LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 ill I I 
 
 000037D3447 
 

 
 ^°^v 
 
 
 
 vV«* 
 
 r * * • o 
 
 
 
 
 
 AT • 
 
 
 
A 
 THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL 
 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Jfttntfi KotiQUt ; 
 
 IN WHICH 
 
 THE PRESENT USAGE IS DISPLAYED, 
 
 AGREEABLY TO THE DECISIONS OF 
 
 THE FRENCH ACADEMY. 
 
 J. . ■ B 
 
 Br M. DE LEVIZAC. 
 
 REVISED AND CORRECTED BY 
 
 MR. STEPHEN PASGLUIER, M.A. 
 
 OF THE UNIVER8ITY OF PARIS, AND TEACHER OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE 
 TO^HE CHARTER-HOUSE SCHOOL. 
 
 SEVENTH AMERIGAN EDITION, 
 
 WITH THE VOLTARIAN ORTHOGRAPHY, ACCORDING TO THE DICTIONARY 
 OF THE FRENCH ACADEMY. 
 
 [Stereotyped by A. Chandler.] 
 
 NEW'-YORK : 
 
 W. E. DEAJT, PRINTER fy PUBLISHER, 32 AJVJV.STREET. 
 
 COLLINS ft HANNAY ; N. ft J. WHITE ; J. B. COLLINS ; 
 * ROE LOCKWOOD ; MON80N BANCROFT, AND 
 CHARLES H. BANCROFT, NEW-ORLEANS. 
 
 1834. 
 
■p 
 
 =>c. 
 
 ^ 
 
 o^ 
 
 \A 
 
 V s * 
 
 Southern District of New-York, ss. 
 
 BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the 27tb day of January, A. D. 1829, in 
 the fifty-third year of the Independence of the United States of America, W- 
 E.Dean, of the said district, hath deposited in this office the title of a book, 
 the right whereof he claims as proprietor, in the words following, to wit: 
 
 • 
 ■ A Theoretical and Practical Grammar of the French Tongue; in which 
 the present usage is displayed, agreeably to the decisions of the French 
 Academy. By M. De L6vizac. Revised and corrected by Mr. Stephen 
 Pttsqmer, M. A. of the University of Paris, and teacher of the French Lan- 
 guage to the Charter-house School. Seventh American Edition, with the 
 Voltarian Orthography, according to the Dictionary of the French Acade- 
 my." 
 
 In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled u An 
 Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts, 
 and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, dining the time 
 therein mentioned j" and also to an act, entitled u An act, supplementary to 
 an act, entitled, an Act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the 
 copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietors of such co- 
 pies during the times therein mentioned, and extending the benefits there- 
 of to the arts of designing, engraving, and etching historical and other prints." 
 
 FRED. J. BETTS, 
 Clerk of the Soutturn District of ;Veu<- Fo; Jr. 
 
 APR 7 1923 
 

 PREFACE. 
 
 The distinguished success that has attended the 
 Grammar of M. de Levizac, which has been adopt- 
 ed by the most celebrated Schools in England, is a 
 sufficient proof that it is one of the most useful that 
 has hitherto appeared : it has, indeed, one advan- 
 tage, that will always secure it a preference above 
 every other : all the principles it contains, as well 
 as the Orthography of Voltaire, are sanctioned by, 
 the authority of the French Academy, and by all 
 the Grammarians of erftinence, who for nearly a 
 century have laboured to ascertain and fix the true 
 rules of the French Language. Another advan- 
 tage, not less valuable, is, that almost all the phrases 
 given as examples or exercises, being drawn from 
 the Dictionary of the Academy, or the most approv- 
 ed French writers, the Student of this Grammar 
 will store his mind with none but pure and correct 
 forms of speech, and will not be liable to contract 
 vicious modes of expression, and imbibe error while 
 aiming at instruction. The proprietors have been 
 particularly careful with respect to the correctness 
 and simplicity of the present Edition, which they 
 have submitted to a strict revision, and which, on 
 a comparison, will be found to surpass preceding 
 Editions, both in the copiousness of its remarks and 
 its general perspicuity. 
 

 EXPLANATION 
 
 "^■^•HR^ajm: 
 
 EVIATIONS USED IN THE EXERCISES 
 
 m. stands for 
 
 masculine. 
 
 L - 
 
 - feminine. 
 
 pi.*- - 
 
 - plural. 
 
 s. orbing. 
 
 - singular. 
 
 h m. 
 
 - h mute. 
 
 h asp. 
 
 - h aspirated. 
 
 pr. - 
 
 - preposition. 
 
 art. - 
 
 - article. 
 
 pr.-art. 
 
 - article contracted. 
 
 pron. 
 
 - pronoun. 
 
 inf-l 
 
 - present of the infinitive. 
 
 inf-2 
 
 - the past. 
 
 inf-3 
 
 - participle present. 
 
 inf-4 
 
 - participle past. 
 
 ind-1 
 
 - present of the indicative. 
 
 ind-2 
 
 - imperfect. . 
 
 ind-3 
 
 - preterit definite. 
 
 ind-4 
 
 - preterit indefinite. 
 
 ind-5 
 
 - preterit anterior. 
 
 ind-6 
 ind-7 
 
 - pluperfect. 
 
 - future absolute. 
 
 ind-8 
 
 - future anterior. 
 
 cond-1 
 
 - present uf the conditional. 
 
 cond-2 
 
 - first conditional past. 
 
 cond-3 
 
 - second conditional past. 
 
 imp. 
 
 - imperative. 
 
 subj-1 
 
 - present of the subjunctive, 
 
 subj-2 
 
 - imperfect. 
 
 subj-3 
 
 - preterit. 
 
 subj-4 
 
 - pluperfect. 
 
 * in the exercises denotes that the word under which it is 
 placed, is not expressed in French. 
 
 — denotes that the English word (see page 74) is spelt alike 
 in French, or at least the part under which this sign is placed. 
 
 =■ denotes that the French word differs from the English only 
 by its termination, as directed page 75. 
 
 Those French words which are followed by the above signs, 
 are to take the form which they point out. 
 
 In the Third part the * is no longer placed under the word, 
 but after it. 
 
 In filling the exercises, the order of the figures placed some- 
 times in the phrases after the French words, is to be observed. 
 
 In the exercises, when several English words are included be- 
 tween a parenthesis, they must be translated by the only worcjs 
 placed under. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Of Consonants 
 
 Of Gender .... 
 
 A V jcabular) , French and English 
 
 GRAMMAR. 
 Introduction .... 
 Apostrophe and Elision 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 2 
 3 
 4 
 
 The French Alphabet . 
 
 General Observations . 
 
 The Vowel? .... 
 
 Accentuation and Punctuation . 
 
 Tatlk I. The seventeen Simple Sounds 
 
 Table II. Coalition of Letters, representing the 17 Simple Sounds 5 
 
 Table III The Diphthongs . . . . . 6&7 
 
 Observations upon the two first Tables 
 
 Of the Y. ... 
 
 Exercises on Monosyllables 
 
 Dissyllables 
 
 Words of three Syllables 
 
 8 
 9 
 10 
 12 
 14 
 17 
 37 
 46 
 
 71 
 
 73* and fol. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND 
 INFLECTIONS. 
 
 Chapter I. 
 Of the Substantive 
 Substantive Common 
 Proper 
 
 Collective 
 
 Of Masculine Gender 
 
 Feminine Gender 
 
 Of Singular Number 
 
 Plural Number 
 
 Of the Formation of the Plural 
 
 General Rule .... 
 
 Chapter II. 
 Of the Article .... 
 
 Elision of the Article . 
 
 Contraction of the Article 
 
 Cases in which contraction does not take place 
 
 General Rules on the Article . 
 
 Of the Article in a partitive sense 
 
 a2 
 
 76 
 77 
 77 
 77 
 77 
 77 
 77 
 78 
 78 
 78 
 
 80 
 80 
 81 
 82 
 83 
 84 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Chapter III. 
 
 PAGH. 
 
 Of the Adjective ...... 85 
 
 Of the Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives . . 86 
 
 Exceptions ....... 88 
 
 Of the Formation of the Plural of Adjectives ... 89 
 
 Degrees of Signification of Adjectives ... 91 
 
 Positive ...... 91 
 
 Comparative of Superiority .... 91 
 
 Inferiority .... 92 
 
 Equality .... 92 
 
 On meillkur, moindre, and PIRE .... 93 
 
 Of the Superlative . . . . . .94 
 
 Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive . • 95 
 
 Nouns and Adjectives of Number . . 97 
 
 Chapter IV. 
 
 Of the Pronoun ...... 100 
 
 1. Of the Personal Pronoun .... 100 
 
 Pronouns of the First Person . . .101 
 
 Second Person . . .101 
 
 Third Person . . .102 
 
 Reflected or Reciprocal Pronouns . . . 105 
 
 Of ex and y. . . . . 106 and 107 
 
 2. Possessive Pronouns . . . . .108 
 
 Of those that always agree with a Noun expressed . 108 
 with Nouns understood . 109 
 
 3. Of Relative Pronouns . . . . .111 
 
 4. Of Pronouns Absolute ..... 112 
 
 5. Of Demonstrative Pronouns . . . .113 
 
 6. Of Indefinite Pronouns . . . . .114 
 
 First Class ...... 114 
 
 Second Class ...... 116 
 
 Third Class . . , . . .117 
 
 Fourth Class . . . . . .118 
 
 Chapter V. 
 
 Of Verbs . . . . . . .118 
 
 Characteristics of Verbs . . . . .118 
 
 The Five Sorts of Verbs . . . . .120 
 
 Ot Conjugations ...... 122 
 
 0? the Auxiliary Verb avoir . . . . .128 
 
 The same Verb with a Negative . . . 130 
 
 interrogatively and affirmatively . . 131 
 
 interrogatively and negatively . . 132 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb etre . . . 134 
 
 1. Conjugation in er ..... 140 
 
 2. ir 149 
 
 3. oir ..... 156 
 
 \ j 4. re . . . .160 
 
 Conjugation of the Pronominal Verbs .... 166 
 Passive Verbs . . . 1 74 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Vll 
 
 Conjugation of the Neuter Verbs 
 
 Of the Impersonal Verbs .... 
 
 Conjugation of the impersonal Verb falloir . 
 
 y avoir . 
 
 Of the Irregular Verbs ..... 
 Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation 
 
 Second Conjugation 
 
 Third Conjugation 
 
 Fourth Conjugation 
 
 Irregular Verbs of the First Branch of the Fourth Conjugation 
 Second Branch 
 
 - Third Branch . 
 
 ■ Fourth Branch . 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 175 
 176 
 177 
 179 
 180 
 180 
 182 
 189 
 194 
 194 
 200 
 201 
 202 
 207 
 
 Observations 
 
 Table of the Primitive Tenses of the Four Regular Conjugations 208 
 
 Irregular and Defective Verbs 208 
 
 Of Prepositions. 
 Of the Adverb . 
 Of Conjunctions 
 Of Interjections 
 
 Chapter VI. 
 Chapter VII. 
 
 Chapter VIII. 
 Chapter IX. 
 
 211 
 218 
 223 
 228 
 
 PART II. 
 
 SYNTAX, 
 
 OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 Chapter I. 
 
 Of the Substantive ...... 229 
 
 Of Compound Nouns ...... 229 
 
 Chapter II. 
 Of the Article ....... 231 
 
 A comparative Table on the Use of the Article . f 232 
 
 Chapter III. 
 Of the Adjective. . . . 
 
 Difference of Construction between the English and French Lan- 
 guages ....... 237 
 
Vlll 
 
 CONTENTS* 
 
 Regimen of the Adjectives 
 Promiscuous Exercises . 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 238 
 239 
 
 Chapter IV. 
 
 Of the Pronouns 
 
 1. Of Personal Pronouns . 
 
 Of the Place of Personal Pronouns 
 Of Personal Pronouns used as Subject 
 Of Personal Pronouns used as Regimen 
 
 2. Of the Relative Pronouns 
 
 3. Of Pronouns Absolute . 
 
 4. Of Demonstrative Pronouns 
 i 5. Of Indefinite Pronouns 
 
 First Class .... 
 
 Second Class .... 
 
 Third Class .... 
 
 Fourth Class .... 
 
 Chapter V. 
 
 A general Exercise on the Pronouns 
 Of the Verb . . . . 
 
 Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 
 Of the Regimen of Verbs 
 
 Nature and Use of Moods and Tenses 
 
 Indicative 
 
 Conditional 
 
 Imperative . . v . 
 
 — - — Subjunctive 
 
 Infinitive 
 
 Participle 
 
 Participle Present 
 
 ■Past 
 
 Agreement of the Participle Past with its Subject 
 ■ with its Regimen 
 
 Of the Adverbs 
 Situation of Adverbs 
 
 Chapter VI. 
 
 Chapter VII. 
 
 Of the Conjunctions 
 
 Conjunction que 
 
 Government of Conjunctions . 
 Conjunctions that are followed by an Infinitive 
 
 . govern the Indicative 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises . 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 IX 
 
 PART III. 
 
 IDIOMS, OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR PARTICULAR 
 
 RULES. 
 
 Chapter I. 
 
 Of the Substantive 
 
 Chapter II. 
 Of the Article . 
 
 Cases in which the Article is to be used 
 not used . 
 
 Chapter III. 
 
 Of the Adjective 
 
 with the Article 
 
 lui, leub, may 
 
 a Noun express- 
 
 320 
 320 
 326 
 
 327 
 330 
 332 
 
 335 
 
 The Place of Adjectives 
 Regimen of Adjectives 
 Adjectives of Number . 
 
 Chapter IV 
 Of Pronouns .... 
 Pronouns Personal . 
 On ihe Pronoun soi 
 Cases in which ihe Pronouns e-lle, elles, eux 
 
 apply to things 
 Difficulty respecting the Pronoun explained 
 Repetition of the Personal Pronouns 
 Relation of the Pronouns of the Third Person to 
 
 ed before 
 Explanation of some Difficulties attendant on the Possessive 
 
 Pronouns . 
 Relative Pronouns — Of qui 
 Of que . 
 
 Of lequel and dont . 
 Of quoi and ou 
 
 Absolute Pronouns. — Of qui, que, and quoi 
 Demonstrative Pronouns 
 Indefinite Pronouns. — Of on 
 Of quinconque and chacun 
 
 Of PERiONNE, L'UN ET l'aUTRE,&NI L'UN Nl l'a 
 Of TOUT 
 
 Of quelqur — que and quel que 
 
 Chapter V. 
 
 Of the Verb. — Agreement of the Verb with its Subject . 360 
 
 Of the Collective Partitive ..... 361 
 
 Plate of the Subject, with regard to the Verb . . 363 
 
 Government ot Verbs . . . • . 367 
 
 On the Use, proj er and accidental, of Moods and Tenses, Indicative 369 
 
 the Conditional ...... 376 
 
 Remark on the Use of the Conditional and Future . . 378 
 
 Use of the Subjunctive ...... 379 
 
 page. 
 300 
 
 203 
 303 
 308 
 
 312 
 312 
 314 
 317 
 318 
 
 337 
 341 
 
 344 
 345 
 346 and 347 
 347 
 349 
 353 
 354 
 
 utre, tout,& rien 356 
 357 
 358 and 359 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative 
 
 Subjunctive and those ol the 
 
 Indicative ...... 
 
 Farther Observations upon the Conditional 3nd Subjunctive 
 Relations between ihe Tenses of the different Moods . 
 
 of the Indicative 
 
 to the Conditional, &c. 
 
 of the Present and Future Absolute, &,c. 
 
 Principal Relations with the Subjunctive 
 Of the Infinitive 
 
 Chapter VI. 
 Of Prepositions 
 
 The Use of the Article with Prepositions 
 Repetition of the Prepositions . 
 Government of Prepositions 
 
 CH4PTER VII. 
 Of the Adverb — Of the Negative ne . 
 Of the Place of the Negatives . 
 Of the Use of pas and point . 
 When may both pas and point be omitted ? 
 When ou^ht both pas and point to be omitted 
 On plus and datantage 
 On si, aussi, tant, and autant 
 
 Chapter VIII. 
 Of Grammatical Construction . 
 Of Inversion .... 
 Of the Ellipsis .... 
 Of the Pleonasm 
 Of the Syllepsis 
 
 Chapter IX. 
 Of Grammatical Discordances, Amphibologies and Gallicisms 
 Of Amphibologies 
 
 Of Gallicisms .... 
 Free Exercises 
 
 Pnrases on some Difficulties of the French Language 
 On the Collective Partitives 
 
 Of some Verbs which cannot be conjugated with avoi 
 On the Personal Pronouns 
 On Words of Quantity 
 On soi, lui, soi-meme, and lui-memb . 
 On the Relative Pronouns 
 On the Demonstrative Pronouns 
 On the Verbs avoir employed impersonally 
 Promiscuous Phrases 
 Phrases in which the Article is used 
 
 omitted 
 
 On the Pronoun i,e 
 
 On the Participle Past . 
 
 On the Principal Relations of Moods and Tenses 
 
 On the Negative ne 
 
 On some Delicacies of the French Language 
 
 pa«r. 
 
 382 
 
FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 Grammar, in general, is the art of speaking and writing correctly. 
 
 To speak — is to convey our thoughts by means of articulated sounds. 
 
 To icrite — is to render ihose thoughts permanently visible by means 
 of certain Signs, or Characters, called Letters, and their number dis- 
 posed in order constitutes what is called the Alphabet. 
 
 FRENCH ALPHABET. 
 
 ROMA?.* LETTERS. ITALIC LETTERS. OLD PRO. XEW PRO. 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 ah 
 
 ah 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 B 
 
 b 
 
 bay* 
 
 be* 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 c 
 
 say 
 
 he 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 D 
 
 d 
 
 day 
 
 de 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 E 
 
 e 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 F 
 
 f 
 
 F 
 
 f 
 
 eff 
 
 fi 
 
 G 
 
 g 
 
 G 
 
 8 
 
 ></t 
 
 ghe 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 ahsh 
 
 he 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 3 
 
 jeej 
 
 H 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 hah 
 
 ke 
 
 L 
 
 1 
 
 L 
 
 I 
 
 ell 
 
 le 
 
 M 
 
 in 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 emm 
 
 me 
 
 N 
 
 n 
 
 N 
 
 n 
 
 enn 
 
 ne 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 V 
 
 pay 
 
 pe 
 
 Q 
 
 q 
 
 Q 
 
 a 
 
 kii^ 
 
 ke 
 
 R 
 
 r 
 
 R 
 
 r 
 
 heir 
 
 re 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 ess 
 
 se 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 lay 
 
 te 
 
 U 
 
 u 
 
 V 
 
 u 
 
 u% 
 
 u% 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 vay 
 
 ve 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 eeks 
 
 kse 
 
 Y 
 
 y 
 
 Y 
 
 y 
 
 e grec 
 
 e grec 
 
 Z 
 
 z 
 
 Z 
 
 z 
 
 zed 
 
 ze 
 
 * Here both Ibe old pronunciation and the new are expressed by English 
 sounds, and in the new the letter e after each consonant is sounded as in the 
 English word battery. 
 
 f The two consonant* g and j are sounded in the Alphabet like * in plcarurt, 
 •r z in azure. 
 
 % See the second note, page 4. 
 
2 THE SOUNDS 
 
 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 The French Alphabet contains, as we see, twenty- 
 jive letters, which are divided into Vowels and Conso* 
 nants. 
 
 A vowel is the simple emission of the voice forming 
 an articulate sound by itself. 
 
 A consonant, on the contrary, cannot be articulated 
 without the assistance of a vowel. 
 
 The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, and y, which sometimes 
 has the sound of one i, and sometimes of two. 
 
 The nineteen remaining letters, b, c, d,f,g, h,j, k, 
 I, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, x, z, are consonants. 
 
 THE VOWELS. 
 
 The French language com- 
 prehends more distinct simple 
 sounds than are here represent- 
 ed by the above five vowels ; 
 for, according as these are pro- 
 nounced close or broad, short 
 or long, with the appropriate 
 accentuation, they furnish — ten seventeen sim* 
 simple sounds. pie sounds. — 
 
 N.B. <! Add to these — three other i See Table L 
 simple sounds, each represent- p. 4. 
 ed by the combination of two 
 vowels, and 
 
 Lastly — four nasal simple 
 sounds, which again, for want of 
 more appropriate signs, are re- 
 presented by the coalition of n 
 or m with the above vowels, and 
 ^they complete the number of v 
 
 The vowels are either long or short ; 
 The long vowels require more, the sort vowels less 
 time in pronouncing, thus : 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. * 
 
 a b long in pate dough and short in patte paw 
 
 e tempete storm trompelle trumpet 
 
 i gite abode — petite little 
 
 o note host hotte wicker basket 
 
 u flute flute hutle hut 
 
 Besides the simple there are also the compound 
 sounds, in which two vowels are distinctly heard by a 
 single emission of the voice ; these are the diphthongs. 
 See Table III. p. 6 and 7. 
 
 The sound of one or more letters, pronounced with 
 a single emission of the voice, is called a syllable ; one 
 or more syllables make a word. 
 
 ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION. 
 
 In reading, due attention should be paid to the accents 
 and cedilla, to the apostrophe, diceresis, hyphen, &c. the two 
 former of which are peculiar to the French language. 
 
 (acute (') never placed but on e, as 
 
 I in bonte. 
 
 grave C) placed over a, e, u, as in 
 
 ., <{ violu, proces, ou. 
 
 accents, the • • n /a X if i 
 
 1 circumflex ( ) employed over any long 
 
 vowel, as pldire, reve* 
 
 epUre, apotre, btiche, 
 
 The cedilla is a kind of comma placed under c, giving 
 it the sound of s before a, o, u, as in fa gade, facon, re$u. 
 
 The apostrophe (') marks the suppression of a vowel 
 before another vowel, or h mute, as in Veglise, Voiseau, 
 Vhomme, sHl vient, for la eglise, le oiscau, le hornme, si il 
 vient. 
 
 The diceresis (") is placed over the vo\vel3 e, i, u, to in- 
 timate that they are to be pronounced distinctly from the 
 vowels by which they are accompanied. 
 
 The hyphen (•) is particularly used in connecting com- 
 pound words, as in Belles-lettres, tout-puissant, theft- 
 d 9 ceuvres, arc-en-ciel, &c. 
 
 All the other distinctive marks, as the comma, semi- 
 colon, colon, period, interrogation, note of admiration 
 and exclamation, parenthesis, &c. &c. are the same IB 
 the French as in the English language. 
 
 ? 
 
or 2 
 
 7 
 1 
 
 7 
 4 
 
 7 
 5 
 
 8 or 9 o 
 
 7 i 
 
 10 u 
 7 i 
 
 11 or 12 cu 
 7 i 
 
 13 ou 
 7 t 
 
 14 cm 
 7 * 
 
 1 5 ?'n 
 
 7 t 
 
 16 on 
 
 8 o 
 2 a 
 
 8 
 6 
 
 8 
 15 
 10 
 
 1 
 
 10 
 4 
 
 leu 
 
 len 
 
 ion 
 
 oj n 
 
 ua 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 
 TABLE III. 
 
 
 Diphthongs, 
 ids represented by 
 fmcre 
 galimatias 
 
 examples. 
 
 hackney-coach 
 nonsense 
 
 je deftai 
 amiti'e 
 
 J challenged 
 friendship 
 
 vous riez 
 biais 
 
 yon laugh 
 bias 
 
 biere 
 
 beer 
 
 del 
 
 heaven 
 
 je puriftais 
 vwlon 
 
 I purified 
 violin 
 
 miaulev 
 
 to mew 
 
 reltwre 
 
 binding 
 
 reb'ewr 
 
 bookbinder 
 
 mienx 
 
 better 
 
 chzowrme 
 viande 
 
 i crew of a 
 } galley 
 meat 
 
 audience 
 
 audience 
 
 chreU'en 
 
 christian 
 
 passion 
 
 passion 
 
 hois 
 
 wood 
 
 boite 
 
 box 
 
 foie 
 
 liver 
 
 moelle 
 
 marrow 
 
 voz'sin 
 
 'neighbour 
 
 nag cone 
 
 fn 
 
 bescmi 
 
 want 
 
 nu ?ge 
 
 cloud 
 
 je remum 
 
 I moved 
 
 eternwcr 
 
 to sneeze 
 
 d6nue 
 nuee 
 
 stript 
 cloud 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 10 
 5 
 
 10 
 7 
 10 
 8 
 10 
 11 
 10 
 12 
 10 
 14 
 10 
 15 
 10 
 16 
 13 
 1 
 
 13 
 4 
 
 13 
 5 
 13 
 7 
 13 
 11 
 31 
 12 
 13 
 14 
 13 
 15 
 13 
 16 
 
 TABLE III. 
 
 Diphthongs Continued. 
 Compound Sounds represented by 
 u } ue menuet 
 
 d $ uai il auait 
 
 i bui'sson 
 
 io parapluze 
 
 uo 
 
 ueu 
 
 ueu 
 
 um 
 
 uon 
 
 oua 
 
 oweu 
 
 oueu 
 
 on 
 
 imp£t«osit£ 
 lwewr 
 
 majestwewx 
 
 nwemee 
 influence 
 
 tuons 
 
 rowffge 
 
 d£nouev 
 dejoue 
 fllle enjowee 
 je ]ouai 
 fowctter 
 je d£nouais 
 combo wis 
 Vou'ie 
 
 boueuv 
 
 noucux 
 
 huangoi 
 Rouen 
 
 babowm 
 
 jowons 
 2* 
 
 examples. 
 minuet 
 he perspired 
 bush 
 umbrella 
 
 impetuosity 
 glimmering 
 
 majestic 
 
 shade 
 influence 
 
 June 
 
 let us kill 
 
 wheel-work 
 
 to untie 
 frustrated 
 cheerful girl 
 I played 
 to whip 
 I untied 
 cart grease . 
 hearing 
 
 scavenger 
 
 knotty 
 
 praise 
 Rouen, a city 
 
 baboon 
 let vi play 
 
O THE SOUNDS 
 
 OBSERVATIONS 
 
 Upon the two first Tables. 
 
 Am, an, do not take the nasal sound when morn are 
 doubled, as in const amment, annee. Am is not nasal 
 at the end of some foreign names, as Abram, Roboam, 
 &C. ; except Adam, which has the nasal sound. 
 
 Em and en are articulated as in the English words 
 hem and men : 
 
 1. In words taken from foreign languages ; as Je- 
 rusalem, item, hymen, pollen, solen, amen, &c. and also 
 in lemme, gemme, decemvirat, decemvirs > etrenner, enne- 
 mi, moyennant, penne, pennage, and in the second sylla- 
 ble of the compound word empenne. 
 
 2. In some persons and tenses of the verbs, tenir, 
 venir, prendre, and their compounds, as que je rienne, 
 que tu soutiennes, qu y il comprenne, &c. in the pronouns 
 feminine, la mienne, la tienne, les siennes, in many other 
 words, as antienne, magicienne, Vienne, en Autriche, &c. 
 
 3. In many nouns and persons of verbs ending in trie, 
 erne, as in ar&ne, ebene, je me promene, il egrlne, il seme, 
 where however the e is somewhat more open. 
 
 But em in femme, and en in enorgueillir, cnnoblir, iind 
 ennui, must be pronounced as if spelt with a,f«mme, 
 anorgueillir, annoblir, &c. and len in the second syllable 
 of so-Zcn-nel and derivatives has only the sound of la. 
 
 Aen has the sound of the French nasal an in Caen, a 
 town in Normandy. 
 
 And aon has the same sound in Laon, another town 
 in France, in faon a fawn, and in paon a peacock ; but 
 these letters have the sound of on in taon an oxfly. 
 
 N in the monosyllable en, both when a preposition 
 and when a pronoun, in on, mon, ton, son, pronouns, and 
 in bon, bien, and rien ceases to be nasal when these 
 words are immediately followed by a vowel or an h mute, 
 as en Italie, on en aura, mon ami, c^eti un bon homme, 
 on a bien essay e, je suis bien-aise qu'il n' f ait rien oublie. 
 But en and on remain nasal, when placed after the verbs 
 to which they belong ; as donrrcz-en a votre sozur. A-t-or\ 
 essayf ? va-V-cn au logis. 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUR. 9 
 
 Im and in are not nasal, 
 
 1. In the word interim, and in proper names taken 
 from foreign languages, as Selim, Ephrdim, Ibrahim, 
 However the nasal sound is preserved in Benjamin] Joa- 
 chim, seraphin, chtrubin. 
 
 2. In the beginning and middle of words, when ?n or 
 n is followed by a vowel or an h mute, as inanime, ini- 
 maginable, unanimiti, &c. 
 
 3. Whenever m or n is doubled, as immoler, immer- 
 sion, innover, inne, innocent, though in this latter word 
 only one n is sounded. 
 
 Un has the sound of u close in une, unieme, unanime, 
 and of tun mjeune homme, when followed by a word be- 
 ginning with a vowel or an h mute, as un homme, un es- 
 prit, aucun\imi, commun accord. 
 
 Um is pronounced omm in some words adopted from 
 the Latin, as ceniumvirs, album, quinquennium, ladanum, 
 laudanum, geranium. 
 
 U after the consonants q and g is generally silent, as 
 in quatre, guerre, &e. See those letters, p. 21 and 27. 
 
 OF THE Y. 
 
 This letter when alone, or when preceded, or fol- 
 lowed by a consonant, is pronounced as simple i, ex- 
 cept in pays, paysan, paysage, and even abbaye, which 
 are pronounced pe-is, pe-isan, pe-isuge, abe-ie. Y be- 
 tween two vowels is pronounced ii, and when preceded 
 by a, it gives to this letter the sound of at, and when by 
 u or u, it gives to them the sound of the diphthongs oi 
 or ui. The vowel which follows the y is pronounced 
 like one of the diphthongs ia, ie, &c. for which reason 
 we have deferred speaking of the y till after the diph- 
 thongs. 
 
 Ab-ba-ye 
 
 abbey 
 
 nous e-ga-yons 
 
 we enliven 
 
 a-bo-yer 
 
 to bark 
 
 essu-yer 
 
 to tcipe 
 
 up-pu-yer 
 
 to support 
 
 mo-yen 
 
 means 
 
 ba-la-yer 
 
 to sweep 
 
 net-to-yer 
 
 to clean 
 
 be-ga-yer 
 
 to stammer 
 
 je pa-yais 
 
 I was paying 
 
 cra-yon 
 
 pencil 
 
 je ra-ye-rais 
 
 I would erase 
 
 cro-ya-ble 
 
 credible 
 
 ro-yau-me 
 
 kingdom 
 
 i-cu-yer 
 it cf-tra-ya 
 
 esquire 
 
 vo-ya-ge 
 
 voyage 
 
 ht frightened 
 
 vo-ya-ge ur 
 
 traveller 
 
1U ! 
 
 THE 
 
 SOUNDS 
 
 
 EXERCISES— On Monosyllables, or words 
 
 of one syllable. 
 
 Gras 
 
 fat 
 
 il rend 
 
 he returns 
 
 ma 
 
 my 
 
 il sent 
 
 he smells, fogls 
 
 ta 
 
 thy 
 
 je vends 
 
 I sell 
 
 sa 
 
 his, her, its 
 
 je 
 
 I 
 
 la 
 
 the, her, it 
 
 me 
 
 me 
 
 las 
 
 tired 
 
 n<§ 
 
 not 
 
 pas 
 
 step 
 
 te 
 
 thee 
 
 un plat 
 
 a dish 
 
 ce 
 
 this, thai 
 
 bac 
 
 ferry-boat 
 
 se 
 
 himself, &e. 
 
 sac 
 
 sack, bag 
 
 le 
 
 the, him, it 
 
 arc 
 
 arch, bow 
 
 de 
 
 of 
 
 pare 
 
 park 
 
 U 
 
 breadth (of cloth) 
 
 bal 
 
 ball 
 
 ne\ 
 
 born 
 
 cap 
 
 cape 
 
 mais 
 
 but 
 
 car 
 
 for 
 
 mes 
 
 my, pi. 
 
 par 
 
 by y through 
 
 tes 
 
 thy, pi. 
 
 part 
 
 share 
 
 ses 
 
 his, her t its, pi. 
 
 art 
 
 art 
 
 les 
 
 the, them 
 
 char 
 
 chariot 
 
 pre 
 
 meadow 
 
 dard 
 
 dart 
 
 pres 
 
 near 
 
 lard 
 
 bacon 
 
 pret 
 
 ready 
 
 tard 
 
 late 
 
 ver 
 
 worm 
 
 quand 
 
 when 
 
 vers 
 
 toward, or versa 
 
 rang 
 
 rank 
 
 vert 
 
 green 
 
 blanc 
 
 while 
 
 it perd 
 
 he loses 
 
 sans 
 
 without 
 
 il sert 
 
 he serves 
 
 dans 
 
 in 
 
 cerf 
 
 stag 
 
 gland 
 
 acorn 
 
 serf 
 
 bondman 
 
 pan 
 
 skirt of a coat 
 
 peur 
 
 Jear 
 
 cran 
 
 notch 
 
 il meurt 
 
 he dies 
 
 plant 
 
 plantation 
 
 pleurs 
 
 tears 
 
 plan 
 
 plan 
 
 leur 
 
 their 
 
 flanc 
 
 flank 
 
 sel 
 
 salt 
 
 grand 
 
 great 
 
 tel 
 
 such 
 
 en 
 
 in 
 
 quel 
 
 which 
 
 il fend 
 
 he splits 
 
 sec 
 
 dry 
 
 gens 
 
 people 
 
 bee 
 
 beak 
 
 lent * 
 
 slow 
 
 chef 
 
 chief 
 
 main 
 
 hand 
 
 bref 
 
 short 
 
 il ment 
 
 he lies 
 
 neuf 
 
 new, or nine 
 
 il pend 
 
 he hangs 
 
 Est 
 
 East 
 
 il prend 
 
 he takes 
 
 vingt 
 
 twenty 
 
 ceint 
 
 girl 
 
 crin 
 
 horse-haw 
 
 cinq 
 
 five 
 
 Jin 
 
 flax 
 
 sain 
 
 wholesome 
 
 brin 
 
 sprig 
 
 sein 
 
 bosom 
 
 pain 
 
 bread 
 
 saint 
 
 holy 
 
 pin 
 
 pine 
 
 Being 
 
 signature 
 
 vin 
 
 wine 
 
©» THE FRENCH TONGCE 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 fit 
 
 front 
 
 fiU 
 
 son 
 
 rond 
 
 frit 
 
 fried 
 
 blond 
 
 lis 
 
 lily 
 
 pont 
 
 pris 
 
 taken 
 
 long 
 
 prix 
 
 price 
 
 fond 
 
 ris 
 
 laugh 
 
 ils font 
 
 riz 
 
 rice 
 
 jonc 
 
 ni 
 
 neither, nor 
 
 non 
 
 nid 
 
 nest 
 
 gond 
 
 si 
 
 if 
 
 iiom 
 
 ilfit 
 
 he did 
 
 plomb 
 
 mis 
 
 put 
 
 nu 
 
 plis 
 
 folds 
 
 du 
 
 ll 
 
 thread 
 
 il dut 
 
 vil 
 
 vile 
 
 bru 
 
 vif 
 
 lively 
 
 brut 
 
 sot 
 
 fool 
 
 il but 
 
 tot 
 
 soon 
 
 cru 
 
 clos 
 
 shut up 
 
 il cru I 
 
 DOS 
 
 our 
 
 je fus 
 
 vos 
 
 your 
 
 jus 
 
 gros 
 
 big 
 
 lu 
 
 trop 
 
 too much 
 
 D lut 
 
 trot 
 
 trot 
 
 plus 
 
 croc 
 
 hook 
 
 tu 
 
 or 
 
 gold 
 
 vu 
 
 bord 
 
 edge 
 
 flux 
 
 fort 
 
 strong 
 
 elu 
 due 
 
 tort 
 
 wrong 
 
 je sors 
 
 I go out 
 
 sue 
 
 sort 
 
 fate 
 
 sur 
 
 port 
 
 port 
 
 raur 
 
 H mord 
 
 he bites 
 
 nul 
 
 vol 
 
 theft 
 
 bout 
 
 choc 
 
 shock 
 
 joug 
 
 roc 
 
 rock 
 
 nous 
 
 bloc 
 
 block 
 
 vous 
 
 troc 
 
 exchange 
 
 clou 
 
 dot 
 
 dowry 
 
 cou 
 
 on 
 
 one, people, they coup 
 
 bon 
 
 good 
 
 trou 
 
 bond 
 
 bound 
 
 mou 
 
 ton 
 
 thy 
 
 tout 
 
 son 
 
 his, her, ils 
 
 toux 
 
 ils sont 
 
 they are 
 
 pou 
 
 mon 
 
 my 
 
 cour 
 
 don 
 
 gift 
 
 il pleut 
 
 dont 
 
 of which, &lc. 
 
 peu 
 
 done 
 
 therefore 
 
 il veut 
 
 m. 
 
 forehead 
 
 round 
 
 light (hair) 
 
 bridge 
 
 long 
 
 bottom 
 
 they do 
 
 rush 
 
 no 
 
 hinge 
 
 name 
 
 lead 
 
 naked 
 
 of the, sing. 
 
 he owed 
 
 daughter-in-law 
 
 10 ugh 
 
 he drank 
 
 raw 
 
 he believed 
 
 I was 
 juice 
 
 read- 
 he read 
 
 more 
 
 thou 
 
 seen 
 
 fiux 
 
 bird lime 
 
 duke 
 
 juice 
 
 upon 
 
 waU 
 
 no, none 
 
 end 
 
 yoke 
 
 we, us 
 
 you 
 
 nail 
 
 neck 
 
 blow, stroke 
 
 hole 
 
 soft 
 
 all 
 
 cough 
 
 louse 
 
 yard 
 
 it rains 
 
 little, few 
 
 he is willing 
 
If 
 
 A-bii3 
 
 a-chat 
 
 ac-teur 
 
 a-ge 
 
 a-me 
 
 an-neau 
 
 ar-deur 
 
 ar-gent 
 
 as-tre 
 
 ati-cun 
 
 a-veu 
 
 a-vis 
 
 au-trc 
 
 bal-con 
 
 ban-que 
 
 bar-que 
 
 ba-teau 
 
 ba-ton 
 
 beau-te 
 
 be-gue 
 
 bMe 
 
 beur-re 
 
 bi-ble 
 
 bla-me 
 
 bon-heur 
 
 bon-te" 
 
 bos-quet 
 
 bou-quet 
 
 bour-geon 
 
 "bour-ru 
 
 bras-seur 
 
 bri-gand 
 
 brus-que 
 
 bru-te 
 
 buf-fet 
 
 bu-reau 
 
 bus-te 
 
 ca-deau 
 
 ca-fe 
 
 ca-hot 
 
 ca-non 
 
 ca-ve 
 
 cau-se 
 
 cer-cle 
 
 oi-seau 
 
 £i-seaux 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 
 ON DISSYLLABLES, 
 
 
 Or Words 
 
 of Two Syllables 
 
 
 abuse 
 
 cle-ment 
 
 clement 
 
 purchase 
 
 cli-mat 
 
 climate 
 
 actor 
 
 cloi-son 
 
 partition 
 
 age 
 
 co-hue 
 
 throng 
 
 soul 
 
 cora-muQ 
 
 common 
 
 ring 
 
 cora-pas 
 
 comp asses 
 
 ardour 
 
 com-te 
 
 earl 
 
 money 
 
 con-ge* 
 
 holiday 
 
 star 
 
 con-te 
 
 tale 
 
 none 
 
 co-quin 
 
 rogue 
 
 confession 
 
 cor-deau 
 
 line 
 
 advice 
 
 co-t^ 
 
 side 
 
 other 
 
 cou-ple 
 
 couple 
 
 balcony 
 
 cou-reur 
 
 runner 
 
 bank 
 
 cous-sin 
 
 cushion 
 
 a bark 
 
 cou-vent 
 
 convent 
 
 boat 
 
 cr£-me 
 
 cream 
 
 stick 
 
 cri-me 
 
 crime 
 
 beauty 
 
 crot-te 
 
 dirt 
 
 stammerer 
 
 crou-te 
 
 crust 
 
 beast 
 
 da-me 
 
 lady 
 
 butler 
 
 dan-seur 
 
 dancer 
 
 bible 
 
 d£-bit 
 
 sale 
 
 blame 
 
 de-bout 
 
 erect 
 
 happiness 
 
 de-mi 
 
 half 
 
 goodness 
 
 de-pot 
 
 deposit 
 
 grove 
 
 de-sert 
 
 wilderness 
 
 nosegay 
 
 des-sert 
 
 dessert 
 
 bud 
 
 dis-cours 
 
 speech 
 
 surly 
 
 dou-leur 
 
 pain 
 
 brewer 
 
 e-cu 
 
 crown 
 
 robber 
 
 en-clin 
 
 inclined 
 
 abrupt 
 
 en-fant 
 
 child 
 
 brute 
 
 «-poux 
 
 spouse 
 
 cupboard 
 
 es-poir 
 
 hope 
 
 office 
 
 £-tain 
 
 pewter 
 
 bust 
 
 4 £tre 
 
 being 
 
 present 
 
 ex-ces 
 
 excess 
 
 coffee 
 
 festin 
 
 feast 
 
 jolt 
 
 fe-to 
 
 festival 
 
 cannon 
 
 fi-lou 
 
 pickpocket 
 
 cellar 
 
 fla-con 
 
 decanter 
 
 cause 
 
 flam-beau 
 
 flambeau 
 
 circle 
 
 flu-te 
 
 flute 
 
 chisel 
 
 fo-ret 
 
 forest 
 
 scissors 
 
 fou-dre 
 
 ihundtrboU 
 
OF TH« FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 IS 
 
 fri-pon 
 fu-reur 
 gaie-te 
 gar-^on 
 ga-teau 
 ga-zon 
 gen-dre 
 gen-re 
 gi-got 
 gla-£on 
 gou-te 
 gout-te 
 gra-ce 
 gron-deur 
 gru-au 
 gue-re 
 guer-re 
 gueu-le 
 gui-de 
 ■ hai-ne 
 4 hale 
 • ■ hal-le 
 1 har-pe 
 * ha-te 
 ' hau-teur 
 1 ha-sard 
 1 he-tre 
 hom-me 
 hon-neur 
 1 hon-te 
 hor-reur 
 ho-te 
 hu-main 
 im-pie 
 ju-ge 
 jour-n^e 
 lai-teux 
 la-qnais 
 lar-cin 
 lar-geur 
 li-queur 
 lo-gis 
 lon-gueur 
 mar-bre 
 mar-chand 
 ma-ri 
 mdnre 
 
 ant 
 
 knave 
 
 fury . 
 
 cheerfulness 
 
 boy 
 
 cake 
 
 turf 
 
 son-in-law 
 
 gender 
 
 leg of mutton 
 
 piece of ice • 
 
 luncheon 
 
 drop 
 
 favour 
 
 grumbler 
 
 oatmeal 
 
 little 
 
 war 
 
 mouth of a beast 
 
 guide 
 
 hatred 
 
 sunburning 
 
 market-hall 
 
 harp 
 
 haste 
 
 height 
 
 chance 
 
 beech 
 
 man 
 
 honour 
 
 shame 
 
 horror 
 
 landlord 
 
 human 
 
 impious 
 
 judge 
 
 day 
 
 milky 
 
 footman 
 
 theft 
 
 breadth 
 
 liquor 
 
 dwelling 
 
 length 
 
 marble 
 
 tradesman 
 
 husband 
 
 mother 
 
 meu-ble 
 
 mon-de 
 
 mons-tre 
 
 mou-le 
 
 mou-lin 
 
 ni-gaud 
 
 nou-veau 
 
 ceu-vre 
 
 on-guent 
 
 or-dre 
 
 ou-bli 
 
 pa-rent 
 
 par- rain 
 
 pa-te 
 
 pa-te 
 
 pat-te 
 
 pe-che 
 
 p£-che 
 
 pe-cheur 
 
 pe-cheur 
 
 pei-ne 
 
 pein-tre 
 
 pe-re 
 
 peu-ple 
 
 peu-reux 
 
 pin-te 
 
 plu-me 
 
 por-lrait 
 
 pour-pre 
 
 prin-ce 
 
 pru-neau 
 
 ra-gout 
 
 re-gle 
 
 re-gne 
 
 rei-ne 
 
 ren-te 
 
 re-ve 
 
 ri-re 
 
 rou-te 
 
 ru-se 
 
 sa-bre 
 
 sa-lut 
 
 6a-tin 
 
 sauce 
 
 sau-teur 
 
 se-jour 
 
 si-gnal 
 
 si-gne 
 
 furniture 
 world 
 monster 
 mould 
 mill 
 
 silly fellow 
 new 
 work 
 ointment 
 order 
 oblivion 
 relation 
 godfatlter 
 dough 
 pie 
 paw 
 
 fishing, peach 
 sin 
 
 fisherman 
 sinner 
 trouble 
 painter 
 father 
 people 
 fearful 
 pint 
 feather 
 picture 
 purple 
 prince 
 prune 
 ragout 
 rule 
 reign 
 queen 
 annuity 
 dream 
 laughing 
 road 
 trick 
 sabre 
 salute 
 satin 
 sauce 
 tumbler 
 residence 
 tignal 
 sign 
 
14 
 
 som-bre 
 
 sou-hait 
 
 sou-pe 
 
 sou-ris 
 
 su-cre 
 
 sus-pect 
 
 ta-che 
 
 ta-che 
 
 lam-bour 
 
 tom-beau 
 
 THS SOUNDS 
 
 dark 
 
 to-me 
 
 wish 
 
 tou-pie 
 
 soup 
 
 tour-near 
 
 smile 
 
 trai-neau 
 
 sugar 
 
 tro-ne 
 
 suspicious 
 
 trou-peau 
 
 spot 
 
 veu-ve 
 
 task 
 
 vi-gne 
 
 drum 
 
 ze-le 
 
 grave 
 
 ze-le 
 
 volume 
 
 top 
 
 turner 
 
 sledge 
 
 throne 
 
 flock 
 
 loidow 
 
 vine 
 
 zeal 
 
 zealous 
 
 WORDS OF THREE SYLLABLES. 
 
 A-bi-me 
 
 a-bre-ge" 
 
 a-bri-cot 
 
 ab-so-lu 
 
 ab-sur-de 
 
 ac-tri-ce 
 
 af-fai-re 
 
 am-pou-le 
 
 ap-pe-tit 
 
 a-pre-te 
 
 a-rai-gnee 
 
 ar-raoi-re 
 
 ar-tis-te 
 
 as-si-du 
 
 a-tro-ce 
 
 au-ber-ge 
 
 a-voi-ne 
 
 aus-te-re 
 
 ba-bio-Ie 
 
 bas-ses-se 
 
 ba-ti-ment 
 
 beMe-ment 
 
 ber-ge-re 
 
 be-ti-se 
 
 bien-fai-sant 
 
 bien-se-ant 
 
 bien-ve-nu 
 
 blan-cha-tre 
 
 bles-su-re 
 
 boi-se-rie 
 
 bor-du-re 
 
 bou-lan-ger 
 
 bou-ta-de 
 
 bon-ti-que 
 
 bras-ae-rie 
 
 abyss 
 
 bra-vou-re 
 
 abridgment 
 
 breu-va-ge 
 
 apricot 
 
 bro-de-rie 
 
 absolute 
 
 brou-et-te 
 
 absurd 
 
 brfi-lu-re 
 
 actress 
 
 brus-que-ment 
 
 business 
 
 ca-de>-nas 
 
 blister 
 
 cam-pa-gne 
 
 appetite 
 
 ca-rt-me 
 
 asperity 
 
 car-ros-se 
 
 spider 
 
 cein-tu-re 
 
 cabinet 
 
 ce-pen-dant 
 
 artist 
 
 cham-pi-gnon 
 
 assiduous 
 
 cha-pe-lier 
 
 atrocious 
 
 cha-pel-le 
 
 inn 
 
 cha-pi-tre 
 
 oats 
 
 char-la-tan 
 
 austere 
 
 char-ret-te 
 
 bawble 
 
 cha-ti-ment 
 
 baseness 
 
 chau-de-ment 
 
 building 
 
 chau-die-re 
 
 bleating 
 
 chauf-fa-ge 
 
 shepherdess 
 
 chaus-su-re 
 
 stupidity 
 
 ci-vie-re 
 
 benevolent 
 
 cla-ve-cin 
 
 becoming 
 
 clo-a-que 
 
 welcome 
 
 co-li-que 
 
 whitish 
 
 col-le-ge 
 
 wound 
 
 col -li-ne 
 
 wainscot 
 
 co-lon-ne 
 
 edging 
 
 co-lo-ris 
 
 baker 
 
 co-m^-die 
 
 whim 
 
 co-me-dien 
 
 shop 
 
 com-mer-cant 
 
 bretchouse 
 
 com-pa-gnie 
 
 valour 
 drink 
 
 embroidery 
 wheelbarrow 
 burning 
 bluntly 
 padlock 
 country 
 tent 
 coach 
 girdle 
 however 
 mushroom 
 hatter 
 chapel 
 chapter 
 quack 
 cart 
 
 chastisement 
 warmly 
 copper 
 fuel 
 
 shoes, stockings 
 hand-barrow 
 harpsichord 
 sewer 
 colic 
 college 
 hill 
 column 
 colouring 
 comedy 
 comedian 
 merchant 
 company 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 15 
 
 com-pa-gnon 
 
 eon-<3ui-te 
 
 con-que-rant 
 
 con-que-te 
 
 cons-tam-ment 
 
 con-ti-gu 
 
 cor-don-nier 
 
 co-ri-a-ce 
 
 cor-ni-chon 
 
 cou-chet-te 
 
 cou-ron-ne 
 
 cou-te-las 
 
 cou-te-lier 
 
 cou-tu-re 
 
 cra-moi-si 
 
 cr£-du-le 
 
 cri-ti-que 
 
 cru-au-t£ 
 
 cui-si-ne 
 
 cul-bu-te 
 
 cu-re-dent 
 
 de-com-bres 
 
 de-gou-tant 
 
 de-jeu-ner 
 
 de-meu-re 
 
 des-hon-neur 
 
 des-po-te 
 
 dis-ci-ple 
 
 dis-gra-ce 
 
 dro-guis-te 
 
 droi-ta-re 
 
 6-cha-faud 
 
 £-cbel-le 
 
 e-chc-veau 
 
 e-cu-me 
 
 em-pereur 
 
 em-pla-tre 
 
 em-plet-te 
 
 en-clu-me 
 
 en-ga-geant 
 
 en-ne-mi 
 
 en-sei-gne 
 
 e-pa-gneul 
 
 £-pi-ce 
 
 £-pi-cier 
 
 6-pou-se 
 
 e»-ca-lier 
 
 companion 
 
 es-pe-ce 
 
 kind 
 
 behaviour 
 
 es-quis-se 
 
 sketch 
 
 conqueror 
 
 es-tra-gon 
 
 stragon 
 
 conquest 
 
 e-tei-gnoir 
 
 extinguisher 
 
 constantly 
 
 e-tour-di 
 
 thoughtless 
 
 contiguous 
 
 e-ve-che 
 
 bishoprick 
 
 shoemaker 
 
 e-veil-i£ 
 
 awake 
 
 tough 
 
 ex-ces-sif 
 
 immoderate 
 
 girkin 
 
 ex-em-ple 
 
 example 
 
 couch 
 
 fa-bu-leux 
 
 fabulous 
 
 crown 
 
 fa-§a-de 
 
 front 
 
 hanger 
 
 fa-'ien-ce 
 
 delft-warn 
 
 cutler 
 
 fa-ri-neux 
 
 mealy 
 
 seam 
 
 fa-rou-che 
 
 fierce 
 
 crimson 
 
 fi-las-se 
 
 flax 
 
 credulous 
 
 fleu-ris-te 
 
 florist 
 
 critic 
 
 fai-bles-se 
 
 weakness 
 
 cruelty 
 
 fo-la-tre 
 
 playful 
 
 kitchen 
 
 fou-droy-ant 
 
 thundering 
 
 tumble 
 
 four-bis-seur 
 
 sword-cutler 
 
 tooth-pick 
 
 four-ru-re 
 
 fur 
 
 rubbish 
 
 fram-boi-se 
 
 raspberry 
 
 disgusting 
 
 fri-su-re 
 
 curling 
 
 breakfast 
 
 frois-su-re 
 
 bruising 
 
 abode 
 
 gi-ro-fle 
 
 cloves 
 
 dishonour 
 
 go-be-let 
 
 tumbler, goblet 
 
 despot 
 
 gou-lu-ment 
 
 greedily 
 
 pupil 
 
 gue-ri-son 
 
 cure 
 
 disgrace 
 
 gui-mau-ve 
 
 marsh-mallow 
 
 druggist 
 
 ha-lei-ne 
 
 breath 
 
 uprightness 
 
 ' har-di-ment 
 
 boldly 
 
 scaffold 
 
 c ha-ri-cot 
 
 French bean 
 
 ladder 
 
 hor-lo-ge 
 
 clock 
 
 skein 
 
 hor-ri-ble 
 
 horrid 
 
 froth 
 
 ho-tes-se 
 
 landlady 
 
 emperor 
 
 i-gno-rant 
 
 ignorant 
 
 plaster 
 
 im-men-se 
 
 immense 
 
 purchase 
 
 ira-pu-ni 
 
 unpunished 
 
 anvil 
 
 in-cen-die 
 
 conflagration 
 
 tngaging 
 
 in-con-nu 
 
 unknown 
 
 enemy 
 
 in-ge-nu 
 
 ingenuous 
 
 sign 
 
 in-hu-main 
 
 inhuman 
 
 spaniel 
 
 in-sec-te 
 
 insect 
 
 spice 
 
 ins-truc-tif 
 
 instrudtve 
 
 grocer 
 
 i-voi-re 
 
 ivory 
 
 wife 
 
 i-vro-gne 
 
 drunkard 
 
 stair-cast 
 
 ja-quet-te 
 
 jacket 
 
 space 
 
 jour-na-Her 
 3 
 
 journeyman 
 
16 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 
 fei4ie 4 -re 
 
 milk-woman 
 
 puis-san-ce 
 
 power 
 
 lan-gou-reux 
 
 languishing 
 
 que-rel-le 
 
 quarrel 
 
 len-til-le 
 
 lentil 
 
 ra-pie-re 
 
 rapier 
 
 li-ma-5011 
 
 snail 
 
 ra-tie-re 
 
 rat-trap 
 
 ma-ga-sin 
 
 warehouse 
 
 r^-col-te 
 
 crop 
 
 mal-a-droit 
 
 awkicard 
 
 reiser- ve 
 
 reserved 
 
 ma-nceu-vre 
 
 manoeuvre 
 
 res-sour-ce 
 
 resource 
 
 mar-mi-ton 
 
 scullion 
 
 re-trai-te 
 
 retirement 
 
 mas-cu-lin 
 
 masculine 
 
 re-ve-rie 
 
 meditation 
 
 me-con-tent 
 
 discontented 
 
 rou-gea-tre 
 
 reddish 
 
 me-moi-re 
 
 memory 
 
 rus-ti-que 
 
 rural 
 
 me-na-ger 
 
 thrifty 
 
 scan-da-leux 
 
 scandalous 
 
 men-son-ge 
 
 falsehood 
 
 scru-pu-leux 
 
 scrupulous 
 
 me-pri-se 
 
 mistake 
 
 se-an-ce 
 
 sitting 
 
 m£-tho-de 
 
 method 
 
 ser-ru-re 
 
 lock 
 
 modes-tie 
 
 modesty 
 
 sif-fle-mcnt 
 
 whistling 
 
 mon-ta-gnard 
 
 highlander 
 
 sim-ple-ment 
 
 plainly 
 
 mou-tar-de 
 
 mustard 
 
 so-bri-quet 
 
 nick name 
 
 mur-mu-re 
 
 murmur 
 
 so-len-nel 
 
 solemn 
 
 na-tu-rel 
 
 natural 
 
 son-net-te 
 
 little bell 
 
 nau-fra-ge 
 
 shipwreck 
 
 so-no-re 
 
 sonorous 
 
 ne*-an-moins 
 
 nevertheless 
 
 sou-cou-pe 
 
 saucer 
 
 no-bles-se 
 
 nobility 
 
 soup-con-neux 
 
 auspicious 
 
 noi-ra-tre 
 
 blackish 
 
 spec-ta-cle 
 
 sight 
 
 o-bli-geant 
 
 obliging 
 
 splen-di-de 
 
 splendid 
 
 om-bra-ge 
 
 shade 
 
 suc-ces-seur 
 
 successor 
 
 op-pro-bre 
 
 disgrace 
 
 su-pre-me 
 
 supreme 
 
 o-ra-geux 
 
 stormy 
 
 symp-to-me 
 
 symptom 
 
 or-fe-vre 
 
 goldsmith 
 
 tein-tu-re 
 
 dying 
 
 or-phe-lin 
 
 orphan 
 
 ten-dres-se 
 
 tenderness 
 
 pa-moi-son 
 
 faintingfit 
 
 t£-ne-breux 
 
 dark 
 
 pan-tou-fle 
 
 slipper 
 
 the-a-tre 
 
 theatre 
 
 pa-pe-tier 
 
 stationer 
 
 the-ie-re 
 
 tea-pot 
 
 pa-ra-sol 
 
 umbrella 
 
 toi-let-te 
 
 toilet 
 
 pa-re n-te 
 
 kinswoma 
 
 tour-ne-vis 
 
 screwdriver 
 
 pa-rois-se 
 pas-sa-ble 
 
 parish 
 
 tou-te-fois 
 
 nevertheless 
 
 tolerable 
 
 tri-che-rie 
 
 cheat 
 
 pois-sar-de 
 
 fishwoman 
 
 tri-om-phe 
 
 triumph 
 
 poi-tri-ne 
 
 breast 
 
 trom-pet-te 
 
 trumpet 
 
 por-tie-re 
 
 coach door 
 
 tu-mul-te 
 
 tumult 
 
 pes-tu-re 
 
 posture 
 
 va-can-ces 
 
 holidays 
 
 pota-ge 
 
 porridge 
 
 ver-get-te 
 
 brush 
 
 pous-sie-re 
 
 dust 
 
 ver-mis-seau 
 
 small icon* 
 
 pr£-tex-te 
 
 pretence 
 
 vic-toi-re 
 
 victory 
 
 prin-ces-se 
 
 princess 
 
 vi-gou-reux 
 
 vigorous 
 
 pro-mes-se 
 
 promise 
 
 vil-la-geois 
 
 countryman 
 
 Dro-tec-teur 
 
 protector 
 
 Toi-tu-re 
 
 carriage 
 
 *-<-ril 
 
 childish 
 
 z^-plii-re 
 
 zephyrus 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 17 
 
 B, b, this letter has the same sound as in English. 
 
 Bal ball bo-bi-ne bobbin 
 
 Ba-bel Babel bar-ba-ris-me barbarism 
 
 ba-bil prating bi-bli-o-the-que library 
 
 ba-bouin baboon bur-les-que burlesque 
 
 B is always pronounced in the middle of words, as 
 ab-di-quer, sub-ve-nir, ob-vi-er ; and at the end of pro- 
 per names, as Job, Caleb, Moab ; also in the words 
 radoub, the refitting of a ship, rumb, point of the com- 
 pass ; but it is never sounded in plomb, lead. 
 
 When double, as in able, abbot ; rabbin, rabbin ; 
 sabbat, sabbath ; and their derivatives, only one of 
 these letters is sounded ; however, in Abbeville and 
 abbatial the sound of the double b is distinctly heard. 
 
 C, c, has the sound of < 
 
 C sounded as k. 
 
 " k, or English c in cart, before 
 a, o, u, I, n, r, but 
 of 
 s, or c in cedar, cider, cymbal, 
 before e, i, and y. 
 
 C sounded as s. 
 
 Cal-cul 
 
 ca-co-pho-nie 
 
 ©te-ri-cal 
 
 Cra-co-vie 
 
 co-que-li-cot 
 
 cro-co-di-le 
 
 cris-tal 
 
 cu-cur-bi-te 
 
 calculation 
 
 cacophony 
 
 clerical 
 
 Cracow 
 
 wild-poppy 
 
 crocodile 
 
 crystal 
 
 cucurbite 
 
 ce-ci 
 
 this 
 
 c£-ci-t£ 
 
 blindness 
 
 c£-ta-c£e 
 
 cetaceous 
 
 cer-ceau 
 
 hoop 
 
 Cir-cd 
 
 Circe 
 
 ci-li-ce 
 
 hair-cloth 
 
 cy-ni-que 
 
 cynic 
 
 cy-pres 
 
 cypress 
 
 iddle of words before q, oa, 
 
 co, cu, cl, cr, as socque, acquerir, accabler, acclimater, 
 acclamation, accomplir, acoutrer, acfoe'diter, ecclisias- 
 tique, which are pronounced so-que, a-querir, a-cabler, 
 &c. except, however, in the words pec-cable, pee-cant f 
 
18 THE SOUNDS 
 
 pec-cadille, pec-cam, sac-cholatique, in which the sound 
 of the double c is distinctly heard. — It has the sound of 
 k before ce and ci, as in suc-ces, ac-cident, vac-cine, &c« 
 and takes the sound of s before a, o, u, when there is a 
 cedilla under it, as in fagade, j agon, regu. 
 
 C is sounded as g hard in second, and its derivatives, 
 and by many in Claude, and Reine-Claude, and even by 
 some, but improperly, in secret. 
 
 C, at the end of words, is usually pronounced k, as 
 in cognac, lac (a lake), avec, bee, pic, syndic, roc, froc, 
 e&toc, due, aqueduc, agaric, arc, zinc, &c. and in the 
 singular of echec ; but it is not sounded in croc, ctc-croc, 
 arc-boutant, banc, broc, clerc, marc d'argent, eric, esto~ 
 mac,flanc,jonc, lacs (toils), tabar^ (rone, echecs, nor in 
 done before a consonant ; but 
 
 It is always sounded in croc-en-jambe, franc itourdi, 
 du blanc au noir, and in both syllables of mic-mac, trio 
 trac, cric-crac, ric-a^ric, and pore-epic. 
 
 In words ending in ci, both consonants are generally 
 sounded, as in tact, contact, intact, exact, inexact, ab» 
 ject, correct, direct, infect, strict, succinct ; but neithet 
 of them in aspect, suspect, circonspect, amict, i?istinct, 
 distinct ; and only c in respect, though both letters are 
 always heard in suspecte, circonspecte, respecte, distincte, 
 as well as in the middle of other similar words, as reo 
 teur, vecteur, seducteur, redacleur, humecter, injecttr, dac» 
 tyle, ductile, tactique, &c. 
 
 'one, which is most general, like 
 
 ~, . j j sh in she, shake ; 
 
 Ch has two sounds, < ., ,, i • u i 
 
 ' ) the other, which very rarely 
 
 oc- 
 curs, is that of A: in chimera. 
 
 Examples of sh. 
 
 Chat cat ar-chi-tra-ve arcliilrave 
 
 che-val horse chou-et-te screech-owl 
 
 cher-cher to seek chii-te fall 
 
 chi-che stingy chu-cho-ter to tchisper 
 
 ur-chi-tec-te architect chy-le, &c. &c. chyh 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 19 
 
 and in many proper names, as Achille, Joachim, &i£ru» 
 bin, Zachee, &c. 
 
 Examples of ch as k. 
 
 A-chab 
 
 A-ch£-lo-us 
 
 An-ti-o-chus 
 
 A-ohaie 
 
 A-na-char-sis 
 
 a-na-cho-re-te 
 
 ar-chan-ge 
 
 Ar-chan-gel 
 
 ar-ch£-ty-pe 
 
 ar-chon-tes 
 
 ar-chi-e-pis-co- 
 
 pal 
 chal-ca-doi-ne 
 eu-cha-ris-tie 
 
 Cham 
 
 Cha-na-an 
 
 Chi-o 
 
 Cho*re-be 
 
 Chos-ro-es 
 
 Chal-da-i-que 
 
 Chal-dee 
 
 cha-os 
 
 cbeMi-doi-ne 
 
 Cher-so-ne-se 
 
 chi-li-ar-que 
 
 chal-co-gra- 
 
 phie 
 ca-te-chu-me-ne 
 
 Za-cha-rie 
 
 Ma-chi-a-vel 
 
 Mi-chel-an-ge 
 
 Pul-che-rie 
 
 Ti-cho-Bra-b^ 
 
 Dyr-ra-chi-um 
 
 cbt-ro-man-cie 
 
 cboeur 
 
 cho-ris-te 
 
 or-ches-tre 
 
 i-cho-reux 
 
 cbo-re-ge 
 
 Na-bu-cho-do- 
 
 Cal-chas 
 Bac-chus 
 Cha-ron 
 Ci-vi-ta-Veo- 
 
 cbia 
 Zu-rich 
 £-cho 
 scbo-lie 
 cha-li-be" 
 chon-dril-le 
 chi-ra-gre 
 ar-cha-is-me 
 
 Examples of chl as k. 
 
 Tacht 
 
 U-trecht 
 
 Maes-tricht 
 
 ► are pronounced- 
 
 Yak 
 
 Utrek 
 
 Mastrik 
 
 without sounding 
 thef. 
 
 Ch takes the sound of a hard g in drachme, and is 
 dropped in almanack ; and on account of their Italian 
 origin in vermicelle and violoncelle, c, without h, takes the 
 sound of the English sh. 
 
 Ch has uniformly the sound of fc, in all words where 
 it is followed by a consonant, as Christy chretien, Chloris, 
 chronique, isochrone, chronometre, Arachne, ichneumon, 
 technique, &c. 
 
 D, d, has the same sound as in English. 
 
 De'-da-le labyrinth Dry-a-de Dryad 
 
 do-du plump dro-ma-dai-re dromedary 
 
 din-don turkey de-di-ca-toi-re dedicatory 
 
 D is always sounded in the middle of words, as adjeo- 
 tify adverb e, admirable. 
 
 It is likewise heard at the end of proper names, as £n 
 David, Obedy Gady Alfred, &c. and in some other 
 
 3* 
 
10 THE SOUNDS 
 
 words, as Cid, Sud, Sund, Talmud, ephod, lamed. At 
 the end of many words before a vowel, or h mute, d 
 takes the sound of t, as, quand il viendra ; un grand 
 homme ; vend-il ? &c. however, it is never sounded in 
 bond, gond,fond, nid, nozud, muid, and pied ; except in de 
 fond-en-comble, de pied-en-cap, tenir pied-a-boule, avoir 
 un pied-a-terre, where it is sounded as t. 
 
 D is sounded double in some few words derived from 
 the Latin, as in ad-dition, ad-ducteur , red-dition. 
 
 F,f, is sounded like the same letter in English. 
 
 Example. 
 
 Far-fa-det hobgoblin f£-bri-fu-ge febrifuge 
 
 fau-fi-ler to baste (in sewing) f ruc-ti-fi-er to fructify 
 
 fet-fa edict of the Mufti fi-fre fifer 
 
 fan-fa-ron boaster for-fait crime 
 
 Final / is sounded in all words ending in if, whieh 
 amount to nearly 260, mostly adjectives, and in raf bref, 
 brief, chef, fief, nef nerf, grief, serf, relief, mechef, 
 Azof I of tof tuf, ouf, pouf ceuf, veuf bosuf and neuf, 
 (new) ; but not in clef, cerf eteuf chef-oVozuvre, ceuf 
 frais, nor in the plural of nerf ozuf, bceuf and neuf 
 (new). In neuf (nine), when alone, or when it termi- 
 nates the sentence,/ is distinctly sounded, but it takes 
 the sound of v before a vowel, and is silent before a con- 
 sonant. 
 
 When it is doubled, only one of these letters is sound- 
 ed : however, in some few words, as effusion, affadir, 
 effraction, it seems more proper to sound both. 
 
 'before a, o, u, the hard sound of g in tke 
 > English word go, 
 
 f6> J and before e, i, y^ the soft sound of s in 
 
 pleasure. 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 11 
 
 Examples of g hard. 
 
 Gan-gre-ne gangrene gut-tu-ral guttural 
 
 Gro-nin-gue Groningen gom-me gum^ 
 
 gai cheerful gla-ce looking-glass 
 
 go-gue-nard joker Gor-go-ne Gorgon 
 
 Examples of g soft, 
 
 Geai jay ge-n^-ral general 
 
 ge-or-gi-ques georgics gens people 
 
 gen-re gender gin-gem-bre ginger 
 
 ge-mir to groan gym-ni-que gymnastic 
 
 G final has the hard sound in joug, and in proper 
 names, as Agag, Doeg, but it takes ths sound of k in 
 rang, sang, and long masculine before a vowel ; and 
 also in bourg. It is silent in faubourg, Luxembourg, 
 &c. and in Bourg-Vabbe, Bourg-la-Reine, &c. ; and 
 likewise in sang-sue, de sang-froid, sang-de-dragon, in 
 rang, sang 9 long, before a consonant, and always in 
 doigt, legs, poing, vieux-oing, hareng, etang, seing, and 
 vingt. 
 
 Bourg-mestre is pronounced bourgue-mestre, and bj 
 some persons it is now, and not improperly, written in 
 the latter manner. 
 
 Gu forms a distinct syllable in the inflections of the 
 yerb ar-gu-er ; is strongly sounded in aigu'e, suraigu'e, 
 cigu'e, ambigue, contigu'e, exigu'e, and besaigue ; has a 
 mixed sound with the following i in aiguille, aiguillade, 
 aiguillonner, aiguiser, and derivatives, and in the pro- 
 per names, d'Aiguillon, de Gnise, le Guide. But the 
 u in the inflections of more than forty verbs ending in 
 guer, and in many other words, where it stands before 
 e and i, being intended only to give g the hard sound, 
 is entirely silent, as in bague, begue, Jigue, dogue, fou- 
 gue, fugue, onguent, langue, longue, nargue, vergue, mor- 
 gue, distingue, gue, gui, guerir, guinder, guise, languir, 
 guinguette, &c. 
 
 Gua takes the mixt sound of the diphthong goua in 
 some few words, as lingual, paraguante, Gaudeloupt, 
 Guadalquivir, Guatimala, Guastalla. 
 
THE SOUNDS 
 
 When g is doubled, only one is sounded, except be- 
 fore e and i, then the first g retains the hard, and the 
 second adopts the soft sound, as in sug-gerer, sug-ge*> 
 iion, 
 
 G before h, and before several consonants in thB 
 middle of words, retains its hard sound, as in Berghen, 
 Enghien, eglise, enigme, segment, amygdales. Before 
 I there are two exceptions, in the words, imbroglio and 
 de Broglio, where it is sounded liquid, as in seraglio, 
 and these words are generally pronounced as if written 
 imbroille, de Broille. 
 
 jT one hard, as in the English word 
 
 Vd tlfe"otheJ'liquid, as in the last 
 syllable of onion. 
 
 Gni-de 
 
 Gnome 
 
 gno-mi-de 
 
 gno-mi-que 
 
 gnomon 
 
 gno-mo-ni-que cog-na-ti-on 
 
 Examples of the hard sound. 
 
 gna-phali-um 
 
 gnos-ti-que 
 
 ag-nat 
 
 ag-na-ti-on 
 
 cog-nat 
 
 ag-na-ti-que reg-ni-cole 
 
 cog-na-ti-que mag-nd-sie 
 
 ag-nus stag-nant 
 
 ig-nee stag-na-ti-OB 
 
 ig-ni-cole di-ag-nos-tique 
 
 ig-ni-ti-on mag-nat 
 
 G is silent in signet, and Regnard, a French writer of 
 comedies, pronounced sinet, Renard. 
 
 H, h, when aspirated, is sounded with a strong guttu- 
 ral impulse, and when mute, it has no power but that of 
 showing etymology. 
 
 H 
 
 aspirated in 
 
 H is mute in 
 
 'Habler 
 
 to romance 
 
 ha-bit 
 
 coat 
 
 'ha-che 
 
 axe 
 
 her-be 
 
 grass 
 
 4ia-ir 
 
 to hate 
 
 heu-re 
 
 hour 
 
 'har-pe 
 
 harp 
 
 heu-reux 
 
 happy 
 
 'haut 
 
 high 
 
 he-ro-'i-ne* 
 
 heroine 
 
 ^-ros* 
 
 hero 
 
 he-ro-i-que* 
 
 heroic 
 
 *he-ris-son 
 
 hedge-hog 
 
 he-ro-is-rne* 
 
 heroism 
 
 'hi-deux 
 
 hideous 
 
 his-toi-re 
 
 history 
 
 'hon-te 
 
 shame 
 
 hi-ver 
 
 winter 
 
 hui-ler 
 
 to howl 
 
 hor-reur 
 
 horror 
 
 and about 160 more words. 
 
 and about 135 other caaes* 
 
 All generally noted in my dictionary and others. 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, 23 
 
 * Observe, that h is aspirated in ^heros, but not in its 
 derivatives. 
 
 //is never aspirated in the middle of a word, except 
 when that word is the compound of another beginning 
 with an h aspirated, as in s'aheurter, dehdler, dehanche, 
 deharnacher, enharnacher, s y e?ihurdir, dehors. 
 
 A*. B. Though there is no aspirated h before ome, 
 onzieme, and oui, we pronounce and write more gene- 
 rally le onze, le onzieme, than Vouze, V onzieme, and say 
 always le oui et le non without elision, and final s in tnes, 
 Us, ses, nos, vos, leurs, ces, and les, is never sounded 
 when placed before any of these words, as tons vos out 
 et vos non ; sur les onze heures, and even before une in 
 sur les une heure. 
 
 For what concerns h placed after c or g, see the re- 
 marks on those two letters, p. 1 8 and 22. 
 
 H, after r or t, is always silent, as rheteur, Rhone, rhw* 
 barbe, the, Thomas, ihym. 
 
 J, j, has constantly the sound of z in azure, or * in 
 pleasure. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Jus g^avy jou-jou toy 
 
 ja-mais never ju-ju-be jujube 
 
 jo-vi-al jovial jeu-nes-se youth 
 
 K, L has always a hard sound, as in the English word 
 king. 
 
 This letter can hardly be considered as belonging to 
 the French alphabet, as it is found only in some few 
 words borrowed from foreign languages, as 
 
 Kan-gu-rou kanguroo ki-os-que Turkish pavilion 
 
 kcr-mes cochineal ky-ri-el-le tedious enumtratiQ<\ 
 
24 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 L, l^ has two sounds, the 
 
 'first, is precisely the same as 
 I in the English words li- 
 ly, law, &c. 
 second, resembles that of ill 
 in brilliant. 
 
 Example of the First. 
 
 La-te-ral 
 
 lateral 
 
 li-las lilach 
 
 le-gis-la-teur 
 
 legislator 
 
 lo-cal local 
 
 U-bel-le 
 
 libel 
 
 lu-ni-so-lai-re lunisolar 
 
 
 Example 
 
 of the Second. 
 
 
 Bail 
 
 lease 
 
 cail-lou-ta-ge 
 
 pebble-work 
 
 aom-meil 
 
 sleep 
 
 mer-veiUeux 
 
 wonderful 
 
 ceil 
 
 eye 
 
 ceil-la-de 
 
 glance 
 
 6-cu-reuil 
 
 squirrel 
 
 Guil-lau-me 
 
 William 
 
 or-gueil* 
 
 pride 
 
 or-gueil-leux* 
 
 proud 
 
 fe-nouil 
 
 fennel 
 
 gri-bouil-let-te 
 
 scramble 
 
 tail-le 
 
 shape 
 
 ga-zouil-le-ment 
 
 warbling 
 
 tail-la 
 
 he did cut 
 
 bar-bouil-lage 
 
 scrawl 
 
 tail-te 
 
 cut 
 
 cha-mail-lis 
 
 squabble 
 
 tail-lis 
 
 copse 
 
 o-reiMe 
 
 ear 
 
 tail-Ions 
 
 let us cut 
 
 p£-ril 
 
 danger 
 
 tail-leur 
 
 tailor 
 
 pe-ril-leux 
 
 dangerous 
 
 tail-lu-re 
 
 kind of embroidery oil-le 
 
 olio 
 
 Neuil-ly 
 
 Neul-ly 
 
 im-bro-glio 
 
 intricacy 
 
 As the pronunciation of this letter is attended with 
 some difficulty, observe that the final syllables, ail, eil, 
 ceil, euil, ueil, and ouil, are always liquid ; so are in any 
 situation aill, till, mill, euill, ueill, and ouill, followed by 
 a vowel, as is seen in the list of examples just given. 
 
 * There is a perceptible difference between the vowel 
 sound of the second syllable of orgueil and orgueilleux : 
 the former is pronounced like mil, and the latter like the 
 second syllable of sommeil. 
 
 L final, preceded simply by i, is liquid in some few 
 words, of which the following is nearly a list ; avril, 
 &abil, Bresil, cil, gril % gresil, peril, and gentil, when 
 before a vowel, though in some even of these the / is 
 occasionally dropped m familiar conversation ; in other 
 
OV THE FRENCH TONGUE. 25 
 
 words of this termination, the I is usually suppressed, as 
 in fusil, outil, chenil, &c. pronounced fusi, outi, chenu 
 
 Injils a son, or sons, the I is mute ; but in Jil, Jits, 
 thread, threads, it is always heard, but is not liquid. 
 
 The same remark applies to foil, pronounced poel, the 
 hair of an animal, and to il the personal pronoun ; in 
 the plural of this latter Us the I is sometimes rejected 
 and sometimes pronounced, though the first mode is pre- 
 ferable. 
 
 Observe that Milhaut, Pardalhac, and Sully, proper 
 names, are pronounced liquid, contrary to the establish- 
 ed rule, and that the two latter are nearly the only known 
 instances of an I or // sounded liquid, without being im- 
 mediately preceded by the vowel L 
 
 III, in the middle of a word, is generally liquid, thers 
 being no exceptions of this rule but those words which 
 begin immediately by ill, as illegal, illuminer, &c. and 
 the following, distiller, instiller, osciller, scintiller, titil- 
 ler, vaciller, fritillaire, imbecille, mille, tranquille, with 
 their derivatives and inflections when verbs, and ville with 
 its compounds, as also Achille, campanille, codicille, fi- 
 brille, Gille, maxillaire, pupille, la Sibylle, and sille. 
 
 In most of these exceptions // are both sounded, as 
 well as in several other words, in which these letters are 
 preceded by other vowels, as allegorie, allusion, appel- 
 latif, appellation, belligerant, belliqueur, collation cle 
 benefices, follicule, malleole, velieite, collusion, constella- 
 tion, constelle, ebullition, Gallican, Gallicisme, intellect, 
 &c. malleable, medullaire, palliaiif, pellicule, equipoller, 
 hellenisms, and in proper names, as Apollon, Bellone, Do- 
 labella, Pallas, Sylla, &c. 
 
 M, m, corresponds in sound with the same letter in 
 English. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mar-me-la-de 
 
 marmalade 
 
 rao-mie 
 
 mummy 
 
 raar-mot-te 
 
 marmot 
 
 moment 
 
 moment 
 
 m£-mo-ra-ble 
 
 memorable 
 
 Mus-sul-man 
 
 Mussulman 
 
 mir- mi-don 
 
 myrmidon 
 
 mur-mu-re 
 
 murmur 
 
 mi-mi-que 
 
 mimic 
 
 mys-tt-re 
 
 mystery 
 
96 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 Jif, though usually sounded in the middle of words 
 before n, as in amnistie, calomnie, hymne, insomnie, som- 
 nambule, automnal, is yet mute in dainner, and its deri- 
 vatives, and in the substantive automne. 
 
 When double, only one of these letters is usually 
 sounded, except, 1st. in proper names, as, Em-manuel ; 
 2dly, in words beginning with imin y as im-rnortel. 
 
 In words in which em is followed by m, as emmencher, 
 it is pronounced like an, with the nasal sound. 
 
 When this letter is final, see tables first and second 
 (p. 4 and 5), and the accompanying observations (p. 8 
 and 9), where we necessarily, in part, discussed the na- 
 ture of this letter. 
 
 •TV, n, has the same sound as in English. 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 A-na-nas pine-apple non-ne nun 
 
 Ne-nu-far Nenuphar non-obs-tant nohvithstandivg 
 
 na-ti-o-nal national Ni-ni-ve Nineveh 
 
 no-mi-nal nominal noc-tur-ne nocturnal 
 
 no-na-ge-nai-re a man of ninety nym-phe nymph 
 
 When n follows the letter g, see gn (p. 22). 
 
 JVis often nasal, see table I. (p. 4), and table II. 
 (p. 5), and our observations (p. 8 and 9). 
 
 JV* takes the sound of s in monsieur, pronounced mos- 
 sieu* 
 
 N after e before t final in the third person plural of 
 any French verb is constantly silent, and the e is mute, 
 as Us consentent au marche, Us aimaient a rire 9 Us lurent 
 un chapitre ; here the final t i* only sounded before a 
 vowel. 
 
 When n is doubled, one oniy is generally pronounced, 
 except in an-nexe, an-nal, an-nuel, an-notation, an-niiler, 
 in-ne, in-nove, in~novation, and a few other cases. 
 
 P, p, is sounded as in English. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Pa-pil-lon butterfly pou-pee doll 
 
 pe-pin pippin po-pu-lai-re popular 
 
 pied-plat mean fellow pour-pre purple 
 
 prin-ci-pe principle pur-pu-rin pwplish 
 
 pro-pos discourse py-ra-mi-de pyramid 
 
OP THE FRENCH TONGUE, 27 
 
 P followed by h has the sound of/, as philosopher pho$- 
 phore, physique, 
 
 P preserves its sound in the middle of a word, as in 
 adapter, adopter, capter, captieux, baptismal, aptitude, 
 exception^ exemption, inepte, contempteur, gypse, Sep- 
 tembre, Septuagesime, corruption, rupture, apsides, rap- 
 sodies, symptome. 
 
 But it is not heard in bapteme, baptiser, baptistaire. 
 Baptiste, cheptel, exempt, exempt er, sculpter, sculpteu^ 
 sculpture, je romps, il corromp, sept, septieme, temps, et 
 printemps, nor • in prompt, prompte, and its derivatives. 
 
 Final p is always sounded in Alep, cap, Gap, jalap, 
 and julep, it is also heard in trop, beaucoup, when be- 
 fore a vowel, but never in champ, camp, drop, loup, si- 
 rop, and galop. 
 
 In laps, relaps, and rapt, both the final consonants are 
 pronounced, but neither in ceps de vigne. 
 
 When p is doubled, only one is generally sounded ; 
 however, in such words as lippitude, hippocentaure, hip- 
 popotame, Hippomene, Agrippa, Agrippine, Philippiqucs, 
 and Hippias, both are distinctly heard. 
 
 Q, q, has generally the hard sound of k in king. 
 As this letter is constantly followed by the vowel u, ex- 
 cept in cinq, and coq, we shall simply remark, that 
 
 f k, by far the most general before 
 
 Qu has three sounds, I . , a ^ vowel - ,. T 
 
 th ♦ r { kou before a in some particular 
 
 words. 
 
 [ku before e, or i in some others. 
 
 Examples of &. 
 
 Quai wharf ques-tion question 
 
 qua-li t£ quality sd-ques-tre sequestration 
 
 quel-que some queue tail 
 
 qui-con-que whosoever a-queux watery 
 
 qui-pro-quo blunder a-que-duc aqueduct 
 
 quoli-bet pun d-qui-vo-que ambiguity 
 
 quin-qui-na Peruvian bark se re-quin- >( to trick ontaJJ 
 
 que-nouil le distaff quer ] \ out 
 &c. &c. &.C. 
 4 
 
28 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 Examples of kon. 
 
 A-qua-ti-que 
 
 e-qua-teur 
 
 6-qua-ti-on 
 
 qua-kre 
 
 qua-dra-tu-re 
 
 qua-dri-ge 
 
 qua-dru-pe-de 
 qua-dru-ple 
 
 aquatic 
 
 equator 
 
 equalibn 
 
 quaktr 
 
 quadrature 
 
 C ancient cha- 
 
 < riol with 
 
 I four horses 
 
 quadruped 
 
 quadruple 
 
 qua-ter-ne 
 qua-dra-ge- 
 
 nai-re 
 qua-dra-ge- ) 
 
 si-mai } 
 a-qua-ti-le 
 a-qua-rel-le 
 li-qua-ti-on 
 in-quar-to 
 lo-qua-ci-te 
 
 quaternion 
 a man of forty 
 
 quadragesimal 
 
 aquatile 
 oquatir.ta 
 liquation 
 quarto size 
 loquacity 
 
 Examples of ku. 
 
 equestrian 
 liquefaction 
 questor 
 questure 
 
 e-qui-mtil-ti-ple equimultiple 
 e-qui-ta-ti-on horsemanship 
 
 quin-tu-ple quintuple 
 
 quin-li-le quint He 
 
 quin-quen-nal quinquennial 
 quin-de cem-virs qu in decemviri 
 quin-que-re-me ancient gullet 
 
 ) a term of the 
 quin-quer-ce > indent gyn- 
 
 ) nasium 
 
 In quinquagSnaire , a man of fifty, and quinquagesime, 
 quinquagesima, the first syllable corresponds with the 
 sound of qu in iqvestre, and the second corresponds with 
 the sound of qu in aquatique. This letter is never 
 doubled. 
 
 E qiies-tre 
 
 li-^ue-fac-ti-on 
 
 qucs-teur 
 
 ques-lu-re 
 
 qiiin-quen-nium quenquennium 
 
 ^qui-Ia-t^-re \of^ualdi,nen- 
 
 1 I SIGHS 
 
 e-qui-la-te-ral equilateral 
 e-qui-aii-gle equiangular 
 
 e-qui-dis-tant equidistant 
 
 R, r, is sounded as in English, but much stronger. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ra-re-t6 
 
 ras-su-rer 
 
 ra-bou-gri 
 
 re-brous-ser 
 
 ri-gou-reax 
 
 rom-pre 
 
 rou-vrir 
 
 ru-gir 
 
 ru-ral 
 
 rus-tre 
 
 scarcity 
 
 to hearten 
 
 stunted 
 
 to turn back 
 
 rigorous 
 
 to break 
 
 to open again 
 
 to roar 
 
 rural 
 
 a boor 
 
 rhytb-me 
 
 sour-die 
 cour-roux 
 il-cou-ra 
 cor-ro-de-ra 
 
 cor-ro-bo-re-ra 
 
 ir-ra-di-a-ti-on 
 ir-ro r.i-ti-ou 
 tor-re-fac-ti-on 
 
 rhyih m 
 to spring 
 
 irra h 
 
 he wilt run 
 
 it will corrode 
 
 corre- 
 ale 
 irradiation 
 irrigation 
 tor ■<fur lien 
 
 j it will 
 \ bo alt 
 
 ft is always sounded at the end of words after the 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 29 
 
 vowels, er, i, o, u, except in Monsieur, pronounced, as we 
 have said, Mos-sieu. 
 
 Er, in the following adjectives and substantives, con- 
 stantly rhymes with air, which is pronounced alike in 
 both languages. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Cher 
 
 cuil-ler 
 
 fer 
 
 ver 
 
 mer 
 
 fier 
 
 gas-ter 
 
 hi-er 
 
 hi- ver 
 
 a-roer 
 
 cancer 
 
 en-fer 
 
 either 
 
 a-vant-hier 
 
 aear 
 
 spoon 
 
 iron 
 
 worm 
 
 sea 
 
 haughty 
 
 stomach 
 
 yesterday 
 
 iv inter 
 
 bitter 
 
 cancer 
 
 hell 
 
 ether 
 ( the day before 
 I yesterday 
 
 ou-tre-mer 
 bel-ve-der 
 Lu-ci-fer 
 Pa-ter 
 
 fra-ter 
 
 ma-gister 
 
 Stat-kou-der 
 
 Ju-pi-ter 
 
 Al-ger 
 
 Gess-Her 
 
 > T i-ger 
 
 Sad-der 
 
 ultramarine 
 
 belvideie 
 
 Lucifer 
 
 the Lord's prayer 
 C ignorant medical 
 I practitioner 
 ( village school-mas' 
 I ter 
 
 Stadtholder 
 
 Jupiltr 
 
 Algiers 
 Gessner 
 
 Niger, a river 
 ( Sadder, a holy book 
 I of the Persians 
 
 In all other substantives, ending in er, the r is silent, 
 and the e pronounced close and short as in clarte. 
 
 When the following adjectives and a few others pre- 
 cede immediately a substantive which they qualify, if 
 this begins with a vowel, the r is pronounced, but in no 
 other case. 
 
 ' Le premier acte 
 i son dernier ouvrage 
 R sounded < un eingulier evcriement 
 1 no en tier abandon 
 un i^ger obstacle 
 
 the first act 
 his last work 
 a singular event 
 an entire cession 
 a slight obstacle 
 
 Knot sounded. 
 
 .11 est le premier a vous permcttre et le dernier a 
 vous tenir parole. — He is the first lo promise 
 and the last to keep his word. 
 C'est un horame leger et inconstant, enlier en 
 tout ce qu'il veut, et ringulier en tout ce qu'H 
 fait- — He is a light versatile character, positive 
 tn all he undertakes, and singular in all he 
 does. 
 
 Final r in the present of the infinitive of all the verbs 
 of the first conjugation, is always pronounced when im- 
 
30 THE SOUNDS 
 
 mediately followed by a word beginning with a vowel, 
 when the style is dignified, but in conversation this dis- 
 tinction is seldom observed. 
 
 Rh. See h (p. 23). 
 
 When this letter is double, only one is pronounced, 
 except, 1st. in aberration, abhorrer, horreur, errer, tor- 
 refier, and their derivatives ; 2dly, in words beginning 
 with irr, as irrevocable, irregulier , irruption, &c. ; 3dly, 
 in the future and conditional of the verbs acquerir. com- 
 rir, rnourir, and their derivatives — facquer-rai, je mour- 
 mis, nous cour-ri-ons, &c. 
 
 5', 5, has two ) hard, as in the English word sister. 
 sounds, the $ soft, as in rose and please. 
 In the following list of words the first s has the hard, 
 and the second the soft sound. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF BOTH SOUNDS 
 
 Sai-son 
 
 season 
 
 sour-noi-se 
 
 a sullen woman 
 
 sai-sie 
 
 seizure 
 
 sup-po-sez 
 
 suppose 
 
 se-sa-me 
 
 sesamum 
 
 se-dui-sant 
 
 alluring 
 
 si-se 
 
 situate 
 
 Su-se 
 
 Susa 
 
 Sou-bi-se 
 
 Soubise 
 
 su-sin 
 
 quarter-deck 
 
 sot-ti-se 
 
 silly action 
 
 Sy-ra-cu-se 
 
 Syracuse 
 
 sous-en-ten-te 
 
 ( mental reserva- 
 > Hon 
 
 Syn-the-se 
 
 Synthesis 
 
 S has uniformly the hard sound at the beginning of 
 words, except in Shire, Svelte, Sganare'le and Sdili for 
 Delos, where it has the soft sound ; and in familiar con- 
 versation aider a Sedan ; il est le second de sa classe, are 
 pronounced as if these words were written azdan, h 
 zgon. Before ch, s is mute, as in Schall, Schaffhouse, 
 Schelling, Schis-e, Schorl. 
 
 Sh in sherif, a sheriff, is sounded as in English. 
 
 When s is followed by ce, ci, cy, the sound of only 
 one of these consonants is heard, as in scene, science, 
 Scythie, &c. except, however, in aces-cence, convales- 
 cence, efferves-cence, efftores-cencc, turges-cence, incan- 
 descence, r&minis-cence, rcsipis-cence, mis-cible, res 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 31 
 
 cinder, sus-ception, sus-citer, sus-citation, vis~c£re, w- 
 ciral, trons-cendance, and a few others, where s cannot 
 be rescinded without altering the pronunciation. In all 
 other combinations, sc takes the sound of sk, as scapu- 
 laire, scolie, sclerotique, scribe, esclave, scrupule, &c. 
 
 S preserves the hard sound in the middle of a word, 
 when preceded or followed by a consonant, as in transe, 
 transir, Transulvanie, convulsion, valse, espace, usteti- 
 sile, statistique, &c. &c. However it takes the soft 
 sound, or that of z in Alsace, Arsace, Asdrubal, asbeste, 
 balsamine, balsamique, bisbille, Israel, Israelite, Esdras, 
 Thisbe, presbitere, transaction, transiger, transitoire, 
 intransitif, transalpin, Lesbos, Isboseih, Brisgaw, Rys~ 
 wick, Louisbourg, Augsbourg, Presbourg, Philipsbourg, 
 and some few others. 
 
 S takes the soft sound when between two vowels, as 
 in base, these, bise, rose, ruse, &c. Except in com- 
 pound words, where it preserves the hard sound of the 
 initial s of its root ; as in desuetude, entresol, mono- 
 syllabc, polysyllube, parasol, tournesol, preseance, pre- 
 supposer, resaisir, resaluer, vraisemblable, and some de- 
 rivatives. 
 
 St final, see final t (p. 33.) 
 
 Final s is always heard in as, atlas, argus, bibus, 
 blocus, bolus, agnus, foetus, calus, sinus, Phebus, les us, 
 virus, en sus, aloes, bis, jadis, iris, gratis, lapis, le lis, 
 la Lys (a river), ma'is, metis, vis, tournevis, Amadit, 
 Adonis, Paris, (the shepherd), pathos, Alhos, Lesbos, 
 Ahiio*, I )£Jos } Paros, Brutus, Venus, Regulus, Protesilas, 
 Bias, Gil Bias, Las Casas, and many more foreign pro- 
 per names. 
 
 In almost all other cases final s is silent when the next 
 word begins with a consonant, as au moins vous ne feoti- 
 vez pas dire, que je vous repete ton jours les menus 
 ch'oses ; but it generally takes the soft sound of z before 
 another word, beginning with a vowel or h mute, as aurez 
 vous au moins alors assez de j>atience, pour, &c. 
 
 Though there is no s, in quatre, yet, before yeaux it is, 
 in conversation, pronounced as if ending in that letter, 
 
 4* 
 
32 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 Finally, ss have generally the sound of a single s pro* 
 nounced hard, as in je ressassasse, assassinasse, Mis- 
 sissippi, &c. ; except in some few words, where both 
 are heard, assertion, assonance, dissonance, accessible, 
 inaocessible, admissible, inadmissible, missive, scissile, 
 scission, scissure, fissure, fissipede, assentiment, asservir. 
 Thus there is a difference in pronunciation between 
 these phrases: C'est un homme a sentimens; il aime 
 a servir ses amis ; and il faut son assentiment ; 
 cet ambitieux voudrait asservir Vunivers ; and again 
 between Palun de plume est scissile and la sicile est 
 une tie triangulaire, &c. the double ss must be distinctly 
 heard. 
 
 {first, hard, as in the English 
 T 9 t, has two sounds, i word tit, 
 
 the \ second, soft, like c in cedar and 
 
 \ civil. 
 
 FIRST SOUND. 
 
 Examples of t hard before vowels and diphthongs. 
 
 Tac-ti-que 
 
 tactics 
 
 ti-are 
 
 tes-ta-teur 
 
 testator 
 
 bas-ti-on 
 
 thd-a-tre 
 
 theatre 
 
 ques-ti-on 
 
 to-ta-li t6 
 
 totality 
 
 mix-ti-on 
 
 tour-te-rel-Ie 
 
 turtle- dove 
 
 com-bus-ti-on 
 
 ti-tu-lai-re 
 
 titulary 
 
 bi-jou-tier 
 
 ti-thy-ma-Ie 
 
 tithymal 
 
 Ma-thi-as 
 
 chr£-tien 
 
 christian 
 
 Pon-thieu 
 
 dy-nas-tie 
 
 dynasty 
 
 tu sou-tiens 
 
 le tien 
 
 thine 
 
 &c. Szc. &c. 
 
 
 SECOND 
 
 i SOUND. 
 
 tiara 
 
 bastion 
 
 question 
 
 mixture 
 
 combustw?i 
 
 jeweller 
 
 Mat hi as 
 
 Ponthieu 
 
 thou supported 
 
 Tis soft before i, connected with some other follow- 
 ing vowel or vowels, in some particular words, that are 
 given as exceptions to t\i?, first sound of t. 
 
OP THE FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 
 partial 
 
 ac-ti-on 
 
 action 
 
 partiality 
 
 bal-bu-ti-er 
 
 to slammer 
 
 partial 
 
 in-i-ti-er 
 
 to initiate 
 
 patience 
 
 bal-bu-ti-a 
 
 he stuttered 
 
 impatience 
 
 bal-bu-tie-ment 
 
 stammering 
 
 quotient 
 
 in-i-ti-e 
 
 initialed 
 
 captious 
 
 in-i-ti-a-ti-on 
 
 initiation 
 
 cavil 
 
 Ve-ni-ti-en 
 
 Venetian 
 
 bail 
 
 se pre-cau-ti-on- 
 ner 
 
 to be cautious 
 
 Par-ti-a! 
 
 par-ti-a-li-te 
 
 par-ti-el 
 
 pa-ti-en-ce 
 
 im-pa-ti-en-ce 
 
 quo-ti-ent 
 
 cap-ti-eux 
 
 ar-gu-tie 
 
 cau-ti-on-ne-ment bail 
 
 Sti, xti, thi, preserve invariably thejlrst sound -of t be- 
 fore any letter. 
 
 To complete this second list, observe that t always 
 takes the sound of c. — 1st. In all adjectives ending in 
 -tial, -tiel, -tient, -tieux, and their derivatives ; — 2dly. 
 In all the inflexions of the two verbs quoted, balbutier, 
 and initier ; — 3dly, in several hundred words ending in 
 tion, when tion is not immediately preceded by an s, or 
 an x ; and finally, in the following additional list of 
 words, ending in -tie and 4ien, viz. the substantives 
 calvitie, facetie, impentie, ineriie, minutie, peripetie, 
 primatie, prophStie, suprematie, aristocratie, democra- 
 tie, theocratie ; in the names of countries, as Beotie, 
 Croatie, Dalmatie, Galatie ; and of nations, or per- 
 sons, as Beotien, Egyptien, Capetien, Diocletien, Domi- 
 tien, Gratien, Le Titien, and some few others. 
 
 T final is always sounded in apt, rant, fat, malt, 
 mat, pat, opiat, exeat, transeat, vivat, spa't, spath, Goli- 
 ath, net, fret, tacet^ Thibet, aconit, deficit, grand, intro'it, 
 preterit, transit, subit, dot, Astaroth, azitnut, brut, com- 
 put, chut, bismuth, indult, luth, lid, occiput, sinciput, and 
 both s and t are articulated in Le Christ, Vest (east), 
 Voucst, Brest, lest, test, Pest, toast, and tntrt le zist et le 
 zest ; but neither of these letters is heard in Jesus Christ, 
 which is pronounced Jem Cri. 
 
 T final is likewise generally heard, when the follow- 
 ing word begins with a vowel or h mute^ as e'est un petit 
 homme, &c. &c. ; however, there are many words in 
 which it always remains silent, as mort, tort, goiit, 
 
34 THE SOUNDS 
 
 court, bdt, mat, lit, respect, instinct, navet, assassinat, 
 artichaut, defaut, debout, brulot, statut, &c. so that a 
 person would almost be regarded with astonishment 
 who should affectedly sound it in these sentences : 
 Dassaut a tie terrible. — he contrat est signe et le depot 
 est chez moi. — Le gigot est cuit et le ragout aussi. — Avant 
 de pecker mettez Pappdt a la ligne. — J'ai fait un bon 
 marche ; voyez, P achat est la ; such a pronunciation 
 would be barbarous and often equivocal. 
 
 T is always silent in the conjunction et, pronounced e, 
 therefore to avoid what is called hiatus in French verse> 
 this word is never placed before a vowel. 
 
 For words ending in ct, see page 18. 
 
 When this letter is doubled, only one is heard, except 
 in atticisme, attique, Atticus, battologie, guttural, and pit- 
 toresque. 
 
 V, v, has the same sound in French as in English. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Val-ve valve vi-vre to live 
 
 val-vu-le valvule vi-vo-ter to live poorly 
 
 vau-de-vil-le ballad vi-re-vol-te \ qU ) cJ l irr ^*~ 
 
 I tar walk 
 
 ver-ve poetic fire vi-re-veau windlass 
 
 vi-va-ce vivacious veu-ve widow 
 
 vis-a-vis opposite veu-va-ge widowhood 
 
 This letter, when doubled, is represented by the 
 character rv, which is met with in some foreign words, 
 and is always pronounced as a simple v,as in Wigh, 
 Wolfram, Warwick, Windsor, Walcourt, Walton, War- 
 sovie, Westphalif, Wirlemberg, Wolga, Weser, Wendover, 
 Ryswick, &c. except in wist and wiski, where it has the 
 English sound ; but in Newton, the first syllable ?iezv is 
 pronounced as neu in ?i<?2ttralite. 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 35 
 
 X, ar, has the five 
 different sounds of 
 
 r ks, in axe, expense 
 gz, in exhibit, exhale 
 k, in excellent, exsiccative 
 ss, in bliss, mossy 
 z, in Xenophon, 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Ax-e 
 
 sex-e 
 
 ri-xe 
 
 box-er 
 
 lu-xe 
 
 Of the first sound, ks. 
 
 axis 
 sex 
 
 altercation 
 to box 
 luxury 
 
 A-lex-an-dre 
 
 Xan-tip-pe 
 
 ox-y-ge-ne 
 
 pa-ra-do-xe 
 
 flu-xi-on 
 
 Alexander 
 
 Xantippe 
 
 oxygen 
 
 paradox 
 
 defluxion 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Xa-vi-er 
 
 Xe-ao-phon 
 
 ex-il 
 
 ex-or-de 
 
 ex-u-be-ran-ce 
 
 Of the second sound, gz. 
 
 Xaverius 
 
 Xenophon 
 
 exile 
 
 exordium 
 
 exuberance 
 
 ex-a-men 
 
 ex-au-cer 
 
 ex-haus-ser 
 
 ex-hiber 
 
 ex-hu-mer 
 
 examination 
 ( to hear favoura- 
 \ hly 
 
 to raise 
 
 to produce 
 
 to disinter 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Of the third sound, k. 
 
 Ex-ce-der 
 
 to exceed 
 
 ex-sic-ca-ti-on 
 
 exsiccation 
 
 ex-cel-ler 
 
 to excel 
 
 ex-suc-ci-on 
 
 exsuclion 
 
 ex-ces 
 
 excess 
 
 ex-su-da-ti-on 
 
 exsudation 
 
 ex-cep-ter 
 
 to except 
 
 ex-su-der 
 
 exude 
 ( to plead an ex* 
 I ception 
 
 ex-ci-se 
 
 excise 
 
 ex-ci-per 
 
 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 
 Of the fourth sound, t$. 
 
 Arx - Aix Soixante Sixty 
 
 Aix-la-Chapelle Aix-la-Chapellc Bruxelles Brussels 
 
 Auxerre Auxerre Luxeuil Luxeuil 
 
 Aaxonne Auxonne and some few more. 
 
36 THE SOUNDS 
 
 « 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 Of the fifth sound, z. 
 
 Deuxieme second dix ecus ten crown* 
 
 dixieme sixth dix homraes ten men 
 
 dixieme tenth deux aunes two tils 
 
 dix-huit eighteen beaux yeux fine eyes 
 
 dix-neuf nintlten &.c. &lc. 
 
 The first sound of this letter ks is by far the most ge- 
 aeral. 
 
 The second sound gz takes place in all words begin- 
 ning with x or ex followed by a vowel, or the letter h, 
 as le Xanthc, Xenocrates, Ximenes, exorable, and seve- 
 ral others with those already mentioned in the second ex- 
 emplification. 
 
 The third sound k is limited to words beginning with 
 exce, exci, and exs. 
 
 The fourth sound ss is only found in the above quota- 
 tions, and in six and dix when unaccompanied by sub- 
 stantives, as in de seize Stez six, resle dix, where six and 
 dix are pronounced with the hissing sound of ss in the 
 English word bliss. 
 
 Final x is generally pronounced as z, when the next 
 word begins with a vowel or li mute, otherwise it is 
 silent, as // est heureux aupres de vans, et malfuureux 
 loin de vous : le Jinx et reflux de la mer, &c. except in 
 the following words, where it has always the sound of 
 ks. Jljax, Astiunax, borax, storax, Halifax, Hippo- 
 nax, Dax, climax, thorax, Pertinax, Syphax, index, per- 
 plex, Beatrix, Erix, Felix, prefix, phenix, Fox, Palafox, 
 Coysevox, lynx, sphinx, larynx, syririx, onyx, Styx, and 
 Pollux. 
 
 N. B. X takes the sound of sh only in Don Quixote, 
 generally pronounced Don Kishot, or rather ghishot. 
 
 Z, z, is 
 rose. 
 
 generally 
 
 pronounced as z 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 in zone, or s in 
 
 Zi-sa-nie 
 
 ze^nith 
 
 zo-oe 
 
 tare 
 
 zenith 
 
 sone 
 
 zig-zag ^ 
 
 zin-zo-lin 
 
 Zuy-der-z^e 
 
 zigzag 
 
 reddish purple 
 Zuyder~ze* 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 37 
 
 Except some few words, as assez, chez, nez, sonnez, 
 (two sixes), and some proper names, as Alvarez, Sua- 
 rez, Mete, Senez, Rhodcz, &c. z final is the distinctive 
 mark of almost all the second persons plural in the 
 French verbs, where it is generally heard, when followed 
 by a word beginning with a vowel, or h mute, otherwise 
 it is only sounded in the proper names already mentioned. 
 
 Z is doubled in a few words taken from the Italian lan- 
 guage, as lazzi, (dumb show), mezzanine, mezzo terming 
 mezzo-tinto, and in some names of towns, or provinces, 
 as Arezzo, PAbruzze, &c. 
 
 OF GENDER. 
 
 Gender in all languages marks the distinction of sex, 
 and as there are only two of these, the French agree- 
 ably to this view have but two genders, the masculine 
 and feminine : the neuter they do not admit. 
 
 The masculine gender expresses the male kind, as un 
 komme, a man : un lion, a lion. 
 
 The feminine gender denotes the female kind, as une 
 femme, a woman ; une lionne, a lionness. 
 
 The gender of nouns, in inanimate objects, is gene- 
 rally expressed by their termination ; thus, final e mute 
 is the distinctive mark of the feminine gender, every 
 other final letter is the sign of the masculine. This 
 would be an excellent rule, were it universal ; but 
 this is far from being the case from the number of ex- 
 ceptions, and it is with the intention of affording the learn- 
 er a tolerable clue on this head, that we have here laid 
 down the following concise rules, which will clear up 
 some of the chief difficulties. 
 
38 
 
 THE GENDERS 
 
 A TABLE OF SUBSTANTIVES 
 
 That are Masculine in one signification, and Feminine hi 
 
 another. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Assistant, helper 
 
 Aide 
 
 eagle ; a great genius 
 
 aigle 
 
 an angel 
 
 ange 
 
 an alder-tree 
 
 aune 
 
 barb, a Barbary horse 
 
 barbe 
 
 bard, a poet 
 
 barde 
 
 red-breast 
 
 berce 
 
 a sort of privateer 
 
 cdpre 
 
 a scroll, or ornament in ? 
 painting $ 
 
 cartouche 
 
 a caravan, a hoy 
 
 coche 
 
 cornet, a standard-bearer 
 
 cornelte 
 
 a couple, a man and wife 
 
 couple 
 
 Croat, a Croatian soldier 
 
 cravat e 
 
 a crape 
 
 crept 
 
 an echo, the return of > 
 sound ) 
 
 tclto 
 
 ensign, astandard-bear- > 
 er 5 
 
 enseignc - 
 
 example, model, instance 
 
 exemplc 
 
 a gimlet, a piercer 
 
 foret 
 
 a large tun 
 
 fcudre 
 
 keeper, warden 
 
 garde 
 
 hoar-frost 
 
 givre 
 
 the rolls, a register 
 
 trreffe 
 
 gules in heraldry 
 
 queule 
 
 guide, director 
 
 %uide 
 
 heliotrope, sunflower , 
 
 heliotrope 
 
 iris, the rainbow ; iris ) 
 of the eye $ 
 
 
 iris 
 
 lacker, a kind of varnish 
 
 r aque 
 
 a book 
 
 l ivre 
 
 a hat of otter's hair i 
 
 'outre 
 
 handle of a tool i 
 
 nanche 
 
 a labourer i 
 
 naruzuvre 
 
 memoir; a bill 
 
 nemo ire 
 
 thanks > 
 
 nerci 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Aid, help, support 
 a Roman standard 
 a kind of thornb&ck 
 om ell, a sort of measure 
 beard 
 
 a slice of bacon ; 
 horse-armour 
 cow-parsnip 
 caper, an acid pickle 
 
 cartouch, cartridge 
 
 a notch; a sow 
 
 a woman'shead-dresswhen 
 in dishabille 
 a brace, a pair, two of a sort 
 a cravat, a neckcloth 
 a pancake 
 
 Echo, a nymph 
 
 a sign post 
 
 a copy for writing 
 a wood, a forest 
 lightning, thunderbolt 
 watch ; hilt ; nurse 
 
 S a snake, or serpent (in he- 
 
 i ral dry) 
 a graft 
 
 the mouth of beasts 
 rein, for governing a horto 
 heliotrope ; jasper 
 
 < sprig-crystal ; a proper 
 
 ( name 
 lacca, gum-lac 
 a pound 
 an otter 
 
 a sleeve ; English channel 
 the working of a ship 
 memory 
 pity, mercy 
 
 N. B. Ol" this table it is to be remarked, that the French word stands in the 
 middle column, and its signification on the right band and on tbe left. When 
 it has the meaning which stands on the left, it is masculine ; when that which 
 at&ads to the right, it is feminine. 
 
OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 39 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 i 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 mood ; mode 
 
 mode 
 
 fashion 
 
 a pier, or mound 
 
 mole 
 
 mole, moon-calf 
 
 mould, cast, form 
 
 moule 
 
 muscle, a shell-fish 
 
 a ship-boy 
 
 mousse 
 
 moss, a plant 
 
 the philosopher's stone 
 
 ceuvre 
 
 action ; an author's works 
 
 office, business ; prayers 
 
 office 
 
 pantry, larder, buttery 
 
 ombre, a game at cards 
 
 ombre 
 
 shade, shadow 
 
 page of a prince, &c. 
 
 page 
 
 page in a book 
 
 a merry an drew 
 
 paillasse 
 
 a straw-bed 
 
 a hand's breadth 
 
 palrne 
 
 ( the branch of a palm 
 I tree ; victory 
 
 pantomime 
 
 pantomime 
 
 a dumb show 
 
 easter, easter-day 
 
 pdque 
 
 the passover 
 
 a comparison 
 
 parallele 
 
 a parallel line 
 
 pendulum 
 
 pendule 
 
 a clock 
 
 le Perche, in France 
 
 perche 
 
 pole ; perch, a fish 
 
 summit, highest pitch 
 
 periode 
 
 period, epocha 
 
 any body, nobody (a > 
 pronoun) ) 
 
 per sonne 
 
 a person (a houri) 
 
 spade, at cards 
 
 pique 
 
 a pike 
 
 gnatsnapper, a bird 
 
 pivoine 
 
 peony, a flower 
 
 a plane-tree 
 
 plane 
 
 plane, an instrument 
 
 a stove ; a canopy 
 
 poile 
 
 a frying-pan 
 
 post ; a military station 
 
 poste 
 
 the post for letters 
 
 punto at cards 
 
 ponte 
 
 the laying of eggs 
 
 purple colour; purples > 
 (a disease) $ 
 
 pourpre 
 
 purple fish; purple dye 
 
 a pretence 
 
 prktexte 
 
 pretexta [figment 
 
 quadril at cards 
 
 the calling back a hawk 
 
 quadrille 
 
 party of horse in a tour- 
 
 reclame 
 
 a catch-word (in printing) 
 
 rest, relaxation 
 
 rtldche 
 
 harbour [tance 
 
 a glass coach 
 
 remise 
 
 a coach-house; a remit- 
 
 a sort of pear-tree 
 
 sans-peau 
 
 a sort of pear 
 
 Satyr, a sylvan god 
 
 satyre 
 
 a satire, a lampoon 
 
 serpentarius 
 
 serpent aire 
 
 snake-root, dragon's wort 
 
 nap, slumber 
 
 so mine 
 
 sum; load* name of a A- 
 
 a smile 
 
 souris 
 
 a mouse [ver 
 
 a porter 
 
 Suisse 
 
 Switzerland 
 
 holder, a book-keeper 
 
 teneur 
 
 tenor, purport, conterijt 
 
 a tour; turn ; trick 
 
 tour 
 
 tower; rock at chess 
 
 triumph 
 
 triompht 
 
 a trump 
 
 trumpeter 
 
 irompette 
 
 trumpet 
 
 space 
 
 vague 
 
 a wave, surge 
 
 a vase, vessel 
 
 vase 
 
 ( the slime in ponds, 
 I lakes, &c. 
 
 a bat of vigonia wool 
 
 vigogne 
 
 a vigon, a llama 
 
 a veil 
 
 voile 
 
 a sail 
 
40 THE GENDERS 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES DENOTING SPECIES, 
 
 which have a fixed Gender independently of termination. 
 
 1 
 
 21 
 
 3 
 
 ( God, his angels, cherubim and seraphim, are of 
 
 I masculine gender. 
 
 All terms seeming to constitute an appellation, and 
 all proper names of men and women are of the gen- 
 der of the sex to which they respectively belong, as 
 are likewise all names of animals, when the male is 
 distinguished from the female by a different denomi- 
 nation ; but when the same name is used for both 
 male and female, as un elephant, un zebre, une pan- 
 there, un vauiour, un cygne, une caille, une perdrix, 
 un barbeau, une truite, un congre, its gender must 
 then, like that of any inanimate object, be determin- 
 ed by its termination. Here the only difficulty re- 
 spects substantives ending in e mute, all the rest be- 
 ing of the masculine gender, with such exceptions as 
 will be seen in page 45. 
 
 All diminutives of animals, when there is but one 
 common denomination for both sexes, are of the 
 masculine gender, whatever may be the gender of 
 the original from which they are derived, as un lion- 
 ceau, un souriceau, un perdreau, un cornillas, un 
 carpillon, un couleuvreau, un vipereau, un becasseau, 
 &c. except une becassine ; but these two latter, 
 although derived from the word becasse, and belong- 
 ing to the genus, are not of the same species. In 
 other cases, the diminutives follow the gender their 
 eex indicates, as un poulain, une pouliche, vn cochet, 
 une poulette. 
 
 Diminutives of inanimate objects more generally 
 follow the gender of their roots, as batelet, maison- 
 nette, globule, from bateau, maison, globe, &c. how- 
 ever, corbillon, soliveau, cruchon, savonneite, trout- 
 seau, from corbeille, solive, cruche, savon, and trous- 
 
 ^8e, and many others do not. 
 
OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 41 
 
 ' All the names of the days, months, and seasons of 
 the year, are of the masculine gender, except au- 
 tomne, which is of both genders ; when, however, 
 the diminutive mi (half) is prefixed to the name of a 
 month, the compound word then takes the feminine 
 gender, as la mi-mai, la mi-aout, &c, except also la 
 mi-car ime and saint- days, as la saint- Jean, la Tous- 
 saint, &c. 
 
 of trees, except yeuse, a sort of " 
 oak, 
 
 of shrubs, with some exceptions, 
 
 6 All names 
 
 7 All names < 
 
 of metals, without excepting/>/a- 
 tine, formerly feminine. 
 
 of minerals, a few excepted, 
 
 of colours, without excepting 
 VIsabelle,leFeuille-morte, &c. 
 though they have a feminine 
 termination, 
 
 of mountains, except those 1 
 chains which have no singular, 
 
 are 
 ► mascu* 
 
 line. 
 
 of winds, except la bise, la tra- 
 montane, la bnse, and les 
 moussons, 
 
 of towns, except those which 
 necessarily take the article la 
 before them, as la Rochelle, la 
 Ferte-sur-Aube, &c. and some 
 others, 
 
 are 
 ► mascu 
 line. 
 
42 THE GENDERS 
 
 Ordinal, distributive and proportional numbers, 
 adjectives and infinitives of verbs, prepositions and 
 adverbs, all these, when used substantively, are 
 masculine, as le tiers, le quart, un cinquitme, le qua- 
 druple, le beau, le sublime, le boire, le manger, le 
 mieux, le pour, le contre, un parallele (a compari- 
 son), &c. except la moitie, and the elliptical forms 
 of speech, une courbe, une tangente, une perpendicu- 
 laire y une parallele, une antique, used for une ligne 
 courbe, une ligne tangente, &c. Antique is feminine, 
 for the same reason ; the word medaille, or statue 
 „ appearing to be understood. 
 
 g < All names of virtues are of the feminine gender, 
 I except courage, merit e. 
 
 Si 
 
 GENDERS OP NOUNS MOSTLY DEPENDING ON THEIR 
 TERMINATION* 
 
 !It will be recollected that final e mute constitutes 
 the feminine gender, and every other final letter the 
 masculine. 
 
 All names of states, empires, kingdoms, and 
 provinces, are of the gender which their termi- 
 nations indicate ; except le Bengale, le Meocique, 
 le Peloponese, le Maine, le Perche, le Rouergue, le 
 Bigorre, le Tallage, la Franche-comte, and perhaps 
 
 ,a few more. 
 
 f The names of fruits, grain, plants, and flowers, 
 12 ) follow pretty generally the gender of their termi- 
 
 \ nations, but there are too many exceptions to be in- 
 
 \ troduced here. 
 
 ni 
 
OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 4S 
 
 TABLE 
 
 SHEWING THE GENDER OF ALL WORDS THAT DO NOT END IN 
 6 MUTE. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 11 
 
 40 
 
 15 
 
 30 
 
 10 
 
 200 
 
 6 
 3 
 
 100 
 
 200 
 
 f Aparte\ arrete, be 
 
 nidicit£, comte, 
 < cote, £te, pate\ 
 
 traite, t£, the, 
 
 Lethe" 
 
 alibi, biribi, lundi, 
 grand merci, 
 
 ( alibi 
 
 convoi, efFroi, &c. 
 ergo, vertigo, indi- 
 go, he. 
 
 fichu, cru, £cu, tis- 
 su, he. 
 
 aloyau, anneau, he. 
 he. 
 
 ( bref, chalef, chef, 
 ( fief, grief, relief 
 ( daim, essaim, abat- 
 l faim 
 
 San, ban, cran, e- 
 cran, pan, he. 
 ^bain, baise-main, 
 avant-raain, garde- 
 J main, tourne-main 
 J essuie-main, gain 
 ^frein, basin, he. 
 
 { amitte, inimide\ 
 \ moiti£, pitie* 
 
 absurdite, beauts, 
 charity, cite\ dig- 
 nit6, fidelity, g6n£- 
 rosit£, he. he. 
 
 Fournii, 'merci, 
 gagui, apres-midi 
 
 foi, loi, paroi 
 
 albugo, virago 
 
 bru, glu, tribu, 
 
 vertu 
 
 eau, peau, surpeau, 
 
 sans-peau 
 
 •i 
 
 clef, nef , soif 
 faim, male-faim 
 maman 
 
 in fin, main, nonnain 
 
 30 
 
 scion, bastion, 
 tion, Ixion 
 
 bes- 
 
 ' gabion, taudion, 
 million, lion, ard6 
 lion, fourmilion, 
 tr^mion, capion, 
 turion, oamion, 
 lampion, septen- 
 trion, brimborion, 
 
 k gavion, &c. 
 
 -cion 
 •^ion 
 -tion 
 -gion 
 -nion 
 -xioo 
 
 succion, cession, 
 friction, gestion, 
 region, opinion, 
 reflexion, fluxion, 
 he* he. he. 
 
 rebellion, dent-de- % 
 lion, alluvion > 
 
 5X50 
 
 1100 
 
44 
 
 THE GENDERS 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 8 
 
 11 
 
 15 
 
 4 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 150 
 
 70 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 700 
 
 260 
 
 alcyon, clayon, cra- 
 yon, rayon, sayon, 
 trayon, lamproyon, 
 Amphictyons 
 
 brise-raison 
 
 peson, bison, gri- 
 | son, groison, hori- 
 zon, tison, oison, 
 I poison, contre-poi- 
 fc son, buson 
 
 f basson, caisson, ca- 
 
 j vesson, taisson, po- 
 
 I isson, cosson, buis 
 
 J son, frisson, heris- 
 
 son, maudisson 
 
 nourrisson, palis 
 
 son, polisson, unis- 
 
 son, saucisson 
 
 < arcanson, echan- 
 \ son, tenson, pinson 
 
 ( charancon,cavecon 
 I pin9on, sucon, &.c. 
 
 brrdon, gueridon, he. 
 
 tendron, jeune ten- 
 dron, baron, he. 
 
 abattis, appentis, 
 iris, tourne-vis, he. 
 
 C bois, mois,carquois. 
 ( harnois, he. 
 
 Sadent, chiendent, 
 liondent, claque- 
 \ dent, cure-dent, oc- 
 ( cident, trident, he. 
 
 ( acharnement, as- 
 \ sortiment,&c. 
 
 "ballet, billet, bos- 
 quet, minuit, con- 
 i duit,reduit, he. bil- 
 j lot,brul©t, coraplot, 
 he. bout, gout, ra- 
 gout, he. 
 
 ^ir 
 
 -yon 
 
 y -sson 
 
 -gon 
 
 -don 
 
 •Ion 
 -ron 
 
 -dent ) 
 -gent $ 
 
 -ment 
 
 cargaison, he. he. 
 
 garnison, gue>ison, 
 prison, trahison, j 
 cloison,foison, moi- 
 son, pamoison, toi- \ 
 son, camuson 
 
 30 
 
 paisson, boisson 
 moisson, cuisson 
 salisson, mousson 
 
 : S 
 
 chanson 
 
 fa^on, contrefac.on, ' 
 lecon, 
 
 raalfacon. 
 
 rancon 
 
 dondon 
 
 laideron, 
 tatillon 
 
 souillon, i 
 
 brebis, souris, chau- 
 ve-souris, vis, iris 
 
 fois 
 
 dent, surdent, gent 
 jument 
 
 foret, nuit, dot, glout 
 
OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 45 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 i 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 15 
 
 20 
 
 40 
 
 900 
 
 faix, choix, cruci- 
 I fix, prix, &c. taux, 
 i houx, courroux, e- 
 
 poux, &.C 
 
 art, depart, cham- 
 | part, rempart, ef- 
 fort, port, fort, tort, 
 &c. 
 
 fer, ver, hiver, &c. 
 air, Eclair, &c. tour, 
 contour, four, &c. 
 
 "bonheur, malheur, 
 labeur, honneur, 
 deshonneur, cceur, 
 anticceur, creve- 
 cceur,chceur,chou- 
 fleur, pleurs,equa- 
 teur, secteur, &c. 
 &c. &c. 
 
 paix, croix, noix, 
 poix>voix,perdrix, 
 chaux, faux, toux 
 
 hart,part,mort,ma- 
 lemort 
 
 cuiller, mer, chair, ) 
 cour, tour $ 
 
 aigreur, ampleur, ar- 
 deur, blancheur, can- 
 deur, chaleur, chan- 
 deleur, clameur, cou- 
 leur, douceur, dou- 
 leur, epaisseur, er- 
 reur, fadeur, defa- 
 veur, ferveur, fleur. 
 
 76 
 
 passe-fleur, sans -fleur, fraicheur, frayeur, froideur, fureur, gran- 
 deur, grosseur, hauteur, horreur, humeur, laideur, langueur, lar- 
 ge ur, lenteur, liqueur, longueur, lourdeur, lueur, maigreur, moi- 
 teur, noirceur, odeur, paieur, pesanteur, peur, primeur, profon- 
 deur, puanteur, pudeur, impudeur, rigueur, roideur, rondeur, 
 rougeur, rousseur, rumeur, saveur, senteur, soeur, souleur, splenl 
 deur, sueur, teneur, terreur, tiedeur, torpeur, touffeur, tumeur, 
 valeur, non- valeur, vapeur, verdeur, vigueur, and mceurs ; be- 
 sides basseur, rancoeur, tremeur, three words now obsolete, making 
 in the whole the number of seventy-six. 
 
 There are a great many proper names of females, which 
 though they may not have the feminine termination, are of that 
 gender, as the learner, from their nature, will easily comprehend 
 such are, among the heathens, Pnllas, Ctrts, Thltis, Vtnus, Ju'- 
 non, Dxdon, &c ; amongchristian names, Sarah, Deborah, Elizabeth, 
 Agnte, &c. and many of these are contractions, as Fanchon for 
 Fanny, Lison, Louixon, Marion, Manon, Nanon, Jeanneton, Ma- 
 delon, Tonlon, Cataut, Margot, Golon, Babet, Babeau, Isabeau 
 &c. [See Article 2. p. 40.] 
 
 As this list of exceptions will be found pretty accurate, all 
 other nouns, that belong to this termination, must be strictly con- 
 sidered as being of the masculine gender, since they are not enu- 
 merated in this Table. 
 
A 
 VOCABULARY 
 
 FRENCH AND ENGLISH. 
 
 *#* In the following Vocabulary, the Gender has been affixed 
 only to those Nouns that are not comprised in the preceding 
 Rules. 
 
 
 Of the Universe in General. 
 
 
 Dieu 
 
 God 
 
 soleil 
 
 sun 
 
 cr^ateur 
 
 creator 
 
 rayon du soleil 
 
 sun-beam 
 
 Jesus -Christ 
 
 Jesus Christ 
 
 lune 
 
 moon 
 
 trinite 
 
 trinity 
 
 Eclipse 
 
 eclipse 
 
 Saint-Esprit 
 
 Holy Ghost 
 
 orage, m. 
 
 storm 
 
 ange 
 
 angel 
 
 tonnerre, m 
 
 thunder 
 
 arcbange 
 
 archangel 
 
 Eclair 
 
 lightning 
 
 prophete 
 
 prophet 
 
 brouillard 
 
 f°g 
 
 messie 
 
 messiah 
 
 pluie 
 
 rain 
 
 sauveur 
 
 saviour 
 
 arc-en-ciel 
 
 rain-bovo 
 
 r^dempteur 
 
 redeemer 
 
 on dee 
 
 shower 
 
 Vierge-Marie 
 
 Virgin Mary 
 
 neige 
 
 snow 
 
 apotre 
 
 apostle 
 
 grele 
 
 hail 
 
 £vangel!ste 
 
 evangelist 
 
 glace 
 
 ice 
 
 martyr 
 
 martyr 
 
 gelee 
 
 frost 
 
 saint 
 
 saint 
 
 cUgel 
 
 thaw 
 
 paradis 
 
 paradise 
 
 rosee 
 
 dew 
 
 ciel 
 
 heaven 
 
 creature 
 
 creature 
 
 enfer 
 
 hell 
 
 globe, m. 
 
 globe 
 
 diable 
 
 devil 
 
 sphere 
 
 sphere 
 
 nature 
 
 nature 
 
 hemisphere, m. 
 
 hemisphere 
 
 univers 
 
 universe 
 
 horizon 
 
 horizon 
 
 monde, m. 
 
 world 
 
 degre" 
 
 degree 
 
 eminent 
 
 element 
 
 longitude 
 
 longitude 
 
 terre 
 
 earth 
 
 latitude 
 
 latitude 
 
 eau 
 feu 
 
 water 
 fire 
 
 points cardi- } 
 naux, pi. J 
 
 I cardinal points 
 
 air 
 
 air 
 
 orient, or est 
 
 east 
 
 firmament 
 e"toile 
 
 sky 
 star 
 
 Occident, or < 
 ouest < 
 
 >wett 
 
 plan£te 
 
 planet 
 
 septentrion, or < 
 
 y north 
 
 com^.te 
 
 comet 
 
 nord J 
 
 
 constellation 
 
 constellation 
 
 midi, or sud 
 
 south 
 

 VOCABULARY. 
 
 47 
 
 climat 
 
 climate 
 
 r£cif* 
 
 reef of rocks 
 
 region 
 continent 
 
 region 
 continent 
 
 brisans* 
 
 } breakers, 
 I surf 
 
 Europe 
 
 Europe 
 
 cime 
 
 top 
 
 Asie 
 
 Asia 
 
 pierre 
 
 stone 
 
 Afrique 
 
 Africa 
 
 pont 
 
 bridge 
 
 Am£rique 
 
 America 
 
 chauss£e 
 
 causeway 
 
 empire, m. 
 
 empire 
 
 gue" 
 
 ford 
 
 royaume, m. 
 
 kingdom 
 
 quai 
 
 warf, or quay 
 
 republique 
 
 republic 
 
 route 
 
 road 
 
 pays 
 
 country 
 
 sentier 
 
 path 
 
 colonie 
 
 colony 
 
 fosse" 
 
 ditch 
 
 principaute 
 
 principality 
 
 gravier 
 
 gravel 
 
 £lectorat 
 
 electorate 
 
 sable, m. 
 
 sand 
 
 province 
 
 province 
 
 sablon 
 
 small sand 
 
 comte 
 
 shire or county 
 
 poussiere 
 
 dust 
 
 lie 
 
 island 
 
 ocean 
 
 ocean 
 
 presqu'ile 
 
 ) 
 
 mer 
 
 sea 
 
 p^ninsule 
 
 ^peninsula 
 
 golfe, rn. 
 
 gulf 
 
 chersonese 
 
 s 
 
 baie 
 
 bay- 
 
 cap 
 
 cape 
 
 rade 
 
 road {for ships) 
 
 promontoire, 
 
 m. promontory 
 
 anse 
 
 creek 
 
 isthme, m. 
 
 isthmw 
 
 canal 
 
 channel 
 
 montagne 
 
 mountain 
 
 d^troit 
 
 strait 
 
 mont 
 
 mount 
 
 courant 
 
 current 
 
 colline 
 
 hill 
 
 maree 
 
 tide 
 
 sommet 
 
 summit 
 
 flux 
 
 flowing 
 
 pente, or 
 penchant 
 hauteur 
 
 > declivity 
 
 reflux 
 vague 
 
 ebbing 
 wave 
 
 eminence 
 
 flots, pi. or 
 
 billowe 
 
 vallee 
 
 valley 
 
 ondes, pi. 
 
 waves 
 
 vallon 
 
 vale 
 
 havre, m. 
 
 haven 
 
 pblme, m. 
 
 abyss 
 
 port 
 
 harbour 
 
 desert 
 
 desert 
 
 lac 
 
 lake 
 
 plaine 
 
 plain 
 
 riviere 
 
 river 
 
 marais 
 
 marsh, or fin 
 
 fleuve, m. 
 
 great river 
 
 rive 
 
 > bank (of a 
 j river) 
 
 embouchure 
 
 ) mouth of a 
 J river 
 
 rivage, m. 
 
 shore 
 
 ruisseau 
 
 brook 
 
 cote 
 
 coast 
 
 d£bordement 
 
 overflow 
 
 rocher* 
 
 rock 
 
 deluge, m. 
 
 deluge 
 
 roche* 
 
 rock 
 
 inondation 
 
 inundation 
 
 rod* 
 
 rock 
 
 £cluse 
 
 ) flood-gate 
 
 £cueil* 
 
 shoal 
 
 $ sluice 
 
 banc* 
 
 ledge of rocks 
 
 digue 
 
 dike 
 
 # These seven words do not convey in French the same idea : 
 «oe four latter relate to the sea. 
 
48 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 e*tang 
 
 pond 
 
 nuage, m. 
 
 cloud 
 
 vivier 
 
 fish-pond 
 
 nielle 
 
 blight 
 
 reservoir 
 
 bason 
 
 humidite 
 
 dampness 
 
 abreuvoir 
 
 horse-pond 
 
 serein 
 
 mildew 
 
 bain 
 
 bath 
 
 tourbillon 
 
 whirlwind 
 
 citerne 
 
 cistern 
 
 orage, m. 
 
 storm 
 
 fontaine 
 
 fountain 
 
 tempete 
 
 tempest 
 
 source 
 
 spring 
 
 calme, m. 
 
 calm 
 
 puits 
 
 well 
 
 eternite 
 
 eternity 
 
 pompe 
 
 pump 
 
 temps 
 
 time 
 
 bateau 
 
 boat 
 
 siecle, m. 
 
 age or century 
 
 barque 
 
 bark 
 
 epoque 
 
 epoch 
 
 bac 
 
 ferry boat 
 
 pdriode, m. 
 
 period 
 
 coche d'eau, m. barge 
 
 date 
 
 date 
 
 gab are 
 
 lighter 
 
 an, ann£e 
 
 year 
 
 navire, m. 
 
 ship 
 
 mois 
 
 month 
 
 vaisseau 
 
 vessel 
 
 Janvier 
 
 January 
 
 paquet-bot 
 
 packet-boat 
 
 fevrier 
 
 february 
 
 flamme 
 
 blaze 
 
 mars 
 
 march 
 
 etincelle 
 
 spark 
 
 avril 
 
 april 
 
 ehaleur 
 
 heat 
 
 mai 
 
 may 
 
 fum£e 
 
 smoke 
 
 juin 
 
 june 
 
 incendie, m. 
 
 conflagration 
 
 juillet 
 
 July 
 
 chauffage, m. 
 
 fuel 
 
 aout 
 
 august 
 
 charbon 
 
 coals 
 
 septembre 
 
 September 
 
 charbon-de- 
 
 > pit-coal 
 
 octobre 
 
 October 
 
 terre 
 
 novembre 
 
 november 
 
 charbon- de- 
 bois 
 
 > charcoal 
 
 ddcembre 
 semaine 
 
 december 
 week 
 
 braise 
 
 small coal 
 
 jour 
 
 day 
 
 tourbe 
 
 turf 
 
 journ^e 
 
 day 
 
 mottes, pi. 
 
 peat 
 
 aujourd'hui 
 
 to-day 
 
 bois 
 
 wood 
 
 demain 
 
 to-morrow 
 
 buche 
 
 log of wood 
 
 hier 
 
 yesterday 
 
 fagot 
 
 faggot 
 
 lundi 
 
 monday 
 
 coupeaux, pi. 
 
 chips 
 
 mardi 
 
 tuesday 
 
 cendre 
 
 ashes 
 
 mercredi 
 
 Wednesday 
 
 suie 
 
 soot 
 
 jeudi 
 
 thursday 
 
 feu 
 
 fire 
 
 vendredi 
 
 friday 
 
 atmosphere 
 
 atmosphere 
 
 samedi 
 
 Saturday 
 
 vent 
 
 wind 
 
 dimanche 
 
 sunday 
 
 eephyr 
 
 zephyr 
 
 heure 
 
 hour 
 
 vapeur 
 
 vapour 
 
 demi-heure 
 
 half an hour 
 
 lumTwre 
 t^nebres, pi. 
 
 light 
 darkness 
 
 quart- d' heure 
 
 C quarter of an 
 I hour 
 
 ehaleur 
 
 heat 
 
 aurore 
 
 aurora 
 
 froid 
 
 cold 
 
 aube 
 
 dawn 
 
 cue, nude 
 
 cloud 
 
 matin 
 
 morning 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 49 
 
 matinee 
 
 midi 
 
 l'apres-midi 
 
 Papres-dinee 
 
 soir 
 
 soiree 
 
 crepuscule m. 
 
 nuit 
 
 minuit 
 
 minute 
 
 seconite 
 
 moment 
 
 instant 
 
 saison 
 
 printemps 
 
 ete 
 
 automne 
 
 hiver 
 
 forenoon 
 noon 
 
 > the afternoon 
 
 > evening 
 
 twilight 
 
 night 
 
 midnight 
 
 minute 
 
 second 
 
 moment 
 
 instant 
 
 season 
 
 spring 
 
 summer 
 
 autumn 
 
 winter 
 
 earn aval 
 
 careme, ?n. 
 
 mi-careme 
 
 paque 
 
 pentecote 
 
 la Saint-Jean 
 
 l'avent 
 
 noel 
 
 fete 
 
 equinoxe, m. 
 
 solstice, m. 
 
 canicule 
 
 fenaison 
 
 moisson 
 
 vendage 
 
 tonte 
 
 semailles, pi. 
 
 conge 
 
 carnival 
 lent - 
 
 midlent 
 easier 
 
 whit-sunday 
 midsummer 
 advent 
 Christmas 
 festival 
 equinox 
 the solstice 
 the dog- days 
 hay -harvest 
 harvest 
 vintage 
 shearing4imt 
 sowing-time 
 holiday 
 
 OF MAN. 
 
 genre-humain 
 
 homme 
 
 femme 
 
 sexe 
 
 enfant 
 
 garc,on 
 
 fille 
 
 vierge 
 
 virgin ite 
 
 entance 
 
 jeunesse 
 
 adolescence 
 
 virilite 
 
 vieillesse 
 
 decrepitude 
 
 jeune homme 
 
 jeune fille 
 
 vieillard 
 
 geant 
 
 nain 
 
 pigme'e, m. 
 
 mari 
 
 femme 
 
 veuf 
 
 *euve 
 
 mankind 
 
 man 
 
 woman 
 
 sex 
 
 child 
 
 boy 
 
 girl 
 
 virgin 
 
 virginity 
 
 infancy 
 
 youth 
 
 adolescence 
 
 manhood 
 
 old age 
 
 decrepitude 
 
 youth or lad 
 
 young girl 
 
 old man 
 
 giant 
 
 dwarf 
 
 pigmy 
 
 husband 
 
 wife 
 
 widawer 
 
 widow 
 
 orphelin 
 
 orpheline 
 
 be'ritier 
 
 h^ritierc 
 
 maitre 
 
 maitresse 
 
 hote 
 
 hotes.se 
 
 domestique 
 
 servante 
 
 compagnon 
 
 compagne 
 
 corps 
 
 rnembre, m. 
 tronc 
 tete 
 
 crane, m. 
 front 
 
 visage, m. 
 traits, pi. 
 
 orphan (boy\ 
 orphan (girl) 
 heir 
 htiress 
 master 
 mistress 
 landlord 
 landlady 
 man servant 
 maid servant 
 neighbour 
 ( neighbour 
 I (female) 
 companion 
 
 S companion 
 (female 
 
 body 
 
 member 
 
 trunk 
 
 head 
 
 scull 
 forehead 
 face 
 feature* 
 
ceil 
 yeux, pi. 
 
 eye 
 eyes 
 
 iiULAKI. 
 
 cerveau 
 cervelle 
 
 { brain 
 
 sourcils, pi. 
 
 eye-brows 
 
 squelette, m. 
 
 skeleton 
 
 paupiere 
 
 eye- lid 
 
 cceur 
 
 heart 
 
 nez 
 
 nose 
 
 poumon 
 
 lungs 
 
 narines, pi. 
 
 nostrils 
 
 foie, m. 
 
 liver 
 
 bouche 
 
 mouth 
 
 rate 
 
 spleen 
 
 levres, pi. 
 
 lips 
 
 estomac 
 
 stomach 
 
 dent 
 
 tooth 
 
 entrailles, pi. 
 
 entrails 
 
 gencives, pi. 
 
 gums 
 
 sang 
 
 blood 
 
 machoire 
 
 jaw-bont 
 
 humeurs, pi. 
 
 humours 
 
 langue 
 
 tongue 
 
 glande 
 
 gland 5 
 
 pala.is 
 
 palate 
 
 poil 
 
 hair 
 
 joues, pi. 
 
 cheeks 
 
 chair 
 
 flesh 
 
 fossette 
 
 dimple 
 
 peau 
 
 skin 
 
 menton 
 
 chin 
 
 pores, m. pi. 
 
 pores 
 
 barbe 
 
 beard 
 
 nerf 
 
 nerve 
 
 tempes, pi. 
 
 temples 
 
 artere 
 
 artery 
 
 oreille 
 
 car 
 
 veiue 
 
 vein 
 
 cheveax, pi. 
 
 hair 
 
 OS 
 
 bone 
 
 cou 
 
 neck 
 
 moelle 
 
 marrow 
 
 gosier 
 
 throat 
 
 ride 
 
 wrinkle 
 
 sein 
 
 bosom 
 
 bouton 
 
 pimple 
 
 mamelle 
 
 breast 
 
 sante 
 
 health 
 
 ventre, m. 
 
 belly 
 
 temperament 
 
 constitution 
 
 ceinture 
 
 waist 
 
 embonpoint 
 
 plumpness 
 
 cote 
 
 side 
 
 maigreur 
 
 leanness 
 
 hanche 
 
 haunch 
 
 teint 
 
 complexion 
 
 cuisses, pi. 
 
 (highs 
 
 rougeur 
 
 redness 
 
 genou 
 
 knee 
 
 paleur 
 
 paleness 
 
 j arret 
 
 ham 
 
 port 
 
 countenance 
 
 rotule 
 
 knee*pan 
 
 demarche 
 
 gait 
 
 jambe 
 
 leg 
 
 geste, m. 
 
 gesture 
 
 mollet 
 
 calf of the leg 
 
 vivacite 
 
 liveliness 
 
 pied 
 
 foot 
 
 enjoument 
 
 sprightliness 
 
 talon 
 
 heel 
 
 gaiety 
 
 gaity 
 
 orteil 
 
 toe 
 
 beaute* 
 
 beauty 
 
 bras 
 
 arm 
 
 charmes, m. pi 
 
 . charms 
 
 coude, 7ii. 
 
 elbow 
 
 attraits, pi. 
 
 attractions 
 
 aisselle 
 
 the arm-pit 
 
 appas,p/. 
 
 beauties 
 
 epaule 
 
 shoulder 
 
 agrement 
 
 pleasantness 
 
 main 
 
 hand 
 
 laideur 
 
 deformity 
 
 poing 
 
 fist 
 
 taille 
 
 shape, size 
 
 poignet 
 
 wrist 
 
 voix 
 
 voice 
 
 doigt 
 
 finger 
 
 parole 
 
 speech 
 
 pouce, m. 
 
 thumb 
 
 silence, m. 
 
 silence 
 
 ongle, m. 
 
 nail 
 
 action 
 
 action 
 
 c6te 
 
 rib 
 
 mouvement 
 
 motion 
 

 VOCABULARY. 
 
 i 
 
 repoa 
 
 rest 
 
 vertige m. 
 
 dizziness 
 
 grimace 
 
 grimace 
 
 evanouisse- 
 
 > swooning 
 
 ris, rire m. 
 
 laughter 
 
 ment 
 
 souris 
 
 > smile 
 
 defaillauce 
 
 fainting 
 
 sourire m. 
 
 faiblesse 
 
 swoon 
 
 humeur 
 
 ill temper 
 
 deraangeaison 
 
 itching 
 
 soupir 
 
 sigh 
 
 pesanteur 
 
 heaviness 
 
 g^missement 
 
 groan 
 
 engourdisse- 
 
 > numbness 
 
 assoupisse- 
 ment 
 
 > drowsiness 
 
 ment 
 insomnie 
 
 toant of sleep 
 
 sonimeil 
 
 sleep 
 
 coup 
 
 blow 
 
 songe m. 
 
 vision 
 
 contre-coup 
 
 counter-blow 
 
 reve m. 
 
 dream 
 
 egratignure 
 
 scratch 
 
 souffle m. 
 
 blast 
 
 ecorchure 
 
 excoriation 
 
 haleine 
 
 breath 
 
 entorse 
 
 sprain 
 
 respiration 
 
 respiration 
 
 foulure 
 
 strain 
 
 £lernuement 
 
 sneezing 
 
 enflure 
 
 swelling 
 
 yue 
 
 sight 
 
 tumeur 
 
 tumour 
 
 ouie 
 
 hearing 
 
 meurtrissure 
 
 bruise 
 
 odorat 
 
 smell 
 
 contusion 
 
 contusion 
 
 gout 
 
 taste 
 
 blessure 
 
 wound 
 
 toucher 
 
 touch 
 
 cicatrice 
 
 scar 
 
 sentiment 
 
 sense 
 
 ulcere in. 
 
 ulcer 
 
 obscurite 
 
 darkness 
 
 gangrene 
 
 mortification 
 
 ombre 
 
 shade 
 
 coupure 
 
 cut 
 
 son 
 
 sound 
 
 brulure 
 
 burn 
 
 bruit 
 
 noise 
 
 cor 
 
 corn 
 
 odeur 
 
 smell 
 
 durillon 
 
 callosity 
 
 puanteur 
 
 stench 
 
 enrouement 
 
 hoarseness 
 
 saveur 
 
 relish 
 
 rhume m. 
 
 cold 
 
 sensations pi. 
 
 sensations 
 
 toux 
 
 cough 
 
 chatouillemenl 
 
 tickling 
 
 coqueluche 
 
 hooping-cough 
 
 plaisir 
 
 pleasure 
 
 surdite 
 
 deafness 
 
 joie 
 
 joy 
 
 freoesie 
 
 frenzy 
 
 douleur 
 
 pain 
 
 folie 
 
 lunacy 
 
 faim 
 
 hunger 
 
 rage 
 
 madness 
 
 soif 
 
 thirst 
 
 goutte 
 
 gout 
 
 dugout 
 
 surfeit 
 
 convulsions;;/ 
 
 convulsive-fits 
 
 maladie 
 
 disease 
 
 vapeurs pi. 
 
 vapours 
 
 mal 
 
 complaint 
 
 fievre 
 
 fever 
 
 incommodite* 
 
 illness 
 
 frisson 
 
 shivering 
 
 infirmity 
 
 infirmity 
 
 acces 
 
 p 
 
 indisposition 
 
 disorder 
 
 ddlire m. 
 
 delirium 
 
 mal-de-dents 
 
 tooth-ache 
 
 crise 
 
 crisis 
 
 mal-de-tete 
 
 head-ache 
 
 m£decine 
 
 physic 
 
 mal-aux-ycux 
 
 ( complaint in 
 \ the eyes 
 
 me'decin 
 
 physician 
 
 
 cbirurgien 
 
 surgeon 
 
 migraine 
 
 megrim 
 
 apothicaire 
 6 
 
 apothecary 
 
 51 
 
52 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 accoucheur 
 
 «age«femrne 
 
 consultation 
 
 ordonnance 
 
 remede m. 
 
 drogues pi. 
 
 po ud res pL 
 
 pillules/*/. 
 
 saignee 
 
 lancette 
 
 gouttes pi. 
 
 bain 
 
 man-midwife 
 
 midwife 
 
 consultation 
 
 prescription 
 
 remedy 
 
 drugs 
 
 powders 
 
 pills 
 
 bleeding 
 
 lined 
 
 drops 
 
 bath 
 
 regime m. 
 
 sirop 
 
 agonie 
 
 mort 
 
 cadavre m. 
 
 vie 
 
 gu orison 
 
 rechute 
 
 symptome m. 
 
 convalescence 
 
 diet 
 
 syrup 
 
 dying how 
 
 death 
 
 corpse 
 
 life 
 
 recovery 
 
 relapse 
 
 symptom 
 k fair way of 
 ( recovery 
 
 OF THE MIND AND ITS FACULTIES. 
 
 &me 
 
 soul 
 
 souvenir - 
 
 esprit 
 
 mind 
 
 oubli 
 
 genie m. 
 
 genius 
 
 slupidite 
 
 raison 
 
 reason 
 
 passions pi. 
 
 entendement 
 
 understanding 
 
 affections/?/. 
 
 jugement 
 
 judgment 
 
 amour 
 
 sens 
 
 sense 
 
 amours/, pi. 
 
 pensee 
 
 thought 
 
 haine 
 
 idee 
 
 idea 
 
 desir 
 
 imagination 
 
 imagination 
 
 crainte. peur 
 
 fantaisie 
 
 fancy 
 
 apprehension 
 
 caprice m. 
 
 caprice 
 
 esp ranee 
 
 volonte 
 
 will 
 
 confianee 
 
 liberte 
 
 liberty 
 
 honte 
 
 bel-esprit 
 
 wit 
 
 timidite 
 
 opinion 
 
 opinion 
 
 h a rd i esse 
 
 sentiment 
 
 sentiment 
 
 assurance 
 
 verite 
 
 truth 
 
 coiere 
 
 erreur 
 
 error 
 
 courroux 
 
 vraisemblance 
 
 likelihood 
 
 fureur 
 
 probabilite 
 
 probability 
 
 rage 
 
 apparence 
 
 appearance 
 
 ressentiment 
 
 me prise 
 
 mistake 
 
 vengeance 
 
 bevue 
 
 oversight 
 
 depit 
 
 science 
 
 science 
 
 d«plaisir 
 
 connaissance 
 
 knowledge 
 
 tristesse 
 
 penetration 
 
 penetration 
 
 chagrin 
 
 sagacity 
 
 sagacity 
 
 peine 
 
 disposition 
 
 disposition 
 
 d£sespoir 
 
 inclination 
 
 inclination 
 
 doute m. 
 
 capacite* 
 
 capacity 
 
 soupcon 
 
 m^moire 
 
 memory 
 
 envie 
 
 remembrance 
 for gelf illness 
 stupidity 
 passions 
 affections 
 love 
 
 amours 
 hatred 
 desire 
 fear 
 
 apprehension 
 hope 
 
 confidence 
 shame 
 bash fulness 
 boldness 
 confidence 
 anger 
 id rath 
 
 f ir y 
 
 rage 
 
 resentment 
 
 revenge 
 
 spite 
 
 displeasure 
 
 sadness 
 
 g™f 
 
 sorrow 
 
 despair 
 
 doubt 
 
 suspicion 
 
 envy 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 53 
 
 jalousie 
 pi tie 
 
 misericorde 
 
 compassion 
 
 terreur 
 
 epouvante 
 
 indignation 
 
 verta 
 
 charite 
 
 justice 
 
 temperance 
 
 sobriete 
 
 force 
 
 modestie 
 
 civility 
 
 pudeur 
 
 polites?e 
 
 bonnetete 
 
 complaisance 
 
 douceur 
 
 bonte 
 
 amitie 
 
 union 
 
 Concorde 
 
 paix 
 
 tranquillite 
 
 patience 
 
 prudence 
 
 £conomie 
 
 habilete 
 
 industrie 
 
 soin 
 
 diligence 
 
 exactitude 
 
 liormeur 
 
 probity 
 
 ddsinteresse- 
 
 ment 
 sagesse 
 Constance 
 bienveillance 
 Emulation 
 faveur 
 valeur 
 bravoure 
 courage m. 
 finesse, ruse 
 
 jealousy 
 
 pity 
 mercy 
 compassion 
 terror 
 frigid . 
 indignation 
 virtue 
 charity 
 justice 
 temperance 
 sobriety 
 fortitude 
 modesty 
 civiii'y 
 bash fulness 
 politeness 
 honesty 
 complaisance 
 sweetness 
 goodness 
 friendship 
 union 
 concord 
 peace. 
 
 tranquillity 
 patience 
 prudence 
 economy 
 skill 
 industry 
 care 
 
 diligence 
 exactness 
 honour 
 probity 
 
 > disinterestedness 
 
 icisdom 
 
 constancy 
 
 benevolence 
 
 emulation 
 
 favour 
 
 valour 
 
 bravtry 
 
 courage 
 
 cunning 
 
 adresse 
 
 cha«tete 
 
 innocence 
 
 liberalite 
 
 gen ero site 
 
 reconnoissance 
 
 frugalite 
 
 prosperite 
 
 adversite 
 
 mceurs pi. 
 
 bonheur 
 
 recompense 
 
 prix 
 
 present 
 
 don 
 
 prtt 
 
 grace 
 
 reputation 
 
 vice m. 
 
 defaut 
 
 imperfection 
 
 avarice 
 
 avidite 
 
 orgueil 
 
 paresse 
 
 fain ear. tise 
 
 lachete 
 
 nonchalance 
 
 luxe m. 
 
 mollesse 
 
 impurete 
 
 debauch e 
 
 dissolution 
 
 libertinage m. 
 
 desordre.wi. 
 
 dereglement 
 
 mepris 
 
 raillerie 
 
 moquerie 
 
 modisance 
 
 calomnie 
 
 crime m. 
 
 malice 
 
 mechancete 
 
 tromperie 
 
 parjure m. 
 
 friponnerie 
 
 dexterity 
 
 chastity 
 
 innScenct 
 
 liberality 
 
 generosity 
 
 gratitude 
 
 frugality 
 
 prosperity 
 
 adversity 
 
 manners 
 
 happiness 
 
 reward 
 
 prise 
 
 present 
 
 gifl 
 
 loan 
 
 grace 
 
 fame 
 
 vice 
 
 defect 
 
 imperfection 
 
 avarice 
 
 greediness 
 
 pride 
 
 idleness 
 
 slothful n ess 
 
 sluggishness 
 
 carelessness 
 
 luxury, pomp 
 
 effeminacy 
 
 lewdness 
 
 revel 
 
 dissoluteness 
 
 libertinism 
 
 disorderly lift 
 
 licentiousness 
 
 contempt 
 
 jest 
 
 mockery 
 
 slander 
 
 calumny 
 
 crime 
 
 malice 
 
 wick td nets 
 
 deceit 
 
 perjury 
 
 knavery 
 
54 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 fourberie 
 
 roguery 
 
 exil 
 
 exile 
 
 enchantement 
 
 witchcraft 
 
 banissement 
 
 banishment 
 
 injustice 
 
 injustice 
 
 pusillanimity 
 
 pusillanimity 
 
 tort 
 
 wrong 
 
 trahison 
 
 treat hery 
 
 mure 
 
 usury 
 
 perndie 
 
 perfidiousness 
 
 achat 
 
 purchase 
 
 punition 
 
 punishment 
 
 vente 
 
 sals 
 
 chatiment 
 
 chastisement 
 
 troc 
 
 barter 
 
 legerete* 
 
 levity 
 
 gage m. 
 
 pledge 
 
 coquetterie 
 
 coquetry 
 
 depot 
 
 trust 
 
 badinage m. 
 
 sport 
 
 contrat 
 
 contract 
 
 larcin 
 
 robbery 
 
 marche* 
 
 bargain 
 
 vol 
 
 theft 
 
 bassesse 
 
 meanness 
 
 fripponnerie 
 
 knavish trick 
 
 impudence 
 
 impudence 
 
 tromperie 
 
 deceit 
 
 effronterie 
 
 effrontery 
 
 ivroguerie 
 
 drunkenness 
 
 audace 
 
 audaciousness 
 
 ivresse 
 
 ebriety 
 
 t£m6rite* 
 
 temerity 
 
 assassinat 
 
 murder 
 
 pohronnerie 
 
 cowardice 
 
 meurtre m. 
 
 manslaughter 
 
 qniniatrete* 
 
 stubbornness 
 
 mensonge m. 
 
 lie 
 
 obstination 
 
 obstinacy 
 
 faussete 
 
 falsehood 
 
 cruaute 
 
 cruelly 
 
 conte m. 
 
 tale 
 
 dispute 
 
 dispute 
 
 serment 
 
 oath 
 
 querelle 
 
 quarrel 
 
 malheur 
 
 misfortune 
 
 brouillerie 
 
 broil 
 
 folie 
 
 folly 
 
 babil 
 
 babbling 
 
 extravagance 
 
 madness 
 
 caquet 
 
 prating 
 
 coutume 
 
 custom 
 
 inconstance 
 
 inconstancy 
 
 usage m. 
 
 use 
 
 ingratitude 
 
 ungratefulness 
 
 pratique 
 
 practice 
 
 ambition 
 
 ambit ion 
 
 liabitude 
 
 habit 
 
 prodigality 
 
 prodigality 
 
 licence 
 
 licentiousness 
 
 gourraandise 
 impolitesse 
 
 gluttony 
 
 exees 
 
 txcess 
 
 rudeness 
 
 tour 
 
 trick 
 
 incivility 
 
 incivility 
 
 bagatelles pi. 
 
 trifles 
 
 dissention 
 
 dissension 
 
 faute 
 
 fault 
 
 impatience 
 
 impatience 
 
 faiblesse 
 
 weakness 
 
 imprudence 
 
 imprudence 
 
 faible m. 
 
 foible 
 
 negligence 
 
 negligence 
 
 affront 
 
 affront 
 
 malhonn&tete 
 
 rudeness 
 
 outrage wi. 
 
 outrage 
 
 d£shonneur 
 
 disgrace 
 
 insulte 
 
 insult 
 
 OF MEATS AND DRINKS. 
 
 nourriture 
 uTimens pi. 
 vivres m. pi. 
 
 nourishment 
 
 food 
 
 victuals 
 
 provisions 
 re pas 
 dejeuner 
 
 provisions 
 
 meal 
 
 breakfast 
 

 VOCABULARY. 
 
 i 
 
 diner 
 
 dinner 
 
 verjus 
 
 verjuice 
 
 
 j afternoon's 
 
 ancbois 
 
 anchovies 
 
 gouter 
 
 I luncheon 
 
 Apices/?/. 
 
 spices 
 
 souper 
 
 supper 
 
 poivre. m. 
 
 pepper 
 
 collation 
 
 collation 
 
 gingembre m. 
 
 ginger 
 
 festin 
 
 feast 
 
 muscade 
 
 nutmeg 
 
 re"gal 
 
 treat 
 
 macis 
 
 macs 
 
 pain 
 
 croute 
 
 bread 
 
 crust 
 
 girofle m. 
 (clous de) 
 
 > cloves 
 
 mie 
 
 crumb 
 
 canelle 
 
 cinnamon 
 
 farine 
 
 flour 
 
 oublies pi. 
 
 wafers 
 
 son 
 
 bran 
 
 sucre m. 
 
 sugar 
 
 pate 
 
 dough 
 
 caDsonade 
 
 moist sugar 
 
 levain 
 
 leaven 
 
 dessert 
 
 dessert 
 
 morceau 
 
 bit, morsel 
 
 fruit 
 
 fruit 
 
 tranche 
 
 slice 
 
 pate 
 
 pie 
 
 bouchee 
 
 mouthful 
 
 gateau 
 
 cake 
 
 viande 
 
 meat 
 
 tourte, tarte 
 
 tart 
 
 bouilii 
 
 boiled meat 
 
 biscuit 
 
 biscuit 
 
 rot, roti 
 
 roast meat 
 
 macaron 
 
 macaroon 
 
 boeuf 
 
 beef 
 
 crepe 
 
 pancakes 
 
 mouton 
 
 mutton 
 
 confitures pi. 
 
 sweetmeats 
 
 tgneau 
 
 lamb 
 
 gelee 
 
 jdly 
 
 »eau 
 
 veal 
 
 marmelade 
 
 marmalade 
 
 pore 
 
 pork 
 
 conserve 
 
 conserve 
 
 venaison 
 
 venison 
 
 tablettes pi. 
 
 lozenges 
 
 Tolaille 
 
 fowls 
 
 dragees pi. 
 
 sugar -plums 
 
 gibier 
 
 game 
 
 pralines pL 
 
 crisp -almonds 
 
 gigot 
 
 a leg of mutton 
 
 \ from age m. 
 
 cheese 
 
 andouille 
 
 chitterlings 
 
 beurre m. 
 
 butter 
 
 saucisse 
 
 sausage 
 
 lait 
 
 milk 
 
 jambon 
 
 ham 
 
 creme 
 
 cream 
 
 lard 
 
 bacon 
 
 ceuf 
 
 e gg 
 
 /noutarde 
 
 mustard 
 
 coque 
 
 shell 
 
 soupe 
 
 SOU]) 
 
 blanc 
 
 white 
 
 potage m. 
 
 pottage 
 
 jaune m. 
 
 yolk 
 
 bouillon 
 
 broth 
 
 boisson 
 
 drink 
 
 consoram^ 
 
 jelly broth 
 
 liqueur 
 
 liquor 
 
 ragout 
 
 ragout 
 
 the 
 
 tea 
 
 fricassee 
 
 fricassee 
 
 cafe 
 
 coffee 
 
 jus 
 
 gravy 
 
 chocolat 
 
 chocolate 
 
 sauce 
 
 ^auce 
 
 limonade 
 
 lemonade 
 
 poisson 
 
 fah 
 
 ponche m. 
 
 punch 
 
 salade 
 
 sallad 
 
 vin 
 
 wine 
 
 sel 
 
 salt 
 
 biere 
 
 beer 
 
 huile 
 
 oil 
 
 eau-de-vie 
 
 brardy 
 
 vinaigre m. 
 
 vxntgar 
 
 nectar 
 
 nectar 
 
 55 
 
 6* 
 
56 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ambroisie 
 cidre m. 
 poire* 
 
 ambrosia 
 
 cider 
 
 perry 
 
 hydromel 
 
 sirop 
 
 lie 
 
 mead 
 syrup 
 dregs 
 
 OF DRESSING APPAREL, &C. 
 
 habilleroent 
 
 dress 
 
 guetres pi. 
 
 gaiters 
 
 hardcs 
 
 clothes 
 
 souliers 
 
 shoes 
 
 habit complet 
 
 a suit of clothei 
 
 i escarpinsp/. 
 
 pumps 
 
 habit 
 
 coat 
 
 semelle 
 
 sole 
 
 veste 
 
 waistcoat 
 
 bottes pi. 
 
 boots 
 
 gilet 
 
 under -waistcoat boucles pi. 
 
 buckles 
 
 manches pi. 
 
 sleeves 
 
 cuir 
 
 leather 
 
 poches/?/. 
 
 pockets 
 
 chapeau 
 
 hat 
 
 bouton 
 
 button 
 
 perruque 
 
 wig 
 
 doublure 
 
 lining 
 
 jape 
 
 petticoat 
 
 couture 
 
 seam 
 
 jupon 
 
 under-petticoat 
 
 calotte 
 
 breeches 
 
 satin 
 
 satin 
 
 pantalon 
 
 pantaloon 
 
 taffetas 
 
 taffety 
 
 gousset 
 
 fob 
 
 gaze 
 
 gauze 
 
 drap 
 
 cloth 
 
 coiffure 
 
 head-dress 
 
 soie 
 
 silk 
 
 coiffe 
 
 hood 
 
 velours 
 
 velvet 
 
 collier 
 
 necklace 
 
 serge 
 basin 
 
 serge 
 dimity 
 
 boucles 
 
 d'oreilles^/. 
 
 > ear -rings 
 
 flanelle 
 
 flannel 
 
 gants pi. 
 
 gloves 
 
 aoffe 
 
 staff 
 
 mitaines pi. 
 
 mittens 
 
 manteau 
 
 cloak 
 
 tablier 
 
 apron 
 
 surtout 
 redingote 
 
 surtout 
 riding-coat 
 
 mules pi. 
 pantoufles pi. 
 
 S slippers 
 
 linge m. 
 
 linen 
 
 bague 
 
 ring 
 
 toile 
 
 linen-cloth 
 
 bijou 
 
 jewel 
 
 batiste 
 
 cambric 
 
 bracelet 
 
 bracelet 
 
 mousselin 
 
 muslin 
 
 dentelle 
 
 lace 
 
 linon 
 
 lawn 
 
 blonde 
 
 blond-lace 
 
 chemise 
 
 shirt 
 
 eventail 
 
 fan 
 
 jabot 
 
 frill 
 
 manchon 
 
 muff 
 
 cravate 
 
 cravat 
 
 agrafe 
 
 clasp 
 
 bas pi. 
 
 stocking* 
 
 ep ingle 
 
 pin 
 
 jarretieres pi. 
 
 garters 
 
 aiguille 
 
 needle 
 
 laine 
 
 ivool 
 
 etui 
 
 case 
 
 m 
 
 thread 
 
 de 
 
 thimble 
 
 coton 
 
 cotton 
 
 masque m. 
 
 mask 
 
 maille 
 
 slilch 
 
 voile m. 
 
 veil 
 
 trou 
 
 hole 
 
 tabatiere 
 
 sniff- box 
 
 chffiissons pi. 
 
 socks 
 
 tabac 
 
 snuff 
 
tabac (afumer) tobacco 
 bourse purse 
 
 argent money 
 
 porte -feuille m. pocket-book 
 ciseauxp/. scissars 
 
 crayon pencil 
 
 mouchoir handkerchief 
 
 lunettes pi. spectacles 
 
 lorgnette opera-glass 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 conserves pU 
 
 preserves 
 
 bouquet 
 
 nosegay 
 
 canne 
 
 cane 
 
 ok cordon 
 
 string 
 
 epee 
 
 sword 
 
 montre 
 
 watch 
 
 lief boite 
 
 case 
 
 chaine 
 
 chain 
 
 ss cachet 
 
 seal 
 
 57 
 
 OF A HOUSE AND FURNITURE. 
 
 maison 
 
 house 
 
 Salle 
 
 {parlour 
 
 h Atol 
 
 < nobleman's 
 
 salon 
 
 llOlcJ 
 
 \ house 
 
 escalier 
 
 stair-case 
 
 hotcllerie 
 
 inn 
 
 office 
 
 pantry 
 
 chateau 
 
 castle 
 
 cuisine 
 
 kitchen 
 
 palais 
 
 palace 
 
 garde-man- 
 
 i store-room 
 
 conronne 
 
 crown 
 
 ger m. 
 
 s 
 
 trone m. 
 
 throne 
 
 bouiangerie 
 
 bake house 
 
 sceptre in. 
 
 sceptre 
 
 brasserie 
 
 bre.w-house 
 
 aile 
 
 wing 
 
 lingeiie 
 
 laundry 
 
 pavilion 
 
 pavilion 
 
 ecurie 
 
 stable 
 
 fondemens pi. 
 
 foundation 
 
 remise 
 
 coach-house 
 
 mur, muraille 
 
 wall 
 
 puits 
 
 well 
 
 batiment 
 
 building 
 
 etage m. 
 
 fiory 
 
 materiaux pi. 
 
 materials 
 
 appartemenl 
 
 apartment 
 
 pierre 
 
 stone 
 
 chambre 
 
 room 
 
 brique 
 
 brick 
 
 antichambre 
 
 aniichamber 
 
 mortier 
 
 mortar 
 
 salle-a-raanger 
 
 • dining-room 
 
 chaux 
 pi at re m. 
 
 lime 
 plaster 
 
 salon-de-com- 
 pagnie 
 
 > drawing-room 
 
 ciment 
 
 cement 
 
 eabinet-de- 
 
 ) 
 
 tuile 
 
 tile 
 
 toiletle 
 
 > aresnng-room 
 
 ardoise 
 
 slate 
 
 charnbre-a- 
 
 > bed-room 
 
 charpente 
 
 timber work 
 
 coucher 
 
 poutre 
 
 beam, 
 
 galerie 
 
 grit try 
 
 solive 
 
 joist 
 
 cabinet 
 
 closet 
 
 6chelle 
 
 ladder 
 
 boudoir 
 
 lady's closet 
 
 cave 
 
 vault 
 
 garde-robe 
 
 wardrobe 
 
 cellier 
 
 cellar 
 
 porte 
 
 door 
 
 tonneau 
 
 cask 
 
 porte-ccchere 
 
 gale 
 
 futaille 
 
 vessel 
 
 seuil 
 
 lli r ahold 
 
 boutique 
 
 shop 
 
 jalousie 
 
 blinds 
 
 atelier 
 
 work-shop 
 
 gond 
 
 h inge 
 
 magasin 
 
 warehouse 
 
 marteau 
 
 knocker 
 
 vestibule m. 
 
 hall 
 
 scrrure 
 
 lock 
 
58 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 cle\ or clef 
 
 key 
 
 amidon 
 
 starch 
 
 verrou 
 
 bolt 
 
 balaia 
 
 broom 
 
 fenetre 
 
 window 
 
 banc 
 
 bench 
 
 vitre 
 
 glass 
 
 escabeau 
 
 stool 
 
 volet 
 
 shutler 
 
 planeher 
 
 floor 
 
 balcon 
 
 balcony 
 
 parquet 
 
 inlaid floor 
 
 store m. 
 
 blind 
 
 plafond 
 
 ceiling 
 
 grenier 
 
 garret 
 
 lambris 
 
 wainscot 
 
 toit 
 
 roof 
 
 cloison 
 
 partition 
 
 gouttiere 
 
 gutter 
 
 tapisserie 
 
 hangings 
 
 malle 
 
 trunk 
 
 tapis 
 
 carpet 
 
 boite 
 
 box 
 
 lit 
 
 bed 
 
 caisse 
 
 chest 
 
 alcove 
 
 alcove 
 
 cassette 
 
 casket 
 
 chalit 
 
 bedstead 
 
 coffre m. 
 
 coffer 
 
 chevet 
 
 bolster 
 
 logement 
 
 lodging 
 
 oreiller 
 
 pillow 
 
 ameublement 
 
 furniture 
 
 paillasse 
 
 straw-mattress 
 
 cheminee 
 
 chimney 
 
 matelas 
 
 mattress 
 
 atre m. foyer 
 
 hearth 
 
 draps pi. 
 
 sheets 
 
 soufflet 
 
 bellows 
 
 couvertures pi. 
 
 bed-clothes 
 
 pelle 
 
 sho vel 
 
 courte-pointe 
 
 counterpane 
 
 pincettes pi. 
 
 tongs 
 
 rideau 
 
 curtain 
 
 fourgon 
 
 poker 
 
 tringle 
 
 curtain-rod 
 
 garde-cen- 
 dre m. 
 
 >fender 
 
 anneau 
 
 sofa 
 
 ring 
 sofa 
 
 coquemar 
 bouilloire 
 
 > boiler, copper 
 
 fauteuil 
 siege m. 
 
 elboio-chair 
 seat 
 
 couvercle m. 
 
 lid 
 
 chaise 
 
 chair 
 
 poele 
 
 frying-pan 
 
 coussin 
 
 cushion 
 
 poelon 
 
 skillet 
 
 armoire 
 
 press 
 
 casserole 
 fourneau 
 
 saucepan 
 stove 
 
 commode 
 
 ( chest of draw' 
 \ crs 
 
 allumette 
 
 match 
 
 trumeau 
 
 pier-glass 
 
 pierre-a-fusil 
 
 flint 
 
 toilette 
 
 toilet 
 
 briquet 
 
 steel 
 
 miroir 
 
 looking-glass 
 
 four 
 
 oven 
 
 peigne m. 
 
 comb 
 
 essuie-main 
 
 towel 
 
 pomade 
 
 pomatum 
 
 bassinoire 
 
 v: arming-pan 
 
 poudre 
 
 powder 
 
 panier, cor- 
 
 > basket 
 
 bouppe 
 
 P u ff 
 
 beille 
 
 parfum 
 
 perfume 
 
 porcelaine 
 
 china-ware 
 
 tableau 
 
 picture 
 
 faience 
 
 delft-ware 
 
 dessin 
 
 drawing 
 
 poterie 
 
 earthen-ware 
 
 coioris 
 
 colouring 
 
 pot 
 
 pot 
 
 portrait 
 
 portrait 
 
 eruche 
 
 pitcher 
 
 pay sage m. 
 
 landscape 
 
 lampe 
 
 lamp 
 
 miniature 
 
 miniature 
 
 lanterne 
 
 lantern 
 
 chandelier 
 
 candlestick 
 
 savon 
 
 soap 
 
 bougeoir 
 
 fiat candlestick 
 

 VOCABULARY. 
 
 5< 
 
 bobeche 
 
 socket 
 
 cuiller, or cu- ) mdnm ^ Lmm 
 
 chandelle 
 
 candle 
 
 Mere 
 
 £ a^wun 
 
 bougie 
 
 wax-light 
 
 saliere 
 
 sail cellar 
 
 cire 
 
 wax 
 
 huillier 
 
 oil- cruet 
 
 moiichettes pi 
 
 . snuffers 
 
 moutardier 
 
 mustard-pot 
 
 porte-mou- 
 chettes m. 
 
 > snuffer-pan 
 
 aiguiere 
 coupe, tasse 
 
 ewer 
 cup 
 
 eteignoir 
 
 extinguisher 
 
 gobelet 
 
 goblet 
 
 vergettes^Z. 
 
 brush 
 
 verre m. 
 
 glan 
 
 buffet 
 
 cup-board 
 
 bouteille 
 
 bottle 
 
 cabaret 
 
 tea-board 
 
 bouchon 
 
 cork 
 
 tasse 
 
 cup 
 
 tire-bouchon 
 
 77i. cork-screw 
 
 soucoupe 
 
 saucer 
 
 carafe 
 
 decanter 
 
 theiere 
 
 tea-pot 
 
 bibliotheque 
 
 library 
 
 cafetiere 
 
 coffee- pat 
 
 bureau 
 
 bureau 
 
 chocolatiere 
 
 chocolale-pot 
 
 tiroir 
 
 drawer 
 
 sucrier 
 
 sugar-basin 
 
 cachet 
 
 seal 
 
 jatte 
 
 bowl 
 
 Jettre 
 
 letter 
 
 table 
 
 table 
 
 enveloppe 
 
 cover 
 
 nappe 
 
 cloth 
 
 adresse 
 
 direction 
 
 serviette 
 
 napkin 
 
 signature 
 
 signature 
 
 assiette 
 
 plate 
 
 sonnette 
 
 bell 
 
 plat 
 
 dish 
 
 estampe 
 
 print 
 
 couteau 
 
 knife 
 
 mddaille 
 
 medal 
 
 
 OF THE CITY. 
 
 
 v»Ie 
 
 town, city 
 
 fronti3pice m. 
 
 frontispiece 
 
 village m. 
 
 village 
 
 portail 
 
 porial 
 
 bourg 
 
 borough 
 
 colonne 
 
 column 
 
 rue 
 
 street 
 
 pilastre »?. 
 
 pilaster 
 
 c aire four 
 
 cross- way 
 
 base 
 
 base 
 
 passage m. 
 
 passage 
 
 pedestal 
 
 pedestal 
 
 place 
 
 square 
 
 statue 
 
 statue 
 
 cul-de-sac 
 
 J no thorough- 
 
 I f are 
 pyramid 
 
 arcade 
 
 arcade 
 
 pyramide 
 
 portique m. 
 
 > portico, or pU 
 5 azza 
 
 obeMisque m. 
 
 obelisk 
 
 aqueduc 
 
 aqueduct 
 
 pave 
 
 pavement 
 
 dome m. 
 
 dome 
 
 ruisseau 
 
 kennel 
 
 paroisse 
 
 parish 
 
 marchfj 
 
 market 
 
 corned ie 
 
 play-house 
 
 denizes pi. 
 
 provisions 
 
 theatre m. 
 
 stage 
 
 boacherie 
 
 meat-market 
 
 coulisses pi. 
 
 scenery 
 
 poissonnerie 
 friperie 
 
 fish-market 
 
 decorations 
 
 decor utiont 
 
 old clothes shop 
 
 toile 
 
 curtain 
 
 edifice m. 
 
 edifice 
 
 foyer 
 
 gree7i-room 
 
 facade 
 
 front 
 
 orchestre m. 
 
 orchestra 
 
60 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 parterre m* 
 loge 
 
 pit 
 
 tr£sorerie 
 
 treasury 
 
 box 
 
 amiraute 
 
 admiralty 
 
 amphiteatre m. 
 
 first gallery 
 
 arsenal 
 
 arsenal 
 
 paradis 
 billet 
 
 upper gallery 
 
 faubourgi 
 
 suburbs 
 
 ticket 
 
 boulevards pi. 
 
 bulwarks 
 
 couvent 
 
 convent 
 
 remparts pi. 
 
 ramparts 
 
 inonastere m. 
 
 monastery 
 
 barriere 
 
 turnpike 
 
 cellule 
 
 cell 
 
 guinguette 
 
 tea-garden 
 
 hermitage m. 
 
 hermitage 
 
 forge 
 
 forge 
 
 solitude 
 
 solitude 
 
 verrerie 
 
 glass-house 
 
 retraite 
 
 retirement 
 
 fonderie 
 
 foundery 
 
 university 
 
 university 
 
 carrosse m. 
 
 coach 
 
 college m. 
 
 college 
 
 imperiale 
 
 roof 
 
 e*cole 
 
 school 
 
 portiere 
 
 coach door 
 
 pension 
 
 boarding school 
 
 glaces pi. 
 
 windows 
 
 pari e men t 
 
 parliament 
 
 timon 
 
 coach-pole 
 
 chambre-haute, 
 ou des pairs 
 
 ' > house of lords 
 
 roue 
 essieu 
 
 wheel 
 axle-tree 
 
 chambre basse. 
 
 (house of 
 
 equipage m. 
 
 equipage 
 
 ou des com- 
 
 harnais pi. 
 
 harness 
 
 munes 
 
 I commons 
 
 r&nes pi. 
 
 reins 
 
 prison 
 
 prison 
 
 bride 
 
 bridle 
 
 cachot 
 
 dungeon 
 
 licou 
 
 halter 
 
 hopital 
 
 hospital 
 
 selle 
 
 saddle 
 
 innrmerie 
 
 infirmary 
 
 bat 
 
 pack-saddle 
 
 taverne 
 
 tavern 
 
 argon 
 
 saddle-bow 
 
 cabaret 
 
 public-house 
 
 sangle 
 
 girth 
 
 auberge 
 
 inn 
 
 etriers pi. 
 
 stirrup 
 
 cafe 
 
 coffee-house 
 
 eperons pi. 
 
 spurs 
 
 enseigne 
 
 sign 
 
 berline 
 
 berlin 
 
 affiche 
 
 bill 
 
 cabriolet 
 
 gig 
 
 pont 
 
 bridge 
 
 chaise 
 
 chaise 
 
 arche 
 
 arch 
 
 nacre m. 
 
 hackney-coa 
 
 pilier 
 
 pillar 
 
 charrette 
 
 cart 
 
 bateau 
 
 boat 
 
 fourgon 
 
 waggon 
 
 quai 
 
 key, on a river 
 
 remise 
 
 coach house 
 
 bourse 
 
 exchange 
 
 rasoir 
 
 razor 
 
 banque 
 
 bank 
 
 cuir 
 
 strap 
 
 agiotage m. 
 
 stock-jobbing 
 
 moule 
 
 mould 
 
 douane 
 
 custom-house 
 
 machine 
 
 machine 
 
 poste 
 
 general post 
 
 moulin 
 
 mill 
 
 petite-poste 
 
 twopenny post 
 
 
 
 OF 
 
 TRADES, ARTS 
 
 !, PROFESSION, 
 
 &C. 
 
 boul anger 
 
 baker 
 
 relieur 
 
 book-binder 
 
 perruquier 
 iorgerou 
 
 hair-dresser 
 
 libra ire m. 
 
 bookseller 
 
 blacksmith 
 
 chaudronnier 
 
 brazier 
 
brasseur 
 
 boucher 
 
 ^beniste 
 
 charpentier 
 
 charron 
 
 sculpteur 
 
 chimiste 
 
 horloger 
 
 confiseur 
 
 carrossier 
 
 tonnelier 
 
 corroyeur 
 
 coutelier 
 
 fourbisseur 
 
 teinturier 
 
 distillateur 
 
 droguiste 
 
 graveur 
 
 marechal 
 
 poissonnier 
 
 iondeur 
 
 fruitier 
 
 fniirreur 
 
 jarJinier 
 
 do rem* 
 
 verrier 
 
 viuier 
 
 gantier 
 
 orfevre 
 
 joaillier 
 
 bijou tier 
 
 epicier 
 
 armurier 
 
 chapelier 
 
 aabei \ 
 
 menuisier 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ( 
 
 brewer 
 
 serrarier 
 
 locksmith 
 
 butcher 
 
 mac, on 
 
 bricklayer 
 
 cabinet-maker 
 
 maitre d'hotel 
 
 steward 
 
 carpenter 
 
 rnercier 
 
 mercer 
 
 wheel-wrighl 
 
 meunier 
 
 miller 
 
 carver 
 
 peintre 
 
 painter 
 
 chymist 
 
 patissier 
 
 pastry-cook 
 
 clock-maker 
 
 paveur 
 
 pavtour 
 
 confectioner 
 
 colporteur 
 
 pei*ar 
 
 coach-maker 
 
 parfumeur 
 
 perfumer 
 
 cooper 
 
 medecin 
 
 physician 
 
 turrier 
 
 platrier 
 
 •plasterer 
 
 cutler 
 
 piombier 
 
 plumber 
 
 sword-cutler 
 
 potier 
 
 poller 
 
 dyer 
 
 imprimeur 
 
 printer 
 
 distiller 
 
 sellier 
 
 saddler 
 
 druggist 
 
 lingere 
 
 sempstress 
 
 engraver 
 
 couturiere 
 
 mantua-make. 
 
 farrier 
 
 tailleur 
 
 tailor 
 
 fishmonger 
 
 cordon nier 
 
 shoe-maker 
 
 founder 
 
 pelletier 
 
 skinner 
 
 fruiterer 
 
 forgeron 
 
 sm ith 
 
 furrier 
 
 chirurgien 
 
 surgeon 
 
 gardener 
 
 apothicaire 
 
 apothecary 
 
 gilder 
 
 arpenteur 
 
 surveyor 
 
 glass-maker 
 
 tanneur 
 
 tanner 
 
 glazitr 
 
 - tourneur 
 
 turner 
 
 giover 
 
 entrepreneur 
 
 undertaker 
 
 goldsmith 
 
 tapissier 
 
 upholsterer 
 
 > jeweller 
 
 horloger 
 tisserand 
 
 watch-maker 
 wearer 
 
 grocer 
 
 perruquier 
 
 wig-maker 
 
 armourer 
 
 ouvrage 
 
 work 
 
 halter 
 
 ouvrier 
 
 work-man 
 
 innkeeper 
 
 ouvriere 
 
 work-uoman 
 
 joiner 
 
 manoeuvre 
 
 labourer 
 
 61 
 
 OF THE COUNTRY, HUSBANDRY, FLOWERS, TREES, &C. 
 
 campagne 
 
 country 
 
 hameau 
 
 hamlet 
 
 chemin 
 
 way 
 
 enclos 
 
 close 
 
 sentier 
 
 foot -way 
 
 chateau 
 
 castle 
 
 bone 
 
 mud 
 
 terre 
 
 estate 
 
 fange 
 
 mire 
 
 cour 
 
 yard 
 
 pou«siore 
 
 dust 
 
 basse-cour 
 
 poultry-yard 
 
 bo ur nier 
 
 slough 
 
 colombier 
 
 pigeon-house 
 
 oruiere 
 
 cart-rut 
 
 laiterie 
 
 dairy 
 
vz 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 e'curie 
 
 stable 
 
 jardin 
 
 garden 
 
 fruiterie 
 
 fruit-loft 
 
 jardinagc m. 
 
 gardening 
 
 
 OF HERBS 
 
 AND PLANTS. 
 
 
 aloes 
 
 aloe 
 
 moutarde 
 
 mustard 
 
 angelique 
 
 angelica 
 
 capucina 
 
 nasturtium 
 
 artichaut 
 
 artichoke 
 
 optie 
 
 nettle 
 
 asperge 
 
 asparagus 
 
 oignon 
 
 onion 
 
 melisse 
 
 balm 
 
 persil 
 
 parsley 
 
 basilic 
 
 basil 
 
 panais 
 
 parsnip 
 
 feve 
 
 bean 
 
 pois 
 
 peas 
 
 haricot 
 
 french-bean 
 
 partetaire 
 
 pellitory 
 
 poiree 
 
 beet 
 
 plante 
 
 plant 
 
 betterave 
 
 beet-root 
 
 plantain 
 
 plantain 
 
 boarrache 
 
 borage 
 
 pavot 
 
 poppy 
 
 bardane 
 
 burdock 
 
 pomme-de-terrepo/a/oe 
 
 primprenelle 
 
 burnet 
 
 courge 
 
 pumpkin 
 
 chou 
 
 cabbage 
 
 pourpier 
 
 pur slain 
 
 carotte 
 
 carrot 
 
 rave 
 
 radish 
 
 celeri 
 
 celery 
 
 radis 
 
 Spanish radish 
 
 cerfeuil 
 
 chervil 
 
 roseau 
 
 reed 
 
 choux-neurs/)Z 
 
 . cauliflowers 
 
 rue 
 
 rue 
 
 maches pi. 
 
 corn-sal lad 
 
 jonc 
 
 rush 
 
 cresson 
 
 cresses 
 
 rhubarbe 
 
 rhubarb 
 
 concombre m. 
 
 cucumber 
 
 safran 
 
 saffron 
 
 dent-de-lion 
 
 dandelion 
 
 sauge 
 
 sage 
 
 patience 
 
 dock 
 
 sarette 
 
 sav-ery 
 
 chicoree 
 
 endive 
 
 ciboule 
 
 scallion 
 
 fenodil 
 
 fe?ine I 
 
 echalote 
 
 shallot 
 
 fougei>e 
 
 fern 
 
 oseille 
 
 sorrel 
 
 ail 
 
 garlic 
 
 veponique 
 
 speedwell 
 
 calebasse 
 
 gourd 
 
 epinards pi. 
 
 spinage 
 
 eigne 
 
 hemlock 
 
 tanaisie 
 
 tansy 
 
 her be 
 
 herb 
 
 ivraie 
 
 tare 
 
 raifopt 
 
 horse-radish 
 
 estragon 
 
 stragon 
 
 joubarbe 
 
 house-leek 
 
 chardon 
 
 thistle 
 
 Herre m. 
 
 ivy 
 
 thym 
 
 thyme 
 
 poireau 
 
 leek 
 
 s*rpolet 
 
 wild thyme 
 
 la-Hue 
 
 lettuce 
 
 tretle m. 
 
 trefoil 
 
 reglisse 
 
 licorice 
 
 navet 
 
 turnip 
 
 mauve 
 
 mallows 
 
 Valeriana 
 
 valerian 
 
 guimauve 
 
 marsh-mallows 
 
 vegetauxp/. 
 
 vegetables 
 
 m.iijc laine 
 rtseda 
 
 marjoram 
 
 mignonette 
 
 legumes rn.pl. 
 
 { vegetables, 
 \ greens 
 
 menthe 
 
 mint 
 
 verveine 
 
 vervain 
 
 gui 
 
 misleloe 
 
 absynthe 
 
 wormus \)d 
 
 mousse 
 
 moss 
 
 raille-feuille 
 
 yarrow 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 63 
 
 FLOWERS. 
 
 fleuriste 
 parterre 
 fl em- 
 iris 
 
 prim eve re 
 narcisse m. 
 jacinthe 
 tulipe 
 violette 
 pens^e 
 marguerite 
 imperiale 
 martagon 
 lis 
 
 muguet 
 oreille-d'ours 
 anemone 
 renoncule 
 jonquille 
 giroflee 
 oeillet 
 campanule 
 gantel6e 
 rose 
 jasmin 
 tubereuse 
 
 florist 
 
 flower garden 
 
 flower 
 
 crocus 
 
 cowslip 
 
 narcisms 
 
 hyacinth 
 
 tulip 
 
 violet 
 
 pansy 
 
 daisy 
 
 turk's cap 
 
 mountain-lily 
 
 my 
 
 may-lily 
 
 auricula 
 
 anemone 
 
 ranunculus 
 
 jonquil 
 
 stock- gilli flower 
 
 pink 
 
 > bell flower 
 
 rose 
 
 jasmine 
 
 tuberose 
 
 chevre-feuille ^ honty . mckit 
 
 seringa 
 
 lilac 
 
 marigold 
 
 amaranth 
 
 poppy 
 
 wild-poppy 
 
 blue-bell 
 sun-floicer 
 camomile 
 C great night- 
 I chade 
 
 cassidony 
 
 balsam 
 
 columbine 
 
 hollyhock 
 
 hepatica 
 
 lark-spur 
 
 piony 
 
 scabious 
 
 rocket 
 
 bed 
 
 flower-border 
 
 Ml. 
 
 seringat 
 
 lilas 
 
 souci 
 
 amaranthe 
 
 pavot 
 
 coquelicot 
 
 ponceau 
 
 bluet, barbeau 
 
 tournesol 
 
 camomille 
 
 belle-de-nuit 
 
 eternelle 
 
 immortelle 
 
 balsamine 
 
 ancolie 
 
 passe-rose 
 
 bepatique 
 
 pied-d'alouette 
 
 pivoine 
 
 scabieuse 
 
 julienne 
 
 planche 
 
 plate-bande 
 
 OF TREES AND SHRUBS. 
 
 arbre nu 
 
 tret 
 
 *eau 
 
 shrub 
 
 ^corce 
 
 bark 
 
 branche 
 
 branch 
 
 feuille 
 
 leaf 
 
 graine 
 
 ited 
 
 rejeton 
 
 sucker 
 
 abricotier 
 
 apricot-tree 
 
 cerisier 
 
 cherry-tree 
 
 chataignier 
 
 chesnut-tree 
 
 citronnier 
 
 lemon-tree 
 
 coignassier 
 
 quince-tree 
 
 figuier 
 
 Jig-tree 
 
 noyer 
 
 walnut-tree 
 
 oranger 
 
 orange-tree 
 
 pGcber 
 
 peach-tree 
 
 pommier 
 
 poirier 
 
 prunier 
 
 arbousier 
 
 fr£ne 
 
 tremble 
 
 hetre 
 
 bouleau 
 
 buis 
 
 genet 
 
 sureau 
 
 orme 
 
 sapin 
 
 coudrier 
 
 houx 
 
 lilas 
 
 7 
 
 apple-tree 
 
 pear-tree 
 
 plumb-tree 
 
 arbutus 
 
 ash-tree 
 
 aspen 
 
 beech-tree 
 
 birch-tree 
 
 box 
 
 broom 
 
 elder-tree 
 
 elm 
 
 fir-tree 
 
 hazel4ru 
 
 holly 
 
 lilac 
 
64 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 UUeul 
 myrte 
 
 chene 
 Osier 
 romarin 
 fglantier 
 
 lime-tree 
 
 myrtle-tree 
 
 oak 
 
 osier 
 
 rosemary 
 
 sweet briar 
 
 £pine 
 
 buisson 
 
 aub^pine 
 
 vigne 
 
 saule 
 
 if 
 
 thorn 
 
 thorn-bush 
 
 white-thom 
 
 vine 
 
 willow-tree 
 
 yew-tree 
 
 amands 
 porarae 
 abricot 
 cerise 
 
 guigne 
 
 chataigne 
 marron 
 groseilles pi, 
 
 froseille 
 gae 
 aveline 
 raisin 
 prune 
 
 reine-claude 
 citron 
 ananas 
 nefle 
 
 FIIUITS. 
 
 
 almond 
 
 melon 
 
 melon 
 
 apple 
 
 mure 
 
 mulberry 
 
 apricot 
 
 bru^non 
 
 nectarine 
 
 cherry 
 
 noisette 
 
 nut 
 
 C black-heart 
 I cherry 
 
 orange 
 
 orange 
 
 peche 
 
 peach 
 
 chcsnut 
 
 poire 
 
 pear 
 
 horse chesnut 
 
 citrouille 
 
 pumpion 
 
 currants 
 
 coin 
 
 quince 
 
 gooseberry 
 
 framboise 
 
 rasberry 
 
 # 
 
 fraise 
 
 strawberry 
 
 filbert 
 
 noix 
 
 walnut 
 
 grapes 
 
 epine-vinerte 
 
 barberries 
 
 plum 
 
 grenade 
 
 pomegranate 
 
 green-gage 
 
 olive 
 
 olive 
 
 lemon 
 
 
 C kernels of 
 I walnuU 
 
 pine-apple 
 
 cerneaux 
 
 medlar 
 
 raisins-secs 
 
 raisins 
 
 PROMISCUOUS WORDS. 
 
 grange 
 
 hutte 
 
 chaumiere 
 
 seigneurie 
 
 dime 
 
 metairie 
 
 sill on 
 
 pr£, prairie 
 
 arpent 
 
 fosse 
 
 champ 
 
 paturage m. 
 
 terroir 
 
 Earc 
 aie 
 bruyere 
 dunes 
 laade 
 
 barn 
 
 hut 
 
 thatched- house 
 
 manor 
 
 tithe 
 
 farm 
 
 ridge 
 
 meadow 
 
 acre 
 
 ditch 
 
 field 
 
 pasture-ground 
 
 soil 
 
 park 
 
 hedge 
 
 heath 
 
 downs 
 
 toast e-land 
 
 commune 
 
 plaine 
 
 garenne 
 
 fondriere 
 
 marais 
 
 plate-bande 
 
 serre 
 
 serre-chaude 
 
 boulingrin 
 
 berceau 
 
 bosquet 
 
 grotte 
 
 vignobie iH. 
 
 pepiniere 
 
 taillis 
 
 hallier 
 
 paysage m. 
 
 perspective 
 
 common 
 
 plain 
 
 warren 
 
 bog 
 
 marsh 
 
 border 
 
 green-house 
 
 hot-house 
 
 bowling-green 
 
 bower 
 
 grove 
 
 grotto 
 
 vineyard 
 
 nursery 
 
 coppice 
 
 thicket 
 
 landscape 
 
 prospect 
 

 VOCABULARY. 
 
 6 
 
 me 
 
 view 
 
 millet 
 
 millet 
 
 cascade 
 
 cascade 
 
 lin 
 
 flax 
 
 canal 
 
 canal 
 
 chanvre m. 
 
 hemp 
 
 agriculture 
 
 agriculture 
 
 chenevis 
 
 hemp-seed 
 
 labourage m. 
 
 tillage 
 
 epi 
 
 ear (of corn) 
 
 betail 
 
 cattle 
 
 gerbe 
 
 sheaf (of corn) 
 
 fumier 
 
 dung 
 
 tige 
 
 stalk 
 
 terreau 
 
 mould 
 
 tuyau 
 
 blade 
 
 r^colte 
 
 crop 
 
 paille 
 
 straw 
 
 moisson 
 
 harvest 
 
 chaume w. 
 
 stubble 
 
 vendange 
 
 vintage 
 
 foin 
 
 hay 
 
 houblon 
 
 hops 
 
 fourrage m. 
 
 fodder 
 
 grain 
 
 corn 
 
 fermier 
 
 farmer 
 
 bl£ 
 
 wheat 
 
 paysan 
 
 peasant 
 
 orge 
 
 barley 
 
 laboureur 
 
 ploughman 
 
 avoine 
 
 oats 
 
 moissonneur 
 
 reaper 
 
 riz 
 
 rice 
 
 faucheur 
 
 mower , 
 
 seigle m. 
 
 rye 
 
 berger 
 
 shepherd 
 
 65 
 
 OF QUADRUPEDS. 
 
 tame beast 
 
 bete beast 
 
 animal animal 
 
 animal domes- 
 
 tique 
 bete-de-somme beast of burden 
 
 f beast for the 
 
 I saddle 
 
 horse 
 
 mare 
 
 mare 
 
 stallion 
 
 coil 
 
 monture 
 
 cheval 
 
 oavate 
 
 jument 
 
 6 talon 
 
 poulain 
 
 pouliche 
 
 bidet 
 
 ane 
 
 anesse 
 
 anon 
 
 mulet 
 
 mule 
 
 bete-a-cc 
 
 bflBUf 
 
 buffle 7/i. 
 
 taureau 
 
 vache 
 
 g£nissc 
 
 reau 
 
 My 
 
 poney 
 
 ass 
 
 milk- ass 
 
 young ass 
 
 mule 
 
 she-mule 
 
 homed beast 
 
 ox 
 
 buffalo 
 
 bull 
 
 cow 
 
 heifer 
 
 heifei 
 calf 
 
 bouvillon 
 
 renne m. 
 
 brebis 
 
 mouton 
 
 b^Iier 
 
 agneau 
 
 chevre 
 
 bouc 
 
 chevreau 
 
 cocbon 
 
 pore 
 
 pourceau 
 
 truie 
 
 cochon-de-lait 
 
 cochon-d'inde 
 
 verrat 
 
 sanglier 
 
 laie 
 
 marcassin 
 
 bete-fauve 
 
 cerf 
 
 biche 
 
 faon 
 
 daim 
 
 daim-male 
 
 daim-femelle 
 
 bullock 
 rein-deer 
 ewe 
 wether 
 ram 
 lamb 
 she-goat 
 he-goat 
 hid 
 hog 
 Pig 
 P*g 
 sow 
 
 sucking pig 
 guinea pig 
 boar 
 
 wild boar 
 wild sow 
 young wild bottr 
 deer 
 stag 
 hind 
 fawn 
 
 fallow-deer 
 buck 
 doe 
 
66 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 chevreuil 
 
 chevrette 
 
 cbamois 
 
 lion 
 
 lionne 
 
 lionceau 
 
 tigre 
 
 tigresse 
 
 ours 
 
 ours on 
 
 zebre m 
 
 giraffe 
 
 leopard 
 
 cameleopard 
 
 rhinoceros 
 
 hippopotame m. 
 
 Elephant 
 
 chameau 
 
 dromadaire m, 
 
 lama 
 
 buffle m. 
 
 hyene 
 
 panthere 
 
 once 
 
 licorne 
 
 elan 
 
 lo-jp 
 
 louve 
 
 louveteau 
 
 lynx 
 
 renard 
 
 laisson 
 
 blaireau 
 
 castor 
 
 hemiine 
 
 marte, zibeline 
 
 £cureuil 
 
 lierisson 
 
 pore-epic 
 
 loutre 
 
 raton 
 
 furet 
 
 lievre 
 
 'hase 
 
 levraut 
 
 kipin 
 
 lapine 
 
 chien 
 
 chienne 
 
 roe-buck 
 
 roe 
 
 chamois 
 
 lion 
 
 lioness 
 
 lion's whelp 
 
 tiger 
 
 tigress 
 
 bear 
 
 bear's cub 
 
 zebra 
 
 giraffa 
 
 leopard 
 
 camelopard 
 
 rhinoceros 
 
 river-horse 
 
 elephant 
 
 camel 
 
 dromedary 
 
 lama 
 
 buffalo 
 
 hyena 
 
 panther 
 
 ounce 
 
 unicorn 
 
 elk 
 
 wolf 
 
 slie-wolf 
 
 wolf's cub 
 
 lynx 
 
 fox 
 
 brock 
 
 badger 
 
 beaver 
 
 ermine 
 
 marten- sable 
 
 h'edge-hog 
 
 porcupine 
 
 otter 
 
 rackoon 
 
 ferrei 
 
 hare 
 
 doe-hare 
 
 leveret 
 
 rabbit 
 
 doe-rabbit 
 
 dog 
 
 bitch 
 
 lice 
 le>rier 
 levrette 
 dogue 
 doguin 
 matin 
 limier 
 bichon 
 epagneul 
 basset 
 barbet 
 
 chien-d'arret 
 meute de 
 chiens 
 chat, matou 
 chatte 
 chaton 
 minon 
 
 minet, minette 
 singe m. 
 guenon 
 magot, babouin baboon 
 
 hound-bitch 
 
 greyhound 
 
 greyhound bitch 
 
 bull dog 
 
 whelp 
 
 mastiff 
 
 blood-hound 
 
 lap-dog 
 
 spaniel 
 
 terrier 
 
 shagged-dag 
 
 pointer 
 
 I pack of hounds 
 
 cat, tom-cat 
 
 cat, puss 
 
 kitten 
 
 puss 
 
 young kitten 
 
 monkey 
 
 ape 
 
 gazelle 
 
 belette 
 
 poutois 
 
 fouine 
 
 genette 
 
 muse 
 
 loir 
 
 marmote 
 
 taupe 
 
 rat 
 
 souris 
 
 tortue 
 
 antelope 
 
 weasel 
 
 polecat 
 
 pole-cat 
 
 wild cat 
 
 musk-oat 
 
 dormouse 
 
 marmot 
 
 mole 
 
 rat 
 
 mouse 
 
 tortoist 
 
 betail, bestiaux cattle 
 troupeau flock, herd 
 
 patre, berger shepherd 
 bergere shepherdess 
 
 vaclier, bouvier cow-herd 
 porcher swine-herd 
 
 chasse hunting 
 
 chasseur hunter 
 
 braconnier poacher 
 
 gibier, venaison gams 
 fusil gun 
 
 gibeeiere pouch 
 
 tire shooting 
 
 tireur shooter 
 
 garde -chasse gamekeeper 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 67 
 
 OF BIRDS. 
 
 oweaa bird 
 
 oiselet, oisillon little bird 
 
 volaille 
 
 coq 
 
 poule 
 
 poalet 
 
 pouss^n 
 
 cochet 
 
 poularde 
 
 chapon 
 
 coq-d'Iiide, 
 din don 
 
 dinde 
 
 dindonneau 
 
 oie 
 
 jar 
 
 oison 
 
 canard 
 
 cane 
 
 caneton, ca- 
 nette 
 
 pigeon 
 
 colombe 
 serin, canari 
 
 perroquet 
 
 perruche 
 
 moineau, 
 
 passceau 
 hirondelle 
 martinet 
 rossigncl 
 chardonneret 
 pinson 
 verdier 
 bouvreuil 
 linot, linote 
 rouge-gorge tn. 
 merle m. 
 grive 
 geai 
 pie 
 
 alouette 
 bergeronnette 
 alcyon, ou mar- 
 
 tin-pe*cheur 
 pivert 
 
 fowl 
 
 cock 
 
 hen 
 
 chicken 
 
 young chicken 
 
 cockerel 
 
 pullet 
 
 capon 
 
 > turkey-cock 
 
 turkey-hen 
 
 young turkey 
 
 goose 
 
 gander 
 
 gosling 
 
 drake 
 
 duck 
 
 > duckling 
 
 pigeon 
 dove 
 
 canary bird 
 parrot 
 paroquet 
 
 > sparrow 
 
 swallow 
 
 mart in 
 
 nightingale 
 
 goldfinch 
 
 chaffinch 
 
 greenfinch 
 
 bullfinch 
 
 linnet 
 
 redbreast, 
 
 blackbird 
 
 thrush 
 
 magpie 
 
 lark 
 
 wagtail 
 
 ( kingfisher 
 
 woodnecker 
 
 robin 
 
 mesange 
 
 pluvier 
 
 roitelet 
 
 vanneau 
 
 butor 
 
 bec-figue r». 
 
 £tourneau 
 
 sansonnet 
 
 bruant 
 
 coucou 
 
 freux, grolle 
 
 corbeau 
 
 corneille 
 
 hibou 
 
 chouette 
 
 buse 
 
 choucas 
 
 aigle 
 
 aiglon 
 
 £pervier 
 
 emouchet 
 
 milan 
 
 faucon 
 
 cormoran 
 
 plongeon 
 
 heron 
 
 cigogne 
 
 outarde 
 
 pelican 
 
 autour 
 
 vautour 
 
 griffon 
 
 huppe 
 
 mouette 
 
 perdrix 
 
 bartavelle 
 
 perdreau 
 
 caille 
 
 cailleteau 
 
 faisan 
 
 faisandeau 
 
 b^casse 
 
 b^cassine 
 
 ortolan 
 
 tourtereHe 
 
 7* 
 
 tit 
 
 plover 
 
 wren 
 
 lapwing 
 
 bittern 
 
 beccafico 
 
 starling 
 
 starling 
 
 yellow-hammer 
 
 cuckoo 
 
 rook 
 
 raven 
 
 crow 
 
 owl 
 
 screech-owl 
 
 buzzard 
 
 chough 
 
 eagle 
 
 eaglet 
 
 sparrow-hawk 
 
 musket-hawk 
 
 kite 
 
 falcon 
 
 cormorant 
 
 diver 
 
 heron 
 
 stork 
 
 buskard 
 
 pelican 
 
 gos-hawh 
 
 vulture 
 
 griffin 
 
 lapwing 
 
 partridge 
 ? large red par- 
 5 tridge 
 
 young partridge 
 
 quail 
 
 young quail 
 
 pheasant 
 
 young pheasant 
 
 woodcock 
 
 snipe 
 
 ortolan 
 
 turtle-dove 
 
68 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 ge*linotte 
 francoHn 
 
 wood-hen 
 
 autruche 
 
 ostrich 
 
 heath-cock 
 
 pintade 
 
 pintado 
 
 ramier 
 
 wood-pigeon 
 
 fou-de-bassan 
 
 gannet 
 
 macreuse 
 
 sea-duck 
 
 pingoin 
 
 razor-bill 
 
 sarcelle 
 
 teal 
 
 chauvre-souris 
 
 bat 
 
 grue 
 courlis 
 
 crane 
 curlew 
 
 chasse-aux- 
 oiseaux 
 
 > fowling 
 
 foulque 
 
 > cooti moorcock, 
 
 appeau 
 
 bird-call 
 
 I or hen 
 
 gluaux 
 
 Ixmt twigs 
 
 poule-d'eau 
 
 moor-hen 
 
 trebucbet 
 
 birdrtrap 
 
 paon 
 
 peacock 
 
 filets 
 
 nets 
 
 paonne 
 
 pea-hen 
 
 o-iseleur 
 
 bird-catcher 
 
 paonneau 
 
 young peacock 
 
 oiselier 
 
 bird-sell* 
 
 eigne m. 
 
 swan 
 
 voliere 
 
 aviary 
 
 
 OF FISHES, 
 
 
 poisson 
 
 fish 
 
 homard, lan- 
 
 \ lobster 
 
 esturgeon 
 
 sturgeon 
 
 gouste 
 
 turbot 
 
 turbot 
 
 ecrevisse-de- 
 
 saumon 
 
 salmon 
 
 mer 
 
 rouget 
 
 roach 
 
 ecrevisse 
 
 crawfish 
 
 brochet 
 
 pike 
 
 crabe m. 
 
 crab 
 
 carpe 
 
 carp 
 
 crevette 
 
 prawn 
 
 truite 
 
 trout 
 
 chevrette 
 
 shrimp 
 
 perche 
 
 perch 
 
 anguille 
 
 eel 
 
 cabillaud 
 
 fresh cod 
 
 anchois 
 
 anchovy 
 
 morue 
 
 stockfish 
 
 goujon 
 
 gudgeon 
 
 raie 
 
 skate 
 
 veron 
 
 minnvw 
 
 tanche 
 
 tench 
 
 lotte, barbottc 
 
 \ eel-pout 
 
 eperlan 
 
 smelt 
 
 loche 
 
 ( loach, groundt 
 
 maquereau 
 
 mackerel 
 
 \ ting 
 
 surmulet 
 
 mullet 
 
 morue salee 
 
 salt-fish 
 
 carrelet 
 
 flounder 
 
 barbue 
 
 dab 
 
 barbeau 
 alose 
 
 barbel 
 shad 
 
 marsoin 
 
 S sea-hog, por 
 \ poise 
 
 sole 
 
 sole 
 
 espadon 
 
 sawfish 
 
 sardine 
 
 sprat 
 
 r ircelaine 
 
 sea-snail 
 
 thon 
 
 tunny 
 
 tortue 
 
 tortoise 
 
 plie 
 
 plaice 
 
 huitre 
 
 oyster 
 
 congre m. 
 
 conger 
 
 petoncle 
 
 cockle 
 
 merlan 
 
 whiting 
 
 moule 
 
 muscle 
 
 merluche 
 
 haddock 
 
 baleine 
 
 xchale 
 
 hareng 
 
 herring 
 
 cachalot 
 
 cachalot 
 
 seche 
 
 cuttle Jish 
 burt, hretfish 
 
 requin 
 
 shark 
 
 liraande 
 
 dauphin 
 
 dolphin 
 
 lamproie 
 
 lamprey 
 
 chien-raarin 
 
 sea-dog 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 69 
 
 loup-marm 
 herisson-de- 
 
 mer 
 frai 
 fMtin 
 laite 
 
 CEufs 
 
 maseau 
 ouies 
 
 sea-wolf 
 sea-urchin 
 
 fry 
 
 young fish 
 
 soft roe 
 j spawn, hard 
 I roe 
 
 snout 
 
 gills 
 
 nageoires 
 ecailles 
 
 fint 
 scales 
 c o quill es shells 
 
 arrites bones 
 
 pinces, braques claws 
 appat, amorce bait 
 pecheur fisherman 
 
 peche fishery 
 
 peche a-la- > ,. 
 ligne I angling 
 
 
 OF REPTILES AND INSECTS 
 
 
 grenouille 
 
 f r og 
 
 pou 
 
 louse 
 
 serpent 
 
 serpent 
 
 lente 
 
 nit 
 
 couleuvre 
 
 adder 
 
 puce 
 
 flea 
 
 vipere 
 
 viper 
 
 punaise 
 
 bug 
 
 scorpion 
 
 scorpion 
 
 chenille 
 
 caterpillar 
 
 spic 
 
 aspic k 
 
 papillon 
 
 butterfly 
 
 basilic 
 
 basilisk 
 
 mouche 
 
 fly 
 
 dragon 
 
 dragon 
 
 abeille 
 
 bee 
 
 tarentule 
 
 tarantula 
 
 frelon 
 
 hornet 
 
 crapaud 
 
 toad 
 
 bourdon 
 
 drone 
 
 lizard 
 
 lizard 
 
 guepe 
 
 wasp 
 
 sang-sue 
 
 leech 
 
 taon 
 
 °xfly 
 
 limace 
 
 slug 
 
 cousin 
 
 gnat 
 
 ver 
 
 worm 
 
 cantharide 
 
 Sp&nish-fly 
 
 ver-luisant 
 
 glow-worm 
 
 hanneton 
 
 cockchafer 
 
 ver-coq«in 
 
 tine- grub 
 
 sauterelle 
 
 grasshopper 
 
 ver-i-soie 
 
 silk- worm 
 
 cigale 
 
 balm-cricket 
 
 escargot 
 
 snail 
 
 araign£e 
 
 spider 
 
 escarbot 
 grillon 
 
 beetle 
 
 cricket 
 
 toile-d'araig- 
 nee 
 
 i cobweb 
 
 perce-oreill< 
 teigue 
 
 i m. ear-wig 
 moth 
 
 essaim-d'a- 
 beilles 
 
 I swarm of bee 
 
 ciron 
 
 hand- worm 
 
 mlel 
 
 honey 
 
 fourrai 
 
 ant 
 
 cire 
 
 wax 
 
 cbarancon 
 
 weevil 
 
 rayon-de-raiel 
 
 honeycomb 
 
 cloporte m. 
 
 wood-louse 
 
 ruche 
 
 hive 
 
 tique 
 
 tick 
 
 fourmiliere 
 
 ant-hill 
 
 or 
 
 argent 
 
 gold 
 silver 
 
 OF METALS, &C. 
 
 platine 
 vermeil 
 
 platina 
 silver-gilt 
 
70 
 
 cuivre 
 
 air am 
 
 laiton 
 
 bronze 
 
 slmilor 
 
 fer 
 
 fil-d'archal 
 
 acier 
 
 fer-blanc 
 
 etain 
 
 plonib 
 
 mercure 
 
 vif-argent 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 copper 
 
 brass 
 
 laU en-wire 
 
 b reuse 
 
 pinchbeck 
 
 iron 
 
 wire 
 
 steel 
 
 iron-tinned 
 
 tin, pewter 
 
 lead 
 
 mercury 
 
 quicksilver 
 
 soufre 
 
 nitre 
 
 saltpetre 
 
 bitume 
 
 antimoine 
 
 arsenic 
 
 alum 
 
 couperose/. 
 
 vitriol 
 
 carmin 
 
 pastel 
 
 ocref. 
 
 vermillion 
 
 sulphur 
 
 nitre 
 
 saltpetre 
 
 bitumen 
 
 antimony 
 
 arsenic 
 
 alum 
 
 copperas 
 
 vitriol 
 
 carmine 
 
 pastel 
 
 ochre 
 
 red-lead 
 
 blanc 
 
 noir 
 
 bleu 
 
 vert 
 
 gris 
 
 orange 
 
 diamant 
 
 topaze 
 
 6meraude 
 
 saphir 
 
 escarboucle 
 
 rubis 
 
 OF COLOURS. 
 
 white 
 
 rouge 
 
 black 
 
 iaune 
 
 blue 
 
 brun 
 
 green 
 
 pourpre 
 
 grey 
 
 e carl ate 
 
 orange colour 
 
 indigo 
 
 OF PRECIOUS STONE! 
 
 diamond 
 
 amethyste 
 
 topaz 
 
 comaline 
 
 emerald 
 
 onyx 
 
 sapphire 
 
 agathe 
 
 carbuncle 
 
 corail 
 
 ruby 
 
 perle 
 
 red 
 
 yellow 
 
 brown 
 
 purple 
 
 scarlet 
 
 indigo 
 
 amethyst 
 
 cornelian 
 
 onyx 
 
 agate 
 
 coral 
 
 pearl 
 
 OF THE PRINCIPAL COUNTRIES. 
 
 France 
 
 Italie 
 
 Espagne 
 
 Portugal 
 
 Turquie 
 
 Allemagne 
 
 Suisse 
 
 Prusse 
 
 Pologne 
 
 Boheme 
 
 Hongrie 
 
 France 
 
 Italy 
 
 Spain 
 
 Portugal 
 
 Turkey 
 
 Germany 
 
 Switzerland 
 
 Prussia 
 
 Poland 
 
 Bohemia 
 
 Hungary 
 
 Hollande 
 
 les Pays-Bas 
 
 Angleterre 
 
 Ecosse 
 
 Irlande 
 
 Russie 
 
 Dan em arc 
 
 Suede 
 
 Norvdge 
 
 Tartarie 
 
 Arabie 
 
 Holland 
 
 the Netherlands 
 
 England 
 
 Scotland 
 
 Ireland 
 
 Russia 
 
 Denmark 
 
 Sweden 
 
 Norway 
 
 Tartary 
 
 Arabia 
 
Perse 
 
 Inde 
 
 Chine 
 
 Mogol 
 
 Ben gale 
 
 Malabar 
 
 Japon 
 
 Barbarie 
 
 Egypte 
 
 Biledulgerid 
 
 Zaara 
 
 Nigritie 
 
 Guinee 
 
 Etbiopie 
 
 Zanguebar 
 
 Monomotapa 
 
 VUUi 
 
 Persia 
 
 Mono6mugi 
 
 Monoemugi 
 
 India 
 
 Caffrerie 
 
 Caffraria 
 
 China 
 
 Abyssinie 
 
 Abyssinia 
 
 Mogul 
 
 Canada 
 
 Canada 
 
 Bengal 
 Malabar 
 
 Pensylvanie 
 
 Pennsylvania 
 
 Maryland 
 
 Maryland 
 
 Japan 
 
 Virginie 
 
 Virginia 
 
 Barbary 
 
 Caroline 
 
 Carolina 
 
 Egypt 
 
 Georgie 
 
 Georgia 
 
 Biledulgerid 
 
 Perou 
 
 Peru 
 
 Zaars, 
 
 Paraguay 
 
 Paraguay 
 
 Nigritia 
 
 Chili 
 
 Chili 
 
 Guinea 
 
 Bresil 
 
 Brazil 
 
 Ethiopia 
 
 Guiane 
 
 Guiana 
 
 Zanguebar 
 
 St. Domingue 
 
 St. Domingo 
 
 Monomotapa 
 
 Jama'ique 
 
 Jamaica 
 
 71 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES 
 
 The learner is to render the English definite article 
 
 !le before a noun masculine ^ 
 
 la before a noun feminine I in the singu- 
 
 V before a noun masculine or feminine [ lar. 
 begining with a vowel or h mute J 
 I Us before nouns of either gender in the plural and the 
 ^ indefinite. 
 , ( un before a noun masculine singular. 
 
 the by 
 
 une before a noun feminiue singular. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 the plants 
 a man 
 a worrxin 
 a hero. 
 
 Le livre the ho ok Its nlnntes 
 
 la rue the street un hommo 
 
 Tame the soul une fenirae 
 
 Pbistoire the history un heros 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 The wood ; the forest ; the houses ; the men ; the court ; 
 
 hois m. fortit f. maisons pi. lunnmes pi. our f. 
 
 the foot ; the arms ; the room ; the garden ; the windows ; 
 
 pied in. bras pi. chambre f. jardin m. fenitresp]. 
 
 a history ; a novel ; a foreigner ; a walk ; a day ; 
 
 histoircL roman m. Hr anger m. promenade f. jour m. 
 
 a night ; the sun ; the moon ; tlie stars ; a body ; a card ; 
 
 ■Ml f. soleil m. liuie f. ttoiles pi. corps m. carte L 
 
 a crown. 
 
 6cu m. 
 
 He will render the English prepositions 
 of and/rcwi by de * 
 by d 
 
 [and when followed by the article, thus: 
 
72* 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 u S a 1 
 
 toah Y\cii 
 
 ' du before a noun masculine singular beginning witii 
 i a consonant or h aspirated 
 
 of the by < de la before a noun feminine singular 
 
 ) de V before any noun beginning with a vowel or h mute 
 k des before any noun in the plural. 
 " au before a noun masculine singular beginning with 
 % a consonant or h aspirated 
 
 to the by 2 a la before a noun feminine singular 
 
 J a V before any noun beginning with a vowel or h mute 
 \ aux before any noun in the plural. 
 And when "these prepositions are followed by a or an, thus : 
 * -U $ rf'Mn before a noun masculine 
 °J a 7 J d*une before a noun feminine 
 a un before a noun masculine 
 i une before a noun feminine. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Du pare of the park a l'esprit to the mind 
 
 de la riviere of the river aux carrosses to the coaches 
 
 de l'esprit of the mind d'un jour of a day 
 
 des carrosses of the coaches d'une nuit of a night 
 
 au pare to the park a un jour to a day 
 
 a la riviere to the river a une nuit to a night 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 The palace of the king ; of the queen ; of the man ; of the 
 
 palais m. roi m. reine f. homme h m. 
 
 men ; to the king ; to the queen ; to the man ; to the men ; 
 hemmes pi. 
 
 from a balcony ; from a window ; of a prince ; to a princess ; 
 
 balcon m. fenetre f. — m. princesse f. 
 
 of the gardens ; of the evening ; to the courtiers ; of a table ; to 
 
 jardins pi. soir m. courtisans pi. f. 
 
 the master ; to a lady ; of the soul ; of the horse ; to a cat ; 
 
 maiire m. damef. dme f. cheval m. chat m. 
 
 of the houses ; of a carpet. 
 maisons pi. tapis m. 
 
 These same prepositions, when followed by the possessive pro- 
 nouns, my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, and their, will be both ren 
 dered thus : 
 
 Smy a 
 
 thy I 
 
 his, her, or xts I 
 
 your \ 
 
 their J 
 
 their 
 • my 
 , thy 
 
 I his, her, its 
 i our 
 ' your 
 
 their 
 
 by de 
 
 by d 
 
 Ingular 
 in. 
 
 plural 
 f. m. axd i. 
 
 mon 
 ton 
 
 ma 
 ta 
 
 me* 
 tes 
 
 son 
 notre 
 votre 
 leur 
 
 sa 
 
 notre 
 votre 
 leur 
 
 ses 
 
 nos 
 vos 
 leurs 
 
 mon 
 ton 
 
 ma 
 ta 
 
 mes 
 tes 
 
 son 
 
 notre 
 
 votre 
 
 leur 
 
 sa 
 
 notre 
 votre 
 leur 
 
 tes 
 
 net 
 
 vos 
 leurs 
 
TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 73* 
 
 and likewise, when followed by the demonstrative this or that, 
 
 these or those : 
 
 { ce before a noun masculine beginning 
 
 r*L- ,l * v. a* \ with a consonant or /i aspirated 
 
 of this or that, by de i ^^ & Qoun u beginning 
 
 to ihu or that, by a \ with a vowel or A mute 
 
 V cette before a noun feminine 
 of these or those, by de ces > before ^ f ei h d 
 
 fo these or Mo.se, by a c« J ■ & 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 de mon pere of my father a leur travail to their work 
 
 a ta mere to thy mother de cette terrasse from this terrace 
 
 de son frere of his brother de ce lieu of that place 
 
 dfe notre ville of our town de cette homme of this man 
 
 k votre maison to your house de ces arbres of these trees 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Of my clothes' ©/ f/u/ handkerchief ; of his pocket: of your 
 habits pi. mouchoir m. 2?oc/ie f. 
 
 letters; of our treasure; to their house; of this steeple; of that 
 letters pi. trisor m. maisoni. clocher m. 
 
 hero ; of this tower; of these models ; 0/ my sister; To 
 
 Aero* m A asp. /our f. modtles pi. sceur f. 
 
 your relations ; the top of this mountain ; to my friend ; 
 parens pi. sommet m. moniagne f. ami m. 
 
 of thine pleasures; of our duties; to their connexions ; of 
 
 plaisirs pi. devoirs pi. liaisons pi. 
 
 fcw acquaintances ; to my neighbours. 
 connaissances pi. voisins pi. 
 
 The Apostrophe (') marks, we have said, page 3, the 
 suppression of a vowel before another vowel, or h mute, 
 as in Peglise for /a eglise, &c. 
 
 This suppression is called elision ; a, e, i t are the 
 only vowels liable to be thus cut off, and even of the 
 suppression of the last of these, only two instances oc- 
 cur, viz. in the conjunction si before the pronoun, singu- 
 lar and plural, il, ils. 
 
 The a is suppressed only in la feminine, both when an 
 article and a pronoun. 
 
 But the elision of e occurs, not only in the mas- 
 culine article and pronoun /e, but also in many other 
 monosyllables, such as je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que. 
 
72 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 and in the compound of que, such as, parceque^quoiquey 
 puisque, jusque, vu que, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ia 
 
 la 
 It 
 It 
 
 je 
 
 me 
 
 tt 
 
 It 
 la 
 ce 
 de 
 nt 
 
 j qut 
 
 si 
 
 SI 
 
 parceque 
 
 quoique 
 
 puisque 
 
 jusque 
 
 vu que 
 
 desque 
 
 quelque 
 
 ramitie* 
 
 1'herbe 
 
 l'oiseau 
 
 l'honneur 
 
 j'ai 
 
 il m'oublie 
 
 je t'aime 
 
 il s'habille 
 
 vous l'aidez 
 vous l'obligez 
 c'est \Tai 
 un coup-d'oeil 
 n'oubliez pas 
 ' qu'attendez 
 
 vous ? 
 s'il arrivait 
 s'ilspouvaient 
 
 parceqirilfaut 
 
 quoiqu'il fasse 
 
 £ puisqu'on 
 \ vous dit 
 ( jusqu' a de- 
 l main 
 
 £ vu qu'il ob- 
 \ tiendra 
 i desqu'on 
 I saura 
 J quelqu'un 
 ( vient 
 
 for* 
 
 'la auntie" 
 la herbe 
 le oiseau 
 \e honneur 
 je ai 
 
 il me oublie 
 je te aime 
 
 il se habille 
 
 vous le aidez 
 vous la obligez 
 ce est vrai 
 un coup de ceil 
 ne oubliez pas 
 que attendez " 
 vous? 
 
 si il arrivait 
 si ils pouvaient 
 parceque il 
 faut 
 
 quoique il 
 fasse 
 
 puisque on 
 vous dit 
 jusque a de- 
 main 
 vu que il 
 obtiendra 
 desque on 
 saura 
 
 quelque un 
 vient 
 
 the friendship 
 the grass 
 the bird 
 the honour 
 I have 
 
 he forgets me 
 I love thee 
 j he dresses 
 I himself 
 you help him 
 you oblige her 
 it is true 
 a glance 
 do not forget 
 what do you 
 
 expect ? 
 if it happened 
 if they could 
 because it is 
 
 requisite 
 whatever he 
 
 may do 
 since they tell 
 
 you 
 
 till to-morrow 
 
 since he will 
 
 obtain 
 as soon as il 
 will be known 
 somebody 
 
 comes 
 
 It is allowable either to retrench, or to retain the final 
 e of the preposition entre, between, among, when it is 
 placed before the pronouns ewrr, elles, and autres ; but 
 it is always rescinded in the following compound words : 
 
 Entr'acte 
 «'entr'aider 
 entr'ouir 
 entr'ouvrir 
 
 an interlude 
 to help one another 
 to hear imperfectly 
 to half open 
 
 >for 
 
 entre-acte 
 I se entre-aider 
 i entre-ouir 
 
 { entre-ouvTir 
 and in a few others ; but it is indifferent to. say : 
 
TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 73 
 
 entre eux 
 
 entre elles 
 
 entre autres choses 
 
 entr'eux between them 
 
 entr'elles between them 
 
 entr'autres choses among other things 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The soul ; the heroine ; the mind ; he loves him ; she 
 time f. heroine f. esprit m. il dime 2 le 1 : elh 
 
 loves her ; I love this man ; you do not understand 
 
 2 /al; je aime homme m. vous * ne'entendez 2 pas 3 
 me ; he esteems thee ; he goes away ; it was the golden age ; 
 me \ : il estime 2 te 1 ; se en-va ce Hail de or 2 age 1 ■; 
 
 do not go there ; if he comes: if they please : what has he 
 * ne allez pas la ; si vienl ; Us veulent ; que a-t-il 
 
 said 1 till night ; though he says ; since he knows 
 
 dit ? jusque au soir m. quoique dise ; puisque- sail ; 
 
 f.-hen he saw : between them ; somebody is come. 
 lorsque vit ; entre eux; quelque un est vcnu. 
 
 N. B. In the following French negative modes of 
 speech, which answer to the accompanying English 
 translation, the caret points out the place which the 
 French verb must occupy, whenever it is not in the in- 
 finitive mood. 
 
 ne 
 ne' 
 
 pas 
 point 
 
 ne 
 ne 
 
 Net 
 
 ntvtr 
 nothing 
 
 nobody 
 
 not a jot ne * goutte 
 niille 
 
 ■no where 
 
 ne 
 
 f je ne suis pas, &c. lam not, &c. 
 
 nous n'avons } . , 
 
 . . > we nave not 
 
 point ^ 
 
 jamais il ne joue jamais he never plays 
 
 rien vous ne dites } ., . 
 
 rien • 5 you sa V nothm S 
 
 ne'personne j.as ^ je ne vox* per- I j see nobod 
 sonne 5 
 
 CI do not see, or 
 je ne vois goutte < / see not in tke 
 
 ( least 
 je neraisnulle > r . , 
 
 part j I part \I go nowise 
 
 But in compound tenses, it is the auxiliary verb that 
 parts the negative ne from the pas, or point, &c. that 
 accompany it, as nous tfavons point parle, we have not 
 spoken ; on tfaurail jamais cru, one could never have be- 
 lieved. 
 
 N. B. The addition of pas, or point, to the negative particle n& 
 must not be considered as a second negation : but only as a com- 
 plementary part of it. For in such cases, pas, point, goutte, ate 
 mere restrictive terms, nearly resembling the English words, jp^ 
 bit, tittle, sometimes added to not, with this difference, that pa$ 
 and point in French have nothing trivial in them. 
 
74 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 I do not say , I have not said ; I have never seen ; I nevei 
 
 * dis ai (lit ai vu 
 
 (tell a falsehood) ; I do nothing ) I have done nothing ; is he 
 
 mens fais fait est-il 
 
 not arrived ? does not he come ? I see nothing ; has he never seen ? 
 
 arrive * 2 vient 1 vols a-t- vu 
 
 he never loses his time ; that (is worth) nothing ; I met nobody. 
 perd temps m. ccla vaut rencontrai 
 
 There are many words which are alike in both lan- 
 guages, and others which differ only in their termina- 
 tion. 
 
 The expressions, which are perfectly arfike, are par- 
 ticalarly those that have the following terminations : 
 
 S animal, cardinal, fatal, general, local, moral, natal, 
 original, principal, fee. 
 < capable, fable, he. bible, eligible, he. noble, double, 
 ( soluble, insoluble, &,c. 
 
 { face, grimace, grace, place, preface, race surface, 
 ( trace, he. 
 
 chance, complaisance, extravagance, ignorance, 
 lance, temperance, &c. 
 ( abstinence, conference, continence, diligence, elo- 
 ( quence, patience, he. 
 
 ( artifice, auspices, edifice, justice, injustice, office, 
 I orifice, precipice, solstice, he. 
 
 miracle, oracle, obstacle, receptacle, tabernack, 
 spectacle, he. 
 i ambuscade, cavalcade, brigade, esplanade, sere- 
 ( nade, retrograde, he. 
 
 i age, adage, bandage, cage, cordage, image, page, 
 I plumage, rage, he. 
 
 i college, privilege, sacrilege, siege, sortilege, 
 { &c. 
 
 ( vestige, doge, barge, charge, orange, forge, rouge, 
 ( refuge, deluge, &c. 
 
 S globule, ridicule, animalcule, corpuscule, formule, 
 module, mule, pustule, valvule, he. 
 i bile, d6bile, agile, docile, ductile, facile, fragile, 
 I nubile, reptile, versatile, he. 
 c carabine, fascine, doctrine, heroine, machine, ma- 
 l rine, famine, mine, rapine, &c. 
 i action, fraction, legion, nation, opinion, passion, 
 I question, religion, Sic. 
 
 -al 
 -ble 
 -ace 
 -ance 
 ence 
 -Ice 
 -acle 
 -ade 
 -age 
 -ege 
 
 -£ e 
 
 -ule 
 
 -fle 
 
 4ne 
 
 fon 
 
 as 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
TO THE EXERCISES. 
 
 75 
 
 -ant 
 
 -ent 
 
 arrogant, constant, elegant, elephant, petulant, 
 
 piquant, poignant, vigHant, &c. 
 absent, accident, compliment, augment, content, 
 
 Element, frequent, serpent, &c. 
 
 Many other English words require only the change 
 of termination, in the following manner : 
 
 •gy 
 
 -ary 
 -ory 
 
 -<</ 
 
 -ous 
 
 -cur 
 
 -or 
 
 -ine 
 
 -ive 
 
 -ry 
 •dy 
 
 into 
 
 -aire 
 
 -oire 
 
 -ce 
 
 -te 
 
 -eux 
 
 -eur 
 
 -eur 
 
 -in 
 
 -if 
 
 -rie 
 
 -die 
 
 N. B. Adjectives in- 
 
 energy 
 
 — military 
 
 — glory 
 
 — clemency 
 
 — beauty 
 
 — dangerous 
 
 — favour 
 
 — error 
 
 — clandestine 
 
 — expressive 
 
 — fury 
 perfidy 
 
 -eux i 
 -in ) 
 
 energie 
 
 militaire 
 
 gloire 
 
 clemence 
 
 beaute* 
 
 dangereux 
 
 faveur 
 
 erreur 
 
 clande3tin 
 
 expressif 
 
 furie 
 
 perfidie 
 
 make their feminine in 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 the horror of vice ; the utility 
 
 f. f. h. m. art. m. f. 
 
 the atrocity of this action ; the violence of his 
 f. f. f. 
 
 the simplicity of that machine ; an audacious 
 
 t f. 2. 
 
 the absurdity of that opinion ; the military 
 
 f. f. pi. 2 
 
 an industrious nation ; an important victory ; an 
 2 f. 1. 2 f. 1 
 
 a dangerous animal ; a figurative 
 
 2 m. 1 2 
 
 his constant generosity, he Is 
 m. 2 f. 1 il tsj 
 
 his imprudence is visible ; his fidelity 
 50 n f. 
 
 is indubitable ; she is very attentive ; your clemency is 
 
 elle est tres- f. f. 
 
 admirable; the destruction of his fortune was the consequei^ie 
 f. f. fut i 
 
 The beauty of that fable; 
 f. 
 of science ; 
 art. f. 
 passions ; 
 
 pi. 
 conspirator; 
 
 m. 1 
 evolutions ; 
 
 ,,1.1 
 alimentary pension ; 
 
 2. f. 1 
 
 expression ; a famous general ; 
 
 f. 1. 
 incapable of attention ; 
 
76 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 
 
 of his temerity ; she is very scrupulous ; his condition is horrible ; 
 
 f. tres- f. f. 
 
 his parents are very miserable ; this history is incontestable ; 
 
 pi. sont trie- pi. f. 
 
 your facility is prodigious ; his perfidy is odious ; it was an hor- 
 
 f. f. f. ce etait 
 
 rible famine : the sublimity of his sentiments is still preferable 
 
 f. f. m. encore 
 
 to the energy of his expressions ; it was a decisive action ; the 
 
 f . f . 2 f . 1 
 
 carnage was terrible ; that obstacle is invincible ? this 
 
 m. Jut cet m. 
 
 instrument is not harmonious ; the prosperity of the wicked is 
 m. f. medians pi. 
 
 not durable ; your insidious presents are not acceptable ; his 
 
 2 pi. sont pi. 
 
 memory is truly extraordinary ; that is his principal occupation : 
 
 f. vraiment ce est f. f. 
 
 a central position ; his extravagance is visible ; these argu- 
 
 f. 2. f. 1 son f. ces m. 
 
 raents are insoluble. 
 
 pi. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE 
 AND INFLECTIONS. 
 
 There are, in French, nine sorts of words, or parts of 
 speech, namely, 
 
 T. Substantive, or Noun, 4. Pronoun. 7. Preposition, 
 
 2. Article, 5. Verb, 8. Conjunction, 
 
 3. Adjective, 6. Adverb, 9. Interjection. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 
 
 The substantive is a word, which serves to name a 
 person, or thing, as Pierre, Peter ; livre, book> &c. 
 There are two sorts of substantives, the svhrtajitive 
 
OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 77 
 
 proper, or proper name, and the substantive common, al- 
 so called appellative. 
 
 The proper name is that which is applied to a par- 
 ticular person, or thing, as Cesar, Cesar ; la Tamise, the 
 Thames. 
 
 The substantive common is that which belongs to a 
 whole class of objects. The word homme, man, is a sub- 
 stantive common, as it is applicable to any individual, as 
 Peter, Paul, John, &c. 
 
 Of these nouns, some are collective, and others ab- 
 stract. 
 
 Collectives express either a whole mass, as une armh, 
 an army : une foret, a forest : or a partial assemblage, 
 as une quantile de, &c. a certain quantity of; la plupari, 
 most part, &c. 
 
 Abstract nouns are the names of qualities abstracted 
 from their subjects, as, surface, rondeur, science, sagesse$ 
 surface, roundness, knowledge, wisdom, &c. 
 
 In substantives, are to be considered Gender and Num- 
 ber. 
 
 OF GENDER. 
 
 There are only two genders, the masculine and femi- 
 nine. 
 
 The masculine belongs to the male kind, as un hon*- 
 me, a man ; un lion, a lion, &c. 
 
 The feminine belongs to the female kind, as une fern- 
 me, a woman ; une lionne, a lioness, &c. 
 
 This distinction has, through imitation, been ex- 
 tended to all substantives, as, un livre, a book, is mas- 
 culine ; une table, a table, is femiaine, &c. see p. 37, 
 40, &c. 
 
 OF NUMBER. 
 
 There are two numbers ; the singular and the plvr 
 ral. 
 
 The singular expresses one single object, as tin hommt t 
 un livre. 
 
 8* 
 
78 
 
 OF THK SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 The plural announces more objects than cnc, as des 
 hornmes, des livres. 
 
 Proper names have no plural, as Londres, Paris, Mil- 
 ton, &c. 
 
 OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH 
 SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 GENERAL RULE. 
 
 TJie singular is ge- 1 
 nerally changed I 
 into a plural, by ( as 1 
 adding an 5. J I 
 
 Singular. 
 le roi the king 
 
 Plural. 
 Its rots the kings 
 
 la reine the queen les reines the queens 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 FIRST EXCEPTION. 
 
 Sing-. 
 
 " s ) remain i 
 ~* t alterable. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ^ le fils, the son ; 
 as \ la voix, the voice ; 
 
 le nez ike nose 
 SECOND EXCEPTION. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 les fils, the sons. 
 
 les voix, the voice*. 
 
 les nez the noses. 
 
 S'vng. 
 -a-x 
 -eu 
 •am 
 -ou 
 
 Plural. 
 
 f take an 
 ( and make 
 
 Plural, 
 bateaux, 
 feux, 
 voeux, 
 bijoux, 
 
 boats. 
 Jires. 
 voros. 
 jewels. 
 
 THIRD EXCEPTION. 
 
 Sing-. Plural. Singular. 
 
 -al t \ are changed I -aux > j cheval, 
 -ai# 5 into I -aux I ( travail, 
 
 Plural. 
 horse ; cievaux, horses, 
 work ; travaux, works. 
 
 * Those in -cu, that take x in their plural, are chou, caillou-bijov, 
 genou, hibou,joujou, pou; the others now follow the general rule 
 and take 5, as clou, clous ; verrou, verrous, Sic. 
 
 t Several nouns in -al, as bal, cal, pal, regal, carnaral, local, &c. 
 follow however the general rule, simply taking s. 
 
 t Those in -ail, making their plural in aux, are particularly bail, 
 sous-bail, coral/, email, wupirail, travail, v ant ail, ventail ; the rest 
 as attirail, ditall. tvt ntail, gtmvernail, portail, serazl&c. follow the 
 general rule. 
 
79 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 
 
 FOURTH EXCEPTION. 
 
 S'vag. Plural. Singular. Plural. 
 
 -ant* ? now drop taeir < -ansC "> enfant, child; enfans, children, 
 
 -cnt* ) t in polysyllables { -ens "£ Jmoment, moment ; momens, moments. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 fail 
 
 garlick 
 
 aulx 
 
 heads of garlick 
 
 These 
 
 bewail 
 
 cattle 
 
 bestiaux 
 
 cattle 
 
 aieul 
 
 grandfather 
 
 aieux 
 
 ancestors 
 
 six are <, 
 irregular 
 
 ciel 
 
 heaven 
 
 cieux 
 
 heavens 
 
 oeil 
 
 eye 
 
 yeux 
 
 eyes 
 
 
 • bercail 
 
 sheep fold 
 
 has no plural 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The flowers of the gardens ; 
 Jleur jar din 
 
 the palaces of the kings ; 
 
 pal fiis roi 
 
 the walnuts of their orchards : 
 
 noix verger 
 
 the feathers of these birds ; 
 plume oiseau 
 
 gods of the pagans ; 
 di"u paicn 
 
 of our gardens ; 
 jar din 
 
 the niceties of the languages ; 
 delicalesse langue 
 the woods of those countries ; 
 bois pays 
 
 the pictures of those painters ; 
 tableau pcintre 
 
 the melody of their voices ; the 
 =f. s voix 
 
 the jewels of my sisters ; the cabbage* 
 bijou sozur chou 
 
 these charming places ; 
 char mans 2 lieu 1 
 
 stables ; 
 {curie 
 churches; 
 igHu 
 
 lit- : 
 vie 
 
 architects ; 
 ' — tide 
 those times ; 
 
 temps-la 
 
 combs ; the playthings of our children : 
 feigne joujou enfant 
 
 nails. 
 cluu. 
 
 the horses of my 
 cheval 
 
 the fans of these ladies ; the (front gates) of those 
 eventail dame portail 
 
 the actions of my ancestors ; the evils of this 
 
 — aieul mal 
 
 tbe victories of those generals ; the works of those 
 =» — travail 
 
 the corals of those seas ; the (learned men) of 
 
 co rail mer 
 
 the presents of my parents ; 
 
 savant 
 th?. teeth of your 
 dent 
 the heads of these 
 tltt 
 
 'uly polysyllables in ~nt drop the/, but monosyllables retain 
 chant, chants ; gant, ganls; dent, dents; &c.exc< j>t, howevea 
 g* nt, gens. 
 
80 OP THE ARTICLE. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 OP THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The Article is a small word prefixed to substantives, to 
 determine the extent of their signification. 
 
 ( le before a mascu. \ 
 The French 1 substantive f the plural is les for 
 
 article is \ la before a femin. f both genders. 
 \ substantive j 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 c- (Zejour the day \ . < les jours (he days 
 
 g ' I la nuit the night 5 rlnr * \ Its nuits the nights. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The sun, the moon, and the stars, are the glory of 
 
 soleil m. lune f\ e.toile, f. pi. sont =f. 
 
 nature. 77ie king, the queen, and the princes are well 
 
 art — f. roi m. mne f. — m. pi. tris- 
 
 pleased. The rose, the violet, the tulip, the narcissus, 
 satisfaits. — f. violeite f. tulipe f. narcisse m. 
 
 Me hyacinth, Me gilliflower, Me jasmine, Me lily, Me 
 
 jacinthei. girojttei. jasmin m. lism. 
 
 honeysuckle, the ranunculus, are Me delight of the sight, 
 
 cJievre-feuille m. renoncule f. dllices f. pi. vue f. 
 
 Poetry, painting, and music, are (sister arts). The 
 
 art. potsie f. art. peinture f. art. musique f. sceitr f. pi. 
 day and the night are equally necessary. 
 jour m. rata* f. dgalement nicessaires. 
 
 The article is subject to elision and contraction. {Set 
 p. 73* and 72.) 
 
 Elision of the article is the omitting of the e in /e, or 
 the a in la, when these articles precede a noun begin- 
 ning with a vowel, or h mute. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 I'argent > . . •, f We argent themsney 
 l'histoirej insteaG01 \ \ a histoire the history 
 
 But in this case the place of the letter thus omitted is 
 supplied by an apostrophe. 
 
OF THE ARTICLE. 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 81 
 
 The soul of man without cultivation is like a 
 
 dme f. art. homme h m. sans culture f. est comme 
 
 diamond (in the rough). The history of Spain is sometimes 
 diamant m. brut ' =/i m. Espagne est quelquefoh 
 
 very interesting. (Look at) the amaranth and the anemone; 
 tres-intirtssante. Consider cs amarantht f — f. 
 
 what beauty ! Self-love and pride are always the 
 
 quelle=i. art. amour-propre art. orgueil sont toujours 
 
 offspring of a weak mind. Honesty, inno- 
 
 partage m. faible 2 esprit m. 1. art. Honnetete, h. m. art. 
 cence, honour, and the love of virtue are 
 
 — art. honneur hm'.' amour art. vertu f. 
 
 (very much; esteemed. Summer, autumn, and winter, 
 
 tres-estimis art. ete art. avtomne art. hiver h m. 
 
 are very changeable. France is separated from Italy by the 
 
 variables art. — Sf'paret de art. Jlalie par 
 
 Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees. 
 Alpes, pi. art. — pi. 
 
 Contraction in grammar is the reducing of two syl- 
 lables into one, and takes place, when the preposition 
 a, or de precedes the article ; in which case, instead 
 of putting de le before a masculine singular, beginning 
 with a consonant, or h aspirated, du must be employed ; 
 instead of a le } au must be used ; and before the plural 
 substantives of both genders, de les is changed into des, 
 and a les into aux. 
 
 Thu* 
 
 Du roi 
 du heros 
 au roi 
 au heros 
 des rois 
 des reines 
 aux rois 
 aux reines 
 
 is instead of 
 
 de le roi 
 de le heros 
 a U roi 
 a le h£ros 
 de les rois 
 de les reines 
 a les rois 
 a les reines 
 
 of the ki?ig 
 of the hero 
 to the king 
 to the hero 
 of the kings 
 of the queens 
 to the bugs 
 to the tautens 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Tlit- top of the mountains, and the bottom of the vallies 
 
 sommei in. mo4itag?ie fond m. vaUU 
 
 are equally agreeable. Silk is soft to the touch. The 
 
 igalcment ggrtablcs art. Soie f. douce toucher in. 
 
 happiness of a feeling m :i i- 'o relieve the wants of the 
 
 bonheur m. sensible 2 1 desubvenira be<*oin 
 
82 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 poor. A man given to pleasure was never a great man. 
 
 pauvre m. s. livri art. plaisvr m. fat grand 
 
 He obeyed the orders of the king. The warbling of birds, 
 
 // obeit a ordres gazouillement m.art. oiseau 
 
 the murmuring of streams, the enamel of meadows, the 
 
 — rem. art. ruisseau email m. art. prairie 
 
 coolness of woods, the fragrance of flowers, and the sweet 
 fraicheur f. art. bois parfum m. art fleur douce 
 
 smell of plants, contribute greatly to the pleasures of the 
 odeur f. art. plante contribuent beaucoup 
 mind and to the health of the body. 
 esprit sante f . corps m. 
 
 De and a are never contracted with la, before a femi- 
 nine substantive singular beginning wkh a consonant. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 De la reine of the queen a la reine to the queen 
 
 Nor are de and a contracted with le or la, before any 
 substantive singular, beginning with a vowel, or h mute, 
 but then the article suffers elision. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 De Vesprit of the mind de Vhommc of man 
 
 A Vesprit to the mind a l x homme to man 
 
 De Vdme of the soul a Vdme to the soul 
 
 De Vhistoire of the history a Vhistoire to the history 
 
 Contraction likewise does not take place, when the 
 adjective tout, all, every, intervenes between de, or a, 
 atid the article. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 De tout le monde, of every body. 
 
 De tous les hommes, of all men. 
 
 A tout le monde, to every body. 
 
 A tous les hommes, to all men. 
 
 De toutes les verius, of all virtues. 
 
 A loutes les maisons, to all houses. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The hope of success strengthened the cause of 
 
 esperance f. art. rtussite f. fortifia — f. 
 
 virtue, and weakened the audaciousness of rebellion^, 
 
 art. vtrlu f. affaiblit audace f. art. — f. 
 
 Fire of imagination, strength of mind, and 
 art. Feu m. art. — f. art./orce f. art. esprit art. 
 
 firmness of soul, are gifts of nature. We saw 
 
 fermtUi. art. awe desdonsm.pl. art. — f. NousvUnes 
 
OF THE ARTICLE. 83 
 
 with horror that man given up to avarice and vo- 
 
 avec = livre * art. — a art. vo- 
 
 luptuousness. Good cultivation is that which contributes 
 
 lupti f. art. Bonne culture f. ce qui conlribue 
 
 most to the fertility of Vie soil. More or less pain 
 
 le plus = terrei. Plus ou moins dt peine 
 
 is the lot of every body. The history of man under 
 
 partagc m. tout art. mondcm. =■■ art. dans 
 
 all the circumstances of life, is the study of the 
 
 toutes art. circonstance f. art. vie f. Uude 
 
 wise. Playfulness does not become all ages 
 
 sage m. art. Enjouement m. * ne sied ni a art. — m. pi. 
 nor all characters. 
 ni a art. caractere> m. pi. 
 
 I. General Rule. In French, the article always 
 agrees in gender and number with the substantive to 
 which it relates. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Le Hire que je ckerche, The book which I am looking 
 
 for. 
 La/ewme queje vois, The woman whom I see. 
 
 Les homines qui ttudient, The men that study. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The father, mctheT, brothers, sisters, 
 
 pirt m. art. mere f. art. frere m. pi. art. s&urs f. pi. 
 
 uncles, aunts, and several other relations 
 
 art. oncles m. pi. art. tante f. pi. pleusieurs autres parens m. pi. 
 w^re present. What we value is health, frugality, 
 
 etaient present. C& que nous estimons, c'est art. santt f. art. = f. 
 
 liberty, vigour of mind and body ; it is the love of 
 art. -— f. art. vigueuri. art. art. corps m. ce amour m. 
 
 virtue, reverence for the gods, fidelity to all 
 
 art f. art. crainte f. de dieu m. pi. art.=f. envers 
 
 mankind, moderation in prosperity, ibr- 
 
 art. monde m. art. — f. dans art. = f. art. for- 
 
 titude in adversity, courage, good morals, and the 
 
 ce f. art. = f. art. — m. art. bonnes-m&urs, f. pi. 
 
 abhorrence of flattery. 
 horreur f. h. m. art. =f. 
 
 II. General Rule. The article and the prepositions 
 a and c/e, whether contracted or not, are invariably to bo 
 repeated before every substantive. 
 
84 OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'csprit, les graces, et la beautt Wit, grace, and beauty, capti- 
 
 noxis captivent- vate us. 
 
 Je vis frier le roi, la reine, et les I saw yesterday the king, queen, 
 
 princes. and princes. 
 
 LHgnoronce est la mere de Ver- Ignorance is the mother of er- 
 
 reur, de Vadmiration, et des ror, admiration, and prejudi- 
 
 prtventions de toule esjyice. ces of every kind. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Innocence of manners, sincerity, obedience. 
 
 ar t # — f. art. mceurs, pi. art. =f. art. obeissance f. 
 
 and abhorrence of vice, inhabit this happy region. 
 
 art. horreur h. m. art. — m. habitent heureuse — f. 
 
 The plants of the gardens, the animals of the forests, the minerals 
 
 plante jardin m. — fortt f. — 
 
 of the earth, the meteors of the sky, must all concur 
 
 terre f. meteore del m. doivenl tons concovrir 
 
 to store the mind with an inexhaustible varieiy. Neither 
 
 a enrichir par inepuisable 2 =f. I * 
 
 suffering, punishment, nor kindness make any 
 art. peine, f. art. chdtiment m. * art. carresse \. pi. ne font nullc 
 impression on those minds. The lily is the emblem of 
 
 — sur time pi. lis m. symbole m. 
 
 virginity, candour, innocence and 
 
 art. =f. de art. =f. de art. — f. de art. 
 
 purity. 
 purete f. 
 
 Du, de la, de V, des, answering to the English partitive 
 some expressed, or understood, have by way of ellipsis 
 passed into habitual use. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Je mcuige du f,ain. I eat bread. 
 
 LLprend de la peine. He takes some trouble. 
 
 Nous tnangeons du hachis. We eat some hash. 
 
 Ellc congoit de la halne. She conceives a hatred. 
 
 Vous avez de Vatnitie. You have some friendship. 
 
 Vous prenez de Vhumeur. You go into an ill humour. 
 
 Nous cueillons des pommes. We gather apples. 
 
 lis vendent des oranges. Tbey sell oranges. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Give me some bread and butter. Offer him some 
 
 donnez-moi pain m. pr. art. buerre m. Offirt*~M 
 
OP THE ADJECTIVE. 85 
 
 meat. Take some salt. (There is)~ mustard. W> 
 
 viande f. Prenez sel m. Voilapr. art. moutarde f. A r cua 
 
 have some girkins. Shall I offer you some chicken 1 Shall I 
 
 «ro7w cornidwns pi. Foii5 offrirai-je poulet m. Fbas 
 
 help you to some fruit ? 1 will take (with pleasure) some 
 
 serviraije * — m. /e prendrai volontiers 
 
 broth. Bring me some bread. Pour me out some beer. 
 bouillon m. Apportez-moi Versez-moi * oiere F. 
 
 Drink some wine. Take some tea. Put (in) some sugar 
 Buvez tin m. Prtnez the m. Meitez-y sucre m. 
 
 and milk. I hear some noise. There falls some hail. 
 
 pr. art. lait m. J'enltnds bruit m. // fom&e gre7e f. s. 
 
 She has some pride. Have you any ink and 
 
 Elle a orgueil m. Avez-vous pr. art. encre f. pr. art. 
 
 pens? Put some oil and vinegar to the salad. 
 
 plumes pi. Mettes kuile, h m. pr. art. vinaigre m. sur salade f. 
 Eat some lobster. He has received some gold and 
 
 Mangez pr. art. homard m. ft. asp. 7/ a regu or m. 
 
 silver, 
 pr. art. argent m. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 The adjective is a word, which is added to a substan- 
 tive to express its quality, as, 
 
 bon pere good father bonne mere good mother 
 
 beau livre fine book belle image fine image 
 
 These words bon 9 bonne, beau, belle, are adjectives, 
 as they express the qualities of pere, mere, livre y 
 image. 
 
 A word is known to be an adjective, when it can be 
 properly joined with the word personne, or the word chose. 
 Thus, habile, skilful, and agrenble, agreeable, are adjec- 
 tives, because we can say personne habile, skilful person ; 
 chose agreable, agreeable thing. 
 
 In French the adjective takes the gender and number 
 of the substantive to which it relates. This difference 
 of gender and number is generally marked by the termi- 
 nation. 
 
 9 
 
86 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 - 
 OF THE FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF FRENCH 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule I. All adjectives ending in the singular in e mute, 
 
 are of both genders. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Un homme aimable, An amiable man. 
 
 Unefemme aimable t An amiable woman. 
 
 Rule II. Whenever the adjective does not end in e 
 mute, the e mute is added to form its feminine. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 prudent 
 
 sensible 
 
 polite 
 
 crooked 
 
 informed 
 
 Rule III. Adjectives in -el, -eil, -ten, -on, and -et, 
 to form their feminine double their last consonant and 
 take e mute. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 prudent 
 sense 
 
 
 f prudente 
 \ sensee 
 
 poli 
 
 /• 
 
 c polie 
 
 tortu 
 instruit 
 
 
 1 tortue 
 V. instruite 
 
 of each 
 termination. 
 
 Rule IV. Adjectives ending in/, change this letter into 
 -u, and take e mute. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 fbretfe short 
 
 * j active active 
 
 •''I naive ingenuout 
 
 l^neure new 
 
 Rule V. Adjectives ending in -x change -rr into t, and 
 take e mute. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 honteux C honteuse ashamed 
 
 yertneux /.< vertueuse virtuous 
 
 jaloux ( jalouse jealous 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 87 
 
 Rule VI. Adjectives, or rather substantives, ending 
 in -eur, derived from verbs, generally change the r into s, 
 and take e mute ; but several, mostly of Latin origin, 
 require -eur to be changed into -rice, in others -eur is 
 transformed into -eresse, and about twelve, as, anterieur, 
 citerieur, exterieur, inierieur, inferiear, meilleur, mineur, 
 majeur, posterieur, superieur, ulterieur, prieur, take on- 
 ly an e mute, and follow the Second Rule. 
 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 
 
 L trompeur 
 m.< inenteur 
 ( parleur 
 
 ( troinpeuse 
 /. ) menteu^e 
 ( parleuse 
 
 deceitful 
 
 lying 
 talkative 
 
 
 C acteur 
 m. < accusateur 
 ( admirateur 
 
 ( actnce 
 /.< accusatrice 
 ( admiratnce 
 
 actor, actress 
 
 accuser 
 
 admirer 
 
 * 
 
 C enchanteur 
 m.< pecheur 
 ( vengeur 
 
 ( enchanteresse 
 /.< pecherewe 
 ( vengeresse 
 
 enchanting 
 
 sinful 
 
 avenging 
 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 She is decent. . This house is well situated. This pear 
 
 Elle — Cette maison, f. bien situe poire F. 
 
 is too ripe. She is tall and \ve\\ formed. This story is 
 
 grand hien fait histoire f. 
 
 This person is very unsteady. This raouTi- 
 
 personne f. bien leger mon- 
 
 This road is not very safe. The door is not 
 route f. sur forte f. 
 
 It is 
 Ce 
 
 trop mur 
 very entertaining, 
 trts-amusant 
 tain is steep, 
 tngne f. escarp k 
 
 open. This room is dark. This street is too narrow, 
 
 ouvert. chambre f. obscur rue f. etroit 
 
 an addent custom. She has carnation lips. His 
 
 coutumei. a art. vermeil 2Zerref.pl. 1, Sa 
 memory will be immortal. His manners are natural. The 
 
 =f. sera — teL Ses manieres f. pi. naif 
 
 engagement was warm. (That Is) an original thought. This 
 action f. fut rif voiia neuf2 penstei.X. 
 
 cloth is the best of all. They are. delusive prt>- 
 
 tloffe f. meilhur f pi. Ce des trompeur 2 pro- 
 
 mises. He seduces by his fawning mar.ners. T1ib 
 
 messe f. pi. 1. stduit par flat t cur 2 manieres f. pi. 1. 
 
 delightful valley of Tempe h> in Thessaly. 
 
 dclicitux valllcf. Tempt dans art. =f. 
 
88 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS TO THE SECOND RULE. 
 
 The CoV owing adjectives double the last consonant in 
 forming the feminine. 
 
 m. 
 bas 
 cas 
 
 /• 
 
 basse 
 casse 
 
 low 
 
 hoarse, broken 
 
 m. 
 £pais 
 metis 
 
 epaisse 
 metisse 
 
 thick 
 mongrel 
 
 gras 
 las 
 
 grasse 
 lasse 
 
 fat 
 tired 
 
 gros 
 sot 
 
 grosse 
 sotte 
 
 big 
 silly 
 
 eCspres 
 
 expresse 
 
 express 
 
 vieillot 
 
 vieillotte 
 
 oldish 
 
 protes professe professed 
 
 monk nul nul/e none 
 
 or gentil gentil/e genteel 
 
 OTHER EXCEPTIONS TO THE SECOVD AND FIFTH RULES. 
 
 The following adjectives form their feminine by doub- 
 ling the I in the masculine before a vowel. 
 
 m. 
 
 beau 
 
 bel 
 
 nouveau 
 
 nouvel 
 
 vieux 
 
 vieil 
 
 <belte 
 S nouvel/e 
 > vieilte 
 
 fine 
 
 old 
 
 VI. 
 
 fou 
 fol 
 
 raou 
 mol 
 
 \io\le 
 
 - molfr 
 
 mad 
 
 soft 
 
 The following are entirely irregular. 
 
 m 
 
 blanc 
 
 franc 
 
 LVais 
 
 sec 
 
 Grec 
 
 public 
 
 caduc 
 
 Turc 
 
 lonsr 
 
 b6nin 
 
 malift 
 
 n.bA 
 
 blanc/ie 
 franc/ie 
 fraicAe 
 seche 
 Grecque 
 publicize 
 enduque 
 Turfite 
 longue 
 benigne 
 malig?ie 
 m. 
 concret 
 discret 
 indiscret 
 inquiet 
 complet 
 incomplet 
 replet 
 suret 
 pret 
 
 white 
 frank 
 fresh 
 
 dry 
 
 Greek 
 public 
 
 decrepit 
 
 Turkish 
 
 long 
 
 benign 
 
 malignant 
 
 m. 
 faux 
 roux 
 doux 
 
 aigre-doux 
 tiers 
 
 tors 
 
 ► make 
 
 J 
 
 coi 
 favori 
 jumeau 
 tratire 
 
 /• 
 
 concrete 
 discrete 
 
 indiscrete 
 
 inquitte 
 { complete 
 
 incomplete 
 
 re pi it e 
 
 surete 
 [prete 
 
 fausse 
 rousse 
 douce 
 
 aigre- douce 
 tierce 
 
 J torse, or 
 
 I torte 
 
 coite 
 
 favorite 
 
 jnme//e 
 
 truitresse 
 
 false 
 red 
 sweet 
 tart 
 third, he 
 
 twisted 
 
 still, mug 
 
 favorite 
 
 twin 
 
 traitor 
 
 follow the second 
 rule, except in the 
 additional accent, 
 and differing from 
 the numerous ter- 
 minations in ~et*, 
 
 Of the THIRD RULE- 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 89 
 
 Prefix m. makes prefix e f. and is the only adjective in 
 -£, which preserves this letter and follows the second 
 rule. 
 
 Some adjectives have no feminine, as bische, dispos, 
 fat, paillet, &c. ; others have no masculine, as blette^ 
 &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. 
 
 herbe f. soupe f. mais trop 
 
 It is a. foolish undertaking. There is no truth in all that. 
 
 sot enterprise f. Jl rty a nul verite f. dans tout cela 
 
 This water is not clean. It is a very silly history. It is in the 
 
 eauf. net. Ce 2 fol3=f. 1. a 
 
 newest fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon 
 nouveau mode f. beau =f. loi f. sur 
 
 that point. He lives in a state of luxurious idleness. This wax 
 — m. 11 vit dans * * mou oisiuett f. cire f. 
 
 is not very white. She is as fresh as a rose. The paint 
 
 com me — f. peinture f. 
 
 on that wainscot is not dry. His answer is a m*re evasion. 
 de lambris m. riponse i. franc defaite f. 
 
 The thing is public. That plant possesses a pernicious 
 
 chose f. herbe f. a malin 2 
 
 property. She is of a benevolent character. The avenging 
 qualitti.\. a * benin 2 humeur f. vengeur2 
 
 thunderbolt smote that impious wretch. He extended to 
 
 Joudre(,\. frappa impie m. * tendit 2 * 
 
 us a. protecting hand. This woman is jealous and deceit- 
 nous 1 — ttur 2. main {.I. femmei. jaloux faux, 
 ful. His temper is mild. This colour is too red. These old 
 
 Son humew; f. doux couleur f. trop roux. 
 
 clothes are good for nothing. 
 
 hardes f. pi. ne a rien. 
 
 OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH AD- 
 JECTIVES. 
 
 General Rule. Every adjective forms its plural 
 by the simple addition of s, as, bon, bons, bonne, Lonnes^ 
 poll, polis, polie, polie?. This rule is without exception 
 as it regards the feminine termination ; but the masculine 
 has the four following exceptions. 
 
 9* 
 
90 OF THt ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. Adjectives ending in -s or -x, do not change 
 their termination in the plural masculine, as gros, gras, 
 hideux. 
 
 2. Those ending in -au, take x in the plural, as beau, 
 beaux, nouveau, nouveaux. 
 
 3. Some adjectives in -al, change this termination 
 into aux, as, egal, equal, egaux ; general, generaux ; 
 but most of these have no plural masculine, as amical, 
 austral, boreal, canonial, conjugal, diametral, fatal, filial, 
 final, frugal, jovial , lustral, rnatinal, naval, pastoral, pec- 
 toral, special, venal, and some others. 
 
 4. Polysyllables ending in -nt, according to the most 
 general practice, drop the t in the plural masculine, as 
 excellent, excellens ; but monosyllables retain it, as lent, 
 slow," lents. The adjective tout, all, makes tous. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 They are envious and jealous. Those fowls are big and 
 
 Us = poulet m. pi. 
 
 fat. Owls are frightful birds. (There 
 
 art. Hibou m. pi. des hideux 2 oiseau m. pi. 1. Voita 
 
 are) some beautiful jewels. The two new operas 
 
 de beau bijou m. pi. deux r.ouvcau — m. pi. 
 
 have succeeded. Men are only equal in the 
 
 out reussi art. 2 ne 1 que 4 3 par 
 
 infirmities of nature. The general officers are 
 
 = art. — f. — 2 officitrs m. pi. 1. 
 
 assembled. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency 
 
 — bU — m. pi. 5071/ — Ses progris m. pi. 
 
 is slow, but solid. All his friends have been very glad to 
 sont solide ami m. pi. onl tie bien-aise dt 
 
 see him. Those ladies are tired with walking. You 
 
 voir 2 lei. rfamef.pl. las de marcher. Fous 
 
 have powerful enemies, but their efforts will be vain 
 
 avez de ennemi m. pi. mats leurs — m. pi. seront — 
 
 and useless. The four cardinal points are the east. 
 
 inutile. quatre point m. pi. 1. oriznt m. 
 
 west, south, and north, 
 
 art. Occident m. art. mi dim. art. nord m. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 91 
 
 OF THE DEGREES CF SIGNIFICATION OF THE ADJEC- 
 TIVE. 
 
 Grammarians commonly reckon three degrees ot 
 comparison ; the positive, the comparative, and the su* 
 perlntive. 
 
 The positive is the adjective expressing the quality 
 of an object, without any increase, or diminution, as 
 beau, belle. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 A child gentle, amiable^ and docile, is beloved by every 
 enfant m. doiix, cimable — aimt de tout 
 
 body. An ingenuous candour, an amiable simplicity and a 
 
 Umonde. — nu 2 =f. 1. =f. 
 
 lively artlessness are the charm of youth. The 
 
 piquant 2 naivete i. 1 charme m. art. jeun esse f. 
 
 sight of an agreeable landscape is a varied and rapid source 
 vue f. agr table pay sage m. varic 2 rapideS — f . 1 
 
 of delightful sensations. 
 delicituz 2 — f. pi. 1. 
 
 The comparative is so called, because it draws a com- 
 parison between two or many objects. When two things 
 are compared, the one is either superior, inferior, or equal 
 to the other ; hence three sorts of comparison, that of 
 superiority, inferiority, and equality. 
 
 N. B. The adverbs plus, moins, and aussi, which 
 mark these three kinds of comparison, are to be repeat- 
 ed before every adjective, when several are joined to the 
 same substantive, and are followed by the conjunction que, 
 rendered in English by than or as. 
 
 The comparative of superiority is formed by putting 
 plus, more, before the adjective, and que, than, after it. 
 
 EXAiMPLE. 
 
 La rose est plus belle que la no- The rose is more beautiful than 
 lette, the violet. 
 
92 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The republic of Athens was more illustrious than that 
 
 republiquei. Athene* a ete illustre ctlh 
 
 of Lacedemon. Homer was perhaps a greater genius 
 
 Lacidemone. Horn ere claii peut-etre . grand ginie m. 
 
 than Virgil ; but Virgil had a more delicate and more refined 
 
 Virgile ; mais avait Jin 2 delicat 
 
 taste than Homer. Milton appears (to me) more sublime 
 
 3 gout m. 1 h m. parait 2 me 1 
 
 than all the other epic poets. 
 
 autre 1 epique 3 poete m. pi. 2. 
 
 The comparative of inferiority is formed by prefix- 
 ing moins, less, to the adjective, and adding que, than, * 
 after it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 La violette est moins belle que la The violet is less beautiful than 
 rose. the rose. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasures 
 art. Naufrage m. art. morl f. funestes pi. m. 
 
 which attack virtue. The violet is less brilliant to tke 
 
 qui attaquent art. f. f. brillant 
 
 eye than the lily, a true emblem of modesty 
 
 m. pi. lis m.* veritable 2 embleme m. 1. art. = f. 
 
 and of pride. Autumn is less varied than 
 
 de art. orgueil m. art. Automne f. varti art. 
 
 spring, but it is richer. 
 
 printemps m. elle riche. 
 
 The comparative of equality is formed by placing aus- 
 si, as, before the adjective, and que, as, after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La tulipe est aussi belle que la The tulip is as t/eautiful as the 
 rose, rose. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Pope's images are as perfect as his style is har- 
 
 de Pope 2 art. — f. pi. 1 par fait son — m. 
 
 mouious. Delicacy of taste is a gift of na- 
 
 = art. Dilicatcsse f. art. gout m. don m. art. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 93 
 
 ture, as scarce as true genius, The love of our neighbour 
 — f. rare art. vrai genie m. amour du* prochain 
 
 is as necessary in society for the happiness of life, 
 
 = dans art. =f. pour bo'hturm. art. vie f. 
 as iu Christianity for eternal salvation. It is as easy 
 
 art. — nisme m. art. — nel 2 salut in. 1. aise 
 
 to dp good, as to do evil. 
 
 defaire art. bien m. de art. ?»a/ m 
 
 The three following adjectives, meillevr, better, pire, 
 worse, moindre, less, are comparatives in themselves. 
 
 N. B. As most beginners are apt to confound these 
 comparative adjectives with the comparative adverbs, 
 mieux, pis, and moins, because they are generally ren- 
 dered by the same English words better, worse, and less, 
 it may be adviseable to subjoin here tnese comparative 
 adverbs with their positives, that the difference of mean- 
 ing may serve as a distinction. 
 
 Meilleur, better, is the comparative of bon, good, 
 and is used instead of plus bon, which is never said. 
 
 Pire signifies plus mauvais, worse, or more wick- 
 ed, and is used instead of this. 
 
 Moindre means plus petit, less, or smaller, and is 
 ^used instead of these terms. 
 
 f Mieux*, better, is the comparative of bien, well, 
 and is used instead of plus bien, more well, which is 
 said in neither language. 
 o { Pis* is the comparative of tnal, badly, and is used 
 for plus mal, worse, which is likewise employed. 
 Moins is the comparative of pew, little, and is used 
 „for plus peu, which is never heard. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ce fruit-la est bon, mais celui- That fruit is good, bat this is bet 
 
 ci est meilleur. ter. 
 
 Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but 'it has 
 
 ellc a ete pire. been worse. 
 
 Ma depeuse est petite, mais la My expense is small, but yours is 
 
 votre est moindre. smaller. 
 
 > 
 
 o- 
 
 y - There are some instances of pis and mieusc used adjectivtlv, 
 but this i> not the place to notice them. 
 
94 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 II se conduit bien, mais elle se He behaves welly but she behaves 
 
 conduit encore mieux. still better. 
 
 II se portait raal, mais il est pis He ivas unwell, but he is worse 
 
 que jamais. than ever. 
 
 Jeparle peu,vousparlez encore J speak little, you speak still 
 
 moins. less. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 His reasoning is not better than yours. Your style is 
 
 Son raisonnement m. le votre. Voire m. 
 
 (a great deal) better than that of bis brother. The thickness of 
 de beaucoup celui son epaisseur f. 
 
 this wall is less than that of the next wall. This column 
 
 mvr m. celle voisin2 1 colunne f. 
 
 is less than the other in height and thickness. The remedy 
 
 autre en hauteur f. en grosseur f. remede m. 
 
 is ivorse than the disease. Your horse is worse than mine. 
 
 mal m. cheval m. le mien. 
 
 The adjective is in the superlative degree, when it 
 expresses the quality in a very high, or in its highest 
 state : hence there are two sorts of superlatives, the ab- 
 solute and the relative. 
 
 The superlative absolute is formed by putting tres, 
 fort, bien, very, before the adjective ; it is called abso- 
 lute, because it does not express any relation to other ob- 
 jects. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Londres est une trcs-belle ville. London is a very fine city. 
 
 Remark. The adverbs extremement, extremely, irtfi- 
 niment, infinitely, are likewise marks of the superlative 
 absolute, 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cet homme est extremement sa- That man is extremely learn- 
 
 vant. ed. 
 
 Dieu est infinimenl heureux. God is supremely happy. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 That landscape is v&ry divcrsifiedj very extensive, and infi- 
 paysage m. varit elendu 
 
 nitely agreeable on every side. The Alps are very high and 
 
 agr table de tout cote m. f. pi. haut 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 93 
 
 very steep. The style of Fenelon is very rich, and very 
 
 escarp e. — m. — 
 
 harmonious, but it is sometimes prolix ; that of Bossuet is 
 
 = il quelquefois prolixe ; celui 
 
 extremely sublime, but it is sometimes harsh and unpolished. 
 Sieve dur rude. 
 
 The superlative relative is formed by prefixing the ar- 
 ticle le to the comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and 
 to the adverbs plus and moins ; it is called relative, as it 
 expresses a relation to other objects. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Londres est la plusbelle des villes. London is the finest of cities. 
 Je pre/ere une tnaison de cam- I prefer a country-house to the 
 pagne au plus beau palais. finest palace. 
 
 Plus and moins with the article are repeated before 
 every adjective. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The most beautiful comparison, that there is perhaps in 
 
 compuraison i. que il y ait peut-etredans 
 any language, is that which Pope has drawn from the Alps, 
 aucun langue f. celle que tire f. de 
 
 in his Essay on Criticism. The most able men are 
 
 dans son Essai sur art. Critique f. habiU gens m. pi. 
 
 not always the most virtuous. The most ancient and most 
 
 toujours vertucux f. 
 
 gtneral of all kinds of idolatry, was the worship ren- 
 
 f. art. espece f. pi. = Hail culle m. ren- 
 
 dered to the sun. The least excusable of all errors is 
 
 du soleil m. art. = f. 
 
 that which is wilful. 
 celle qui volontaire. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTAN- 
 TIVE. 
 
 Rule I. The adjective always agrees in gender and 
 number with the substantive to which it relates. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Lt bonpere, The good father. 
 
 La bonne mere, The good mother. 
 
 De beaux jar dins, Fine gardens. 
 
 De btlles promenades, Fine walks. 
 
96 OF THE ADJECTIVE, 
 
 Bon is masculine singular, because pere is masculine, 
 and in the singular ; bonne is feminine singular, because 
 mere is feminine, and in the singular ; beaux is in the 
 masculine plural, because jardins, is masculine, and plu- 
 ral, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 These hills are covered with trees loaded with 
 
 coteau m. pi. couvert de arbre m. pi. charge de 
 fruit, already ripe. A pure stream rolls its limpid 
 
 — id. pi. deja mur. chair ruisseau m. route son limpid c 2 
 
 water through the midst of meadows enamelled with 
 
 crisial m. 1 a milieu m. prairie f. pi. emailli de 
 
 flowers. (Every thing) interests the heart in this abode, 
 
 fleur i. pi. tout intcresse cosur m. sejour m. 
 
 which is full of charms. Fly, inconsiderate youth, 
 
 * * plein altraicm.pl. Fuyez, — dire 2 jeunessef. 1 
 
 fly from the enchanting allurements of a vain w T orld : 
 
 * — tcur 2 altrait 1 — 2 monde m. 1. 
 
 its perfidious sweets are a slow poison, which (would 
 
 ses — de 2 douceur f. pi. 1 lent 2 — m. I qui de- 
 
 destroy) in your soul the noble enthusiasm of goodness, 
 
 truirait dans dme — enthousiasme m. art. Hen m. 
 
 and the precious seeds of sublime virtues. 
 =s= germe m. art. — 2 vertu 1. 
 
 Rule II. When the adjective relates to two substan- 
 tives singular of the same gender, it must be put in the 
 plural, and agree with them in gender. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ijjp, vox et le berger sent egaux The king and the shepherd are 
 apres la mort, equal after death. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Uprightness and piety are much esteemed, even by 
 
 art. Droiturei. &rt.pietef. tret estimi mime de 
 
 the wicked. A man in the most elevated, 
 
 michant pi. *art. dans ilcvS 2 art. Stat 1 
 
 and a man in the most obscure situation, are equally 
 
 *art. obscur 2 art. Stat m. 1. Sgalement 
 
 precious in the eyes of God. Pilpay and Confucius are very 
 
 = a m. pi. Ditu — — 
 
 celebrated among the nations m. of Asia. 
 eclcbre parmi p tuple pi. art. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 97 
 
 Rule III. When the two substantives, to which the 
 adjective relates, arc of different genders, the adjective is 
 to be put in the masculine plural, 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Monpere et ma mere sont con- My father and mother are cob- 
 tens, tented. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 His probity and disinterestedness are known (every where) 
 
 = f. son dtsintirtssement m. connu partout 
 
 The love of life, and the fear of death, are 
 
 amour m. art. vie f. crainte art. mort f. 
 
 natural to man. Ignorance and self-love are 
 
 — rel art. art. — f. art. amour-propre m. 
 
 equally presumptuous. My sister and brother were very 
 
 prisomptueux f. mon m. ont Itt 
 
 attentive to the instructions of their masters. 
 == — maitre m. pi. 
 
 NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 
 
 Numbers are divided into five classes, viz. cardinal, ordinal, 
 collective, distributive, and proportional. 
 
 CARDINAL 
 NCMBER. 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBER. 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
 NOUNS. 
 
 lun, une 
 
 premier 
 
 first 
 
 unite' 
 
 
 unit 
 
 2 
 
 deux 
 
 ( deuxieme, > 
 I second J 
 
 2d 
 
 couple, paire 
 
 
 couple 
 
 3 
 
 trois 
 
 trois ieme 
 
 3d 
 
 trio 
 
 
 trio 
 
 4 
 
 quatre 
 
 quatv ieme 
 
 4th 
 
 cleux couples 
 
 
 two couple 
 
 5 
 
 cinq 
 
 cinqui'eme 
 
 5th 
 
 
 
 
 ?> 
 
 six 
 
 sixieme 
 
 6th 
 
 ( demi- 
 \ douzaine 
 
 i 
 
 half a dozen 
 
 : 
 
 8 
 
 sept 
 huit 
 
 septieme 
 buiticme 
 
 7th 
 
 8th 
 
 huitaine 
 
 
 tieek 
 
 9 
 
 neu/ 
 
 neuviime 
 
 9th 
 
 neuvalne 
 
 
 < nine dayt of 
 I prayer 
 half a tcore 
 
 10 
 
 dix 
 
 dixtemc 
 
 10th 
 
 dizaine 
 
 
 11 
 
 onze 
 
 onzieme 
 
 11th 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 douze 
 
 douzteme 
 
 12th 
 
 douzaine 
 
 
 dozen 
 
 10 
 
93 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 CARDINAL 
 NUMBER. 
 
 13 
 14 
 
 15 
 16 
 17 
 18 
 19 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 SO 
 31 
 40 
 41 
 50 
 51 
 60 
 61 
 
 70 
 
 71 
 
 72 
 
 80 
 81 
 90 
 91 
 
 treize 
 
 quatorze 
 
 quinze 
 
 seize 
 
 dix-sept 
 
 dix-huit 
 
 dix-neu/ 
 
 vingt 
 
 vingt-et-un 
 
 vingt-deux 
 
 Irente 
 
 (trente*et- 
 
 <un, &c. 
 quarante 
 
 Squarante- 
 et-un 
 cinquante 
 < cinquante- 
 ( et-un 
 soixante 
 ( soixante- 
 > et-un 
 S soixante- 
 ( dix 
 
 { soixantc- 
 fonze 
 soixante- 
 douze, &c. 
 
 jquatre- 
 } vingt 
 
 I quatre- 
 : vingt-un, 
 [ &c. 
 
 {quatre- 
 ( vingt-dix 
 
 C quatre- 
 1 vingt- 
 ( onze 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBER. 
 
 trcizieme 
 
 quatorz?e7rte 
 
 quinzieme 
 
 seizieme 
 
 dix-seph'ewie 
 
 dix-huitieme 
 
 dix-neuvieme 
 
 vingtieme 
 
 ! vingt-et- 
 un ieme 
 Jvingt-deux- 
 ( i£ me, &c. 
 trentieme 
 c trente- 
 ( unieme 
 quaranu'eme 
 
 < quarante- 
 ( unieme 
 
 cinquantieme 
 ( cinquante- 
 ( unieme 
 
 soixauU'eme 
 
 Ssoixante- 
 unieme 
 Ssoixante- 
 dixzeme 
 Ssoixante- 
 onzieme 
 { soixante- 
 ( douzieme 
 
 < quatre- 
 
 ( vingfcieme 
 
 ( quatre- 
 
 < vingt- 
 ( unieme 
 C quatre- 
 
 1 vingt- 
 
 ( dixQme 
 L quatre- 
 
 2 vingt- 
 
 ( onzteme 
 
 13th 
 14th 
 15th 
 16th 
 17th 
 18th 
 19th 
 20th 
 
 21st 
 
 22d 
 30th 
 31st 
 40th 
 41st 
 50th 
 olst 
 60th 
 61st 
 
 70th 
 
 71st 
 
 72d 
 
 80th 
 81st 
 90th 
 91st 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
 
 NOUNS, 
 
 quinzame 
 
 vingtaine 
 
 trentaine 
 
 quarantaine 
 
 , cinquan- 
 1 taine 
 
 soixantaine 
 
 fortnight. 8c c 
 
 a score 
 
 a score fyahalf 
 
 two score 
 
 ( two score k 
 I a half 
 
 three scort 
 
 four score 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 99 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBER. 
 
 100 
 101 
 
 200 
 1000 
 
 2000 
 
 10,000 
 1,000,000 
 
 Un milliard, or 
 
 cent 
 
 eent- 
 un, he, 
 
 \ deux 
 ( cents 
 
 miile 
 
 C deux 
 1 miile, 
 f&c. 
 
 ( dix 
 \ mil 
 
 mille 
 
 ( mille 
 2 fois 
 ( mille 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBER. 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLEC- 
 TIVE NOUNS. 
 
 centame 
 
 2 centaines 
 
 1 millier 
 
 2 miiliers 
 
 1 myriade 
 1 million 
 
 1 hundred 
 
 2 hundred 
 
 1 thousand 
 
 2 thousand 
 
 1 myriad 
 1 million 
 
 ( itme 
 billion, a thousand millions, un trillion, &c 
 
 The formation of the ordinal number from the cardinal 
 does not require any explanation, except that -unieme is 
 only found in compound numbers, where premier and se- 
 cond are inadmissible. 
 
 When mentioning the days of the month, the French 
 make use of the cardinal instead of the ordinal number, 
 and say, le onze d'avril, not le onzieme, &c. le vingl-cinq 
 du mais prochain, and not le vingt-cinquieme, &c. except, 
 however, that instead of Vun du mois, they say, le pre- 
 mier, the first day of, &c. and sometimes le second^ 
 though not so well, for le deux ; but this mode proceeds 
 no farther. 
 
 Mille never takes s in the plural, thus, vingt mille is 
 twenty thousand, and not vingt milles, which would 
 mean twenty miles ; and when mentioning the christian 
 
100 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 aera, it is customary to curtail this word into mil, and to 
 write, for example, Van mil huit cent seize, and never Van 
 mille, &c. 
 
 There are many other numerical expressions used in 
 poetry, music, games, &c. as distique, tercet, Quatrain, 
 sixain, huitain, &c. solo, duo, trio, quatuor, quinque, 
 quinte, octave, &c. beset, sonnez, &c. 
 
 Un millier is very often employed for one thousand 
 weight, but quintal is never used except in the sense of 
 one hundred weight. 
 
 The distributive numbers are those which express the 
 different parts of a whole: as, la moitie, the half; le 
 quart, the quarter ; un cinquieme, a fifth, &c. 
 
 The proportional denote the progressive increase of 
 things ; as, le double, the double ; le triple, treble ; le 
 centuple, a hundred-fold, &c. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 A pronoun is a word substituted in the place of a 
 noun. 
 
 There are several kinds of pronouns, as the personal^ 
 possessive, relative, absolute, demonstrative, and indefi- 
 nite. 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Personal Pronouns are used for the names of persons, 
 or things. 
 
 There are three persons : the first who speaks ; the 
 second who is spoken to ; and the third is the person, or 
 thing spoken of. 
 
OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 101 
 
 PROJTOUNS OF THE FIRST PERSON. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 Subject, je 
 
 / 
 
 je loue Dieu 
 
 I praise God 
 
 . r me for a moi 
 
 to me 
 
 il me donne 
 
 he gives me 
 
 | J me moi 
 
 me 
 
 il me blesse 
 
 he hurts me 
 
 Lfi» j moi a moi 
 
 to me 
 
 donnez-moi 
 
 give me 
 
 f moi moi 
 
 me 
 
 aidez-moi 
 
 help ftie 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Subj. nous 
 
 we 
 
 nous louons Dieu 
 
 tee praise God 
 
 nh . ( nous for a nous 
 ? I nous nous 
 
 to us 
 
 il nous donne 
 
 he gives us 
 
 us 
 
 il nous blesse 
 
 he hurts us 
 
 They are both masculine and feminine, that is, of the 
 same gender as the person, or persons they represent. 
 
 In general, je and me are put before the verb ; moi 
 after it ; and nous before, but sometimes likewise afteT 
 it. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 I cast my eyes upon the objects which surrounded me, 
 
 portai vue f. s. sur objet qui environnaient me, 
 
 and saw with pleasure that all was calm and tranquil. Do 
 
 je vis avtc que ttait calme tranquille * 
 
 you not see in all the features of my father that he is 
 
 3 14 voyez 2 dans trait m. pi. que 
 
 satisfied with me ? We have told the truth. What were 
 
 content de moi ? avons dit veriie f. Qwe * 
 
 they saying of us ? If we desire to be happy, we musj 
 on 2 disait 1 Si desirous de devons 2 
 
 not deviate from the path of virtue. 
 
 1 3 nous icarter de sentier m. art. 
 
 
 
 PRONOUNS 
 
 OF THE 
 
 SECOND PERSON 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Subj. tu 
 
 
 thou 
 
 tu trains Dieu 
 
 
 te 
 
 for a toi 
 
 to thee 
 
 il te parle 
 
 Obj.< 
 
 te 
 
 toi 
 
 . toi 
 
 toi 
 
 a toi 
 
 toi 
 
 thee 
 to thee 
 thte 
 
 il te voit 
 
 ( donne-toi la 
 
 I peine 
 habille-toi 
 
 5 thou feartil 
 I God 
 ( he speaks to 
 I thee 
 he sees thee 
 ( give thyself 
 > the troubtt 
 aresi thyself 
 
102 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Plural. 
 „ , . C i/e, or ( vous louez ? you praise 
 
 kubj. vous Yyou \ Dieu \ God 
 
 ,. *S vous for a vous to you il vous parle \ l 6 ^ a 
 
 ^ vous vous you il vous respecte he respects you 
 
 In general iu and (e are put before the verb ; toi af- 
 ter ; and vous before, but sometimes after it. 
 
 Remark. Politeness has led to the use of the plural 
 vous, instead of the singular tu : as, vous etes bien bon, 
 you are very good, for tu es bien bon. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Thou art greater than I ; and from thee I have (at once) 
 
 es moi toi at en mtme 
 
 learnt humility and wisdom. I (was telling) 
 
 t emps 2 appris 1 art. = f. art. sagesse f. disais 
 
 thee that dancing is to the body what taste is to the mind. 
 te que art. dansef. m. ce que art. m. 
 
 You have shown us great talents ; when (will you show) 
 
 aves 2 montri 3 1 de — m. quand montrerez-vous 2 
 
 us great virtues ? How amiable you are ! How good you are 
 1 de f. pi. Que 3 1 etes 2 3 12 
 
 to have thought of us ! (It was said) of you the other day, 
 de. vous etre occupe On disaii autre jour m. 
 
 that you intended to spend a winter in London (in order to) 
 
 rolM vousproposiez de passer m. a —dres pour 
 
 see every thing curious which that city presents, 
 voir tout ee =(> que 1 cette 2 title 3 offre 4 de 5. 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON. 
 
 Sub 
 
 Singular. 
 
 . il m. he 
 
 i il perd son \ he loses his 
 
 temps J time 
 
 U f . ( elle travaille / she is always 
 
 •" I to uj ours ) at work 
 
 i diies-lui qne }tell him that 
 
 lui m. for a lui to him < je lui par- V / will speak 
 
 ( lerai ) to him 
 
 ^ ] ( dites-lui que ) tell her that 
 
 lui/. a elle Jo tor < vous/uidon- > you will 
 
 f nerez ) give her 
 
OF THE PERSONAL PROSOUNS. 
 
 103 
 
 Singular, 
 lui St. for le him 
 
 le m. 
 la/. 
 
 elle/. 
 
 lui 
 elle 
 
 him 
 her 
 
 r 
 
 je ne connais 
 que lui de 
 capable 
 je le meprise 
 je la respecte 
 
 elle her 
 
 le m. for cela 27 
 
 Plural. 
 
 elles/. 
 
 — they 
 
 leur m. /or a eux to them 
 
 leur/. /or a elles Jo /frfim 
 
 les m. 
 
 or eux 
 
 them 
 
 les/ 
 
 or elles 
 
 them 
 
 eux in. 
 
 — — 
 
 them 
 
 elles 
 
 — 
 
 them 
 
 i". 
 
 ( je ne le savais > / 
 
 I P as s 
 
 i / How 6u£ 
 /iim capa- 
 
 / despise him 
 J respect her 
 
 ne commit J /ie knows but 
 quelle S 
 
 Us ch ante ut 
 
 her 
 
 did 
 know it 
 
 not 
 
 i 
 
 i payez leur 
 < que vo 
 ( leur deve: 
 
 elles rient ? 
 
 ce C 
 
 rous ? 
 
 • devez ( 
 
 C dites-ffwr, que % 
 < je desire /eur<^ 
 ( parler f 
 
 $ vous /es trou- ) 
 \ verez j 
 
 il les admire < 
 
 i" 
 
 je ne vois 
 qu'eux 
 ne connait 
 
 qu'elles 
 
 they sing 
 
 (gentlemen) 
 they laugh 
 
 (ladies) 
 pay them what 
 
 you owe to 
 them (to men) 
 fe//them that 
 
 I wish to 
 speak to them 
 
 (to ladies) 
 you will find 
 
 them (men) 
 hz admires 
 them (ladies) 
 1 I see but them 
 \ (gentlemen) 
 he knows but 
 them (ladies) 
 
 All the personal pronouns je, tu, il, vous, ils, and 
 elle, tiles, when subjects, are put after the verb in inter- 
 rogations, as, 
 
 Singular, 
 je / okm-je payer? 
 
 Subject. 4 
 
 tu thou as-tu dit ? 
 
 il he | 
 •lie she 
 
 chante-t-iZ 
 bien ? 
 
 travaHie-t- 
 elle ? 
 
 must I pay ? 
 
 hast thou said 7 
 
 J does he sing 
 \ well ? 
 
 dees she u&rk f 
 
104 OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Plural, 
 fnous vet irons nous ? shall we go ? 
 
 vous you vlendrez-vous ? willyou come t 
 
 J c ' pis an. they chantent-i7s ? do they sing? 
 
 Relies/, they J ^ttt?^' { do the ^ " or * ? 
 
 II, le, Us, eux, are always masculine : elle, la, elles, 
 feminine ; and les, leur, of both genders, as well as lui, 
 when meaning to him, or to her ; in other cases, lui ex- 
 clusively belongs to the masculine. 
 
 All personal pronouns, when subjects, are placed 
 before their verbs, except in interrogative sentences, 
 and most of them likewise, when objects precede them, 
 except in the imperative affirmative. But the objective 
 eux, elles, lui for le, and moi, toi, soi, with one exception 
 of this last, in soi disant, styling himself, are invariably 
 placed after the verbs by which they are governed. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 He loved them, because they were mild, attentive* and 
 aimait m. parce que doux = 
 
 grateful. He (was saying) (to them), do you not know 
 reconnuissant disait ■* 3 1 4 saves 2 
 
 that the property of merit is to excite envy 1 She 
 
 que propre m. art. merile m. de exciter art. envie f. 
 often exhorted me to the study which is the most useful, 
 
 sovvent 2 exhorlait 1 itude f. * * utile 
 
 that of the human heart. They make us love virtue, more 
 
 celle 2 m. 1. font aimer art. f. 
 
 by their examples than by their words. What has been 
 
 par Uurs exemple pi. parole f. pi. Que 1 on 3 at-Z* 
 
 said of them ? Did they speak ot them ? Do you not see 
 dit eux ? * on 2 parlail I elle ? * 4 1 5 voyes 3 
 
 her ? With what pleasure she plays ! 
 3 quel pue ! 
 
OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 105 
 
 REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD 
 PERSON. 
 
 Singular. examples. 
 
 !. ( with a preposi- ) . ' .. n \- ( wtrv one draws 
 501 \ tion l $ chacun taC asei \ to himself 
 C 1'ee-oisme fait( e Sotism makes a 
 . < governed by the S ' § s -l) person see 
 
 501 { S verb Y 9 UM ne vo,t i none but him- 
 
 ( que soi { se , f 
 
 r se for 5 ^ 501 '' ^ ^" 5 ^ ^ C donne ^ es S h e g™ es himself 
 ' I mime ( louanges ( praises 
 
 • w < 
 
 O 
 
 for $ ^ elle-me- ( elle se fait illu-Js/ie imposts on 
 
 5 ^ ^ wte J sion £ herself 
 
 ^ C soi, or /iu"- > 
 
 se J or i meme \ ^ se P er d ^ e rw ™ 5 himself 
 
 - f° T \ "££•*■ j elle « bit. { *£*» "» 
 
 Plural. EXAMPLES 
 
 £ ils s'attribuent ) they attribute to 
 se for a eux-memes 1 la gloire de, \ themselves the 
 
 ( he. ) glory of &c. 
 
 { elles se prescri- Uhey prescribe to 
 se for a elles-m&mes 1 vent pour re- V themselves as a 
 
 ( gle de, &c. ) ru/e fo, &c. 
 
 f ils s'entredon- i 
 
 se/o, FunaFautr* \ ^•de "^^ 
 
 deaux 
 
 p. (they ex 
 
 5 ils «e sont dfc-f^ ST***" 
 
 se for eux-mtmes I honores ) graced them- 
 
 1 f selves 
 
 1' ' 
 
 , elles « sont flat- < /A '* *«f /«'" 
 se for elles-memes < ,, •> lered them- 
 
 f selves 
 se for Fun Fautre ils s'eutr'aident j '*$* e r °" e a "' 
 
 /orj' 
 
 frf* ) rent " "£ eaf each other. 
 
 Remark. &> is placed before a verb, and soi, after a 
 preposition, and sometimes after a verb. 
 
106 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 In a thousand instances we do not watch sufficiently over 
 
 * mille occasion f. on * veille assez sur 
 
 ourselves. The glory of the world (passes away) in an instant. 
 
 soi = f . monde m. s'evanouit en — m. 
 
 He gives himself (a great deal) of trouble. She tires herself. 
 
 donne se beaucoup peine f. lasse se 
 
 People should (very seldom) speak of themselves. Virtue is 
 On doit rarement parler soi art. f. 
 
 amiable in itself. We must take upon ourselves the care 
 
 de soi On doit prendre sur soi soin m . 
 
 of our own affairs. 
 ses propre affaire f. pi. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN RELATIVE en. 
 
 de lui of him « 
 d'elle of her 
 
 d'eux of them 
 r^ d'elles of them 
 de cela of that 
 d'ki hence 
 
 ifor-i 
 
 ' cet hommevous 
 I plait, vous en I 
 | parLez sou- j 
 
 vent 
 ' je ne crois pas 
 ) cette femme 
 | sincere, je m' 
 
 en mefie 
 * ces fruits parais- 
 ) sentbons, j'cw 
 \ manger aisvo- 
 I lontiers 
 f voila de belles 
 ) oranges, vou- 
 \ lez-vous m'e?i 
 I donner ? 
 
 ( on ne ma 
 trompe, 
 suis eur 
 
 ' il arriva 
 comme 
 ' part a is 
 
 pas 
 j 7 en 
 
 ici, 
 
 yen 
 
 de la thence 
 
 vousallez a Pa 
 ris, et monsi- 
 1 eur en vient 
 
 1 
 
 'that man pleases 
 > you, you speak of 
 
 I him often 
 
 I I do not believe 
 that woman sin- 
 cere, I distrust 
 
 ) her 
 
 | these fruits look 
 good, I should 
 I like to eat some 
 ) of them 
 
 i these are beautiful 
 oranges, will you 
 give me some 
 
 ) 1 ' have not been 
 I imposed \ipon % 
 C I am sure of 
 ) it 
 
 ihe arrived here 
 as I was set- 
 ting off from 
 hence 
 \you are going to 
 Paris, this gen- 
 tleman comes 
 from thence. 
 
yfor^ 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 107 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN, OR ADVERB 7/. 
 
 C C c'est un honnete ) , • r ; 
 
 ^ , . . , . ) i /• (he is an honest man* 
 
 a lui to htm < homme, fiez-vous- \ . . . ,. ' 
 
 (y S 
 
 v ,, . - beetle raison est so- \ that reasoii is good, 
 
 a elle ro Acr ^ Hd ^ je m ,^ refids £ JyieW tQ ^ 
 
 I ces argumens sont f these argumenhare 
 
 a eux to /Acm < P lt r 5ian ^ J e n V \ cogent J see no re- 
 Yvoa point de re-f ?/ | to \ bem . 
 ( plique J r * 
 
 £ accable de vos ci- \ loaded ithh your ci- 
 * vilites, je ne sais f vilitits, I do not 
 comment 3/ repon- ( know how to ac- 
 dre ) knowledge them. 
 
 ( j'ai eprouve cette ) / experienced that 
 a cela to it < perte quand j'y > loss, when I least 
 ( pensais le moins ) thought of it. 
 C nous partons de Ywe set off from Lon 
 ici here < Londres, quand > don, when you 
 
 vous y venez ) camehither. 
 
 a elles to them 
 
 c'est un endroit ) // w aj??ie p/ece, / 
 > intend to settle 
 
 la Mere < charmant, je 
 
 ( compte m'3/ fixer ) there 
 
 Remark. Y and en are always put before the verb, ex- 
 cept with the imperative affirmative. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 They speak (a great deal) of it. You like French 
 
 On parlc beaucoup aimez art. Francais 2 
 
 authors, you are always speaking of them. That is a delicate 
 auteur 1 * 2 parlez 1 Ce delicat 2 
 
 affair; the success of it is doubtful. See them ; I consent 
 =-. { . 1 succcs m. douteux Voyez \co?istns3 
 
 to it, but do not trust them. That is a fine appoint- 
 
 2 * 1 5 vouj 2fiez 4 3/ 3 Ce charge 
 
 ment : be bad long aspired to it. He has done 
 
 f. * depuis long-temps 3 — rait 2 1 a/ai/ 
 
 it ; but he will get nothing by it. 
 
 ne 1 gagnera 3 rien 4 y 2 
 
108 OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 These pronouns are adjectives, which denote the pos- 
 session of things. When we say, mon habit, my coat ; 
 votre maison, your house ; son jar din, his or her gar- 
 den ; it is the same as saying Vhabit qui est a moi, the 
 coat which belongs to me ; la maison qui est a vous, the 
 house which belongs to \ou ; Ic jar din qui est a lui, or a 
 elle, the garden which belongs to him or to her. 
 
 Of these pronominal adjectives, some always agree 
 with a noun expressed, and the others with a noun under- 
 stood ; hence there are two sorts of possessive pronouns. 
 
 Of those that always agree with a nojn expressed, 
 some relate to one person, and others' to several. 
 
 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES RELATING TO ONE PERSON, 
 
 for the 
 
 PERSON. 
 
 Cist 
 
 (2d 
 (2d 
 
 Singular, 
 mon, m. ma,/, 
 ton, m. ta,/. 
 son, m. sa,/. 
 
 Plural, 
 mes, m.f. my 
 tes, m. / thy 
 ses, m.J. his, her, 
 
 its 
 
 PRONOMINAL ADJP:CT1VES 
 
 RELATING TO MANY PERSONS. 
 
 of the 
 
 PERSON. 
 
 { 1st 
 
 2%d 
 
 ( 3d 
 
 Singular, 
 notre, m. / 
 votre, m.f, 
 leur, m.f. 
 
 Plural, 
 nos, m.f. 
 vos, m.f. 
 leurs, m.f. 
 
 
 our 
 
 your 
 
 their 
 
 
 N. B. These possessive pronouns in French always 
 agree in gender and number with the object possessed, 
 and not with the possessor as in English, for which rea- 
 son they must be repeated before every noun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mon pere, ma mere, et mes My father, mother, and bro- 
 frer*8 mnt a la camfagne avec thers are in the country, with 
 vos amis et leurs enfans, your friends and their children. 
 
 Mon cousin est alle consoler sa My cousin is gone to visit and 
 saur, qui a perdu son fils, console his sister, who has lott 
 
 her son. 
 
OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 109 
 
 Mon, ton, son, are also used before a noun feminine, 
 when beginning with a vowel, or h mute ; thus, mon 
 dme, my soul ; ton humeur, thy humour ; son amitie> his 
 friendship ; must be said instead of ma dme, ta humeur, 
 sa amitie. 
 
 EXERCISE. . 
 
 My principles, my love of retirement, my taste 
 
 — pe gout m. pour art. retraiie f. amour m. 
 
 for (every thing) thit (is connected) with learning, and 
 
 tout ce qui tient a art,, instruction, 
 
 my detestation of all spirit of party, (every thing) has 
 
 haine f. h. asp. pour tsprit parti tout a 
 
 induced me to prefer a life passed in the closet, to the 
 porti prSferer * art. vie f. * de * cabinet 
 
 active life of the world. Do not think, my daughter, that thy 
 = 2 f . 1 m, * pense que 
 
 candour, thy ingenuousness, ihy taste, so delicate and so 
 = f. ingenuite f. m. — cat 
 
 refined, and even thy graces, can shelter thee from 
 
 Jin meme — puissent mettre a Vabri de 
 
 censure. His wit, his talests, his honesty, 
 
 art. — f. esprit in. — m. honntteti f. h. m. 
 
 and even hU (good nature) make him beloved by every body. 
 
 mime bonhomie f. font aimer de tout le monde. 
 
 Our constancy and our efforts will (at last) surmount aH 
 
 = f . — m. * enfin 2 surmonteront 1 
 
 obstacles. I see nothing that can (be cen- 
 
 art. — m. pi. vols 2 nt 1 rien 3 que on puisse re* 
 
 sured) in your conduct. Their taste for the fantastical, !he 
 
 prendre daris conduite t. pour bizarre, m. 
 
 monstrous, and the marvellous, gives to all their compo- 
 monstrueux, m. merveilleux^ m. donne — 
 
 sitions, although very fine in themselves, an air of deformity, 
 f. quoiqut en elles-mlmes } — m. difformiU f. 
 
 which shocks at first sight. 
 qui choque a art. coup-d'ceil. 
 
 Of the pronouns, which, always agree with nouns tm- 
 derstood, some relate to one person, and others to several 
 persons. 
 
 Those which relate only to one person are : 
 
 m. Sing. f. Sing. m. Plur. f. Plur. 
 
 Iff, Le rntan, lamiennt y les miens, les miennes, mine 
 
 2d. Le lien, la limine, lis thus, les tiennes, thine 
 
 3d. Le Hen, lasicnnc, lessiens, Its iitnnts, his, hep, »U 
 
 11 
 
110 OP POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Those which relate to several persons are : 
 
 m. Sing. f. Sing. PI. of both Gen. 
 
 1st Le ndtre, la noire, Its nbtres, ours 
 
 2d. Le voire, la vdtre, les vdtres, yours 
 
 3d. Le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs 
 
 N. B. The real use of these pronouns is to spare the 
 repetition of the nouns, which have been expressed a lit 
 tie before. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Avez-vous toujours votre che- Have you still your horse ? 1 
 val t je n'oi plus le mien. have disposed of mine. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Is it your temper or hers, that hinders you from living well 
 ce humeur f. qui empeche de tivre 
 
 together ? If it be yours, it is easy for you to remedy 
 
 ensemble ce est il 2 aise 3 * 1 de porter remede 
 
 it, by mastering (your temper) ; if it be hers, redouble your 
 y en prenant sur vous-mtme ; ce redoubles de * 
 
 complaisance, attention, and good behaviour ; it is 
 
 — de — de proce'de m. pi. il 
 
 very seldom that this method (proves unsuccessful). If my 
 
 iris -rare ce moyen ne reussisse pas Si 
 
 friends had served me with the same zeal as yours, it 
 
 avaient servi meme sHe m. que il 
 
 is very certain that I (should have) succeeded : but yours have 
 
 ires-sur aurais riussi ont 
 
 been all fire, and mine all ice. All the pictures which we 
 eti de deglace tableau m. que 
 
 expected from Rome are arrived : there are some that are a 
 atlendions arrivis il y en a qui 
 
 little damaged ; but yours, his, and mine, are in good 
 
 peu endommagis «n 
 
 condition. We know perfectly well what are your 
 
 Hat m. savons parfaitement * quels 
 
 amusements in town, and I assure you we are very 
 
 — a art. ville f. — que sommes bien 
 
 far from envying you them ; but if you knew 
 
 Moigni pi. envier 3 1 2 connaissiez quels 
 
 ours in the country, it (is most likely) you 
 
 sont a campagne f. il y a toule apparence que 
 
 (would not be long) in giving them the preference. You 
 
 ne tarderiez pas a donner leur — f. 
 
 have opened your heart to me with that noble franknea6 
 avez ouvtrt — franchise f 
 
OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Ill 
 
 which so well becomes an honest man : this confidence well 
 qui si 2 3 sied 1 a honnete eonfiance f. 3 
 
 deserves mine, 
 mirite 1. 
 
 Remark. When through politeness vous is used for 
 tu 9 then votre, vos, must take the place of ton,ta, tes, and 
 le votre, kt votre, les votres, be used for le tien, la tienne, 
 les tien$) les tiennes. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Que vous ressenxhles peu a vos How little you resemble your 
 
 ncUres ! ancestors ! 
 
 Quand vous aurez entendu nos When you have heard our 
 
 *vison.i f nouttc9uteronsles votres. reasons, we will listen to yours. 
 
 §m. 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Relative pronouns are those which relate to a pre- 
 ceding noun, or pronoun, called the antecedent. In the 
 phrase, Vhomme qui joue, the man who plays ; qui re- 
 lates to the substantive homme ; V homme is then the an- 
 tecedent to the pronoun relative qui. 
 
 Qui 
 
 Que 
 
 Dont 
 
 or 
 
 de qui 
 
 who 
 
 which 
 
 whom 
 
 which 
 
 of which 
 
 whose 
 
 of whom 
 
 Dieu qui voit tout 
 
 < God who 
 I thing 
 
 leschevaux qmcourent \ the ho F ses 
 1 I running 
 
 ' '"homme que vous $ the man whom 
 
 Liquet, 
 
 Laqutllt 
 Auzquels | 
 Auxquelles*- 
 
 u<, 
 
 I cherchez 
 
 Sles lois que nous ob- 
 servons 
 $ liamlte dont vous 
 I vous plaignez 
 ( la nature dont nous 
 I ignorons Ze* secrets 
 £ les gens de qui vous 
 \ parlez 
 
 C c'est une condition 
 
 < sans laquelle il ne 
 
 ( vtut rien /aire 
 
 < to whomC ceux auxquels il s'est 
 
 adresse, ont refuse" 
 
 de le diftndre 
 
 which 
 
 sees every 
 
 which are 
 
 you 
 seek 
 
 the laws which we ob- 
 serve 
 
 the insult of which you 
 complain 
 
 nature whose secrets 
 
 are unknown to us 
 | the people of whom 
 you speak 
 
 it is a condition, with- 
 out which he will do 
 nothing 
 
 those to whom he ap- 
 plied, refused to pr«*~ 
 tect him 
 
112 
 
 OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Qttoi 
 
 I ce soul des choses a I 
 
 what < quoi v ous ne pen-< 
 
 ( sez pas ( 
 
 L la cause, pourquoif 
 
 which < on Va arrets esU 
 
 I connue i 
 
 these are things of 
 
 which you do not 
 
 think 
 the reason why he 
 
 was arrested, is 
 
 known 
 
 Qwt, que, and dont, are of both genders and both num- 
 bers. 
 
 Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article le, la, 
 les, with which it coalesces in the following manner : 
 
 Plural. 
 
 lesquels lesquelles which 
 
 desquels desquelles of which 
 
 aux quels auxquelhs to which 
 
 This pronoun always agrees in gender and number 
 with its antecedent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its 
 place, is always governed by a preposition. 
 
 Singular. 
 lequel laquelle 
 duquel de laquelle 
 auquel a laquelle 
 
 §iv. 
 
 OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Pronouns absolute are those which have no relation to 
 They are >be five following : 
 
 ( je vous dirai qui Va J 1 will tell you who 
 > fait \ has done it 
 
 \ vous pouves consult er < you may consult 
 qui vous voudrcz ( whom you please 
 qui consulterez- J whom will you con- 
 vows ? I suit ? 
 ( il ne suit que resou- ( he does not know on 
 I dre I what to determine 
 que ferez-vous ? what will you do ? 
 en quoi puis-je vcus ( in what can T servo 
 servir ? \ you ? 
 
 . ( there is in it, I do 
 it ne sots] notknowtf/w/ob 
 
 I scurity 
 
 ] il y a la 
 j quoi do 
 
OP DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 113 
 
 Quel 
 
 Lequel * 
 
 what 
 
 what 
 
 which 
 which 
 
 ( quelle instabiKtt j 
 
 < dans les choses ! 
 ( humaines ! ) 
 
 Sil ne sait quel parti S 
 prendre } 
 
 C lequel aimes-vous ( 
 
 < le mieux de ces < 
 ( tableaux ? ( 
 J je sais bizn lequel X 
 \ je choisirais \ 
 
 what instability in 
 human affairs I 
 
 he does not know 
 what resolution 
 to take 
 
 which do you pre 
 fer of those pic- 
 tures ? 
 
 I know well which 
 I would choose 
 
 Qui applies only to persons. Que and quoi to 
 things. 
 
 Quel, masc. quelle, fern. sing, quels, m. quelles, f. pi. 
 always precede a substantive, the gender and number 
 of which they take. 
 
 Lequel, duquel, auquel, &c. are used to mark a dis- 
 tinction between several objects. 
 
 §v. 
 
 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, &C 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns are those which point, as it 
 were, to the objects spoken of. These are, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 fern. 
 
 masc. fern. 
 
 
 
 ce, cet* 
 
 cette 
 
 this, or that ces ces 
 
 these, 
 
 Or tfl08€ 
 
 celui 
 
 celle 
 
 this, or thai ceux celles 
 
 these, 
 
 or thou, 
 
 •elui-ci 
 
 celle-ci 
 
 this ceux-ci celle3-ci 
 
 these 
 
 
 eelui-la 
 ceci 
 eel a 
 
 celle-la 
 
 that ceux-la celles-la 
 that k taese nave no plural. 
 
 those 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ce before a consonant ce litre th& book 
 
 1 ce before an h aspirated cf heros that hero 
 
 ■ cet before a vowel cet enfant this child 
 
 i cet before an h mute cet homme that man 
 
 •ette before any feminine noun cette femme that woman 
 li* 
 
114 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 C when without a noun, ) C qui est-ce ? ) who is it ? 
 
 ge < intimates a person, or > as < ce que je vou* > whatl tell you 
 
 thing spoken of ) ( dis est vrai ) is true 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Nothing is so opposite to that true eloquence, the office 
 
 he 2 rien 1 oppose veritable — f. fonc~ 
 
 (of which) is to ennoble (every thing), as the use 
 
 tion f. 2 1 de 1 ennoblir 3 tout 2 * que e?nploi m. 
 
 of those refined thoughts, and hunting after those light, 
 
 fin 2 pensee f. 1. art. recherche f. de /£ger 2 
 
 airy, unsolid ideas, which, like a leaf of 
 
 delie 2 sans consislance 4 idee f. 1 comme feuille f. 
 
 beaten metal, acquire brightness only by losing 
 
 baltu2 — m. 1 ne prennent de art. iclat m. <7«e en perdant 
 part of their solidity. This man has nothing in common 
 
 * * art. = f . hm. de csmmun 
 
 with that hero. This long restrained hatred broke 
 
 h asp. 1 long-temps 3 contenu 4 /jajne f. 2 Aetata 
 out, and was the unhappy source of those dreadful events. 
 
 fut malheureux — f. terrible iv&ne- 
 
 Jt is a great pleasure to me. ft was a great 
 
 ment m. pi. Ce plaisir m. * fut 
 
 pain to us. 
 
 d&plaisir m. * nous. 
 
 §vi. 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns are those which are of a vague 
 and indeterminate nature. 
 They are of four sorts. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 Those that are never joined to a substantive. 
 
 one on aime a se flatter J one J s f a P l to flatter one ' S 
 
 a man J on n ^ esi V as toujours ( a man is not always mas- 
 ( maitre de soi \ ter of his own temper. 
 
OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 115 
 
 a woman 
 
 somebody 
 
 people 
 
 they 
 
 you 
 
 they 
 
 [ on n'est pas toujours ' 
 
 maitresse d'aller ou*< 
 
 j Ton veut 
 
 on frappe a laporte 
 
 on pense et * Ton ditj 
 
 tout haul I 
 
 C oh raconte diversementX 
 
 I cette histoire \ 
 
 on acquiert Vexperi-S 
 ence a ses dipens \ 
 
 ( on trouve partout desS 
 £ imp or tuns S 
 
 on privient qu'on 
 point eu VintenV 
 de, &.c. 
 Quand on vous dit 
 que * Ton compte 
 sur vous 
 
 l'on vous blame 
 * on It loue, on 
 tort 
 
 iVal 
 Hon< 
 
 i si * 1 
 <? e/ si ! 
 ( a ton 
 
 it is not always in 
 the power of a wo- 
 man to go where 
 she wishes 
 
 somebody knocks at 
 the door 
 
 people think and say 
 openly 
 
 they relate that story 
 differently 
 
 we acquire experi- 
 ence at our own 
 expense 
 
 you will find trou- 
 blesome people 
 every where 
 
 J beg to observe 
 that / had no in- 
 tention to, &c. 
 
 when /tell you that 
 / depend upon 
 you 
 
 if they blame you 
 and praise him, 
 they are wrong. 
 
 t one 
 
 <%uelqu y un 1 somebody 
 ( some one 
 
 Chaeun 
 
 each 
 every one 
 
 Iquelqu'un m'a dit, somebody 
 I told me. 
 
 \ quiconque connaii Its hzmmes^ap- 
 f prend a s^en defier, whoever 
 f know T s mankind, learns to dis- 
 ) trust them. 
 
 S chaeun s r en plaint, every one 
 complains of him. 
 
 feton \ it is better for > 
 
 • In- \ / euphony to | 
 stead lo\xon\ part these 
 
 of i V words with i * 
 
 V si on J an /' 
 
 les habitudes qu'on con- 
 and ( trade 
 
 • In- j ce apres quoi on court 
 •tead \ quoiqu'on croie 
 
 of / un homme a qui on re- ' 
 ^ proche 
 
 ' et /'on \ when the next 
 / word does not 
 
 ! ou /'on \ begin with an 
 V /, as is seen by 
 
 , si /'on J the examples 
 
 . les habitudes que Von con- 
 
 traote 
 1 ce apres quoi Von court 
 | bien que Von croie 
 un homme a qui Von re- 
 
 proche 
 
H6 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Aulrux 
 
 Personne 
 
 Rien 
 
 other people 
 
 others 
 
 nobody 
 no one 
 
 nothing 
 
 not any thing 
 
 any thing 
 
 'n'enviez pas le bien d'autrui, do not 
 covet the property of others. 
 
 ne faiies pas a aulrui ce que vous ne 
 voudritz pas qu'on vous fit, do 
 not do to others what you would 
 not have done to you. 
 
 Slafierte ne convient a personne, pride 
 becomes nobody. 
 rien ne lui plait, nothing pleases 
 
 him. 
 y a-Uil rien qui puisse lui plaire ? is 
 there any thing that can please 
 him? 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 If you (behave yourself) (in that manner), what w T ill people 
 vous conduisez ainsi # on 2 
 
 say of you ? It (is thought) that this news is true. 
 
 dira-t 1 On croit nouvetle f. 
 
 They write me word from Ispahan that thou hast left 
 
 ecrit * — as quitli art. 
 
 Persia, and art now at Paris. One cannot read 
 
 Perse f. que tu es actuelhment a ne peut lire 
 
 Telemachus, without becoming better : we there find (every 
 Telemaque m. sons devenir meilleur, on y trouce par- 
 
 where) a mild philosophy, noble and elevated sentiments : we 
 tout ctoux =f. des—2 eleve 3. — 1 
 
 there find in every line the effusions of a noble soul, and %ec 
 
 y voit a chaque ligne &panchement m. beau f. 
 admire precepts calculated to effect the happiness of 
 
 des precepte pi. propre /aire bonheur m. 
 
 the world. 
 
 mondem. 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 
 
 Those which are always joined to a substantive. 
 
 Quelqu* 
 
 Chaque 
 
 Qutlconque 
 
 each, every 
 
 whoever 
 whatever 
 
 !si cela itait rrai, quelque historien 
 en aurait parte, if that were 
 true, some historian would have 
 mentioned it. 
 C a chaque jour suffit sa peine, the 
 ? trouble of each day is sufficient 
 ( of itself. 
 
 ( il n'y a raison quelconque qui pu- 
 \ isse Vy obliger, no reason what- 
 f ever can oblige him to it. 
 
OP INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 117 
 
 Certain 
 
 Vn 
 
 \ certain 
 \ some 
 
 a, an 
 
 certain homme, a certain man. 
 
 certaines nouvelles, some news. 
 (fat vu un homme, I saw a man; 
 2 prenez une orange, take an 
 ( orange 
 
 THIRD CLASS, 
 
 These which are sometimes joined to a substantive, and 
 sometimes not. 
 
 Nul no, none 
 
 Pasun no, not one 
 
 Aucu* no, none 
 
 Autre other 
 
 Mime same 
 
 Tei. 
 
 Plusieurs 
 
 such 
 like 
 
 several 
 
 C sev 
 ( mai 
 
 many 
 
 C all 
 T§ut / every 
 
 ( every thing 
 
 C nutie raisonnepeut It convaincre, no 
 1 reason can convince him ; 
 j nul d'eux ne Pa rencontre, not one 
 £ of them has met him. 
 'il n'y a pas une erreur dans cet ouv- 
 rage, there is no error in that 
 I work ; 
 pas un ne It dit, not one says 
 so. 
 
 !je ne connais aucun de vosjuges, I 
 know none of your judges ; 
 iln'afatt aucunt difficult, he has 
 made no difficulty. 
 ' strvez-vous d'une autre expression, 
 make use of another expres- 
 i sion ; 
 je vous prenais pour un zu/re, I took 
 
 you for another. 
 'c'esl le meme homme qui je vis hier r 
 he is the same man I saw yester- 
 day ; 
 cet homme n'est plus le meme, that 
 
 man is no longer the same. 
 r il tint a peu pris un tel discours, 
 he delivered nearly such a dis- 
 course ; 
 je ne vis jamais rien de lei, I never 
 
 caw any thing like it. 
 il est arrivi plusieurs vaisstaux, se- 
 veral vessels are arrived ; 
 il ne faut pas (pie plusieurs putis- 
 sent pour un seul, many must not 
 suffer for one. 
 ( tons les ctrcs cries, all created be- 
 ; ings; 
 
 \ tout disparuil devant Dieu, every 
 f thing vanishes before God. 
 
118 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Out que 
 
 Quoi que whatever 
 
 Of those which are followed by quel. 
 whoever 
 
 Que/ que 
 
 ( whoever 
 \ whatever 
 
 Tel que such as 
 
 Quelque — 
 que 
 
 C whatever 
 \ however 
 
 Tout — que however 
 
 L qui que tu sois, whoever thou may- 
 
 2 est be ; 
 
 ( qui que ce soit, whoever it may be. 
 
 Squoi que ce soit, whatever it may 
 be ; 
 quoi que vous disiez, whatever you 
 may say. 
 Squel que soit eel hemme, whoever 
 that man may be ; 
 quel que soit votre courage, what- 
 ever your courage may be. 
 C cette etoffe est telle que vous la vou- 
 < lez, this stuff is such as you wish 
 ( for. 
 
 fquelque raison que vous donniez, 
 i whatever reason you may give", 
 j quelque puissant que vous soyzz, 
 L however powerful you may be. 
 ( tout savant qu'il est, however leara- 
 I ed he may be. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 The Verb is a word, the chief use of which is to ex- 
 press affirmation : it has persons, moods, and tenses. 
 
 In the phrase, la vertu est aimable, virtue is amiable, 
 it is affirmed that the quality aimable, belongs to la 
 rertu ; likewise in this sentence, le vice n'est pas aima- 
 ble, vice is not amiable, it is affirmed that the quality 
 aimable, does not belong to le vice ; the word est express- 
 es this affirmation. 
 
 That concerning which we affirm, or deny a thing, is 
 called the subject, and what is affirmed, or deaied, is call- 
 ed its attribute. In the two preceding sentences vertu 
 and vice are subjects of the verb est, and aimable is the 
 attribute affirmed respecting the one, and denied with re- 
 spect to the other. 
 
OF THE VERB. 119 
 
 There are in verbs two numbers, the singular and plu- 
 ral, and in each number three persons. 
 
 The first person is that who speaks ; it is desig- 
 y nated by je, I, in the singular, and by nous, we, in 
 i the plural : as, je pense, I think ; nous pensons, we 
 think. 
 
 The second is the person spoken to, expressed 
 by tu, thou, in the singular, and by vous, you, in the 
 plural ; as, tu pensti, thou thinkest ; vous pensez, 
 you think. 
 
 The third is the person spoken of, known by il, 
 he, or elle, she, in the singular, and by Us, or elles, 
 they, in the plural ; as, il, or elle pense, he, or she 
 thinks ; Us, or elles pensent, they think. 
 
 All substantives, either common, or proper, are of the 
 third person, when not addressed, or spoken to. 
 
 £ A word is known to be a verb, when it admits 
 Rfm < ^ e P ersona ^ pronouns ; thus, jSmY, to finish, is 
 \ a verb, because we can say, je finis, tu finis, il, 
 'or ellefinit, &c. 
 
 There are five moods, or modes of conjugating 
 verbs. 
 
 C The infinitive mood affirms, in an indefinite man- 
 
 1 / ner, without either number, or person ; as, aimtr, 
 ( to love ; avoir aime, to have loved. 
 
 !The indicative simply indicates and asserts a 
 thing in a direct manner ; as, faime, I love ; il 
 aima, he loved. 
 
 2 { The conditional affirms a thing with a condition, 
 \ as, j'aimerais, si, &c. 1 should love, if, &c. 
 
 i The imperative is used for commanding, exhort- 
 4 / ing, requesting, or reproving ; as, aime, love (thou) ; 
 ( aimons, let us love. 
 
 ictive subjects a thing to what pre- 
 
 vous voulez, quHl aime, you wish that 
 
 que nous aimions, that we may 
 
120 OF THE VERB. 
 
 There are three tenses, the present, which declares 
 a thing now existing, or doing, as, je lis, I read ; the 
 past, or preterit, denoting that the thing has been done, 
 as,j'ailu,I have read; the future, denoting that the 
 thing will be done, as, je lirai, I shall read. But these 
 are subdivided, so that there are several preterit, and two 
 future tenses. 
 
 There are five kinds of verbs, the active, passive, neu- 
 ter, pronominal, and impersonal. 
 
 The verb active is that which expresses an action, 
 the object of which is either declared, or understood. 
 Aimer, to love, is a verb active, as it expresses an ac- 
 tion, the object of which may be quelqu'un, some per- 
 son, or quelque chose, some thing ; as, aimer Dieu, to 
 love God ; aimer V etude, to love study. The object of this 
 action is called the regimen, or goverment of the verb active* 
 
 C A simple question will show this regimen, as, 
 N "R • qu*est-ce que faime ? what do I love ? answer, 
 \ Dieu, God. Dieu is then the regimen of the 
 * Verb faime. 
 
 In the French language the passive verbs are sup- 
 plied by the verb etre, as they are in English by the 
 verb to be, and the participle past of the verb active 
 followed by the preposition de, or par, the subject and 
 regiment of the verb active being reversed. Thus to 
 change the verbs from active to passive in these 
 sentences, mon pere m'aime, my father loves me ; le 
 milan a enleve le canari, the kite has carried off the 
 canary ; tiiey must be reversed in this way, je suis 
 aime de mon pere, I am loved by my father : le canari. 
 a ete enlevg par le milan, the canary has been carried off 
 by the kite. 
 
 The verb neuter, is that which has no direct regimen^ 
 as the verb active has. Alter, to go ; marcher, to walk, 
 are verbs neuter, because wc cannot say, oiler quel- 
 nu'un, to go somebody ; marcher quelque chvse, to walk 
 something. Plaire to please, is likewise a verb neuter, 
 as we cannot say in French plaire qttelqu'un, to please 
 somebody, but plaire a quelqu'un. 
 
OF THE VERB. 121 
 
 The pronominal verbs are those in which each person 
 is conjugated through all the tenses, with a double per- 
 sonal pronoun. 
 
 fje me t I myself nous nous we ourselves 
 
 jtute, thou thyself vans vou,{ >' 8U ^flL, 
 
 as < (or ye yourselves 
 
 il se, he himself lis se \ ./ Al _ , 
 
 [e^e, she herself erte se $ they themselves 
 
 There are four sorts of pronominal verbs. 
 
 The pronominal verb active, when the action of 
 the verb falls upon the subject, as, je mefiatte, I 
 natter myself; il se lone, he praises himself. Al- 
 most all the active verbs are susceptible of being re- 
 ^fleeted. 
 
 C The pronominal verb neuter, which indicates 
 1 only a state, a disposition of the subject, as, se re- 
 \pentir, to repent, se desisier, to desist, s'enfuir, to 
 { run away. 
 
 The reciprocal verb expresses a reciprocity of 
 action between two, or more subjects, and conse- 
 quently has no singular; such are s'entr'aidcr, to 
 help one another, s'entre-donner, to give each other. 
 The pronominal verb impersonal, is only used in 
 the third person singular. Active verbs frequently 
 assume this form, in a passive sense, for the sake of 
 brevity and energy ; as, il se batit, there is building; 
 il se faisait, there was doing ; il se conclut, there 
 was concluded ; il s'est dit, it has been said ; il se 
 donnera nne grande bo faille, a great battle will be 
 „ fought. 
 
 The impersonal verb is only used in the third person 
 singular, with the pronoun il, and has no relation to any 
 person or thing. JSfciger, to snow, is an impersonal 
 verb, as it cannot be applied to any person, or thing ; H 
 7icige, it snows, il neigeait, it did sno^- 
 
 Though the greatest part of the French verbs are 
 12 
 
122 OF CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 regular, there are, however, as in other languages, some 
 that are irregular, and others that are defective. Regu- 
 lar verbs are those which are conjugated conformably to 
 a general standard. Irregular verbs are those which do 
 not conform to the verb employed as a model ; and de- 
 fective verbs are those which, in certain tenses, or per- 
 sons, are not used. 
 
 OF CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 To conjugate a verb is to rehearse it with all its differ- 
 ent inflections, 
 
 The French have four conjugations, -which are easily 
 distinguished by the termination of the present of the in- 
 finitive. 
 
 -er as, parler, aimer, chanter, donnfi?', &c 
 -ir as, finiV, sentir. ouvrir. iem'r, £ 
 -oir as, recevosr, aperccvo?r, devoir, &ce. 
 -re as, rendre, plaire, paroitre, reduire, 
 joindre, he. 
 
 The French, like most modern nations, not having a 
 Sufficient number of inflections in their verbs to represent 
 the great variety of their tenses, supply this defici 
 With two auxiliary verbs, avoir and etre, to have and to 
 be. 
 
 Those tenses in a verb, whose inflections are dei: 
 pure and unmixed from the parent stock, are called 
 pie tenses, and are always in French expressed by i; 
 gle word. But the -tenses, which are formed by the uni- 
 on of those of the verbs avoir, or tire, with a par 
 pie past, are called compound, and n 
 of not less than two; or three words. Thus 
 j 9 avais, feus, &c. parler, je parle, je 
 simple tenses ; but avoir c 
 
 avoir parte, fai parte, fc\ ,'....' &c. are 
 
 compound tenses. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 123 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB Avoir, TO HAVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST 
 
 avoir to have avoir eu io have had 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 ayant having 
 
 past. > ayant eu 
 
 having 
 
 had 
 
 eu, m, eue, /. had ) 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE, OR COMPOUND 
 
 OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 
 j'ai I have j'ai "| 
 
 I have 
 
 " 
 
 
 tu as thou hast tu as 
 
 thou hast 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 il, or elle a he, or she has il a 1 
 
 he has 
 
 
 *had 
 
 nous avons we have nous avons ( ett 
 
 we have 
 
 
 vous avez you have vous avez J 
 
 you have 
 
 
 
 ils, orelles ont they have ila ont J 
 
 they have 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 C In the following exercises, the substantive be- 
 ■o 2 m & ta ^ en m a partitive sense, it will be neces- 
 
 ysary to use the article, according to the direc- 
 V. tion given, page 84. 
 
 Present,— I have books. Thou hast friends. He has 
 livre. ami 
 
 honesty. She has sweetness. We have credit. You have 
 
 honnlteti f. h m. douceur f. — m. 
 
 riches. They have virtues. They have modesty. 
 
 riches se pi. m. vertu f. = f. 
 
 Preterit Indefinite. — I have had pleasure. Thou hast had 
 
 plaisir m. 
 gold. He has had patience. She has had beauty. We have 
 or in. — f. = f. 
 
 had honours. You have had friendship. They have had 
 
 honneur amitit f. m. 
 
 sentiments. They have had sensibility. 
 
 Imperfect. — I had ambition. Thou hadst wealth. He had 
 . bien m. 
 
124 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSfclS. 
 
 PLUPERFECT, Or COMPOUND OF THE 
 
 IMPERFECT, 
 j'avais / had, or did j'avais 
 
 have 
 tu avais thou hadst, or tu avais 
 
 didsl have 
 il avait he had, or did il avait 
 
 have 
 nousavions we had, or did nous avions 
 
 have 
 vous aviez youhad,ordid vous aviez 
 
 have 
 ils avaient they had, or ils avaient 
 
 did have 
 
 Veu 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 I had 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 he had 
 
 we had 
 
 you had 
 
 they had 
 
 had 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, OV COMPOUND 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. OF THE PRETERIT. 
 
 j'eus I had 
 
 tu eus thou hadst 
 
 il eut he had 
 
 nous eumes we had 
 
 vous efites ycu had 
 
 ils eurent they had 
 
 j'eus 
 
 
 I had 
 
 tu eus 
 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 il eut 
 
 >eu 
 
 he had 
 
 nous efimes 
 
 we had 
 
 vous eutes 
 
 
 you had 
 
 ils eurent 
 
 
 they had 
 
 >had 
 
 sincerity. She had graces. We had oranges. You had pears. 
 = f. -j- — poire 
 
 They had apples. Th^y had lemons 
 m. pomme f. J citron. 
 
 Pluperfect. I had had apricots. Thou hadst had nectarines, 
 abricot brugnon 
 
 He had had walnut*. . She had had hazel-nuts. We had had 
 
 noix & noisette. 
 
 chesnuts. You had had figs. They had had medlars. They 
 chataigne figw na. nejle f. 
 
 had had filberts. 
 aveline. 
 
 Preterit definite. 1 had plums. Thou hadst cherrie? 
 
 prune cerise 
 
 He had strawberries. She had pine-apples. We had almonds* 
 
 fraise ananas amande 
 
 V'ou had currants. They had raspberries. They had 
 
 groseille ra. framboise f. 
 grapes. 
 raisin m. pi. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 126 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES, 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 j'aurai / shall, or will have j'aurai ") 
 
 tu a?iras Ihsu shalt, or wilt in auras 
 
 have 
 il aura he icill have 
 
 nousauronswe shall have 
 vous aurez you shall have 
 ils auront they mil hace 
 
 il aurat 
 nous aurons 
 vous aurez 
 ils auront 
 
 feu 
 
 I shall, or > 
 will have 
 thou wilt 
 
 have 
 he will 
 
 have 
 we shall 
 
 have 
 you will 
 
 have 
 they will 
 
 have 
 
 Vhad 
 
 In the following exercises, the addition of 
 o J an adjective, after the substantive, will make 
 ) no change in the remark on the preceding ex- 
 _ ercise. 
 
 Preterit anterior. — I had bad very black ink. Thou 
 
 fori 2 noir 3 encre f I. 
 hadst had honest proceedings. She had had uncommon 
 
 honnUe 2 procLdi 1 rare 2 
 
 graces. We had had very ripe grapes. You had had exquisite 
 1. 2 mur 3 1. exquis2 
 
 melons. They baa had ready money. 
 — m. 1. comptant 2 argent m. 1. 
 
 Future absolute. — I shall have studious pupils. Thou 
 
 appliquS 2 eleve m. 1. 
 wilt have horrid pains. He will have ridiculous ideaa, 
 horrible 2 peine f. 1. ridicule 2 idee f. 1. 
 
 We shall ha*e useless cares. You will have true and real 
 
 inutile 2 soin m. 1. 2 reel 3 
 
 pleasures. They will have poignant griefs. 
 
 m. 1. cuisant 2 chagrin m. 1. 
 
 -o ( But if the adjective precedes the substantive, 
 ( then de 7 or d\ only is to be used. 
 
 Future anterior. — I shall have had good paper. Thou 
 
 papier m. 
 wilt have had excellent fruit. She will have had charming 
 m. pi. charm ant 
 
 flowers. We shall have had good pens. You will have had 
 fleurs f, plume f. 
 
 12* 
 
126 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PAST, Or COMPOUND OF THE CON- 
 DITIONAL. 
 
 j' aurais I should^could, j'aurais 
 
 or would have 
 tu aurais thou should'st tu aurais 
 
 have 
 il aurait he should havp il aurait 
 
 nousaurions we should have nousaurions 
 
 vous auriez youshouldhave vous auriez 
 
 ils auraient they should have ils auraient 
 
 should ~) 
 
 have 
 thou should* 
 
 est have 
 he should 
 
 have 
 we should 
 
 have 
 you should 
 
 liavt 
 they should 
 
 have 
 
 had 
 
 large buildings. They will have had fine clothes. 
 grand bailment m. supcrbe habit m. 
 
 Present of the conditional. — I should have fine engrav- 
 er aru re 
 ings. Thou should'st have pretty playthings. He should 
 f. joli joujou m. 
 
 have immense treasures. We should have beautiful pictures. 
 
 — tresorxa. tableau m. 
 
 You would have pretty houses. They should have long con- 
 
 f. — 
 
 versations. 
 f. 
 
 The preceding remark holds good likewise 
 after a word expressing quantity, such as 
 .p Jbeaucoup, a great deal, great many ; pen, 
 Mittle, few ; plus, more ; mouis, less ; irop, too 
 much, too many, &c. except bien, much, ma- 
 ny, which requires du, de la, de P, des. 
 
 Conditional past. — I should have had a great deal o/trouble. 
 
 peine f. 
 Thou would'st have had more pleasure. He would have 
 
 de 
 had (a vast deal) of knowledge. We should have had more 
 infiniment connaissance f. pi. 
 
 opportunities of succeeding. You would certainly 
 de oceddon f. pi riussir cerlainemcnt 
 
N. B. ) 
 
 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 127 
 
 J'eusse eu, tu eussts eu, il exit eu, nous eussions ev, vov* 
 eussies eu, Us eussent eu, I should have had, &c. is also 
 used for the conditional past. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Aie, or aye Have (thou) 
 
 Qu'il ait Let him have 
 
 Ayons Let us have 
 
 Ayez Have (ye) 
 
 Qu'ils aient Let thzm have 
 
 have had many advantages over him. They would have 
 
 1 beaucoup de avantage sur lui 
 
 had many enemies. 
 
 ^ bicn ennemi* 
 
 Observe that, when the verb is followed by several 
 substantives, the proper article and preposition must be 
 repeated before each. 
 
 Imperative. — Have complaisance, attention, and 
 
 — f. egard m. pi. 
 
 politeness. Let bim have modesty, and more correct ideas, 
 pulitesse f. — f. 2 juste 1. 
 
 Let her have more decency. Let us have courage and firmness. 
 dicence — m. fermetef 
 
 Have gravy soup, nice roast-beef, and a pudding. Let 
 
 un gras 2 soupe f. i unhon rosbif m. pouding m. 
 
 them have a ] e, rum, and punch. Let them have manners, 
 m. aile f. rum m. ponche. m. f. rnceursi. pi. 
 
 and conduct. 
 conduile f. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. — That I may have many friends. That thou 
 
 beaucoup 
 may'st have good reasons to give him. That he may have 
 
 donner lui 
 elevated sentiments. That we may have courage and mag- 
 
 '•2 — m. 1. bravoure f. 
 
 nanimity. That you may have delightful landscapes, and 
 = f. dilicieux 2 paysagt m. pi. 1. 
 
 beautiful sea-pieces. That they may have more condescension 
 marine f. pi. — dance 
 
 and more prepossessing manners. 
 
 2 prevenant 3 manicre f. pi. 1. 
 
 Preterit.— That I may have had wine, beer, and cider. 
 
 inn m. biere f. cidre m. 
 
128 
 
 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Que* 
 
 PRETERIT, Or COMPOUND 
 
 ^1 
 
 That Que 
 
 j'aie I map have j'aie 
 
 tu aies thou may' 'st have tu aies 
 
 il ait he may have il ait 
 
 nous ayons we may have nous ayons 
 
 vous ayez you may have vous ayez 
 
 ils aient they may have ils aient 
 
 ► eu 
 
 OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 That 
 
 I may have 
 
 thou may'st 
 
 have 
 he. may have 
 
 we may have 
 
 you may have 
 
 they may have 
 
 had 
 
 That thou may'st have had a good horse, and a fine dog. 
 
 cheval m. chien in. 
 
 That he may have had enlightened judges. That we may have 
 
 eclair e 2 jwge m. 1. 
 had snow, rain, and wind. That you may have liad a great 
 
 neige f. pluie f. vent m. 
 dining-room, a beautiful drawing-room, a pretty 
 
 salle-a-manger f. superbe salon-de-compagnie ra. joli 
 
 dressing-room, and a charming bed-room. That 
 
 cabinet de toilette m. — mant chambre-a-coucher f. 
 
 they may have had vast possessions, fine meadows, and de- 
 vaste — f. prairie f. de- 
 
 lightful groves. 
 licieux 2bois m. 1. 
 
 Imperfect. — That I might have a sword, musket, and 
 
 ipie f. fusil m. 
 pistols. That thou might'st have a knife, a spoon, and a 
 pistolet'm, couteau m. cuillere f. 
 
 fork. That we might have a penknife, pencils, and good 
 
 fourcheltei. canifm. pinceau m. 
 
 copies. That he might have a coach, a good house, and 
 
 modele m. carrosse m. f. 
 
 < 1 
 
 Rem. < the 
 /En 
 
 The subjunctive, in French, is always preceded by 
 e conjunction que, that, which is often suppressed in 
 glish. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 120 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT, OT COMPOUND 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 OF THE IMPERFECT. 
 
 Que That 
 
 Que 
 
 
 That 
 
 
 j'eusse I had, or might 
 
 j'eusse 
 
 
 I might 
 
 
 have 
 
 - 
 
 
 have 
 
 
 tu eusses thou mighVst 
 
 tu eusses 
 
 
 thou might- 
 
 
 have 
 
 
 
 est have 
 
 
 il eut he might have 
 
 il eut 
 
 ► eu 
 
 he might 
 have 
 
 ► had 
 
 nous eussions we might have 
 
 nous eus- 
 aions 
 
 
 we might 
 have 
 
 
 vous eussiez you might have 
 
 vous eus- 
 siez 
 
 
 you might 
 have 
 
 
 Us eussent they might have 
 
 ils eussent 
 
 
 they might 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 have 
 
 
 furniture, simple but elegant. That you might have 
 
 meuble, m. pi. — mats — 
 
 health and great respect. That they might have fruitful 
 
 saute f. un consideration f. fertile^ 
 
 lands. 
 
 terre f. 1. / 
 
 Pluperfect. That I might have had friendship. That thou 
 
 amitU f. 
 might'st have had gloves, boots, and horses. That he 
 
 gant m. hotte f. cheval m. 
 
 might have had zealous and faithful servants. That we 
 
 zelS 2 fidtle 3 domestique m. 1. 
 
 might have had fine clothes, precious jewels, and magnificent 
 
 = 2 bijou m. 1 magniftque 2 
 furniture. That you might have had warm friends. That 
 
 1 chaude 2 1 
 
 they might have had greatness of soul and pity. 
 
 grandeur f. pitiS f. 
 
 N.B.5 
 
 The verb avoir^ serves not only as an auxiliary tu conju- 
 gate its own compound tenses, but likewise the compound 
 tenses of the verb tirt, and those of the active, the imper- 
 sonal, and almost all the neuter verbs. 
 
130 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
 
 SENTENCES ON THE SAME VERB, WITH A 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 In the following sentences, the preposition de or d y , is 
 put before the substantive, according as it begins with a 
 consonant, or a vowel, ne between the personal pronoun 
 and the verb, and pas or point, after the verb in the sim- 
 ple tenses, and between the verb and the participle in the 
 compound tenses ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai pas de livres, J have no bonks. 
 
 Tu n'avafc pas de bien Thou hadst no wealth. 
 
 Elle n'eut pas d'honnetetd, She had no honesty. 
 
 Nous n'avons pas eu d'amiti£, We have had no friendship. 
 
 Vous n'aviez pas eu de puissans You had not had powerful 
 
 amis, friends. 
 
 lis n'auront pas d'ennemis re- They will not have formidable 
 
 doutables, j enemies. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. Present. I have no precious medals. 
 
 = 2 medaille f. 1. 
 We have no useless things. Preterit indefinite. 
 
 inutile 2 chose f. 1 
 I have had no constancy. We have had no generosity. 
 
 == f . = f . 
 
 Imperfect. Thou hadst not a beautiful park. You had no 
 
 pare m. 
 good cucumbers. Pluperfect. He had had no fine houses. 
 
 concombre m. 
 They had had no money. Preterit definite. He had not 
 
 argent m. 
 a skilful gardener. They had no carpets. Preterit an- 
 
 habile jar dinier ra. tapis m. 
 
 terior. Thou hadst had no complaisance. You had had no 
 
 — f. 
 great talents. Future absolute. I shall have no great bu- 
 — m. co- 
 
 siness. We shall have no uncommon prints. Future 
 
 faire L pi. rare 2 eslampe f. 1. 
 
 anterior. Thou shalt have had no consolation. You shall not 
 
 — f. 
 have had quiet days. 
 
 tranquille2, m. 1. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 131 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 Present.— He should not have bad pictures. They 
 
 mauvais tableau m. 
 sfiould have no leisure. 
 loisi* m. 
 Past. — I should have had no griefs. We should have 
 
 chagrin m. pi. 
 had no troubles. 
 peine f. pi. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 Have no impatience. Let him not have absurd 
 
 sing. — absurde 2. f. pi. 
 
 ideas. Let us not have dangerous connexions. Have no such 
 
 1. =2 tamonf.pl. tel 
 
 whims. Let them not have 50 whimsical a project. 
 caprice m. bizarre 2. projtt m. 1. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. —That I may have no protectors. That we may 
 
 = m. 
 have no success. 
 succh m. 
 Preterit. — That he may have had no perseverance. That 
 
 = f. 
 they may have had no valour. 
 
 bravQure f. 
 Imperfect. — That thou might'st have no principles of taste. 
 
 principem. gov! m. 
 That you might not have a just reward. 
 
 juste recompense f. 
 Pluperfect. — That I might have had no good advice. That 
 
 avism. pi. 
 we might have had no news. 
 
 nouvelle f. pi. 
 
 THE VERB Avoir, INTERROGATIVELY AND AFFIRMATIVELY. 
 
 In interrogations, the personal pronoun, accompa- 
 nied by a hyphen (-), is placed after the verb, in the 
 simple tenses, and between the verb and the participle, 
 ie compound tenses, and, when the third person sin- 
 gular of the verb ends with a vowel, for euphony a t is 
 tvveen it and the pronoun, preceded and follow- 
 ed by a hyphen, thus (-*-). See likewise the remarks, 
 
132 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
 
 Ai-je des Iivres ? Have I books ? 
 
 Avais-tu du bien ? Hadst thou wealth ? 
 
 Eut-elle de l'honnetet^ ? Had she honesty f 
 
 Avons-nouseude bonsconseils? Have ut had good advice t 
 
 Aviez-vous eu de la prudence / Hid you had prudence 1 
 
 Aura-t-il de l'argent ? Will he have money ? 
 
 Aura-t-elle eu des protecteurs? Will she have had protectors ? 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. Present.— Hast thou needles ? Have you 
 
 aiguille f. 
 coloured maps ? Preterit indefinite. — Have I had pens ? 
 enlumini 2 carte f. 1. plume^ f. 
 
 Have we had convenient houses ? Imperfect. — Had she silk ! 
 commode 2 f. I . soie f. 
 
 Had they large buildings ? Pluperfect. — Had she had pins ? 
 
 grand bailment m. ep ingle f. 
 
 Had they had extensive fields? Preterit definite. — Had 
 
 spacieux 3 champ m. 1. 
 he good shoes ? Had they looking-glasses ? Preterit ante- 
 
 soulier m. f. iniroir m. 
 
 rior. — Hadst thou had lace ? Had you had odoriferous 
 
 dentelle f. odttriferant 2 
 
 shrubs. Future absolute. — Shall I have gold, silver, 
 arbuste m. 1. m. argent m. 
 
 and platina. Shall we have (good luck) ? Future anterior. — 
 
 platine m. bouheur m. 
 
 Will she have had joy ? Will they have had company ? 
 joie ? compagnie f. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. Present— Shouldst thou have happy 
 
 heureux 
 moments ? Should you have good wine and nice cordials ? 
 
 — m. vin. m. Jin 2 liqueur f. 1. 
 
 Past.— Should he have had uncommon fruits 1 Should they 
 
 rare 2 m. 1. 
 
 have had rich clothes ? 
 
 THE SAME VERB INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. 
 
 In sentences of this form observe the different rules 
 that are prefixed to the exercises on the verb, and in 
 sentences simply interrogative, always place nc at the be- 
 ginning of sentences, and pas, or point, after the person- 
 al pronoun, whether in the simple, or compound tenses. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 133 
 
 ITai-je pas de3 livres ? Have I no books f 
 
 N'avais-tu pas des amis ? Hadst thou no friend* ? 
 
 N'a-Uellepas beaucoupd'esprit? Has she not a great deal of wit t 
 
 N'avons-nous pas eu de bons Have we not acted fairly ? 
 
 proc^des ? 
 
 N'aviez-vous pas eu de nouvel- Had you not had new gowns ? 
 
 les robes ? 
 
 N'aura-t-il pas des ressources 1 Will he have no resources ? 
 
 N'auront-elles pas eu des conso- Will they have had no consola- 
 
 lations? lions ? 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. Present.— Hast thou no diamonds? Have 
 
 diatnant m. 
 you no indulgent parents ? Preterit indefinite. — Hast thou 
 
 — 2 — m. 1. 
 not had contempt, and even hatred, for that man ? Have 
 
 mipris m. mtme haine f. h asp. pour cet 
 
 you not had better examples ? Imperfect. — Had he not a 
 
 meilleur exemple m. 
 rigid censor 7 Had they not inattentive children ? 
 
 shire 2 censeur m. 1. =2 enfant m. 1. 
 
 PiUPERFECT. — Had I not had other views 7 Had we not had 
 
 autre vue ? f. pi. 
 amethysts, rubies, and topazes ? Preterit definite. — Had I 
 amilhyste f. rubis m. topaze 9 f. 
 no great wrongs ? Had we not perfidious friends 7 Preterit 
 
 tori m. perf.de 2 1 
 
 anterior. — Had he not used far-fetched expressions ? Had 
 
 eu 2 recherchiS — f. 1. 
 they not excellent models ? Future absolute. — Wilt thou 
 
 — modele m. 
 
 not lead a more regular life 7 Will you uot have 
 
 avoir plus 2 regie 3 conduitc f. 1. 
 fashionable gowns ? Future anterior. — Shall I have had no 
 a la mode 2 robe f, i. 
 
 sweetmeats 7 Shall we not have had a good preacher 1 
 confitures 7 f. predicateur ? m. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. Present.— Should she not have ciear 
 
 clair 2 
 
 and just ideas 7 Would they not have more extensive know- 
 
 3 f . 1 2 itendu 3 c©»- 
 
 ledge 7 Past. — Should she have had no patience f 
 
 nuissances f. pi. 1. 
 
 Should they have had no rectitude 7 
 f. droiture ? f. 
 
 13 
 
134 
 
 AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB, 
 
 etre, to be % 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 A 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Etre 
 
 
 to be 
 
 Avoir 6te to have been 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Etan 
 
 
 being 
 
 ) 
 
 
 PAST 
 
 
 > ay ant £t<§ having been 
 
 ete 
 
 
 been 
 
 s 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 je suis 
 
 
 lam 
 
 j'ai 1 
 
 
 I have "1 
 
 tu es 
 
 
 thou art 
 
 tu as 
 
 
 thou hast 1 
 
 il, or elle est 
 
 he* or she is il a 
 
 i 6t6 
 
 ***** [been 
 
 nous sommes 
 
 we are 
 
 nous avons 
 
 
 we have f uecn 
 
 vous etes 
 
 you are 
 
 vous avez 
 
 
 you have J 
 
 elles 
 
 > sont 
 
 they are 
 
 ils ont 
 
 
 they have j 
 
 
 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 
 
 As interrogative and negative sentences will now be 
 promiscuously intermixed, the scholar will observe, 
 that the adverb, in the following exercises, is to be 
 placed before the adjectives ; and that whenever in in- 
 terrogative sentences a substantive is the subject, it 
 is to be placed at the head of the sentence, adding a 
 pronoun for the interrogation immediately after the verb, 
 as, monfrere est-il venu ? is my brother come 1 
 
 Present. — I am very glad to see you. Art not thou pleased 
 aise de voir satisfait 
 
 with that book ? Is she really amiable ? We are happy. 
 
 de veritablement heureux 
 
 Are not you too condescending ? Are your friends still in 
 
 complaisant f encore a 
 
 London ? 
 Londres ? 
 
 Preterit indefinite. — Have not I been constant? Haf* 
 
AVXILIART VERB ETRE. 
 
 135 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 fetais / was 
 
 j'avais 
 
 
 Thad \ 
 
 tu etais thou wast 
 
 tu avais 
 
 
 thou hadst J 
 
 il etait he was 
 
 il avait 
 
 ► ete* 
 
 he iiad I . 
 
 nou3 e*tions we were 
 
 nous avions 
 
 we had ( bem 
 
 vous etiez you were 
 
 voss aviez 
 
 
 you had 1 
 
 ils 6taient they were 
 
 ils avaient 
 
 
 they had J 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 je fus J was 
 
 j'eus " 
 
 
 I had 
 
 
 tu fus thou wast 
 
 tu eus 
 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 
 il fut he was 
 
 ilent 
 
 >ete 
 
 he had 
 
 >been 
 
 nous fumes we were 
 
 nous eumes 
 
 we had 
 
 vous futes you were 
 
 vous eutes 
 
 
 you had 
 
 
 ils furent they were 
 
 ils eurent j 
 
 
 they had J 
 
 
 thou always been steady ? She has been faithful. Have we 
 
 posi fidele 
 
 feeen firm and courageous ? You have been charitable. Have 
 
 ferme = — 
 
 those men always been good and benevolent ? 
 
 bienfaisant ? 
 
 Imperfect. — I was too busy to see you. Wast not thou 
 occupe pour recevoir 
 troublesome ? Was this girl idle ? Were we not too un- 
 
 importun jille paresseux in- 
 
 tractable ? You were not quiet enough. They were vain, 
 
 docile '? tranquille 2 asses 1. L — 
 
 frivolous, and coquettish. 
 frivole coquette. 
 
 Pluperfect. — I had hitherto been very indifferent. Hadst 
 jusqu y alors insouciant. 
 
 not thou been too imprudent ? Had his wife been sufficiently 
 
 — epouse asses 
 
 modest and reserved ? We had not yet been sufficiently 
 
 asses reserve" encore 
 
 Pret. ant. — Exercises upon this tense would be 
 
 as yet too complicated, as may be seen by this sen- 
 
 Rem.<( tence ; a peine y eus-je ele cinq ou six minutes, quHl ar 
 
 riva % I had scarce been there five or six minutes,, when 
 
 Jxe arrived. 
 
136 
 
 AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 1 shall or will j'aurai 
 
 be 
 thou wilt be tu auras 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE 
 
 je serai 
 
 tu seras 
 
 il sera he will be il aura 
 
 nous serous we shall be nous aurons 
 
 vous serez you shall be vous aurez 
 
 ils seront they shall be ils auront 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 ete 
 
 J shall or' 
 will have 
 
 thou wilt 
 have 
 
 he will have 
 
 we shall 
 
 have 
 you will 
 
 have 
 they will 
 
 have 
 
 been 
 
 attentive. Had you been envious and jealous ? They had not 
 applique = jaloux 
 
 been grateful. 
 
 reconnoisant. 
 
 Preterit definite. — Perhaps 1 was not sufficiently 
 
 Peut hire que asses 
 
 prudent. Wast thou discreet enough on that occasion ? Was 
 
 — discret 1 en — f. 
 
 not that princess too proud ? We were very unhappy. Were you 
 
 — cesse fier 
 not too hasty ? They were not much satisfied. 
 prompt fort satisfait. 
 
 Future absolute- — To-morrow I shall be at home till 
 
 Demain ches-moijusqu-a 
 
 (twelve .o'clock). Wilt thou always be restless, brutal, and 
 
 m idi inquiet, bourru 
 
 sour? Will your father be at home this evening? 
 
 chagrin Monsieur chez-lui soirm. 
 
 Shall we not be more diligent ? Will you always then be 
 _ 3 done 2 1 
 
 capricious, obstinate, and particular ? Will not your scholars be 
 quinteux opiniatre, pointilleux ? holier 
 
 troublesome ? 
 incommode ? 
 
 Future anterior.— Shall not I have been too severe ? Thou 
 
 wilt have been too distrustful. Will not his sister have been 
 
 defiant saur 
 
 whimsical and capricious ? Shall not we have been eager 
 funiasque =s* etnprtssi 2 
 
AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 
 137 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 je serais I should, would, j'aurais 
 
 or could be 
 
 tu serais thou would'st tu aurais 
 
 be 
 
 il serait he would be il aurait 
 
 nous serions we should be nous aurions 
 
 rous seriez you would be vous auriez 
 
 Ms seraient they would be ils auraient 
 
 >m 
 
 PAST. 
 I should 
 
 have 
 thou would'st 
 
 have 
 he would 
 
 have 
 we should 
 
 have 
 you should 
 
 have 
 they would 
 
 have 
 
 f s 
 
 The conditional past, J'eusse ete, tu eusses eti, il eU ite, nous 
 mssions Hi, vous eussiez ite, ils eussent ite, is also used. 
 
 enough ? Will^^i not have been inconsiderate ? Will not the 
 
 1 ^9 indiscret 
 
 judges have been just ? * 
 
 Conditional present. I would not be so rash. 
 
 '^fc temeraire. 
 
 Would'st thou be as consistent in thy behaviour as in thy Ian- 
 consequent dans conduits f. pro- 
 
 gnage ? Would not his son be ready in time ? Should we be 
 pos m. pi. fits pret a 
 
 always incorrigiblBr You would not be disinterested enough. 
 
 disinteressi 2 1 
 Would not those lsldies be always virtuous ? 
 dame veriueux 1 
 
 Past. (Had^nSt been for) your instructions, I should have 
 j?:s conscil m. pi. 
 
 been proud ^htd haughty. Would'st not thou have been 
 
 didaigneux I hautain 
 malicious and sarcastic ? Would that man have been so 
 matin ricanpur . tellement 
 
 destitute of common sense ? Certainly we should not have been 
 depourvu bon sens 
 
 so ridiculous. Would 1 ! not you have been more kind and 
 si ridicule doux plus 
 
 indulgent ? They would not have been so ungenteel. 
 complaisant ? malhonniU. 
 
 13* 
 
138 
 
 AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Sois 
 
 Qu'il soit 
 Soyons 
 Soyez 
 Qu'ils soient 
 
 Be (thou) 
 Let him be 
 Let us be 
 
 Be (ye) 
 Let them be 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TEKSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 que 
 je sois 
 tu sois 
 
 PRESENT. 
 that 
 
 que 
 
 / ma y, can, or j'aie 
 
 should be 
 thou may'st tu aies 
 be 
 il soit he may be il ait 
 
 >dte 
 
 nous soyons we may oe nous ayons 
 
 vous soyez you may be vous ayez 
 ils soient they may be ils aient 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 that ^ 
 
 J may, can, or 
 
 should have 
 
 thou may'st 
 
 have 
 he may have 
 
 We may hate 
 
 you may have 
 
 ihty may have. 
 
 \bten 
 
 Imperative. Be liberal. Do not be so lavish. Let 
 sing. — sing, prodigue 
 
 as be equitable, humane, and prudent. Letups not be covetous. 
 
 — humain, — avide. 
 
 Be economical and temperate. Do not be tljjbughtless. 
 pi. tconome sobre pi. l£gcr 
 
 As the third person singular and plujaflbf the impera- 
 tive mood belong rather to the subjunctirc, they are there 
 exemplified. 
 
 It has already been observed, that" before the sub- 
 junctive can form a complete sense, it must be pre- 
 ceded by another verb. For the sake of brevity, 
 therefore, complete sentences will only be given on the 
 present tense. This remark applies alike to the four 
 conjugations. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 159 
 
 S1MPLB TBKSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 que 
 
 that 
 
 que 
 
 
 that 
 
 
 je fusse 
 
 I mighty or 
 
 j'eusse 
 
 
 I might or 
 
 
 
 could be 
 
 
 
 could 
 
 2r 
 
 tu fusses 
 
 thou might' &t be 
 
 tu eusses 
 
 
 thou might's! 
 
 » 
 
 il fat 
 
 he might be 
 
 il eut 
 
 ► ete 
 
 he might 
 
 ► £ 
 
 UOU3 ftlS- 
 
 we might be 
 
 nous eus- 
 
 
 we might 
 
 
 sJt>D3 
 
 
 sions 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 vcus fussiez 
 
 you might be 
 
 vouseussiez 
 
 
 you might 
 
 
 ils fussent 
 
 they might be 
 
 ils eusaent J 
 
 
 they might 
 
 
 Present. Is it possible I can be so credulous ? They wish 
 
 — * — le On desire 
 thou may'st be more modest. Is it possible she can be so ob- 
 
 modeste * en- 
 
 stinate ? They wish us to be more assiduous. It is not 
 
 Mi assidu On * 
 
 expected you should be timid. It is feared they may 
 
 s' attend timide. On* craint ne 
 be guilty. 
 coup able. 
 
 Preterit. That I should have been so hasty and impatient. 
 
 empcrte si — 
 Thou should'st have been so puffed up with pride. That she 
 
 bouffi de 
 should have teen so fickle. That we should have been so head- 
 ■ - volage Utu 
 
 strong. That you should have been so avaricious. That they 
 
 avare 
 should have been so unreasonable. 
 diraisonnable. 
 
 Observe, the vfcrb elre serves as an auxiliary to conjugate the 
 passive verbs through all their tenses, the compound tenses of the 
 pronominal verbs and those of about fifty neuter verbs. 
 
 Imperfect. That I should not be humane and generous. 
 
 humain =s 
 
 That thou might'st be more careful. That she might not be so 
 
 soigneux. 
 arrogant. That we might be victorious. That you might not be 
 
 so stern. That they might not be so cruel. 
 Uvere. 
 
140 OF THE REGULAR YERBS. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 IN ER. 
 
 In verbs ending in -ger, the e is preserved in 
 
 ) those tenses where g is followed by the vowels a, 
 
 ) or o, in order to preserve to this letter its soft sound ; 
 
 as, mangeant, jugeons, je n&gligeai. 
 
 C In verbs ending in -cer, &r the same reason, a 
 
 2 1 cedilla is put under c, when followed by a, or o ; as, 
 { siigant, plagons, j'effagai. 
 
 I In verbs ending in -oyer and -uyer, the y is chang- 
 
 3 7 ed into i before a mute e ; as, j'emploie, il essuie, 
 {j'appuierai, il nettoierait. 
 
 ( This practice is extended by some to verbs in 
 
 4 < *vyer and -eyer, as, z7 paie } j'essaierai, elle grasseye, 
 f or grasseie. 
 
 In some few verbs ending in -eler and -eter, the 
 / and £ are doubled in those inflections, which re- 
 ceive stn e mute after these consonants, as, from ap- 
 peler, il appelle, from jeter, je jetterai } &c. 
 
 The first person singular of the present of 
 the indicative changes e mute into acute e in in- 
 terrogative sentences. The remark is also ap- 
 plied to some verbs of the second conjugation end- 
 ing in -vrir, -frir, and -lir ; as, neglige-je ? aimS- 
 s/ e ' °jf T z-jt ' cueille-je ? 
 
 EXERCISE, 
 
 Pluperfect. That I might have beon more studious. That 
 
 thou might'st have been more circumspect. That she might 
 
 circonspect. 
 have been more attentive to her duty. That we might have 
 
 = devoir ra. pi. 
 
 been less addicted to pleasure. That you might have been 
 
 livre a art. m. pi. 
 more assiduous and more grateful. That they might havft 
 
 assidu plus reconnaissant 
 
 been less daring. 
 hardi. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 141 
 
 PARADIGM, OR MODEL. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 FAST. 
 
 parl-er 
 
 to speak 
 
 avoir pari-! 
 
 to have spoken 
 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 PAST. 
 
 pari-on* 
 
 speaking 
 
 > 
 
 
 PAST. 
 
 \ ayant parl-e* 
 
 hating spoken 
 
 parl-e* m. -ee f. 
 
 spoken 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 
 ( All the regular 
 
 verbs of the First Conjugation 
 
 \ adopt the terminations of the verb 
 
 parler ; Exam. 
 
 pari -er 
 
 aim-er 
 
 expliqu-er 
 
 avou-er 
 
 parl-anf 
 
 annong-anf engag-eanf 
 
 deTray-arcf 
 
 parl-e 
 
 agre-e' 
 
 d^cri-^ 
 
 d£dommag-e* 
 
 je parl-e 
 
 dans-e 
 
 ignoT-e 
 
 renvoi-e 
 
 tu parl-e* 
 
 din-es 
 
 rejet-fes 
 
 renouveWes 
 
 il parl-e 
 
 chant-e 
 
 begai-e 
 
 grass ey-e 
 
 nous parl-ons 
 
 berq-ons 
 
 choy-ons 
 
 chang-eons 
 
 vous parl-es 
 
 regn-es 
 
 essuy-es 
 
 epel-es 
 
 ils parl-enf 
 
 caress-en/ 
 
 ennu-ie?if 
 
 appel-Jenf 
 
 And so on through the whole verb. 
 
 Adverbs, with few exceptions, must be placed 
 I after the verb, in simple tenses, and between the 
 | auxiliary and the participle in compound tenses, 
 when this adverb is only a single word. 
 
 SThe remarks prefixed to the exercises on the 
 verb avoir, when de is to be placed between the 
 verb and the substantive, ought to be attended to. 
 i The article the, after the verb, must always be 
 4 I expressed in French, though often understood in 
 ( English. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Indicative prhsbitt. I willingly give that plaything to 
 volontiers donner joujou m. 
 
142 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 je parl-e I tpeak j'ai 
 
 tu parl-e* thou speakest tu a9 
 il parl-e he speaks il a 
 
 nousparl-om we speak nous avons 
 
 vous parl-es you speak vous avez 
 ils parl-erif they speak ils ont 
 
 parl-e' 
 
 / hare 
 thou hast 
 he has 
 we have 
 you have 
 ihey have 
 
 your sister. Do I prefer pleasure to my duty ? Dost 
 
 f. * pre/erer art. m. devoir m. 
 
 thou not irritate thy enemies ? He does not propose salutary 
 irriter ennemi proposer un = 2 
 
 advice to his friends. We sincerely love peace and 
 
 avis m. 1 sincerement art. paix f. art. 
 
 tranquillity. We do not neglect (any thing) to please you, 
 
 = f. * nigliger rien pour plaire 
 
 Do you not admire the beauty of that landscape ? Do not 
 
 admirer = f. 
 
 your parents comfort the afflicted ? 
 
 — consoler offiigi m. pi. 
 means to succeed, 
 art. moyen m. pour rtussir. 
 
 Preterit indefinite. 
 
 pay sage m. 
 They (make use of) all 
 employer 
 
 horse to my cousin. 
 
 cheval m. 1 — m. 
 
 with my sister 1 
 
 I have (given up) my favourite 
 cider favori 2 
 
 Hast thou not exchanged watches 
 changer dt montres 
 Has the tutor given fine engravings to his 
 pricepteur de gravure f. pi. 
 pupil ? We have spoken (a long while) of your adventure. 
 pupille m. long-lemps aventure L 
 
 Have you not insisted too much upon that point ? Have your 
 
 insist £ * sur — m. 
 
 aunts prepared their ball dresses ? 
 tanlt preparer de bal 2 habit m. pi. 1. 
 
 Imperfect. I unceasingly thought of my misfortunes. 
 
 sans cesse penser a malheur m. pi. 
 Didst thou dread his presence and firmness 1 He ex- 
 redouter — f. pron. fermeti f. re- 
 
 lubited in his person all the virtues of his ancestors. Did not 
 tracer en f. f. aucetre 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 143 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 jc parl-ai$ I did speak, or j'avais "*) 
 
 was speaking 
 tu parl-ais thou didst speak tu avais 
 il parl-atf he did speak il avait j> parI-£ 
 
 nousparl-ioni ice did speak nous avions 
 vous parl-tez you did speak vous aviez 
 ils parl-aien/ /Ae^/ rfirf speak ils avaient J 
 
 I had 
 
 thou hadst 
 he had 
 we had 
 you had 
 they had 
 
 © 
 
 S 
 
 that woman accuse her friend of levity ? We did not protect 
 
 accuser ami f. legerete f. * proteger 
 
 that bad man. You despised a vain erudition. Did fhe 
 
 mecha/it mtpriser — 2 — f. 1. * 
 
 Romans disdain so weak an enemy ? The bees were there 
 Romain dtdaigner faible 2 m. 1. abeille * y 
 
 sucking the cups of the flowers. 
 sucer calice m. fleur. 
 
 Pluperfect. — I had drained an unwholesome marsh. 
 
 dessicher mat sain 2 marais m. 1. 
 Had'st thou not married a man rich, but unluckily without 
 
 epouser ?na!heureusement sans 
 
 education ? Had his father rejected these advantageous 
 
 — f. rejeter avantageux 2 
 
 offers ? We had not long listened to the singing of the 
 
 offre f. 1. long-temps ecouter * chant m. 
 
 birds. Had you already studied geography and history T 
 oiseau m. deja ttudier art. = f. art. = 
 
 Had not his friends procured him a troop of cavalry? 
 
 procurer 2 lui 1 comvagnie f. cavalerieP 
 
 There is a fourth preterit, called preterit anterior in- 
 definite, which is used instead of the preterit anterior, 
 when speaking of a time not entirely elapsed ; as j'ai eu 
 acheve mon ouvrage ce matin, cette semaine, &c. and not 
 pens acheve : as it is found in every conjugation, I shall 
 insert it here ; fax eu parle, tu as eu parity il a eu parity 
 nous avons eu parte , vous avez eu parle, ils ont eu parle. 
 
144 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 je parl-ai I spoke j'eus 
 
 tu parl-aJ thou spokest tu eus 
 
 il parl-a he spoke il eut 
 
 nou3 parl-nmC5 we spoke nouseumes 
 
 vous parl-o/cJ you spoke vous eutes 
 
 ils parl-emif they spoke ils eurent 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 ► parl-e 
 
 I had 
 thouhadst 
 he had 
 ice had 
 you had 
 Ihey had 
 
 -5 
 
 © 
 
 S 
 
 Preterit definite. — Did I not gladly give peaches 
 * avec plaisir de art. piche f. pi. 
 
 and flowers to my neighbours ? Thou forgottest an 
 
 pr. art. flturs f. pi. voisin m. pi. oublier 
 
 essential circumstance. Did not your cousin relate that 
 
 e$sentiel2 circonslance f. pi. * raconler 
 
 charming history with (a great deal) of grace ? He lightly 
 — mant = f. avec beaucoup legerement 
 
 judged of my intentions. Did we not shew courage, 
 
 juger # — * montre de art. — m. pr. — 
 
 constancy, and firmness? Did you visit the grotto 
 
 art. = f. pr — art. f. * visiter grotte f. 
 
 and the grove ? They did not generously forgive their 
 
 bois m. * genireusement pardonner a 
 
 enemies. 
 
 Preterit anterior. — I had soon wasted my money, and 
 
 bientbt manger argent m. 
 Hadst thou very soon reinforced thy 
 ressource f. * vite r enforcer 
 
 Had not Alexander soon surmounted all obstacles? 
 
 Alexandre surmonter to us art. =m. pi. 
 
 Hot soon enough shut the shutters, and (let down) the 
 tdl 2 assez 1 j'trmer volet b&isser 
 
 curtains. Had you not quickly dined ? In the twinkling 
 rideau promplemcnt dhier. Dans * un clin 
 
 of an eye, they had disponed the mob. 
 
 * tdl disj)crser populace f. 
 
 exhausted my resources. 
 ipuiser - 
 party ? 
 parti m. 
 We had 
 
 Future abs LUTE. — 1 shall relieve the poor. Wilt 
 
 soulager pauvre m. pi. 
 
 thou faithfully keep that secret ? WH1 he consult 
 
 fidelement garder — m. consulter de art. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 145 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 je parl-era* J shall , or j'aurai 
 
 will speak 
 tu parl-eras thou shall tu auras 
 
 sptah 
 il parl-era he shall il aura 
 
 speak 
 nous parl-erons we shall nous aurons 
 
 speak 
 vous parl-eres you shall vous aurez 
 
 speak 
 ils parl-eroTif they shall ils auront 
 
 speak 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 > parl-s 
 
 I shall, or^ 
 
 will 
 thou shalt 
 
 he shall 
 
 xce shall 
 
 you shall 
 
 they shall 
 
 >■! 
 
 enlightened judges ? He will support you with all his credit. 
 eclair e 2 juge I. appuyer de — m. 
 
 We shall not prefer pleasure to glory, and riches to 
 
 prbfirtr art. m. art. f. art. pi. art. 
 
 honour. By such conduct, will you not afflict your father 
 
 tel 2 1 conduile f. 3. a fflig*r 
 
 and mother ? Will they astonish their hearers 1 
 
 pron. etonner auditeur m. pi. 
 
 Foture anterior. — I shall soon have finished this book. By 
 
 achever m. 
 
 thy submission, wilt thou not have appeased his anger ? Will 
 
 soumission f. appaiser colere f. 
 
 the king have triumphed over his enemies ? We, perhaps, shall 
 
 triompher de 2 1 
 
 not have rewarded enough the merit of this good man. 
 
 recomptnser merite m. de bitn 2 1 
 
 Will you not have flown to his assistance ? Will our servants 
 
 voler sccours m. domeslique m. 
 
 have brought money ? 
 
 appoTter de art. argent. 
 
 Conditional present. — Should I form conjectures 
 
 former de art. — f. pi. 
 without number ? Thou would'st not avoid so great a danger. 
 
 nombrem. eiiler 2 3 1 4 
 
 Would not his attorney (clear up) that business ? We would 
 
 procureur dkbromller affaire f. 
 
 (drrve away) the importunate. Would you not discover 
 
 chasser importun m. pi. de'voiler 
 
 14 
 
140 OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PAST 
 
 
 je parl-craw I should, j'aurais 
 
 
 I should, 
 
 
 would, or 
 
 
 would, or 
 
 
 could speak 
 
 
 could 
 
 
 tu parl-erai* thou skould } st tu aurais 
 
 
 thou should' st 
 
 
 speak 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 il parl-erart he should il aurait 
 
 
 he should 
 
 
 speak 
 
 • parI-£ 
 
 
 >* 
 
 nous pari- we should nous aurions 
 
 
 we should 
 
 
 trions speak 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 vous pari- you should vous auriez 
 
 
 you should 
 
 
 tries speak 
 
 
 
 
 ils pari- they should ils auraient 
 
 
 they should 
 
 
 traient speak 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 J'eusse parte, tu eusses parte, il eut pane, nous eussions parU, 
 vous eussies parlt, ils eussent parte, is also used for the conditional 
 past. This remark holds good for every verb. 
 
 that atrocious plot ? They would not unravel the clue of 
 
 atroce 2 complot m. 1. dSmiler fil m. 
 
 that intrigue 
 
 Past. — I should have liked hunting, fishing, and the 
 
 aimer art. chasst f. art. piche f. 
 country. Would'st thou not have played ? Would he not have 
 campagne f. jouer 
 
 bowed to the company ? Would we gladly have praised his 
 salaer * compagniei. avec plaisir 2 louer 1 
 
 pride and incivility ? You would have awakened 
 
 orgueil m. pron. malhonneteti f. eveiller 
 
 every body. Would those merchants have paid their debts ? 
 tout le mondt marchand payer dtlle f. pi. 
 
 Imperative. — In all thy actions, consult the light of 
 
 Dans — f. pi. consult tr lumiere art. 
 
 reason. Never yield to the violence of thy passions. 
 
 f. te abandonner — f. — 
 
 Let us love justice, peace, and virtue. Let us not 
 
 art. — f. art. f. art. f. 
 
 cease to work. Sacrifice your own interest to the 
 
 cesser de travailler. Sacrificr * inter it m. pi. 
 
OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 147 
 
 parl-e* 
 
 qu'il parl-e 
 
 parl-orw 
 
 paries? 
 
 qu'il s parl-e?tf 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 speak (thou) 
 let him speak 
 let us speak 
 speak (ye) 
 lei them speak 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 que that que 
 
 je parl-e / may, or can j'aie 
 
 speak 
 tu parl-e* thou may J st tu aies 
 
 speak 
 il parl-e he may speak il ait 
 
 nous parl-ions we may speak nous ayons 
 vous parl-ies you may speak vous ayez 
 ils parl-C7i£ they may speak Us aient 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 that 
 
 Imay^ or can 
 
 ► parl-e 
 
 thou may'st 
 
 he may 
 we may 
 you may 
 they may 
 
 public good. Do not omit such useful and interest- 
 
 2 Men 1 * negliger de art. si utile 2 intirts- 
 
 ing details. 
 sani 3 — m. pi. 1. 
 
 Subjunctive Present. — That I may not always listen to 
 
 icouter * 
 
 a severe censor of my defects. That thou should'st find 
 
 — 2 = m. 1 defaut m. pi. trouver 
 
 real friends. That he would adorn his speeches with the graces 
 
 de vrai parer discours de 
 
 of a pure diction. That she would remain in her boudoir. 
 
 — 2 — f. 1. tester — m. 
 
 That we should so hastily condemn the world. That 
 legerement condamner monde m. 
 
 * Rem. The second person singular of the imperative of this 
 conjugation, and likewise of some verbs of the second ending in 
 mr,yWr, -Ur t take * after e, before the word y and 411, as, porles- 
 en a ton frere, cany some to thy brother ; offrts-en a ta scsur, 
 offer some to thy sister ; cueilles-en aussi pom toi, gather some 
 alike for thyself; apportes-y tes livres, bring there thy books. 
 
146 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 erne 
 
 je parl-awe 
 
 that que 
 
 
 \fhat 
 
 
 I might, cou ld : j'eusse 
 
 
 I mighty could, 
 
 
 
 or would 
 
 
 or would 
 
 
 
 speak 
 
 
 
 
 tu parl-a**es 
 
 thou might y st tu eusses 
 speak 
 
 
 thou mighVst 
 
 0» 
 
 il parl-a* 
 
 he might speak il eut 
 
 ► parl-^ 
 
 he might 
 
 >* 
 
 nous parl- 
 
 we might nous eus- 
 
 
 we might 
 
 
 assions 
 
 speak sions 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 vous parl- 
 
 you might vous eus- 
 
 
 you might 
 
 
 assies 
 
 speak siez 
 
 
 
 
 ils parl-oweni 
 
 they might ils eus- 
 
 
 they might 
 
 
 
 speak sent 
 
 - 
 
 
 you may pout incessantly. That they may work more 
 
 bouder sans cesse travailltr plus 
 
 willingly. 
 volontiers. 
 
 Preterit. — That I may have caressed insolence, and 
 
 caresscr art. — f. 
 flattered pride. That thou would'st have added nothing to 
 flatter art. ajouter 
 
 that work. That he should have carried despair into 
 
 owvrage m. porter art. desespoir m. dans 
 
 the soul of hi3 friend. That we may have blamed a conduct 
 
 time bldmer conduiie f. 
 
 so prudent and so wise. That you may have exasperated so 
 
 — • sage exasperer 
 
 petulant a character. That they may not have taken advan- 
 — 2 car act ere ra. 1 profit er 
 
 tage) of the circumstances. 
 cir constav.ee f. pi. 
 
 Imperfect. — That I should not copy his example. That 
 
 imiler exemple m. 
 thou migbt'st (give up) perfidious friends. That he 
 
 abctndonner de art. — de 2 1 
 might inhabit a hut instead of a palace. That we 
 
 habiter chaumiere f. (tu litv palais m. 
 
 should Tall at the feet of an illegitimate king. That you 
 
 tomber a pied m. UUgitime 2 1 
 
 would respect the laws ot ycur country. That they would 
 respecter loi f. pi, pays m. 
 
OF THE JIEGULAR VERBS, 
 
 149 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 IN -IR. 
 
 This conjugation is divided into four branches. 
 
 The first branch contains upwards of two hundred 
 and eighty regular verbs in -ir, exclusive of fifty-three 
 more comprised in the three other branches, which 
 may be considered as exceptions, and may be reduced 
 to thirteen roots, with thirty-nine derivatives. By 
 presenting some of the regular verbs of the first 
 branch, which nearly resemble the three following lists 
 of exceptions, the scholar will evidently see that the 
 terminations in -mir, -vir, -tir, and -mV, are not ab- 
 solutely the distinctive marks of the three other 
 branches, the lists of which ought to be learned by 
 heart. 
 
 Ibr. 
 
 ' ralent-ir 
 retent-fr 
 app£sant-ir 
 nant-ir 
 renform-ir 
 afferm-ir 
 repart-tr 
 avert-tr 
 sert-tr 
 dessert-zV 
 sort-tr son 2 
 plein et > 
 
 | entiereffet ) 
 
 [ assoit-ir 
 
 to slacken 
 
 
 to resound 
 
 ressort-tr 
 
 to make heavy 
 
 
 to pledge 
 
 asserv-ir 
 
 to plaster 
 
 sev-ir 
 
 to strengthen 
 
 assouv-tr 
 
 to distribute 
 
 appauvr-ir 
 
 to inform 
 
 tern-ir 
 
 to set a stone 
 
 vern-ir 
 
 to unset a stone 
 
 garn-ir 
 
 to obtain a 
 
 fourn-ir 
 
 full effect 
 
 b£n-ir 
 
 (by law) 
 
 henn-ir, &c 
 
 to match 
 
 
 C to be under the 
 < jurisdiction 
 I of a court 
 
 to inslave 
 
 to use hard 
 
 to glut 
 
 to impoverish 
 
 to tarnish 
 
 to varnish 
 
 to garnish 
 
 to furnish 
 
 to bless 
 
 to neigh 
 
 not speak at random. 
 
 a-tort et a -tr avers. 
 
 Pluperfect. That I should not have burnt that work. That 
 
 bruler m. 
 
 thou might'st not have contemplated the beauties of the coun- 
 contempler = cam* 
 
 try. That he should have perfected his natural qualities. 
 pagne perfectionner — rel 2 =f. pi, 1. 
 
 That we might not have gained the victory. That you 
 
 remporter =f, 
 
 bad enchanted the public. That they would have struck 
 — ter — m. frapp er 
 
 their enemies with fear. 
 de crainte 
 
 14* 
 
150 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 ROOTS. 
 
 2br.< 
 
 dor-wir 
 
 men-tfr 
 sen-/ir 
 
 par-h'r* 
 
 sov-tir* 
 ser-wr 
 .se repen-hY 
 
 DERIVATIVES. 
 ( redor-mir to sleep again 
 J endor-rtiir to lull asleep 
 j se rendor-mir to fall asleep 
 again 
 to give the lie 
 to consent 
 to foresee 
 to resent 
 io divide 
 J to set out 
 \ aga in 
 
 to go out again 
 ( to clear the 
 l table 
 to repent % has no derivative. 
 
 to sleep 
 
 io lie 
 to fid 
 
 to set out 
 
 to go out 
 to serve 
 
 demen-/ir 
 
 consei\-tir 
 
 pressen-<ir 
 
 ressen-/ir 
 
 depar-/ir 
 
 repar-fir 
 
 ressor tir 
 
 desser-i'ir 
 
 
 ouv-rtr 
 
 to open 
 
 ( rou v-rir to open again 
 I entr'ouv-nr lo half open 
 
 3br.- 
 
 
 
 I d6co\iv~rir to discover 
 I recouv-rtr to cover again 
 
 couv-rir 
 
 to cover 
 
 
 
 
 off-rir 
 
 to offer 
 
 mesoff-Wr to underbid 
 
 
 souff-r/r 
 
 to suffer, 
 
 has no derivative. 
 
 ROOT, 
 
 r 
 
 DERIVATIVES. 
 av-enir to happen 
 
 circonv- tto circum- 
 
 enir $ vent 
 contrev- ) to contra- 
 
 enir ) vene 
 cony -enir* to agree 
 dev-e?iir to become 
 disconv- 
 
 enir 
 
 intee-vemr to intervene 
 venir parv~e/*ir to attain 
 })rev-enir to prevent 
 prov -enir* io proceed 
 come 
 gain 
 snrv-cnir to befall 
 suhv -enir* io relieve 
 se souv- \ to remem- 
 
 cnir } ber 
 se ressouv- ( to recol- 
 
 enir ) Uct 
 
 rev-emr 
 
 > to deny 
 
 Uo c 
 
 ROOT. DERIVATIVES. 
 
 f 
 
 s ? abst-e?it> to abstain 
 
 appart-entr to belong 
 cont-en*r to contain 
 det-e?uV to detain 
 entret-C7ifr to keep up 
 
 tenir 1 
 
 maint-cntr to maintain 
 obt-enir to obtain 
 ret-ertr to retain 
 sout-eutr to uphold 
 
 * N. B. Partir, repartir, sortir, and rtuortir, of the second branch, fake the 
 auxiliary Hre. Venir, and its derivatives, are likewise conjugated with ftrc, 
 except circonvenir, conl rcvcnir, prtvcntr, ar.d subrenir, which take avoir : con- 
 vtnir also takes avoir, when it meafis te suit, but it takes ttre, when it signifies 
 to a^ee. Jivenir Is a defective and obsolete verb, only used impersonally. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 151 
 
 BRANCH 1. 
 . , Uo punish 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. 
 to feel to open 
 
 sen-tir ouv-rir 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 pun 
 
 ■issant 
 
 feeling 
 sen-tant 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 Simple I P unis ? lin s 
 
 . , < puniahed 
 
 Comp. < to have punished J 
 pres. \ avoir pun-i f felt 
 
 Comp.'l hacirtg punished tsen-ti 
 partic. \ ayantpun-* J 
 
 opening 
 ouv-ranf 
 
 felt 
 sen-ti 
 
 opened 
 ouv-ert 
 
 opened 
 ouv-ert 
 
 ' 1 punish 
 
 je pun-i* 
 
 tu pun-is 
 
 Sim. 1 il pun-if 
 
 nous pun-issons 
 vous pun-utefl 
 [ ils pun-is*enf 
 c 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 feel open 
 
 sen-s ouv-re 
 
 sen-s ouv-res 
 
 sen-/ ouv-re 
 
 sen-tons ouv-rons 
 
 sen-tez ouv-rez 
 
 sen-tent ouv-rent 
 
 BRANCH 4. 
 
 to hold 
 t-enir 
 
 holding 
 Uenant 
 
 held 
 
 t-enu 
 
 held 
 t-enu 
 
 hold 
 
 t-iens 
 
 t-iens 
 
 i-ienl 
 
 t-enons 
 
 t-ene2 
 
 t-iennent 
 
 Indicative. Present. I choose this picture. I feel all 
 choisir tableau m. 
 
 the unpleasantness of your situation. Whence comest thou f 
 
 disagrkment m. — d'ou venir 
 
 Does he thus define that word ? Does his mother (go out) so 
 ainsi dtfinir mot m. sortir 
 
 Do we not (set off) for the country ? Do you not 
 
 partir campagm f. 
 
 his sorrows ? Do you not (tell a lie ?) They are 
 compatir a mal ra. pi. mentir 
 
 finishing at this momeut. They (act contrary) to your 
 
 soon ? 
 
 tot 
 
 pity 
 
 finir 
 
 orders. 
 
 ordre. 
 
 dans 
 
 art. 
 
 contrcvenir 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 fortified his 
 primunir 
 
 sou! 
 
 against 
 contre 
 
 the dangers of 
 
152 
 
 OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 r 
 
 | I have punished 
 
 felt 
 
 opened 
 
 held 
 
 uomp. ^ j, a1 pun { 
 
 sen-li 
 
 ouv-ert 
 
 t-enu 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 Simple \ ! did ! ,Unish 
 
 feel 
 
 open 
 
 hold 
 
 sen-tais 
 
 ouv-rais 
 
 t-enau 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 Comp. \! had Punished' 
 C J avais pun-i 
 
 felt 
 
 opened 
 
 held 
 
 sen-ti 
 
 ouv-ert 
 
 t-enu 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 
 
 [* J punished 
 
 felt 
 
 opened 
 
 held 
 
 
 je pun -15 
 
 sen-tis 
 
 ouv -ris 
 
 t-ins 
 
 
 tu pun-f* 
 
 sen-tis 
 
 ouv -ris 
 
 t-in* 
 
 Simple < 
 
 il pun-t/ 
 
 sen-tit 
 
 ouv-ri£ 
 
 i-int 
 
 
 nous pun-zme$ 
 
 sen-times 
 
 ouv- rimes 
 
 X-inmes 
 
 
 vous pun-to 
 
 sen-tites 
 
 ouv-rites 
 
 X-intes 
 
 
 Jls pun-irent 
 
 sen-tirent 
 
 onv-rireiit 
 
 t-inrent 
 
 sed 
 
 uction. I serve 
 
 d my friends 
 
 warmly. 
 
 Did'st not 
 
 art. — f. servir avec chahur 
 
 thou amuse him with fair promises ? He complied (at last) 
 entretenir de beau promesse f. pi. consentvr tnfin 
 
 Did we not frequently 
 
 with the wishes of his family 
 a desir m. pi. famille f. 
 
 warn our friends of the bad state 
 avertir etai 
 
 sleep then ? Did you not belie 
 dormir alors ? dtmenlir 
 
 friquemment 
 of their affairs ? Did we 
 
 your character ? 
 car act ere m. 
 
 Did 
 
 not the enemies invade an immense country? Did the 
 
 envahir 
 wild beasts often 
 
 sauvage 2 bete f. 1. souvent 
 their mountains ? 
 montagne. 
 
 Preterit. I softened my father by my submission. I 
 fitchir soumission f. 
 
 foresaw that terrible catastrophe. Thou did'st not (come again) 
 presse.ntir — 2 — f . 1 revenir 
 
 as thou had'st promised. He did not succeed through 
 
 eommc le ind-2 promis rcussir par 
 
 — 2 pays m. 1. 
 (come out) from the bottom of 
 sortir fond m. 
 
 N. B. Only the first person of those tenses, which are invari- 
 ably conjugated alike, will now be given, the scholar will easily 
 supply the rest. 
 
Comp. i . 
 Simple 5 i 
 Comp. $ f 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 15$ 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 I had punished felt opened held 
 
 #, eus pun-i sen-ft ouv-«rf t-enu 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 I shall punish fed open hold 
 
 *e pun-iVflt sen-ft7ai ouv-nrai i-iendrax 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 I shall have punished felt opened held 
 
 o\iY-ert t-ewu 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 5* nle $ * should punish feel open hold 
 
 %m P {jepun-traw sen-brat's buv-rirat* t-iendrais 
 
 thoughtlessness. Did his daughter not (set out again) 
 
 itourdtrie f. repartir 
 
 immediately ? Did not Alexander sully his glory by his pride ? 
 sur-le-champ ternir 
 
 Did we (go out of the city) before him ? We never betrayed 
 
 title I. «.vant lui trahir 
 
 that important secret. Did you not agree to trust 
 
 — 2 — m. 1. consentir de vous en rapporter 
 
 to me ! They served their country with courage. Did the 
 
 moi pays — 
 
 ancient philosophers enjoy great consideration ? 
 
 philosophe m. pl.jouir de un — f. 
 
 Future. Shall I not obtain this of you ? What will be- 
 
 obtenir ccla de que de- 
 
 cora* of thee, if I forsake thee. Will he not embellish 
 
 venir * tu abandonner embellir 
 
 his country-seat ? He will not sleep quietly. 
 
 maison dt campagne tranquillemtnt 
 
 Shall we consent to that ridiculous bargain ? With 
 
 2 marche m. 1. arec de art. 
 
 time and patience, you will compass your end. We 
 
 m. pr. art. f. venir a-bout de dessein m. 
 
 shall not sully the splendour of our life by an unworthy action. 
 
 iclat m. indigne 2 — l 
 
 Will those men enrich their country by their industry 7 Will 
 
 enricher pays Industrie 
 
 not our friends offer us their assistance ? 
 offrir secours 
 
164 OF THE REGULAR VERES. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Comv £ I should have punished felt opened held 
 
 P' l j'aurais pun-i sen-f* ouv~ert t-e*u 
 
 
 
 IMPERATTVE 
 
 • « 
 
 
 
 ' punish (thou) 
 
 fed 
 
 open 
 
 hold 
 
 
 pun-is 
 
 sen-5 
 
 ouv-re 
 
 t~iens 
 
 -,. 
 
 qu'il pun-twe 
 
 sen-/e 
 
 ouv-rg 
 
 t-ienne 
 
 nm. < 
 
 pun-issons 
 
 sen-tons 
 
 ouv-ron* 
 
 t-enons 
 
 
 pun-isses 
 
 sen/ear 
 
 ouv-rez 
 
 t-enez 
 
 
 ^qu'ilspun-issejz/ 
 
 ssn-tent 
 
 ouv-rent 
 
 t-iennent 
 
 Conditional. I would open the door and the window, 
 
 porle f. fenetre f. 
 
 I should still cherish lite. Would'st not thou interpose in 
 
 chirir art. intervenir 
 
 that affair ? Would my brother £et off again) without taking 
 
 f. repartir sans prendre 
 
 leave of us ? You would not succeed in injuring him in the 
 conge parvenir a nuire lui 
 
 public opinion. Could'st thou soften that flinty heart 1 
 
 — 2 — f. 1. attendrir de rocker 2 1 
 
 Could they foresee their misfortune ? Would men always 
 
 pressentir malheur art. 
 
 (grow old) without growing wiser, if they reflected on tne 
 
 vieillir sans devenir inf-1 refltchir ind-2 sur 
 
 shortness of life ? 
 brieveti f. art. 
 
 Imperative. Shudder with horror and terror. Support 
 
 Fremir de = deeffroim. Soutenir 
 
 thy character in good and bad fortune. Do not 
 
 art. dans art. mauvais — f. 
 
 obtain thy point, but by means consistent with 
 parvenir a Jin f. pi. que par des moyens que avoue 2 * art. 
 delicacy. Let us feed the poor. Let us again 
 
 delicatesse 1 nourrir m. pi. obtenir art. 
 
 glory by our perseverance. Let us not divulge our secrets 
 
 = f • — dicouvrir 
 
 to every body. Never submit to so unjust a yoke. Do not 
 
 tout-le-monde flechir sous 2 joug m. 1. 
 
 maintain so absurd an opinion. Do not (come upon us) again 
 soutenir — de 2 — f. 1 surrcnir plus 
 
 (in that unexpected manner.^ 
 ainsi a Vimprovisle. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 155 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Sim. < 
 
 r that I may punish 
 que je pun-isse 
 que tu pun-wses 
 qu'il pun-fsse 
 que nous pun-issions 
 que vous ymn-issiez 
 
 .qu'ilspun-isse/iJ 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 feel 
 
 sen-te 
 
 sen-tes 
 
 seu4s 
 
 sen-iions 
 
 sen-tiez 
 
 sen-tent 
 
 open 
 
 ouv-re 
 
 ouv -res 
 
 ouv-re 
 
 ouv-rions 
 
 ouv -ries 
 
 Q\iv-rent 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 Co n S that I may have punished felt 
 P' I que j'aie pua-i sen-tf 
 
 opened 
 ouv-ert 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Sim. < 
 
 that I might punish 
 que je pun-tue 
 que tu pun-isses 
 qa'il pun-i£ 
 que nous pun-issions 
 que vous pun-issiez 
 [ qu'il s pnn-issent 
 
 feel p 
 
 sen-tisse 
 
 sen-tisses 
 
 sen-tit 
 
 sen-tissioiis 
 
 sen-tissiez 
 
 sen-tissent 
 
 open 
 
 ouv-risse 
 
 ou v-risses 
 
 ouv-rit 
 
 onv-rissions 
 
 onv-rissiez 
 
 ouv-rissent 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 r $ that I might have punished felt 
 
 om P- £ q Ue j'ensse puni senti 
 
 hold 
 
 t-ienne 
 
 t-iennes 
 
 t-ienne 
 
 X-enions 
 
 t-eniez 
 
 t-iennent 
 
 held 
 t-enu 
 
 hold 
 
 t-insse 
 
 t-insses 
 
 t-int 
 
 t-inssiont 
 
 t-inssiez 
 
 t-inssent 
 
 opened 
 ouvert 
 
 held 
 teau 
 
 Subjunctive present. — That I may never blemish my re* 
 
 fletrir 
 putation. That I may (be before-hand) with such dangerous 
 
 f. privenir de art. si = 2 
 
 enemies. I will not have thee (go out) this morning. That he 
 
 1 veux que tu sub-1 maiin ra. 
 
 may not enjoy his glory. That he may not obtain his 
 
 de = f. parvenir a 
 
 ends. That we may become just, honest, and virtuous. 
 
 fin f. pi. devenir honnete verlueux. 
 
 That you may punish the guilty. That you may return 
 
 coupable pi. revenii 
 
 covered with laurels. That they may establish wist 
 
 couvert de laurier m. pi. itablir de art. 2 
 
 and just laws. That they may agree about the conditions. 
 8 1 convenir de — 
 
156 OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 IN -0//2. 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 This conjugation contains only seven regular verbs, 
 which are : 
 
 perc-evoir tjp receive dkc-evoir to deceive 
 
 aperc-eioir to perceive d-evoir to owe 
 
 conc-evoir to conceive red-evoir to owe again 
 
 And rGcevoir, which serves as paradigm. Percevoir is a law 
 term, and apercevoir is often reflected. 
 
 Observe. In verbs ending in -cevoir, the c, to pre- 
 serve the soft sound of that letter, takes a cedilla, when 
 followed by o, or w. See page 3. 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 rec-evoir to receive avoir rec-u to have received 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. \ 
 
 relevant Receiving f ayant re<? . M having received 
 
 rec-u received J 
 
 Imperfect. — That I migkt stun the whole neighbourhood. 
 etour»lir2 tout 1 voisinage m. 
 That I might not (bring about) my designs. That thou 
 
 venir a-bout de pro jet m. pi. 
 would'st (tell a wilful lie.) That he might not bear 
 
 mentir de dessein premSdile. souienir 
 
 his disgrace with firmness. That we might disobey the law?. 
 
 — f. fermete disobtir. a 
 
 That we should belong to that great king. That you might 
 
 appartenir 
 renounce your errors and prejudices. That they might 
 
 revenir de = pr. pron. prtjugi 
 
 weaken the force of their reasons. That they might hold 
 affaiblir f. raisotinement ttnir k 
 
 the most absurd ideas. 
 2 1. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 157 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 / receive, &c. we receive, he. 
 
 je veq-ois nous rec-evons j'ai reg-u 1 have received 
 
 tu req-ois vous rec-eres tu as, &c. thou, &c. 
 
 il revolt ils req-oivent 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 I did receive we did receive j'avais rec,-u I had received 
 
 je rec-cvais nous rec-evions 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 / received we received 
 
 je rec-itt nous req-umes j'eus, req-u I had received 
 
 tu req-us vous req-utes tu eus, &.C. thou, &c. 
 
 il req-ui ils req-urenl 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Indicative present. — I perceive the summit of the Alps 
 
 apercevoir sommet Alpes f. pL, 
 
 9 covered with perpetual snow. What gratitude dost 
 
 de tternel 2 neige f. pi. 1 reconnaissance f. 
 
 thou not owe to her who (has discharged) the duty of a mother, 
 
 devoir edit 1 remplir 3 6 
 
 (to thee) (in thy infancy) ? Does your scholar understand 
 
 pres de 4 2 kcolier concevoir 
 
 well that rule which is so simple ? We do not owe a large 
 b ten regie f . * * devoir gros 
 
 sum. Do you not perceive the snare ? Ought firm 
 
 soinme f. piege m. Devoir 6 des 1 3 
 
 and courageous men to yield to circumstances ? 
 = 4 2 * c^rfer art. circonstance ? 
 
 Imperfect. — Did I not receive him kindly ? Did he 
 
 le avec amitid ? 
 see the castle from such a distance? We did not re 
 
 ttpercevoir chateau si * loin per- 
 
 ceive our income. Did you not receive great civilities? 
 cevovr revtnu m.vl de ftonnelett f. pi. 
 
 15 
 
158 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 I shall receive we, he. j'aurai rec, u I shall have 
 
 je ve$-evrai nous rec-evrons received. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 I should receive we should^ &c j'aurais reg-u I should have 
 je Tec-evrais nous rec-evrions tu, &c received 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 rec-evons let us receive 
 req-ois receive thou vec-evez receive ye 
 
 qu'il req-oive let hfrn receive qu'ils req-oivent let them receive 
 
 Did those tyrants conceive all the blackness of their crimes 1 
 tyran concevoir noirceur f. — 
 
 Preterit. — I perceived him walking by moon 
 
 le qui se promenait a art. clair dt 
 light. Did the queen conceive a great esteem for that 
 
 lalune m. estimei. 
 
 honest man. Did we not immediately perceive the snare ? 
 
 de bien 2 1 
 
 You did not receive his letters in time. Did the ministers con- 
 
 lettres a-temps. — tre 
 
 ceive the depth of his plan. 
 
 profondeur f. — m. ~~ 
 
 Future. — Shall I receive visits to-day ? He will 
 
 de art. visitc aujourd'hui f 
 not discover the spire of his village. We shall conceive 
 apercevoir clocher m. — m. 
 
 well founded hopes. Will you never conceive so 
 
 de art. fondS2 espirajicef. pi. 1. 
 
 luminous a principle ? Shall men always owe their mis- 
 
 = 2 1 art. mal- 
 
 fortunes to their faults 1 
 hew faule 9 
 
 CoNDrrioKAL.— Should I receive the offers of my ei.emy 7 
 
 offre 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 1 59 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT. 
 
 that J may receive that we, &c. que j'aie req~u that I may 
 
 que je req-oive que nous rec-evions que tu, &c. have r»- 
 
 que tu rec-otre* que vous rec^eviez qu'il, &c. ceived 
 qu'il req-oivz qu'ils req-oivent 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT, 
 
 that I might f &c. that we might, &c- que j'eusse thatlmight 
 
 que je req-nsse que nous req-ussions rec-w have re- 
 
 que tu req-usses que vous req-ussies que tu, &c. ceirerf 
 
 qu'il req~ut qu'ils rec-wwenf 
 
 Should a wise man thus (give himself up) to 
 devoir 4 1 3 2 ainsi 6 s'abandonner 5 art. 
 
 despair ? Should we conceive such abstract ideas 1 
 
 dhespoir m. - de art. si 2 abstrait 3 1 
 
 You would easily perceive so gross a trick. Would not 
 
 grosrier 2 ruse f. 1 
 my sisters receive their friend with tenderness ? 
 
 tendresse ? f. 
 
 Imperative. Conceive the horror of his situation. Do not 
 
 receive that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us 
 
 marque f. confiance — 
 
 entertain a horror of vice. Let us never owe (any 
 
 concevoir * de art. pour art. m. 
 
 thing). Receive his advice with respect and gratitude. Re- 
 rien. avis — — 
 
 ceivc no more of his letters. 
 
 lettre f. pi. 
 
 Subjunctive present. That I may receive consola- 
 
 de art. 
 tions. That he should not conceive a thought so well explained. 
 
 pensie f. diveloppL 
 
 That we may always receive false news. That you 
 
 de nouvelle f. pi. 
 
 may not perceive the danger of books which are contrary 
 
 — art. * * contre 
 
 to good morals. That they may not collect unjust 
 * art. mecur* f. pi. percevoir de injuste 2 
 
 taxes. 
 — f. pi. 1 
 
160 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 IN -RE. 
 Remark. — This conjugation has five branches. 
 
 The first ends 
 
 the second ends 
 
 the th IRD ends g!»;f« 
 
 the fourth ends in -wire 
 
 C in -aindre 
 
 the fifth ends < in -eindre 
 { in -oindre 
 
 as, vipandre 
 as, vendre 
 as, rSpondre 
 as, pen/re 
 as, mordre 
 
 ( as, plairc 
 
 ( as, {aire 
 as, repaftre 
 as, connaitre 
 as, instiwe 
 as, contraindre 
 as, p eindre 
 as, joindre 
 
 to spill 
 to tell 
 to answei 
 to lose 
 to bite 
 to please 
 to keep secret 
 to feed 
 to know 
 to instruct 
 to constrain 
 to paint 
 to join 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 PRESENT. 
 
 BRANCH 1. 
 
 to render 
 rend-re 
 rendered 
 avoir rend-w 
 
 BRANCH 2. 
 to please 
 pl-aire 
 pleased 
 pl-i* 
 
 BRANCH 3. 
 to appear 
 par-ctffre 
 appeared 
 par-u 
 
 BRANCH 4. 
 to reduce 
 reduire 
 reduced 
 redui-/ 
 
 BRANCH 
 
 to join 
 joi-ndrc 
 joined 
 joi-rU 
 
 Imperfect. That I might conceive such a project. That 
 
 pro jet m. 
 he might perceive the secret designs of the enemy's general. 
 
 cache, 2 dessein 1 2*1 
 
 That we should not receive ever/ body with civility. That you 
 
 honneteU. • 
 could not conceive the depth of this book. Thfct they 
 
 profondeur f. 
 might not perceive the masts of the ship. 
 
 mat m. pi. vaisseau m. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 161 
 
 BRANCH 1« 
 rendering 
 
 vand-ant 
 
 rendered 
 rend-w 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. 
 
 pleasing appearing reducing 
 ^[•aisant -par-aissant redm-sant 
 PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 pleased appeared reduced 
 pl-u par-w redui-f 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 1 render please 
 
 je rend-5 pl-at* 
 
 tu rend-s -p\*ais 
 
 il rend pi-ait 
 
 nous rend-ons ip\-aisons 
 
 vous rend-es p\-aisez 
 
 ils rend-ent p\-aisent 
 
 PRETERIT 
 
 rendered 
 j'ai rend-u 
 
 pleased 
 pl-u 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 appear 
 
 par-ais 
 
 par-ais 
 
 par-ozf 
 
 pa.r-aissons 
 
 par-aisses 
 
 p&v-aissent 
 
 INDEFINITE 
 
 appeared 
 
 par-u 
 
 reduce 
 
 redui-5 
 
 redui-s 
 
 redui-£ 
 
 redui-sons 
 
 redai-ses 
 
 redui-senf 
 
 . (I have) 
 reduced 
 redui-f 
 
 BRANCH 5. 
 
 joining 
 jol-gnant 
 
 jomea 
 joi-nf 
 
 join 
 
 joi-ns 
 
 joi-ns 
 
 joi-nf 
 
 joi-gnons 
 
 jol-gnez 
 
 joi-gnent 
 
 joined 
 joi-?if 
 
 Indicative present. I know his fiery and impetuous 
 connaitre bouillant 2 =3 
 temper. I wait his return with impatience. Does he 
 
 caractere m. 1 attendre retour 
 
 fear death ? Does not virtue please every body ? We do 
 
 craindre art. f. a 
 
 not force you to adopt this opinion. We suppress Jbr 
 
 contramdre de adopter — f. taire 
 
 the present several interesting circumstances. Do you not 
 
 — m. inliressanl 2 f . 1 
 
 confound these notions one with another? You seduce 
 confondre art. art. siduirz 
 
 your hearers by your modest exterior. Do your sons 
 
 audileur m. pi. 2 = m. 1 
 
 acknowledge their errors 7 Do not those workmen waste their 
 reconnaitre =s ouvrier perdre 
 
 time about trifles ? 
 
 a de art. bagatelle pi. 
 
 Imperfect. I did not displease by my conduct. 1 was 
 dip lair e 
 pitying those sad victims of the revolution. Did not 
 plaindre triste victime f. pi. — f. 
 
 15* 
 
\$2 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2 
 
 . BRANCH 3. 
 
 BRANCH 4. 
 
 BRANCH 5 
 
 / did render 
 
 please 
 
 appear 
 
 reduce 
 
 join 
 
 je rend-ais 
 
 pl-aisais 
 
 par-aissais 
 PLUPERFECT 
 
 r€dui-sais 
 
 joi-gnaw 
 
 / had rendered 
 
 pleased 
 
 appeared 
 
 reduced 
 
 joined 
 
 j'avais rend-u 
 
 pl-u 
 
 par-u 
 
 r£dui-f 
 
 joi-nf 
 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 
 / rendered 
 
 pleased 
 
 appeared 
 
 reduced 
 
 joined 
 
 je rend-is 
 
 pl-us 
 
 par-us 
 
 redui-sts 
 
 joi-g?iw 
 
 tu rend-is 
 
 pi -us 
 
 par-us 
 
 redui-m 
 
 joi-gnis 
 
 il rend-il 
 
 pl-u/ 
 
 par-u£ 
 
 redui-sif 
 
 jo'i-gnit 
 
 nous rend-imes \A-umes 
 
 par-umes 
 
 r£dui-siwes 
 
 joi-gnimes 
 
 vous rend-ftes 
 
 \)\-vie$ 
 
 par-iMes 
 
 vedui-sites 
 
 jo\-gnites 
 
 ils rend'irent 
 
 \A-urent 
 
 par-urerc£ 
 
 redm-sirent 
 
 jo'i-gnirent 
 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 
 I had rendered 
 
 pleased 
 
 appeared 
 
 reduced 
 
 joined 
 
 j'eus rend-u 
 
 pl-u 
 
 par-u 
 
 redui-f 
 
 joi-nt 
 
 this dog bite ? Did that man (at last) acknowledge his 
 
 chien mordre enfin 
 
 injustice? We did not appear convinced. We joined our 
 
 — f. convaincu pi. 
 
 sighs and tears. Were you painting an historical 
 
 soupir m. pi. pron. larme f. pi. peindre d'histoirt 2 
 
 subject ? Did those orators throw the graces of 
 
 tableau m. 1 = repandre — 
 
 expression into their speeches ? They led the people 
 
 art. — discours induire m. 
 
 into an error. 
 en * 
 
 Preterit. I aimed at an honest end. Did his prudence 
 
 tendre a 2 but m. 1 — f. 
 
 extinguish the fire of a disordered imagination ? Did not your 
 tteindre dertgU 2 — f . 1 
 
 conduct (do away) his prejudices ? We led our 
 
 — duite f. detruire prevention f. pi. reconduire 
 
 friend back to his country-house. Did we offer our in- 
 * de campagne 2 f . 1 tendre en- 
 
 cense to the pride of a blockhead? Did you feign to think 
 cens sot feindre de 
 
 as a madman ? Did you conduct your children from truth to 
 on * fou conduirt on 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 168 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5» 
 
 I shall render please appear reduce join 
 
 je rend-rai pl-crirai -pav-aitrai r£dui-rat joi-ntfrat 
 
 future anterior. (/ shall have) 
 
 rendered pleased appeared reduced joined 
 
 j'aurai rend-u pl-w par-u redui-* )o\-nt 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 I should render please appear reduce join 
 
 je rend-rais pl-airais par-ai/rai* redui-rats joi-ndrais 
 
 truth 1 Did those frightful spectres appear again ? 
 
 effrayant 2 — m. pi. 1 apparailre de nou- 
 Did not the children (come down) at the first sum- 
 veau desctndre a or- 
 
 mohs ? 
 dre m. sing. 
 
 Future. Shall I hear the music of the new opera ? 
 
 entendre musique f. 
 
 I shall not conceal from you my mind. ' Will the ge- 
 
 taire faijon de penser. 
 
 neral constrain the officers to join their respective corps ? 
 
 contraindre ojfficier rejoindre =■ 
 
 Will not a thought, true, grand, and well expressed, please 
 
 f. exprimi 
 
 at all times ? We shall (make our appearance) on this great 
 dans art. m. pi. paraitre sur 
 
 theatre, next month. Shall we describe all the 
 
 — m. art. prochain 2 mots m 1 depeindre 
 
 horror of this terrible night ? Will you not new-model a 
 
 — 2 nuit f. 1 refondre 
 
 work so full of charming ideas ? Will you know your 
 
 pleine 2 1 reconnailre 
 
 things again ? Will they always reduce our duties to 
 
 effet m. pi. * devoir m. pi. 
 
 beneficence ? They will assiduously correspond with 
 art. bienfaisance f. assidumcnt correspondre 
 
 their friends. 
 
 Conditional. ' Should 1, by these means, gain the 
 
 moyen m. s. atteindre a 
 desired end? I should (carry on) the undertaking with suc- 
 dcsiri2 but m. 1. conduit e entreprise f. 
 
164 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 past. (/ should have) 
 
 BRANCH 1. : 
 
 BRANCH 2 
 
 . BRANCH 3. 
 
 BRANCH 4. 
 
 BRANCH 5. 
 
 rendered 
 
 pleased 
 
 appeared 
 
 reduced 
 
 joined 
 
 j'aurai? rend-u pl-u 
 
 par-u 
 
 r6dui-f 
 
 joi-nf 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 
 render (thou) 
 
 please 
 
 appear 
 
 reduce 
 
 join 
 
 rend-5 
 
 pl-ais 
 
 par-etis 
 
 redui-j 
 
 joi-n* 
 
 qu'il rend-e 
 
 Y>\-aise 
 
 par- aisse 
 
 redui-se 
 
 joi-g?ie 
 
 rend-on* 
 
 yhaisons 
 
 u&v-aissons 
 
 re dui -so ns 
 
 joi-gnons 
 
 rend-es 
 
 phaisez 
 
 par-aisses 
 
 r£dui-ses 
 
 joi-gnez 
 
 qu'ilsrend-enf 
 
 pl-aisent 
 
 ItdLT-aissent 
 
 r£dui-senf 
 
 joi-gnent 
 
 cess. Would his mother wait with (so much) patience ? Could 
 
 tant de 
 
 sincerity displease the man (of sense) ? Should we sell 
 
 art. «= f. a sense vendre 
 
 our liberty ? Should we build our house upon that plan ? 
 
 construire — m. 
 
 Would you oblige young people to live as you 
 
 astreindre de art. gens pi. vivre comme 
 
 do? Would you reduce your child to despair ? They 
 
 art. desespoir m. 
 should dread the (public) censure. Would my pro- 
 
 craindre 1 du public 3 f. 2. 
 tectors introduce an unknown person into the world ? 
 = introduire inconnu m. # 
 
 Imperative. Depict in thy idyl all the charms of a 
 
 peindre idylle douceur f. 
 
 rural life. Expect not happiness from exter- 
 
 champetre 2 1 altendre art. art. exte- 
 
 ndi objects; it is in thyself* Know the powers of thy mind 
 neur 2 m. pi. I force f. 
 
 before thou writest. Let us unite prudence with 
 
 avant de * ecrire joindre art. f. d art. 
 
 courage. Let us not descend to useless particulars. 
 
 m. descendre dans des 2 — larrle 1 
 
 Let us not (give offence) by an air of haughtiness. Seem 
 
 deplaire * des m. pi. paraitre 2 
 
 neither to cheerful nor too grave. Ye sovereigns, make 
 ne 1 ni gai ni sirieux * souverain pi. rendre 
 
 the people happy. Do not despise his friendship. Sweet 
 
 d&daigtier doux 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 165 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 present, (that I may) 
 
 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5. 
 
 BRANCH 
 
 render 
 
 tu 
 
 il 
 
 nous 
 
 vous 
 
 ils 
 
 rend-e 
 
 rend-es 
 
 rend-e 
 
 rend-ions 
 
 rend-ies 
 
 rend-enJ 
 
 please 
 
 •phaise 
 
 p\-aises 
 
 pl-azse 
 
 pl-amons 
 
 \)\-aisiez 
 
 p\-aisent 
 
 PRETERIT, 
 rendered pleased 
 
 que j'aie rend-u pl-w 
 
 appear 
 
 par-aisse 
 
 par-ame$ 
 
 p&r-aisse 
 
 p&r-aissions 
 
 Tpa.r-aissiez 
 
 ydT-aissent 
 
 (that I may have) 
 appeared reduced 
 par-u- r£dui-f 
 
 reduce 
 
 r£dui-se 
 
 r6dui-ses 
 
 r£dui-se 
 
 redui-«o?i5 
 
 rddui-sies 
 
 redui-sen£ 
 
 join 
 
 joi-gne 
 
 joi- gnes 
 
 joigne 
 
 joi-gnions 
 
 jol-gnies 
 
 jo'i-gnent 
 
 joined 
 joi-7if 
 
 (Keep to yourself) such 
 taire certain 
 
 illusions, vain phantoms, vanish. 
 
 — f. — fantdme m. disparaitre 
 truths a3 may offend. 
 
 f. pi. qui peuvent offtnser. 
 
 Subjunctive present. That I may fear that cloud of ene- 
 
 nuee f. 
 mies. That I should please everybody, is impossible. 
 
 a ce 
 
 That he may not reply to such absurd criticism. That 
 
 repondre un si 2 3 critique f. pi. 
 he may lead his pupil step by step to a perfect knowledge 
 conduire eleve pas a connaissance 
 
 of the art of speaking and writing. That we may entice by an 
 
 ini-1 pr. inf-1 seduire 
 
 enchanting style. That we may confound the arts with the 
 
 — teur 2 m. 1 
 sciences. That you may have the same end in view. That 
 
 but m. 2 tendre a 1 
 they may not depend on any bedy. That they may not in- 
 dipendre de personne cc- 
 
 crease our sufferings. 
 croitre peincs. 
 
 Imperfect. That I might not melt into tears. That 
 
 fondre en larme 
 I would acknowledge the truth. That he might (draw a picture) 
 
 reconnaitre peindre 
 
 of distressed virtue. That he might please by her accom- 
 
 art. malheureux 2 1 grace 
 
166 OP THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 imperfect, (that I might) 
 
 BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5. 
 
 render phase appear reduce join 
 
 que je rend-isse p\-usse par-uwe redui-suse joi-gmwe 
 
 tu rend-me.? p\-usses psr-usses redul-sisses joi-gnisses 
 
 il rend-i/ y\-ut par-u£ r6dui-si£ jo\-gnit 
 
 nous rend-issions pl-iissions par-nssions redm-sissions \oi-gnissions 
 
 vous rend-issies p\-ussiez p&v-ussiez redm-sissies joi-gnissie2 
 
 ils rend-issent pl-ussent pav-ussent redm°sissent joi-gnissent 
 
 pluperfect, (that I might have) 
 
 rendered pleased appeared reduced joined 
 
 guej'eusse pl-w par-u redui-/ joi-nf 
 
 rend-u 
 
 PARADIGM, OR MODEL FOR PRONOMINAL 
 VERBS. 
 
 Se repentir to repent. 
 
 Pronominal verbs, as was said page 121, are con- 
 jugated throughout, in each person, with a double per- 
 sonal pronoun, and as all their compound tenses are 
 formed by means of the auxiliary verb Ure, their par- 
 ticiple past must always agree in gender and number 
 with the objective pronoun, when it is direct, otherwise 
 not. Their inflections all follow the conjugations to 
 which they belong. 
 
 plishments more than by her beauty. That we might conduct 
 f. pi. conduire 
 
 him to court. That we should affect such low 
 
 art. cour f. feindre de art. si bas 2 
 
 sentiments. That you might hear their justification. 'I hat 
 
 1 entendre 
 
 you might know your real friends. That they might (wait for) 
 vrai aitendre 
 
 the opinion of sensible persons. That they would not ap- 
 art, stnsi 2 f. pi. 1. f. 
 pear so scornful and vain. 
 
 dedaigneux f. pi. ni si f. pi. 
 
OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 161 
 
 In all participles past, except absous 7 dissous, r€sous 9 
 which are to be seen in their places, the feminine is 
 formed by adding e mute to the masculine, and the 
 plural by adding s to the singular, both masculine and 
 feminine, when it does not already end with this letter, 
 the French language not admitting a final double conso- 
 nant. 
 
 As there is some difficulty in conjugating pronomi- 
 nal verbs, some few are here selected, which it will prove 
 advantageous to practise. 
 
 s' alarmer 
 s 7 assoupir 
 $' apercevoir 
 se defendre 
 se hater 
 se depecher 
 se ressentir 
 se pouvoir 
 se taire 
 se promener 
 se coucher 
 se lever 
 s J asseoir 
 s 1 arroger 
 se procurer 
 se visiter 
 
 s' abstemr 
 se servir 
 se souvenir 
 se prevaloir 
 se repaitre 
 se conduire 
 s* enrhumer 
 a' ennuyer 
 a' orienter 
 a' endormir 
 se morfondre 
 se perdre 
 a' evanom'r 
 s 1 applauch'r 
 a' attribuer 
 $' entr'aider 
 
 a' habituer 
 se nanttr 
 se contraindre 
 se rendre 
 a' evertuer 
 s 3 impatienter 
 st foe her 
 se reposer 
 s* enquere'r 
 se mefier 
 se formaiiser 
 se rapetisser 
 se r£concilie-r 
 se s avoir gr6 
 se prescrire 
 a' entr'ouvrir 
 
 a' enorgueilhV 
 se meconnaitre 
 s' immortaliser 
 se dorloter 
 a' ingenier 
 a' obliger 
 se recueillir 
 se blesser 
 a' enrouer 
 se rejouir 
 a' embarrasser 
 a' habiller 
 a' emanciper 
 se dire 
 
 •se rendre compte 
 a' entre voir 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 INFINITITE. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 te repentir to repent 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 se repentant repenting 
 
 PAST. 
 
 3£* W«<* 
 
 PAST. 
 
 a' etre 
 
 repent 
 
 Wo 
 
 or 
 repentie ) 
 
 have repented. 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT and PA3T. 
 
 repen 1, ) having rCm 
 repentie \ ***** 
 
 >s' etant? 
 
168 
 
 OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS, 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 
 I repent. 
 
 / have repented. 
 
 
 J* 
 
 me repens 
 
 je me suis 
 
 ) repenti, 
 
 tH 
 
 te repens 
 
 tu V es 
 
 ? or 
 
 il, or 
 
 elle se repent 
 
 il, or elle s y est 
 
 ) repentie 
 
 nous 
 
 noie$repenton3 
 
 nous nous sommes 
 
 ) repenti*, 
 
 vous 
 
 vous repentez 
 
 vous vous lies 
 
 > or 
 
 ils, or 
 
 elles se repentent 
 
 ils, or elles se sont 
 
 Jrepenties 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 J did repent. 
 
 / have repented. 
 
 
 je 
 
 me repentais 
 
 je m 1 itais 
 
 ) repenti, 
 
 tu 
 
 te repentais 
 
 tu V itais 
 
 i 0T 
 
 il, or 
 
 elle se repentait 
 
 il, or elle $' etait 
 
 ^repentie 
 
 nous 
 
 nous repentions 
 
 nous nousitions 
 
 ) repentw, 
 
 vous 
 
 vous repentiez 
 
 vous vous itiez 
 
 > or 
 
 ils, or 
 
 elles se repentaient ils, or elles s' itaient 
 
 )repentie» 
 
 we not (nurse our- 
 s'icouttr 
 They mean to 
 se proposer de 
 
 Indicative present. — I commonly walk by moon- 
 d' 'ordinaire se promener a art. clair 
 light. Dost thou not deceive thyself ? He (is never happy) 
 
 de la lune m. se tromper * ne se plaire 
 
 but (when he is doing) wrong ! Do 
 
 que a faire de art. mat m. 
 
 selves) too much ? How do you do 1 
 
 se porter 
 travel in the spring. 
 voyager a m. 
 
 Preterit indefinite. — I (have been) tolerably well for 
 
 se porter asses bien depuis 
 
 sometime. Didst thou not lose thyself in the wood ? (It is 
 s'egarer * On 
 
 said) that he killed himself (out of) despair. Have we nattered 
 dit se tuer * de se flatter 
 
 ourselves without foundation ? Ladies, have you walked 
 
 * fondement Mcsdames, se promener 
 
 this morning ? Did those ladies recognise themselves in 
 
 this portrait 1 
 
 dame se reconnoitre 
 
OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 169 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 [repented. I had repented. 
 
 je me repentis je me fus } repenli, 
 
 tu te repentis tu te fus > or 
 
 il, or elle se repentit il, or elle se fut ) repentic 
 
 nous nous repentinies nous nous fumes ^repentis, 
 
 vous vous repentites vous vous fides > or 
 
 ils, or elles se repentirent ils, or elles se furent jrepentie* 
 
 Imperfect. — I tormented myself incessantly about the 
 se tourmenter * sans cesse pour 
 
 affairs of others. Wast thou not (laying the foundation for) 
 
 autrui se preparer 
 
 much sorrow by thy foolish conduct? He made himself 
 
 bien des regrets se rendre * 
 
 more and more unhappy (every day.) We despaired without 
 
 dejour en jour se dtsesptrer 
 reason. Did you not laugh at us ? They ruined them- 
 
 se moquer de se verdrc * 
 
 selves wantonly. 
 
 de gaiete de cceur. 
 
 Pluperfect. — I had trusted myself to (very uncertain) 
 se livrer a des ptu sur 2 
 
 guides. Didst thou not confide too inconsiderately in this 
 m. pi. 1. se conjier legerement a 
 
 man ? Had that officer rushed rashly into this 
 
 — cier s„ precipiler timer air ement dans 
 danger? We had condemned ourselves. Had you not (been 
 — m. se condamner nous-memes. s'ofr 
 
 engaged) in trifles ? Had those travellers (gone out) of 
 
 cuper de bagatelle f. pi. voyageurs se ditourner 
 
 the right way ? 
 droit chemin m. 
 
 Preterit. — I repented but too late of having taken such a 
 
 tard inf-2 fait 2 1 
 step. Wast thou not well entertained yesterday even 
 
 d-marche f. s^amuser hier au 
 
 ing ? He suffered for his imprudence. We 
 
 ne se trouver pas bien de 
 met in the street, but did not speak. Did you say 
 
 $t rencontrer rue te parier dites-vous 
 
 nothing (to each other) ? Did not those rash children ap- 
 
 Umiraire 2 1 #' ap- 
 plaud themselves for their folly ? 
 plaudir * de sottist. 
 
 16 
 
170 OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 I shall repent. I shall have repented. 
 
 je me repentirai je me serai }repenti, 
 
 tu le repentiras tu te stras \ or 
 
 fl, or elle se repentira il, or elle se sera jrepentie 
 
 nous nous repentirons nous nous strons 5 repents, 
 
 vous vous repcntirez vous vous seres > or 
 
 lis, or elles se repentiront ils, or elles se seront jrepentie* 
 
 Preterit anterior. — (As soon as) I discovered that they 
 des-que s'apercevoir on 
 
 sought to deceive me, I was on my guard. 
 
 chercher in d-2 tromper se tenir ind-3 garde-f.pl. 
 
 What didst thou, when thou saw'st thyself thus forsaken 1 
 Jis quand se trouver * ainsi abandonni 
 
 When she recollected all the circumstances, she was quite 
 se souvenir de f. ind-3 toute 
 
 ashamed. When he had rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. 
 honteux se rejouir asses se siparer ind-3 
 
 When you had amused yourself sufficiently at his expense, 
 
 s'amuser * a depensm. pi. 
 
 did you not leave him quiet ? When they had walked 
 
 laisstr ind-3 tranquille se prornener 
 
 enough, they (sat down) at the foot of a tree. 
 s J assirent a 
 
 Future absolute. — I will yield, if they convince me 
 
 se rendre on convainc 
 
 Wilt thou remember the engagement that thou makest ? What 
 
 se souvenir de prends 
 
 will not he reproach (himself for) ? We shall not forget our- 
 
 se reprocher a lui-meme s'oublier 
 
 selves (so far as) to (be wanting) in respect towards him. Will 
 
 * jusque manquer de * lui 
 
 you employ the means I (point out) to you ? Will not 
 
 seservirde que indiquer * 
 
 these flowers fade ? 
 
 f. se fl&trir. 
 
 Future anterior. — Skall I have betrayed myself? Wilt 
 
 se trahir moi-meme 
 thou not have degraded thyself in his eyes ? He will have 
 
 s'avilir * a 
 
 (been proud) of this trifling advantage. We shall have 
 
 t'enorgueillir foible avantage m. 
 
OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 171 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 PAST. 
 
 I should repent. 
 
 
 I should have repented. 
 
 je me repentirais 
 
 je 
 
 me serais } repenfi, 
 
 tu te repentirais 
 
 tu 
 
 te serais > or 
 
 il, or elle se repentirait 
 
 il, or 
 
 ell3*e serait ) repentie 
 
 nous nous repentrrions 
 
 nous 
 
 now tenon, \ . 
 
 vous series f r ' 
 
 vous vous repentiriez 
 
 vous 
 
 ils, or elles se repentiraient 
 
 ils, or 
 elles 
 
 > se seraient irepentiej 
 
 fatigued ourselves (to no purpose). In the end, you will have 
 se fatiguer * inutilement a 
 
 (been undeceived). Will your children have (loved each other) 
 se desabuser s'entr'aimer 
 
 too much ? 
 
 # 
 
 Conditional- Present. Should I suffer myself to 
 
 se lasser * * 
 
 (be drawn) into the party of the rebels ? Wouldst thou be 
 entrainer parti m. 2 * 
 
 (so easily) frightened ? Would not the nation sub- 
 
 de si peu de chose 3 s'effrayer 1 — f. se son- 
 
 mit to so just a law ? We should not rejoice to see the 
 
 mettre 3 4 12 se plaire voir 
 
 triumph of guilt. Would you dishonour yourselves by 
 triomphe art. crime m. se dishonorer * 
 
 such an action ? Would those lords (avail themselves) of 
 
 2 1 seigneur se prevaloir rf« 
 
 their birth and fortune, (in order to) hurt 
 
 naissance f. de leurs richesses pour /aire rig- 
 
 our feelings ? 
 lence a sentiment. 
 
 Past. Should I not have devoted myself entirely to 
 
 se devouer * entierement 
 the service of my country ? (Had it not been for) thy careless- 
 pays m. sans insouci- 
 
 ness, thou would'st certainly have (grown rich). Would this 
 ance f. s'enricher 
 
 pleasing hope have vanished so soon ? Should we have 
 
 ioux espoir m. s'foanouir 
 
 degraded ouiselves to such a degree ? You would have 
 it dSgrader * 2 1 point m. 
 
172 
 
 OP THE PRONOMINAL VKRBS, 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 AFFIRMATIVE. 
 
 Repent (thou). 
 repens-/oi 
 
 quelle 1 " }' ere P ente 
 
 repentons-r.ous 
 repentez-vous 
 
 gar}— f-r- 
 
 qu'elle 
 
 NEGATIVE, 
 Do not repent, 
 ne te repens 
 ^ ne se repente 
 
 ne nous repcitons 
 ne vous repentez 
 
 ► pas 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE, 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 That I may repent. 
 
 que 
 
 je me repente 
 
 tu te repentes 
 
 il, or elle se repente 
 
 nous nous repentions 
 
 vous vous repentiez 
 
 ils, or elles se repentent 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 That I might have repented. 
 
 que 
 
 je m e sois }repenti, 
 
 tu te sois > or 
 
 il, or ejie se soit jrepentie 
 
 nous noussoyons 
 
 vous soyez 
 
 se soient 
 
 vous 
 ils, or i 
 elles 
 
 repentis, 
 
 or 
 repentie* 
 
 reduced yourselves to every kind of want. They 
 
 se reduire * sorte f. privation f. pi. 
 
 would have (been drowned,) if (they had not had assistance). 
 se noyer on ne les avcit secourus. 
 
 Imperative. O man, remember that thou art mortal. Do 
 se sowenir 
 not flatter (thyself that thou wilt succeed easily). Let 
 
 tc promels un succtsfr.cile 
 
 us take an exact account of our actions. Let us not deceive 
 serendre — 2 eompte 1 se seduire 
 
 ourselves. Rest yourself under the shade of this tree. 
 
 nous-mimes. Sc reposcr * a ombre 
 
 Do not expose yourself so rashly. 
 
 s expos tr * 
 Subjunctive present. 
 
 i itre i I 
 
 I must rise to-morrow at 
 
 flfaut que se lever at 
 
OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 173 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 That I may repent. That I might have repented. 
 
 que que 
 
 ie me repentisse je me fusse }repenti, 
 
 tu te repentisses tu it fusses \ or 
 
 il, or elle se repentit il, or elle se fut )repentie 
 
 nous nou* repentissions nous nous fussions ) repentis, 
 
 vous vous repentissiez vou* vous fussies > or 
 
 ils, or elles se repentissent ils, or elles se fussent ) repenfie* 
 
 an earlier hour. I wish that thou may'st be 
 
 * meilleur heure f. souhaiter se porter 
 
 better. I wish him to conduct himself better. Is it not es- 
 
 mieux veux qu'il * se conduire * 
 
 sential that we should contain ourselves ? They wish that 
 
 — tiel se contenir * On desirer 
 
 you should accustom yourselves early to labour. 
 
 s'habiluer * de bonne hture art. travail m. 
 It is time that they should (have relaxation) from the fatigue 
 
 se dilasser — f. 
 
 of business, 
 art. f. pi. 
 
 Preterit. Can I have (been deceived) so grossly ? 
 
 Se peut-il que se tromper grossiere- 
 
 It is astonishing that thou hast determined to stay. Jt U 
 ment ? Honnant se decider rester On* 
 
 not said that he interfered in this business. It will never be 
 dit se meler de On * 
 
 believed that we have conducted ourselves so ill. It is not 
 croira se comporter * mat. On * 
 
 suspected that you have disguised yourselves so ingeniously. 
 soupconner se aeguiser * adroitemint 
 
 It is not feared that they have behaved ill. 
 craindre se conduire. 
 
 Imperfect. They required that I should (go to bed) at ten 
 On exigeait se toucher a 
 
 o'clock. They wish that thou should'st walk often e*. 
 
 heure On voudrait sepromener 
 
 Did they not wish that h« should practise fencing ? 
 On veulait s'exercer a faire des arms* 
 
 Was it necessary that we should (make use) of this method ? 
 =» se serrir moytn m. 
 
 16* 
 
174 
 
 OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 There is but one mode of conjugating passive verbs ; it is by 
 adding to the verb etre, through all the moods and tenses, the 
 participle past of the verb active, which then must agree in gen- 
 der and number with the subject ; as, 
 
 Je suis aim£, or ainiee 
 
 tu etais 6stim6, or estiniee 
 
 ce roi fut cheri cie son peuple 
 
 elle fut toujours che>ie 
 
 nion p£re fut respects 
 
 ma m£re fut r£v£r6e 
 
 uous serous loues, or loupes 
 
 vous en serez blames, or blamees 
 
 ils seroient craints et redout^s 
 
 je voudrais que les portes fussenl ) 
 
 ouvertes 5 
 
 tu en avais ^te averti, or avertie 
 lorsqu'il eut £te" mordu 
 je soup^onne que la ruse aura ete" 
 
 d^couverte 
 vous auriez £t£ ape^us, or apercues 
 bien qu'elles aient ete reconnues 
 supposez que les lumieres eussent > 
 
 ete eteintes. > 
 
 / am loved 
 
 thou wast esteemed 
 
 that king was beloved by his peoplt 
 
 she was always beloved 
 
 my father was respected 
 
 my mother was revered 
 
 xve shall be praised 
 
 you will be blamed for it 
 
 they would be feared and dreaded 
 
 I wish the doors were opened 
 
 thou hadst been apprised of it 
 when he had been bitten 
 i suspect the artifice will have been dis- 
 covered 
 you would have been perceived 
 although they were recognised 
 
 suppose the lights had been put out. 
 
 Did they wish that you should complain without reason ? 
 
 on voulait se plaindre 
 
 Did they not wish them (to make more haste) ? 
 
 on desirer ind-2 que ils se hater davantage ? 
 
 Pluperfect. Would they have wished that I had revenged 
 
 voulu se venger 
 
 myself? I could have wished that thou hadst shewn 
 
 * desirer se montrer 
 thyself more accommodating. 1 could have wished that this 
 
 * moins difficile voulu 
 
 painter had (been less negligent). Would you have wished that 
 peintre se negliger moins voulu 
 
 we should have ruined ourselves in the public opinion, (in order 
 seperdre * 2 f . 1 pour 
 
 to) satisfy your resentment ? I could have wished perhaps 
 satisfaire ressentiment desirer ptut-itrt 
 
 that you had applied yourselves more to your studies. 
 
 s'appliquer * davantage 
 
 We could have wished that they had extricated themselves 
 
 se tircr 
 more skilfully from the difficulties (in which) they (had 
 
 adroiiement embarras &u 
 
 involved themselves). 
 s^taient mis. 
 
0"F THE NEUTRAL VERES. 
 
 175 
 
 In the following exercises upon the verbs, the 
 tenses will now be promiscuously intermixed. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
 That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that 
 
 jeune demoiselle doux honnete bon 
 
 she is beloved by every body. He performed with (so much) 
 aime de jouer ind-4 tant de 
 
 ability, that he was universally applauded. He is know T n 
 
 intelligence ind-4 applaudi 
 
 by nobody. How many counties, unknown to the ancients, 
 de que de pays incunau 
 
 have been discovered by modern navigators ? 
 
 art. 2 navigaleur m. pi. 1. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE NEUTER VERBS. 
 There are in the French language about six hundred neuter 
 verbs, which are conjugated with the auxiliary avoir in their 
 compound tenses; the only excepted are the following, which 
 take etre ; even some of them, and particularly those marked with 
 an asterisk, take either, according to the sense. 
 
 Aller 
 
 to go 
 
 venir 
 
 to come 
 
 accourir 
 
 to run to 
 
 revenir 
 
 to come back 
 
 arriver 
 
 to. arrive 
 
 devenir 
 
 to become 
 
 choir 
 
 to/all 
 
 redevenir 
 
 to become again 
 
 deehoir 
 
 to decay 
 
 avenir 
 
 to happen 
 
 eckoir 
 
 to become due 
 
 intervenir 
 
 to intervene 
 
 monter* 
 
 to go up 
 
 parvenir 
 
 to attain 
 
 descendre * 
 
 to go dozen 
 
 proven ir 
 
 to come from 
 
 remonter * 
 
 to go up again 
 
 survenir 
 
 to befall 
 
 redescendre 
 
 to go down again 
 
 discon venir 
 
 to deny, or disovm 
 
 entrer 
 
 to enter 
 
 naltre 
 
 to be born 
 
 rentrer 
 
 to come in again 
 
 inourir 
 
 to die 
 
 retourner 
 
 to return 
 
 deceder 
 
 to die 
 
 tomber 
 
 to fall 
 
 eclore 
 
 < to be hatclud, i 
 \ blow 
 
 retomber 
 
 to fall again 
 
 partir 
 
 to set out 
 
 accoucker 
 
 \ to be brought i 
 
 repartir 
 
 to set out again 
 
 ( bed 
 
 rester 
 
 to stay 
 
 demeurer * 
 
 to stay, or remain 
 
 £chapper * 
 
 to escape 
 
 apparaltre * 
 
 to appear 
 
 expirer * 
 
 to expire 
 
 perir * 
 
 *o perish 
 
 passer * 
 
 to pass away 
 
 resulter* 
 
 to result 
 
 sortir 
 
 to go out 
 
 convenir * 
 
 to agree, to suit 
 
 ressortir 
 
 to go ovt again 
 
 contrevenir * 
 
 to contravene 
 
 aborder * 
 
 to land, kc. 
 
 
 
 Remark. The participle of these neuter verbs, which take 
 tlrt for auxiliary, must accordingly agree both in gender and 
 number with their subject ; as, 
 
 Je suit tombe, or tombee 
 quand tufas venu, or venue 
 il titait arrive avant moi 
 elte it ait deja arrivee 
 ma saeur itait partie avant lui 
 nous serons revrnm, or revenue* 
 quand vous serez descenduo, or > 
 desceuduo > 
 
 / have fallen 
 
 when thou hadst come 
 
 he had arrived before m»*~ 
 
 she had already arrived ^v 
 
 my sister had set off before him 
 
 rue shall have returned 
 
 when you shall have come down 
 
 / 
 
176 
 
 OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 lis aeraient reparti* ") 
 
 elles seraient repartiea $ 
 
 vos soeurs itaient sorties, sent-elles a 
 
 present rentrees ? 
 cela lui est echu en partage 
 cette maison nj'a convenu et je suis 
 
 convenu du prix 
 il n'en est pas discern venu 
 
 they would have set off again 
 
 your sisters went out, are they now com* 
 
 back ? 
 t hut fell to his lot 
 thai house suited me and 1 have agreed 
 
 about the price 
 he did not deny it 
 
 cette chose mhst echappee de !a m& that thing escaped from my memory. 
 
 moire, de la main 
 la tre>e est expiree 
 les delais sont expires 
 elle a expire dans les bras de sa m6re 
 qu' a-t-il rebuild de la ? qu'en est il re- 
 
 sulte ? 
 tous ceux qui etaient sur ce vaisseau 
 
 ont peri, ou sont peris 
 a-t-on descendu le vin a la cave ? > 
 
 dropped from my hand 
 the truce has expired 
 the delays have expired 
 she expired in the arms of her mother 
 what has been the result, o«- consequence 
 
 of it ? 
 all those that were on board of that ship 
 
 have perished 
 have they carried down the wine into the 
 
 cellar 7 
 
 le barom£tre a descendu de quatre de- the barometer fell four degrees during 
 
 gres pendant la journ£e. 
 les actions ont mont£ beaucoup. 
 je n'ai pas remonte" ma montre 
 il a monte quatre fois a sa cbambre 
 
 pendant la journee. 
 il est mont£ dans sa chambre, et il y 
 
 est rest£. 
 
 the day 
 the stocks rose very much 
 1 have not wound up my watch 
 he went up to his room four times in the 
 
 course of the day 
 he is gone up to his room, and has re 
 
 mained there 
 
 And so on through all the compound tenses of the other verbs. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 They came to see us with the greatest haste. When 
 
 ind-4 * voir empressemeiit Quand 
 
 did they arrive ? That estate fell to his 
 
 esl-ce que arriver ind-4 terre f. lui est echu en * 
 
 lot. He fell from his horse, but happily received 
 
 partage tomber ind-4 * il — ind-4 
 
 only a slighi contusion on the knee. 
 ne que legtr — f. a genou m. 
 
 
 
 OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Observe that 
 
 , in impersonal 
 
 verbs, il has 
 
 no 
 
 relation to a sub- 
 
 stantive, 
 
 i as may be seen by the impossibility 
 
 of substituting a 
 
 noun in its place. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 
 
 il pleut 
 
 
 it rains 
 
 il bruine 
 
 
 it drizzles 
 
 il neige 
 
 
 it snows 
 
 il importe 
 
 
 it matters 
 
 U grfcie 
 
 
 it hails 
 
 il semble 
 
 
 it seems 
 
 il tonne 
 
 
 it thunders 
 
 il parait 
 
 
 it appears 
 
 il eclaire 
 
 
 it lightens 
 
 il suffit que 
 
 
 it suffices 
 
 il gele 
 
 
 it freezes 
 
 il convient 
 
 
 it becomes 
 
 il degele 
 
 
 it thaws 
 
 il s'ensuit que 
 
 
 it follows the* 
 
 tl arrive 
 
 
 it happens 
 
 il est a propos 
 
 
 it is proper 
 
 il sied 
 
 
 it is becoming 
 
 il taut 
 
 
 it is necessary 
 
 il messied 
 
 
 it is unbecoming 
 
 il y a, &c. 
 
 
 there is, or art 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 
 
 Does i 
 
 t rain 
 
 this morning 1 Did it hail 
 
 
 pleuvovr matin 
 
 m. 
 
 grii 
 
 \er ind- 4 art. 
 
OF THE IMPERSONAL VERES. 177 
 
 last night? It does not snow. I thought it had thun- 
 
 der nier 2 f . 1 neiger croyais que ten- 
 
 dered. Does it not lighten 1 Do you think it freezer. T 
 
 ner ind-6 eclair er croytz que geler 
 
 It is a remarkable thing. It was a terrible hurricane. 
 
 ce ce ind-2 2 ouragan 1 
 
 It is ten o'clock. It (was not my friend's fault) that it 
 
 heure pi. ne lenir itid-3 pas a nion ami la chose 
 
 was not so. It will freeze long. I do not think so ; it 
 
 subj-2 ne ainsi long-temps ^ crois 
 
 seems, on the contrary, that it thaws. It (is fit) to act 
 
 sembler a contraire degeler convenir de 
 
 so. It (was of great importance) to succeed. Would it be 
 
 importer bcaucoup ind-2 de rhissir Hre 
 
 proper to write to your friends? It appears that he has 
 
 ct prop os de 
 not attended to that business. Perhaps it (would be N i better to 
 
 s'occuper de vaudrait 
 
 (give up) the undertaking. It (was sufficient) to know his 
 
 abandonner entreprise suffisait de 
 
 opinion. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB 
 
 Falloir, ilfaut, it must, it is necessary, 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 present falloir past avoir fallu 
 
 partic. pres. wanted past fallu, ayant fallu. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 present. il faut preterit ind. il a fallu 
 
 imperfect. il falloit pluperfect, il avait fallu 
 
 PRETERIT DEF. il fallut PRETERIT ANT. il eut fallu 
 
 future absol. il faudra future anter. il aura fallu. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 present il faudrait past il aur ait fallu 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 present qu'il faille preterit qu'il ait fallu 
 
 iiipep.fect qu'il fallut pluperfect qu'il eut fallu 
 
 Remark. The English verb, must, not being im- 
 personal, may take any noun, or pronoun, for its sub- 
 ject, whereas the French verb f<ill>ir, being always 
 
178 OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 impersonal, a change of construction in the translation 
 becomes necessary, and this may be done in two differ- 
 ent ways. 
 
 The most common method is by putting the con- 
 junction que after il faut, il fallait, &c. then transport- 
 ing the subject of the English verb must to the second 
 verb, which is to be put in the subjunctive in French : 
 thus, I must sell my house, il faut que je vuide ma 
 maison. 
 
 The other way is by allowing the second verb to 
 remain in the infinitive, as in English, and substituting 
 in the place of the personal pronoun, which is the 
 subject of the verb must, its corresponding objective 
 me, te, lui, nous, vous, leur, which are to be placed 
 between il and faut, fallait, &c. as, I must begin that 
 work to-day, il me faut commencer cet ouvrage au- 
 jourd-hui. 
 
 Observe. That all expressions implying necessity, 
 obligation, or want, may be rendered by falloir ; as, I 
 want a new grammar, il me faut une nouvelle gram- 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 You must speak to him about that affair. It was necessary 
 
 sub-1 de f. ind-2 que 
 
 for him to consent to that bargain. We were obliged to (set 
 * it * sub-2 marche m. ind-3 partir 
 
 out) immediately. Children should learn every day sorae- 
 sub-2 sur-le-champ art. cond-1 sub-2 
 
 thing by heart. Shall I suffer patiently such an insult ? He 
 
 ind-7 sub-1 2 1 
 
 must have been a blockhead not to understand 
 
 cond-2 * sub-2 sot 2 pour 1 comprendre inf-1 des 
 
 such easy rules. (How much) do you want ? He does 
 
 si 2 3 regie f. 1 combien fait 
 
 what is requisite. Do that as it (should be). What must he 
 
 failes ind-1 que 2 lui 1 
 
 have for his trouble ? You are the man I want. Do not 
 
 * peine f. que 
 
 give me any more bread, I have already more than I 
 
 * de en deja ne 
 
 want. 1 need not ask you whether you will come. I do not 
 m'tn * inf-1 si 
 
OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 179 
 
 think that it is necessary to be a conjurer to guess his motives. 
 crois il sub-1 * sorcier pour deviner motif 
 
 I could not suspect that I ought to ask pardon for a fault 
 pouvais soupgonner sub-2 * inf-1 — de fault f. 
 
 I have not committe 
 que commise. 
 
 Present 
 Past 
 Participle Pres. 
 Participle Past 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB 
 
 Y avoir, there to be. 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 y avoir there to be 
 
 y avoir eu there to have been 
 
 y ay ant there being 
 
 y ayant eu there having bem 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present 
 Preterit Indef. 
 
 Imperfect 
 Pluperfect 
 Preterit Def. 
 Preterit Ant. 
 Future Absolute 
 Future Anterior 
 
 Present 
 Past 
 
 il y a 
 
 il y a eu 
 
 il y avait 
 il y avait eu 
 il y eut 
 il y eut eu 
 il y aura 
 il y aura eu 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 il y aurait there would be 
 
 there is, or there are* 
 
 there has been, or there have 
 
 been* 
 there was, or there were* 
 there had been 
 there was, or there were* 
 there had been 
 there will be 
 there will have been 
 
 il y aurait eu there will have been 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present qu 'il y ait that there may be 
 
 Preterit qu'il y ait eu that there may have been 
 
 Imperfect qu'il y eut that there might be 
 
 Pluperfect. qu'il y eut eu that there might have been 
 
 N. B. This verb in English is used in the plural, when 
 followed by a substantive plural ; in French it remains 
 always in the singular. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 There must be a great difference of age between those two 
 il doit — f • 
 
 persons. There being (so many) vicious people in this world. 
 taut de =2 gens m. pi. 1 
 
180 
 
 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 is it astonishing that there are so many persons who become 
 
 itonnant sub-1 devenir 
 
 the victims of the corruption of the age ? It is a thousand 
 
 pervtrsile f. siecle m. * mille a 
 
 to one that he will not succeed. There would be more 
 
 parier con're rtussir 
 
 happiness if (every one) knew how to moderate his desires, 
 de bonheur chacun savait * * moderer disir 
 
 I did not think that there could be (any thing) to blame in 
 
 croynis sub-2 rien reprendre 
 
 his conduct. There would not be so many duels, did people 
 
 conduitei. — si Con 
 
 reflect that one of the first obligations of a Christian is to 
 
 lefltchir in d-2 f. — f. Chretien de 
 
 forgive injuries. Could there be a king more happy 
 
 pardonner art. Pourrait-il 
 
 than this, who has always been the father of his subjects ? 
 celui-ci sujet 
 
 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS* 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 
 To (go away) 
 
 To &ar>e gone (envay) 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 en) aller (s' 
 
 en) etre ) 
 
 1 aUe, alle« 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRES. (s» 
 
 en) allant \ 
 
 en)alle 5 (s ? 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST. ( 
 
 en) etant ( 
 
 1 ailee, alleei 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 je (m» 
 tu (t> 
 
 en) vais* je (m* 
 en) vas tu (t' 
 
 en) suis 
 en) es 
 
 ?alle, or 
 
 PRES. 1 
 
 il, or elle (s' 
 
 en) va il, or elle (s' 
 
 en) est 
 
 i alle< 
 
 , nous (nous 
 
 en) allons nous (nous 
 
 en) somraes ) _„ ,_ 
 
 
 ' vous (vous 
 
 en) ftllez vous (vous 
 
 en) et*s 
 
 gilt's, or 
 } allecs 
 
 
 . ils, or elles (s' 
 
 en) vont ils, or elles (s' 
 
 en) sont 
 
 IMP. 
 
 je (m» 
 
 en) allals je (m' 
 
 en) £tais 
 
 alle, &C 
 
 PRET. 
 
 J« (m» 
 
 en) allai je (ra' 
 
 en) fus 
 
 alle.fcc 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 , j« <m' 
 
 en) iuai je (m' 
 
 eii) serai 
 en) serais 
 
 alle, fcc 
 
 OOND. 
 
 je (m» 
 
 en) irais je (ra' 
 
 alle, kc 
 
 * Or je (m' en) vas. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 AFFIRMATIVE. NEGATIVE. 
 
 181 
 
 qum 
 
 quHls 
 
 va 
 
 (V en) 
 
 
 (s' en) aille 
 
 allons 
 
 (nous en) 
 
 allez 
 
 (vous en) 
 
 
 £s' en) aillent 
 
 qu'il 
 
 qu'ils 
 
 ne (t> 
 ne (s* 
 ne (nGus 
 ne (vous 
 ne (s 1 
 
 en) va 
 en) aille 
 en) allons 
 en) allez 
 en) aillent 
 
 pas. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 
 f je (m' 
 
 en) aille je (m' 
 
 en) sois 
 
 )alle, or 
 ? ollee 
 
 
 I tu (t' 
 
 en) ailies tu (t' 
 
 en) sois 
 
 PRES. 
 
 J il, or elie (s' 
 
 en) aille il, or elle (s' 
 
 en) soit 
 
 que 
 
 j nous (nous 
 
 en) allions nous (nous 
 
 en) soyoof 
 
 f all£s, or 
 J alle« 
 
 
 / vous (vous 
 
 en) alliez vous (vous 
 
 en) soyez 
 
 
 *• ils, or elles(s' 
 
 en) aillent ils, o relies (s' 
 
 eu) soient 
 
 Imp. 
 
 je (m' 
 
 en) allasse je (m' 
 
 en) fusse 
 
 all 6, &c 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 Je fusy j'ai ete, j'avais ete, j'aurais ite, are some- 
 times used for j 'a llai, je suis alle, j'etais alle, je serais 
 alle* 
 
 The imperative va takes an s when followed by y, 
 or by en ; as, vas-y, vas en savoir dc$ nouvelles, go thi- 
 ther, go to hear some tidings of it ; however it takes no 
 s when the y is followed by a verb ; as, va y donner or- 
 dre, go and order that affair. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 Will you go this evening into the country ? 
 
 soir a 
 
 pay some visits, and if I be 
 faire ind-1 
 
 shall certainly go home. 
 
 s'en aller chez-moi 
 Go and do that errand. 
 
 * faire commission f. 
 
 thing in order. Let him go to 
 
 en art. eglise f. 
 
 By being loaded with scents, 
 
 campagne f. 
 early 
 
 de bonne heure 2 " libre I 
 Go there with thy brother 
 
 I am going to 
 (at liberty) I 
 
 Go there and put every 
 * meltre 
 church on holidays. 
 
 art. /our pi. de 
 
 and particularly 
 fH: a force de inf-f charge de odeur f. pi. surtout 
 
 amber, he (offends the smell.) They have woven 
 
 pr. ambre m. sentir mauvais. de art f. 
 
 17 
 
182 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Puer, to stink, is by no means irregular, but simply 
 defective in the preterit of the indicative, and in the im- 
 perfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 TVsser, to weave, is a verb defective, which, to form 
 its compound tenses, borrows the participle past tissu, 
 from the obsolete verb tistre. 
 
 Envoyer and renvoyer, make in their future absolute 
 and conditional present, j'enverrai, j'enverrais, and je 
 renverrai, je renverrais. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION 
 
 branch i. Punir. 
 
 Benir, to bless, has no irregularity, except in one of 
 its two participles past, bgnit, benite ; as, pain benit, 
 hallowed bread ; eau benite, holy water. The other, 
 beni, bdnie, being regular ; as, benie entre toutcs lesfem- 
 mes, blessed among all women. 
 
 Fleurir, signifying to blossom, is regular ; but when 
 it means to flourish, to be in repute, honour, esteem, 
 
 silk and cotton together, and made a very pretty 
 
 pr-art. m. en ont fait 
 
 stuff. I shall send spring flowers to those 
 
 eloffe f. dc art. printanier2 f. pi. 1 
 
 ladies. I would go to Rome, if I could. We would 
 
 dame f. pi. _ pouvois 
 
 (send back) our horses. Why do they go away so soon ? 
 
 pourquoi 
 My brother and sister went yesterday to Windsor. I 
 
 pron. ind-4 
 
 will not go (any more) a hunting. 
 plus a * art. chasse f. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH I. 
 
 May the name of that good king be blessed from generation 
 nom m. 
 to generation ! These trees bloswmed twice every 
 
 en ind-2 deux fois tout art. 
 
 year; The arts and sciences flourished at Athens in the 
 
 an pi. — art. — ind-2 a. Athtnes 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 183 
 
 it makes, in the participle present, florissant, and in the 
 imperfect of the indicative, jlorissait, florissaient. 
 
 In hair, to hate, the letters -ai form throughout two 
 syllables, except in the three persons singular of the 
 present of the indicative, je hats, tu hais, il hait, and 
 in the second person singular of the imperative hais* 
 which are pronounced as one syllable, as if written, je 
 hes, iu hes, il hit. 
 
 Gesir, to lie, is a defective verb* and has only pre- 
 served gisant, git, nous gisons, ils gisent, il gisait> used 
 in familiar discourse, or poetry, and particularly in 
 monumental inscriptions : ci-git, here lies. 
 
 branch ii. on Sentir. 
 bouillir, to boil, courir, to run. 
 
 Par.pres. Bouillant — Past, bouilli Courant — couru 
 
 C bous, bous, bout cours, cours, court 
 
 Ind. pres $ < bouillons, bouillez, courons, courez, courenl 
 
 ( bouillent 
 
 Imperf, bouillais — Pret. bouillis courais — courus 
 
 Future. bouillirai— Cond. bouil- courrai — courrais 
 
 lirais 
 
 Imp. bous, bouillons, bouillez rours, courons, courez 
 
 Sub. pres. bouille — Imp. bouillisse coure — cournsse 
 
 Rebouillir, to boil again, and ebouillir, to boil away, 
 are conjugated like bouillir ; this latter is only used in 
 
 time of Pericles. Horace and Virgil flourished under the 
 
 Pericles Virgil e ind-2 sous 
 
 reign of Augustus. We discovered from tbe top of the 
 
 regne Augvste. dtcouvrir haut 
 
 mountain a vast plain full of flowery meadows. 
 
 plaine f. rempli de flearissant 2 pre m, pi. 1 
 The empire of the Babylonians was long a/ou- 
 
 — — nien ind-3 long-temps * 
 
 risking one. We did not hate the man, but his vices. Does 
 
 ehe really hate that vain pomp and all the parade of 
 
 pompe f. appareil ait 
 
 grandeur i 
 
184 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 compound tenses, and the infinitive ; as, cette sauce exi 
 trop ebouillie, this sauce has boiled away too much. 
 
 Like courir are conjugated, 
 accourir to run to far courir to run over 
 
 concourir to concur recourir to have recourse 
 
 discourir to discourse secourir to assist 
 
 encourir to incur 
 
 Faillir, to fail. 
 Part. pres. faillant* Past, failii. 
 
 Ind. pres. faux,* faux,* faut,* faillons,* faillez,* faillent.* 
 Imp erf. faillais.* Prel. faillis, he. Fut. faudrai.* 
 Cond. faudrais.* Subj. imp erf. que je faillisse. 
 
 Defaillir, to faint, has now only the plural of the 
 IffD. pres. nous defaillons, ils defaillent. Imperf. defaillo»s. 
 Pret. defaillis. Pret. indef. j'ai defailli, and Ixf. pres. defaillhr. 
 
 N. B. The tenses marked with an asterisk are obsolete. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH II. 
 
 Take that water off the fire, it boils too fast. Do not 
 
 Retirer f. de dessus m. f. fort 
 
 let the soup (boil away) (so much). That sauce has 
 
 laisscr 1 pot 3 taut 2 f. est 
 
 (boiled away) (too much). Boil that meat again ; 
 
 f. ' trop Faites rebouillir viandei.* 
 
 It has not boiled long enough. He runs faster than I. He 
 
 f. 2 * asses 1 vile moi 
 
 ran about uselessly all the morning. We ran at the 
 
 ind-4 * inutilement matinee f. ind-3 
 
 voice of that honest man, and assisted him. (The moment) he 
 
 f. des-que 
 
 saw us in danger, he ran to us and delivered us. By so 
 
 vit en * delivrer ind-3 2 
 
 whimsical a conduct, should we not contribute to our destruc- 
 biearre 3 1 concourir perte f. 
 
 tion? He discoursed so long on the immortality of the soul, 
 
 sur = 
 
 and the certainty of another life, that he left 
 
 certitude f. laisser ind-3 
 
 nothing unsaid. If we (were to act thus), we should 
 
 en arriere agir ind-2 ainsi 
 
 certainly incur the displeasure of our parents. I would not 
 
 disgrace f. 
 huve recourse to so base a method. Will men always 
 
 bas 2 moyen m. I art. 
 
 mn after shadows ? 
 
 de art. chbnere f. pi. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. t8S 
 
 Fuir, tojly, to run away. 
 
 Part. pres. fuyant. Past. fui. 
 
 Ind. pres. fuis, fuis, fuit, fuyons, fuyez, fuient. 
 
 Jmperf. fuyais. Pret. fuis. Fut. fuirai. Cond. fuiraia. 
 
 Imp. fuis, fuie, fuyons, fuyez, fuient. 
 
 Subj. pres. fuie, fuies, fuie, fuyions, fuyiez, fuient. 
 
 Imperf. je fuisse, or rather, prisse la fuite. 
 
 Mourir, to die. 
 
 Part. pres. mourant. Past. mort. 
 
 Ind. pres. meurs, meurs, meurt, mourons, mourez, meurent* 
 
 Imp. mourais. Pret. mourus. Fut. mourrai. Cond. mourraii. 
 
 Imp. meurs, meure, mourons, mourez, meurent. 
 
 Subj. pres. meure, meures, meure, mourions, mouriez, meurent, 
 
 Imperf. mourusse. Comp. tenses, je suis mort, j'£tais mort, &«. 
 
 Rem. S'enfuir, to run away, is conjugated after ftiti%. 
 Mourir takes the auxiliary etre ; and when reflected, 
 se mourir signifies to be dying, or at the point of death- 
 It is seldom used except in the present and imperfect of 
 fhe indicative. 
 
 EXERCISE ON FAILLIR, &c. 
 
 He (was near) losing his life in that rencounter. He 
 
 faillir perdre * art. rencontre f. 
 
 (was near) falling into the snare which was laid for Kim. 
 
 faillir \nd-4 donner piege m. qu'onavait tendu * ttti 
 
 His strength fails . him every day. Let us 
 
 * art. f. pi. difaillir lui art. m. pi. Donnez-iipu* 
 
 have something to eat directly ; we are fainting with 
 
 * * manger 2 vile 1 de 
 
 fatigue and hunger. I cannot meet him, he shuns 
 
 — pr. faim ne puis rencontrer 
 
 me. When we have no employ, we endeavour to 
 
 o?i salt s'occuper chercher st 
 
 fly from ourselves. Would he not avoid flatterers* 
 
 * soi-meme fuir art. flatteur m. pL 
 
 if he knew all their falsehood ? He diedby a (very painful) 
 
 ind-2 faussete f. de cruel 2 
 
 disease. She died of grief (for the loss of) her ion. 
 
 maladie f. 1 ind-4 chagrin m. d 1 avoir perdu 
 
 He is dying. She was expiring with grief, when the fear 
 
 ie mourir se mourir de craintt f. 
 
 of death at last wrested her secret from her 
 
 art. enfln arracher ind-3 — m. * lui. 
 
 17* 
 
186 OF TB£ IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Querir, to fetch, is used in familiar conversation af- 
 ter venir, envoyer, a tier, as, eir^yez querir, send for ; 
 allez querir, go and fetch. 
 
 Acquerir, to acquire. 
 Part. pres. acqu£rant. Past, acquis. 
 Ind. pres. acquiers, acquiers, acquiert, acqu^rons, acquerez, ao 
 
 quierent. 
 Imper. acque'rais. Pret. acquis. Fut. acquerrai. Cond. acquerrais. 
 Imp. acquiers, acquiere, acquerons, acquerez, acquierent. 
 Subj. pres. acquier-e, -es, -e, acquer-ions, -iez, acquidrent. 
 Imperf. acquisse. 
 
 S'enquerir, to inquire, and requerir, to request, are 
 conjugated as acquerir. 
 
 Conquerir, to conquer, is seldom used but in the 
 Ind. pret. je conquis, &c. and in the Subj. imperf. je 
 conquisse. Its chief use is in the compound tenses. 
 
 Ou'ir, to hear, is only employed in the Inf. pres. 
 oui'r. Part. past. oui. Ind. pret. j'ou'is, tu ouis, &c. 
 and Subj. imperf. j'ouisse, tu ouisses, &c. Its princi- 
 pal use is in the compound tenses , when it is generally 
 accompanied by another verb ; as, je Pai, or je I'avais 
 oui dire, I have, or I had heard it said. 
 
 Vetir, to clothe. 
 Part. pres. vetant* Past. vetu. 
 Ind. pres. vets,* vets,* vet,* vetons, v£tez, vetenf. 
 Imperf. vetais. Prel. vetis. Fut. v&tirai. Cond. v&irais. 
 Imp. vets,* vete,* vetons, vetez, vetent. 
 Subj. pres. vete. Imperf. vetisse. 
 
 N. B. Vetir, is seldom used in the forms marked 
 with an asterisk, and is most frequently reflected. 
 
 Revetir, to clothe, to invest, is used through all the 
 tenses ; devetir, to divest, is principally used as a re- 
 flected verb, and in some forms only. 
 
 ~ EXERCISE ON QUERIR, he. 
 
 Send for the physician and follow exactly his advice. Go 
 
 rnidecin suives 
 
 and fetch ray cane- Every day he acquired 
 
 * canne f. art. jour m. pi. ind-3 de art. 
 
 celebrity by works calculated to fix the atteiv- 
 
 s f . de art. ourrflgem.pl. fait pour 
 
 tion of an enlightened public. That I would acquire 
 
 2 1 subj-2 de art. 
 
 riches at the expense of my honesty ! He had acquired 
 
 dtpens m. pi. pi obit t f. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 187 
 
 branch in. Ouvrir. 
 Cueillir, to gather. 
 
 Part. pres. cueillant. Past, cueilli. Ind. pres* cueille. 
 
 Imperf. cueillais. Pret. cueillis. Fut. cueillerai. 
 
 Cond. cueillerais. Imper. cueille. Subj. pres. cueille. 
 
 Imperf. cueillisse. 
 
 Thus, accueillir, to welcome, and recueillir, to col- 
 lect. 
 
 Saillir, to project, has only soillant, sailli ; and the 
 following forms : il saille, il saillait, il saillera, il sail- 
 lerait, qu y il saille, qvMl saillit. But saillir, to gush 
 out, is regularly conjugated like Jlnir : saillissant, je 
 
 by his merit great influence over the opinions of his con- 
 m. line — f. sing. con- 
 
 temporaries. I have inquired about that man (every where) 
 tempormn dc — la par I out 
 
 and have not (been able) (to hear any thing of him). Who 
 je pu en avoir de, nouvdles Qui est- 
 
 has requested it of you ? Sesostris, king of Egypt, 
 ce qui 3 4 e?i 2 * " 1 
 
 conquered a great part of Asia. The formidable empire 
 
 art. 2 1 
 
 which Alexander conquered did not last longer than 
 
 — dre ind-6* durer plus long-temps 
 
 his life. I have heard that important news. He dressed 
 
 f. ouir-dire 2 sing. I se vilir 
 
 himself in haste and (went out) immediately. I wish 
 
 a art. hate f. soriir sur-le-champ. voudrais 
 
 she would drest the children with more care. If his 
 
 que vilir subj -2 de 
 
 fortune permitted him, be would clothe all the poor of his 
 
 permellait le lui 
 parish. Two servants clothed him with his ducal 
 
 paroisse f. donustique revttir de 2 
 
 mantle. He only passed for a traveller; but 
 
 tnanteau m. 1 ne ind-2 que voyageur 
 
 lately he has assumed the character of an envoy. It 
 
 depuis pen revttir nn * envoy 6 
 
 begins to be very warm ; it is time to (throw off 
 
 commencer /aire chaud; de u d6~ 
 
 some clothing.) 
 Utir. 
 
188 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 saillis, &c. Us saillissent, &c. Its principal use is k the 
 third persons. 
 
 Assaillir, to assault. 
 
 Part. pres, assaillant. Past, assailli. Ind. pres. assaille-. 
 
 Imperf. assaillais. Prtt. assaillis. Fut. assaillirai. 
 
 Cond. assaillirais. Imper. assaille. Sub. assaille. 
 
 Imperf. assaillisse. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH III. 
 
 I will gather with pleasure some of these flowers and 
 
 pr-pron. 
 fruits, since you wish to have some. Do not gather 
 
 puisque etre bien-aise de en 
 
 these peaches, before they are ripe. That is a 
 
 f. pi. av ant que de subj-1 mur. Ce 
 
 country where they neither reap corn, nor (gather) 
 
 pays oil on ne recueillir ni ble ni 
 
 grapes. We shall collect in ancient history important 
 
 vin recueillir 2 1 de art. — 2 
 
 and valuable facts. He received us in the most polite manner. 
 
 pricieux 3 fait I. accueillir de 2 maniere 
 
 Poverty, misery, sickness. persecution, in a 
 
 f. 1 art f. art. f. art. maladie f. art. f. en 
 
 word, all the misfortunes in the world have (fallen uvori) 
 
 malheur m. pi. de accueiuir 
 
 him. You will give six inches to that cornice ; it will 
 
 voules pouce m. pi. cornicheL f. 
 
 project too much. That balcony projected too much ; it 
 
 balconm. ind-2 
 darkened the dining-room. When Moses struck 
 
 obscurcir ind-2 Quand Mo'isefrapper ind-3 
 
 the rock, there gushed out (of it) a spring of (fresh running) 
 
 rocher m. il ind-3 en source f. n/2 
 
 water. The blood gushed from his vein with impetuosity. 
 f. 1 ind-2 veine f. = 
 
 We shall assault the enemy to-morrow in their entrenchments, 
 pi. demain rttranchemeni. 
 
 Were we not overtaken by a horrible storm ? At every word 
 ind-3 assailli lempete f. a chaque 
 
 they said to him concerning his son, the good (old man) 
 que on disait • de rieillard 
 
 leaped for joy. Shall you not shudder with fear 1 
 
 tressaillir ind-2 de joie. tressaillir peur f. 
 
 N. B. Tressaillir, to start, conjugated like assaillir, 
 makes in the fut. je tressaillirai, or tressaillcrai, &o. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Avoir, to have, is conjugated at length, p. 123. 
 
 Ravoir, to have again, and se ravoir, to recover, are 
 only used in the present of the infinitive. 
 
 Choir, to fail, has only the participle past, chu, chue, 
 formerly chute, preserved in chape-chute. 
 
 Dechoir, to decay. 
 
 (No Part, pres.) Part. past, dechu. 
 
 Ind. pres. d^chois, dechois, dechoit, dechoyons, d^choyez, d£- 
 
 cboient. 
 (No Imp erf.) Pret. dechus. Fid. decherrai. Cond. decherrais. 
 Imper. dechois, dechoie, dechoyons, dechoyez, dechoient. 
 Sub. pres. dechoie, dechoies, dechoie, dechoyi-ons, ■ — ez, decb •'*. 
 
 ient. Imperf. dechusse. 
 
 Echoir, to fall to, to expire, has only now in use, the 
 •L\d. pres. il echoit, sometimes pronounced il echet ; the 
 pret. il echut ; fut. il echerra ; cond. il echerrait ; the 
 imperf. Subj. que j'echusse, &c. and Inf. echoir, gcheant, 
 Schu. 
 
 ]JT. B. Choir, dechoir, echoir, take the auxiliary elre. 
 
 Falloir, to be necessary, is an impersonal verb, tho 
 conjugation of which has been given, p. 177. 
 
 EXERCISE ON AVOIR, RAVOIR, &c. 
 
 I had apartments that I liked ; I will endeavour to have them 
 ind-2 un logement aimer veux essayer de s. 
 
 again. Beware of falling. How has he fallen into 
 
 prenez-garde inf-1 comment en 
 
 poverty 7 Since the publication of his last work, he has 
 pauvreti? Depuis dernier 
 
 much, fallen in the esteem of the public, if he do not alter 
 dechoir changer 
 
 his conduct, he will decline every day in his reputation 
 de * dechoir de jo ur-en-jour de — f. 
 
 and credit. He has put in the lottery, and he hopes 
 
 pr. pron. — m. mis a loterie f. 
 
 that a capital prize \\W\fall ^to his share). That bill 
 
 * art. gros lot m. d. choir lui lettre f 
 
 of exchange has expired. The first term expires at Mid 
 
 change tchoir. ttrme m. a la Saint 
 
I$0 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Mouvoir, to move. 
 Part.pres. mouvant. Part. past. mu. 
 
 Ind. pres. meus, meus, raeut, mouv-ons, — ez, meuvenL 
 Jmperf. mouvais. Prtt. mus. Fat. mouvrai. Cond. mouvrais. 
 Imper. meus, meuve, mouvons, mouvez, meuvent. 
 Subj. pres. meuv-e, — es, — e, mouv-ions, — iez, meuvent. 
 Imperf. musse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, emouvoir, to stir 
 up, to move ; promouvoir, to promote ; and demouvoir, 
 to make one desist. 
 
 The first, whether in an actual or figurative sense, is 
 much used. The second, is employed in speaking of a 
 dignity. The third, is a law term, and is only used in the 
 Inf. pres. 
 
 Pleuvoir, to rain {impersonal). 
 Part.pres. pleuvant. Past. plu. Ind. pres. il pleut. 
 
 Imperf. il pleuvait. Pret. il plut. Fut. il pleuvra. 
 
 Cond. ilpleuvrait. Sub. pres. qu'il pleuve. Imperf. qu'il plut. 
 
 summer. You have drawn on me a bill of exchange ; when 
 
 Jean. Urer sur moi 
 
 is it payable ? I did not believe that I must so soon (have taken) 
 
 echoir ind-1 croyais sub-2 fairs 
 
 tJiat journey. He must have sunk under the efforts 
 
 voyage m. ind-4 que succomber sub-2 
 of (so many) enemies. 
 
 tant de 
 
 EXERCISE ON MOUVOIR, &c. 
 
 The spring which moves the whole machine is very inge- 
 
 ressort m. 2 tout 1 — f. 
 
 nious, though very simple. It was passion which moved 
 
 = quoique — Ce ind-1 art. f. ind-4 
 
 him to that action. Can you doubt that the soul, though it 
 
 — f. Pouvez f. 
 
 is spiritual, moves the body at pleasure ? That is a man 
 * — iuel ne sub-1 a sa volonte f Ce 
 
 whom nothing moves. We had scarcely lost sight of 
 
 emouvoir ind-3 a peine perdu vue f . 3 2 art. 
 
 land when there arose a violent tempest. We 
 
 terre } f. 1 que il s 1 emouvoir ind-3 grande tempite f. 
 were moved with fear and pity. When the famous 
 
 ind-2 imus de crainte f. pr. pitti f. Qnand cHebre 
 
 d'Aguesseau was promoted to the dignity of chancellor, all 
 
 = f. ckancelier oft. 
 
OF IH-: I AR VERBS. 191 
 
 PouvOiR, to bt able. 
 Part. pres. pouvanl. Part. past. pu. 
 
 Ind. pres. puis or peux, peux, peut, pouv-ons, — ez, peuvent 
 Imperf. pouvais. Fret. pus. Fut. pourrai. Cond. pourrais. 
 {No imperative) . Sunj.pres. puisse. Imperf. pusse. 
 
 Remark. Conversation and poetry admit je peux ; 
 but in interrogations, puis-je ? and not peux-je ? must be 
 used. 
 
 Savoir, io know. 
 Part. pres. sachant. Part. past. su. 
 
 Ind. pres. sais, sais, sait, savons, savez, savent. Imperf, savais. 
 Pret. sus. Fut. saurai. Cond. saurais. 
 
 Imper. sache, sache, sachons, sachez, sachent. 
 SuBj.pres. sache. Imperf susse. 
 
 Seoir, to become, to befit, has only the part, pres 
 seyant ; and the third person of the simple tenses, 
 il sied, ils siecnt, il seyait, il siera, il sierait, quHl siee. 
 But seoir, to sit, is used only in the two participles, seant 
 and sis. This verb is also use-d impersonally. 
 
 France shewed the greatest joy. That bishop well 
 
 f. en temoigncr ind -3 f. eveque 
 
 deserv r ed by his talents and by his virtues, that the king 
 
 mtriter ind-2 
 should promote him to the dignity of primate. The people 
 
 sub-2 primat sing. 
 
 thirik that it rains frogs and insects 
 
 croit de art. grenouille f. pi. pr-art. insecte m. pi. 
 
 at certain seasons. It will not rain to-day, but I 
 
 en — temps pi. d'aujourd'hui 
 
 (am fearful) of its raining to-morrow. 
 craindre que * ne sub-1 
 
 EXERCISE ON POUVOIR, SAVOIR, &c. 
 
 When he arrived at home, he (was quite ex 
 
 ind-5 with tire chez-lui rten pouvoir 
 
 hausted). The minister had (so many) people art his 
 
 ind-2 plus ministre ind-2 tant de monde a. 
 
 levee, that I could not speak to him. Are you afraid 
 
 audience, ind-2 * 2 craignez 1 
 
 that he will not accomplish that affair? I know 
 
 pouvoir sub-1 venir a bout de 
 
 that he is not your friend, but I know likewise that he is a 
 de pi. aussi * 
 
192 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS* 
 
 Asseoir, to set. 
 Part. pres. asseyant. Pari. past, assis. 
 
 Ind. pres. assieds, assieds, assied, assey-ons, — ez, — ent. 
 Imperf. asseyais. Prtl. assis. Fut. assierai, or asseyerai. 
 Cond. assiirais, or asseyerais. Imper. assieds, asseyc, asseyons> 
 — ez, — ent. Subj. pres. asseye. Imperf. assisse. 
 
 N. B. This verb is more frequently reflected, as 
 s'asseoir, to set down. Its compound rasscoir, to set 
 again, to calm, or to sit down again, is conjugated in the 
 same manner. 
 
 Voir, to see. 
 Pari. pres. voyarit. Part. past. vu. 
 
 Ind. pres. vois, vois, voit, voyons, voyez, voient. 
 Imperf. voyais. Pret. vis. Fut. verrai. Cond. verrais. 
 Tmper. vois, voie, voyons, voyez, voient. 
 Subj. pres. voie, voies, voie, voyions, voyiez, voient. Imp. visse. 
 
 man of probity. Let them know that their pardon depends on 
 
 bien grace dependre de 
 
 their submission. \ could wish that he knew his lessons 
 
 soumission. dtsirer con 1-1 sub-2 
 
 a little better. Let us see if this new-fashioned 
 
 voyons d'un nouveau gout 2 
 
 gown become* you, or not. Be assured that too gaudy 
 
 robe f. 1 71071 art. toy ant 
 
 colours will not become you. The head-dress which that 
 
 f. coiffure f. que 
 
 lady wore became her very ill. These colours become 
 
 porter ind-2 ind-2 lui inf-3 
 
 you so well, you (would do wrong) to wear any others. 
 
 avoir tort cond-1 de en porter de 
 Set that child in this arm-chair, and take care lest he 
 
 asseoir m. fauttuil m. prenez-garde que 
 
 fall. I will sit down on the top of that hill, 
 
 ne subj-1 s'asseoir sommet m. coteau m. 
 
 whence I shall discover a prospect (no less) magnificent 
 
 decouvrir scene f. aussi — que 
 
 than diversified. We (were seated) on the banks of the 
 
 varie s'asseoir ind-6 bord m. pi. 
 
 Thames, whence we (were contemplating) myriads of 
 
 Tamise f. ind-2 de art. millitr 
 
 vessels, which bring every year, the riches of the two 
 vaixeau apporter art. pi. 
 
 hemispheres. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS, 193 
 
 Revoir, to see again, and entrevoir, to have a glimpse 
 of, are conjugated in the same manner ; but prevoir, to 
 foresee, makes in the future and the conditional, je pr€- 
 voirai, &c. je prtvoirais, &c. 
 
 Pourveir, to provide, differs in the pret. je pourvus, 
 tu pourvus, &c. fut. je pourvoirai, &c. cond. je pour- 
 voiraisy &c. and imperf. subj. que je pourvusse, &c. 
 
 Surseoir, to supersede, though a compound of seoir, 
 is conjugated like voir, except that it makes fut. je sur~ 
 seoirai, &c. gond. je surseoirais, &c. and part, past, 
 sursis. 
 
 Valoir, lo be worth. 
 Pari. pres. valant. Part, past. vain. 
 
 Ind. pres. vaux, vaux, vaut, valons, valez, valent. 
 Imperf. valais. Pret. valus. Fut. vaudrai. Covd. vaudrais. 
 Lmper. vaux, vaille, valons, valez, vaiilent. 
 Subj. prts. vaille, vailles, vaille, valions, valiez, vaiilent. 
 Imperf. valusse. 
 
 Revaloir, to return like for like, and equivaloir, to be 
 equivalent to, follow valoir; but privaloir, to prevail, 
 makes in the sub J. pres. que je private, que tu privates, 
 qu'il prevale, que nous privations , &c. 
 Vobtloir, to be willing. 
 Part. pres. voulant. Part. past, voulu. 
 lxD.pres. veux, veux, veut, voulons, voulez, veulent. 
 Imperf. voulais. Pret. voulus. Fut. voudrai. Cond. voudrais. 
 Subj. pres. veuill-e, — es, — e, voulions, vouliez, veuillent. 
 Imperf. voulusse. 
 
 N, B. The imperative veuille,- veuillons, veuillez, is 
 also used, particularly veuillez, with the sense of, be so 
 
 good as y so kind as to, &a. 
 
 EXERCISE ON VOIR, &c. 
 See the admirable order of the universe : does it not announce 
 2 m. 1 
 
 a supreme architect ? Has he again seen with pleasure his 
 
 — 2 artisan m. 1. 
 
 country and his friends ? (Had he hid a glimpse of) the dawn 
 
 pays aurort 
 
 of this fine day? To finish their affairs, it would be neces- 
 
 Four falloir 
 
 18 
 
194 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 branch i. on Rendre. 
 
 Soudre, to solve, now obsolete, and replaced by 
 Resoudre, to resolve. 
 Part. pres. resolvant. Part. past. r£solu, or r6sous. 
 Ind. pres. resous, resous, resout, resolv-ons, — ez, — ent. 
 Imperf. r^solvais. Pret. resolus. Fut. resoudrai. 
 Cond. resoudrais. Imper. resous, resolve, resolv-ons, -ez, -ent. 
 Subj. pres. resolve. Imperf. resolusse. 
 
 This verb has two participles past, resolu, when it 
 means determined ; and resous^ when it means resolved 
 into ; in this last sense it has no feminine. 
 
 Absoudre, to absolve, is conjugated like resoudre ; 
 but has neither pret. ind. nor imperf. subj. ; its parti- 
 ciple past is absous, m. absoute, f. 
 
 sary for thern to (see one another). I clearly foresaw t (from 
 que * Us * s'entrevoir subj-2 bien des- 
 
 thattime), all the obstacles he would have to surmount. Would 
 lors — m. surmonter. ind-2 
 
 you have the judge (put off) the execution of the 
 
 * que surseoir subj-2 
 
 sentence that he had pronouneed ? I shall not put off the pur- 
 arret rendu pour- 
 
 suit of that affair. If men do not provide (for it), God 
 
 suite T. pi. art. y 
 
 will provide for it. Would this book be good for nothing ? You 
 
 valoir * 
 have not paid for this ground more than it is worth ; (are you 
 * terre f. f. ne cretin- 
 
 afraid) that it is not worth six hundred pounds ? Let ui 
 
 dre que subj-1 livre f. pi. sterling ? 
 
 take arbitrators. One ounce of gold is equivalent to 
 
 prenons de art. arbitre once f. 
 
 fifteen ounces of silver. Doubt not that reason and 
 
 art. art. 
 
 truth will prevail at last. I can and will tell the truth 
 
 * ne subj-1 a la longue pron. dire 
 
 If you are willing, he will be willing too. Let us resolve to 
 le le aussi vouloir * 
 
 resist our passions, and we shall be sure to conquer them. 
 
 combattre de vmncrt 
 
 {Be so good as) to lend me your grammar. 
 vouloir * preler 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 195 
 
 Dissoudre, to dissolve, has the same irregularities, and 
 wants the same tenses, as absoudre. 
 Coudre, to sew. 
 Part. pre*, cousant. Part. past, cousu. 
 
 I»d. pres. couds, couds, coud, cousons, cousez, cousent. 
 Imperf. cousais. Prtt. cousis. Fut. coudrai. Cond. coudrais. 
 Imper. couds. Subj. pres. couse. Imperf. cousisse. 
 
 Decoudre, to unsew, and recoudre, to sew again, are 
 conjugated in the same manner, so likewise sourdre y to 
 issue from a fountain, which is only used in the infini- 
 tive sourdre and present of the indicative il sourd. 
 Mettre, to put. 
 
 Part. pres. mettant. Part. past. mis. 
 
 Ind. pres. mets, mets, met, mettons, mettez, mettent. 
 Imperf. mettais. Pret. mis. Fut. mettrai. Cond. mettrais. 
 Imper. mels. SuBj.p'es. mette. Imperf misse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated the derivatives, 
 
 admettre to admit permettre to permit 
 
 commettre to commit promettre to promise 
 
 compromettre to compromise remettre to replace 
 
 se ddrnettre \ t0 P^ out of joint soumettre to subject 
 
 \ to resign transmettre to transmit 
 
 omettre to omit s'entremettre to intermeddle 
 
 EXERCISE UPON RESOUDRE, kc 
 
 Wood which is burned resolves itself into ashes 
 
 art. bois m. on brultr ind-2 se resoudre * en cendre f. 
 
 and smoke. Have they resolved on peace or war ? 
 
 pr. fumit i. on * art. f. art. f. 
 
 The fog has resolved itself into rain. Could that 
 
 brouillard m. se risoudre ind-4 * pluie f. 
 
 judge thus lightly absolve the guilty 1 Strong 
 
 si ligerement cond-1 coupable m. pi. art. fort 2 
 waters dissolve metals. Those drugs (were dissolved) 
 
 f. pi. 1 art. on 1 drogue 3 ind-4 2 
 
 before they were put into that medicine. My sister 
 
 avant que de Its * mettre remede m. 
 
 was serving all day yesterday. That piece is not w T ell sewed, it 
 ind -3 * hier m. 
 
 must (bt sewed over again.) Unpick that lace, and sew it 
 
 la inf-1 Dicoudre dentelle f. 2 1 
 
 again very carefully. Does he set a great value 
 
 avec beaucoup de sain mettre prix m. 
 
196 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Moudre, to grind (corn, &c.) 
 
 Part. pres. moulant. Part. past, moulu. 
 
 Ind. pres. mouds, mouds, moud, moul-ons, — ez, — cnt. 
 
 Imperf. moulais. Pret. moulus. Fut. moudraL 
 
 Cond. moudrais. 
 
 Imper. mouds, moule, moulons, moulez, moulent. 
 
 Sdbj. pres. moule. Imperf. moulusse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated the derivatives : 
 
 , , J '° g™' 1 ^ remoudre to grind again (corn, &c.) 
 
 I (knives, Sic.) remoudre to grind again (knives, &c.) 
 
 Prendre, to take. 
 
 Part. pres. prenant. Part. past. pris. 
 
 Ind. pres. prends, prends, prend, pren-ons, — ez, prennent. 
 
 Imperf. prenais. Pret. pris. Fut. prendrai. Cond. prendrais. 
 
 Imper. prends, prenne, prenons, prenez, prennent. 
 
 Subj. pres. prenn-e, — es, — e, pren-ions, — iez, prennent. 
 
 Imperf. prisse. 
 
 upon richest I never a dmitted those principles. Has 
 
 a art. 
 he committed that fault ? If he (would take my 
 
 ^aute f. me 
 
 advice,) he would resign his charge in favour of his 
 
 croyoit se dimettre cond-1. de f. en = 
 
 son. He put his arm (out of joint) yester- 
 
 se demeltre ind-3 * art. bras m. 
 day. I will omit nothing that depends on me to 
 
 de ce dependre ind-7 de pour 
 serye you. God frequently permits the wicked to 
 
 souvent que mechant m. pi. * 
 
 prosper. Put this book in its place again. Under 
 
 prospirer sub-1 remettre a — f. * 
 
 whatever form of government you (may live), remem- 
 
 quelque gouvernemenl m. que viviez sesou- 
 
 berthat your first duty is to be obedient to the laws. It 
 
 venir devoir m. de soumis 
 
 frequently happens that fathers traiismit to their children 
 
 arriver art. 
 
 both their vices and their virtues. He has loHg meddled 
 
 long-temps s'entre- 
 with public affairs ; but his endeavours have Dot been 
 mettre de art. 2 1 effort 
 
 crowned with success. 
 touronner de art. m. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 197 
 
 v In the same manner are conjugated, 
 
 appre-ndre to learn entreprendre to undertake 
 
 desapprendre to unlearn se m^prendre to mistake 
 
 comprendre to understand reprendre to retake, to reply 
 
 deprendre to separate surprendre to surprise 
 
 Rompre, to break. 
 Part. pres. rompant. Part. past, rompu. 
 Ind. pres. romps, romps, rompt, romp-ons, — ez, — ent. 
 Imperf. rompais. Pret. rompis. Put. romprai. Cond. romprais. 
 Imper. romps, rompe, rompons, rompez, rompent. 
 Subj. pres. 1 ompe. Imperf. rompisse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated corrompre, to cor- 
 rupt, and interrompre, to interrupt. 
 
 EXERCISE ON MOUDRE, PRENDRE, &c. 
 
 I took great pains : but, at last, I ground all the 
 
 ind-3 beaucoup de sing. enfin 
 
 coffee. Grind those razors with care. Those knive3 
 
 cafe m. rasoir m. couteaum. 
 
 (are just) ground. This grain is not sufficiently ground, it 
 
 venir Metre asses 
 
 should be ground again. I wish that you wonld take 
 
 falloir ind- We inf-1 vouloir 
 
 courage. What news have you learnt ? Philosophy com- 
 
 f. pi. art. 
 prehends logic, ethics, physics, and 
 
 logique f. art. morale f. art. physique f. art. 
 
 metaphysics. It is (with difficulty) that he divests himself of 
 metaphysique f. Ce difficilement que se deprendre 
 
 his opinions. He has forgotten all that he knew. I fear 
 desapprendre ce que ind-2 que 
 
 you will undertake a task above your strength. Could 
 
 ne subj-1 tdche f. au-dessus de f. pi. * 
 
 he have been mistaken so grossly ? I reproved 
 
 cond-2 grossierement reprendre ind-2 
 
 him continually for his faults, but (to no purpose). We 
 
 sanscesse de defaut inutilement 
 
 surprised the enemy, and cut them to pieces. In the middle 
 
 ind-3 pi. tailler en a 
 
 of the road the axletree of our carriage broke. Bad 
 
 chemin essieu m. carosse se rompre art. 
 
 company corrupts the minds of young people. Why do 
 
 f. pi. sing. gens pourquoi 
 
 you interrupt your brother, when you see him busy ? 
 quand occupi 
 
 18* 
 
198 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Sl/JVRE, to follow. 
 
 Part. pres. suivant. Part. past, suivi. 
 
 Ixv.pres. suis, suis, suit, suivons, suivez, suivent. 
 
 Imperf. suivats. Pret. suivis. Fut. suivrai. Cond. suivrais. 
 
 Imper suis, suive, suivons, suivez, suivent. 
 
 Subj. pres. suive. Imperf. suivisse. 
 
 N. B. S'ensuivre, to ensue, only used in the third 
 person singular and plural of every tense , and poursui- 
 vre, to pursue, are conjugated in the same manner. 
 
 Vaincre, to conquer, to vanquish. 
 
 Part. pres. vainquant. Part. past, vaincu. 
 
 Ind. pres. vaincs,* vainc,* vainc,* vainqu-ons,* — ez, — ent. 
 
 Imperf. vainquais. Pret. vainquis. Fut. vaincrai. Con. vaincrais. 
 
 Imper. vaincs,* vainque, vainquons,* vainqu-ez, — ent. 
 
 Subj. pres. vainque. Imperf. vainquisse. 
 
 All the persons of this verb, marked with an asterisk, 
 are very little used. But its derivative, convaincre, to 
 convince, is used in all its tenses and persons. 
 
 EXERCISE ON SUIVRE, &c. 
 
 (For a long while) we followed that method, which was 
 long-temps 2 ind-3 1 f. ind-2 
 
 only calculated to mislead us. What (is the consequence .?) 
 ne " que propre egarer que s^ensuivre 
 
 See the errors that have sprung from this propo- 
 
 s'ensuivre ind-4 f. pi. — f. 
 
 sition, which appeared so true. We pursued our course 
 
 ind-2 suivre ind-2 chemin 
 
 when some cries, which came from the midst of the 
 lorsque de art. cri, m. pi. * sortis fond m. 
 
 forest, excited terror in our souls. The Greeks 
 
 for It f. porter ind-3 art. «= f. Grec 
 
 vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Sal am is, Platea, 
 
 Perse a pr. Salamine pr. Platte 
 
 and Mycale. I have, at last, convinced him, by such 
 pr. de art. si 2 
 
 powerful reasons, of the greatness of his fault, that [ (have 
 
 fort 3 f. pi. 1 enormite faute f. ne 
 
 no doubt) but he will repair it. It is during 
 
 douttt nullement que ne reparer subj-1 Ce pendant 
 
 winter that they thrash the corn in cold countries, 
 
 art. o?i battre froid 2 art. pays m. pi. 1 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 199 
 
 Battre, to beat. 
 
 Part. pres. battant. Part. past, battu. 
 
 Ind. pres. bats, bats, bat, battons, battez, battent. 
 
 Imperf. battais. Pret. battis. Fut. battrai. Cond. battrais. 
 
 Imper. bats. Subj. pres. batte. Imperf. battisse. 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner, 
 
 abattre to pull down combattre to fight 
 
 rabattre to abate debattre to debate 
 
 rebattre to beat again s'ebattre to be merry 
 
 &tre, to be, is conjugated at full length, p. 134. 
 
 Vivre, to live. 
 
 Part. pres. vivant. Part. past. vecu. 
 
 Ind. pres. vis, vis, vit, vivons, vivez, vivent. Imperf. vivais. 
 Pret. v£cus. Fut. vivrai. Co>*d. vivrris. Imp. vis. 
 Subj. pres. vive. Imperf. vecusse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, revivre, to re* 
 vive ; and survivre, to survive. 
 
 The enemy was so completely beaten in that engagement, that 
 
 pi. — ment rencontre f. 
 
 he was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the country. The 
 
 pi. de lieue f. * pays 
 
 cannon (beat doiori) the tower. They were fighting with 
 canon abattre ind-3 tour f. * ind-2 un 
 
 unexampled fury, when a panic terror made 
 
 sans exemple 2 acharnemtnt m. 1 panique 2 = i\ 1 ind-3 
 
 them take flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beat 
 leur art. fuite f. m. rtbattre 
 
 these mattrasses again. Happy are those who live in soli- 
 matelas m. pi. * * art. re- 
 
 tude ! Long live that good king ! He 
 
 traite f. que 1 long-temps 4 subj-1 3 2 
 
 did not long survive a person who was so dear to him 
 
 ind-3 a f. art. 
 
 Fathers hve again in their children. He was in a strange de- 
 
 ac- 
 jection of mind ; but the news which he has received has 
 cablement f. pi. f. pi. ontfail 
 
 revived him. 
 inf-1 
 
200 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 branch 11. Piaire. 
 
 Braire, to bray, and il broit, ils braient, il braird*, 
 ils brairont, il brairait, ils brairaient, are only used 
 when speaking of asses ; though it may be used with 
 propriety in the other persons by comparison. 
 Faire, to do. 
 
 Part. pres. faisant. Fart. past. fait. 
 
 Ind. pres. fais, fais, fait, faisons, faites, font. 
 
 Imp erf. faisais. Pret. fis. Fut. ferai. Cond. ferais. 
 
 Imper. fais, fasse, faisons, faites, fassent. Subj. pres. fasse. 
 
 Itnperf. fisse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, 
 
 contrefaire 
 defaire 
 re defaire 
 forfaire* 
 rnalfaire* 
 
 to counterfeit refaire 
 to undo satisfaire 
 to undo again surfaire 
 tc trespass inefaire* 
 to do ill parfaire* 
 
 to do again 
 to satisfy 
 to exact 
 to misdo 
 to perfect 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH If. 
 
 What will you have him do ? 
 
 FAIRE, he. 
 
 Do not make (so 
 
 Que vouloir * que it subj-1 
 
 much) noise. Do they never exact ? That woman mimicked 
 tant de bruit ind-2 
 
 all the persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered 
 
 f. pi. que f. pi. legerete f. ind-3 
 
 her odious. It was with difficulty he (divested himself) of the 
 
 f. ind-3 peine que se defaire 
 
 false opinions which had been given him in bis infancy. 
 
 — f. on * f. pi. lui f. 
 
 Could it be possible that w T e should not again make a jcur- 
 
 subj-2 art. * voy- 
 
 ney to Paris, Rome, and Naples ? He says that you 
 
 age de pr. pr. dit 
 
 have offended him, and that, if you do not satisfy him quickly, 
 
 offense" prompte- 
 
 he will find means to satisfy himself. Every 
 
 ment art. moyen sing, de se lui-mtme 
 
 night, she milked her sheep, which gave her a (great 
 art. joirra.pl. ind-3 brebis pi. ind-2 lui ubon- 
 
 quantity) of wholesome milk. Have you milked your 
 
 dant2 * etsain3 lait in. 1. 
 
 * These four verbs are only used in this form, and the partic^ 
 ' past, forfait, malfait, nufait, and parfait. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 201 
 
 Traire, to milk (defective). 
 
 Part. prts. trayant Part. past, trait. 
 
 Ind. pres. trais, trais, trait, trayons, trayez, traient. 
 
 Imperf. trayais. (No prci.) Fut. trairai. Cond. trairais. 
 
 Imper. trais, traye, trayons, trayez, traient. 
 
 Subj. pres. traye. (No imperf.) 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner 
 
 attraire 
 
 to allure 
 
 rentraire 
 
 tofinedraw 
 
 abstraire 
 
 to abstract 
 
 retraire 
 
 to redeem 
 
 distraire 
 
 to dicert 
 
 soustraire 
 
 to subtract 
 
 extraire 
 
 to extract 
 
 
 
 All these verbs are principally used in the compound 
 tenses. 
 
 branch in. Parcttre. 
 
 NaItre, to be born. 
 
 Part. pres. naissant. Part. past. ne\ 
 
 Ind. pres. nais, nais, nait, naissions, naissez, nais3ent 
 
 Imperf. naissais. Pret. naquis. Fut. naitrai. Cond. naftraia. 
 
 Imper. nais. Svbj. pres. naisse. Imperf. naquisse. 
 
 This verb takes the auxiliary lire ; but its derivative, 
 renaitre, to be born again, has no participle past, and, 
 consequently, no compound tenses. 
 
 goats? Are the cowi milked? Salt is good to 
 
 mtcre f. pi. vache f. pi. art. Sel m. pour 
 
 entice pigeons. You will never know the nature ot 
 
 attraire art. m. pi. connaitre 
 
 bodies, if you do not abstract their necessary qualities from 
 art. * ■.■»■;— 1.1 
 
 those which are inherent (in them). The least thing (diverts 
 
 — leur moindre le 
 
 his attention.) Will you not extract that charming parage ? 
 distraire — m , 
 
 Have you darned your gown ? Should he not redeem that 
 
 rtntraire 
 land ? What ! would you have me screen those 
 
 Quot / ind-1 * queje soustraire sub- 1 
 
 guilty persons from the rigour of the laws ? 
 
 coupable m. pi. * a rigueur f. 
 
202 OP THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Pa!tre, to graze (defective). 
 
 Part. pres. paissant. Part. pest. pu. 
 Ind. pres. pais, pais, pait, paissons, paissez, paissent. 
 Imperf paissais. (No pre!.) Fnt. paitrai. Cond. paltrals. 
 IairER. pais. Subj. pres. paisse. (No imperf.') 
 
 Repaitre, to feed, to bait, is, like paraitre, regular in 
 all its tenses, making in the pret. ind. je repus, &c. and 
 in the imperf. subj. je repusse, &c. 
 
 branch iv. Redtiire. 
 
 Bruire, to roar, which is defective, has, besides this 
 form, the part. pres. bruyant, oftener used as an adjec- 
 tive, as, desjlots bruyans ; and the two third persons of 
 the imperf. ind. il bruyait, ils bruyaient. 
 
 Luire, to shine, and reluire, to glitter, make the part, 
 past, lui, relui, neither the preu ind. nor imperf subj. 
 are in use. 
 
 Nuire, to hurt, making part, pres, nuisant, past, nui, 
 has ail its tenses. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH III. NAITRE, &c. 
 
 Was not Virgil born at Mantua ? It is from that poisoned 
 
 ind-3 Manloue ? Ce empoisonni 2 
 
 source that have arisen all the cruel wars that have 
 
 f. 1 que nailre f. pi. 2 f. pi. 1 
 
 desolated the universe. The fable says that, as soon as 
 
 dholer i. dit aussifdt que 
 
 Hercules had (cut off) one of the heads of the hyd^ 
 Herculehm. couper tele f. pi. hydre f. 
 
 others sprang up. While their united 
 
 d'autres 2 il en renaiire ind-2 1 Tandis que riuni 2 
 
 flocks fed on the tender and flowery 
 
 troupeau m. pi. 1 paitre ind-2 * 2 fleuri 3 
 
 grass, they sung under the shade of a tree the 
 
 herbei.l chanter ind-2 a ombre 
 
 sweets of rural life. Your horses have not 
 
 douceur f. pi. art. champelre 2. f. 1 
 
 fed to-day ; you must have them fed. 
 
 repailre d'aujourd'hui * • fairt 2 1 inf-1. 
 
 He is a man who thirsts after nothing but blood 
 
 Ce ne se repaltre dc2 * que 1 
 
 and slaughter, 
 pr. carnage m. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. £Q3 
 
 Confjre, to pickle. 
 Part. pres. confisant. Part. past, confit. 
 IsD.pres. conf-is, — is, — it, — isons, — isez, — isent. 
 Imp erf. confisais. Pret. conns. Fut. confirai. 
 
 Cond. confirai?. Imp. confis. Subj. pres. confise. 
 
 Imperf confisse. 
 
 Its derivative deconfire, to discomfit, is rather obsolete. 
 
 Circoncire, to circumcise, and suffre to suffice, make 
 in the part. past, circoricis and siiffi, the rest is as confire. 
 
 Dire, to say. 
 Part. pres. disant. Part. past. dit. 
 
 IifD. pres. dis, dis, dit, disons, dites,* disent. 
 Imperf. disais. Pret. dis. Fut. dirai. Cond. dirais. 
 
 Imper. dis, dise, disons, dites,* disent. 
 Subj. pres. dise. Imperf. disse. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH IV. BRUIRE, &c. 
 The thunder which roared from afar an- 
 
 tonnerre ra. bruire ind-2 dans art. lointain m. 
 
 nounced a dreadful storm. They heard roar the waves 
 
 ind-2 terrible 2 orage ra. 1 On ind-2 inf-1 fid m. pi. 
 
 of an agitated sea. That street is too noisy for those who 
 
 agile 2 mer f. 1 rue f. bruyant 
 
 love retirement and study- (I have a glimpse of) gome- 
 art, relraile f. art. enfrevoir quelque 
 thing that shines through those trees. A ray of hope 
 chose au-travtrs dt ray an m. 
 shone upon us in the midst of the misfortunes which over- 
 ind-4 * a milieu malheur m. pi. ac- 
 whelmed us. Every thing is well rubbed in that bouse; every 
 caller ind-2 frotte 
 thing shines, even the floor. Would he not have 
 
 y reluire jusquea planch er m. * 
 
 injured you in that affair ? Jesus Christ was circumcised eight 
 
 cond-2 
 
 * Redire, to say again, conformably to its primitive, makes re- 
 dites, but 
 
 contredire 
 
 to contradict 
 
 de*dire 
 
 to unsay 
 
 interdire 
 
 to forbid 
 
 m£dire 
 
 to slander 
 
 p rid ire 
 
 to foretell 
 
 maudire 
 
 to curse 
 
 "J f vous contredije* 
 
 vous d6d\sez 
 i vous interdises 
 | vous m6(\\sez 
 vous pr6d\sez 
 ^vohs matidis*eg 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 make 
 
 j 
 
 This last makes part. pres. maudtoffnl, with two ss, and 1 conw 
 quently oous maudi-Mons, &z,c. je rnaudiwais, Sic. 
 
204 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Ecrire, to write. 
 Part. pres. ^crivant. Part, past, £crit. 
 
 Ind. pres. £cris, ecris, ecrit, ecriv-ons, — ez, — ent. 
 Imperf. ^crivais. Pret. ecrivis. Ful. ecrirai. Cond. £crirals. 
 Imp. £cris. Subj. pres. icrive. Imperf. £crivisse. 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner, 
 
 circonscrire to circumscribe proscrire to proscribe 
 
 d£crire to describe recrire to write again 
 
 inscrire to inscribe souscrire to sub scribe 
 
 prescrire to prescribe transcrire to transcribe 
 
 Lire, to read. 
 Part. pres. lisant. Part. past. lu. 
 
 Ind. pres. lis, lis, lit, lisons, lisez, lisent. Imperf. lisais. 
 Pres. lus. Fut. lirai. Cond. lirais. Imper. lis. 
 Subj. pres. lise. Imperf. lusse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, 
 elire to elect relire to read over again 
 
 days after his birth. Will you preserve these peaches 
 
 naissance f. confire 
 
 with sugar, with honey, or with brandy? 
 
 a art. sucre m. art.mielm. art. eau-de-vie f. 
 
 Did you pickle cucumbers, purslane, 
 
 de art- concombre m. pi. pr-art. pourpitr m 
 and sea-fennel ? If he loses his lawsuit, all his 
 
 pr. art. perce-pierre f. proces m. 
 
 properly will not suffice, 
 bien 
 
 EXERCISE ON DIRE, &c. 
 Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never eontra- 
 dire art. f. 
 diet (any one) in public. You thought you were serving 
 
 psrsonne en penser ind-4 * * inf-1 
 
 m-e in speaking thus: well, (let r be 50) ; you shall not 
 
 en parler ainsi eh ! Men, soit en 
 
 be contradicted. What ! would you forbid him all commu- 
 
 dedire. Quoi ! * interdire 
 
 nication with his friends ? That woman who slandered 
 
 f. ind 2 de 
 
 every one, soon lost all kind of respect. You had 
 
 ind-3 espece F. consideration 
 
 foretold that event. Let us curse no one ; let us remember 
 
 ne ptrsonne se rappeler 
 
 that our law forbids us to curse even those who persecute us. 
 difendre * de persicuter 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 205 
 
 Rire, to laugh. 
 
 Part. pres. riant. Past. ri. Ind. pres. ris, ris, rit, rions, riez, nent. 
 Imperf riais. Pret. rK Fut. rirai Cohd. rirais 
 
 Imper. ris. Sub j. pres. rie- Imperf. risse. 
 
 Sourire, to smile, is conjugated as rire. 
 
 FWre, to fry, besides the present of the infinitive, has 
 only the part. past, frit ; indic. pres. je fris, tu fris, fl 
 frit ; fut. je fnrai, tu, &c. ; cond, je frirais, tu, &c. ; 
 imper. sing. fris. But it has all the compound tenses. 
 The forms that are deficient are fully supplied by fair e, 
 prefixed tofrire, as faisant frire, je faisais frire, &c 
 
 Boire, (o drink. 
 
 Part. pres. buvant. Past. bu. 
 
 Ind. pres. bois, bois, boit. buvons, buvez, boivent. 
 
 Imperf. buvais. Pret. bus. Fut . boirai. Cond. boirais 
 
 InrER. bois, boive, buvons, buvez. boivent. 
 
 Sunj./?re5. boiv-e, — es, — e, buvious, buviez, boivent. 
 
 Imperf busse. 
 
 Write every day the reflections which you make on tbe 
 
 arLpl. 
 books you read. Did he not read that interesting his- 
 
 ind-2 2 I 
 
 tory with (a great deal) of pleasure ? God is an infinite being 
 
 2 Itrt m. 
 who is circumscribed neither by time nor place. 
 
 1 ne ni art. ni pr. art. iieiiia.pL 
 
 Will you not describe in that episode the dreadful tempest 
 
 — m. horrible 2 f. 1 
 
 which assailed your hero ? Get those soles and whitings 
 
 ind-3 Jaire 1 — pron. merlan 3 
 
 fried. If you wish to form your taste, read over and over, un- 
 lnf-1 2 vouloir * * re lire 
 
 ceasingly, the ancients. He was elected by a great majority of 
 sans-cesse ind-4 a »— r 
 
 voices. We have laughed heartily, and have rcsslveu 
 
 de bon cceur nous rholu 
 
 to (go on). He did not answer him (any thing ) : but 
 
 de continuer repondre ind-3 lui rxtn 
 
 he smiled at him, as a sign of approbation, in the kindest 
 
 ind-3 # lui en * — de graticuxZ 
 
 manner. 
 air ra. 1 
 
 19 
 
206 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, 
 
 reboire to drink again s'emboire to inbibe, a technical t&m 
 
 used in painting. 
 
 Clore, to close, ha? only the part, pasty clos ; ind. 
 pres. je clos, tu clos, il clot ; fut. je clorai, tu cloras, &c; 
 cond. je clorais, tu clorais, &c. ; and the imp. sing. clos. 
 
 Declore, to unclose, enclore, to enclose, are defective 
 in the same tenses as clore ; but forclere, to debar, a law 
 term, is only used in the inf. and part, past, forclos. 
 
 Eclore, to be hatched, as birds, or to blow like a flow- 
 er, has only these forms ; inf. eclore ; part, past, eclos ; 
 ind. pres. il eclot, ils tclosent ; fut. il £clora, ils eclo- 
 ront ; cond. il eclorait, ils ecloraient ; and the subj. pres. 
 qu'il eclose, qu'ils eclosent. But its compound tenses, 
 which are formed with tire, are much used. 
 
 Conclure, to conclude. 
 
 Part. pres. con cluant. Past, conclu. 
 
 Ind. pres. conclus, conclus, conclut, conclu-ons, — ez, — ent. 
 Imperf. concluais. Pret. conclus. Fut. conclurai. 
 Cond. conclurais. Imper. conclus. Subj. pres. conclue. 
 
 Imperf. eonclusse. 
 
 N. B. Ex dure, to exclude, is conjugated like con- 
 dure, except that its participle past is either exclu, or ex~ 
 clus. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BOIRE, CLORE, &,e. 
 
 Seated under the shade of palm-trees, they were milkwig 
 
 Assis a art. palmier pi. * ind-2 
 
 their goats and ewes, and merrily drinking 
 
 chevre f. pi. pron. brebis f. pi. avecjoie2 ind-2 1 
 
 that nectar, which (was renewed) every day. Should 
 
 m. . se renouveler ind-2 art. pi. * 
 
 they not have drunk with ice ? This window does not 
 
 "-nd-2 a art. f. f. 
 
 shut well ; when you have made some alterations (in it), 
 
 ind-8 reparation f. pi. y 
 
 it will shut better. He had scarcely closed his eyes, when 
 
 f. tnieux. a peine ind-6 * art. que 
 
 the noise which they made at his door, awoke him. 
 
 que on ind-3 a rtvtillir ind-3 
 
 Have they not enclosed the suburbs within the city ? 
 
 on fa u b o u rg in . pi . villc f . 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 207 
 
 Croire, to believe. 
 
 Part. pre*, croyant. Past, cru. 
 
 Ind. pres. crota, crois, croit, croyons, croyez, croient. 
 
 Imperf. croyais. Fret. crus. Fut. croirai. Cond. croirais. 
 
 Imper. crois, croie, croyons, croyez, croient. 
 
 Sobj. pres. croie, croies, croie, croyions, croyiez, croient. 
 
 Imperf. crusse. 
 
 It has no derivative but accroire, which is only used 
 with j aire, as, faire accroire, or en f aire accroire, to im- 
 pose upon credulity ; and s 1 en faire accroire, to be setf- 
 conceited. 
 
 Poindre (upon joindre), v. a. to sting, and v. n. to 
 shoot forth, to dawn, has, besides the inf. poindre, the 
 ind. pres. il point, and theyW. il poindra. 
 
 Will you enclose your park with a wall, or a hedge? 
 
 pare de mur m. pr. haie f. 
 
 Put the eggs of those silk-worms in the sun, 
 
 mettes ozuf m. pi. rer-a-5oiem.pl. a soleil m. 
 
 that they may hatch. Those flowers just blown, 
 
 sub-1 nouvellement 
 
 spread the sweetest fragrance. When did they conclude this 
 reprandre doux parfum m. ind-4 
 
 treaty ? His enemies managed so well, that he was unani- 
 traite m. faire ind-3 ind-3 unani- 
 
 mously excluded from the company. Did you think me 
 
 mement compagnie f. croire ind-1 
 
 capable of so black an act ? He possesses some kind of 
 
 noir 2 trait m. 1. avoir espict 
 
 knowledge ; but (not so much as he thinks.) 
 savoir il Jen faire trop accroire. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS 
 
 UPON THE TWO FOLLOWING TABLES* 
 
 The following Tables, which exhibit at one view all 
 the primitive tenses, both of the regular and irregular 
 verbs, and most of the defective, with reference to the 
 pages, where the other tenses are to be found, will, it is 
 presumed, prove useful to those who will consult them. 
 
208 
 
 TABLE 
 
 OF THE PRIMITIVE TENSES 
 
 OF THE FOUR 
 
 
 REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 
 INFIN. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. f INDICATIVE. 
 
 1 
 
 Page 
 
 | 141 
 
 Present. j 
 
 Present. Past. \ Present. 
 
 Prtter. 1\ 
 
 Parler. j 
 
 Flf 
 
 Variant. 
 
 1ST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Je parlai. 
 
 Parle. | Je parle. 
 
 PumY. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Je punis. 
 
 151 
 
 Punissant. 
 
 Puni. 
 
 Je punis. 
 
 Sentir. 
 
 Sentant. 
 
 Sent?'. 
 
 Je sens. 
 
 Je sentw. 
 
 151 
 
 Mentir. 
 
 Mentant. 
 
 Mentt. 
 
 Je mem. 
 
 Je mentis. 
 
 
 Se repent ir. 
 
 Se repentant. 
 
 Repen ti. 
 
 Je me repens. 
 
 Je me repentis. 
 
 167 
 
 Par* ir. 
 
 Part ant. 
 
 Parti. 
 
 Je pan. 
 
 Je partis. 
 
 
 SortzY. 
 
 Sortant. 
 
 Sorti." 
 
 Je sor s. 
 
 Je sort is. 
 
 
 Dormir. 
 
 Dormant. 
 
 Dormi. 
 
 Je dors. 
 
 Je dormis. 
 
 
 Sertur. 
 
 Servant. 
 
 Serri. 
 
 Je sers. 
 
 Je serris. 
 
 
 Ouvrir. 
 
 Ouvrant. 
 
 Ouvert. 
 
 J' ou\re. 
 
 J* ouvrts. 
 
 15: 
 
 C ou vrir. 
 
 Couvrant. 
 
 Couvert. 
 
 Je couvre. 
 
 Je couvris. 
 
 
 OfiWr. 
 
 OfiVauf. 
 
 Offert. 
 
 J' offre. 
 
 J* offris. 
 
 
 SouflWr. 
 
 Souffranr. 
 
 Souffert. 
 
 Je souffre. 
 
 Je souffrir. 
 
 
 Tenir. 
 
 Tenant. 
 
 T«mu. 
 
 Je tiens. 
 
 Je tins. 
 
 151 
 
 Venir 
 
 Vennnt. 
 
 Venn. 
 
 Je \iene. 
 
 Je vins. 
 
 
 Recevoir. I 
 
 TH] 
 Recevant. 
 
 RD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Je reqtu. 
 
 158 
 
 Recit. j Je recois. 1 
 
 De-eotY. 
 
 Devant. \ Du. | Je doi's. 
 
 Je dus. 
 
 
 Repandre 
 
 FOU 
 
 RTH CONJUGATION 
 
 Je repand is. 
 
 
 Repandant. 
 
 Repandu. 
 
 Je repands. 
 
 Rendr->- 
 
 Rendant. 
 
 Rendu. 
 
 Je rends. 
 
 Je rend is. 
 
 160 
 
 Fondr«. 
 
 Fondant. 
 
 Fondu. 
 
 Je fonds. 
 
 Je fondis. 
 
 
 Repondre. 
 
 Repondant. 
 
 Repondu. 
 
 Je reponds. 
 
 Je r^pondis. 
 
 
 Tondre. 
 
 Tond«nt. 
 
 Tondu. 
 
 Je tonds. 
 
 Je tondt's. 
 
 
 Perdre. 
 
 Perdant. 
 
 Perdu. 
 
 Je peril 5. 
 
 Je perdis. 
 
 
 Mordre. 
 
 Mordant. 
 
 Mordu. 
 
 Je mords. 
 
 Je moid is. 
 
 
 Tordre. 
 
 Tordanf. 
 
 Tordu. 
 
 Je to id s. 
 
 Je to rd is. 
 
 
 Plaire. 
 
 Vlaisant. 
 
 Plu. 
 
 Je pi a is. 
 
 Je plus. 
 
 J 60 
 
 Taire. 
 
 Taisant. 
 
 Tu. 
 
 Je tais. 
 
 Je tus. 
 
 
 Paratfre. 
 
 Paraissant. 
 
 Pant. 
 
 Je parai's. 
 
 Je parus. 
 
 160 
 
 Croftre. 
 
 Croissant. 
 
 Cru. 
 
 Je crois. 
 
 Je crus. 
 
 
 Connaitre. 
 
 Conna issanf. 
 
 Connu. 
 
 Je connai's. 
 
 Je connus. 
 
 
 Repaitre. 
 
 Repatssant. 
 
 Repu. 
 
 Je repau. 
 
 Je repw.\ 
 
 
 Require. 
 
 R&luisant. 
 
 Reduit. 
 
 Je reduis. 
 
 Je leduisis 
 
 160 
 
 Instruir*. 
 
 Instruisant. 
 
 Instruit. 
 
 J' instruit. 
 
 J' instruis/s. 
 
 
 Craindre. 
 
 Craig-uant. 
 
 Craint. 
 
 Je crains. 
 
 Jc eraig-nis. 
 
 
 Peindre. 
 
 Peig-nant. 
 
 Peinf. 
 
 Je peins. 
 
 Je peig-nts. 
 
 
 Jolndre. 
 
 Joig-nant. 
 
 Joint. 
 
 Je joins. 
 
 Je joig-nis. 
 
 160 
 
209 
 
 PRIMITIVE TENSES OF THE IRREGULAR WITH 
 
 
 SOME DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 
 INFIN. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 ! INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Present. \ Past. 
 
 Present. J Preter. Def. 
 
 Alter. 
 
 F 
 | AUant. 
 
 RST CONJUGATION. 
 
 J' allai. 
 
 Page 
 |180 
 
 Alie. | Je vais. 
 
 Fleurir. j 
 Hair. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 132 
 
 Fleurissant. 
 Florissant. 
 
 > Fleuri. 
 
 \ Je fleuris. 
 
 Je fleuris. 
 
 HaJssant. 
 
 Hal. 
 
 Je hals. 
 
 Je hals. 
 
 133 
 
 Gesir.* 
 
 Gisant. 
 
 
 1 11 git. 
 
 
 133 
 
 Bouillir. 
 
 Bouillant. 
 
 Bouilli. 
 
 ' Je bous. 
 
 Je bouillis. 
 
 133 
 
 Ebouillir. 
 
 
 Ebouilli. 
 
 i 
 
 
 193 
 
 Courir. 
 
 Courant. 
 
 Couru. 
 
 Je cours. 
 
 Je courus. 
 
 183 
 
 Faillir. 
 
 Faillant.* 
 
 Failli. 
 
 Je faux.* 
 
 Je faillis. 
 
 134 
 
 Defaillir. 
 
 
 Defailli. 
 
 Nous defaillons 
 
 Je defaillis. 
 
 184 
 
 Fuir. 
 
 Fuyant. 
 
 Fui. 
 
 Je fuis. 
 
 Je fuis. 
 
 1-5 
 
 Mourir. 
 
 Mourant. 
 
 Mort. 
 
 Je mours. 
 
 Je mourus. 
 
 185 
 
 Acquerir. 
 
 Acqueraut. 
 
 Acquis. 
 
 J'acquiers. 
 
 J' acquis. 
 
 136 
 
 Conquerir. 
 
 Conquerant. 
 
 Conquis. 
 
 Je conquiers. 
 
 Je conquis. 
 
 126 
 
 Ouir. 
 
 Oyant.* 
 
 Oul. 
 
 
 J' ouis. 
 
 186 
 
 Velir. 
 
 Vetant. 
 
 V6tu. 
 
 Je vets. 
 
 Je vetis. 
 
 136 
 
 Revetir. 
 
 Revetant. 
 
 Revetu. 
 
 Je revets. 
 
 Je revetis. 
 
 186 
 
 Cueillir. 
 
 Cueillant. 
 
 Cueilli. 
 
 Je cueilla. 
 
 Je cueillis. 
 
 187 
 
 Saillir. 
 
 Sailiant. 
 
 Sailii. 
 
 11 saille. 
 
 11 saillit. 
 
 137 
 
 Tressaillir. 
 
 Tressaillant. 
 
 Tressailli. 
 
 Je tressaille. 
 
 Je tressailhs. 
 
 189 
 
 Avoir. 
 
 Tf 
 
 IIRD CONJ 
 
 UGATION. 
 
 
 128 
 
 Ayant. 
 
 Eu. 
 
 J'ai. 
 
 J' eus. 
 
 Ravoif. 
 
 
 
 
 
 139 
 
 Choir. 
 
 
 Chu. 
 
 
 
 139 
 
 Dechoir. 
 
 
 Decbu. 
 
 Je dccbols. 
 
 Je dechus. 
 
 139 
 
 Echoir. 
 
 Eche.ant. 
 
 Echu. 
 
 11 echoit. 
 
 J* echus. 
 
 139 
 
 Falloir. 
 
 
 Fallu. 
 
 11 fauU 
 
 11 faJlut. 
 
 177 
 
 Mouvoir. 
 
 Ziouvant. 
 
 Mo. 
 
 Je meus. 
 
 Je mus. 
 
 190 
 
 Premouvoir. 
 
 
 Promu. 
 
 
 Je promus.* 
 
 190 
 
 Pleuvoir. 
 
 Pleuvant. 
 
 Plu. 
 
 Ilpleut. 
 
 11 plut. 
 
 190 
 
 Pouvoir. 
 
 Pouvant. 
 
 Pu. 
 
 Je puis. 
 
 Je pus. 
 
 191 
 
 Savoir. 
 
 Sachant. 
 
 Su. 
 
 Je sais. 
 
 Je sus. 
 
 191 
 
 Seoir.* 
 
 Seyant. 
 
 
 11 sted. 
 
 
 191 
 
 Seoir* 
 
 Seant. 
 
 Six. 
 
 
 
 191 
 
 Asseoir. 
 
 Asseyant. 
 
 Assis. 
 
 J' assieds. 
 
 J' assis. 
 
 192 
 
 Surseoir. 
 
 
 Sursis. 
 
 Je sursois. 
 
 Je sursis. 
 
 193 
 
 Voir. 
 
 Voyant- 
 
 Vu. 
 
 Je vois. 
 
 Je vis. 
 
 192 
 
 Prevoir. 
 
 Prevoyant. 
 
 Prevu. 
 
 Je prevois. 
 
 Je previ6. 
 
 193 
 
 Pouvoir. 
 
 Pourvoyant. 
 
 Pourvu. 
 
 Je pourvois. 
 
 Je pourvus. 
 
 193 
 
 Valoir. 
 
 Vulant. 
 
 Valu. 
 
 Je vaux. 
 
 Je valus. 
 
 193 
 
 Vouloir. 
 
 Voulawl. 
 
 Voulu. 
 
 Je veux. 
 
 Je voulus. 
 
 193 
 
 1 
 
 f. B. The forms niarked with 
 
 an asterisk arp obsolete. 
 
 
 ~w 
 
210 
 
 INF1N. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 | Present, 
 
 | Past. 
 
 Present. 
 
 | Preterit. 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 FOl 
 
 'RTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Page 
 
 
 
 
 
 Soudre. 
 
 Solvant.* 
 
 
 
 
 194 
 
 
 Resoudre. 
 
 Resolvant. 
 
 Resous, resolu. 
 
 Je resous. 
 
 Je resolus. 
 
 194 
 
 
 Absoudre. 
 
 Absolvant. 
 
 Absous. 
 
 J' absous. 
 
 
 194 
 
 
 Dissoudre. 
 
 Dissolvant. 
 
 Dissous. 
 
 J e di. c sous. 
 
 
 195 
 
 
 Coudre. 
 
 Cousant 
 
 Cousu. 
 
 Je couds. 
 
 Je cousis. 
 
 195 
 
 
 Sourdre. 
 
 
 
 11 sourd. 
 
 
 195 
 
 
 Melt re. 
 
 Metiant. 
 
 Mis. 
 
 Je mets. 
 
 Je mis. 
 
 195 
 
 
 Moudre. 
 
 Moulnut. 
 
 Moulu. 
 
 Je mouds. 
 
 Je moulus. 
 
 196 
 
 
 Prendre, 
 
 Prenaot. 
 
 Pris. 
 
 Je prends. 
 
 Je pris. 
 
 196 
 
 
 Rompre. 
 
 Rampant. 
 
 Rompu. 
 
 Je romps. 
 
 Je rompis. 
 
 197 
 
 
 Suivre. 
 
 Suivant. 
 
 Suivi. 
 
 Je suis. 
 
 Je suivis. 
 
 198 
 
 
 S'ensuivre. 
 
 S'ensuivant. 
 
 Ensuivi. 
 
 11 s'ensuit. 
 
 11 s'ensuivit. 
 
 198 
 
 
 Valncre. 
 
 Vainquant. 
 
 Vaincu 
 
 Je vaincs.* 
 
 Je vainquis. 
 
 193 
 
 
 Battre. 
 
 Battant. 
 
 Battu. 
 
 Je bats. 
 
 Je battis. 
 
 199 
 
 
 Etre. 
 
 Etant. 
 
 Ete. 
 
 Je suis. 
 
 Je fus. 
 
 134 
 
 
 Vivre. 
 
 Vivant 
 
 Vecu. 
 
 Je vis. 
 
 Je v£cus. 
 
 199 
 
 
 JBraiie. 
 
 
 
 II brait 
 
 
 -200 
 
 
 Faire. 
 
 Faisant. 
 
 Fait. 
 
 Je fais. 
 
 Je fis. 
 
 200 
 
 
 Traire. 
 
 Trayant. 
 
 Trait. 
 
 Je trais. 
 
 
 ^01 
 
 
 Naitre. 
 
 Naissant. 
 
 Ne. 
 
 Je nais. 
 
 Je naquis. 
 
 201 
 
 
 Renaitre. 
 
 Renaissant. 
 
 
 Je renais. 
 
 Je renaquis.* 
 
 201 
 
 
 Paitre. 
 
 Paissani. 
 
 Pu. 
 
 Je pais. 
 
 
 202 
 
 
 Bruire. 
 
 Bruyant. 
 
 
 
 
 282 
 
 
 Luire. 
 
 Luisant. 
 
 Lot. 
 
 Je luis. 
 
 
 20 J 
 
 
 Nuire. 
 
 Nuisant. 
 
 Nui. 
 
 Je nuis. 
 
 Je nuisis. 
 
 202 
 
 
 Confire. 
 
 Oonfisant. 
 
 Ccnfit. 
 
 Je confis. 
 
 Je confis. 
 
 203 
 
 
 Suffire. 
 
 Suffisant. 
 
 Suffi. 
 
 Je sums. 
 
 Je suffis. 
 
 203 
 
 
 Circoncire. 
 
 Circoncisant. 
 
 Circoncis. 
 
 Je circoncis. 
 
 Je circoncis. 
 
 203 
 
 
 Dire. . 
 
 Disant. 
 
 Dit. 
 
 Je dis. 
 
 Je dis. 
 
 203 
 
 
 Med ire. 
 
 Medisanl. 
 
 Medit. 
 
 Je in6dis. 
 
 Je mddis. 
 
 203 
 
 
 Maudire. 
 
 Maudissant. „ 
 
 Maudit. 
 
 Je naudis. 
 
 Je maud is. 
 
 203 
 
 
 Ecrire. 
 
 Ecrivant. 
 
 Ecrit. 
 
 J' ecris. 
 
 J' e*crivis. 
 
 £04 
 
 
 Lire. 
 
 Lisant. 
 
 Lu. 
 
 Je lis. 
 
 Je lus. 
 
 204 
 
 
 Rire. 
 
 Riant. 
 
 Ri. 
 
 Je ris. 
 
 Je ris. 
 
 205 
 
 
 Frire. 
 
 
 Frit. 
 
 Je fris. 
 
 
 205 
 
 
 Boire. 
 
 Buvant. 
 
 Bu. 
 
 Je bois. 
 
 Jebus. 
 
 205 
 
 
 Clore,clorre. 
 
 
 Clos. 
 
 Je clos. 
 
 
 205 
 
 
 Conclure. 
 
 Concluant. 
 
 Conclu. 
 
 Je conclus. 
 
 Je conclus. 
 
 206 
 
 
 Exclure. 
 
 Excluant. 
 
 Exclu, or exclus. 
 
 J' exclus. 
 
 J' exclus. 
 
 206 
 
 
 Croire. 
 
 Croyant. 
 
 Cru. 
 
 Je cqois. 
 
 Je crus. 
 
 207 
 
 
 Poindre. 
 
 
 
 11 point. 
 
 
 207 
 
 
 N. B. Th< 
 
 i derivatives, \ 
 
 vbich are not in th 
 
 is Table, will 
 
 be found with 
 
 
 
 
 the primitives 
 
 , to which we bav 
 
 i given relere 
 
 nces. 
 
 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 211 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Prepositions, which are so called, from being pre- 
 fixed to the nouns which they govern, serve to connect 
 words with one another, and to show the relation be- 
 tween them. Thus, in this phrase, le fruit de Parbre, 
 the fruit of the tree, de expresses the relation between 
 fruit and arbre. Likewise in this, utile a Phomme, 
 useful to man ; a forms the relation between the noun 
 homme and the adjective utile. De and a are preposi- 
 tions, and the word to which they are prefixed, is called 
 their regimen. 
 
 There are different kinds of prepositions. 
 
 Some are used — to denote place, as : 
 Chez. II est chez-/ui, he is at home. 
 Daxs. 11 se pTomtne dans le jardin, he is walking in 
 
 the garden. 
 Devant. // eit toujour* devant mes yeux, he is always 
 
 before my eyes. 
 Derriere. // ne regarde jamais derriere lui, he never 
 
 looks behind him. 
 Parmi. Que defous parmi les hommes ! how many fools 
 
 among men ! 
 Sous. La taupe vit sous terre, the mole lives under 
 
 ground. 
 Sub. II a le ckapeau sur la teie, he has his hat on (his 
 
 head.) 
 Vers. Vaimant se tourne vers le nerd, the loadstone 
 
 points towards the north. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 We find less real happiness in an elevated condition than in 
 On de 2 bonheur i 2 f. 1 
 
 a middling state. One is never truly peaceful but at 
 
 moytn 2 1 v'rilabienient tranquille que 
 
 home. He walked before me to serve me as a guide. 
 
 soi marcher pour de * 
 
 There was a delightful grove behind his house Among 
 ind-2 2 bosquet m. 1. 
 
212 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Some — to mark order, as : 
 
 Avant. La nouvelle est arrivee avant le courrier, the 
 news is come before the courier. 
 
 Apres. II est trop vain pour marcher apres les autres, 
 he is too proud to walk after other people. 
 
 Entre. Etle a son enfant entre les bras, she holds her 
 child in (for between) her arms. 
 
 Depuis. Depuis la creation jusqu'a nous, from the crea- 
 tion to the present time. 
 
 Des. Des son cnfance, from his infancy ; des sa source, 
 from its source, "f 
 
 Some — to denote union, as : 
 Avec. Ilfaut savoir avec qui on se lie, we ought to 
 know with whom we associate. 
 
 (^so many) different nations, there is not one that has not a 
 
 tantde 2 1 y en avoir subj-1 
 
 religious worship. Nature displays her riches with mag- 
 
 2 culte m. 1 art. diployer 
 
 nificence under the torrid zone. Eternal snows 
 
 iorride 3 f. 1 de art. 3 5 f. pi. 4 on 1 
 (are to be seen) on the summit of the Alps. Towards the north, 
 voir ind-1 2 sommtt 
 
 nature assumes a gloomy and wild aspect, 
 art. triste2 sauvage 3 aspect m. 1. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 We (were up) before day -light, (in order to) enjoy 
 
 se lever ind-6 art. peur de 
 
 the magnificent spectacle of the rising sun. After such great 
 
 magnijique 2 — m. 1 levant 2 1 de si 
 
 faults, it only remained for us to repair them (as 
 
 faute f. pi. ne r ester ind-2 * que riparer 
 
 well as we could). Between those two mountains runs a deep 
 dt noire mieux est pro fond 3 
 
 hollow road. Many very astonishing events 
 
 et creux 2 chemin m. 1 * de art. 2 4 3 
 
 (have taken place) within these ten years. From my earliest 
 
 il se passer ind-4 1 depuis * art. tendre 
 
 infancy I have had an abhorronce of lying. 
 
 * horreur art. incnscnge m. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 213 
 
 Durant. Durant la guerre, during the war : durant 
 
 Pete, during the summer. 
 Pendant. Pendant Phiver, in winter ; pendant la 
 
 paix, in time of peace. This preposition denotes a 
 
 duration more limited than durant. 
 Outre. Outre des qualites aimables, ilfaut encore, Sic. 
 
 besides amiable qualities, there ought still, &c, 
 Suivant. Je me decider ai suivant lea circonsfances, 
 
 I shall determine according to circumstances. 
 Selon. Le sage se conduit selon les maximes de la 
 
 raison, a wise man acts according to the dictates of 
 
 reason.]: 
 
 Some — to express opposition, as : 
 
 Contre. Je plaide contre lui, I plead against him. 
 
 Malgre. II Pa fait malgre moi, he has done it in 
 spite of me. 
 
 Nonobstant. Nonobstant ce qu^on lui a dit, notwith- 
 standing what has been said to him. IT 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 JVith wit, politeness, and some (readiness to 
 
 de art. pr. art. peu (& prevenance 
 
 oblige), one generally succeeds in the world. We are fit 
 
 reussir on prop re 
 
 for meditation during winter. (In the course of) that siege 
 a art. f. pendant sitgem. 
 
 the commandant of the city made some very successful 
 
 ind-3 de art. heureux 2 
 
 sallies. Besides the exterior advantages of figure and 
 
 sortie f. pi. 1 2 1 art. 
 
 the graces of deportment, she possesses an excellent heart, a 
 
 art. maintien m. avoir 2 1 
 
 correct judgment, and a sensible soul. Always act 
 sain 2jugement 1 2 1 5e conduirt 
 
 according to the maxims which I have given you. 
 
 * f. pi. incutquer f. pi. 
 
 11 EXERCISE. 
 We cannot long act (contrary to) our own character; 
 
 savoir co ml- 1 agir contre * 
 
 natuntlistanding all the pains we take to disguise it, it 
 
 que pour 
 
 shews itself, and betrays us on many ions. In 
 
 se monlrer trahir en Oien de art. * 
 
£14 OP THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Some — to express privation, or separation, as : 
 
 Sans. Des troupes sans chef, troops without com- 
 manders. 
 
 Excepte. Excepte quelques malheureux, except some 
 wretches. 
 
 Hors. Tout est perdu hors Vhonneur, all is lost save 
 honour. 
 
 Hokmis. Tous sont entres hormis monfrlre, they are 
 ail come in except my brother!. 
 
 Some — to denote the end, as : 
 
 Envers. II est charitable envers les pauvres, he is cha- 
 ritable to the poor. 
 
 Touchant. // a ecrit touchant cette affaire, he has 
 written respecting that business. 
 
 Pour. II travaille pour le bien public, he labours for 
 the public good. IT 
 
 vain we dissemble ; in spite of ourselves, we are known at 
 
 * avoir beau f aire on nous connait d 
 
 last. . 
 la tongue. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 {Had it not been for) your care, I should have been ig- 
 sans pi. uii 
 
 norant all my life. All the philosophers of antiquity 
 
 art. 
 except a few, have held the world to be eternal. All 
 
 ires-petit nombre croire * * 
 
 laid down their arms, except two regiments, who pre- 
 
 mettre bas * art. 
 ferred (making their way) through the enemy. Every 
 
 sej aire jour au-travers de pi. 
 
 thing is absurd and ridiculous in that work, except a chapter 
 or two. 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 I have written to you concerning that business, in which I 
 
 a laquelle 
 
 take the most lively interest ; and as I know your benevo- 
 
 vif connaitrc bienrtil- 
 
 lence towards the unfortunate, I (make not the least doabt) 
 
 lance f. malheureux ne douter nullcment 
 
OP THE PREPOSITIONS. 215 
 
 Others — to mark the cause and means, as ; 
 Par. // Pa flechi par ses prieres, he has softened him 
 
 by hi3 entreaties. 
 Moyennant. II rtussira moyennant vos avis, he will 
 
 succeed by means of your counsels. 
 Attexdu. // ne pent partir, attendu les rents contraires, 
 
 he cannct sail on account of contrary winds, J 
 
 The use of the prepositions, — a, — de, — en, is yery 
 
 extensive. 
 
 A is generally used to express several relations, as des- 
 tination, tendency, place, time, situation, &c. being 
 often a substitute for various other prepositions ; 
 ex. : — destination -to : oiler a Londres, to. go to Lon- 
 don. — Tendency -to, toward: count a sa perte, to 
 hasten to one's ruin. — Aim -a£, for : aspirer a la 
 gloire, to aspire to glory. — Residence -at, in : etre a 
 Rome, to be at Rome. — Time -at : a midi, at twelve 
 o'clock. — Concern -on : a ce sujet, on this subject. — 
 Manner -with : supplier a mains jointes, to entreat 
 earnestly. —Means -with: peindre a Vhuile, to paint 
 in, or with oil; -with: bas a-irois-fils, three thread- 
 stockings, that is, with three threads, — Situation -at, 
 
 that you (will carefully attend; (to it), (not so much) for ike 
 
 ne donner tous vos soiiis subj-1 y moinx 
 satisfaction of obliging me, as for the pleasure of justifying 
 
 inf-1 justijier inf-1 
 
 innocence and confounding calumny, 
 art. pr. covfondre art. f. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 Is there any man that has never been softened by tears 
 aucun subj-1 jltchir art. 
 
 or disarmed by submission ? Through the precautions 
 
 ni desarmer art. 
 
 which we took, we avoided the rocks of that dangeroui 
 
 que ind-3 ind-3 icutil m. pi. 2 
 
 coast. Owing to the bad state of my father's health, I shaH 
 role Li 2 1 
 
 not trarel this year. 
 voyager annti f. 
 
216 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 with : etre a son aise, to be at ease. — Purpose for : une 
 table a manger, a dining table. — Suitableness -for, to : 
 homrne a rtussir, a man likely to succeed : — Desert : 
 crime a ne pas pardonner, a crime not to be forgiven, &c 
 
 De is generally used to express separation, extraction, 
 possession, appartenance, cause, shift, result, &c. and 
 supplies the place of several prepositions, as — from: 
 je viens de France, I come from France ; d'un bout 
 a-V autre, from one end to the other. — Of: lepalais du 
 roi, the palace of the king; les facultes de Pdme, the 
 faculties of the soul ; un homme ft esprit, a man of wit. 
 ki a partitive sense — of : moitie de, quart de, &c. the 
 half of, the fourth of, &c. : it is used for par — by : il 
 est aime de tout le monde, he is beloved by every body ; 
 for — through, or by, &c. ; mourir defaim, de soif, to 
 die of hunger, of thirst : — on, upon, with : vivre de 
 fruits, to live upon fruit. — On account of or for : sau- 
 ter dcjoie, to leap for joy. IT 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION a. 
 
 Fathers ! give good counsels, and still better 
 
 de encore 3 pr. meilltvr 1 
 
 examples to your children. A good minister only aims 
 
 2 ne aspire r 
 
 at the glory of serving his country well. When we were 
 que a inf-1 2 pays 3 1 ind-2 
 
 hi the country, we devoted the morning io 
 
 a campagne f. consacrtr ind-2 maitnee f. art 
 
 study, we walked at noon, and at three or four 
 
 se promener ind-2 midi 
 
 o'clock we went a hunting, or fishing. Michael 
 
 heure pi. ind-2 art. chasse f. pr. art. ptche f. Michel- 
 
 Angelo has painted (a great deal) in fresco. It is a bed with 
 
 Ange beaucnup art. fresque f. ce lit m. 
 
 ivory posts and mahogany feet. That man, with his 
 colonne d'ivoire pr. pied ef acajou * art. 
 
 gloomy looks and surly behaviour, seems 
 
 sombre 2 regard m. 1 pr. art. brusque 2 mainlien m. 1 ne sembU 
 hi oniy /o serve as a scarecrow. 
 propre que de * tpouvanlail. 
 
OP THE PREPOSITIONS. 217 
 
 En serves lo mark the relations of time, place, situa- 
 tion, &c. and is variously expressed, as, c'etait en 
 hiver, it was during winter ; etre en Angleterre, to be 
 in England ; aller en Italie, to go into Italy ; elle est 
 en bonne sante, she is in good health ; il vaut mieux 
 etre en paix, ^w'en guerre, it is better to be at 
 peace than at war ; il Va fait en haine de lui, he did 
 it out of hatred to him, &c. J 
 
 H EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION de. 
 I come from London, where I have spent a week very 
 oil passi huit jours 
 
 agreeably. From one end of the horizon to the other, the 
 
 bout m. m. 
 
 sky was covered icith thick black clouds. 
 
 del m. Spais 2 et noir 3 nuage m. pi. 1 
 
 The marble of Paros is not finer than that which we get 
 
 qui nous vient 
 from Carrara. Montaigne, Mad. de Sevigne, and la Fontaine, 
 
 Carrarc. 
 were writers of truly original genius. One half 
 
 ind-2 rfe art. icritain un 2 3 1 moiiiti. 
 
 of the terrestrial globe is covered with water, and above a 
 terrestre2 globe m. 1 plus de 
 
 (third part) of the rest is uninhabited, either through extreme 
 tiers m. inhabite on par un 2 
 
 heat, or through excessive cold. In that happy 
 
 chaleur f. 1 un = 2 froid m. 1 
 
 retreat, we lived an the milk of our flocks, and the delicious 
 asile m. ind-2 brebis pr. 2 
 
 fruits of our orchards. 
 1 verger m. pi. 
 
 ; EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION en. 
 
 He had for a (long while) lived in France ; the 
 
 3 * dcpuis 1 * long-temps 2 vivre ind-2 
 troubles which agitated that fine kingdom obliged him to 
 
 ind-4 royaume m. ind-4 de 
 
 retire to Switzerland, whence he soon after (set off) 
 
 se retirer Suisse d'oil 3 1 2 se rendre ind-4 
 
 for Italy. We were at peace, and enjoyed all 
 
 ind-2 pron. en gouter ind-2 art. 
 
 its blessings, when ambition rekindled the flames of 
 
 # charme m. art. rallumer ind-3 feu s. 
 
 war, and forced us to put our frontiers in a state 
 
 art. ind-3 de mettre frontier e f. nl. * 
 
 20 
 
218 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 The adverb, is a word which accompanies verbs, ad- 
 jectives, or even other adverbs, to espress their man- 
 ner, or circumstances. 
 
 Remark. There are adjectives which are some- 
 times used as adverbs, as, il chante juste, he sings 
 well ; elle chante faux, she sings out of tune ; Us ne 
 voient pas clair, they do not see clear ; cettejieur sent 
 ban, this flower has a good smell, &c. The adjec- 
 tives, juste, faux, clair, and bon, here supply the place 
 of abverbs. 
 
 Adverbs are of different kinds. 
 
 The most numerous are those which express manner, 
 and are formed from adjectives by the following method : 
 
 Rule I. When the adjective ends, in the mascu- 
 line, with a vowel, the adverb is formed by adding 
 ment ; as, modeste-ment, modestly ; poli-ment, politely ; 
 ingenii-ment, ingenuoush &c. 
 
 Exceptions. Impuni /lakes impunlment, and traitre, 
 traitreusement. 
 
 The following six titce e close before -ment, instead 
 of the e mute in the adjective. 
 
 aveuglement blindly conform Anient conformably 
 
 commod^ment commodiously enormement enormously 
 incommodement incommodiously opiniatrement obstinately 
 
 Observe that the adverbs, 
 follejient foolishly bellement softly 
 
 mollement effeminately nouvellement newly 
 
 are to be considered as coming from the adjectives fol, mol, bel, 
 nouvel, and accordingly belong to the following rule. 
 
 Rule II. When the adjective ends witii a conso- 
 nant, in the masculine, the adverb is formed from the 
 feminine termination, by adding ment ; as, grand 
 
 of defence. The savage is almost continually at war ; he can- 
 
 presque toujours 
 not remain at rest. He has acted, on this occasion, like 
 
 en repos dans en 
 
 a great man. 
 
OF THE ADVERB. 219 
 
 grandement, greatly ; franc, franchement, frankly, 
 naif, na'ivement, artlessly, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. 1st. Genlil, makes gentiment, prettily. 
 
 2nd. The following eight adverbs, 
 comniunement commonly importuu^ment importunately 
 
 confus^ment confusedly obscurement obscurely 
 
 diffusement diffusedly precis6ment precisely 
 
 expressement expressly profondement deeply 
 
 take before ment the e close instead of the e mute, in 
 the feminine of the adjectives from which they are 
 derived : 
 
 Rem. The six following adverbs are not derived 
 from adjectives. 
 
 comment how profusement lavishly 
 
 incessamment presently nuitamment by night 
 
 notamment especially sciemment knowingly 
 
 3rd. Adjectives ending in -nt, form their adverbs by 
 changing -nt into -mment, as consta-nt, consta-mmen%\ 
 constantly ; eloque-nt, eloque-mment. Except lent and 
 present, the only two of this class, that follow the se- 
 cond general rule, making lentement and presejitement. 
 
 Rem. Most adverbs denoting manner, and a few 
 others, have the three degrees of comparison, as, pro~ 
 fondement, aussi, plus, or moins profondement, fort, 
 bien, or tres -profondement, and le plus profondement. 
 
 The following degrees of comparison are irregular. 
 
 POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE, 
 
 bicn well mie*ix better le mieux the best 
 
 mal bad pis worse le pis the worst 
 
 peu little moirrslf less I e moins the least 
 
 EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 
 
 Bourdaloue and Masillon have both spoken very 
 
 Vun et V autre 
 eloquently on evangelical truths ; but the former has prin- 
 
 „ art. izang clique 2 1 
 oipally (proposed to himself) to convince the mind ; the latter 
 
 se proposer deconvaincre 
 
 has generally had in view to touch the heart. Several of 
 
 en vuc de art. 
 
 la Bruyere's characters are as finely drawn as they are deUr 
 2 1 finement tract * 
 
220 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 There are likewise various other sorts of adverbs 
 
 f Affirmation, [ as 
 ) Consent, 
 °M Doubt, 
 
 Certes, certainly : oui, yes. 
 Soli, be it so ; volontiers, willingly. 
 Peut-Ure, perhaps. 
 (^Denial, — non,ne, tie-pas, tie-paint, no, not,t 
 
 Order o • ^ Premtirement, first ; stcondement, 2dly, &c. 
 Rank ' \ Wabord, at first ; ensuite, aprts, afterwards ; 
 ' ( auparavant, before. 
 
 of^ r Oil, where ; id, here ; Id, there ; de-ca, on this 
 
 Place, or I side ; de Id, on that side ; par-tout, every 
 
 Distance, ) where ; prts, proche, near, nigh ; loin, far, 
 
 L &c.t 
 
 oately expressed. Bnft'on is one of the best writers of the last 
 
 2 
 century ; he thinks deeply, describes forcibly, and expresses 
 siecle m. 1 peindre fortement 
 
 himself (with dignity.) Corneille and Racine are the two best 
 
 noblement 
 French tragic poets ; the pieces of the former are strongly, 
 
 3 tragique2 If. 2 
 
 but incorrectly written ; those of the latter are more regularly 
 
 3 1 
 
 beautiful, more purely expressed, and more delicately conceived. 
 beau pense. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, &c. 
 
 Certainly, either I mistake, or the business passed (ia 
 
 ou se tromper se passer ind-4 
 
 that manner.) Do you think that he listens icillingly to this 
 
 ainsi ecouter 
 
 proposal ? Have you ever read in Racine the famous scene of 
 
 f. 
 Phaedra's delirium ? Yes, I have, and I own it is one 
 
 Phedre 2 art. delire m. 1 la lue avouer que ce 
 
 of the finest of the French theatre. Perhaps you will discover, 
 
 .2 m. 1 
 on a second perusal of la Fontaine's fables, beauties 
 
 elans lecture f. 2 art. 1 de art. f. pi. 
 
 which yon did not perceive at first. Will you have some ? 
 que avoir apercue-s d art. f. * en 
 
 No. Will you not have some ? The man who (is willing) to 
 * vouloir * 
 
 do good is not stopped by any obstacle. I will pay him 
 * art.' arret 6 auctm lui 
 
 what I owe, but not all at once. 
 ce que lui von pas a art. fris f. 
 
OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 221 
 
 Of time. < 
 
 Present. 
 Past. 
 Future. 
 Indeterminate. 
 
 Maintenant, now ; dprisent, at 
 present ; actuellement, this mo 
 ment, &c. 
 Hier, yesterday ; avant-hier, the 
 day before yesterday ; autre- 
 fois, formerly, &,c. 
 Demain, to-morrow ; apr&s-d»- 
 main, the day after to-mor- 
 row, &c. 
 (Souvent, often ; d' ordinaire, gene*, 
 rally ; quelquefois, sometimes; 
 matin, early ; tot, soon ; tard, 
 late, &c.1T 
 
 % EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF ORDER, &<u 
 
 We ought first to avoid doing evil ; afterwards we 
 * falloir ind-1 * de inf-1 art. * 
 
 ought to do good. Read books of instruction first, and 
 
 * art. 1 art. 3 4 2 
 
 then you may proceed to those of entertainment. If 
 
 * passer ind-7 agriment 
 
 you will go, settle first what is to be don« 
 
 vouloir s'en alter rtgler auparavant falloir * * inf-1 
 
 The painter had (brought together) in the same picture several 
 
 rassembler un tableau 
 
 different objects : here, a troop of Bacchants ; there, a troop of 
 
 2 1 BaccJiante 
 
 young people ; here, a sacrifice ; there, a disputation of philoso- 
 
 gens dispute 
 
 phers. Sesostris carried his conquests farther than Alexander 
 
 pousser conquete ng 
 
 did afterwards. Call upon your cousin ; he lives near here 
 ind-4 dcpuis Passer chez loger 2 idl 
 
 I cannot see that, if I be not near it. When he knew 
 
 ind-1 aupres * Quand satoir ind-3 
 where he was, he began to fear the consequence of hli 
 
 ind-2 commencer ind-3 suite 
 
 imprudence. Contemplate (at a distance ) lofty mountains, If 
 
 de loin art. haut f. 
 
 you wish to behold prospects ever varied and ever new. 
 
 vouloir * dtcouvrir de art. site m. 
 
 1f EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 
 I have finished the work you prescribed nae ; what do 
 
 achever que ordonner ind-6 que 
 
 20* 
 
222 OF Till. ADVERB. 
 
 Quantity. 
 
 OF< 
 
 I Comparison, 
 
 L Pck, little ; assez, enough ; trop, too 
 3 much; bcaucoup, much, ve-ymuch; 
 r tant, so much, &c. 
 X Plus, more ; moins, less ; aussi, so ; au- 
 I tant, as much, &c.t 
 
 you wish me to do now? Formerly, education 
 
 voulolr 1 que je * subj-1 3 2 
 was aeglected; it is now (very much) attended to ; it is (to 
 
 on 3 beaucoup 2 s T occuper en 1 faUoir 
 be hoped) that new views will soon (be adopted.) They 
 
 esperer on * 4 2 adopter in d -7 1 de 3. 0» 
 
 grieved (at it) yesterday; now, they laugh (at it); 
 
 s'affligcr ind-2 e?i aujourd'hui rire en 
 
 to-morrow, h will no longer (be thought) of. It is one of 
 
 ow ^Zms penscr ind-7 2/ 
 
 those accidents which it is sometimes impossible to avoid. The 
 
 de 
 dew incommoded me (very much.) ; I shall not (in future) 
 serein m. ind-4 desormats 
 
 walk so late. Rude and coarse criticism 
 
 sc promener Malhonnete 2 grossier Sun f . 1 
 
 generally (does greater injury) to the person who indulges 
 
 nuire plus sepermetire 
 
 himself in it, than to him who is the object (of it.) 
 * celle en 
 
 I EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF QUANTITY, &c 
 
 There are many people who have pretensions ; but very 
 beaucoup de * * d 
 
 few who have such as are well founded. To embellish a 
 
 en sub-1 * * * * de fondei. pi. * 2 
 
 subject too much, frequently betrays a want of judgment and 
 
 '3 1 souvent etre faute 
 
 taste. One very often experiences disgust in the midst ot 
 
 trouver art. ennui d 
 Khe most riotous pleasures. She is a giddy and thoughtless 
 
 bruyant 2 1 Ce Icgcr 2 inconsequent 2 
 
 woman, who speaks much and reflects little. She has so much 
 1 rifl6chir 
 
 kindness, that it is impossible not to love her. These stuffs 
 de de kojfe L 
 
 are beautiful ; consequently they are dear. This book has 
 aussi couter chtr. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 The conjunction is a word which serves to connect 
 words, or sentences, as, II pleure et rit en meme temps, 
 he cries and laughs at the same time ; the word et 
 unites the first sentence, il pleure, with the second, il 
 rit. Likewise in Pierre et Paul rient, Peter and Paul 
 laugh ; the word et unites these two sentences into one, 
 Pierre rit and Paul rit. 
 
 There are different kinds of conjunctions. 
 
 To unite two words under the same affirmation, or 
 under the same negation, et is used for the affirmation, 
 and ni, neither, nor, for the negation. 
 
 To denote an alternative, or distinction, ou, either, or ; 
 soit, que, whether, or ; tantot, sometimes, &c. 
 
 To restrict an idea ; sinon, but, except ; quoique, en- 
 core que, though, although ; a moins que, unless, till.f 
 
 merit ; but there are others as good. If he has done that, 
 du en * de 
 
 I can do (as much.) What I say to you (about it) is meant 
 
 en aidant en * 
 
 less to give you pain, than to apprize you of the lan- 
 jwur faire de art. avertir pro- 
 
 guage that is used. She is six years younger than her bro- 
 pos\)\. on tenir avoir de moins 
 
 ther. Nobody is more interested than you are (in the 
 
 ne * d ce que reussir 
 
 success) of the affair. You do not offer enough for this garden : 
 subj-1 2 * 1 offrir de 
 
 give something more. TIic more ignorant we are, the less we 
 
 de * 1 4 on 2 3 * 
 
 (believe ourselves so.) 
 croire Vttre. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Gold and silver are metals less useful than iron, 
 art art. de art. art. 
 
224 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 To express opposition, mats, but ; cependant, yet, 
 nevertheless; neanmoins, for all that, however; pour- 
 tant, however, thoagh ; toutefois, Men que, although. 
 
 To express a condition ; si, if ; sinon que, except 
 that ; pourvu que, provided that ; a condition que, on 
 condition that. 
 
 To express consent ; a la verite, indeed ; a la bonne 
 heure, very well. 
 
 For explanation ; savoir, c'esUa-dire, viz. that is to 
 say ; , comme, as. j" 
 
 To listen with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to 
 * midisant * lui ce * 
 
 cherish the serpent who stings, that he may sting more 
 rechauffer p?,guer a fin que plus 
 
 effectually. I like neither 8 ,terers nor the wicked. Those 
 surement t 7 Uteur pi. 
 
 who have never suffered, kn w nothing; they know neither 
 savoir connaitre 
 
 good nor evil. You may choose either a happy 
 art. bienpl. art. mal pi. avoir d choisir de 
 
 mediocrity, or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to many 
 
 f. de f. bien de 
 
 dangers. He is an inconsistent man ; he is sometimes of 
 art. Ce inconsequent 2 1 tantot 
 
 one opinion, and sometimes of another. I have (nothing more) 
 
 avis ne autre chose 
 
 to say to you, only that I will have it so. I shall not yet 
 
 sinon que » vouloir * * encore 
 
 proceed to the perusal of t^e authors of the second class, unless 
 
 lecture f. ordre m. 
 
 you advise me to do so. 
 
 ne conseiller subj-1 * * le 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 The serpent bites ; it is only a bite ; but from this bite 
 ce ne que morsurc 
 
 the venom communicates itself to the whole body ; the slanderer 
 
 venin 
 speaks ; it is but a word; but this word resounds every 
 
 ne que parole f. rctcntir 
 
 where. (That is) certainly a superb picture ; nevertheless, there 
 Voild tablet: u 
 
OP CONJUNCTIONS. 225 
 
 To express relation, or parity; comme, as, ainsi, 
 thus, so ; de meme, as, just as ; crnisi que, as ; autant 
 que, as much as ; si que, as, &c. 
 
 To express augmentation, d'ailleurs, besides, more- 
 over ; outre que, besides that ; de plus, au surplus, be- 
 sides, furthermore. 
 
 For diminution, au moins, du moins, pour le moins, at 
 least. 
 
 To express the ca *e, or the reason of a thing ; car, 
 for ; comme, as ; parc^ que, because ; puisque, since ; 
 pour que, that, in order mat, &c. % 
 
 is some incorrectness in the design. Although Homer, accord- 
 
 incorrection pi. dessin 
 
 uag to Horace, slumbers (aft times), he is never- 
 
 soinmeiller sub-1 qcjelquefois en 2 3 we 1 pas 
 thdtss the first of all poets. You will succeed, provided 
 moins art. riussir pourvu 
 
 you act with vigour. We have within us two facultief 
 
 que agir sub-1 ew 
 
 that are seldom united, viz. imagination and judgment. 
 * * art. 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 The most beautiful flowers last but a moment : thus hu 
 durer ne que art. 2 
 
 man life passes away. The (greatest part) of mankind 
 
 4 3 1 * plupart f. art. homme pi 
 
 have, like plants, bidden qualities that chance 
 
 pi. art. de art. cach6 2propriet6 f. 1 art. hasard 
 
 discovers. Mad. de Sevigne's letters are mo- 
 
 faire decouvrir 2 art. f. 1 de art. 
 
 dels of elegance, simplicity, and taste ; besides, they are 
 
 pr. pr. 
 
 replete with interesting anecdotes. Nothing is more enter 
 plein de 2 f . 1 * de emu 
 
 taining than history ; besides, nothing is more instructive. 
 sant art. * de 
 
 Circumstances show us to others, and still 
 
 art. occasion pi. faire connaitre encore 
 
 more, to ourselves. I shall always advise you to take the 
 
 consc tiler de 
 
226 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 To draw a conclusion ; or, now ; done, then ; par 
 consequent, consequently ; e'est pourquoi, therefore. 
 
 To express a circumstance ; quand, lorsque, when ; 
 pendant que, tandis que, &c. whilst, while ; iant que, 
 as long as ; depuis que, ever since ; avant que, before ; 
 des-que, aussi-totque, d'abordque, as soon as ; a -peine, 
 hardly, scarcely ; apres que, after that ; enfm, in fine, 
 finally, to conclude, &c. 
 
 To express a transition ; car, for ; en effet, indeed, 
 in effect ; au reste, besides, otherwise ; a propos, now 
 I think of it ; ay res tout, after all. f 
 
 ancients as your guides ; at least, quit but seldom 
 
 pour * pr. s'tcarter dene que 
 
 the way which they have traced for you. We must, at 
 
 route f. que trade * * falloir 
 
 least, know the general principles of a language, before (we 
 
 2 1 langue f. de 
 
 take upon ourselves) to teach it. Certain people hate 
 
 se miler de * enseigner f. gens art. 
 
 grandeur, because it lowers and humiliates them, and 
 
 — f, pron. rabaisser pron. 
 
 makes them feel the privation of the advantages which 
 que. elle leur bien pi. 
 
 they covet. 
 aimer. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 We ought to love what is amiable : note, virtue i* 
 
 * falloir ind-1 * art. 
 
 amiable ; therefore we ought to love virtue. We ousht to 
 
 * * * falloir * 
 
 practise what the Gospel commands us ; now it commands 
 
 6vangUe m. 
 us, not only to forgive our enemies, but also to love 
 
 non de pardonner d encore de 
 
 them. Despreaux was extremely particular in not 
 
 de la plus grand exactitude d 
 coming late, when he was invited to dinner ; he said that 
 inf-1 trop ind-2 ind-2 
 
 all the faults of those who (are waited for) present themselves 
 
 difaut sc faire attend re 
 
 to those who wait for them. The pride which possesses us; 
 attendre ¥ posstder 
 
OP CONJUNCTIONS. 227 
 
 The conjunction que is always placed between twp 
 ideas, bi 'h necessary to complete the sense, as, II est 
 tres -important que tout le monde soit instruit, it is of 
 great importance that every body should be well in- 
 structed. It differs from the relative pronoun que, as 
 it can never be converted into lequel, laqueile. The 
 conjunction que is generally repeated before every 
 member of a period. U 
 
 visible as it is, escapes our eyes, while it manifests itself 
 tout que d 
 
 to the eyes of the public, and displeases every one. 
 
 choquer art. esprit pi. 
 
 After we had examined that singular effect, we (inquired into) 
 ind-5 2 1 recherclier ind-3 
 
 its causes. We had hardly done, when he came in. Pride 
 en ind-2 finir que entrer 
 
 counterbalances all our imperfections ; for, whether it hides 
 cvntre-peser misdre pi. ou cacher 
 
 them, or whether it discovers them^ it glories in knowing them. 
 
 si se glorijier de inf-1. 
 
 None but an Englishman can (be a judge) of Shak- 
 77 7i y a que qui subj-1 juger 
 
 speare ; for, what foreigner is sufficiently versed in the English 
 
 language to discover the sublime beauties of that author ? 
 languei. pour 2 1 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 
 (As long as Hive), this image will be before my eyes 
 
 tout ma trie — f. peirtt 
 
 and, if ever the gods permit me to reign, I shall not forget, 
 
 faire * 
 
 after so terrible an example, tluit a king is not 
 
 (pas not expressed) 
 worthy to govern nor happy in his power, (but in 
 
 de commander et ri'est puissance f. qu'- 
 
 proportion as) he subjects it to reason. I am very glad to 
 a u< ant que soumettre art. de 
 
 si-e that you do not love flattery, and that one (runs no ribk) 
 
 ne hasarder rien 
 in speaking to you with sincerity, 
 o inf-1 
 
228 
 
 OF INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 OF INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 Interjections are words, which serve to express the 
 sudden emotions of the soul. The only point to be 
 attended to, is not to place them between words which 
 custom has made inseparable. There are interjections 
 for every feeling, viz. 
 
 Of 
 
 pain 
 
 ahi, aie ! ouf ! ah ! 
 
 grief 
 
 helas ! mon Dieu, &c. 
 
 fear 
 
 ha ! he ! 
 
 J°y 
 
 ah ! bon, bon ! o ! 
 
 aversion 
 
 fi ! fi done ! oh, oh ! 
 
 disgust 
 
 pouah, pouah ! 
 loin de. 
 
 indignation 
 
 imprecation 
 
 peste de, la peste de. 
 
 disbelief 
 
 chansons, tarare. 
 
 surprise 
 
 ouais ; 
 
 astonishment 
 
 oh ! bon Dieu ! misericorde ! pest* 
 
 warning 
 
 gare ! hem ! hoi a, ho ! 
 
 checking 
 
 tout beau ! hola. 
 
 encouraging 
 
 alerte ! allons ! ca, courage ! 
 
 applauding 
 
 bravo, vivat ! 
 
 encoring 
 
 bis, bis. 
 
 calling 
 
 hola ! ho ! hem, hem ! 
 
 derision 
 
 oh ! eh ! zest 1 oh ! oh I oh ! 
 
 silence 
 
 chut! paix! st 
 
PART II. 
 
 THE SYNTAX, 
 
 OR 
 
 WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 §1. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 There are some substantives which are never used 
 in the plural ; such are — 1 . The names of metals, con. 
 sidered in their original state ; as, Vor, gold, le platine, 
 platina. 2. The names of virtues and vice ; as, la chas- 
 tele, chastity, Fivrognerie, drunkenness. 3. Some 
 words of a physical or moral nature ; as, route, hear- 
 ing ; Vodorat, smelling ; le sang, blood, le sommeil, 
 sleep, la pauvrete, poverty. 4. The infinitive of verbs 
 and adjectives used substantively, together with some 
 other words, which cannot be reduced to any particu- 
 lar class. 
 
 Others, on the contrary, which likewise cannot be 
 reduced to any particular class, are never used in the 
 singular ; as, annales, annals ; ancetres, ancestors ; 
 couchettes, snuffers, &c. 
 
 OF COMPOUND NOUNS 
 
 Of the formation of their plural. 
 
 1. When a noun is compounded of a substantive 
 and an adjective, they both take the sign of the plural ; 
 as, tin gentilhomme, a nobleman ; des gentilshommes, no- 
 blemen. 
 
 2. When a noun is compounded of two substantives, 
 united by a preposition, the first only takes the sign of 
 the plural ; as, arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; des arcs-en-ciel, 
 rainbows. 
 
 21 
 
230 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 3. When a noun is compounded of a preposition, or 
 verb, and a substantive, the substantive alone is put in 
 the plural ; as, un entresol (a low room between two 
 floors,) des entresols ; un garde-fou (rails on bridges), 
 des garde-fous. 
 
 Remark. There is a small number of substantives 
 composed of a verb and an adverb ; as, un passe- 
 partout, a master or general key ; or of a verb repeat- 
 ed ; as, passe-passe, sleight of hand : they never take 
 the sign of the plural. 
 
 EXERCISE ON SUBSTANTIVE AND COMPOUND 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 'Gold is the most pure, the most precious, the most ductile, 
 art. parfait 
 
 and, after platina, the heaviest of all ^ metals. Chastity is an 
 
 pesant art. 
 
 obligation of all times, all ages, and all conditions. 
 
 * art. pr. art. pr. art. etat m. pi. art 
 
 Intoxication, which proceeds from beer, is of longer duration 
 ivresse vcnir art. * * 
 
 than that which proceeds from wine. It is the sense of 
 
 art. Ce art. 
 
 feeling, , which teaches to guard against the errors of sighL 
 toucher apprendre se garantir de art. 
 
 Sleep is the image of death. Early learn 
 
 art. art. de bonne-heure 2 apprendre 1 
 
 to distinguish truth from falsehood. That is more bitter 
 
 — guer art. vrai art. faux arner 
 
 than wormwood. Dignity of mind was 
 
 de art. absinthe art. EUvation art. sentiment m. pi. ind-2 
 formerly the (distinguishing mark of) noblemen. One of 
 
 ce qui * distinguer iiid-2 art. 
 
 the buttresses of the vault has fallen. He is always 
 
 arc-boutant m. pi. tomber 
 
 making (cock and bidl stories.) The Tartars always form 
 
 fait de art. coq.d-Vdne m. pi. Tartarc etre 
 
 the scouts of an army. The fish-carriers did 
 
 avant-courier m. pi. ciiasse-marie ra. pi. 
 
 not arrive in time. This door is only fastened with a 
 
 ind-3 d nc que former d *art. 
 
 latch ; ana all (the persons) in the house have each their 
 loquet m. * ceux de 
 
 key. 
 passe-partout m. 
 
OF THE AETICLE. 5381 
 
 CHAP II. 
 
 OP THE AKTICLE. 
 
 §1. 
 
 1. The difficulty attendant on rendering into French 
 the a, or an which precedes a substantive, when it fok 
 lows the verb to be, will easily be removed by examin- 
 ing whether that substantive be restricted by a particu- 
 lar idea ; if it be not restricted, the a, or an is not ex- 
 pressed in French ; thus, i* am a Frenchman, 1 am a 
 prince, must be translated by je suis Francais,^je suis 
 prince. But if it be restricted, then the a or an must 
 be expressed by the word un placed before the substan- 
 tive, as, / am a Frenchman of an illustrious family, I 
 am a very unfortunate prince, must be translated by jb 
 suis un Francais d'une illustre maison,je suis un prina 
 tres-malheureux. 
 
 2. When the verb &tre is preceded by the demon- 
 strative ce, in phrases of this kind, un is always requir- 
 ed before the substantive, as, e'est un tresor, &c. 
 
 3. The French do not use the article before sub- 
 stantives, expressing the quality of a preceding noun =: 
 though, in cases of this kind, the English usually em- 
 ploy the article the, and still more frequently a, or an ; 
 as, Telemaque, fils d' Ulysse, roi d'ltaque, Telemachus, 
 the son of Ulysses, king of Ithaca ; le Due oV Yorh> 
 prince du sang, the Duke of York, a prince of the 
 blood. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 
 
 I am a Frenchman and a merchant ; after having (been at) 
 
 negotiant inf-1 parcouru 
 
 the most famous (trading towns) in the Levant, my commercial 
 
 = 6chelle f. pi. de — m. les affaires 
 
 concerns have brought me here. I am an unhappy 
 
 de mon commerce conduire 
 
 Frenchman who, a striking example of the vicissitudes of 
 * memorable 2 1 — 
 
 fortune, seek an asylum where I may end my days 
 
 art. ckerchcr asile m. puissefinir 
 
232 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. 
 
 §2. 
 
 Without entering more minutely into this subject, 
 the following comparative table, in which the same 
 words are exhioited, according to circumstances, both 
 with and without the article, in conjunction with the 
 phrases which have been inserted at the end of this 
 grammar, will, it is presumed, be considered as a suf- 
 ficient illustration of custom. IT 
 
 in peace. He was a man of uncommon probity and of 
 
 Ce un rare 2. f . 1 un 
 
 tried virtue: (as a) reward for the services he had 
 
 eprouve 2 1 pour le recompenser de que 
 
 rendered to the church and state, the king has made him a 
 
 m. pi. eglise pr. art, 
 
 bishop. Neoptolemus had hardly told me that he was a Greek, 
 6veque. N6optoleme eut d peine dit 
 
 when 1 (cried out) : O enchanting words, after so many 
 que s' eerier ind-3 doux parole f. pi. de 
 
 years of silence and unceasing pain ! o my son, what 
 
 sans consolation 2 pr. 1 
 misfortune, what storm, or rather what propitious wind has 
 malheur m. tempete f. plutot favorable 2 1 
 
 brought you hither to end my woes ? He replied, 
 
 conduire pour mat ? m. pi. repondre ind-3 
 
 I am of the island of Scyros, I am returning thither ; (I am 
 
 He retourner y on 
 
 said) (to be^ the son of Achilles. 
 dit que ind-I. 
 
 If COMPARATIVE TABLE. 
 
 WITH THE ARTICLE. WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The writings of Cicero are full The writings of Cicero are full 
 
 of the soundest 2 ideas 1. of sound 2 ideas 1. 
 
 Divest yourself of the preju- Have no prejudice (with regard 
 
 se defaire prejugc to) this question. 
 
 dices of childhood. sur 
 
 The different kinds of animals There are different kinds of 
 
 that are upon the earth. • animals upon the earth. 
 
 He enters into a detail of the He enters into a long detail of 
 
 rules of a good grammar. frivolous 2 rules 1. 
 
 He affects circumlocutions. He affects long 1 cirrumlocu- 
 
 chercher de detour. Hons 2 in order to explain 
 
 the simplest 2 things 1. 
 
SYNTAX OP THE AETICLE. 
 
 233 
 
 WITH THE ARTICLE. 
 
 WITHOUT THE AETICLE. 
 
 He loads his memory with the 
 
 verses of Virgil and the 
 
 phrases of Cicero. 
 Essays supported by strong 2 
 
 discours sontenu. 
 
 expressions 1 
 He has collected precepts of 
 recueiUir suf 
 
 morality. 
 
 ■maurs pi. 
 Make use of the tokens we 
 
 se servir signe (dont) 
 
 agreed upon.* 
 
 etre convenu. 
 The choice of studies, proper, 
 
 &c. 
 Knowledge has always been 
 Connaissance pi. 
 
 the object of the esteem, the 
 
 praise, and the admiration of 
 
 elogc pi. 
 
 men. 
 The riches of the mind can only 
 
 (be acquired) by study. 
 
 ne que s'acquirir. 
 The gifts of fortune are un- 
 certain. 
 
 fragiles. 
 The connexion of proofs 
 
 enchainement preuve 
 
 makes them please and 
 qu'ellcs 
 
 persuade*. 
 It is by meditation upon what 
 
 we read, that we acquire 
 
 fresh 2 knowledge, 1. 
 
 connaissance pi. 
 The advantages of memory. 
 
 The memory of facts is the 
 
 most showy. 
 briilant. 
 The aim of good masters 
 
 should be to cultivate the 
 
 devoir ind-1 de 
 
 He loads his memory with in- 
 sipid 3 verses 1 and phrases % 
 
 Essays supported by lively ] 
 vive 
 expressions 2. 
 A * collection of precepts in 
 recueil sur 
 
 morals. 
 
 We are obliged to use some ex- 
 terior 2 signs 1, in order to 
 make ourselves understood. 
 nous entendre 
 
 He has made a choice of books 
 which are, &c. 
 
 It is an object of esteem, of 
 
 Ce 
 praise, and admiration. 
 
 There is in Peru a prodigious 
 le Perou 
 abundance ofuseles\2 riches 1. 
 Gifts of fortune. 
 Bien. 
 
 There is in this trook an admi- 
 rable connexion of solid 2 
 proofs 1. 
 
 It is by meditation that we ac- 
 quire fresh 1 knowledge 2. 
 nouveau. 
 
 There are different kinds of 
 
 memory. 
 He has only a memory oT 
 
 facts. 
 
 He has an air of pedantry 
 ton m. maitre 
 
 2V 
 
284 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 WITH THE ARTICLE. 
 
 WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 
 
 mind and reason of their pu- 
 pils. 
 
 The taste of mankind is liable 
 homme pi. 
 to great changes. 
 
 He has no need of the lessons 
 you wish to give him. 
 
 France, Spain, England, &c. 
 
 The isle of Japan. 
 He comes from China. 
 He arrives from America. 
 The extent of Persia. 
 
 He is returned from the East 
 Indies, from Asia, &c. 
 
 He lives in Peru, in Japan, in 
 d 
 the Indies, in Jamaica, &c. 
 
 The politeness of France, &c. 
 
 The circumference of England. 
 
 The interest of Spain. 
 
 The invention of printing is at- 
 tributed to Germany. 
 
 He comes from French Flan- 
 ders. 
 
 that shocks you at first sight. 
 abord 
 Society of chosen 2 men 1. 
 
 Spam, 
 
 He has no need of lessens, 
 avoir besoin 
 
 Kingdom of France, of 
 of England, &c. 
 
 Island of Candia. 
 
 He comes from Poland 
 
 He arrives from Italy. 
 
 He is gone to Persia, 
 en 
 
 He is returned from 
 from Persia, &c. 
 
 He lives in Italy, in France, 
 in London, in Avignon, &c 
 d d 
 
 The fashions of France. 
 
 The horses of England. 
 
 The wines of Spain. 
 
 The empire of Germany is di- 
 vided into a great number of 
 states. 
 
 He comes from Flanders. 
 
 §111. 
 
 ON MEASURE, WEIGHT, &C. 
 
 1. The English make use of a, or an, before nouns 
 of measure, weight, and purchase; as, wheat is sold 
 for a crown a bushel; butter sells for sixpence & pound ; 
 wine sold yesterday for forty crowns a hogshead, His 
 more than a groat a bottle. But the French make use 
 of the article le, la, as, le bU se vend un ten le boisseau ; 
 le beurre se vend six sous la livre ; le vin se vendit hier 
 quarante (cus le muid, Jest plus de quatre sous la 
 bouteilJe. 
 
 2. When speaking of time, a or an is expressed in 
 French by the preposition par, as, so much a week, tant 
 par semaine. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 235 
 
 3. In English, a is sometimes put between the pro- 
 noun which expresses admiration, and the substantive 
 that accompanies it, as, what a beauty! but, in French, 
 the un is never expressed in similar cases, as, quelle 
 beautd ! 
 
 4. In English, when the adverbs more and less are 
 repeated to express a comparison, they must be pre- 
 ceded by the article, as, the more difficult a thing is, 
 the more honourable it is. But, in French, the article 
 is omitted, as plus une chose est difficile, plus elle est 
 honorabie.'f 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 It has been said (p. 95), that an adjective agrees in 
 gender and number with the substantive which it qua- 
 lifies ; from this rule, however, must be excepted nu, 
 bare, and demi, half, when placed before a substantive, 
 and feu, late, when before the article or a pronominal 
 
 t EXERCISE ON MEASURE, &c. 
 
 Corn sells for eight shillings a bushel. Veal and 
 
 art. bti m. se vendre * schelling boisseau art. veau 
 
 mutton cost ten pence a pound. This lace is sold at 
 art. couter sou litre f. f. se vendre * 
 
 half a guinea an ell. The best French wines are sold at 
 demi 2 1 f. aune de France 2 1 ind-1 
 
 from twelve to fifteen shillings a bottle. My father goes to 
 
 boutcillc f. va en 
 
 Ireland four or five times a year. He gives his son seven 
 Irlande fois an 
 
 shillings a day. It (Is necessary), if you desire to 
 
 falloir * 
 
 (improve fast) that you should take a lesson three times a 
 
 faire des pro arks rapides prcniez * 
 
 we.ik. The more I contemplate those precious remains of anti- 
 
 = rests ru.pl. art. 
 quity, the more I am struck with wonder. What a beautiful 
 a=i frapp£ de Homement 
 
 morning ! come, let us go and walk in the fields. 
 malinfo £ st promener champ m.pl. 
 
236 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 adjective, as, il va nu-pieds, he goes barefoot; je suts 
 a vousdansune demi-heure, I will be with you in half 
 an hour ; feu la reine, the late queen ; feu ma mere, 
 my late mother. But the agreement takes, place, rf nu 
 and demi be placed after the substantive, and feu be- 
 tween the article or pronominal adjective and the sub- 
 stantive, as, il a les pieds nus, his feet are bare ; je suis 
 a vous dans une lieure et demie, I will be with you in 
 an hour and a half; lafeue reine, mafeue mere. 
 
 2. An adjective frequently serves to qualify two, or 
 more substantives expressing either persons, or things 
 of different genders. 
 
 If it be used to qualify more than two substantives, 
 it must agree with them ; for, either these substantives 
 perform the office of subject, as, la grammaire, la 
 logique, et la rhetorique, methodiquement enseignees, 
 ne s'oublient guere, grammar, logic, and rhetoric, when 
 taught with method, are seldom forgotten; or they 
 constitute the regimen, as, c'est un homme d'une valeur, 
 d?une vertu et d'unefidelite, eprouve'es, he is a man of 
 tried courage, virtue, and fidelity. 
 
 If it be used to qualify only two substantives, the 
 substantive of persons must be distinguished from the 
 substantive of things; with the first, the rules of 
 agreement are to be observed in all cases : with the 
 second, custom allows, when the substantives form the 
 regimen, to make the adjective agree with the last 
 only ; as, die avoit les yeux et la boucJie ouverle. 
 Nevertheless, modern grammarians prefer the agree- 
 ment, even in this case. 
 
 3. With respect to phrases like the following, les 
 langues Anglaise et Franc aise sont fort cultivtes, 
 though they are in opposition to the rules of grammar, 
 yet, it is allowable to use them. However, in strict 
 propriety, it seems better to say, la langue Francaise 
 et V Anglaise sont tres-cidtiv^es.^ 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE" 
 
 He ran through the streets like a madman, bare-(ooi and 
 ind-2 * rue f. pi. 
 
8XNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 237 
 
 II. 
 
 DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUCTION BETWEEN THE ENGLISH 
 AND FRENCH LANGUAGES. 
 
 1. In English, the substantive of measure is placed 
 before the substantive, or adjective expressing the di- 
 mensions, as, a tower two hundred feet high, or in 
 height. In French, the word which expresses dimen- 
 sion, is placed first, if it be an adjective, and the pre- 
 position de be added to it as a regimen, as, une tour haute 
 de deux cents pieds. But, if it be a substantive, or an 
 adjective used substantively, it is placed after, with the 
 preposition de, either before the noun of measure, or 
 of dimension, as : une tour de deux cents pieds de haut, 
 or de hauteur. This last mode is the most elegant. 
 
 iare-headed. His leg3 were bare. Give me 
 
 tete il * &rt.jambe, f. 2 avoir 1 
 
 half a guinea, and then you (will only owe) me a guinea 
 
 ne devoir plus que 
 and a half. I shall he at home in half an hour. Come 
 
 chez-moi dans 
 before half past one. The late queen was idolized. The 
 
 2 une heure et 1 2 1 ind-2 adore 
 
 late queen was universally regretted. His impetuosity and 
 ind-3 
 courxge, long restrained, soon surmounted all obsta- 
 pron. enchaine ind-3 art. 
 
 cles. The imagination and genius of Ariosto, although ir- 
 
 art. VArioste quoique 
 
 regular In their course, yet interest, (hurry along,) and 
 
 march* n&anmoins attacker cntraivcr 
 captivate the reader, who can never be tired of admiring them. 
 
 lecteur se lasser inf-1 
 
 There are in Gessner's idylls sentiments and a 
 
 2 art. idylle 1 de art. 
 
 grace altogether affecting. The good taste of the Egyptians, 
 
 tout-d-fait touchant 
 (from that time) made them love solidity and unadorned 
 des-lors ind-3 leur art. = tout nu 2 
 
 regularity. In those climates, the dry and the rainy raon- 
 =- 1 sec plurricux mou$~ 
 
 aoons divide the year. 
 son f. ph st diviser annte. 
 
238 SXNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE, 
 
 2. The English manner of expressing dimensions, is 
 to use the verb to be, as, the walls of Algiers are twelve 
 feet thick, and thirty feet high; the French in general, 
 make use of the verb avoir, when there are two con- 
 structions : as, les murs (V Alger ont douze pieds d^pais- 
 seur, et trente de hauteur ; or, les murs d) Alger ont douze 
 pieds d^paisseur sur trente de hauteur. This second 
 mode of expression is most generally adopted. 
 
 3. In comparative sentences, to express difference, 
 the English sentence often runs thus : she is taller than 
 her sister by the whole head. The French, in this man- 
 ner ; elle est plus grande que sa sceur de toute la tete.'f 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUC- 
 TION. 
 
 This trunk, which is six feet long, is very convenient. You 
 coffre m. commode 
 
 will be stopped in your march by a river three hundred feet broad. 
 
 arreti f. 
 
 This observatory, which is twelve hundred feet high, is very pro- 
 per for knowing the true position of the stars. It is a terrace 
 
 inf-1 astre m. pi. ce terrace f. 
 
 a hundred and eighty feet broad, and twelve hundred 
 
 large 
 feet long. The walls of our garden are twenty feet high 
 
 mur m. pi. 
 and three broad. It is one of the finest stones that was 
 
 on ait 
 ever seen: it is twenty feet long and six thick. This 
 
 jamais vices longueur Spaisseur. 
 
 ditch is nine feet six inches deep and six feet 
 
 foss i m. ponce m. pi. profondeur f. 
 
 broad. My son is taller than yours by two inches. 
 
 REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Several adjectives have a regimen ; some require 
 the preposition de, and others the preposition a before 
 a noun, or a verb, which is then called the regimen or 
 government of the adjective. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVES 289 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Digne de recompense, Worthy of reward. 
 
 Utile a Vhomme, Useful to man. 
 
 Digne de rtgner, Worthy of reigning. 
 
 Content de son sort, de vivre, &c. Satisfied with hisiot, with living. 
 
 Beau a voir, bon a manger, Fine to the sight, good for eat- 
 
 ing. 
 
 Apre au gain, avide d'tionneur, Eager after gain, greedy of ho- 
 nour. 
 
 Propre a fa guerre, Fit for war. 
 
 Recompense is the government of the adjective digne, 
 
 as it is joined to that adjective by the word de : Vhomme 
 
 is the government of the adjective utile, because it is 
 
 joined to that adjective by the word d, and so of the rest. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Virtuous men are always worthy of esteem. A weak 
 art. Vertueux 2 1 toujours estime f. faible 2 
 
 mind is liahle to many contradictions. A heart free from 
 
 1 m. sujet bien des — f. pi. caurm. libre de 
 
 cores enjoys the greatest possible felicity. Voltaire was 
 
 soin m. pi. jouit de 1 — 3 = f . 2 — fut 
 
 always greedy of praise, and insatiable of glory. Rousseau, 
 
 avide Iouangef.pl. — = — 
 
 endowed with a strong and fiery imagination, was all hii 
 
 done de fort 2 bouUlani 3 — f. 1 
 
 (life-time) subject to frequent fits of misanthrophy, and 
 
 vie f. enclin d de — acces m. pi. = 
 
 liable to all the variations attendant upon it. 
 sujet — f. pi. qui en sont la suite. 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE ARTICLE AND 
 THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 THE FAULTS OF INFANCY. 
 
 defaut m. pi. art. enfance. 
 
 The amiable Louisa and her young brother Charles were 
 Louise — ind 2 
 
 gentle, humane, and sensible. To the most interesting 
 doux sensible spirituel inttvessant 2 art. 
 
 person, Louisa joined all the modesty, the pleasing ingenu- 
 figure f. 1 ind-2 = f. keureux ingS- 
 
 ousness and artless graces of her sex ; and Charles, the 
 nuiti f. naif 9 art. — f. sexe m. 
 
240 SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 yivacity, the fire, and the manly gracefulness of hit* 
 
 b f. feu m. mdle agrSment m. pi. 
 
 But these advantages, the precious gifts of nature, 
 
 avantage m. pi. * =3 don m. pi. art. — f. 
 were obscured by great defects. They were both 
 
 ind-2 un peu obscnrci de dtfaut m. pi. ind-2 Vun ct 
 
 inclined to idleness ; and liable to fits of sullenness 
 V autre enclin a.rt.paressei. sujets des acces bouderie f. 
 and ill humour when they were contradicted. Faults are 
 de* h m. lorsque contredit art. Defaut 
 
 diseases of the soul, the cure (of which) is the work 
 
 des maladies guirison f. 2 dont I ouvrage 
 
 of lime. 
 xex. m. 
 
 a good dispositions, it is generally the fruit of the deve- 
 
 Les dmes bien nees elle d 'ordinaire — m. dive- 
 
 lopement of reason, and the desire of pleasing. Though 
 
 loppement m. art. de m. inf-1 Quoique 
 
 their parents were persuaded (of this), they employed, 
 
 — sub-2 2 — deS en 1 employer ind-3 
 
 to hasten it, an expedient, which succeeded. If they 
 pour hater 2 la 1 moyen m. leur reussir ind-3 * 2 
 
 were satisfied with them, contentment and joy were 
 ind-2 1 content de art. satisfaction f. art. f. 
 
 painted in their countenances; if dissatisfied, they 
 
 pcint sur figure f. pL * en etaient-Us micontent 
 
 did not scold, but they received them with a sorrow- 
 
 * lesgrondcr ind-2 ind-3 tnste 2 
 
 fill air, a dejected countenance, and every sign of 
 
 regard 1 abattu 2 maintienl tons art. sig?ie m. pi. 
 
 chagrin and trouble. Louisa and Charles were natu- 
 
 art. — m. de art. douleur natik- 
 
 rally kind and feeling ; they could not long support 
 
 rellement bon sensible ne pouvaient long-temps ri sister d 
 
 the idea of havkig afflicted such tender parents. They felt 
 
 %d{e iuf-1 afflig£ des si tendre 2 — 1 ind-2 
 
 their error, burst into tears and asked pardon. All was 
 
 fautei.fondrc en larmei.^X. — m. 2 3 
 
 immediately forgotten, and satisfaction again smiled 
 
 aussirtot 1 oublie art. cordentcment m. renaitre ind-2 
 
 around. It was by this means that these amiable 
 
 autour d'eux. Ce fut moyen sing, que 
 
 children soon became models of docility, com- 
 
 bientot 2 devenir 1 des modele m. pi. de 
 
 plaisance and applioation. 
 — de — 
 
BYlfTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 841 
 
 CHAP IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 M- 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Of the Place of Personal Pronouns. — See p. 100. 
 
 There is no difficulty in placing personal pronouns, 
 when they act as subjects : the person who speaks al- 
 ways names himself last, and the person addressed is 
 generally named first. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vous et moi, nous irons d la You and I will go into the 
 
 campagne, country. 
 Nous irons ce soir d la promt- Will you take a walk this even- 
 node, vous, votrefrire, si moi, H ing, you, your brother, and I. 
 
 Rule. The pronouns il and Us always represent a 
 substantive masculine, il, if it be singular ; and ils, if 
 it be plural ; and elle and elles, on the contrary, repre- 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 My sistef and I were walking by the last rays of 
 
 nous *" ind-2 d rayons m. pi. 
 
 the setting sun, and we were saying, what a mild splendour 
 
 couchant 2 1 * disions eclat m. 
 
 does it still spread over all nature ! In the long 
 
 * 2 pas 3 5 we rtpand 1 art. 
 
 winter evenings, my father, my brothers, and I used 
 
 de 2 soirie t. pi. 1 nous pas- 
 
 (to spend) two hours in the library, and to read there, 
 
 set ind-2 bibliotkdque f. nous lisions y 
 
 (in order to) (unbend our minds) from «he serious studies of the 
 
 pour se delasspr =2 1 
 
 day, those amiable poets who interest most the heart, by the 
 
 2 1 leplns 
 
 charms of a lively imagination, and make us love truth, by 
 riant 2 1 art. en 
 
 disguising it under the mask of an ingenious fiction 
 
 dcguiser inf-3 trait m. pi. =2 f . 1 
 
 You and your friend shall accompany me to the museum, 
 
 — pagner muste m. 
 
 where we shall study nature in her three kingdoms. 
 ob regne m. pi. 
 
 22 
 
242 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 sent a substantive feminine, elle, if it be singular : elles, 
 if plural. 
 
 Thus in speaking of the rose: we should say, elle a 
 un parfum exquis, aussi est-elle la fleur la plus recher- 
 chie, it has an exquisite fragrance, and is indeed the 
 choicest of flowers ; because rose is feminine and singu- 
 lar ; and in speaking of several ladies : dies ont autant 
 de modestie que de beaute, d* esprit et de grace, they have 
 as much modesty as they have beauty, -wit, and accom- 
 plishments ; because dames is feminine and plural, f 
 
 With respect to pronouns, when used as a regimen, 
 custom has established the following rules : 
 
 Rule I. The pronouns me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, 
 and en, are generally placed before verbs, as are nous, 
 wus, and lui, when without a preposition. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 U me dit he tells me Je lui parle I speak to him 
 
 Je le vols I see him JTy songerai I will think of it 
 
 Je les icoute I listen to them t J'tn suis ram I am delighted at it 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 (Look at) that magnificent building ; it unites grace to 
 Regarder — Jique bdtiment m. riunir art. grdce f. 
 
 beauty, and elegance to simplicity. Ignorance is 
 art. = f. art. — f. art. = f . — f. 
 
 jealous, presumptuous, and vain : it sees difficulties in 
 presompiueux — ne de = f. pi. d 
 
 nothing, (is surprised) at nothing, and stops at nothing. 
 rien ne s'itonner de nes'arreter d 
 
 Let us gather these roses ; Heavens ! what a sweet fragrance 
 
 cucillir Ciel! quel * parfum 
 
 they exhale ! Never judge from appearances; they are often 
 
 — lev sur art. f. 
 
 deceitful : the wise man examines them, and does not decide 
 * * se decider 
 
 upon them till he has had time to fix his judgment 
 d'aprts f. que lorsque art. m. de fixer 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 (As soon as) he had explained to us the maxims of So- 
 
 Dks que expliquer ind-5 * So- 
 
 crates, he said : you see that it is not without reason he 
 
 crate ind-3 ce que on U 
 
SYXTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 248 
 
 Rule II. The pronouns moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, lui> 
 tux, elle, and elles, are placed after verbs, when they 
 are preceded by a preposition. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Cela depend de moi, That depends on me. 
 
 Jepense d toi, I think of thee. 
 
 On s'occupe trop de soi, We are too attentive to ourselves 
 
 Que dites-vous d'eux ? What do you say of them ? 
 
 Rule III. In imperative phrases, when affirmative, 
 moi, toi, nous, vous, lui, leur, eux, elle, elles, le, la, le&> 
 y, and en, are placed after verbs ; but, with a negation, 
 
 (is looked upon) as truly wise. He was continually saying to 
 
 regarde un vrai ind-2 * 
 
 me : yet a little patience, and you will disarm even envy 
 
 de disarmer * art. 
 
 itself. You have, no doubt, (some foundation) for reproaching 
 
 etre sans doate fond€ d inf-1 
 
 him with his faults : but is there (any man) on earth thajt 
 lui de * art. m. pi. quelqiCun art. qut 
 
 is exempt (from them) ? To please her, you must neve? 
 subj-1 en Pour lui * 
 
 flatter her. To abandon awe's self to metaphysical abstrao- 
 
 des mitaphysique 2 — 
 tions, is to plunge into an unfathomable abyss. 
 1 ce * se jeter sans fond 2 abime m. 1. 
 
 11 EXERCISE. ' 
 
 My father loved me so tenderly, that bethought of none 
 
 ind-2 penser ind-2 d ?j« 
 
 but me, (was wholly taken up) with me, and saw none but m* 
 
 que ne s'occuper ind-2 que de ind-2 
 
 in the universe. If you wish to obtain that favour, you must 
 
 de * 
 
 speak to him himself It depended on you to excel 
 
 ind-2 de de V importer sur 
 
 your rivals, but you would not. Philip, father of 
 
 It vouloir ind-4 Philippe 2 
 
 Alexander, being advised to expel from his dominions 
 
 comme on conseillait dl de chasser etat m. pi. 
 
 a man, who (had been speaking) ill of him ; I shall take care nol 
 
 parlcr ind-6 se garder Men * 
 
 lo do that, said he, he would go and slander me every where. 
 * * en ind-3 * midire de 
 
244 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 me, te, se, nous, vous, lui, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are 
 placed before verbs. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 AFFIRMATIVELY. NEGATIVELY. 
 
 Dites-mo'i Tell me Ne me ditespas Do not tell me 
 
 Donncz-m'en. Give me half Ne m'en don- Do not give me 
 
 la moitii of it nez point any 
 
 Songez-y se- Think of it se- Ny songezpas Do not think of 
 
 rieusement riously it 
 
 Rem. If the pronouns me, te, moi, toi, intervene be- 
 twixt an imperative and an infinitive, me, te, are used 
 when the imperative is without a regimen direct. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Venez me parler, Come and speak to me. 
 
 Va tefaire cogffer, Go and get thy hair dressed. 
 
 But moi, toi, are used if the imperative have a regi- 
 men direct. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Laissez-moifaire, Let me do it. 
 
 Fais-toi co&ffer, Get thy hair dressed. 
 
 2. If moi, toi, when placed after the imperative, be fol- 
 lowed by the pronoun en, they are changed into me, te. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Donnez-m'en, Give me some. Retourne-Ven, Go back. 
 
 3. When there are two imperatives joined together 
 by the conjunctions et, on, it is most elegant to place the 
 second pronoun before the verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Polissez-le sans cesse et le repo- Polish and repolish it continu- 
 
 lissez, ally. 
 
 Gdrdez-ies, ou les renvoyez, t Keep them or send them back. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 Listen to me, do not condemn me, without a hearing. 
 
 tcouter * * m'ccoutcr. 
 
 Complain, thou hast just cause of complaint ; however, do 
 
 stplaindre un sujct plainte 
 
 not complain too bitterly of the injustice of mankind. Give 
 
 amcremcnt art. homme pi. 
 
 some. Do not give any. Think (of it.) Do not think of it. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 246 
 
 Rule IV. When several pronouns accompany a 
 verb, me, te, se, nous, vous, must be placed first ; le, la, 
 les, before lui, leur ; and y before en, which is always 
 
 the last. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Pretez-moi ce livre ; je vous le Lend me that book ; I will re* 
 rendrai 1 emain; si vous me turn it to you to-morrow; SF 
 le refuscz, je saurai m'en you refuse me, I can make 
 passer, shift without it. 
 
 Aurez-vous la force de le leur Will you have resolution 
 dire ? enough to mention it to themf 
 
 II ria pas vovlu vous y mener, He would not take you there. 
 Je vous y en porterai, I will bring you some there. 
 
 Exception. In an imperative sentence, when afni- 
 mative, le, la, les, are always placed first, as, donnez- 
 le-moi, give it me, qffrez-la-lui, offer it to him ; con~ 
 duisez-les-y, conduct them thither ; and moi is placed 
 after y, as menez.y-moi, carry me thither; but nous will 
 precede y, as, menez-nous-y, take us thither. ^ 
 
 Repeat to them continually, that, without honesty, one can neve? 
 succeed in the world. Do not repeat to them continually th* 
 same things. Acknowledge him as your master, and obey 
 
 rcconnaitre pour 
 
 him. Tread upon that spider and kill it. 
 
 lui marcher arraignii. ^eraser 
 
 X EXERCISE. "~ 
 
 You wish to make a present to your sister. (There is*) a 
 vouloir * Voild 
 
 beautiful fan ; you should present her with it 
 
 eccjitail m. devoir cond-2 offrir lui * 
 
 (How many) people are there (destitute of) merit and without oo- 
 que de gens * * sans 
 
 cupation, (who would be mere nothings) in society, did not 
 
 ne tcnir d rien cond-1 art. si art- 
 
 gaming introduce them (into it.) I shall speak to them 
 
 jcu m. introduire ind-2 y 
 
 (about it), and give you a faithful account of it It 
 
 en je rendre ind-7 exact 2 cmnpte in. 1 
 
 is certain that old Geronte has refused his daughter to Va- 
 
 art. 
 lere ; but because he does not give her to him, it does not foV 
 
 s*m- 
 low that he will give her to you. 
 suivre 
 
 22* 
 
S46 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Remark. The word m£me is sometimes added to the 
 pronouns moi, toi, sol, nous, vous, eux, lui, elle, elles, to 
 specify the person, or thing spoken of. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Es se sont perdus eux-memcs, They have ruined themselves. 
 
 Le monde estlme bien des choses The world prizes many things 
 qui, en elles-memes, sont fort which, in themsvives, are 
 meprisables, worthless. 
 
 §11. 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. P. 111. 
 
 The relative pronouns are qui, que, dont, lequel, dec. 
 see p. 111. 
 
 Rule I. Qui, when a relative, is always of the num- 
 ber, gender, and person of its antecedent, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 tyoi qui suis sonfils, I who am his son. 
 
 Toi qui es sijeune, Thou who art so young 
 
 V enfant quijoue, The child who plays. 
 
 Nous qui etudions, We who study. 
 
 Vous qui riez, You who laugh. 
 
 Lea livres qui instruisent, • The books which instruct. 
 
 In the first example, qui is singular, and of the first 
 person, because the pronoun moi is in the singular, and 
 of the first person. In the second, it is singular, and 
 of the second person, for a similar reason, &c. IF 
 
 U EXERCISE. 
 
 I icho did not suspect (so much) falsehood, cuiv- 
 
 * soupqonncr ind-2 tant de fausseti f. pr. ruse. 
 
 ning, and perfidy, in a man whom I loved, blindly follow- 
 f. pr. = f. ind-2 areugUment je sui- 
 
 vd his counsels. Thou icho art candour and innocence 
 vre iud-3 conseil m. art. = f. art. — f. 
 
 itself, trust not too lightly. The great empire of the Egyp- 
 rntme te conjie legdrcment — m. — 
 
 tians tchich was, (as it were) detached from all others, was 
 lien ind-3 comrne dStacJtt art. 
 
 not of long duration. We who know the value of time 
 
 durie, f. conn ait re priz m. art. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PB0N0UN8. 247 
 
 Rule II. Que, when a relative, is of the number and 
 gender of its antecedent. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ctst max que Von demande, It is I whom they ask for. 
 
 Cest toi qu'on appelle, It is thou whom they call. 
 
 La fcmme que je zois si lien The woman whom I see so weD 
 
 parte, dresse>L 
 
 C'est nous que vous offensez, It is we whom you offend. 
 
 C\st vous que je cherche, It is you I am seeking. 
 
 Les dames que vous voyez, The ladies whom you see.t 
 
 Dont sometimes represents dequi, duquel, de laqueUe+ 
 desquels, desquelles, and even de quoi. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vhomme dont vous parlez est The man of whom you are 
 parti, speaking is gone. 
 
 ought to make a good use (of it), instead ®f wasting 
 
 nous devoir ind-1 * emploim. aulieu perdre 
 
 it in idleness and frivolity. What ! is it you, my 
 
 dans art. oisivcte f. art. inutiliti f. Quoi ce 
 
 daughter, who (would wish) that I (should love) you less ? The 
 
 vouloir con-1 que sub-2 
 
 greatest men, who were the ornament and glory of Greece, 
 ind-4 orncment art. = f. art. Grece f. 
 
 Homer, Pythagoras, Plato, even Lycurgus and Solon, went 
 Homerc — gore Platon, mime — gue — ind-3 
 
 to learn wisdom in Egypt. 
 
 * apprendre art. sagesse f. en Egypt e. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 / "horn temptation surrounded on every side 
 
 art. seduction f. enrironnrr ind-2 de tout partf.p]. 
 fell into the snare. It is thou whom the public voice 
 
 jr. tombai dans pie gem. Ce 2 f . 1 
 
 calls to that employ. A power which terror and 
 appder ykice f. puissanr: f. art. = f. art. 
 
 force have founded, cannot be of long duration. It is we whom 
 — f. fond6 f. ne pent duree f. 
 
 they persecute with unexampled rage. You whom 
 
 Von poursuivre avec une sans cxemple 2 fareur f. 1 
 every body respects, hasten to (come forward.) (Every 
 
 tout It monJc respecter se hdtcr de paraitre Tout 
 
 thing) in the universe alters and perishes ; but the writings 
 
 dans univers m. s'alttrer ptrir icrit m. pi. 
 
 ichick genius has dictated, shall be immortal, 
 art. ginie in. dicl6 m. pi. — tel. 
 
248 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 La tour dont nous apercevons les The tower whose battlements 
 
 crSneaux doit etre tres-elevie, we perceive must be very high. 
 
 Ce dont je vous ai parte V autre, What I was speaking to you of 
 
 jour rfa pas reussi, the other day did not succeed. 
 
 Observe 1. — That qui, que, and dont, may equally 
 apply to persons and things ; but qui, preceded by a 
 preposition, can never apply to things ; in this case, 
 lequel, duquel, auquel, &c. must be used. 
 
 2. — Lequel, laquelle, &c. apply both to persons and 
 things ; but — quoi applies only to things. 
 
 The adverb oil is likewise employed as a relative pro- 
 noun, for dans lequel, auquel, dans laquelle, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Voild le but oil il tend, That is the object he has in view- 
 
 er sont das affaires, oil je suis Those are affairs with which I 
 
 embarrasse, am perplexed. 
 
 Remark. Ou admits the prepositions de and par. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 VGUd une chose d'oii depend le That is an affair on which th« 
 bonheur public, public happiness depends. 
 
 Tels sont les lieux par ou il a These are the places through 
 passS, t which he passed. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 Persons of ordinary condition have not the same 
 
 art. personne f. pi. commun 2 — f . 1 mhnt 
 
 need of being cautioned against the dangers to ichich 
 
 besoin m. inf-1 precautionnc f. pi. contre 6cueil m. pi. 
 
 elevation and authority expose those who are des- 
 art. — f. art. autoritSf. exposer ctux des- 
 
 tined to govern mankind. The protection on which 
 
 tin6 m. pi. gouverner ail. homme pi. — f. sur — 
 
 he relied has been too weak. That after which a true 
 
 compter ind-2 faible. Ce apres vrai 
 
 philosopher sighs most ardently, is to spread that 
 
 — phe m. soupirer art ardemmtnt derfpandre 
 
 sentiment of universal benevolence which should unite and 
 
 — m. — sel 2 bienveillance f. 1 devrait unir 
 
 (bring together) all men. These are conditions without 
 
 rapprocher art. Ce sont des sails 
 
 which the thing would not have been concluded. Nature, 
 
 fait f. art. — f. 
 of whose secrets we (are ignorant) will be always a 
 
 1 art. — m. pi. 4 2 ignorer3 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PBONOUNS. ■ 249 
 
 §111. 
 OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. P. 112. 
 
 See p. 112, the pronouns absolute, qui, que, quoi, 
 quel, lequel. 
 
 Qui signifies quel homme, what man ; quelle personne, 
 what person. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Qui rous a dit celd ? Who told you that ? 
 
 J'ignore qui a fait celd, I don't know who did that. 
 
 Que signifies quelle chose, what thing. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Que dit-on ? What do they say ? 
 
 Je ne sais qu'enpenser, I don't know what to think of it. 
 
 Quoi has the signification of que. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 A quoi s'occupe-t-on ? What are they engaged in ? 
 
 Dites-moi en quoi je puis xous Tell me how i can serve you. 
 
 servir, 
 
 Rem:. If que, or quoi be followed by an adjective, 
 it requires the proposition de before that adjective. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Que dit-on denouveau T What news is there ? 
 
 Quoi de plus instructif et de What is more instructive and 
 plus amusant ? 1f amusing ? 
 
 source of conjecture to mankind. That of which we 
 
 — f . 3 — f. pi. 4 pour 1 art. homme 2 Ce 
 
 complain most bitterly is not always what affects uc 
 
 seplaindre amtrement ce qui affect er 
 
 the most. The only moments in which his soul still 
 
 seul — m. pi. cncore2 
 
 expands to pleasure, are those which he devotes to 
 s'ontrir 1 art. ceux contact er art 
 
 study. The mountains from whence gold (is extracted) 
 
 Hudei. f. pi. ou 1 art. or 3 tire 2 
 
 are not in general fruitful. The* different countries through 
 
 * en — infertile pi. — pays in. pi. par 
 
 which he has passed have furnished his pencil with ro- 
 
 passi fourni d pinctau m. de art. 
 
 niantic and picturesque scenes. 
 — tique 2 pittorcsque 3 — 1. 
 
 H EXERCISE. 
 Who will not agree that life has few real pleasure* 
 convenir art. f. peu de vrai 
 
250 SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 In interrogations, or after a verb, quel is used to ask 
 the name, or qualities of a person, or thing. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quel homme est-ce ? What man is it ? 
 
 Quel temps fait-il ? What weather is it ? 
 
 Je ne sais quel homme c'est, I don't know- what man it is. 
 
 J/ salt quel parti prendre, He knows what steps to pursue. 
 
 The adverb ou, it has been already seen, is employed 
 as a relative pronoun ; it is likewise used as a kind of 
 absolute pronoun. 
 
 Ou represents en quel endroit, in what place, or a 
 quoi, to what. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Ou allez-vous ? Where are you going ? 
 
 Oil cela nous mknera-t-il ? Where will that take us ? 
 
 JF ignore ou Von me conduit, I don't know where they are 
 
 taking me. 
 II n'a pas privu'oil cette c§n- He did not foresee where such 
 
 duite h menerait, conduct would lead him. 
 
 Remark I. When ou is preceded by the preposition 
 de, it marks the place, or cause, spoken of. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 D'ou vient-il f Where does he come from ? 
 
 D'oil sa haine procede-t-elle ? Whenee proceeds his hatred 1 
 
 and many dreadful pains ? (Some one) entered se- 
 
 leaucoup d'affreux 2 peine f. pi. 1 On entra se- 
 
 cretly ; guess who it was. What have you read in that 
 cr&tement deviner * * 
 
 book that can have excited in your soul emotion and 
 
 m. qui puisse porti art. — f. 
 
 enthusiasm? I know not what to think (of it.) At tchat 
 art. enthousiasme m. savoir * * 
 
 did you find them occupied ? There is in that dis- 
 
 avez trouves occupe m. pi. dis- 
 
 course I know not what which appears to me designing. What 
 cours m. savoir sembler * insidieux. 
 
 have you remarked good, beautiful, and sublime in Homer? 
 
 remarqut pr. pr. pr. 
 
 What more brilliant, and, at the same time, more false, than 
 
 pr. hrillant en * mhne pr. 
 
 the expressions of a man, who has (a great deal) of wit, but 
 
 — beaacoup esprit qui 
 
 wants judgment ? 
 manque de jugement ? 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 251 
 
 VoUd (Toil U vient, It was there he came from. 
 
 Le mal me vient (VoU fatten- The evil proceeds from that 
 dais mon rem&de, quarter whence I had expect- 
 
 ed a remedy. 
 
 Remark II. Ou preceded by the preposition par, sig- 
 nifies through what place, or by what means. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Par ou avez-vous passi 7 Which way did you come ? 
 
 Par cu me tirerai-je d 'affaire ? Which way shall I extricate 
 
 myself? 
 Voildpar oiifaipass6, This is the way I came. 
 
 Je, ne sais par ou je me tirerai I don't know which way I shall 
 d 'affaire, extricate myself. 
 
 By the manner In which these pronouns are employed, 
 it will be seen they are only interrogative, when at the 
 beginning of a sentence, and, consequently, the most 
 proper name for them is that of pronouns absolute, f 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 JVhat grace, what delicacy, what harmony, what co- 
 grace f. delicatesse f . = f. co- 
 louring, what beautiful lines in Racine ! What then 
 loris m. -vers m. — 1 done 3 
 must have been that extraordinaiy man, to whom seven cities 
 doit 2 = 2 — 
 
 contested the glory of having given birth ? He does 
 se sont dispute — f. avoir aonni art. jour m. * 
 
 not know what model to follow. I have told you what 
 
 savoir modele m. * suivre 
 
 man it is. lVfiich of those ladies do you think the 
 
 ce f. dames f. * 2 trouvcr 1 
 
 most amiable ? Choose which of those two pictures 
 
 f. Clioisir m. 4 5 6 tableau m. 7 
 
 you like best. Where am I ? He knows not 
 
 1 aimer 2 art. mieux 3 en savoir 
 
 whf-nce lie is. He is gone I don't know where. Where 
 
 en altt ne savoir Be 
 
 does he get that pride ? (It is) from there he derives hia 
 
 lui vient orgueilm. Voila de tirer 
 
 origin. (Which way) did you. come? (That is) (fh* 
 
 originc. Par ites-vous arrive Voild par 
 
 road) I came. 
 oil venir ind-4. 
 
252 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 §IV. 
 
 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. P. 113. 
 
 Ce, eette, ces, are often joined to the adverbs of place, 
 ci, here, and la, there, in order to point out in a more 
 precise manner the thing spoken of, the demonstrative 
 pronoun is then placed before the substantive, and ci 
 and la after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ce livre-ci this book Cet homme-ld that man 
 
 Cettefleur-ci this flower Cesfemmes-ld those women 
 
 Celui, celle, ceux, celles, are followed by the preposi- 
 tion de, when placed before a substantive, and by a pro- 
 noun relative, when placed before a verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les maladies de Vdme sont plus The disorders of the mind are 
 
 dangereus-es que dies du more dangerous than those of 
 
 corps j the body. 
 
 Lliomme dont je vous ai parli, The man of whom I spoke to 
 
 est celui que vous voyez, you is he whom you see 
 
 De toutes les choses du monde, Oi all the things in the world, 
 
 e'est celle quefaime le, moins, it is that which I like least. 
 
 Remark. The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles, 
 when followed by a pronoun relative, are expressed in 
 English, by the personal pronouns, he, she, they, or by 
 that which, those which, such as, &c. IF 
 
 IF EXERCISE. 
 
 The pleasures of the wise resemble in nothing those of 
 
 ressembler 2 3 1 4 d 
 a dissipated man. He that suffers himself to (be ruled) by 
 
 dissip6 2 1 se laisse * domincr 
 
 his passions, must renounce happiness. This stuff 
 
 doit renonctr d art. bonheur m. Stoffe-ci f. 
 
 will become you wonderfully. That action is worthy of 
 
 * siera d mcrvtille — f. -Id 
 
 blame. Tlris scene is calculated to interest all men, 
 bldme — f. -ci faite pour inter esser art. 
 
 but that cannot succeed, 
 -Id ne saurak riussir. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PIICXOUXS. 253 
 
 Celui-ci and celui-ld adopt the gender and number of 
 the substantives whose place they supply. When op- 
 posed to each other, celui-ci marks the nearest object ; 
 and celui-ld the remotest. 
 
 - EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cdui-ci plait, mms celui-ld cap- This pleases, but that capti- 
 tive, vates. 
 
 Ci and la coalesce with ce, and form two other de- 
 monstrative pronouns, ceci and cela, the first cf which 
 signifies cette chose-ci, this object; the second, ceite 
 chose-ld, that object. 
 
 They may be used singly ; but when they are op- 
 posed to each other, ceci expresses the nearest object, 
 and cela the remotest. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Je n'aime point ceci, donnez- I don't like this, gwe me 
 moi cela, that. 
 
 Remark. When cela is alone and not opposed to the 
 pronoun ceci, it refers, like this last, to an object point- 
 ed to. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Que dkes-vous de cela ? What do you say of that t 
 
 Cela est fort beau, t That is very handsome. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 (Here are) certainly two charming prospects ; this 
 
 Voild certainerrunl beau perspective f. pi. 
 
 has something more cheerful, but many people 
 
 quelque chose de riant bun de wd.personnt 
 
 think that more striking and more majestic. The body 
 
 (. pi. trouver imposant majestueux m. 
 
 perishes, the soul is immortal ; yet all our cares are for 
 
 yfoir f. — tel cependant soin 
 
 ttuit, while we neglect this. What means this? That 
 
 tandis que nSgliger veut dire 
 
 is true. It is not that. This is low and mean, but that k 
 Ce bas rampant 
 
 grand and sublime. 
 
 23 
 
254 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS- 
 
 §V. 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 Of those that are never joined to a Substantive. — P. 114. 
 QuelqxCun means un, une, one. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Nous attendons des Iwmmes, il We expect men, some one win 
 
 en viendra qudqu'un, come. 
 
 Plusieurs femmes m'ont promis Several ladies have promised 
 
 de venir, U en viendra quel- me to come, some one of them 
 
 qu'une, will come. 
 
 Quelqu'un taken absolutely and substantively, is of 
 both genders, and means une personne, a person, 
 
 EXAMPLE 
 ^attends ici quelqu'un, I wait here for somebody. 
 
 Qnelques-uns signifies plusieurs dans un plus grand 
 nombre several ouc of a great number. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelques-uns assurent, Some people affirm 
 
 Entre lea nouvelles qvCil a dibi- Amcmg the reports he has circu 
 
 t6es, il y en a qudques-unes lated, several are true. 
 
 de vraies, 
 
 Quiconque, whoever, signifies quelque personne que ce 
 soit, qui que ce soit, any person whatever. It takes no 
 plural, and is never used but of persons. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ce discours s'adresse d quicon- This speech is addressed to 
 que est coupable, whoever is guilty. 
 
 Chacun, each, every one, is used either distributively, 
 or collectively. It has no plural. 
 
 Distributively, it means chaque personne, chaque chose, 
 each person, or thing. It is then used likewise in the 
 feminine, and requires the preposition de after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Cliacun de nous vit d sa mode, Each of us lives as ne pleases. 
 Voyez styarlment chacune de ces Look at each of these medals 
 medailles. separately. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 256 
 
 Collectively, it signifies toute personne, every person. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Ckacun a ses defauis, t Every body has his faults. 
 
 Autrui, means les autres personnes, other people : it 
 only applies to persons, is never accompanied by an 
 adjective, has no plural, and is never used in a sentence 
 without being preceded by a preposition. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 La charit6 se rejouit du bonheur Charity rejoices in the happi- 
 d'autrui, ness of others. 
 
 Personne, which is always masculine and singular 
 means nul, qui que ce soit, nobody, whosoever. In this 
 sense, it is preceded or followed by the negative ne 
 which is placed after personne, when this word stands 
 before the verb ; and before the verb, when personne 
 stands after. The same observation applies to rien. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Can any one (be still ignoraat) that it is from ttce 
 
 Pourrait-il 2 1 ignorer encore ce des 
 
 earliest infancy we ought to form the mind, the heart, and the 
 tendre enfance f. on doit * former 
 taste ? Will not some one of these ladies be of the party ? Somv 
 
 * f. partie f. 
 
 people like to read (every thing new.) (These are) beautiful 
 
 aimer toutes les nouveautts Voild de superb* 
 
 pictures ; I could wish to buy some. Whoever has stu- 
 
 tableau m. roulbir en * acheter 
 
 died the principles of an art, knows that it (is only) (by length 
 
 — pes — m. savoir ce n'estque d la 
 
 of time) and by deep reflections, that he can succeed m 
 longue deprofond r [flexion f. ftus&iar d 
 
 making it his own. All the ladies at the ball were 
 
 se 2 rendre 4 le 3 * propre 5. bal m. ind-2 
 
 very finely dressed, and each differently. 
 
 * superbemcnt pare avail nne parurc different^. 
 
 Every one should, for (the sake of) his own happiness, listen 
 devrait pour * propre m. ritcon* 
 
 only to the voice of reason and of truth. What is the 
 terqne * voixi. art. rnison f. art. viriti f. 
 
 price of each of these medals ? 
 prix m. f. mtdaillc f. 
 
256 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 11 ne faut nuire d personne, We must injure nobody. 
 
 Personne n'est assuri de vivre Nobody *s certain of living till 
 jusqu'au lendemain, to-morrow. 
 
 Rem. I. The negative is sometimes understood, as, 
 y a-t-il quelqu^un ici ? is there are any body here ? per- 
 sonne, nobody. Personne stands for il rfy a personne, 
 there is nobody here« 
 
 Rem. II. In interrogative phrases without negation, 
 or in those expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqu'un, 
 any body. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Personne oserait-il nier ? Would any body dare deny ? 
 
 Je doute que personnc soit assez I doubt whether any body be 
 
 hardly bold enough. 
 
 Rem. III. When personne is placed in the second 
 member of a comparison, it means any tody, 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cette place lui convient mieux That place suits him better than 
 qu' d personne? any body. 
 
 Rien, nothing, which is masculine and singular, is 
 used with, or without a negation. When with a nega- 
 tion, it means nulle chose, nothing. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 n ne s 'attache d rien de solide, He applies himself to nothing 
 
 fixed. 
 
 When used without a negation it means quelque chose 
 something. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je doute que ricn soit plus pro- I doubt whether any thing be 
 pre d faire impression que, more suited to make an im- 
 &c. pression than, &c. 
 
 The negation is sometimes understood, que vous a 
 cottle* cela ? rien, how much did you pay for it ? nothing. 
 
 It always requires the preposition de before the ad- 
 jective, or participle that follows it, and then the verb is 
 understood, as is likewise the negation, as, rien de beau 
 que le vrai, nothing is noble but truth. IF 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 257 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are always joined to a Substantive .-P. 116. 
 Quelque, some, signifies un, une, enire plusieurs, one 
 out of several ; it is of both genders, and takes the 
 number of the substantive. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Adressez-vous d qudque autre Apply to somebody else. 
 personne, 
 
 Chaque, each, every, which is of both genders, has 
 no plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Chaque pays a ses coutumes, Each countiy has its customa. 
 
 Quelconque, aucun, any, quel que ce soit, whatever it 
 be ; quel quHl soit, whoever he be, is of both genders, 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 To most men the misfortunes of others are opt 
 
 Pour la plupart de art. mal m. ne qu% 
 
 a dream. Do not to others what you would not wish (to~be 
 * songe m. * vouloir qu y jm 
 
 done to you.) No one knows whether he deserves love or 
 xous fit savoir si est digne de 7k 
 
 hatred. An egotist loves nolody, not even his own children-, 
 
 tgoiste pas meme propre 
 
 in the whole universe he sees no one but himself. He is move 
 dans * univers ne voit * que lui seul. 
 
 than (any body) worthy of the confidence (with which) the kfarg 
 
 digne confiance f. dont 
 
 honours him. I doubt whether anyone ever painted 
 
 honorer que ait jamais peint art. 
 
 nature in its amiable simplicity, better than the sentimental 
 — f. = f . sensible 
 
 Gessner. Has any body called on me this morning? 
 
 — * 2 est-il venu 1 chez matin m. 
 
 Nobody. There was nothing but what was great in the de- 
 ind-2 que * de * grand dans dst- 
 
 signs and works of the Egyptians. I doubt 
 
 sein m. pi. art. ouvrage m. pi. — tiens 
 
 whether there is any thing better calculated to exalt fhc 
 
 que subj-1 2 1 plus propre 
 
 soul than the contemplation of the wonders of nature. 
 — f merveille f. art. — f. 
 
 23* 
 
258 SYNTAX OF THE PKONOFffS. 
 
 and always is placed after a substantive ; when used 
 with a negative it is always singular. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 // ne veut se soumettre d aucune He will submit to no authority 
 autorite qaclconque, whatever. 
 
 Certain, signifies quelque, certain, some. In this 
 sense it is used alike of persons and things ; but it is 
 always placed before the substantive. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Tai out dire d certain homme, I have heard some man say. 
 d un certain homme, 
 
 Un, line, a, or an, when used indeterminately for 
 quelque, certain, some person, or some thing, takes the 
 gender of the substantive to which it is joined. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Tai vu un homme quicourait, I saw a man who was running. 
 
 Je me suis protnenS dans una I walked in a large fine mea- 
 grande et belle prairie, t dow. 
 
 X EXERCISE ON THE SECOND CLASS. 
 
 Some enlightened people among the Egyptians pre- 
 
 6claire2 esprit m. pi. 1 parmi — tiens con- 
 
 served the idea of a first being, whose attributes 
 
 server in d-2 idie etre art. — butm.pl. 3 
 
 they represented under various symbols ; this (is 
 
 1 ' reprcsenter ind-2 2 different symbole m. c' est ce que 
 
 proved) by the following inscription upon a temple, " I am 
 
 prouve * * cette * — f. de — m. 
 
 all that has been, is, and shall be : no mortal ever removed 
 ce qui 3 mortel 2 1 lever ind-4 
 
 the veil that covers me." Every nation has (in its turn) 
 voile m. i. d son tour 2 
 
 shone on the theatre of the world. There is no reason whatever 
 brille 1 m. raison f. 
 
 that can bring hrm to it. Some figures eppear monstrous 
 
 puisse determiner — f. — trutuz 
 
 and deformed, considered separately, or too near; but, if they 
 
 difforme f. pi. s6parement de prts on 
 
 are put in their proper light and place, the true point of 
 
 les met * jour d leur — — m. 
 
 view restores their beauty and grace. Yesterday 1 
 
 vue f. leur rendre * art. = f. art. — f. 2 
 
 saw a lady remarkably beautiful. 
 
 1 d'une rare 2 beautt 1. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 259 
 
 THIRD CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are sometimes joined to a Substantive , and 
 sometimes not. — Page 117. 
 
 Nul, and pas un, not any, not one, are employed ei- 
 ther alone, or in conjunction with a substantive. They 
 are accompanied by the negation, assume the feminine, 
 but have no plural, and may be followed by the preposi- 
 tion de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Xul de t§us ceux qui y ont iti Not one of those who went 
 
 w'era est revenu, there has returned. 
 
 Pas un ne croit cette nouvelle, Not one believes that intelli- 
 gence. 
 
 Je iven ai nulle connaissance, I have no knowledge of it. 
 
 // riy a pas une seule personne There is not a single person that 
 
 qui le croie, believes it. 
 
 Aucun signifies nul, no, not any, when accompanied 
 by a negation, and may be followed by the preposition de. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 I'uus riavez aucun moyen de You have no means of succeed- 
 riusirdans cette affaire, ing in that affair. 
 
 This pronoun is seldom employed in the plural^ ex- 
 cept before substantives, which, in some particular sense, 
 are better employed in the plural. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 II ri a fait aucunes dispositions, He has made no dispositions. 
 
 Rem. Aucun may be employed without a negation in 
 liiterro^-ative sentences, or those which express doubt, 
 or exclusion. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Aucun hom'me fut-il jamais plus Was ever aoy man more suc- 
 
 hcureux ? cestui ? 
 
 On noute qu'aucane de ces affaires They doubt whether any of 
 
 rtussisse, tiiose affairs will succeed. 
 
 Leplusbtuumorceau d' eloquence The finest piece of eloquence 
 
 fju'ily ait dans aucuneiangue, that exists in any language, 
 
 Autre, other, ex; a difTerence between two 
 
260 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 objects, or between one and several ; as, quelle autre 
 chose souhaitez-vous de moi ? what else do you wish of 
 me ? 
 
 Rem. Autre is sometimes used to express a person 
 but indeterminate ; a.s,j'aime mieux que vous Vappreniez 
 de tout autre que de moi, I had rather you learn it of any 
 other person than me. 
 
 Un is sometimes opposed to autre ; in which case, 
 these two words are preceded by the article, supply the 
 place of the substantives to which they relate, adopt 
 their gender and number, and form the pronouns Vun 
 V autre, Vun et V autre, and ni Vun ni V autre. 
 
 Uun Vautre, each other, one another, applies both 
 to persons and things : it takes both gender and num- 
 ber, and requires the article before the two words of 
 which it is composed. If there be any preposition, it 
 must be placed before the last. When these two words 
 are used in conjunction, they express a reciprocal rela- 
 tion betw r een several persons or things. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 llfaut se secourir Vun Vautre, We ought to assist each other. 
 
 U EXERCISE ON THE THIRD CLASS. 
 
 No one likes (to see himself) as he is. No expression, no 
 se voir tel que — f. 
 
 truth of design and colouring, no strokes of genius in that 
 
 f. dessein de colons trait 
 
 great work. He is as learned as anyone. Not one of these 
 
 ouvrage ra. savant 
 
 engravings announces any^reat skill. None of his works 
 
 gravure f. pi. annoncer un talent m. 
 
 will descend to posterity. He is so ignorant, and at the same 
 passer art. = f . — en * mime 
 
 time so obstinate, that he will not (be convinced) by any reason- 
 temps obstine * se rendre d raison- 
 ing. Did any man ever attain to such a pitch ©f 
 nement m. jamais 2 parvenir 1 ce * comblem. 
 glory ! I doubt whether there be in any science a more evi- 
 = que subj-1 — f. plus In- 
 dent principle. 
 mintux 2 — ptm.X. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 261 
 
 When used separately, they denote a difference. 
 EXAMPLE 
 
 Las passions s'entendent lesunes Our passions have a relation 
 avec les autres ; siVonselaisse with each other: if we in- 
 aller aitz unes, on attire bien- dulge some, the others will 
 tot les autres, soon follow. 
 
 Rem. In the latter case/'tm is used for the person, or 
 thing first mentioned, and V autre, for the person or thing 
 last spoken of. 
 
 L 'un et V autre, both ; these two words mark union. 
 They require the verb to be Jn the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Vune et V autre sont bonnes, Both are good. 
 
 Ni Vun ni V autre, neither ; these two words on the 
 contrary mark separation. The verb must be in the 
 plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Ni Vun ni V autre n'on fait Itur Neither has done his doty. 
 
 devoir, t 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 Ask another. Would any other have been so 
 
 D&mander d * aurait-il eu * assez 
 
 self-conceited as to think that his private opinion could 
 d amour-propre * pour penser particulicr2 — f . 1 put 
 
 counterbalance the public sentiment? Reason and faith 
 
 balancer 2 opinion ? f. 1 art. Raisonf. nii.foif. 
 
 equally demonstrate thaj we were created for another life. 
 
 2 dhnontrer 1 cr6eriud-i f. 
 
 They speak ill of one another. The happiness of the people 
 
 mat m. 
 
 constitutes that of the prince ; their true interests are connected 
 faire — m. intirct in. lie 
 
 with each other. Presumption and pride easily insinuate 
 d pi. pi. art. Prisomption f. art. orgueil 2 se g/issa 
 themselves into the heart ; if we allow one the entrance, 
 
 1 m. Von y donne d2 f. 3 * entrie 1 
 
 it is much to (be feared) that we shall soon (abandon our- 
 
 bicn craindre on * bicntut 2 ne sc litre 1 
 
 telves) to the other. Both relate the same story, though 
 
 rapporter fait m. 
 
 neither believes it to be true. 
 
 nepenser que * soit 
 
262 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 M&me signifies qui n'est pas autre, which is not diffe- 
 rent. It is of both genders, and takes the plural. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 C'cst le mime homme, It is the same man. 
 
 La mime personne, The same person. 
 
 Ce sont les mimes raisons, They are the same reasons. 
 
 Ce podme est le mime que celui This poem is the same that 1 
 dontje vous aiparli, was mentioning to you. 
 
 Tel means pareil, semblable, de m£me, such, like, si- 
 milar. It takes both gender-s and both numbers. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Un tel projet tie saurait reussir, Such a scheme cannot succeed. 
 R n'y a pas de tels animaux, de There are no such animals, no 
 
 telles coutumes, such customs. 
 
 When used alone, it either preserves its proper sig- 
 nification, or it expresses a person indeterminately. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Vous ne sauriez me persuader You cannot persuade me of any 
 
 rien de tel, such thing. 
 
 Tel fait des libiralitis, qui ne The same man is liberal in giv- 
 
 paye pas ses dettes, ing,who does not pay his debts. 
 
 Plusieurs, several, which is plural and of both gen- 
 ders, is used alike of persons and of things. When 
 united to a substantive, or relating to it, it signifies an 
 indeterminate number, without relation to another. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Plusieurs motifs Vont ditermini, Several reasons determinedhim. 
 Je crois cela pour plusieurs rai- I believe that for several rea- 
 sons, sons. 
 
 But it is likewise used as a part of a greater number. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Parmi un si grand nombre de Out of so great a number of 
 gens, U y en eut plusieurs qui persons, several objected to 
 s'y opposdrent, it. 
 
 When plusieurs is employed absolutely as a substan- 
 tive, it always means plusieurs persounes, several per- 
 sons. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Plusieurs aimcnt micux mourir Many would rather die than 
 que de perdre leurriputation, forfeit their character. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 263 
 
 Tout is used either alone, or with a substantive. 
 When employed alone, it signifies tout choses, all 
 things ; toute sorte de choses, every kind of things ; 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Tout nous abandonne au moment Every thing forsakes us at the 
 de la mort; il ne nous reste moment of death ; we retain 
 que nos bonnes aeuvres, nothing but our good works. 
 
 When united to a substantive, it is used either collec- 
 tively, or distributively. 
 
 Considered collectively, tout signifies the totality of 
 a thing, and is then followed by the article. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tout Vunivers, The whole universe. 
 
 Tous les corps ciltstes. All the celestial bodies. 
 
 Considered distributively, tout signifies chaque, each ; 
 in this case, it is not accompanied by the article. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Tout bien est disirable, t Every good is desirable. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 Does he always maintain the same principles ? Yes, they are 
 * soutenir —pe Oui ce 
 
 absolutely the same. That general is the same that commanded 
 — meat pi. — — der 
 
 last year. Such a conduct is inexplicable. There 
 
 art. dernier 2 annie f . 1 2 1 comduite f. — 
 
 are no such customs in this country. I never heard 
 
 de coutumes f. pays m. - ai entendu dire 
 
 (anything) similar. The same man sows who often reaps 
 
 rien de * semtr recueillir 
 
 nothing. I this morning received several letters. Among those 
 
 1 3 matin 4 ind-4 2 lettre f, pi. 
 
 manuscripts, there are several much esteemed. Many 
 
 — crits qu'on beaucoup 2 estime 1 
 
 by endeavouring to injure others, injure themselves more 
 
 en s'efforcer de nuire d art. se nuirea 
 
 than they think. All is in God and God is in all. The whole 
 
 nepenser en 
 
 course of his life has been distinguished by generous actions. 
 cours m. f. marqu6 des = 2 f I. 
 
 Every vice is odious. 
 — m. =» 
 
264 SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUNS. 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are followed by que. — P. 118. 
 
 Qui, que, whoever, is only said of persons, and sig* 
 nines quelque personne que, whatever person ; it requires 
 the verb following to be in the subjunctive. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Qui que ce soit qui ait fait cela, Whoever has done that, is a 
 
 c'est un habile homme, man of talent. 
 
 Qui queje sois, Whoever I may be. 
 
 Qui que g } ait et6, Whoever it may have been. 
 
 Qui que e'eut ete, Whoever it might have been. 
 
 Qui que ce puisse itre, Whoever it may be. 
 
 When qui que, followed by ce soit, is used with a ne- 
 gative, it signifies aucune personne, nobody; as, je ri*y 
 trouve qui que ce soit, I find nobody there. 
 
 Quoi que, whatever it be, is only used of things, and 
 signifies quelque chose que, whatever thing ; it requires 
 also the verb following to be in the subjunctive 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quoi que ce soit qu'U fasse, ou Whatever he doej or says, he 
 
 qu'il dise, on se defie de lui, is distrusted. 
 
 Quoi que vous disiez, je le Whatever you may say, I will 
 
 ferai, do it. 
 
 Rem. When quoi que, followed by ce soit, is used 
 with a negation, it signifies aucune chose, not any thing. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Sans application, on ne pent re- Without application it is in> 
 ussir en quoi que ce soit, t possible to succeed in any 
 
 thing whatever. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Whoever has told you so, he is mistaken. Pas- 
 
 ce soit qui le se t romper ind-4 Pas- 
 
 senger, whoever thou be, contemplate with religious veneration 
 snnt contcmplr un =2 respect m. 1 
 
 this monument erected by gratitude ; it is the tomb 
 
 — m. ehevi art. re.connnissancei.ee toinbeaum. 
 
 of a just and benevolent man. How can he hope to be 
 2 bienfaisant 3 1 Comment esperer de 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 2G5 
 
 Quel que signifies de quelque sorte, de quelque espice 
 que ce soil, of whatever sort, or kind it may be, when 
 relating to things ; or, qui que ce soit, whoever it may 
 be, when relating to persons. It takes both gender and 
 number according to the person, or thing it relates to, 
 and requires the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelles que ^oient vos affaires, Whatever business you may 
 
 vcnez, have, come. 
 
 Je ri'en excepte personne, quel I except nobody, whoever he 
 
 q\Cil soit, may be. 
 
 Rem. Lequel que, whosoever, whichever, is also 
 used ; as, lequel des trois que vous choisissiez, peu 
 mHmporte, whichever of the three you choose, I care 
 little. 
 
 Quelque— que, of both genders, when united to a 
 substantive, signifies quel que soit le, quelle que soit la, 
 &c. whatever be the, &c. It has both numbers, and re- 
 quires the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelque raison qxCon lux apporte, Whatever reason is adduced, 
 il n'en croit rien, he believes nothing about it. 
 
 Quelques efforts que vous fas- Whatever attempts you may 
 siez, vous ne riussirez point, make, you will never succeed. 
 
 When united to an adjective, it operates as an ad- 
 verb, and signifies a quelque point que, however great 
 a degree ; it then neither takes gender, nor number. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quelque belle qu J ellepuisse ttre, However beautiful she may be, 
 
 elle ne doit pas ttre zaine, she ought not to be vain 
 
 beloved who has regard for no one ? Wiatever he may do 
 
 lid ne d'igards 
 or say, he (will find it) very difficult to destroy pre- 
 
 qu'il aura bicn de la peine dttruire des prt~ 
 
 juaices so deeply rooted. A mind vain, .presumptuous, 
 
 jug6 m. si profondiment enracine — presomptueux, 
 
 and inconsistent, will never succeed in any thing whatever, 
 
 sans consistance * riussir 
 
 JVhatever a frivolous world may think of you, never swerve 
 
 frivole 2 monde 1 puisse s§ ditoisnur 
 
 from the path of virtue. 
 
 chemin m art. f. 
 
 24 
 
266 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Quelque puissans qu'ils soicnt, However powerful they may 
 je ne les crains point, be, I am not afraid of them. 
 
 Tel que, such as, serves to mark a parity between 
 objects by comparison. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cest un homme tel qu it vous He is just such a man as you 
 Icfant. want. 
 
 Tout — que signifies quoique, encore que> though, 
 quelque, however. On this occasion, tout is considered 
 as an adverb, and is employed with adjectives of every 
 kind, and even with some substantives. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tout artificieux qu'ils sont, je Artful as they are, I doubt 
 
 doute que le public soit long- whether the public will be 
 
 temps leur dupe, l° n g their dupe. 
 
 Toutefemme qu'clh est,\ Woman as she is. 
 
 t EXEHCISE. 
 Let the laws be (what they may), we must always 
 
 Que 2 loi f. 4 subj-1 3 quel 1 il 
 
 respect them. Whatever efforts you make ; I doubt whether 
 respecter — m. subj-1 que 
 
 you will succeed. All men, however opposite they may 
 
 * riussir subj-1 art. opposS 
 
 be, agree on that point. The »an who descends into 
 
 subj-1 s'accorder — m. ne rentrer en 
 
 himself only to discover his defects, and correct them, likes 
 
 que pour y dimBler — m. se corriger en 
 
 to see himself as he is. However surprising that phenomenon 
 
 surprenant 2 phenom&nem. 3 
 may be, it \g not against the order of nature. Children as 
 
 1 contre ordre m. art. 
 
 they are, they behaved remarkably well. 
 
 se sont conduits fort hien. 
 
 A GENERAL EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The Evening Walk, 
 
 du 2 soir 3 promenade/. 1. 
 
 On a fine summer evening, my brother, my sister, ana 
 
 Dans de 2 soiree 1. 1 
 
 myself. (were walking) (by the side) of a wood 
 
 moi nous nous promenions le long bois m. qui n'est 
 
EXERCISE OF THE PRONOT7NS. 267 
 
 not far distant fr«m the castle which we inhabit. We 
 
 pas Men eloign^ chdteau m. habiter 
 
 (were contemplating) with rapture the majestic scenery 
 
 contempler ind-2 transport — tueux 2 scene f. 1. 
 
 which nature exhibits at the approach of night, when we 
 
 art deployer approclte f. art. nuit f. quand 
 
 perceived at the foot of an ancient oak. a boy of a most 
 
 apercevoir ind-2 d pied pi. vieux chenem. enfant art. 2. 
 interesting countenance. His beauty, his air ofingenu- 
 
 intiressant 3 art. figure f. 1 = f . — m. ingenu- 
 
 ousness and candour, his gracefulness struck us, and we 
 it6 de = grace pi. frapper ind-3 nous 
 
 approached him. What ! alone here, my boy * said we ; 
 
 approcher ind-3 en seid ici enfant lux dimes 
 
 whence art thou ? Whence comest thou ? What art thou 
 D % oi\ * 2 
 
 doing here alone 1 I am not alone, answered he smiling, 
 
 fais 14 3 repondre ind-3 d'un air riant 
 
 I am not alone ; but I was fatigued, and I (have seated myself) 
 
 ind-2 fatigue' s'asseovr ind-4 
 
 under the shade of this tree, while my mother is busy 
 
 d ombre f. arbre m. tandis que occupi 
 
 in gathering simples to give some relief to the 
 
 d cueillir des — pour apporter aoulagement m. 
 
 pains which her aged father suffers. Ah ! (how many) 
 
 douleur f. pi. 2 vieux 3 4 souffrir 1 que 
 
 troubles my good mamma has ! How many troubles ! 
 de peine f. pi. 2 8 maman 4 1 si 
 
 Did you knew them, there is not one of you that would not 
 * connaitre ind-2 qui * 
 
 be touched with pity, and who could refuse the tribute 
 subj-2 de pitie * l u i subj-2 un tribut 
 
 of your tears. We said to him, lovely child, thy ingenu- 
 
 * larme f. pi. ind-3 * aimable 
 
 ousness, candour, innocence, (every thing), interests us 
 
 pro. = f. pro. — f. intlresser 
 
 in thy misfortunes and those of thy mother. Relate them to 
 d mallieur m. pi. d Raconter 2 * 
 
 us ; whatever they be, ( fear not to afflict us. (Woe be) to 
 
 1 subj-1 de affliger malheur 
 whoever cannot feel for the misfortunes of others! 
 
 nesaitpas s'attendrir sur moZm.pl. 
 
 He immediately related the history of his mother, with an ex- 
 
 2 aussitot 1 ind-3 = 
 
 pression, an artlessness, a grace, altogether affecting. Our 
 — f. naivete f = f . tout-d-fait touchant f. s. 
 
268 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Agreement of tJie Verb with the Subject. 
 
 The subject is that of which something is affirmed, 
 and may always be known by the answer to this ques- 
 tion, qui esUce qui ? who, or what is it ? as, Pierre 
 vit, Peter lives ; Voiseau vole, the bird flies ; if it be 
 asked, qui est-ce qui vit ? who is it that lives ? qui 
 est-ce qui vole ? what is it that flies ? The answers 
 Pierre and Voiseau, shew that Pierre and Voiseau are 
 the subjects of the verbs vit and vole. 
 
 Rule. The verb must be of the same number and 
 person as its subject. 
 
 hearts felt the liveliest emotions ; tears (trickled down 
 
 Sprouver ind-3 vif — f. nos coultr 
 
 our cheeks) and we gave him what little money we 
 ind-3 lui * art. pen de argent que 
 
 had about us. (In the mean lime) the mother returned. 
 ind-2 sur cependant revenir ind-3 
 
 (As soon as) he saw her, he exclaimed, (make haste,) 
 
 Dts-que apercevoir s'tcrier accourir. s. 
 
 mamma, make haste ; see what these good little folks have 
 
 s. ce que gens f. pi. 
 
 given me ; I have related to them thy misfortunes ; they have 
 
 m. 
 been affected (by them), and their sensibility (has not been 
 iowcAem.pl. en = f . nes'estpas 
 
 satisfied) with shedding tears. See mamma, see what they 
 
 born6 d * des s. 
 
 have given me. The mother was moved ; she thanked us, 
 
 ind-3 attendri f. remcrckr 
 and said : generous feeling souls, the good action 
 
 nous = 2 et sensible 3 dme f. pi. 1 — f. 
 
 which you (have just been doing) will not be lost. He who 
 
 vencz defaire perdu f. 
 
 sees (every thing) and judges (every thiug) will not let it go 
 juger laisser * 
 
 unrewarded. 
 sans recompense. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 289 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Je lis, / laugh. Nous parlons, We speak. 
 
 Tujoues, Thouplayest. Vous plaisantez, You jest, 
 
 II aime, He loves. lis sontfous, They are mad. 
 
 La vertu est aimable, virtue is amiable. 
 
 Ris is in the singular number, and the first person, 
 because je, its subject, is in the singular, and the first 
 person. Joues is in the singular, and the second per- 
 son, as tu is in the singular, and the second person, &C.TT 
 
 Rem. I. When a verb has two subjects both singular, 
 it is put in the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Mon ptre et ma mhre treatment My father and mother love me 
 tendrement,i tenderly. 
 
 Rem. II. When a verb relates to subjects of differ- 
 ent persons, it agrees with the first, in preference to 
 the other two, and with the second in preference to the 
 
 H EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 
 The most free of all men is he who can be free even In 
 libre art. celui mem* 
 
 slavery. Are we not often blind to our defects ? 
 
 art. esclavage m. * s'aveugler ind-1 sur dSfaid 
 
 All men (are inclined) to idleness, but the savages of 
 
 art. tendre ind-1 art. sauvage .art 
 
 hot countries are the laziest of all men. Do you think of 
 chaud 2pays 1 * 
 
 imposing long on the credulity of the public ? Thou 
 
 en imposer long-temps d = f . m. 
 
 canst not deny that he is a great man. 
 pouvoir fixer ne sub-1. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 His uprightness and honesty, make him courted Tnr 
 
 droiture f. pron. honnetetefaire reckercher <k 
 
 every body. Strength of body and of mind 
 
 art. f. art. celle art. s* 
 
 meet not always together. A good heart and a noble soul 
 
 rencontrer ensemble. m. beau T 
 
 are precious gifts of nature. 
 
 dt art. = 2 don m. pi. 1 art. — f. 
 
 24* 
 
2<70 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 third, The person addressed is named first, and the 
 person addressing last. On this occasion, the pronoun 
 plural nous, is generally placed before the verb, if the 
 first person has been mentioned before, or the pronoun 
 plural vous, if no first person has been mentioned. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Vous, voire frere, et moi, nous You, your brother, and I, read 
 
 lisons ensemble la brochure together the new pham- 
 
 nouvelle, phlet. 
 
 Vous et votre ami, vous viendrez You^and your friend will come 
 
 avec moi,X » with me. 
 
 Rem. III. When a verb has the relative pronoun 
 qui for its subject, it is put in the same number and 
 person as the noun, or pronoun, to which qui relates. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Est-ce moi qui ai dit cette nou- Is ft I who told this news t 
 
 velle ? 
 Est-ce nous qui Vavons voulu ? Is it we who desired it ? 
 Ceux qui aiment sincerement la Those who sincerely love virtue 
 
 vertu sont heureux,^ are happy. 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 You, your friend, and I, have each a different opinion. In 
 chacun 2 f. 1 
 
 our childhood, you and I (were pleased) with playing together 
 
 enfance f. se plaire ind-2 d inf-1 
 
 Neither I, nor (any one else) has been able to understand 
 
 ni ni oVauires ne pouvoir ind-4 * comprendre 2 
 (any thing) in that sentence. (Take good care) you and your bra 
 
 Hen 1 d phrase f. se garder Men 
 
 ther, not to (give way) to the impetuosity of your character. 
 * de s'abandonner = caracterem. 
 
 IF EXERCISE. 
 He that complains most of mankind, is not always he 
 Celui se plaindrc le plus art. hommc pi. 
 that (has most reason) to complain (of them.) You that wish 
 
 etre leplusfend6 en voulorr 
 
 to enrich your mind with thoughts vigorously conceived and 
 * enrichir csjirit de f. pi. fortement concu f. pi. 
 
 nobly expressed, read the works of Homer and Plato. 
 
 noblement exprimc ouvragc. 
 
 N. B. See the exercises. (Page 246.) 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 271 
 
 OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 
 A verb is active, when it will admit after it quelqu'un, 
 or quelque chose ; and, the word, which is put after the 
 verb, is called the regimen of that verb. Observe that 
 this regimen may be known by asking the question, 
 qu'est-ce que ? It is called direct, and may be either a 
 noun, or a pronoun. 
 
 Rule. When the regimen of the active verb is a 
 noun, it is always placed after the verb ; when it is a 
 pronoun, it is generally placed before it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ma mbre aime tous ses enfans, My mother loves all her children. 
 
 Je vous aime, and not as in English, Jaime vous, I love you, 
 U m'aime, and not 11 aime moi, he loves me.t 
 
 Besides this regimen direct, some active verbs may 
 have a second, which is called indirect, and is marked 
 by the words d or de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 £1 a fait un prisent d sa sarnr, He has made a present to his 
 
 sister. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 
 He has discovered to all other nations his ambitious 
 
 montrer art. * peupte m. pi. = 2 
 
 design of enslaving them, and has left us 
 
 dessein m. 1 mettrc dans Vesclavage inf-1 ne taisser 
 
 no means of defending our liberty, but by endeavouring to 
 aucun moyen inf-1 que en tdcher inf-3 de 
 
 overturn his new kingdom. Homer represents Nestor as him 
 renvcrser royaume m. c<lui 
 
 that restrained the ungovernable wrath of Achilles, the 
 
 mode'rer ind-2 bouiUant courroux m. 
 
 pride of Agamemnon, the haughtiness of Ajax, and the impetuous 
 
 fitrti f. =2 
 
 courage of Diomed. He dared not (lift up) his eyes, lest 
 — m. 1 Diomede. oscr ind-2 m lever * art. de 
 
 they should meet those of his friend, whose 
 
 yeur de * * rencontrer hif-1 
 
 very silence condemned him. He caresses them, because 
 art. mime 2 m. 1 ind-2 
 he lov-es them. 
 
272 SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. 
 
 U accuse son amid 1 imprudence^ He accuses his friend of im- 
 prudence. 
 
 The second regimen is known by the answer to these 
 questions ; a qui ? to whom ? a quoi ? to what ? de qui ? 
 of whom? de quoi ? of what ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 A qui a-t'ilfait un present ? To whom did he make a present? 
 A sa saiur, To his sister. 
 
 Be quoi accuse-t-il son ami ? Of what does he accuse his friend ? 
 D 1 imprudence. Of imprudence 
 
 Passive verbs require de, or par, before the noun, or 
 pronoun that follows them. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La souris est mangie par le chat, The mouse is eaten by the cat. 
 Un enfant sage est aimi de tout A good child is loved by evecy 
 le monde, body. 
 
 Rem. The French never use the word par, before 
 Dieu, God ; they say, les medians serontpunis de Dieu, 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 In submitting to the yoke of Asia, Greece would have 
 
 En subir inf-3 * joug m. art. art. 
 
 thought virtue subjected to voluptuousness, the mind 
 croire art. 2 assujetiir iuf-11 art. volupt6 f. 
 to the body, and courage to a senseless force, which consisted 
 
 art. insensi 2 — f . 1 ind-2 
 
 only in numbers. Three hundred Lacedemonians, hast- 
 ne que art. multitude f. s. — niens, courir 
 
 entd to Thermopylae to certain death, content in dying, to 
 ind-3 art. — piles pi. un assurS 2 f . 1 en de 
 
 have sacrificed to their country, an infinite number of barbarians, 
 
 immoler pays in. 2 1 barbarc 
 
 and to have left to their countiymen the example of an unheard 
 
 de laisser compatriotc inoul 2 
 
 of bravery. You knew the importance which your parents 
 * hardiesse f. 1 savoir ind-2 — f. que — 
 
 attached to the success of that affair : why have you not 
 
 ind-2 riussite f. f. pourquoi 
 
 hastened to announce it (to them ?) 
 
 s' empress er ind-4 de f. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 273 
 
 which, in ordor to avoid making use of by, may be thus 
 Englished ; God will punish the wicked. IT 
 
 Some few neuter verbs have no regimen ; as, dor- 
 mir, to sleep ; but many of them have a government. 
 
 Rule. Some neuter verbs require d, others de, be- 
 fore their regimen. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Tout genre d/excts nuit d la Every kind of excess is hurtful 
 
 saute, to health. 
 
 11 medit de tout It ?nondeA He slanders every body 
 
 IT exercise" 
 
 The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the 
 Troie pris f. saccage detruit 
 
 confederate Greeks, 1148 years before the Christian sera : this 
 covfcderS 2 1 avant 2 ere f. 1 
 
 event has been celebrated by the two greatest poets of Greece 
 
 art. 
 and Italy. You will only be beloved, esteemed, and 
 
 pr. art. 
 courted by men, (in proportion as) you join the 
 
 rechercher de que atttant que jobidre ind-7 
 
 qualities of the heart to those of the mind. God pu- 
 
 = f. pi. pr. 3 pu- 
 
 nished the Jews every time when, 
 
 nir (passive voice ind-3 2) peuple Juif 1 toute's les fois que 
 
 deaf to the voice of the prophets, they fell into 
 
 sourd f. prophete sing, tomber ind-3 dans 
 
 idolatry and impiety, 
 art. = art. = 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 This sentiment has pleased the king and all the nation 
 d d 
 
 In his retirement, he (has the full enjoyment) of the 
 dans retraitei. jouir tout 
 
 faculties of his soul. To slander (any one) is to assassinate 
 = f. p). " medirede quelq wun c' est * 
 
 him in cold blood. The honest man seldom (permits himself) 
 de 2 sang 1 rarement 2 sc permettre 1 
 
 to jest, because he knows the most 
 
 de * art. plais ant trie f. pi. parcc que savoirqvc 
 
 innocent jests may sometimes hurt the reputation. It is 
 
 f. pi. * pouvoir qutlquefois nuire d f. ce 
 
 only in retirement that one truly enjoys one's sett. 
 
 ne que art. oji v entablement 2 jouir 1 dc siri. 
 
2T4 8YNTAX OF THE VEEB. 
 
 Reflected verbs have for their regimen the personal 
 pronouns me, te, se, nous, and vous, and this regimen is 
 sometimes direct, asid sometimes indirect. 
 
 OF THE NATURE AND USE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 Of the Indicative. 
 
 The indicative is that mood which simply declares 
 and affirms a thing. It contains eight tenses, viz. the 
 present, the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in- 
 definite, the preterit anterior, the pluperfect, the future 
 simple, and the future anterior. 
 
 The present marks that a thing is now passing, that is, 
 either existing, or doing. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Jaime Hove Rsjouent They play 
 
 The imperfect expresses a present with respect to 
 something past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Tentrais au moment oik vous I came in at the moment you 
 
 sortiez, were going out. 
 
 Or it expresses something past, but habitual, without 
 fixing the time of its duration. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Cesar itait un habile giniral, Caesar was an able general. 
 
 The preterit definite marks that a thing took place at 
 a time completely past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J'icrivis hicr d Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 
 
 The preterit definite expresses a thing as having 
 taken place at a time which is neither precise, nor de- 
 terminate. 
 
 His work has pleased every one, because it unites 
 
 ouvrage m. d art. monde joindre 
 
 to real utility the charms of style, and the beau- 
 
 un 2 = f . 1 agriment m. pi. art m. sing, 
 
 lies of sentiment, 
 art. pi. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. 275 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 II m'a fait un vrai plaisir en He has given me real pleasure 
 venant me voir, by coming to see me 
 
 Or at a time which is not absolutely past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Tai vu cette semaine beaucoup de I have seen many people this 
 monde,$ . week. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 My sister is in her chamber, where she (is occapied) in reading 
 ou s'occuper d inf-l 
 
 ancient history, the study (of which) pleases her extremely, 
 art. 2 1 2 dont 1 lui infiniment 
 
 Benefits bestowed are (so many) trophies 
 
 art. Bienfait que onrepandre ind-1 de zYt.trophie que on 
 
 erected in the heart of those whose felicity (has been 
 
 s'eriger ind-1 1 art. =* f. 4 on 2 /aire 
 
 promoted) (by them.) The great Corneille was buoy in his 
 ind-1 3 * — occupi 
 
 study tracing the plan of one of his tragedies, wlien a ser- 
 cabinet d inf-l — m. = do 
 
 vant, terrified, came to tell him that his house was 
 
 inestique m. tout effrayS ind-3 * lui * art. 3 prendre 
 
 on fire : go and find my wife, replied he : I do 
 d ind-6 2 * art. 1 * trouver repondre ind-3 
 
 not understand household concerns. Some Hunga- 
 
 entendre rien d art. affaire pi. du manage m. de art. Hon- 
 rian noblemen revolted from the Emperor Sigismund ; 
 
 grovj 2 seigneur 1 se rivolter ind-3 contre = — mond. 
 
 this prince heard it, and marched boldly against 
 
 apprendre ind-3 jidrementau-devantde 
 
 them : which, among you, said be (to them), will lay hands 
 (Ventre ind-3 mettre 1 art. f. 
 
 upon his king first ? If there be one bold enouoii 
 sing. 3 4 art. 2 en un Jiardi 2 1 
 
 let him advance. This noble firmness struck the rebels 
 
 en imposer d s6ditieux 
 
 (with awe), who returned immediately to their duty. 1 have 
 
 * rentrer aussi-tot dans h devoir 
 
 travelled through almost all Europe, and I have visited the 
 voyager dans art. — f. 
 
 most celebrated places in Asia and Africa ; if, on the one 
 
 — brt 2 lieu 1 de art. Asie pr. art. Afrique de * 
 hand, I admired the master-pieces of art, of every kind, which 
 cot6 m. ind-4 chefs-d'eeuvre art. en tout genre 
 
276 SYNTAX OP THE VEBB. 
 
 The preterit anterior expresses that a thing had taken 
 place immediately before a time which is passed, and 
 this tense is either definite, or indefinite. There is the 
 same difference between its two forms, as between the 
 two preterits, definite and indefinite. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 feus dint hier d midi, I had dined yesterday at twelve. 
 
 Qtiand feus dine hier, midi When I had dined yesterday, it 
 
 sonna, struck twelve. 
 
 Tai eu dejeuni ce matin d dix I had done breakfast this morn- 
 
 heures, * ing at ten o'clock. 
 
 The pluperfect is that past tense which expresses a 
 thing as having taken place at any period antecedent to 
 the time when another thing happened ; or it expresses 
 a thing habitually done before another. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tavais soupe quand il ontra, I had supped when ke came in. 
 
 Lorsque fttais d la campagne, When I was in the country, as 
 dds quefavaisd&jeuni, fallais soon as I had breakfasted, I 
 d la chasse, used to go a hunting. 
 
 The future absolute, is that tense which expresses that 
 an action or event will take place at a time which does 
 not yet exist. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J'irai demain d la campagne, I shall go to-morrow into the 
 
 country. 
 
 The future anterior is the tense which expresses that 
 at a time when a thing will take place, another thing will 
 have already taken place. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Quand fauraijinije sorlirai,}] When I have done, I shall go 
 
 out. 
 
 the protection of enlightened governments has produced, on 
 
 art. 2 1 faire naitre 
 
 the other, I shed tears, (on seeing) the ravages of ig- 
 
 ind-4 de art. sur — art* 
 
 norance and barbarism, 
 
 pr. art. barbarie f. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 277 
 
 OF THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 The conditional is the mood which affirms on condi- 
 tions ; it has two tenses, the present and the past. 
 
 The present of the conditional is >hat tense which 
 expresses that a thing would take place on certain con- 
 ditions. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je ferais votrc affaire avant pen, I would settle your business be- 
 si elle dependait uniquement de fore ?ong, if it only depended 
 mui, upon me. 
 
 The past of the conditional is that tense which ex- 
 presses that a thing would have taken place at a time 
 which no longer exists, dependant on certain conditions. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Taurais, ou j'eusse fait votre I would have settled your bu» 
 affaire, si vous mi'en amez, ou siness, if you had mentioned 
 m'cn eussiez parle,\ it to me. 
 
 1T EXERCISE ON THE PRETERIT ANTERIOR, <&c. 
 I had done yesterday, at noon. I (went out) (as soon as) I 
 Jinir midi sortir ind-4 des-que 
 
 had dined. As soon as Caesar had crossed the Rubicon, he had 
 
 passer — 
 
 no longer to deliberate ; he (was obliged) to conquer or to die. 
 pl'us devtir ind-2 * vaincre * 
 
 1 had finished the task that you had imposed upon me, when 
 
 tdche f. imposcr f. * 
 
 yuu came in. Those who had contributed most to his elevation 
 
 — bv<:T leplus 
 tb the throne of his ancestors, were these who laboured with 
 sur travailler 
 
 the most eagerness to precipitate him (from it.) I shall 
 de acJtarncmcnt en ne point 
 
 shortly go into the country, where I intend to (collect 
 
 tarder d d campagne sc proposer de herbo- 
 
 plants), (in order to) (make myself perfect) in the knowledge 
 riser inf-1 pour se p°rfectionntr 
 
 >f botany. When 1 have done reading the di- 
 
 art. botanique f. aclieicr ind-8 de inf-1 
 
 vine writings of Homer and Virgil, and my mind has imbiV- 
 
 2 lait m. 1 pr. que se pi- 
 ad their beauties, I shall read the other epic poets. 
 nttrer ind-8 de ind-7 2 1 
 
 25 
 
278 SYNTAX OP THE VERB, 
 
 OF THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 The imperative is that mood which commands, ex. 
 horts, entreats, or reproves. It is a present with re- 
 spect to the injunction, and a future with respect to the 
 thing enjoined, 
 
 In many verbs a compound of the imperative may be 
 used to express an injunction to have a thing done pre- 
 viously to another, ?£, ayez dine* avant que je revienne, 
 have dined before I return.:]: 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 What would not be the felicity of man, if he always sought 
 
 Quel * — f. chercher ind-2 
 
 his happiness in himself ? I shall be glad to see you harmo- 
 
 um pi. 
 nious, happy, and comfortable. A dupe to my imagination, I 
 
 tranquille * de 
 
 should have (been bewildered) (but for) you in my search 
 
 s'Ggarer sans * art. rechercftc f. 
 
 after truth. Enquire whether he would have consented to 
 de art. sHnformer si constntir 
 
 those conditions, in case he had thought himself able 
 
 dans art. que se croire subj-4 capable 
 
 to fulfil them. 
 de remptir. 
 
 t EXERCISES ON THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Be not fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which 
 
 sing. passionne pour art. louanget art. 
 
 procures it. Let us remember that unless virtue guide 
 
 attirer se souvenir d moins que art. ne 
 
 us, our choice must be wrong. Let us not be deceived by 
 
 d&voir in d-1 mauvais se laisser prendre d 
 
 the first appearances of tilings ; but let us take lime to 
 
 art. se dormer art. de 
 
 fix our judgment. Arbiters of the destinies of men, do 
 
 Arbitre — ne'e art. art. 
 
 good if you wish to be happy; do good, if you wish that your 
 Men vouloir * 
 
 memory should be honoured ; do good, if you wish that 
 subj-1 art. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 279 
 
 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 The subjunctive is that mood whieh expresses a sub- 
 ordination to what precedes. With this dependance 
 it forms a sense, and none without. Je voudrais quHl 
 lut, forms sense, but quHl Ivt, alone and unconnected, 
 does not. 
 
 This mood contains four tenses, the present, ox future, 
 the imperfect 9 the preterit, and the pluperfect. 
 
 The present and the future of the subjunctive can 
 only be distinguished by the sense ; in this phrase, 
 Ufaut que je vous sois Men attache pour venir vous 
 voir par le temps qu'ilfait, I must have a great esteem 
 for you to come and see you in such weather as this ^ 
 je sois, expresses a present time ; but in this, je ?i& 
 crois pas que vous obteniez cela de lui, I do not think 
 you will obtain that of him, vous obteniez expresses a 
 future, and stands for vous obtiendrez. 
 
 The imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect of 
 the subjunctive express also a past, or future, ac- 
 cording to circumstances : in this phrase, soupconniez- 
 vous quHl ne le fit pas, did you suspect he would noi 
 do it, fit expresses a past ; but in this, je de'sirerais 
 qu'il vit du monde, I wish him to see company, vit marks 
 a future. II 
 
 heaven should open to you its eternal gates. Never forget thgil 
 
 sub-1 2 porte f. 1 
 
 the truly free man is he, who, superior to all fears, and 
 
 vtritablement 2 3 1 dt'gagi de f-s. 
 
 all desires, is subject only to the gods and to reason, 
 pr. m-s. soumis ne que art. f. 
 
 H EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Men must be (very much) blinded by their pa*- 
 
 art. 3 ti 1 que 2 subj-1 bien avevgtt 
 
 sions, not to acknowledge that they ought to (lovje 
 
 2 pour 1 devoir ind-1 * 
 
 one another) as parts of a whole ; and as (the members 
 s'entr'aimer art tout 2 
 
380 SYNTAX OF THE VEHB. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE . 
 
 The infinitive is that mood which affirms indetermi- 
 nately without either number, or person. 
 
 It denotes of itself, neither present, past, nor future, 
 except when it follows other verbs. The present al- 
 ways expresses a present, relative to the preceding 
 verT) ; as, je le vois, je le vis, je le verrai venir, I see, 
 I saw, I shall see him come. The past always ex- 
 presses a past, relative to the verb that precedes it, je 
 crois, je croyais Vavoir vu venir, I think, I thought 
 that I had se^n him coming. To express & future, the 
 
 qf out body) (would do) if (everyone) had a particular vitality. 
 
 1 cliacun ind-2 sa 2 tie 1 
 
 You asked him to come with us ; but I doubt whether he 
 
 prier ind-4 de que 
 
 will have that complaisance. I could Hot persuade myself that 
 
 subj-1 ind-2 
 
 he was so vain as to aspire to that place. Though every 
 
 subj-2 assez * pour — f. 
 
 body says so, I do not believe that he is gone to Rome. 
 
 subj-1 le subj-1 
 
 (Is it possible) that he should let slip so good an oppor- 
 
 sepouvoir laisser subj-3 ichapper beau occasi- 
 
 tun/ty of acquiring immortal glory ? I could have wished 
 anf un 2 1 
 
 that he had availed himself of his abode in the country, to 
 
 profiler subj-4 sijour d campagne pour 
 
 perfect himself in the study of philosophy. 
 m perfectionncr art. = f. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 We only shut our eyes to truth, because we fear to 
 ne * art. art. queparceque de 
 
 see ourselves as we are. We were yet far from the castle, 
 2 mo us 1 tel que ind-2 encore 
 
 when one of our friends came to join U5. I did not think I 
 ind-3 * ' ind-2 * 
 
 was to set out so soou. He promises every day that he 
 devoir * art. pi . de * 
 
 will amend, but I do not rely upon his promises. 
 * se corriger compter pramvsse f. pi. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PABTICIPLE. 281 
 
 infinitive must be preceded by the infinitive of the verb 
 devoir ; as, je croyais devoir y aller, I thought I was 
 to go there. , 
 
 Remark. The infinitive also expresses a future 
 after the verbs permettre, esperer, compter, s'attendm 
 and menacer ; as, il promet de venir (qu'il viendra\ 
 he promises to come (that he will come) ; il menace & 
 s'y rendre (quHl s'y rendra), he threatens to go (that 
 he will go) there. f 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The participle is a part of the verb which partakes 
 of the properties both of a verb and an adjective ; of a 
 verb, as it has its signification and regimen, of an ad- 
 jective, as it expresses the quality of a person, or thing. 
 
 There are two participles, the participle present, and 
 the participle past. 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 The participle present always terminates in ant ; as, 
 aimant, jinissant, recevanL rendant* 
 
 They talk of a secret expedition ; he- hopes to be (in it.) JFJe 
 
 on 2 — f. 1 * en 
 
 relies upon seeing you very soon, to terminate 
 
 Qunipter * inf-1 au premier jour pour 
 
 amicably his affair with you. You expected to take .a 
 
 d I' amiable s'attendre ind-2 fdift 
 
 journey this year ; but your father has changed his mind. 
 voyage m. de * arts 
 
 He threatens to punish us severely, if we (fall again) into .the 
 
 de siverement retomber 
 
 same error. 
 fault. 
 
 - ■ •■ >m • - 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 That mountain being very high, and thus commanding a 
 
 ilccc ainsi domincr s*ur 
 
 vast extent of country, was very well calculated for our 
 gr and e Vendue pays ind-2 * proprc & 
 
 25* 
 
282 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Rule. The participle present remains unchanged, 
 and takes neither gender nor number when it ex- 
 presses an action, as, une montagne, or des montagnes 
 dominant sur des plaines immenses, a mountain, or 
 mountains commanding immense plains : un homme, 
 des hommes, une femme, des femmes lisant, parlant, 
 marchanty a man, men, a woman, women reading, 
 speaking, walking. But whefx, like an adjective, it 
 expresses simply a quality, it takes both the gender 
 and number of its substantive ; as, un homme obligeant, 
 an obliging man ; unefemme obligeante, an obliging 
 woman ; des tableaux parlans, speaking portraits ; la 
 religion dominante, the established religion ; a la nuit 
 tombante, at night fall. 
 
 What grammarians call gerund, is nothing but the 
 participle present, to which the word en is prefixed ; 
 on se forme V esprit en lisant de bons livres, we form our 
 minds by reading good books. 
 
 observations. This woman is of good disposition, obliging 
 
 caractere m. 
 every one, whenever she (has it in her power). They go 
 tout le monde quand le ponvoir 
 
 cringing before the great, that they may be insolent to their 
 ramper devant pi. ajin de * * inf-1 pi. avec 
 
 equals. The state of pure nature is that of the savage living in the 
 egal 
 desert, but living in his family, knowing his children, loving them, 
 
 famille f. connaitre 
 (making use) of speech, and (making himself understood.) 
 
 user art. parole, se faire entendre 
 
 An agreeable languor imperceptibly (laying hold) of my 
 
 2 langueur f. 1 inscnsiblemcnt s'emparer 
 
 senses, suspended the activity of my soul, and I fell (asleep.) 
 sens suspendre ind-3 s'cndormir 
 
 Time is a real blunderer, placing, replacing, ordering, 
 ind-3 art. vrai hrouillon victtrc remcltre ranger 
 
 disordering, impressing, erasing, approaching, removing, and 
 dkr anger imprinter effacer approchrr Eloigner 
 
 making all things, good and bad ; and almost always (impossi- 
 rendre f. pi. presque 
 
 ble to be known again.) 
 m&connaissable. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 283 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 The participle past has various terminations ; as, 
 aim€,jini, recu, ouvert, dissons, &c. 
 
 This participle may either agree with its subject, or 
 its regimen. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST WITH 
 ITS SUBJECT. 
 
 Rule. I. The participle past, when accompanied by 
 the auxiliary verb £tre, agrees with its subject in gender 
 and number. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Monfrere est torribi, My brother is fallen. 
 
 Mesfreres sont lombts, My brothers are fallen. 
 
 Ma soBiir est tomb6e, My sister is fallen. 
 
 Mes soeurs sont tomhies, My sisters are fallen. 
 
 La nuit sera bientot passee, The night will soon be over. 
 
 Lea spectacles soncfrequt?it6s, The theatres are frequented. 
 
 Ceitefleur est fort recherchic, This flower is much sought after. 
 
 lis sont fort estimts, They are very much esteemed, 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 Fire-arai3 were not known to the ancients. Ishmael, 
 
 art. armc-d-feu f. pl» ind-4 connu de IsmaSl 
 
 the son of Abraham, is known among the Arabs, as (the man) 
 
 * — parmi Arabc celui 
 
 from whence they sprung, and circumcision has remained 
 
 etre sorti art. f. Itre dcmeuri 
 
 (among them) as the mark of their origin. Heaven is that 
 
 tear f. art. 
 
 permanent city, (into which) the just are to be received after 
 — 2 citi f. 1 ou pi. decoir * apr&s 
 
 this life. In Abraham's time, the threalenings of the tru* 
 
 de 2 art. 1 menace f. pi. 
 
 God was dreaded by Pharaoh, king of Egypt ; but, in the time 
 
 ind-2 redout 6 de Pharaon 
 of Moses, all nations were corrupted, and the world, whicfc 
 
 Moisc art. f. perverti 
 
 God has made to manifest his power, was become a temple 
 
 pour pouvoir m. devenu 
 
 of idols. That dreadful crisis which threatened the state with 
 terrible 2 arise f. 1 ind-4 de 
 
284 STNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Rule. II. The participle past, when it follows the 
 verb avoir, never agrees with its subject, 
 
 Monfrtrea Sent, My brother has written. 
 
 Mesfreres ont 6crit, My brothers have written. 
 
 Ma scBur a Scrit, My sister has written. 
 
 Mes sceurs ont ecrit, My sisters have written. 
 
 Les Amazones ont acquis de la The Amazons have acquired 
 
 ciltbrite, celebrity. 
 
 J'ai contraint les soldats d mar- I have forced the soldiers to 
 
 cher, march. 
 
 Remark. The participle of the verb ttre, and of 
 all the neuter varbs which are conjugated with the 
 auxiliary verb avoir, never vary, as, it or elle a eU, he, 
 or she has been ; Us or elles ont 6te, they have been ; 
 il or elle a dormi, he or she has slept ; Us or elles ont 
 nui, they have annoy ed.H 
 
 instant destruction, was happily soon over. Ste is 
 
 prochain 2 f . 1 ind-3 heureusement passi 
 
 come to bring us all kinds of refreshments. The sciences 
 
 * sorte f. sing. rafraichissement f. 
 
 have always been protected by enlightened governments. 
 protig6 art. eclaire 2 1 
 
 II EXERCISE. 
 The Romans successively triumphed over the most 
 
 Romain successivement 2 ind-4 1 de 
 
 warlike nations. Larapridius relates that Adrian erected 
 
 bettiqucux 2 1 raconter Adrien elerer 
 
 to Jesus Christ some temples, which (were still 
 ind-6 de art. on encore 2 
 
 to be seen) in his time. Happy those princes who have 
 voir ind-2 1 de * art. 
 
 never (made use) of their power but to do good! We 
 
 user pouvoir que pour art. Ikn 
 
 have spent the whole day in tormenting ourselves. One 
 
 journ-'e f. d inf-1 2 7ious 1 
 
 has seldom seen Q great stock of good sense in a man o4 
 rarantnt fonds m. sens d 
 
 Imagination. The errors of Descartes proved very useful 
 
 — => — beaucottp sertir 
 
 to Newton. 
 ind-4 — 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 285 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST WITH ITS REGIMEN. 
 
 Rule I. The participle past always agrees with its 
 regimen direct, when that regimen is placed before the 
 participle, whether the auxiliary verb that accompanies 
 it be avoir, or &tre. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les ecoliers que fai eus, ont The pupils, whom I have had, 
 fait de grands progres, have made rapid progress. 
 
 Lucrece s r est tuie Lucretia has killed herself. 
 
 Tai renvoyi, les livres que vous I have sent back the books 
 rriariez pretes, which you had lent me. 
 
 Que de soinsje me suis donnis ! What pains I have taken ! 
 
 Quelle affaire avez-vous entre- What business have you under- 
 prise ? taken ? 
 
 Quand la race de Cain sefutmul- When the race of Cain had 
 tipliee, multiplied. 
 
 Ce yeuzque n'ont imusni soupirs Those eyes which neither sighs 
 ni terreur, nor terror have moved. 
 
 Le Dieu Mcrciire est un de ceux The God Mercury is one of 
 que les anciens ont le plus mvX- those whom the ancients hare 
 tiplies, multiplied the most. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICI- 
 PLE PAST WITH ITS REGDfEN. 
 
 All the letters which I have received, confirm that iroport- 
 r. pi. conjirmer 
 
 *nt news. The agitated life which I have led till 
 
 2 s. 1 agiti 3 f . 1 mener jusqu'd 
 
 now, makes me sigh for retirement. The difficulties 
 
 present soupirer aprts avt.retraitcf. f. pi. 
 
 which the academies (have proposed to one another) do not 
 
 st fair e ind-4 
 seem easy to (be resolved.) The sciences which you have 
 paraitre aisS rSsoudre f. pi. 
 
 studied, will prove infinitely useful (to you.) The death whieh 
 
 etre f. 
 
 Lucretia (gave herself) has (made her immortal.) The 
 
 se donner ind-4 immortaliser ind-4 
 
 cities which those nations have (built for themselves) are 
 villef. pi. peuple scbdtir ind-4 
 
 but a collection of huts. The persons whom you have in 
 ne que amas m. chaumiere f. pi. 
 
286 ' SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Rem. The regimen which precedes the participle* is, 
 either one of these pronouns, que, me, te, se, le, la, les, 
 nous, and vous, or a noun sometimes joined to the pro- 
 noun quel, sometimes preceded by the word of quantity, 
 combien, or que, signifying combien, how much, as may 
 be seen in the examples already given. f 
 
 Rule II. The participle past never agrees with its re- 
 gimen, either when that participle is without regimen di- 
 rect, or when, having a regimen direct, that regimen is 
 placed after it. 
 
 gtructed appear to me possessed of reason and taste. Nothing 
 
 pl&in pr. 
 
 can equal the ardour of the troops which I have seen (setting off.) 
 
 6galer f. pi. inf-1 
 
 The chimeras which she has got in her head, (are beyond) 
 
 chhnbre f. pi. fs mtftro * art. passer 
 
 all belief. What measures have I not taken ! What fortunes 
 
 croyamcef, demarches f. pi. fair§ f. pi. 
 
 has not this revolution ruined I What tears has she not shed ; 
 renverser Que de f. pi. vtrser 
 
 what sighs has she not heaved ! The Amazons (made themselves) 
 
 m. pi. pousser f. pi. se rendre in d-4 
 
 famous by their courage. The city of London has (made itself.) 
 cettbre f. 
 
 by its commerce, the metropolis of the universe. I have thought 
 — m. — le £, croira 
 
 her agitated by the furies. This day is one of those which they 
 
 =■ m. pi. 
 
 have consecrated to tears. The language in which Cicero and 
 
 consacrer art. langue f. * Ciciron 
 
 Virgil have written, will live in their works. I could have wished 
 par ouvrage * vouloir 
 
 ts> avoid entering into those details, but I thought them neces- 
 * iviter d'entrer — m. croire in d-4 
 
 sary. The tribunes demanded of Clodius the execution of 
 
 tribun m. pi. ind-3 d 
 the promises which the consul Valerius had given them. 
 f. faire leur. 
 
 H EXERCISE. 
 The persons whose. visit you had announced to me, are- not 
 f. pi. 1 art. f. 5 2 4 * 3 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PAETICIPUS. 287 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La lettre dontje vous ai parle, The letter which I have men- 
 
 tionedjto you. 
 La perte et les profits auxquels The loss and profits which he 
 
 il aparticlpc, has shared. 
 
 Lcs acadimits se sontfait des ob- The academies have proposed 
 
 jtctions, objections to one another. 
 
 Vous avez instruit ces personnes You have taught these persona 
 
 d dessiner, to draw. 
 
 Lucrdce iest donne la mort,% Lucretia has put a period to her 
 
 existence. 
 
 Rule. III. The participle past takes neither gender 
 nor number when the participle and the auxiliary verb 
 to which it is joined are used impersonally, nor when 
 that participle is followed by a verb, which governs the 
 pronouns, or pronouns preceding it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a The excessive heats, which we 
 
 fait cet ete, ont beaucoup nui have had this summer, have 
 
 d la ricoltc. done great injury to the corn. 
 
 Quelle fdck'iisa aventure vous What unpleasant adventure 
 
 est-il arriit ? have you met with ? 
 
 La maison que fai fait bdtir, The house which I have order- 
 
 ed to be built. 
 Imltez les vcrtus que vous avez Imitate the virtues which you 
 
 cntendu Imier, have heard praised. 
 
 Les muthematiques que vous The mathematics which you 
 
 tVatezpas voulu quefetudiasse, would not permit me to study. 
 
 come. Men built themselves cities. The Amazons 
 
 art. se bdtir ind-4 de art. 
 
 acnuire-d great celebrity. I have forced the soldiers 
 
 ind-4 beaucoup de = contraindrc 
 
 to march. That woman has bestowed on herself fine gowns. 
 
 se donner * * de 
 
 Letters and writing were inveiited to represent 
 
 art. 4 art. ecriture oonla2 3 pour peindre 
 
 speech. She has cut two (of her) fingers. Titus has made 
 
 art. se couper * doigt m. pi. rmdre 
 
 his wife mistress of his riches. I have given myself (a great deal) 
 
 bien Men 
 
 of trouble. Commerce has made this city flourishing 
 
 art. peine f. art. m. rtnare f. flonssant 
 
 They have made an appointment. 
 
 se danner * rendcz-vous. 
 
288 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE, 
 
 EXLt s'ert laissi stduire, She has suffered herself to be 
 
 seduced. 
 
 Remark. To make a right application of the second 
 part of this rule, we ought to examine whether we can 
 put the regimen immediately after the participle. As 
 we cannot say ; Tax fait la maison, vous avez entendu 
 les vertus, vous^avez pas vouhi les matMmatiques, it 
 follows that the regimen belongs to the second verb. 
 Sometimes, however, the regimen may relate either to 
 the participle, or to the following verb, according to the 
 meaning of the speaker. Thus, Je Vai vu peindre, 
 means, I saw her picture drawn ; but Je Vai vue pein- 
 dre, signifies, I saw her painting. 
 
 Sometimes it happens likewise, that, in sentences 
 which seem to resemble each other, the regimen in one 
 belongs to the participle, and in the other to the verb 
 which follows it. For instance, this question, Avez- 
 vous entendu chanter la nouvelle actrice ? Have you 
 heard the new actress sing ? should be thus answered, 
 Qui, je Vai entendue chanter, yes, I have : but this ques- 
 tion, Avez-vous entendu chanter la nouvelle ariette ? 
 Have you heard the new song ? must be answered, Qui, 
 je Vai entendu chanter, yes, I have.f 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 The great changes which (have taken place) in admi- 
 changement y avoir ind-4 art. 
 
 nistration, have astonished many people. The heavy rains 
 Men des personnes grand pluie 
 
 which we have had in the spring, have been the cause 
 
 f. pi. * il faire ind-4 
 
 of many diseases. The scarcity which there icas last 
 
 maladic f. pi. disette f. . ind-4 art. demur 2 
 
 winter, has afforded the opportunity of doing much good. What 
 
 1 donner occasion inf-1 bien 
 
 news has reached you ? How many imprudent steps 
 
 est-il vcnu Que de faux demarche f. pi . 
 
 were taken on that occasion ! How many large ships have 
 il s'est faire en gros il se 
 
 been built in England within these fifty years ! The figures 
 construire ind-4 depuis * — 
 
 which you have hawed to draw are of great beauty. We 
 apprendrc dessincr un * 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 289 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Situation of the Adverbs. 
 
 Rule I. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally 
 placed after the verb ; and, in the compound tenses, be- 
 tween the auxiliary and the participle. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vhommt le plus cdairS est ordi- The man who is most learned 
 nairement cclui qui pense le is generally he who thinks 
 plus rnodestement delui-memt, most modestly of himself. 
 
 Avez-vous jamais vu un pedant Have you ever seen a pedant 
 jAus absurde et plus vain 1 more absurd and more vain ? 
 
 Compound adverbs, and those which have preserved 
 the legimen of the adjectives from which they are de- 
 rived, are placed always after the verb, as, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Cost a la mode, That is fashionable. 
 
 // a agi consiquemmerti, He has acted consistently. 
 
 Adverbs which denote time in an indeterminate man- 
 ner are likewise placed after the verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 II tut fallu se lever plus matin, It would have been necessary 
 
 to rise earlier. 
 On a vu cela autrefois, That has been seen formerly. 
 
 Exceptions. 1. Adverbs of order, rank, and those 
 which express a determinate time, are placed either be- 
 fore, or after the verb. 
 
 ought never to swprve from the good path which wc 
 
 falloir ind-1 * s' Eloigner route f. on 
 
 have begun to follow. The measures, which you advised 
 
 mcsure f. pi. conseiller ind-4 
 
 me to adopt, have not succeeded. The rule, which I have be- 
 ds y,rendri>, rtussir rhgle f. 
 gun to explain, seems to mc very easy to (be understood.) Yoi 
 
 cxpliqmr scmbler saisir 
 
 see that I have not (been mistaken) respecting the affaire which 
 
 se trompcr in d-4 
 I had foreseen you would have in hand. 
 vr&coir (pie * * 
 
 26 
 
290 SYNTAX OF THE VERB, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Nous devons premierement/aire We ought, first, to do our duty; 
 
 notre devoir ; seconderaent secondly, enjoy lawful plea- 
 
 chercherlesplaisirspermis, sures. 
 
 Aujourd'hui il fait beau ; il To-day, it is fine ; it will rain 
 
 pleuvra peut-£tre demain. perhaps to-morrow. 
 
 2. These adverbs, comment, on, d'ou, par oil, com. 
 bien, pourquoi, quand, used with, or without interroga- 
 tion, are always placed before the verb which they 
 modify. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Comme vous portez-vous ? How do you do ? 
 
 On allez-vous ? Where are you going ? [it. 
 
 11 tie sait comment s'y prendre, He does not know how to set about 
 Rule II. The adverb is always placed before the 
 adjective which it modifies. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Cest une femmc fort belle, tres- She is a woman very beautiful, 
 sensible, et infiniment sage, of great sensibility, and in« 
 
 finitely prudent. 
 
 Rule III. Adverbs of quantity and comparison, and 
 the three adverbs of time, souvent, touj ours, jamais, are 
 placed before the other adverbs. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Si poliment, fort poliment, So politely, very politely. 
 
 Tris-heureusement, Veiy happily. 
 
 Le plus adroitement, The most skilfully. 
 
 fls ne seront jamais 6troitement They never will be intimately 
 
 unis, united. 
 
 Us sont toujours ensemble, They are always together. 
 
 Cest souvent d Vimproviste quHl He often comes unexpectedly. 
 
 arrive, 
 
 Souvent may, however, be preceded by an adverb of 
 quantity, or comparison, as, si souvent, assez souvent, fort 
 souvent, plus souvent, moins souvent, trop souvent. 
 
 Rem. When adverbs of quantity and comparison meet 
 together in a sentence, the following is the order which 
 custom has established. 
 
 Si peu Bien peu Beaucoup * trop Tant mieux 
 
 Trop peu Bien plus Beaucoup plus Tant pis, 
 
 Tres-peu Bien davantage Beaucoup moins &c. 
 
 * Beaucoup is not as the English mrtcA, susceptible of being modified by 
 any adverb preceding, thus, trts-btauconp, trop beaucoup, &c. would be 
 barbarism. 
 
SYNTAX OP THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 291 
 
 When bien stands before another adverb, it means 
 very, much, &c. as in the preceding and following ex- 
 amples. 
 
 Bien assez Quite enough. Frapper bien fort To strike very hard. 
 Bien moins Much less Bien tard Very late. 
 
 But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies 
 well; as, 
 
 Assez bien Pretty well. Fort bien Very welL 
 
 Moins bien Not so well. Aussibien As well. 
 
 These rules have been sufficiently exemplified. P. 141. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 The conjunction que serves to complete a compari- 
 son ; it is elliptically used to express a restriction, when 
 placed after ue, and it generally gives grac6, energy, 
 and precision to sentences. 
 
 expressing com-^ 
 parison 
 
 for rien que 
 
 -jesouhaite que < 
 
 — d moins que 
 q,ue ^ — a cant que 
 
 — sans que 
 
 — des que I 
 
 — aussitot que < 
 
 — si, or quand ( 
 
 f 
 
 soit que < 
 
 — jusqu'd ce que < 
 
 EXAxMPLES. 
 
 L'Asie est plus 
 
 grande que 
 
 V Europe. 
 On ne parte que 
 
 de la nouvelle 
 
 victoire. 
 QLvfilvivc, pour 
 
 je souhaite 
 
 quHl vive. 
 Cela ne Jinira 
 
 pus qu'iZ ne 
 
 vicnnc. 
 Q,u'i7 fasse le 
 
 moindre excts, 
 
 il est maladc. 
 
 QuHl perde, on 
 
 qu.Hlgu.gne son 
 
 proces, e'est un 
 
 homme ruin I. 
 
 Attendez qu'iZ 
 
 vienne 
 
 f Asia is larger than 
 t Europe. 
 
 They talk of no- 
 thing but the new 
 victory. 
 May he live, for / 
 wish that he may 
 live. 
 There will be no 
 end to it, unless he 
 come. 
 If he commits the 
 least excess, he is 
 ill. 
 ) Wteiher he gaiti6, or 
 ( loses his lawsuit, 
 j he is a ruined 
 J man. 
 
 > Wait till he comes 
 
292 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 ««i-p" { "y&sr } "ssr, be not 
 
 — comme Mechantqu'ilcst. Wicked as he is. 
 
 $ue ^ Que Dieu est > How great is the 
 
 grand I \ Almighty ! 
 
 , . , Que je hais les \ Hoic much I hate 
 
 [y comDien • } medians ! < the wicked .' 
 
 Another frequent use of this conjunction is to save 
 the repetition of comme, parceqiie, puisque, quand, quoi- 
 que, si, &c. when to phrases beginning with these words, 
 others are added under the same regimen, by means of 
 the conjunction et ; as, 
 
 Si Von aimait son pays, et qu'on If we loved our country, and 
 
 en desirdt sinctrementla gloire, sincerely wished its glory, we 
 
 on se conduirait de maniere, should act so as, &c. 
 <fcc.t 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 We have every thing to fear from his wisdom, even more 
 
 encore 
 than from his power. What men style greatness, glory, 
 
 Ce que art. appeler 
 
 power, profound policy, is in the eyes of God only misery, 
 
 profond politique f. d 
 weakness, and vanity. May they understand, at last, that without 
 
 comprendre 
 internal peace there is no happiness. May she 
 
 avec soi-meme 2 art. 1 point de 
 
 be as happy as she deserves to be ! Never write before you 
 
 de It 
 have thoroughly examined the subject which you pro- 
 
 sows toutes scs faces 2 1 se 
 
 pose to treat. Lei him but hear the least noise, his terrified 
 
 proposer de traiter * bruit effraye 2 
 
 imagination presents to him nothing but monsters Do 
 
 f . 1 . * * lie que dt art. 
 
 not sift this question, till I can (be your guide.) 
 
 approfondir ne subj-1 vous mettresur la roic 
 
 Do not go out till your brother comes in. Why does he not 
 
 nercntrcr * 
 (take advantage) of his youth, (in order to) acquire the know- 
 profitcr pour am- 
 
 ledge he wants ? 
 
 naissance pi. dont avoir besoin ? 
 
SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 203 
 GOVERNMENT OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 The conjunctions which unite sentences to one ano- 
 ther are followed either by the infinitive, the indicative, 
 or the subjunctive. 
 
 Those that are followed by an infinitive, are, 
 
 1. Such as are distinguished from prepositions, only 
 by being followed by a verb ; as, 
 
 II faut se reposer apres avoir One ought to rest after having 
 travaillg, laboured. 
 
 2. Those which have the preposition de after them ; 
 as, 
 
 // travaille afin de vous sur- He works that he may surpass 
 passer,^ you. 
 
 + EXERCISE. 
 Full as he was of his prejudices, he would not acknowledge 
 Rempli ind-2 prejuge ind-3 contenir de 
 
 (any thing.) Full of self-love (as he is), expect nothing 
 
 ritn petri 13 2 de 
 
 good (from him.) How beautiful is that cultivated nature ! 
 
 en 16 5 2 4 3 
 
 Hoic, by the care of man, is it brilliantly and richly adorned^ 
 par f. pompevsement orrct 
 
 Had profound philosophers presided at the formation of 
 si * de « ind-6 d art 
 
 languages, and had they carefully examined the elements of 
 langue avec soin subj-4 — m. art. 
 
 speech, not only in their relations (to one another), but also 
 discours non entr'eux encore 
 
 in themselves, it is not (to be doubted), that languages 
 en m. douteux art. ?ie 
 
 wculd present principles more simple, and at the 
 
 offrir subj-2 de art. 
 same time, more luminous. 
 
 ~~1F EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF CON- 
 JUNCTIONS. 
 
 They were going to spend a few days in town 
 
 we * ind-2 * passer * quelques d art. 
 
 only that they might return with more pleasure to 
 
 que pour * * se relrouver inf-1 dans 
 
 their charming solitude. Many persons work only (in order to) 
 
 neque a Jin d» 
 acquire consideration and riches, but the honest 
 
 ae art pr. art. 2 de 
 
 26* 
 
294 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS, 
 
 Conjunctions that govern the indicative, 
 
 bien attendu que, autant que, puisque, peut-etre que, 
 
 a condition que, non plus que, lorsque, comme, 
 
 a la charge que, outre que, pendant que, comme si, 
 
 de meme que, parce que, tandis que, quand, 
 
 ainsi que, attendu que, durant que, pourquoi, 
 
 aussi bien que, vu que, tant que, comment, &c 
 
 They are followed by the indicative, because the prin- 
 cipal sentence, which they unite with that which is inci- 
 dental, expresses the affirmation in a direct, positive, and 
 independent manner. 
 
 The use of the six following conjunctions, 
 3i non que, de sorte que, tellement que, 
 
 «i ce n'est que, en sorte que, de maniere que, 
 
 varies according to the meaning expressed by the prin- 
 cipal sentence. 
 
 EXAMPLE OF THE INDICATIVE. EXAMPLE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Je ne lui ai repondu autre chose, Je ne veux autre chose, si non 
 
 si non que f avals exicute ses que vous travailliez avec plus 
 
 ordres. x d'ardeur. 
 
 I made him no other answer, I desire nothing else, but that 
 
 but that I bad executed his you would study with greater 
 
 orders. ardour. 
 
 The indicative is required in the first sentence, by 
 the verb fax repondu expressing a positive affirmation, 
 and the subjunctive in the second, because je veux ex- 
 presses a compound, or desire. f 
 
 numane man spends (so much) time in study, only 
 
 sensible 3 1 ne employ tr tant de d art. que 
 
 to be useful to his fellow-creatures. I reveal to you the 
 your semblables. d&voiler 
 
 plot which your enemies have concerted in secret 
 trame f. ourdir art. Unebres f. pi. 
 
 in order to warn you against their artifices. 
 premumr 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 When you have a more extensive knowledge of geometry 
 
 ind-7 2 1 art. f. 
 
 and algebra, I shall give you a few lessons in astro- 
 
 pr. art. algebre f. ■ quel que de 
 
 nomy, and optics. Form your mind, heart, and taste 
 pr. optique pron. pron. 
 
FKoaiiscuous EXEKCISES. 295 
 
 The conjunctions which govern the subjunctive are, 
 soit que, jusqu'a ce que, suppose que, afin que, 
 
 sans que, encore que, au cas que, de peur que, 
 
 pour que, a moins que, avant que, de crainte que 
 
 quoique, pourvu que, non pas que, &c. <fcc. 
 
 They require the subjunctive, as they always impJ\ 
 doubt, desire, ignorance. "jf. 
 
 while you are still young. Do not keep truth a prisoner, 
 
 encore retenir art. * captive 
 
 though you should (draw upon you) a cloud of enemies. 
 
 quand devoir cond-1 s'attirer nuee f. 
 
 I will give you this fine picture upon condition that you 
 
 tableau m. d 
 keep it as a testimony of my friendship. 
 
 conserver ind-7. temoignage m. 
 
 ~~X EXERCISE. ~ 
 
 You know too well the value of time, to make 
 
 connaitre prix m. art. pour que etre 2 
 
 it necessary to tell you to (make a good use of) it. Study only 
 il 1 de de bien employer 
 
 great models, lest those which are but middling 
 
 art. de peur que * mediocre ne 
 
 should spoil your taste, before it be entirely formed. I 
 
 gdter subj-1 
 (make not the least doubt) that your method will succeed, 
 
 ne douter nullemenl f. ne * subj-1 
 
 provided it be well known. Several phenomena of nature are 
 
 f. art. 
 
 easy (to be explained), supposing the principle of universal 
 
 (by the active) art. 2 
 
 gravitation to be true, 
 f. 1 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE NINE PARTS 
 OF SPEECH. 
 
 The Good Mother . 
 
 What a fine morning ! said the amiable Charlotte to her 
 matinie f. ind-3 
 iter George. Come ; let as go into the garden and enjoy 
 sing. t * inf-1 
 
 the magnificent sight of rich and abundant nature, 
 
 de 2 spectacle m. j une2 fertile 3 1 
 
 We will gather there the freshest and sweetest Rowers 
 
 cuciliir y fraU 2 art. adv. odornrd 3 f. pi. 1 
 
296 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 We will make a nosegay, which we will offer to mamma. You 
 bouquet m. maman sing, 
 
 know she loves flowers. This attention will give her plea- 
 savoir que art. faire lui 
 
 sure. Ah! brother, it will obtain us a smile, a caress, perhaps 
 
 mon f. valoir sourire m. f. 
 
 even a kiss. Ah ! sister, replied George, your pro- 
 
 baiser m. ma ripondre ind-3 sing, pro- 
 
 posal delights me ; let us run, let us fly, that we may offer 
 jet enchanter courir voter ajin de* * 
 
 her (when she rises) this tribute of our gratitude and our love. 
 lui d son lever hommage — pr. 
 
 Full of this idea, Charlotte and George hastened 
 plein se hater ind-3 de se rendre 
 
 into the garden. Charlotte gathered violets, jessamine, 
 
 ind-3 de art. pr. art. 
 
 and young rose-buds which (had but just begun) 
 
 pr. de 2 bouton m. 1 ne commencer queind-2 
 
 to open their purple cups, while George prepared 
 
 entr'ouvrir de pourpre 2 calicc 1 ind-2 
 
 green sprigs of myrtle and thyme, intended 
 
 de art. verd&yant 2 jet m. 1 myrte \>vAhym destine* 
 
 to support the flowers. Never had these amiable children 
 
 soutenir 1 ind-2 3 2 
 
 worked with (so much) zeal and ardour. Satisfaction and 
 travailler tantde zele pr. art. f. art. 
 
 pleasure beamed in all their features, sparkled in their 
 
 m. etre ind-2 peint trait m. pttilltr 
 
 eyes, and added still to their beauty. 
 
 While they (were employing themselves) (in this manner), 
 s'occuper ind-2 ainsi 
 
 their mother, who had seen them in the garden, came to join 
 
 ind-3 * joindre 
 them. (As soon as) they perceived her, they flew to her, and 
 des que ind-3 ind-3 die 
 
 said: Ah! mamma, how glad we are to see you! how 
 lui que aise 3 1 2 de 
 
 (impatient we were) for this pleasure ! In the 
 
 qu'il tardait d notre impatience d 1 avoir ce 
 
 pleasing expectation (of it) we (were preparing) this nosegay for 
 douz attente f. * ind-2 
 
 you. What satisfaction should we have had in presenting 
 
 f. ne pas d ofrir 
 
 it to you ! Look at these rose-buds, these violets, this jessamine, 
 
 voir * 
 this* myrtle, and this thyme. Well, we designed them for you. 
 
 Eh'.bien, destines ind-2 * 
 
PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 29? 
 
 These flowers, coming from us, would have been dear to you. 
 
 cker 
 When you wore them, you would have said : My children 
 
 En * porter inf-2 
 
 (were thinking) of me while I slept. I am always as 
 
 s'occ.uper ind-2 dormir in d-2 
 
 present to their minds as to their hearts. They love me, and it 
 
 sing. sing. ce 
 
 is by giving me every day new proofs of their affection, 
 
 tn art. pi. de preuvcL 
 
 that they acknowledge the care I have taken of them 
 
 reconnaitre soin m. pi. que 
 
 in their childhood, and all the marks of tenderness I am un- 
 
 que ne 
 
 ceasingly giving them. 
 
 cesser de inf-1 leur. 
 
 My dear children, replied the mother, embracing 
 
 rtpondre ind-3 en embrasser 
 
 them, how charming you render all my days ! your grati- 
 
 quel eharme repandre sur * 
 
 tude, your tenderness, your attention to me, make me forget 
 
 pi. pour oublier 
 
 my former misfortunes, and yield my heart again to the soft 
 
 ancien malheur m. rouvrir * 
 
 impressions of pleasure. May Heaven continue 
 
 f. art. Pouvoir subj-1 art. continuer 
 
 to bless my labour! May it be your guide and your support 
 de soin Pouvoir — soutien 
 
 in the career which (will soon be opened) to you ! may it 
 
 carriere f. aller ind-1 s'ouvrir devant 
 
 complete its kindness by preserving you from the 
 
 meftre le comble d bienfait pi. en garantir inf-2 de 
 
 dangers to which you cannot fail to be soon exposed ! 
 
 * ve pas tarder in d-7 * 
 Alas ! I shudder (at them) beforehand, my dear children ; the 
 
 Jr.'mir en d'acance 
 
 moment is come when you must enter the world. Your 
 
 oil devoir dans 
 
 persons, your birth, and your fortune call you there, and 
 figure sing. naissance appeler y 
 
 ensure you a distinguished rank (in it), I cannot always be your 
 assurer 2 m. 1 y in d-7 
 
 guide. Young and inexperienced, you will find yourselves 
 
 sans txptrience aller ind-1 inf-1 
 
 surrounded by every kind of temptation. (F.very thing), 
 entouri. sorte f. seduction. Tout 
 
 even vice presents itself there under an agreeable 
 
 j usque d art. in. offrir y sous * deart. 2 
 
298 ^ PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 form, and almost always in the shape of pleasure, which has 
 pi. 1 sous image art. 
 
 (so many) attractions for youth. They will try to 
 
 tantde attraiti. art. jeunesse f. On chercher 
 
 mislead you, to corrupt you ; they (will make use of) artifice 
 igarer employer art. 
 
 raillery, and even ridicule, and, if necessary, they 
 
 art. = mime art. — it est 
 
 will assume even the mask of virtue. If you abandon 
 
 prendre jusque d masque m. art. se laisser 
 
 yourselves to first impressions, you are lost The poison of 
 alter art. 
 
 example will insinuate itself into your hearts, will corrupt the 
 
 se glisser altirer 
 
 innocence and purity (of them) and will substitute violent 
 
 C7i de art. dichirant 2 
 
 passions for the mild affections which have hitherto formed your 
 f. pi. 1 d doux faire 
 
 happiness. 
 
 Do not imagine, my dear children, that in placing before your 
 croire en mettre sous 
 
 eyes a picture of the dangers of the world, my intention 
 
 art. tableau m. 
 is to prohibit you every kind of pleasure. God forbid. 
 
 subj-1 de interdire esptee f. d ne plaire 
 
 Pleasure is necessary to man ; without it, our ex- 
 subj-1 art. art. lui 
 
 istence would be dreadful ; (and therefore) Providence, ever 
 
 affreux aussi art. f. 
 
 attentive to our wants, has multiplied the sources of it, both 
 
 besoin -t-elle 
 in and out of ourselves. But, in tasting the pleasures of 
 
 en nous nous en gouter 
 
 the world, never (abandon yourselves) (to them.) Take care 
 
 se livrer y Avoir 
 
 that they do not govern you ; know how to quit them the mo- 
 
 dominer savoir * * de 
 
 ment they have acquired (too much) sway over you. It is 
 
 que prendre ind-7 trop de empire Ce 
 
 the only way to enjoy with delight that exquisite pleasure 
 
 moyen de vdupti de dil'icitux 2 1 
 
 which we can only find in ourselves, and which has its source 
 
 en 
 in an upright and pure conscience. Ah ! why cannot I give 
 dans droit 2 3 f . I que 
 
 you all my experience ? Why cannot you, like me, read the 
 
 dans 
 
PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 299 
 
 depths of the heart 1 With what astonishment would you often 
 
 abime sing. pi. 
 
 see chagrin, agitation, and trouble, disguised under the 
 
 ar t. — na. art. art. — m. diguisi sous 
 
 appearance of joy and tranquillity ; hatred and 
 
 apparence pi. art. pr. art. calme art. f. art. 
 
 envy concealed under the air of confidence and friend- 
 
 f. cachi art. conjiance f. pr. art. 
 
 ship : indifference and selfishness, affecting the most lively 
 
 art. tgo'isme vif 
 
 interest ; the most dreadful and perfidious plots 
 
 2 art. adv. 3 trame f. pi. 1 
 
 contrived deliberately in the dark ; in a word, the most 
 
 ourdi de sang f rend et ttnebresi.\A. en 
 
 odious vices endeavouring to show themselves under the 
 
 2 art. 1 s'efforcer de 
 
 features of (their opposite) virtues ! In the world there 
 
 traits qui leur etre opposi 2 art. 1 
 
 is but one (moving principle ;) that is self-interest. To 
 ne que scul mobile m. ce art. personnel 2 1 C'esi d 
 
 that every action refers, every thing tends to that as 
 lui que art. pi. se rapporter lui 
 
 to its end. I know very well, my dear children, that your 
 
 Jin f. savoir 
 
 hearts will not be infected by this vice. The sentiments of 
 
 de 
 universal benevolence with which I (have always) 
 
 2 lienveillance 1 * ne point cesser ind-4 de 
 
 inspired you, and of which I have seen you give (so many) 
 inf-1 tant de 
 
 proofs, (remove already every fear) (I might have) upon that 
 ptucrc r assurer d'avance me sur 
 
 subject. : but will you not yield to other vices not less danger- 
 point m. de non 
 
 ous ? Cruel idea! terrible uncertainty! If this misfortune 
 
 f. affrtux f. 
 
 were to happen, ah ! my dear children, instead of being 
 
 * * arriver ind-2 
 the joy and consolation of my life, you would be the torment, 
 
 art. f. 
 
 the shame and the disgrace (of it.) You would poison my 
 
 honte f. opprohre en ewpoisonner 
 
 days, and you would plunge a dagger into the very bosom 
 
 porter art. mort f. mcme2 sein m. 1 
 
 which gave you life. But whither is my tenderness for you 
 
 ind-3 art. oil * 
 
 harrying me 7 N#, my children, no, I have nothing to fear; 
 tmporter Non 
 
( 300 ) 
 
 PART III. 
 
 IDIOMS, 
 
 WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR PARTICULAR 
 RULES. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 The substantive performs three functions in language, 
 that of the subject, the regimen, or the apostrophe. 
 
 The substantive is the subject, whenever it is that of 
 which something is affirmed. When we say, Voiseau 
 vole, the bird flies ; le lion ne vole pas, the lion does not 
 fly ; the substantives oiseau and lion are subjects ; be- 
 cause it is affirmed of the first that it flies, and of the se- 
 cond that it does not fly. 
 
 It is to the substantive as the subject that every thing 
 relates in a sentence. In the following, un homme juste 
 
 vou love me (too much) to wish to afflict me so cruelly; and 
 
 trap pour vauloir * 
 I shall have the pleasure, (as long as) I live, of seeing you walk 
 
 tant que ind-7 
 
 in the ways of honour and virtue. 
 
 sender art. pr. art. 
 
 exercise^Tthe substantive. 
 
 1. A king, who is inaccessible to men, is inaccessible to truth 
 also, and passes his life in a ferocious 2 inhuman 3 grandeur 1 : 
 as he is continually afraid of being deceived, he always 2 una- 
 voidably 3 is I and deserves to be so ; besides, he is at the mercy 
 of slanderers and tale-bearers, a base 2 malicious 3 tribe 1, who 
 feed on venom, and invent mischief rather than Cease to injure. 
 
 2. The good which a man does, is never lost; if men forget it, 
 God remembers and rewards it. 
 
 (1.) Is inuccessible also, I'est aussi ; ferocious, sauvage ; inhuman, ct farouche ; 
 as he is afraid, craignant ; is, Test ; to be so, de 1'etre j besides, de plus j talc 
 bearers, rapporteur j tribe, nation ; feed upon, se »ourrir de ; mischief, mal ; to 
 injure, de noire. 
 
 (2.) Good, bien j a man, on ; remember, s'eii souvenir. 
 
PAKTICULAR RULES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 301 
 
 elferme n'est ebranl€, ni par les clameurs d'une popu- 
 lace in juste, ni par les menaces d'un jier tyran ; qm 
 me?ne le monde brise s^ecr outer ait, il en serait fra_ 
 mais nonpas emu, the adjectives juste arAferme modify 
 the subject homme, end all the rest modify un Jiomme 
 juste et ferine. 
 
 The substantive is the regimen, when governed, c 
 by another substantive, by an adjective, by a verb, or 
 by a preposition, asj 
 
 laloideDieUf the law of God. aimer son pro to love o 
 
 chain, neighbour. 
 
 utile a Vlwmme, useful to man. chez son pere. at his fetl 
 
 In French, a substantive cannot be governed by an- 
 other substantive, but by the help of a preposition ; such 
 as de, as, la dijficulte de Ventreprise, the difficulty of the 
 undertaking ; or a, or pour, as, V abandon a ses passions, 
 the giving way to one's passions; legout pour le plaisir, 
 the love of pleasure. 
 
 General Rule. When two substantives are found 
 together, the one governing, the other governed, the for- 
 mer is generally placed first. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 La beaute des sentiment, la vio- The beauty of sentiments, the 
 lence des passions, la grandeur violence of passions, the gran- 
 ges 6v6nemens et les succes mi- deur of events, and the procli- 
 raculeux des grandes eptes des gious successes of the huge 
 kiros, tout cela m'entraine com- swords of heroes, all these 
 •mc unc petite Jillc. — Sevignc. transport me like a little girl. 
 
 Remark. This order is not followed — 1. When, in 
 English, two substantives are joined by an s and an 
 apostrophe, placed after the first, thus, 's, as, the king's 
 palace. 2. When the two English substantives form a 
 compound word, as, silk -stockings.^ 
 
 II EXERCISE. 
 1. The silence of the night, the calmness of the sea, tho trem- 
 bling 2 light 1 of the moon diffused over the surface of the 
 
 (1.) Trembling, iremblant ; di/fused, repandu ; dim, sombre 5 b«t^mgl»d, 
 pars<ni6 ; toith, dt } heighten, rehausser ; s.-tnc, spectac/e. 
 
 27 
 
302 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 The substantive is an apostrophe, whenever it is the 
 object addressed ; as, rois, peuples, terre, mer, et vous, 
 cieux, ecoiUez-?noi ! In this sentence, the substantives 
 rois, peuples, terre, mer, and deux, form an ipostropbc. 
 
 N. B. It is only in highly oratorical language that 
 the address is thus directed to inanimate, or absent 
 objects, f 
 
 water, and the dim azure of the sky bespangled with glittering 2 
 stars 1, served to heighten the beauty of the scene. 
 
 2. Nothing was heard but the warbling of birds, or the soft breath 
 of the zephyrs sporting in Hie branches of the trees, or the murmurs 
 of a lucid rill falling from the rocks, or the songs of the young 
 swains who attended Apollo. 
 
 3. A smiling boy was, at the same time, caressing a lap-dog, 
 which is his mother's favourite, because it pleases the child. 
 
 4. There are several gold and silver mines in this beautiful 
 country ; but the inhabitants, simple, and happy in their sim- 
 plicity, do not even deign to * reckon gold and silver among their 
 riches. 
 
 (2.) Nothing but, on r>e plus que ; breath, lialeine ; sporting, que se jouer 
 ind-3 ; branches, rameaux ; lucid rill, eau claire ; falling, (which fell :) szuains, 
 berg'er 5 attended, suivre, incl-2. 
 
 (S.) Smiling boy, enfant d'un air riant ; was caressing, caresser, ind-2; lap- 
 dog, bichon ; pleases, amuser, (4.) Reckon, compter. 
 
 t EXAMPLE OF A BEAUTIFUL APOSTROPHE. 
 
 O Hippias ! Hippias ! I shall never see thee again * ! O my 
 dear Hippias ! it is I, cruel and * void of compassion, who taught 
 thee to despise death. Cruel Gods ! ye prolonged my life, only ' 
 that I might see the death of Hippias ! O my dear child, whom I 
 had brought up with so much care, I shall see thee no more, O 
 dear shade, summon me to the banks of the Styx, the light grows 
 hateful to me ; it is thou only, my dear Hippias. whom I wish to 
 see again. Hippias ! Hippias ! O my dear Hippias ! I live but 
 to pay the last duty to thy ashes. 
 
 Never, ne plus 5 void of compassion, moi improvable \ taught, apprentire, 
 ind-1 ; prolonged, prolonger, ind- 1 ; only that I might, pour me fa ire ; brought 
 up, nourrir, ind-4 5 mit h so much care, et qui me couter, ind-4, tant de soins 5 
 shade, ombre ; summon, appeler ; to, surj banks, rive ; groivs hateful, 6tre 
 odieux *, / live but to, ne vivre encore que pour j pay, rendre j ashes, cendre. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 303 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 General Principle. The article is to oe used be- 
 fore all substantives common, taken in a determinate 
 sense, unless there be another word performing the same 
 office ; but it is not to be used before those that are taken 
 in an indeterminate sense. 
 
 CASES IX WHICH THE ARTICLE IS TO BE USED. 
 
 Rule I. The article necessarily accompanies all 
 substantives common, which denote a whole species of 
 tilings, or determinate things. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'homme sc repait trop souzent Man too often feeds on chi- 
 de chimeresy meras. 
 
 Les hommes a imagination aunt Men of fanciful dispositions are 
 
 toujuurs malhcureuZy always unhappy. 
 
 L'homme dont vous parlez est The man you speak of is very 
 
 ires-instruit, learned. 
 
 In the first example, the word homme is taken in its 
 fullest sense ; it denotes a collective universality. In 
 the second, les liommes a imagination, denotes a particu- 
 lar class only. In the third, Vlwmme denotes but one 
 individual, being restricted by the incidental proposition, 
 don t vous parlez. 
 
 Remark. In English, the article is not used before 
 substantives taken in a general sense, as, Men of genius, 
 women of sound understanding.* 
 
 X EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The moment elegance, the most visible image of fine taste, ap 
 pears, it is universally admired : men differ respecting the other 
 constituent parts of * beauty, but they all unite without hesitation 
 in acknowledging the power of elegance. 
 
 2. Mtn of siqjerior genius 2, while 1 they * see 3 the rest of 
 
 (1.) The moment, tlu moment que ;fme, delicat r appears, se montrer 5 is, die 
 <*t ; respecting, surj constituent, (which constitute) ; hesitation, hesiter : in, 
 pour. • ' ' 
 
 H hile, tandis que ; struggling, se tourmenter ; obvious, qui s'oflrent d'elie- 
 memes ; glance, As p<*n£trent en un instant 5 lightning, foudre, f. ; through, 
 traverse ; track, espace ; that, qu'on ; be measured, aiesurer. 
 
304 PABTICULAR RULES OP THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Rule II. The article is put before substantives em- 
 ployed in the sense of an extract, or denoting only a 
 part of a species ; but it is omitted, if -they be preceded 
 by an adjective, or a word of quantity. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Du pain et de l'eau me feraient Some bread and water would 
 
 plaisir, please me. 
 
 Je vis hieQ' des savans qui nepen- I yesterday saw some learned 
 
 sent pas comme vous, men, who do not think as you 
 
 do. 
 Voild de beaux tableaux, There are beautiful pictures. 
 
 J'achetai liter beaucoup de li- I bought yesterday many books. 
 
 vres, 
 Que de Yivresfachetaihier ! How many books I bought yes- 
 
 terday ! 
 
 Remark. Among the words of quantity must be 
 reckoned phis, moins, pas, point, and jamais. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 II n'y eut jamais plus de lumi- There never was more learning, 
 
 cres, 
 Hy a moins d'kabitans d Paris. There are fewer inhabitants fa 
 
 qu'd Londres, Paris than in London. 
 
 4$ ne manque pas d'amis, I do not want for friends. 
 
 Exceptions. Bien is the only word of quantity 
 which is followed by the article. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 II a bien de I 'esprit, He has a great deal of wit. 
 
 Elle a bien de la gr&ce, She is veiy graceful. 
 
 Remark. The sense of extract is marked in En* 
 lish by the word some, or any, either expressed or 
 understood, which answers to quelques, a particular 
 adjective, and consequently to du, de la, de V, des, 
 which are elegantly used instead of quelque, quelques, 
 
 mankind painfully * struggling to comprehend obvious 2 truths I t 
 glance themselves * through * the most remote 2 consequences ] g 
 like lightning through a track that cannot be measured. 
 
 3. The man who lives under an habitual 2 sense 1 of the divine 2 
 presence 1, preserves a perpetual cheerfulness of temper, and en- 
 joys, every moment, the satisfaction of thinking himself* in com- 
 pany with the dearest and best of friends. 
 
 (3.) Under, dans ; sense, conviction; preserves, conserve ; perpeiual, con- 
 stant/, cheerfulness, g-aietc ; temper, caractthc j enjoys, jouir de j of thinking, 
 se oroire 5 in, dans, 9ft. \ with, de. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR ARTICLE. 305 
 
 These expressions : des petits-maitres, des sages-fern- 
 mes, des petits-pdte's, &c. are not exceptions to this rule, 
 because, in cases of this kind, the substantives are so 
 united with the adjectives, as to form but one and the 
 same word. We should likewise say : le propre des 
 belles actions, les seniimens des anciens philosophes, &c. ; 
 because, in expressions of this kind, the substantives are 
 taken in a general sense. IT 
 
 f EXERCISE. 
 
 1. We could not cast our eyes on either shore, without seeing 
 opultni cities, t mises agreeably situated, lands yearly 2 
 covered 1 with a golden 2 harvest 1, meadows abounding in flocks 
 and herds, husbandmen bending under the weight of the fruits, and 
 shepherds who made 1 the echoes 5 around them 6 repeat 2 die 
 sweet sounds 3 of their pipes and flutes 4. 
 
 2. Provence and Languedoc produce oranges, lemons, jigs, olives, 
 almonds, chesiw.ts, peaches, apricots, and grapes of an uncommon 
 sweetness. 
 
 3. The man who has never seen this pure light, is as * blind as 
 one who is born blind : he dies without having seen any thing ; 
 at most, he perceives nothing but glimmering and false lights, vain 
 sluzdoics and phantoms that have no reality. 
 
 4. Among the Romans, those who were convicted of having 
 nsed illicit or unworthy means to obtain an employ, were excluded 
 from it for ever. 
 
 5. Those wno govern are like the celestial 2 bodies 1, which 
 have nrcit splendour and no rest. 
 
 G. What heady, sweetness, moelesiy, and at the same time ichat 
 nobleness and greatness of soul ! 
 
 7. Themistocles, in order to ruin Aristides, made use of many 
 artifices, which would have covered him with infamy in the eyes 
 of posterity, had 1 not 4 the eminent services 2 which lie render- 
 ed his country 3 blotted out 5 that slain. 
 
 (1.) Could, pouvoir, ind-2 ; our, art ; eithtr, les deux ; seeing, apercevoir ; 
 yearly, t'iu> les MM 5 covered with, qui se couvrir de, ind-2 ; abounding in, 
 ICmpilfl •!<-' *> flocks and herds, trotipeau ; bending, qui etaient accables ; zceight, 
 jioiis : shepherds, bergeis ; pipes, chalumeau 5 the echoes, aux echos ; around 
 them, d'ajentour. 
 
 ( :.) H ho is born blind, aveu£rle-ne ; vilhout having, rfavoir jamais, inf-3 ; any 
 thing, rien ; at most, tout au plus ; perceives nothing from, apercevoir ne que ', 
 glimmering, sombre ; HgfUs, lueur: no reality, rien de reel. 
 
 (4.) Used, employer; illicit or unworthy means, moyen illicite, on vx>ie in- 
 ditrne, pi. •, were, ind-2 ; from it, en. 
 
 'irrut, be«UCO«p de •, splendour, eclat ; no rest, (that have no rest) repos. 
 
 II hut. qui- lie. (7.) Ruin, |>evdre ", made vsc of many, employer 
 
 bl^n : art ifl.es, iiiau'euvre- j covered, cond-3 ; with, de ; infamy, OpprobrC ; 
 to, a 5 had, &« ; rendered, ind-3, a ; blotted onf,eflacer, cond-3 : slain, tachr. 
 
 27* 
 
308 PAETICULAR RULES OP THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Rule III. The article is put before proper names of 
 countries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La France a les Pyrenees et la France is bounded on the south 
 Miditerranee au sud, la Suis- by the Pyrenees and the Me- 
 st et la Savoie d Vest, les diterranean, on the east by 
 Pays-Bas au nord, et Vocean Switzerland and Sa^'oy, on 
 d Vonest, the north by the Nether- 
 
 lands, and on the west by the 
 ocean. 
 La Tamise, le Rhone, Vaquilon, The Thames, the Rhone, the 
 ■es Alpes, le Canial, north wind, the Alps, the 
 
 Cantal. 
 
 Rem. By apposition we find the words : le mont 
 Parnasse, le mont Valerien, &c. le jleuve Don, &c. 
 But, we should say, la montagne de Tarare, &c. la 
 riviere de Seine, &c. though never, le Jleuve du Rhone^ 
 but simply, le Rhone, f 
 
 8. The consequences of great passions are blindness of mind 
 and depravity of heart. 
 
 9. Noblemen should never forget that their high birth impose^ 
 gxtat duties on * them. 
 
 (9.) Of mind, of heart, de, art. 
 
 (9.) JYoblemen, gentilhomme ; should, devoir, ind-1. 
 
 t EXERCISE, 
 
 1. Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean ; oq 
 tlie south by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it from. 
 Africa; on the east by the continent of Asia; on the west by 
 the Atlantic Ocean. It contains the following 2 states 1 : on 
 the north, Norioay, Sweden. Denmark, and Russia; in the 
 middle, Poland, Prussia, Germany, the United Provinces, the. 
 Netherlands, France, Switzerland, Bohemia, Hungary, the 
 British Isles; on the south, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Turkey ia 
 Europe. 
 
 2. The principal rivers in Europe, are, the Wolga, the Dom or 
 Tana'is, and the Boristhenes, or Nieper, in Muscovy ; the Danube, 
 
 (1.) Bounded, born6 ; en, A; frozen ocean, mer glaciale, f . ; south, sud cr 
 midi*, Mediterranean sea, Mediterran£e, f. ; east, est or orient ; west, ouest 
 w Occident ; Norway, &.c. SEE P. 70. ; British hits, lies Britanniques ; Turkey 
 rn,Turquie de. 
 
 (2.) Muscovy, Moscovie ; Vistula, Vistule, t ; Loirt, f. ; Seine, f. ; Rhone, m. } 
 tiaronne, f. -, Ebro, Eure ; Ta^us, Tage, m. j Tkavies, TanaUe, f.j S^acru^Sa*- 
 vcrne, f. 
 
PABTICITIAR RULES OP THE ARTICLE. 307 
 
 Exceptions. The article is not used before the 
 names of countries : 
 
 1. When those countries have the names of their ca- 
 pitals, as, Naples est un pays delicieux, Naples is a de- 
 lightful country. 
 
 2. When these are governed by the preposition en^ 
 as, il est en France, he is in France ; il est en Espagne, 
 he is in Spain. 
 
 3. When those names are governed by some preced- 
 ing noun, and have the sense of an adjective, as, vins 
 de France, French wines ; nchlesse d* Angleterre, the 
 English nobility. 
 
 4. When speaking of those countries as of places we 
 come from, as, je mens de France, I come from France ; 
 f arrive d'ltalie, I am just arrived from Italy. How- 
 ever, when speaking of the four parts of the world, the 
 present practice favours the use of the article, as,je mens 
 de VAm€rique,f arrive de VAsie.% 
 
 the Rhine, and the Elbe, in Germany ; the Vistula, or Wezel in Po- 
 land ; the Loire, the Seine, the Rlione, and the Garonne, in France ; 
 the Ebro, the Tagus, and the Douro, in Spain ; the Po, in Italy ; 
 the Tluinics and the Severn, in England ; and the Shannon, in 
 Ireland. 
 
 3. The principal mountains in Europe are the Daarne Fields? 
 between Norway and Sweden ; Mount Crapel, between Poland 
 and Hungary ; the Pyrencan Mountains, between France and 
 Spain ; the Alps, which divide France and Germany from Italy. 
 
 4. The bleak north wind never blows here, and the heat of sun> 
 i i tempered by the cooling 2 zephyrs 1, which arrive to refresh 
 
 the air towards the middle of the day. 
 
 (3.) Pyrencan Mountains, Pyrenees. 
 
 (1.) Bleak, rigO UT C m ; north wind, aquilon j hextt, ardeur j cooling, t^» 
 Cralchissant 5 arrive, venirj to refresh? adoucir. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Naples may be called a paradise, from its beauty and fertility. 
 From this country 2 some suppose 1 Virgil took the model of tha 
 Elysian 2 Fields 1. 
 
 2. I have been a * prisoner in Egypt, as a * Phoenician 
 
 (1.) From, a cause de •, from this cowntry, que e'est la, od j *>rne tuppo*" 
 quelque* psrsonnes penser. 
 
 t~\) I'ruotur, capUf ) under that namty e'est souo oe ncra que (IjoUi alike' 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OP THB ARTICLE. 
 
 The article is also used before the names of countries, 
 either distant, or little known, la Chine, China ; le Ja- 
 pon, Japan ; le Mexiqae, Mexico ; and before those 
 which have been formed from common nouns : le Havre, 
 le Perche, la Fleche, &c. 
 
 Remark. In English the article is generally omitted 
 before the names of countries. 
 
 CASES IN WHICH THE ARTICLE IS NOT USED. 
 
 Rule I. The article is omitted before nouns common, 
 when in using them nothing is said as to the extent of 
 their signification. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Le sagen'a ni amour ni haine, The wise man has neither love 
 
 nor hatred. 
 
 Us out renverse religion, mo- They have overturned religion, 
 rale, gouvernement, scien- morality, government, scien- 
 ces, beaux-arts, en un mot, ces, fine arts, in a word, every 
 tout ce qui fait la gloire et la thing which constitutes the 
 force oVun Elat, glory and strength of a state. 
 
 Hence the article is not employed before nouns, 
 
 1. When they are in the form of a title, or an address* 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Preface, Preface. Ildemeure He lives In 
 
 Livre premier, Book the 1st. Rue Piccadilly, Piccadilly. 
 
 Ciiapitrt dix, Chap, the 10th. Quartier St. James, St. James'& 
 
 2. When they are governed by the preposition en, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Regarder enpitii, to look with pity. Vivre en Roi, to live as a kin^ 
 
 under that name I have long suffered, and under that name I have 
 been set at liberty. 
 
 3. He has received French and Spanish wines, Italian silk% 
 Provence oil, and English wool. 
 
 4. We set sail/rom Holland for the Cape of Good Hope. 
 
 5. I was but just arrived from Russia, when I had the misfor 
 tune to lose my father. 
 
 C. I had set off from America, when my brother arrived thertk "* 
 
 (A.) Set sail, partir $ for, pourse rendxe. 
 
 (5^ fwoj but just, ne faire que de. (8.) Set aff % path- j there, % 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 309 
 
 3. When they are joined to the verbs avoir, or J aire, 
 with which they form only one idea. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Avoir peur, To be afraid. Fairepitii, To excite pity. 
 
 4. When they are used as an apostrophe, or inter- 
 jection. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Courage, soldats, tenezferme, Courage, soldiers, stand firm. 
 
 5. When they serve to qualify a noun, or pronoun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 fois plus qu'kom- He is sometimes more than 
 me, man. 
 
 Son Altesse Royale le Due His Royal highness the Duke of 
 d' York, Prince du sang, &c. York, Prince of the blood. 
 
 6. The article is not put before the substantive be- 
 ginning an incidental sentence, which is opposed to 
 what has been said. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Toils les peuples dtla. terre ont All the nations of the earth 
 
 tine idee plus ou moins dive- have an idea more or less 
 
 loppee d'un Etre-Suprime / clear of a Supreme Being j 
 
 preuve evidente que le ptclii an evident proof that original 
 
 originel n'a pas tout-d-fait ob* sin has not totally obscured 
 
 scurci Ventendemcnt, the understanding. 
 
 7. When they are governed by the words genre> 
 Cspcce, sorte, or terms of this kind. 
 
 H EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The highways are bordered with laurels, pomegranates, jes* 
 gamints, and c I Iiich * are * always green, and always in 
 bloom. The mountains are covered with flocks, which yield a 
 fine wool, in great request among all the known 2 nations 1 (of 
 the world.*) 
 
 2. The fleets of Solomon, under the conduct of the Phoeni- 
 cians, made frequent voyages to the land of Ophir and Tharsis, (of 
 the kingdom of Sophala, in Ethiopia) whence they returned at the 
 end of three years, laden with gold, silver, ivory, previous 2 stones 
 1, and other kinds of mercliandise. 
 
 3. Costly furniture 2 is not allow T ed there 1, nor magnificent attirt\ 
 nor sumptuous feasts, nor gilded palaces. 
 
 (1.) Jlighwayt, cbemin ; with, de ; pomegranates, grenadier j in hlocm, fleurl 
 ;/, lainc pL ) in great revest, recherche J amon B , de. 
 \A ; end, bout ; la den, charge. 
 , /* not allowed there, on n'y souflre ni } jumitvre, meuble ; costly, pr4» 
 cieux j attire, oroement ;ft.aits, reyas. 
 
310 
 
 PABTICULAE RULES OF THE AETICLE. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Sorte de fruity 
 Genre d'ouvrage, 
 Mpnceau d y argent, 
 
 A sort of 
 
 fruit. 
 A kind of 
 
 work. 
 A heap of 
 
 money. 
 
 Bands de voleurs, 
 Pile de livres, 
 Meute de chiens, 
 
 A troop of 
 robbers. 
 
 A pile of 
 books. 
 
 A pack of 
 dogs. 
 
 Rule II. The article is not used, either before nouns 
 preceded by the pronominal adjectives mon, ton, son, 
 notre, votre, leur, ce, nul, aucun, chaque, tout (used for 
 chaque), certain, plusieurs, lei, or before those which are 
 preceded by a cardinal number without any relation 
 whatever. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Nos mceurs metlent le prix d nos Our manners fix the value of 
 
 richesses, 
 Toute nation a ses lois, 
 Cent ignorans, doivent-Us Vem~ 
 
 porter sur un homme instruit ? 
 
 % 
 
 our riches. 
 Each nation has its laws. 
 Are a hundred blockheads to 
 
 be preferred to one learned 
 
 man I 
 
 4. We contemplated with pleasure the extensive fields covered 
 tsdth yellew ears of corn, the * rich gifts of bounteous Ceres 
 
 5. He was in a kind of ecslacy, when he perceived us. 
 
 6. In the most corrupt age, he lived and died a icise man* 
 
 *7. Are you surprised that the worthiest 2 men 1 are but men, 
 and betray remains of the weakness of humanity, amid the innu. 
 merable 2 snares 1 and difficulties which * axe * inseparable fronj 
 royalty 1 
 
 8. He excited cur pity, when we saw him after Ms disgrace. 
 
 9. Hear then, O nations full of valour ! and you, chiefs, BD 
 wise and so united ! hear what I have * to * offer to you. 
 
 10. Out of this cavern issued, from time to time, a black 2 
 thick 3 smoke 1, which made a sort of night at mid-day. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 I. That good father was happy in his children, and his children 
 were happy in tiim. 
 
 (4.) Extensive, vaste 5 fields, campagne ; ears, epi ; 6 ounteau s, fecoud. 
 ''>.) J a a kind of, comme en. (6.) Age, siecle. 
 
 % 
 
 7.) That , de ce que ; worthy, estimable; but, encore; bet ray, montrer ) r» 
 mains, reste ; snares, piege ; difficulties, embarras. 
 
 (8.) He exoited our pity, il nous fit pitie. ■ ■ (9.) Hear, ecouter. 
 
 (10.) Out of, de ; issued, sortir ; thiol; et epais ; smoke, fumee ; mid-da$, 
 milieu du jour. 
 
PABTIOTLAB RULES OP THE ARTICLE. 311 
 
 Rule III. Proper names of deities, men, animals, 
 towns, and particular places, do not take the article, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Dieu a credit chletla terre, God ha3 made heaven and 
 
 earth. 
 
 Jupiter etait le premier dcs Jupiter was the first of the 
 
 d'mtx, gods. 
 
 Bucephale 6tait le c.^i r d d'A- Bucephalus was Alexander's 
 
 lexn horse. 
 
 Rome est une ville d'une grande Rome is a city of great beauty. 
 beautc, 
 
 Exceptions Proper names, however, take the ar- 
 ticle, when used in a limited sense. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Le Dieu des Chrc- The God of Le Bucephale, Alexander's 
 
 tiens, Christians, d 1 Alexandre, Bucephalus. 
 
 Le Dieudepaix, The God of VAnciennc, Ancient Rome. 
 
 peace. Rome, 
 
 Le Jupiter d y Ho- Horner's Ju- La Rome Mo- Modern Rome. 
 mere, piter. derne, 
 
 N. B. In imitation of the Italians, the French use 
 the article before the names of several painters and 
 poets of that nation, by an elliptical mode of expres- 
 sion, the words peintre, poete, or seigneur, being under- 
 stood, i" 
 
 2. Those imitative 2 sounds 1 are common to all languages, and 
 form, as it were, their * real basis. 
 
 3. I n has his foibiss, his moments of ill * humour, even 
 his irregularities. 
 
 4. I ' has virtues peculiar to it, the knowledge 2 of 
 which 1 could not but be infinitely useful. 
 
 In all his instructions, he is careful to remember that gram- 
 mar, lo^ic, and rhetoric, are three sisters, that ought never to be 
 disjoined. 
 
 (2.) Common, fonclu ; to, dans *, and form as it were, et ils en sont comme , 
 rtal, fondamentale. 
 
 (4.) P§euliar t qui sont propres j to it, lui ; could, cond-1 •, not but, ne que. 
 
 (5.) He is careful to remember, ne point perdre de vue } ought, on devoir, 
 lnd-l •, to be disjoined, separer. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 1. Jupiter, son of Saturn and Cybele or Ops, after having e» 
 
 (1.) Expelled, chasser ; divided, en partnger j inheritance, heritage. 
 
312 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 I. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Rule I. Adjectives used substantively, are like sub- 
 stantives common, accompanied by the article, if the 
 occasion require it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Les fous inventent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and wise 
 les sages s'y conforment,^ men conform to them. 
 
 pelled his father from the throne, divided the paternal* inheritance 
 with his two brothers, Neptune and Pluto. 
 
 2. On a dispute at a feast of the gods, between Juno, Pallas, 
 and Venus, for the pre-eminence of beauty, Jupiter, not being able 
 to bring them to an agreement, referred the decision to Paris, a 
 shepherd of Mount Ida, with directions that a golden apple should 
 be given to the fairest. Paris assigned to Venus 2 the golden * 
 prize 1. 
 
 3. God said : let there * be 2 light 1, and there * was 2 light 1. 
 
 4. The Apollo di Belvidere, and the Venus di Mtdicis, are valu* 
 able 2 remains 1 of antiquity. 
 
 5. May and September are the two finest months of the year in 
 the south of France. 
 
 6. Tfte God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob f was the only true 
 God. 
 
 (2.) On, dans ; at a feast, qu'il y eut a un festin ; being ahle, pouvoir ; to bring 
 to an agreement, accorder ; referred, renvo3*er j directions, ordre j that a gold- 
 en, &c. to give a golden apple to ; assigned, adjuger. 
 
 (4.) Vi Belvidere, Belv^der ; di, de j valuable, precieux. 
 
 (6.) Only, seul. 
 
 If EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Were the learned of antiquity to come to life again, they 
 would be much astonished at the extent of our knowledge. 
 
 2. The ignorant have, in a* large stock of presumption, what 
 they want in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are axl- 
 inired by /oo/s. 
 
 (1.) Were the, si les ; to come again, revenir, ind-2 ; life, monde $ at, d» ) 
 knowledge, connaissance, pi. 
 
 (2.) Large stock, forte dose ; they want, il leur manquer •, knowledge, science ) 
 the teuton, ce qui fait que ; they arc % &c. the fools admire them. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OP THE ADJECTIVE. 313 
 
 Rule II. When a noun is accompanied by two ad- 
 jectives, expressing opposite qualities, the article must 
 be repeated before each adjective. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les vieux et les nouveaux sol- The eld and the newly raised 
 dats sont remplis d J ardeur, soldiers are full of ardour. 
 
 11 faut frequenter la bonne com- We ought to frequent good and 
 pagnic etfuir la mauvaise, shun bad company. 
 
 Re:vi. But if those qualities be nearly similar, the ar- 
 ticle is not repeated, as, Le sage et pieux Fenelon ; — if 
 merely different, it is perhaps better to repeat it, as, Le 
 sensible et Vingenieux Fenelon. 
 
 N. B. In French the substantive must be joined to 
 the first adjective, when governed by different words. | 
 
 Rule III. The article is used before the adjective 
 which is joined to a proper name, either to express its 
 quality, or to distinguish the person spoken of from those 
 who might bear the same name. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Le sublime Bossuet, Le vcrtueux F6n£lon, Le tendre Racine. 
 The sublime Bossuet. The virtuous Fenelon. The tender Racine. 
 Louis le Gros, Louis le Juste, Louis le Grand, 
 
 Louis the Fat. Louis the Just. Louis the Great. 
 
 Rem. If the adjective, which is joined to a proper 
 name, precede that name, it expresses a quality, which 
 may be common to many ; if it follow, it expresses a 
 distinguishing quality. Thus — Le savant Varron ; and 
 Varron le savant ; do not convey the same meaning : in 
 the first example, Varron merely obtains the quality of 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The ancient 1 and modern 3 writers 2 are not agreed upoi 
 that point. 
 
 'Z. The wise man preserves the same t/anquillity of mind in 
 good or bad fortune. 
 
 3. The man who is jealous of his reputation frequents good and 
 shuns bad company. 
 
 4. Grand and vigorous thoughts were always the offspring of 
 genius. 
 
 (1.) Writers, auteur ; are agreed, s'accorder. (2.) The wise mun, le Mge, 
 
 (4.; Vigoroue, fort J ojfepring, fruit. 
 
 28 
 
311 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 savant ; in the second, Varron is distinguished for his 
 learning from all of the same name .J 
 
 Rule IV. When a superlative relative precedes a 
 substantive, the article serves for both ; if it follow, the 
 article must be repeated before each. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Les plus habiles gens font quelquefois les plus grande3 /awtes, or 
 Les gens les plus habiles font quelquefois \esfautes les plus grandea, 
 The ablest men sometimes commit the grossest blunders. IT 
 
 II. 
 
 THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule I. Pronominal and numerical adjectives pre- 
 cede their substantive, as do generally the following six- 
 teen, beau, bon, brave, cher, chetif, grand, gros, jeune, 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The great Corneille astonishes by beauties of the first order, 
 and by faults of the worst taste. If the tender Racine does not of- 
 ten rise so high, at least, he is always equal, and possesses the art 
 of always interesting the heart. 
 
 2. The more we read the fables of the good and artless La Fon- 
 taine, the more we are convinced they are a book for all ages, and 
 the manual of the man of taste. 
 
 3. It was only under the reign of Louis the Just, (XIII.) that 
 good taste began to show ftself in France : but it was under that 
 of Louis the Great that it was carried to perfection. 
 
 (1.) By, par des ; order, ordre ; is always equal, se soutenir ; possess**, avoir. 
 (2.) The more we, plus on ; artless, simple ; are convinced, on se convaiucre j 
 they are, que c'est ; a, le ; for, de ; manual, manuel. 
 (3.) Only, ne que ; carried, porter &. 
 
 11 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. It has been said of the Telemachus of the virtuou3 Fenelon, 
 that it is the most useful 2 present 1 the muses have made to man- 
 kind ; for, could the happiness of man be produced by a poem, it 
 would be by that. 
 
 2. The smoothest 2 waters 1 often conceal the most dangerous 2 
 gulfs 1. 
 
 (1.) It has been said, on a dit, present, don que; have made, subj-S ; could\ 
 (if the, &c. could, ind-2 $) be produced by, naitre de ; would be, nattre, cond-1. 
 (2.) Smoothest, tranquUle. 
 
PABTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 315 
 
 tnauvais, mechant, meilleur, moindre, petit, saint, vieux, 
 and vrai, when taken in their literal sense. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Monpere, My father. Plusieurs qfficiers, Several officers. 
 
 Quel homme, Whatman. Grand homme, Great man. 
 
 Vieillefemme, Old woman. Six arbres, Six trees. 
 
 Dix guinees, 10 guineas. Chetitemine, Mean look. 
 
 Exception 1. The pronoun quelconque. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 D'une maniere quelconque, In whatever manner. 
 
 2. Adjectives of number, joined to proper names, 
 pronouns, and substantives, as quotations. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 George Trois, George IEEd. Chapitre dix, Chapter 10th. 
 Lui dixi&me, He the tenth. Page irente, Page the 30th. 
 
 3. The above sixteen adjectives, when comiected by 
 a conjunction with another adjective, which is to be 
 placed after the substantive. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. There have been ages, when a great man was a sort of prodi- 
 gy produced by a mistake of nature. 
 
 2. In almost all nations, the great geniuses that have adorned 
 them were contemporaries. 
 
 3. Young people, says Horace, are supple to the enticements of 
 vice, lavish, presumptuous, and equally impetuous and light in 
 their passions ; old people, on the contrary, are covetous, dilatory, 
 timid, ever alarmed about the future, always complaining, hard 
 to please, panegyrists of times past, censors of the present, and 
 £reat givers of advice. 
 
 1. Wliat man was ever satisfied with his condition, and dissatis- 
 fied with his abilities I 
 
 5. Thirty chambers, which have a communication one with an- 
 other, and each of them an iron door, with six huge bolts, are the 
 places where he shuts himself up. 
 
 (1.) Ages, des si^cles ; uficn, oil ; produced, enfanter. 
 
 (2.) In, chez ; nations, people ; adorned, illustrer, ind-4. 
 
 p.) People, g"ens*, supple, souple ; lavish, prodigue ; impetuous, vif ; old, 
 f. pi. (the following adjectives in. pi. :) covet-ous, avare ; dilatory, temporiseur J 
 about, sur •, complaining, plaintifj hard, difTicile ; please, oontenter ; time$ 9 
 ting. (J.) IJitsaiisJicrl, rneconiL-nt ; abilities, esprit. 
 
 (5.) Have a communication, communiquer ; each of them, dont chacun avoir | 
 huge, pros ; bol f s, verrou ; places, lieu, sing. ; shuts hinuelf, ^e unfcriner. 
 
316 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 C'est unefemme grande et Hen She is a tall well-made woman. 
 faite, 
 
 Rem. In English, two, or even several adjectives 
 may qualify a substantive, without a conjunction : but 
 in French, this is generally required, as, c'est un homme 
 aimable et poli, he is an amiable well-behaved man ; 
 except when custom allows the substantives to be placed 
 between two adjectives ; as, c'est un grand homme sec, 
 he is a tall thin man. 
 
 Rule II. Adjectives formed from the participle pre- 
 sent of verbs, are, generally, placed after the substan- 
 tive ; ouvrage divertissant, entertaining work ; and from 
 the participle past, always ; figure arrondie, round 
 figure ; those expressing — form, table ovale, oval table ; — 
 colour, maison blanche, white house ; — taste, herbe 
 amere, bitter herb ; — sound, orgue harmonieux, harmo* 
 nious organ ;— action, procureur actif, active attorney j 
 — effect, coutume abusive, custom founded in abuse ; — 
 arrangement, ordre grammatical, grammatical order ; — » 
 species, quality occulie, occult quality ; — nation, ge'rie'ro- 
 site Anglaise, English generosity ; — those ending in 
 -esque, -il, -ule, -ic, -ique, -in ; 
 
 Style burlesque, Buslesque style. Bien public, Public wel- 
 
 fare. 
 Jargon pueril, Childish jargon. Ris sardonique, Sardonic 
 
 grin. 
 Femme credule y Credulous wo- Vbix enfantine. Childish 
 man. voice. 
 
 but in this, custom is the best guide. f 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. An affected simplicity is a refined impostuie. 
 
 2. The smiling images of Theocritus, Virgil, and Gessner, ex- 
 cite in the soul a soft sensibility. 
 
 3. In that antique palace are to be seen neither icrcathed 
 columns, nor gilded wainscots, nor valuable basso-relievoes, nor 
 
 (1.) Refined, delicat. (-2.) Smiling, riant ; excite, porter ; soft, doux. 
 
 (3.) Are to be seen, on ne voit ; wreathed, torse ; wainscots, lam h ris ; bnsstf 
 relievoes, bas relief 5 tidings, plafond ; curiously, artisteraent J had txist&ncc\, 
 existed 
 
*AKTICTTLAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE, 31? 
 
 Pule III. Although it may seem that adjectives 
 expressing moral qualities are placed indifferently be- 
 fore, or after the substantive ; yet taste and a correct 
 ear will assign them their proper situation. 
 
 In conversation, or in a broken, loose style, it may be 
 indifferent to say femme aimable, or aimable femme ; 
 talens sublimes, or sublimes talens, &c. ; but in the dig- 
 nified style, the place of the adjective may, in a variety 
 of instances, affect the beauty of a sentence. i 
 
 III. 
 
 REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule. A noun may be governed by two adjectives, 
 provided these do not require different regimens, as ; 
 
 ceilings curiously painted, nor grotesque figures of animals, 
 which never had existence but in the imagination of a child or a 
 madman. 
 
 4. If human life is exposed to many troubles, it is also susceptible 
 of many pleasures. 
 
 5. A ridiculous man is seldom so by halves. 
 
 6. Spanish manners have, at first sight, something harsh and un 
 civilized. 
 
 7. French urbanity has become a proverb among foreign na- 
 tions. 
 
 (4.) Many, bien de ; troubles, peine. (5.) So, le ; by halves, a ctemi. 
 
 Espagnol; manners, moeurs ; at first sight, hu premier abord ; 
 uncivilized, sauvage. 
 
 (7.) Become, passer en ; among, chcz. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. An amiable woman gives to everything she says an inex- 
 pressible grace ; the more we hear, the more we wish to hear her. 
 
 2. The majestic eloquence of Bossuet is like a river, which car- 
 ries away every thing in its rapid course. 
 
 3. The sublime compositions of Rubens have made Ian English 
 traveller 3 say 2, that this fa mo us painter was born in Flanders, 
 th rough a mistake of nature. 
 
 If 
 
 (1.) Qivt to, repandre sur' we, on. 
 
 (2.) Kn-er, fleuvp 5 carrits away, entralner ', its rapid course, la rapidity de 
 •on cours. 
 (J., >ay, dire a ; famous, celebre 5 through, par ; initials* , m^prise. 
 
 28* 
 
318 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Cei homme est utile el cher a sa famille, that man is 
 useful and dear to his family. But it would be incor- 
 rect to say : Cet homme ect utile el cheri de sa famille, 
 that man is useful and beloved by his family : because 
 the adjective utile does not govern the preposition de.lF 
 
 IV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 
 
 Vnieme is used only after vingt, trente, quarante, 
 cinquante, soixante, quatre-vingt, cent, and mille. C'est 
 la vingt-et unieme fois, it is the twenty-first time ; see 
 page 99. 
 
 Cent, in the plural takes s, except when followed by 
 another noun of number, as, 
 
 lis etaient deux cents, They were two hundred. 
 
 Trois cents hommes, Three hundred men. 
 
 lis etaient deux cent dix. They were two hundred and ten. 
 
 Vingt, in quatre-vingt, and six-vingt, also takes «, 
 when followed by a substantive, as, 
 
 %ealrc-vingts hommes, Eighty men. 
 
 Cent-vingt abricots, Six score apricots*. 
 
 But it takes no s, when followed by another term ex- 
 pressing number, quatre-vingt-un arbres, quatre-vingt-dix 
 hommes. 
 
 The ordinal numbers, collective and distributive, 
 always take the sign of the plural : les 'premieres dou- 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 l\ A young man, whose actions are all regulated by honour, 
 and whose only aim is perfection in every thing, is beloved and 
 courted by every body. 
 
 2. Cardinal Richelieu was all his life-time feared and hated by 
 the great whom he had humbled. 
 
 3. A young lady, mild, polite, and delicate, who sees in the 
 advantages of birth, riches, wit, and beauty, nothing but incite- 
 ments to virtue, is very certain of being beloved and esteemed by 
 every body. 
 
 (1.) Actions arc regulated by honour, I'lumneur dirige les actions ; whose only 
 aim is, qui ne se propose que ; courted, recherche. 
 
 (2.) Young lady, demoiselle; delicate, decent; yxothivg but, ne que ; incite- 
 ments, encouragement ; certain, assure. 
 
PAKTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 319 
 
 zaines, the first dozens ; les quatre cinquiemes, the four 
 fifths. 
 
 For dates the French write mil, as mil sept cent-quo- 
 tre-vingt-dix-neuf, one thousand seven hundred and 
 ninety-nine, &c. see p. 100. 
 
 Re:u. Cent and mille are used indefinitely, as, 
 
 fl luifit cent caresses, He showed him a hundred marks 
 
 of kindness. 
 Faites-lui mille amities de ma Present him for me a Hwusand 
 part,i compliments. 
 
 The French say, le onze, du onze, au onze, sur les 
 onze heures, sur les une heure, pronouncing the words 
 onze and une, as if they were written with an h aspirated. 
 
 The cardinal numbers are used for the ordinal. 
 
 1. In reckoning time, that is, the hour of the day, 
 the day of- the month, the year of an era, as, il est 
 trols heures, it is three o'clock ; le vingt de Mars, the 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE OF NUMBERS. 
 
 1. It was the thirty-Jirst year after so glorious a peace, when 
 the war broke out again with a fury of which history offers few 
 examples. 
 
 2. There were only three hundred, and in spite of their infe- 
 riority in numbers*, they attacked the enemy, beat and dispersed 
 them. 
 
 3. He has sold his country house for* two thousand Jive hundred 
 and fifty pounds. 
 
 4. Choose out of your nursery eighty fruit trees, and ninety 
 dwarf-trees, divide them into dozens, and put in the two first 
 djzens of each sort, those whose fruits are most esteemed. 
 
 5. When Leuis the Fourteenth made his entry into Strasbourg, 
 the Swiss deputies having come to pay their respects to him, Le 
 Tellier, archbishop of Rheims, who saw among them the bishop 
 of Basle, said to one near him : That bishop is apparently some 
 miserable character. — How, replied the other, he has a hundrtd 
 thousand livres a year. — Oh ! oh ! said the archbishop, he is then 
 a respectable man ; and showed him a thousand civilities. 
 
 (1.) Year, amiee 5 when, que; broke out again^ se rallumer. 
 
 In/y, ne que-, in spite of, malgre. (o.) Pounds, livre sterling. 
 
 y\.)Out of, <june ; nursery, pepiniere } Jruit trees, pied d'arbre fruitier} 
 duarf -trees, arbre naki. 
 
 Svm«, foftbe Swiss pay, presenter j respect, hommage, p). ; one mar 
 him, son voLin j that bukov, Lc. e'est un miserable apparcment que cet 6vAqut 1 
 a year, de reute \ shtued, la ire *, civilities, cau 
 
320 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS 
 
 twentieth of March ; Van mil sept cent dix, &c. See 
 pages 99, 100. 
 
 3. In speaking of the order of sovereigns, as, Louis 
 seize, George trois ; except the first two of the series, 
 as, Henri premier, George second. Quint for cinq is 
 only said of the Empereur Charles -quint, and the Pope 
 Sixte-quint.i 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 1. 
 
 OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 I. 
 
 Office of Personal Pronouns. 
 The personal pronouns have the three characteristics 
 of the substantive, that is, subject, regimen, and apostro- 
 phe ; but with this difference, that some jdways form 
 the subject ; two only are used as an apostrophe: some 
 always form the regimen, and lastly, others are some- 
 times the subject and sometimes the regimen. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. They made in the parish and in the neighbouring places a 
 collection which produced a hundred and twenty-cne guineas. 
 
 2.. William, surnamed the Conqueror, king of England and duke 
 of Normandy, was one of the greatest generals of the eleventh cen- 
 tury; he was born at Falaise, and was the natural son of Robert 
 duke of Normandy, and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. 
 
 3. Make haste ; it will soon be ten o'clock. We shall have a 
 good deal of difficulty to arrive in time. 
 
 4. The winter was so severe in one thousand seven hundred and 
 nine, that there was but one olive tree that resisted it*, in a plain 
 where there had been more than ten thousand. 
 
 5. It was the twenty -first of January, one thousand seven hun- 
 dred and ninety-three, that the unhappy Louis tht sixteenth was led 
 to the scaffold. 
 
 (I.) Thev, on ; neighbouring places, voisioage, sing. ; collection, quete. 
 (2.) William, Guillauu.p ; farrier % Iburreur. 
 
 (3.) Make haste, s=e depecher ; will ba, ind-J ; a good deal of difficulty, bier 
 dc Ja peine ; in, A. (•*.) Severe, rude ; but, ne que 5 had been, iud-2. 
 
PAKTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 321 
 
 Je, tUy U, and Us, are always the subject ; these four 
 pronouns cannot be separated from the verb which they 
 govern, but by personal pronouns acting as a regimen, 
 or by the negative ne. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Je ne lui en veuz rien dire, I will say nothing to him about 
 
 it. 
 Tu en apprendras des nouvelles,. Thou wilt hear news of it. 
 II nous raconta son histoire, He told us his history. 
 
 lis sont survenus d Vimproviste, They are come unexpectedly. 
 
 The two acting as an apostrophe are toi n\d vous, 
 whether they stand alone, or are preceded by the inter- 
 jection 6 ; as, toi, 6 toi: vous, 6 vous.H 
 
 Me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are always used 
 as a regimen : — direct, when acted upon by the verb : 
 — indirect, when referable to the prepositions a or de y 
 (see p. 271, 272.) They always precede the verb, ex- 
 cept in the imperative when affirmative ; and can never 
 
 IF EXERCISE ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The better to bear the irksomeuess of captivity and solitude, 
 / sought for books ; for /was overwhelmed with melancholy, for 
 want of some knowledge to cherish and support my mind. 
 
 2. Since thou art more obdurate and unjust than thy father, 
 mayest thou suffer evils more lasting and more cruel than his ! 
 
 3. What ! say they, do not men die fast enough without destroy- 
 ing each other ? Life is so short, and yet it seems that it appears 
 too long to them. Are they sent into the world to tear each 
 Other in pieces, and to raa^e themselves wretched ? 
 
 4. O tftou, ray son, my dear son, ease my heart : restore me 
 what is dearer to me than my life. Restore to me my lost son, 
 and restore thyself to thyself. 
 
 5. O ye, who hear me with so much attention, believe not that 
 I despise men : no, no, I am sensible how glorious it is to toil to 
 make them virtuous and happy *, but this toil is full of anxieties 
 and dangers. 
 
 (].) To bear, supporter ; irksomeness, ennui ; overwhelmed with, accable de j 
 for want, faute ; to cherish, qui put nourrir ; support, soutenir. 
 
 (2.) Obdurate, dur ; mayat, pouvoir, subj-1 ; lasting, long 1 . 
 
 (3.) Die fast enough, 6tre assez niortel ; destroying each other, se donoer en- 
 core une mort precipitee ; sent into, sur ; world, terre j tear in pieces, sede- 
 chirer •, make themselves, se reudre. 
 
 (-1.) f'.nst, Kxdager ; restore, rendre ; lost (whom I have lost), perdre. 
 
 (5.) / am sensible, savoir ; glorious, grand ; to toil, travailler a ; toil*, travail \ 
 anaicty, inquietude. 
 
322 PAKTICtJLAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 be separated from it by any other word, except tout, rien, 
 and jamais, which may intervene before an infinitive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 CPesi leur tout refuser, It is refusing them every thing. 
 
 C'est ne me rien permettre, It is allowing me nothing. 
 
 11 a jure de ne lui jamais par- He has sworn he would never 
 donner, pardon him. 
 
 Me, te, se, form a regimen sometimes direct, and 
 sometimes indirect; — direct, when they represent moi^ 
 toi, soi ; — indirect, when they supply the place of a moi, 
 k toi, a soi. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vous me soupgonnez mal d pro- You suspect me unjustly 
 
 pos, 
 
 Te Ven remercie, I thank thee for it. 
 
 U se perd de gaidf6 de caur. He ruins himself out of wanton 
 
 ness. 
 
 Vous me donnez un sage conseil, You give me prudent advice. 
 
 Te te donne cela, I give thee that. 
 
 U se donne bien du mouvement, He is an active stirring man. 
 
 Leur is alwavs indirect, as it stands for a eux, or a 
 tiles. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Te leur representai le tort, qu'ils, I represented to them the inju> 
 ou qiCelles sefaisaient,\ ly they did themselves. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He has been speaking to them with such energy, as has as- 
 tonished them. 
 
 2. Women ought to be very circumspect ; for a mere appear 
 unce is sometimes more prejudicial to them than a real fault. 
 
 3. He comes up to me with a smiling countenance, and pres- 
 sing my hand, says : My friend, I expect you to-morrow at my 
 house. 
 
 4. He said to me: Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for 
 advantages, the enjoyment 2 of which 1 could not render thee 
 more happy ? Cast thy eyes round thee : see how every thing 
 
 (1.) Such energy as, une force qui. 
 
 (2.) Aleve, simple : more prejudicial, faire plus de tort. 
 
 (3.) Comes up— with, aborder— de \ pressing, serrer ; my hand, la main ; says, 
 fl me dit *, at my house, chez mci. 
 
 (4.) Incessantly, sans cesse ; advantages, des biens ; could, savoir, cond-1 } cast, 
 porter ; thy, art. j smiles, sourirc. 
 
PAKTICCLAli RULES GT THE TKOXOUNS. 323 
 
 Le, la, Us, are always direct ; as, 
 jc le vois,je la vols, I for I je vols luL je vois elle. 
 
 jt les vois, I — I je vois eux.je vols elles. 
 
 But y and en are always indirect ; as, 
 
 Je n'y intends rien, j for I jc nentends rlen a cela. 
 
 - roa/ez-wiii d'iceux ? 
 
 u« ^eit ime certaine som- 
 mc, or quantity d' argent. 
 
 vou- } | 
 lez-voas 1 ) \ 
 
 
 avez-vous regit de V argent ? 
 — oni.j'en ai recu. 
 
 Though seeming to perform the function of regimen 
 direct, in this last and other phrases of the same kind, 
 it is obvious that there is in the word en an ellipsis, 
 which may be readily supplied. See p. 106.J 
 
 smiles at thee, and seems to invite thee to prefer a retired and tran- 
 quil life to the tumultuous pleasures of a vain 2 world 1. 
 
 5. The ambitious man * agitates, torments, and destroys him. 
 self to obtain the places or the honours to which he aspires ; and 
 when he has obtained them, ha is still not satisfied. 
 
 (5.) D earner j to, pour. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. I have known him since his childhood, and I always loved 
 him on account of the goodness of his character. 
 
 2. This woman is always occupied in doing good works : you 
 sec her constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving the poor, re- 
 conciling enemies, and promoting the happiness of every one 
 around her. 
 
 3. The more you live with men, the more you will be convinced 
 that it is necessary to know them well before you * form a con- 
 nexion with them. 
 
 4. Enjoy the pleasures of the world, I consent to it ; but never 
 give yourself up to them. 
 
 5. 1 shall never consent to that foolish scheme ; do not mention 
 it any * more. 
 
 6. Have you received some copies of the new work ? Yes, I 
 have, (received some.) 
 
 (1.) Have known, eonnaitre, ind-1 j loved, lnd-4 ) on account, a cause ; the 
 goodness of his, (his good.) 
 
 (?•) In, a ; works, ceuvreg, f. pi, ; constantly, sans cesse ; consoling, kc. inf-1 •, 
 nlieving, agister j promoting, faire ; <v< -y ont around hi ; tout ce qui Penv*- 
 Konne. 
 
 ('J.) Live, in<]-7 ; be convinced, se convaincre : before, avaiit de 5 fonn a con- 
 nexion, vous Her. 
 
 (4.) Enjoy, jouir de ; give yourself vp, so livrer. 
 
 f b.) Scheme, entreprise •, mention, psrler de. \Ck) Copies, ©xemplah*. 
 
324 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The pronouns, which are sometimes the subject and 
 sometimes the regimen, are nous, vous, moi, toi, lui, elle, 
 eux, elles. 
 
 Nous and vous are the subject in, nous aimons, vous 
 aimez ; the regimen direct in, Us nous aiment, Us vous 
 aiment; and indirect in, Us nous parlcnt, Us vous par - 
 lent. 
 
 In general, moi, toi, are only the subject by apposi- 
 tion, or reduplication, whether they precede, or follow 
 the verb, as, 
 
 Moi, dont ildichire la reputation, I, whose reputation he is asper- 
 
 je ne lui ai jamais rendu que sing, always did him acts of 
 
 de boiis offices, kindness. 
 
 Toi, qui fais tant le brave, tu Wouldsl thou, who pretendest 
 
 oserais, &c. to be so brave, dare, &c. ! 
 
 Je pritends, moi, I do maintain, I. 
 
 Tu dis done, toi, Thou sayest then, thou. 
 
 Rem. Sometimes the personal pronouns je and tu are 
 not expressed, but understood, as, 
 
 Mo:, trahir le meilleur de men I, betray my best friend I 
 
 amis ! 
 Faire une Idcheti, toi ! Thou, be guilty of such base- 
 
 ness ! 
 
 that is, Je voudrais, &c. ! tu pourrais, &c. ! 
 
 They are likewise the subject, when they are placed 
 in a kind of apposition expressed by ce and il in imper- 
 sonal verbs, as, qui fut bien aise ? cefut moi ; ce ne pcut 
 Hre que toi ; que vous reste-t-il ? — moi. 
 
 After a conjunction, they are either the subject, or 
 regimen, according to the nature of the phrase, as, nous 
 y etions, mon pire et moi ; il ne craint ni toi ni moi. 
 
 In phrases which are not imperative, toi and moi can 
 only be the object by apposition before or after the 
 verb, as, voudriez-vous me perdre, moi, votre allie', <kc. 
 toi, je te soupconnerais de perfidie ! 
 
 After a preposition, they alone can be employed, as, 
 vous servirez-vous de moi ? selon moi, vous avez raison ; 
 il est f ache' contre toi. 
 
 What has just been remarked of toi and moi, is 
 applicable to lui, but with tb»« difference, that lui can 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROXOU^S. 925 
 
 only be the object after ne — que, signifying only, cr in 
 distributive phrases, as, 
 
 JTaimez que lui, je ne le trouve That you should like only him, 
 pas mauvais; mais ne me I do not disapprove, but do 
 haissezpas. not hate me. 
 
 So, p rote gez -nous, lui, a cause de, <fec. et inoi, parte 
 que, &c. we may likewise say by apposition, aimez-le, 
 lui qui, &c. 
 
 Eux is employed in the same manner as lui, but dif- 
 fers from it in this, that it cannot be the regimen indi- 
 rect, except after a preposition, as, parliez-vous tfeux ? 
 est-ce a eux que vous parlez ? 
 
 Rem. Lui and eux may be the subject in distributive 
 phrases without being in apposition, as, 
 
 Mes frdres et mon cousin 'in'ont My brothers and cousin assist- 
 secouru ; eux in'ont relev6, et ed me ; they took me up, and 
 lui m'apanst, he dressed my wounds. 
 
 The natural office of elle and elles is to form the sub- 
 ject ; however they are susceptible of all the other uses 
 just mentioned, except that they cannot be the regimen 
 indirect, unless preceded by a preposition, as, c'est a elles 
 que je parle.f 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. In the education of youth, we should propose to ourselves 
 to cultivate, to polish their understanding, and thus to enable 
 them 10 fill with dignity the different stations assigned them ; but, 
 above all. we ought to instruct them in that religious worship 
 which God requires of them. 
 
 2. What ! you would suffer yourself to be overwhelmed by ad- 
 versity ! 
 
 3. / / stoop to the man w T ho has imbrued his hands in the blood 
 of h'13 king ! 
 
 4. Thou! take that undertaking upon thyself? Canst * thoa 
 think of it. 
 
 (1.) Yout h, jcuties gens ; should, devoir, ind-1 5 to cultivate, (to tbem) ; to po- 
 lish, (to them,) orner 5 understanding, Tesprit ; enable, disposer ; stations, plaot 
 (tvhir h arc) assigned, (to) them ; worship, culte 5 requires, demander. 
 
 (2.) buffer yourself, se latoer, cornl-1 ; to be ove)-w helmed, abattre. 
 
 (•*.) *lonp to, s'abaisser devant, subj-1 ; imbrued, souiller ', in, de. 
 
 (t.) Take upon thyself, se charger, cond-1 ; of it, y. 
 
 29 
 
326 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 II. 
 
 ON THE PRONOUN SOt. 
 
 Soi is generally accompanied by a preposition, and 
 i<s used in phrases, where there is an indeterminate 
 proaou , ei ter expresses rstood : on doit rare- 
 
 ment parler de soi; il est essentiel de prendre garde a soi. 
 
 5. Your two brothers and mine take charge of the enterprise ; 
 they find the money, and he will manage the work. 
 
 6. His /who have engaged him to undertake this journey. 
 
 7. It is thou who hast brought this misfortune on thyself. 
 
 8. When you are at Rome, write to me as often a? you can, 
 and give me an account of every thing that can interest me 
 
 9. He told it to thee thyself. 
 
 10. Fortune, like a traveller, shifts from inn to inn : if she 
 lodges to-day with me, to-morrow, perhaps, she will lodge with 
 thee. 
 
 11. Whom dost thou think we were talking of? — it was of 
 thee. 
 
 12. Descartes deserves immortal praise, because it is he who 
 has made reason 2 triumph 3 over authority in philosophy. 
 
 13. He is dissatisfied with himself. 
 
 14. She is never satisfied zcilh herself 
 
 15. The indiscreet often betray themselves. 
 
 16. Saumaise, speaking of the English authors, said, that he had 
 learned more from them than from any other. 
 
 17. To love a person, is to render him, on every occasion, all 
 the services in our power, and to afford him, in society, every 
 comfort that depends upon us. 
 
 (5.) Take charge, se charger ; fnd, fournir j money, fonds, pi. $ manage, con- 
 luire,ind-l. 
 
 (6.) Undertake, faire } journey, voyage. 
 
 *7.) Hast brought on thyself, s'attirer, ind-4. 
 
 (8.) Are, ind-7 5 can, ind-7 ; give, faire; an account, le detail. 
 
 (9.S Told, dire, ind-4. 
 
 (10.) Shift* from inn to inn, changer d'auberge ; with, chez j she will lodge, 
 Jte £tre. 
 
 (ll.J Were talking, parier, subj-2. 
 
 (12.) Triumph over, triompher de. 
 
 (13.) 75 dissatisfied with, se d^plaire. 
 
 (14.) Satisfied with, content de. 
 
 (15.) Betray, se trahir. 
 
 (17.) In our power, dont on fitre capable 3 afford, procurer 6 ) comfort. agr6 
 ment } depends upon, dependre de. 
 
ARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 327 
 
 In this case, it is the regimen indirect ; but it may be 
 employed without a preposition. 
 
 1. With the verb itre, as, En cherchant a tromper 
 les autres, c'est souvent soi qxCon trompe, or on est sou- 
 vent trompe' soi-m&me, in attempting to deceive others, 
 we frequently deceive ourselves. In tin's situation it is 
 the subject. 
 
 2. After ne que, or by opposition, as, 
 
 N 1 aimer que soi, c'est rfetre Ion To love only ourselves, is being 
 
 a rien, good for very little. 
 
 Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveuglersoi- To think in this manner, is to 
 
 meme, blind onp's-self. 
 
 It is in these examples the regimen ; but when de 
 soi and en soi are used in a definitive sense in speaking 
 of things, they mean de sa nature, and dans sa nature.^ 
 
 III. 
 
 cases where the pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, lear, 
 
 MAY APPLY TO THINGS. 
 
 The personal pronouns die and elles, when the regi- 
 men, generally apply to persons only. Thus, in speak- 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUN soi. 
 1. To excuse in one's-self the follies which one cannot excuse in 
 others, \ c to pre * fool o,<<,'s-sf.Ifi.o seeing others so. 
 
 To be too much dissatisfied with ourselves, is a weakness^ 
 but to be too m id (with ourselves) is (a) folly. 
 
 3. We eught to despise no one : how often have we needed the 
 assistance of one more insignificant than ourselves ? 
 
 4. If we did not attend so much to ourselves, there would be 
 less egotism in the world. 
 
 5. Vice is odious In itself. 
 
 6. The loadstone attracts iron (to itself.) 
 
 (I.) Follies, sottiscs ; others, autrui ; prefer, aimer mieux )fool, sot ; to seeing, 
 que de voir ; i 
 
 (3.) We night, falloir, ind-1 ; how often, combien de fois ; we, on ; needed the 
 assistance, n'avoir pas besoir) ; insignxjicmil , petit. 
 
 (4.) W%, on •, attend to, s'occupcr de ; egotism, £golsme. 
 
 '6.) Loadstone aim 
 
328 TAUTICULAR RULES OF THE PEOXOUXS. 
 
 ing of a woman, we must say, Je m'approchai d'elle, je 
 m'assis pr£s (Telle ; but, in speaking of a table, Je nCen 
 approclmi, je m'assis aupres. 
 
 However, with the prepositions avec, apres, a, de, 
 pour, en, &c. they may be applied to things. Thus it 
 is correct to say of a river, 
 
 Cettc riviere est si rapide, quand That river is so rapid when it 
 
 elle deborde, qu'clle entraine overflows, that it carries 
 
 avec elle tout ce qiCellc ren- away every thing it meets 
 
 centre ; elle ne laisse apres with in its course ; it leaves 
 
 die que du sable et des cail- nothing behind but sand and 
 
 loux, pebbles. 
 
 — of an enemy V army, 
 
 Nous marchdmcs d die. We marched up to it. 
 
 — of things, reasons, truth, &c. as, 
 
 Ces cluoses sont bonnes Welles- These things are good in thera- 
 
 mtmes, selves. 
 
 J'aimc la verite au point queje I love truth to that degree, that 
 
 sacrijicerais tout pour elle^ I would sacrifice every thing 
 
 for it. 
 
 Ces raisons sont solides en elks- Those reasons are solid in them- 
 
 mimes, selves. 
 
 After the verb Hre, they are applied only to persons, 
 and likewise when they are followed by the relatives 
 qui and que, as, Cesta elle, e'est d'elles que je parte, 
 e'est elle.mhne qui vienU 
 
 The same may be said of the pronoun eux, which is 
 aiso generally applied to persons only, yet custom al- 
 lows us to say, 
 
 Ce olden et ces oiseaux font lout This dog and these birds are my 
 monplaisvr ; jen'aimequ'cuz; only pleasure, I love nothing 
 cux seuls sont men amusement ; but them ; they alone are my 
 je ne songe qu'd eux. diversion : I think of nothing 
 
 else. 
 
 Lui and leur are generally applied to persons, but are 
 sometimes used in speaking of animals, plants, and even 
 inanimate objects, as, 
 
 Ces chcvmix sont rendus, faitcs- Those horses are exhausted, 
 
 leur dormer un pen de r>n, give them a little wine. 
 
 Ces orangers vont pf.rlr, si c:i ne Those orange-trees will die un- 
 
 leur donne de Veau, less they have a little water. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 329 
 
 Ces murs sont mat faits, on ne Those walls are not skilfully 
 Uur a pas donn6 assez de built, they are not sufficiently 
 talus, sloped upward. 
 
 Upon these previous observations then may be found- 
 ed the following 
 
 Rule. The pronouns elle, dies, eux, lui, and leur, 
 ought never to be applied to things, except when cus- 
 tom does not allow them to be replaced by the pronouns 
 y and enj\ 
 ' t EXERCISE. 
 
 I. Virtus is the first of blessings ; it is from it alone we are to 
 
 ie iaLyrlntL had been built upon the lake Maeris, and they 
 had given it a prospect proportioned to its grandeur. 
 
 3. Mountains are frequented on account of the air one breathes 
 on them : how many people are indebted to them for the recovery 
 of their health ? 
 
 4. War brings in its train numberless evils. 
 
 5. It is a delicate 2 affair 1 which must not be too deeply inves- 
 tigated, it must be lightly passed over. 
 
 6. I have had my house repaired, and have given it quite * a 
 \- appearance. 
 
 7. Those trees are too much loaded ; strip than of part of their 
 fruit. 
 
 8. This book cost mc a great deal, but I am indebted to it for 
 my knowledge. 
 
 9. Self-love is captious ; we, however, take it for our * guide ; 
 to it are all our actions directed, and/ro??i it we take counsel. 
 
 10. These arguments, although very solid in themselves, yet 
 made no impression upon him, so powerful a chain is habit. 
 
 II. These reasons convinced me, and by them I formed my d&- 
 cision. 
 
 12. Heave you the care of that bird ; do not forget to give it 
 
 leu 5 art, devoir. 
 
 (~.j Had bctn built, on batir, ind-o ; prospect, vue. 
 
 (3.) On account, a cause ; brtath.es, respirer ; en them,y ; are indebted for, de- 
 voir •, recovery, retablisseiuent. 
 
 ( (.; Urines, entrainer ; in its train, avec elle ; numberless, bien de. 
 
 (5.) Affatr, matiere ; must, ind-1 ; be deeply investigated, approlbndir, inf-1 ; 
 be passed, glisser ; over, dessus. 
 
 '(re had, faire, ind-4 ; uppcaravce, air. 
 trip, dter : of part, une paitie. 
 
 (8.) A great deal, cber ; knowledge, instruction, 
 
 ( '.j >> '. (h is it that we :) to it, (h is to it tjat we direct all, be ;) direct, 
 rappo: fc, (and it IB from it tlwit. 
 
 (l<'.)..Vo, d« aucun ; so strong, fcc. (so much habit is a, tc.) habit, habitude 
 
 (1 1.) And from, (and it is from then that :; by, d'ajaes .; formed my deciiion, 
 »c decider. 
 
 29* 
 
330 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS, 
 
 IV. 
 
 DIFFICULTY RESPECTING THE PRONOUN U EXPLAINED 
 
 Le, la, les, arc sometimes pronouns, and sometimes 
 articles. The article is always followed by a noun, le 
 roi, la reine, les hommes ; whereas the pronoun is always 
 joined to a verb, je le connais, je la respecte, je les estime. 
 
 The pronoun le may supply the place of a substantive, 
 or an adjective, or even of a member of a sentence. 
 
 There is no difficulty, when it relates to a whole 
 member of a sentence ; it is then always put in the 
 masculine singular, as, 
 
 On doit s'accommoder d Vhu- We ought to accommodate our- 
 meur des autres autant qu'on selves to the temper of others 
 lepeuf,§ as much as we can. 
 
 Nor is there any difficulty when le supplies the place 
 of a substantive ; it then always takes the gender and 
 number of that substantive, as, Madame, etes-vous la 
 mire de cet enfant ? — Oui,je la suis. Madame, are you 
 the mother of that child ? — Yes, I am. Mesdames, 
 £tez-vous les parentes doni Monsieur m'a parU ? — Qui, 
 nous les sommes. 
 
 Rem. Though the word relating to the following 
 questions, is not expressed in English, yet it must 
 
 § EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The laws of nature and decency oblige us equally to defend 
 the honour and interest of our parents, when we can do it without 
 injustice. 
 
 2. We ought not to condemn, after their death, those that have 
 not been condemned during their life. 
 
 (1.) Decency , bienseance. 
 
 (2.) IVe ought, falloir } condemned, 1 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 331 
 
 always be so in French : this word is le, which takes 
 either gender, or number, according to its relation. IT 
 
 It only remains, therefore, to lay down the following 
 Rule. The pronoun le takes neither gender nor 
 number, when occupying the place of an adjective. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Madame, etes-vous enrhumee 1 — Oui, je le suis. 
 Mesdames, etes-vous contentes de ce disccurs ? — Oui, nous le 
 sommes. 
 Y eut-il jamais une femme plus malheureuse que je le suis ? 
 
 Rem. This rule is observed, when the substantives 
 are used adjectively, as, 
 
 Madame, etes-vous mere ? — Oui, je le suis. 
 Mesdames, etes-vous parentes ?— Oui, nous le sommes. 
 Elle est filie, et le sera toule sa vie. 
 
 But not if the adjectives be used substantively, as, 
 
 Madame, etes-vous la malade ? — Oui, je la suis. 
 
 Therefore this question ; Etes-vous jille deM. leduc? 
 
 is to be answered, Oui, je le suis ; but this, Etes-vous 
 
 Ui J Vie de M, le due ? — Oui, je la suis.^ 
 
 H EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Is that your idea ? — Can you doubt tliat it is ? 
 
 2. Are you Mrs. Such-a-one ? — Yes, ! am. 
 
 3. Are those your servants ? — Yes, they are. 
 
 (l.) Irfta, pensee ; that il is, ce 6lfe,subj-l: 
 
 (J.) *V7rs. Madame ; fxwh-a-ov.t, un tel. (3.) Those, ce Id *, they, ce. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Ladies, are you glad to have seen the new piece / — Yes, we 
 are. 
 
 2. I, a * slave ! I, born to command ! alas ! it is but too true 
 that I am so. 
 
 3. She was jealous of her authority, and she ought to be so. 
 
 4. Was there ever a girl more unhappy, and treated with more 
 ridicule than I am ? 
 
 5. You have found me amiable : why have I ceased to appear 
 so to you ? 
 
 (5. Have we ever been so quiet as we are ? 
 7. Madam, are you married ! — Yes, 1 am. 
 b. Madam, are you the bride I — Yes, I am. 
 
 (1.) Ladies, Mewlames. (-'.) >/«rc, esciave •, but, m> que 
 
 (3.) Ought, devoir, ind-^. (J.) H'ilh more ridicule, plus lidlculement. 
 
332 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The same rule is likewise observed with the article 
 placed before plus, or moins, and an adjective. It 
 takes neither gender nor number, when there is no 
 comparison, as, 
 
 Le lune ne nous iclaire pas au- The moon does not give us so 
 tant que le soleil, meme quand much light as the sun, even 
 elle est le plus britlante, when it shines brightest. 
 
 But it takes them when there is comparison, as, 
 Be to ut&: lesplan&tes, la lune est Of all the planets, the moon is 
 la plus brillanle pour nous,\ the most brilliant to us. 
 
 REPETITION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule I. Pronouns expressing the first and second 
 persons, when the subject must be repeated before all 
 the verbs, if those verbs are in different tenses ; it is al- 
 ways even better to repeat them, when the verbs are in 
 the same tense. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je soutiens et je soutiendrai tou- I maintain, and (I) will always 
 
 jours, maintain. 
 
 Vous dites, et vous avez toujours You say, and (you) have always 
 
 dit, said. 
 
 Accable de douleur, je m'ecriai et Overwhelmed with sorrow, I 
 
 je dis, exclaimed and (I) said. 
 
 Nous nous promenions sur le haut We were walking upon the 
 
 du rocher, et nous voyions sous summit of the r^ck, and we 
 
 nos pieds, &c. saw under our feet, &c. 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 
 1. This father could not bring himself to condemn his children, 
 even when they were most guilty. 
 
 2. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even when she is 
 least afflicted. 
 
 3. Out * of so many criminals, only the most guilty should be 
 punished. 
 
 4. Although that woman displays more fortitude than the 
 others, she is not, on that account, the least distressed. 
 
 (].) Could, ind-9; bring hinuelf, se resoudre. 
 (2.) Shedding, repandre de ; even when, dans le temps m£me que. 
 (J.) Only the most, &c. (one must punish only the most guilty ;) only, ne que.' 
 (4.) Displays, montrcr: foriit.de, fermete; on that account, pour cela ; 
 distressed, afflige. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 333 
 
 In all cases these pronouns must be repeated, though 
 the tenses of the verbs do not change, if the first of these 
 is followed by a regimen, as, 
 Vous aimerez le Seigneur xotre You shall love the Lord your 
 
 Dieu, et vous observtrez sa God, and (you shall) observe 
 
 /oi, II his law. 
 
 Rule II. The pronouns of the third person, when 
 they form the subject, are hardly ever repeated before 
 verbs, except when those verbs are in different* tenses, 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La honne grace ne gate rien ; A graceful manner spoils no- 
 elle ajoute d la heauti, releve thing : it adds to beauty, 
 la modestic, et y donne du lus~ heightens modesty, and gives 
 tre, it lustre. 
 
 II ri a jamais rien valu, et ne vau- He never was good for any 
 dra jamais rien, thing, and never will be. 
 
 U est arrici ce matin, et it repar- He arrived this morning, and 
 tira ce soir, (he) will set off again this 
 
 evening. 
 
 However, perspicuity requires the repetition of the 
 pronoun, when the second verb is preceded by a long 
 incidental phrase, as — II fond sur son ennemi, et apres 
 
 f EXERCISE ON THE REPETITION OF THE PER- 
 SONAL PRONOUN. 
 
 1. My dear child, /love you, and /shall never cease to love 
 you : but it is that very love that I have for you which obliges me 
 to correct you for your faults, and to punish you when you de- 
 re it. 
 
 / hear-1 and admired these words, which comforted me a 
 little, but my mind was not sufficiently at liberty to make him a 
 reply. 
 
 !). Thou art young, and doubtless thou aimest at the glory of 
 surpassing thy comrades. 
 
 4. God has said : you shall love your enemies, bless those that 
 curse you, do good to those that persecute you, and pray for those 
 who slander you. What a difference between this morality and 
 that of philosophers ! 
 
 (1.) Correct for, reprendre de. 
 
 (2 .) H'ard, £couter, ind- ; words, diseours, sing - . ; mymivd, &c. (I had not the 
 mini, Lc.) sufficiently at liberty, n^cv. libre •, to vuike a reply, r£pondre A. 
 (3 ) .limert at, a«;jurer a ; surpasrincr, I'emporter, kc. 
 (4.) Slander, calomnier ; bet-ween, de 5 and that, a. celle. 
 
334 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Vavoir saisi d'une main victorieuse, il le renverse, com- 
 me le cruel aquilon abat les tendres moissom qui dorent 
 la campagne."\ 
 
 Rule III. Any personal pronoun, when the subject 
 must be repeated before verbs, when passing from an 
 affirmation to a negation, and vice versa, or when the 
 verbs are joined by any conjunction, except et and nu 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 II veut et il ne veiU pas, He will and he will not. 
 
 // donne d'exceilens principes, He lays down excellent princi- 
 parce qxCil salt que les progres pies, because he knows that 
 uithieurs en dependent, upon them depends all further 
 
 progress. 
 E donne et recoit, He gives and receives. 
 
 11 ne donne ni ne reqoit,% He neither gives nor receives. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He took the strongest cities, conquered the most consider- 
 able provinces, and overturned the most powerful empkes. 
 
 2. He takes a hatchet, completely cuts down the mast which 
 was already broken, throws it into the sea, jumps upon it amidst 
 the furious billows, calls me by my name, and encourages me to 
 follow him. 
 
 3. He marshals the soldiers, marches at their head, advances 
 in good order towards the enemy, attacks and breaks them, and, 
 after having entirely routed them, (he) cuts them to pieces. 
 
 (1.) Overturned, renverser. 
 
 (2.) Completely cuts dozvn, achever de couper ; jumps upon it, s'elancer des- 
 sus 5 billows, onde. 
 
 (3.) Marshals, ranger en bataille ; breaJcs, renverser ; entirely routed, achever 
 de mettre eu desordre \ cuts, tailler. 
 
 t EXERCISE. " 
 
 1. It is inconceivable how whimsical she is; from one moment 
 
 to another she will' and she will not. 
 
 1. The Jews are forbidden to work on the sabbath ; they are 
 
 as it * were * locked in slumber ; they light no fire, and carry no 
 
 water. 
 
 3. For nearly a week she has neither eaten nor drunk. 
 
 4. The soldier was not repressed by authority, but stopped 
 from satiety and shame. 
 
 (1.) (She is of a whimsical cast inconceivable) whimsical east, bizarrerie, f. 
 
 (2.) (It is forbidden to), jorbiddtn, defendre ; sabbath, jour du sab bat ; locked, 
 enchain e ; sl.nnher, repos ; light, nllumer. 
 
 (3.) For, depuis ; nearly, prvs de ; a week, butt jours ; has eatcn...drvnlc, 
 ind-1. (J.) Repressed, vepriiner j stopped, s'arrtHer, ind-3 .from, par. 
 
PAETICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 335 
 
 Rule IV. Pronouns, when they form the regimen, 
 repeated before any verb. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 ViUede ses malheurs le poar- The ilea of Iris misfortunes 
 
 suit, le tourmente et Vacca- pursues (him), tc-ments 
 He } (him), and overwhelms him. 
 
 Jl nous enniiie et nous olsede He wearies (us) and besets us 
 s i ns cesse, an ceasingly. 
 
 Exception. It is not repeated before such compound 
 verbs as express the repetition of the same action, when 
 the verbs are in the same tense, as, 
 
 Je vous le dis et redis, il le fait et refait sans cesse. H 
 
 VI. 
 
 relation of the pronouns of the third person to 
 a noun as expressed before. 
 
 Rule. The pronouns of the third person, il, Us, elle, 
 dies, le, la, les, must always relate to a noun, whether 
 subject or regimen, taken only in a definite sense, before 
 expressed in the same tense, but they must not be ap- 
 plied to a subject and regimen at the same time. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 La rose est la reine des flturs, The rose is the queen of flow- 
 aussi esf-elle Vemhlemc da La ers ; therefore it is the em- 
 beautc, blem of beauty. 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 1. It is teste that selects the expressions, that combines, ar- 
 ranges, and varies them, so as to produce the greatest effect. 
 
 2. Horace answered his stupid critics not so much to instruct 
 them, as to expose their ignorance, and let them see that they did 
 not even know what poetry was. 
 
 3. Man embellishes nature itself; he cultivates, extends, and 
 polishes it. 
 
 (I.) 8§ «t to, de manure a ce qu'elles, iabj-1. 
 
 (2.) Stupid, lot ; not so much, moins ; as to, pour j shoiv, (to them,) their, Si*. 
 let ste % faire entendre •, was, c'^tait que. 
 
336 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 3'ai'me Pananas ; il est exquis, I like the pine-apple ; it b d«. 
 
 licious. 
 
 But the two following sentences would be equivocal : 
 
 Racine a imit6 Euripide, en Racine has imitated Euripides 
 tout ce qu'il a de plus beau in all lb at he has most beau- 
 dans sa Ph&dre, tiful in his Phedra. 
 
 Le legal publia une sentence The legate published a sen- 
 d'interdit ; il dura trois mois, tence of interdiction ; it last- 
 
 ed three months. 
 
 As in the first of these two sentences il may relate, 
 either to Racine or to Euripides, and from the con- 
 struction of the second sentence, il cannot, as it should, 
 relate to interdit. Again, it is not altogether correct, 
 to say, 
 
 Nulle paix pour Vimpie ; il la No peace for the wicked : he 
 cherche, e]\efuit, seeks it, it flies. 
 
 Because, from the construction, the pronouns la and 
 die seem to he used for nulle paix, whereas the mean- 
 ing requires that they should supply the place of the 
 substantive paix, in the affirmative. IF 
 
 % EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Poetry embraces all sorts of subjects ; it takes in every- 
 thing that is most brilliant in history ; it eiders the fields of 
 philosophy; it soars to the skies ; it plunges into the abyss: it 
 penetrates to the dead ; it makes the universe its domain ; and 
 if this world be not sufficient, it creates new ones, which it em- 
 bellishes with enchanting abodes, which it peoples with a thou- 
 sand various inhabitants. 
 
 2. Egypt aimed at greatness ; and wished to * strike the eye 
 at a distance, always pleasing it by the justness of proportion. 
 
 3. Egypt, satisfied with its own territory, where every thing 
 was in abundance, thought not of conquests ; it extended itself 
 in another manner, by sending colonies to every part of the globe, 
 and with them civilization and laws. 
 
 (1) Subjects, marie 1 re 5 takes in. se charger de ; that is. r avoir tie ; (in) the 
 fields, soaj-s to, s'elancer dans 5 plunges, s'enlbncer | to. chez ; (its domain of 
 the universe ;) be sufficient, suflire ; ones, mondc, enchanting, enchant^ ; abode*, 
 demeure ; various, divers- 
 
 (2.) Greatness, grand ; wished, vouloir $ eyt, pi 5 at a distance, dans l^Iol- 
 gnement ; (in) pleasing, contenter. 
 
 (3) It as in abundance , abondcr ; thought r.f, longer a ', t'^de', by, en ) to- 
 par ; part of the globe, terre. 
 
PARTICULAR BX7LES OF THE PKONOUN8. 337 
 
 II. 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXPLANATION OF SOME DIFFICULTIES ATTENDANT ON 
 THE USE OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, four, fours, relate 
 either to pronouns, to things personified, or simply to 
 things. If they relate to persons, or things personified, 
 their place can never be supplied by others : but if they 
 relate to things, the following rules must be observed. 
 
 The possessive pronouns are always employed, 
 
 1. When the object to which they relate is either 
 named, or designated by a personal pronoun in the same 
 member of a phrase. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 L'Angleterre itend son com- England extends her commerce 
 
 mercepar toute la terre, over the whole globe. 
 
 Elle enzoie ses flottes dans toutes She sends her fleets into every 
 
 les mers, part of the ocean. 
 
 2. Before a noun, when qualified even by a single 
 adjective, unless the noun form the regimen. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ses ressources immenses sont Her immense resources are in- 
 inSpuisables, exhaustible. 
 
 3. After every preposition. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 C'cst par sa position, jointe d la It is by her situation, joined to 
 _fsse dc son gouvernement, the wisdom of her govern- 
 ijiCelle rtAinit dans son sein de ment, that she unites suck 
 si grands avantages, vast advantages within her- 
 
 self. 
 
 4. The Messiah is expected by the Hebrews ; he comes and 
 calls the Gentiles, as it had been announced by the prophecies ; 
 the people that acknowledge him as come, is incorporated with 
 the people that expected kirn, without a single moment of inter- 
 ruption. 
 
 (4.) Gentiles, Gentil ; (the prophecies had announced it j) acknowledge s t r«COtt- 
 naltre ; with, a ; without, sans qu'il y ait } tingle, seul. 
 
 30 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 4. Before all words which can govern the preposi- 
 tion de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Son parlement est le sanctuaire Her parliament i3 the seat of the 
 
 de la plus sage politique, wisest policy. 
 
 Son roin'a de pouvoir que pour Her king possesses power only- 
 Zaire lebien, to do good. 
 
 On all other occasions, the article, with the pronoun 
 en, placed immediately before the verb, must be substi- 
 tuted. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 V*ut cnfin contribue d ra'en In short every thing conspires 
 faire aimer le sejour ; j'en to make me love that resi- 
 admire surtout Vexacte po- dence : I particularly admire 
 lice, en mime temps que les the strictness of her police, 
 lois w'en paraisstnt extreme- at the same time when her 
 ment sagesj laws appear to me extremely 
 
 wise. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. A new custom was a phenomenon in Egypt : for which rea- 
 son, there never was a people that preserved so long its customs, 
 its laws, and even its ceremonies. 
 
 2. Solomon abandons himself to the love of women : his un- 
 derstanding declines, his heart weakens, and his piety degenerates 
 into idolatry. 
 
 3. That superb temple was -upon the summit of a hill : its co- 
 lumns were of Parian marble, and its gates of gold. 
 
 4. Laocoon is one of the finest statues in France : not only the 
 whole, but all its features, even the least, are admirable. 
 
 5. The Thames is a magnificent river : its channel is so wide 
 and so deep below London-bridge, that several thousands of ves- 
 sels lie at their ease in it. 
 
 6. This fine country is justly admired by foreigners : its climate 
 is delightful, its soil fruitful, its laws wise, and its government just 
 and moderate. 
 
 7. The trees of that orchard have sun enough, yet its fruits are 
 but indifferent. 
 
 (1.) Phenomenon, prodige ; for which reason, aussi ; a, de ; preserved, subj -3. 
 (2.) Understanding, esprit : declines, baisser ; weakens, s aiiaiblir. 
 (3.) Summit, haut 5 hill, colline ; Parian, de Pan*. 
 ?4.) In, qu'il y ait en 5 the whole, l'ensemble *, even, jusqu'd. 
 (5.) Magnificent, superbe 5 channel, lit ; below, au desscv.s de ; lie at, £tre a j 
 their, art. ; in it, y. (ri.) Justly, avec raison ', soil, 60I. 
 
 (1.) Have sun enough, £tre bien expose ; but indijftrent, assez nuiuvaid. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 339 
 
 Again, when there exists any doubt whether the pos- 
 sessive pronoun ought to be used, or not before a noun 
 that is the regimen, the following is the 
 
 Rule. The article, not the possessive pronoun, must 
 be put before a noun forming the regimen, when a pro- 
 noun which is either subject, or regimen, sufficiently 
 supplies the place of that possessive, or when there is 
 no sort of ambiguity. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Sm mat d la tdte t I have the head-ache. 
 
 Ilfaudrait lui couper la jambe, It would be necessary to take 
 
 off his leg. 
 Ce cheval a pris le mors aux That horse has run away. 
 dents, X 
 
 8. The Seine has its source in Burgundy, its mouth is at Havre- 
 de-Grace. 
 
 9. The pyramids of Egypt astonish, both by the enormity of 
 their bulk, and the justness of their proportions. 
 
 10. Egypt alone could erect monuments for posterity ; its obe- 
 lisks are to this day, as well for their beauty as for their height, the 
 principal ornaments of Rome. 
 
 11. History and geography throw mutual light on each other? 
 a * perfect knowledge of them ought to enter into the plan of good 
 education. 
 
 (8.) Mouth, embouchure ', Havre y le Havre. 
 (9.) Both, egttleinent et ; bulk, masse •, and, et par. 
 
 (10.) Egypt alone could, il n'appartenait qu'a i'Egypte de ; erect, Slaver $ to 
 this day, encore aujourd'hui ; as well for, autant par ; height, hauteur. 
 (1 1.) Throw mutual light, &c. s'eclairer I'une par l'autre ; of them, (their.) 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 1. During the whole winter he has had bad eyes. 
 
 2. I had a fall yesterday, and hurt wy back and head. 
 
 3. It would be better for a man to lose his life than forfeit * his 
 honour by a criminal 2 action 1. 
 
 4. In this bloody battle, he received a wound by a shot in hit 
 right arm, and another in his left leg : by dint of care his arm wan 
 %aved, but it was necessary to amputate his leg. 
 
 (1.) Hat had bad, avoir nv.tl &. 
 
 (■2.) Had a fall, se laisser tomber ; hurt, se faire mal a ; back, reins, pi. 
 H ouhL be better, valoir mieux, cond-1. 
 
 (4.) . 1 wound by a shot, un coup Ue feu ; in, a : by dint, A force ; his arm.k^ 
 (they saved the arm to him •,) was necessary, falloir, ind-3 ; to * amputate,* to 
 him. 
 
340 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 But should either the personal pronoun, or circum- 
 stances, not remove all ambiguity, then the possessive 
 pronoun must be joined to the noun, as, 
 
 Je vols que m&jambe s'enfle, I see that rny leg is swelling. 
 
 II lui donna sa main & baiser, He gave him 'his hand to kiss. 
 
 Elle a donne hardimeut son bras She courageously presented her 
 au chirurgien,^ arm to the surgeon. 
 
 Ma, not la, because I may also see the leg of another 
 person swelling. 
 
 Rem. 1. Although verbs which are conjugated with 
 two pronouns of the same person generally remove 
 every kind of amphibology, yet custom authorizes some 
 familiar expressions, in which the possessive pronoun 
 seems to be redundant, as, 
 
 II se tientferme sur ses pieds, He stands firm upon his feet. 
 
 Je Vai vu, de mes propres yeux. I have seen it with my own eyes 
 
 2. When speaking of an habitual complaint, the pos- 
 sessive pronoun is properly used, as, 
 Sa migraine I'a repris, His head-ache is returned. 
 
 The possessive pronouns are subject to the same rules 
 as the article ; they must therefore be repeated before 
 all substantives which are either subject or regimen, and 
 before adjectives which express different qualities, as, 
 
 Son pbre, sa mere, el ses frdres His father, mother, and bro 
 
 sont d% retour, thers are come back. 
 
 Je lui ai montre mes plus beaux I hav r e shewn him my finest and 
 
 et mes plus vilains habits, my ugliest dresses. 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 1. In this interview, they made each other presents; she gave 
 him hor portrait, and he gave her his finest diamond. 
 
 2. A young surgeon preparing to bleed the great Conde, this 
 prince said to him smiling, do hot you tremble, to bleed me ? I, 
 my lord, no, certainly ; it is not I, it is you who ought to trem- 
 ble. The prince, charmed with the reply, immediately gave him 
 his arm. 
 
 (1.) Interview, entrevue ; made each other, se foire mutuellement. 
 
 (2.) Preparing, se disposer ; bleed, saigner ; smiling, d'ua air riaut ; it is, 
 not I, (it is not to me ;) it is you, (it is to you ;) u-ho ought to, de *, reply, re 
 partie. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 341 
 
 This rule, which is seldom observed in English, is 
 common in French to all pronominal adjectives.y 
 
 III. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Qui, when it is the subject, may very properly relate 
 both to persons and things. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 L'hommt qui joue perd son The man who gaaies loses Ms 
 
 temps, time. 
 
 Le liv r re, qui plait le plus, rtest The book which pleases mostls 
 pas toujours le plus utile, not always the most useful. 
 
 But when it is the regimen, it can only be used of 
 persons, or of things personified, whether the regimen 
 be direct, or indirect. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quand on est dtlicat ct sage He who is wise and discriminate 
 dans ses goitis, on ne s'at- in his choice, does not form 
 tachtpas, sans savoir qui Von an attachment, withoutknow- 
 aime, ing the person he loves. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Whatever he may do, he always finds himself safe. 
 
 2. Can you still doubt the truth of what I tell you? Would yon 
 ask a stronger proof than that I give you, it is that I heard it, yes, 
 heard it with my own ears. 
 
 3. My gout does not allow me a moment's repose. 
 
 4. It ifl in vain that I exhort you to work and study : your idle- 
 ness, that cruel disease under* which you labour, renders useless 
 all the exhortations of friendship. 
 
 [f vou wish to be beloved, fail not to perform the promise* 
 you have just made. 
 
 6. In the retreat that T have chosen for myself, my study and 
 my garden are my greatest delight. 
 
 7. He brought me into his laboratory, and shewed me his large 
 and small vessels. 
 
 (1.) Finds himself, se retrouvcr ; safe, sur ses jambes. 
 
 ' 'cm, cond-1 ; doubt, douter de ; ask, exiger. 
 (.5.) AUotD) kisser. 
 
 (l.) h is in vain that I, je avoir beau ; you labour, vous travailler. 
 (5.) Fail not, ne pas manquer ; perform, reuiplir ; have just made, venir <te 
 faire. 
 (tf.) For myself, (to roe ;) study, cabinet *, are, faire ; greatest, plus cber. 
 (7.) Brought, mener ; laboratory, laboratoire *, vessel:, vaisseau. 
 
 30* 
 
342 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 L'homme a qui appartient ce The man to whom this fine 
 
 beaujardin est trds-riche, garden belongs is very rich. 
 
 Lafemme de qui vous parlez, The woman of whom you are 
 
 speaking. 
 
 Rem. When the regimen indirect is expressed by 
 the preposition de, then do?il should be preferred to de 
 qui. It is better to say : la femme dont vous parlez ; 
 however, when the verb expresses a kind of transfer or 
 conveyance, de qui must be used, as, 
 Celui de qui je tiens cette nou- The person from whom I had 
 velle, that intelligence. 
 
 Rule I. Qui must not be separated from its antece- 
 dent, when that antecedent is a noun. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Un jeune homme qui pst docile A young man who is obedient 
 aux conseils avian lux donne, to the advice that is given 
 et qui aime d en recevoir, him, and who loves to ne- 
 aura infaiUiblement du mi- ceive this, will infallibly have 
 rite, merit. 
 
 Rem. In some phrases qui may be separated from 
 the substantive* by several words : that is, when the 
 sense obliges us to refer it to that substantive, as, 
 
 II a fallu, avant toute chose, vous faire lire dans l'ecriture 
 sainte, Vhistoire du peuple de Dieu, qui fait le fondement de la re- 
 ligion. 
 
 This sentence is very correct, because, as du peuple 
 determines the kind of history, and de Dieu the kind of 
 people, the mind necessarily goes back to the substan- 
 tive histoire, to which it refers the incidental phrase. 
 
 Qui may likewise hv separated from its antecedent, 
 when this antecedent is a pronoun used as the regimen 
 direct, as, 
 II la trouva qui pleuraitd chaudes He found her crying bitterly. 
 
 larmes, 
 Jc le vols qui joue. I see him playing. 
 
 Because, in ihis case, the true place of the pronoun is 
 before the verb, and it is the same as saying, il trouva 
 elle qui pleurait, &c. jevois lui qui joue. Also in these 
 kinds of sentences, which are real gallicisms, 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRO'OUNS. 343 
 
 Ceux-la ne sont pas les plus Those are not the most un- 
 malheureux, qui se plaignent happy who complain the 
 le plus t % most. 
 
 Rule II. The relative qui must always have a re- 
 ference to a noun taken in a determinate sense. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 U homme est un animal raisonnable, qui, &c. II me requt avcc une 
 politesse, qui, &c. 
 
 But we cannot say, Vhomme est animal raisonnable, 
 qui, &c. II me recut avec politesse, qui, &c. 
 
 Rem. Though in many phrases, the determinate 
 nature of the nouns is not expressed, yet it is clearly 
 understood. Thus, all these phrases are correct : ' 
 
 77 n'a point de livre, qui ne soit He has not a book that is not of 
 
 de son choix. his own selecting. 
 
 Y a-t-U ville dans le royaume Is there a city in the kingdom 
 
 qui suit plus favor is ee ? that is more favoured ? 
 
 II sc conduit en homme qui con- He behaves himself like a man 
 
 nait le monde, who knows the world. 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 1. A young man who loves vanity of dress, like a woman, is un- 
 worthy of wisdom and glory ; glory is only due to a heart that 
 knows how* to * suffer pain and trample upon pleasure. 
 
 2. Thyself, O my son, my dear son, thou* thyself that now en- 
 joyest a youth so cheerful and so full of pleasure, remember that 
 this delightful age is but a flower which will be 1 withered 3 almost 
 as soon 2 as blown. 
 
 3. Mei>pas9 away like flowers, which open in" the morning, and 
 
 :it are withered and trampled under foot. 
 
 4. You must have a man that loves nothing but truth and you, 
 Uiat will speak the truth in spite of you. that will force all your en- 
 trenchments ; and this necessary character is the very man whom 
 you have sent into exile. 
 
 5. We pe/ceived him waiting for us, quietly seated under the 
 shade of a tree. 
 
 (1.) Inanity of dress, a se parer vaineinent •, tmmple upon, fouler aux pieds. 
 
 ( -•) Cheerful, vif ,/u// oA feconde en ; remember, se souvenir ; delightful, belj 
 withered, secber ; bluwn. ecloie. 
 
 ''pen, s'epanouir ; and, (whicb ;) at night, le soir ; withered, fletrir ; under 
 a :f" f >t, art. pi. 
 
 (I.) You mu$t have, il vous falloir J nothing but, ne que ; zvill speak, will 
 force, subj-1 ; entrenchments, retranchement j character, homme } man t mdme } 
 jm< into exile, exiler. 
 
 (5. j Waiting fox , (who waited,) attendre-, under, a. 
 
344 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 11 est accabli de maux, qui ne He is overwhelmed with mis 
 
 tui laissentpas un instant de fortunes that do not allow 
 
 repos, him a moments rest. 
 
 Cest unesorte de fruit, qui ne It is a sort of fruit that does not 
 
 murit pas en Europe, ripen in Europe. 
 
 From the translation of all the above examples, it is 
 evident that livre, mile, maux, are really determinate, 
 the meaning being : it n'a pas un livre qui, &c. y a-Uil 
 une ville qui, &C.1T 
 
 Que relates both to persons and things. It is always 
 the regimen direct, and cannot subsist without an ante- 
 cedent expressed, which it generally follows. L'homme 
 que je vols, la peche que je mange. We say, generally, 
 because, in some instances, it may be separated from 
 the antecedent by several words : that is, when the 
 mind necessarily goes back to that antecedent, as in 
 this sentence of Flechier's, 
 
 QiCest-ce qu'une armee ? — c'est un corps animi oVune infiniti de 
 passions differentes, qu'«n homme habUefait mouvoirpour la defense 
 de la pairie, 
 
 Rem. There are instances where que is apparently 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He received us with such goodness, civility, and grace, as 
 charmed us, and made us forget all we had suffered. 
 
 2. There is no city in the world where there are more riches and 
 a greater population. 
 
 3. Is there a man ca v n say ; I shall live till to-morrow ? 
 
 4. He has no friend but would make for him every kind of sa- 
 crifice. 
 
 5. He is surrounded by enemies, who are continually observing 
 him, and would be veiy glad to detect him in a fault 
 
 6. In his retreat, he lives like a. philosopher, who knows mankind 
 and mistrusts them. 
 
 7. The pine-apple is a sort of fruit that in Europe ripens only in 
 hot-houses. 
 
 8. That man is a sort of pedant, icho takes words for ideas, and 
 facts confusedly heaped together for knowledge. 
 
 (1.) Such — as, un — qui ; civility, politesse. (2.) There arc, sub). 
 
 <S.) JUan, (who •,) can, subj. (4.) But, qui ne ; would make, subj-2. 
 
 (6.) Like a, en ; philosopher, sage j mistrusts, se defter de. 
 (7.) Pine-apple, ananas ; hot-houses, serre chaude. 
 (d.) Heaped together, entasser ; knowledge, savoir. 
 
PABTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 3-45 
 
 used as regimen indirect for a qui, or dont, as : C'est a 
 vous queje parte ; c'est de lui que je parle ; de la f aeon 
 que fai dit la chose. But in this case, que is a con- 
 j unction, f 
 
 Lequel and dont relate both to persons and things. 
 But lequel ought never to be used either as a subject, 
 or object, except to avoid ambiguity; for, whenever the 
 sense is evident, qui or que must be used. 
 
 Lequel) with the preposition de, is either followed, or 
 preceded by a noun, which it unites to the principal 
 sentence. If it be followed, dont is preferable to du- 
 quel, both for persons and things. Thus : 
 
 La Tamise dont le lit, and not, de laquelle. 
 Le prince dont la protection, and not, ditquel. 
 
 If lequel be preceded by the noun, we can only make 
 use of duquel when speaking of things, as, la Tamise, 
 dans le lit de laquelle ; and it is always better to use it 
 when speaking of persons, as, le prince a la protection 
 duquel ; de qui would not be so well. 
 
 With the preposition a auquel, when speaking of 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The God whom the Hebrews and Christians have always 
 served, has nothing in common with the deities full of imperfection 
 and even of vice worshipped by the rest of the world. 
 
 2. The Epic poem is not the panegyric of & hero who is proposed 
 as a* pattern, but the recital of great and illustrious actions, which 
 are exhibited for imitation. 
 
 )'. The good which we hope for* presents itself to us, and disap- 
 pears like an empty dream, which vanishes when we awake : to 
 teach us, that the very things which we think we hold fast in our 
 hands, may slip away in an instant. 
 
 4. Plato says, that, in writing, we ought to hide ourselves, to 
 disappear, to make the world forget us, that we may present no- 
 thing but the truths we wish to impress. 
 
 (I.) (That the rest of the world worshipped.; 
 
 (-.; Is proposed, on propose ; an, pour ; pattern, modele ; it exhibited, on 
 donner; imitation, exemple. 
 
 (3.) (iond, bien; disappears, s'envoler ; empty, vain ; vanishes, &.c. le r£vel] 
 fait evanouir ; zve * hold fast > tenir le mitrux ; in our hands * ; slip away, nou« 
 echanper. 
 
 (4.) /<>, on j to make the world forget, se faire oublier ; that we may present 
 but, pour ne produire que ; icish, vouloir ; impress, persuader. 
 
846 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUWS* 
 
 things, as, les places aux-quelles il aspire, but we ought 
 to prefer a qui, when speaking of persons, as, 
 Les rois a qui on doit obSir. 
 
 Auxquels would not do so well. 
 
 So the relative qui, preceded by a preposition, never 
 relates to things, but to persons only 4 
 
 Quoi only relates to things* It is placed after the 
 word to which it relates, but is always preceded by a 
 preposition, and is generally followed by the subject of 
 the phrase with which it is connected, as, 
 
 La chose a quoi on pense ; voild les conditions sans quoi la chose 
 ne peut sefaire. 
 
 To this mode of expression are to be preferred, 
 lequel, duquel, auquel, as being much better ; for 
 quoi is never used with any degree of propriety, but 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The grand principle on which the whole turns is, that all * the 
 world is but one republic, of which God is the common father, and 
 in which every nation forms, as it were, one great family. 
 
 2. Homer, whose genius is grand and sublime like nature, is 
 the greatest poet, and perhaps the most profound moralist of an- 
 tiquity. 
 
 3. The celebrated Zenobia, tohose noble firmness 2 you have 
 admired 1, preferred dying with the title of queen, rather* than 
 accept the advantageous 2 offers 1 which Aurelian made her. 
 
 4. The Alps, on the summit of which the astonished eye discovers 
 perpetual snow and ice, present, at sun-set, the most striking and 
 most magnificent spectacle. 
 
 5. A king, to whose care we owe a good law, has done more for 
 his own glory, than if he had conquered the universe. 
 
 6. The ambitious man * sees nothing but pleasure in the posses- 
 sion of the offices to which he aspires with so much eagerness, in- 
 stead of seeing the trouble that is inseparable from them. 
 
 7. Kings, lohnm religion makes it our duty to obey, are, upon 
 earth, the true representation of the providence of God. 
 
 (1.) Turns, rouler \ every, chaque ; as it were, comme. 
 
 (3.) Preferred, aimer mieux 5 than, que de. 
 
 (4.) Perpetual, eternel ; snoiv, ice, pi.; sun-stt, soleil, coucbant ; striking 
 imposartf. (5.) Care, solicitude. 
 
 (7.) (To) whom ; makes it our duty to, faire un devoir de j representation 
 image. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 347 
 
 when it relates to a vague and indefinite subject, such 
 as ce, or rien, as, 
 
 Ctst de quoi je irioccupe sans cesse. 
 
 U n'y a rien a quoi je soisplus dispose. 
 
 Ou, d'oii, par oil, relate only to things. They are 
 never used, but when the nouns, to which they refer, 
 express some kind of motion, or rest, at least metapho- 
 rically, as, 
 
 Voild It but ou il tend, That is the end he aims at. 
 
 Cest une chosi d'oii dipend It It is a thing upon which the 
 
 bonhtu public, public happiness depend*. 
 
 Lts lieux par ou il a passi, The places through which he 
 
 «I has passed. 
 
 IV. 
 
 ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Qui relates only to persons presenting but a vague 
 indeterminate idea, as, 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 
 1. What a young man, who begins the world, ought principally 
 to attend to, is not to give it a high opinion of his understanding, 
 but to gain numerous friends by the qualities of his heart. 
 
 2. A youth passed in idleness, effeminacy, and pleasure, lays up 
 for ■ us nothing but sorrow and disgust in old age ; this, however, 
 is what we little think of when we are young. 
 
 3. There is nothing fo/ which we are more affected than the loss 
 of fortune, although, being frail and perishable by its nature, it 
 cannot contribute to our happiness. 
 
 4. A grove, in which I defy the burning heats of the dog-star, a 
 retired valley, where I can meditate in peace, a high hill, whence my 
 eye extends over immense plains, are the places where I spend the 
 happiest moments of my life. 
 
 ( 1 .) To what , ce a quoi; begin?, entrer dans ; to attend, s'attacher ; iff, v, 
 opinion, idee ; understanding, esprit 5 to gain, B€ faire ; numerous, beaucoup de. 
 Idleness, inutility-, effeminacy, mollesse ; pleasure, volupt6 ; lays up, 
 preparer ; of, a ; we, on. 
 
 (3.) liy, a; we, on ; affected, sensible ; frail, frele 5 by, de ; cannot, subj-l ; 
 our (the). 
 
 (40 Orove, bosquet ', defy, braver •, burning' heats, ardeur : dog-star, canicule ( 
 spend, passer. 
 
348 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Qui sera assez hardi pour V attar Who will be bold enough to at- 
 quer ? tack him ? 
 
 It is likewise used in the feminine, and in the plural, 
 as, 
 
 Qui est cette personnel ? Who is that person ? 
 
 Qui sont cesfemmes-ld ? Who are those women ? 
 
 Que and quoi relate to things only, as, 
 
 Que pouvait la valeur en ce com- What could valour do in that 
 
 batfuneste 1 fatal combat ? 
 
 A quoi pensez-vous ? What are you thinking of ? 
 
 Que is sometimes used for a quoi, de quoi, as, 
 
 Que sert la science sans la ver- What avails learning without 
 
 tu ? virtue ? 
 
 Que sert a Vavare aVavoir des What use is it to tke miser to 
 
 tresors ? possess treasures ? 
 
 that is, a quoi sert, &c. de quoi sert, &c. 
 
 Quoi, when relating to a whole sentence, is the only 
 authorized expression that can be used, as, 
 
 La vie passe comme unsonge ; c'est cependant a quoi on ne pense 
 gu&res. 
 
 Rem. Que and quoi require the preposition de before 
 the adjective or substantive that follows them, as, 
 
 Que dit-on de nouveau ? quoi de plus agreable i 
 Que d J inconsequences dans sa conduite ! 
 
 Quel relates both to persons and things, as, 
 
 Quel liomme pent se promettre un bonheur constant ? 
 Quelle grdce ! quelle beauti ! mats quelle modestie I 
 
 Oil, (Pou, par ou, relate but to things. f 
 
 t EXERCISE ON ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. Who could ever persuade himself, did not daily experience 
 convince us of it, (hat, out of a hundred persons, there are ninety 
 who sacrifice, to the enjoyment of the present, all the best found- 
 ed hopes of the future. 
 
 2. Who would not love virtue for its own sake, could he see it' 
 in all its beauty ? 
 
 (1.) Did, si j out of , sur ; future, avenir. 
 
 (2.) Its cum take, elle mAme ; could he, si on pouvoir, lnd-2. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS* "49 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Ce, joined to the verb &tre, always governs this verb 
 in the singular, except when it is followed by the third 
 person plural. 
 
 C'ssi moi, c'eit tji, (test lui, c'cst nous, c'est vous. 
 
 But in dii must say, 
 
 Ce sont euz, ce sont dies, Sont-^e les Anglais, qui ont fait eel a 1 
 Ce furent vos ancetres qui, Est-ce les Anglais que vous aimez f 
 Fut-ce nos propnesjUs qui, Fut-ce nos propresfJs que. 
 
 Ce, when relating to a person, or thing mentioned 
 before, supplies the place of il, ©r elle. Ce must 
 always be used, when the verb tire is followed by a sub- 
 stantive, accompanied by the article, or the adjective 
 tin. 
 
 3. He who does not know how * to apply himself in his youth, 
 does not know what to do when arrived at maturity. 
 
 4. He was a wise legislator, who, having given to his country- 
 men laws calculated to make them good and happy, made them 
 swear not to violate any of those laws during his absence : after 
 which, he went away, exiled himself from his country, and dfed 
 poor in a foreign land. 
 
 5. What people of antiquity ever had better laws than the Egyp- 
 tians ? What other nation ever undertook to erect monuments 
 calculated to triumph over both time and barbarism ? 
 
 6. What more instructive and entertaining than to read celebrated 
 authors in their own language ? What beauty, ichat delicacy, and 
 grace, which cannot be transcribed into a translation, are discover- 
 ed in them ! 
 
 7. When Menage had published his book on tke Origin of the 
 French language, Christina, queen of Sweden, said : " Menage 
 is the most troublesome 3 man 1 in the world 2 : he cannot let 
 one word 2 go 1 without its passport : he must know icfiencc it 
 comes, where it has passed through, and whither it is going." 
 
 O.) (To) what ; to do, s'occuper ; when arrived, &c, duns l'age raUr. 
 
 (4.) lie, ce ; calculated, propre 5 not to, (that they would not ;) went away, 
 partir. (5.) Calculated to, fait pour •, bo*h, egaleroent ; over, <ie. 
 
 (6.) Language, langue ; delicacy, finesse ; which cannot, qu'on ne pent j be 
 transcribed, faire passer; translation, traduction 5 are, kc. n'y U^couvrc-t-on 
 pas. 
 
 (7.) ft hen, apres que; Christina, Christine; troublesome, incommode j fAe, 
 de, art. : cannot, ne saurait ; go, passer ; mutt, vouloir. 
 
 31 
 
350 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Lisez Homdre et Virgilc: ce sont Read Homer and Virgil: they 
 
 les plus grands poetes de Van- are the best poets of anti- 
 
 tiquitS, qui y. 
 
 La douceur, Vaffabiiiii et une Gei tleneis, affabi'.ity, and a cer- 
 
 certaine urhanite, dislinguent tain urbanity, drstingunish the 
 
 I'homme quivit dans It grand man that frequents polite com- 
 
 monde; les marques pany; these lto marks 
 
 auxquelies on ie reconiiait, which he may.be k:io^ , u. 
 
 Avez-vous hi Platon ? c'est un Have you read Plato ? he is one 
 
 des plus beaux genies de Van- of the greatest geniuses of an- 
 
 tiquite, tiqui ty. 
 
 But, when the verb Ure is followed by an adjective, 
 or by a substantive taken adjectively, il, or elle, must be 
 used. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Lisez Demoslhine et CicSron ; ils Read Demosthenes and Cicero; 
 sont tres-eioquens. they are very eloquent. 
 
 Xai vu Vhopital de Greenwich ; I have seen Greenwich Hospi- 
 il est magnifique et digne tal ; it is superb and worthy 
 dhme grande nation, of a great nation. 
 
 Compterlez-vous sur Valhre ? ig- Would you rely upon Valere ? 
 norez-vous qu'il est homme a do you not know that he is a 
 ne jamais rmcmr de ses pre- • man who will never abandon 
 mitres idees ?\ his first opinions ? 
 
 Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, relates to things 
 only. It is always masculine singular, as it only denotes 
 
 X EXERCISE ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. It is we who have drawn that misfortune upon * ourselves 
 through our thoughtlessness and imprudence. 
 
 2. It ions the Egyptians that first observed the course of the 
 stars, regulated the year, and invented arithmetic. 
 
 3. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero : they are the two phi- 
 losophers of antiquity who have given us the most sound and lumi- 
 nous ideas upon morality. 
 
 4. If you are intended for the pulpit, read over and over again 
 Bourdaioue and Massillon : they arc both very eloquent ; but the 
 aim of the former is to convince, and that of the latter to per- 
 suade. 
 
 (1.) Have r7jvzu'n,s'attirer j thoughtlessness, legerete. 
 (2 J First, les premier? ; stars, astre. 
 (3/j Peruse, lire •, sound, sain ; morality, morale. 
 
 (4.) Art intended for, se destiner a ',pulpit, chaire •, read over and over again, 
 lire et relire sans cesse ; aim, but. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 351 
 
 a vague object, which is not sufficiently, specified to 
 know its gender and number. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ce qui flatte est plus dangereux What flatters is more dangerous 
 que ce qui offense, than what offends 
 
 Ce, joined to the relative pronouns, qui, que, dont, 
 and quoi, has, in some instances, a construction pecu- 
 liar to itself. Both ce and the relative pronoun that fol- 
 lows it, form, with the verb which they precede, the 
 subject of another phrase, of which the verb is always 
 efre. Now, etre may be followed by another verb, an 
 adjective, or a noun. 
 
 When etre then is followed by another verb, the de- 
 monstrative ce must be repeated, as, 
 
 Ce que faimele plus, e'est d'etre What I like most, is to be 
 seul, alone. 
 
 When followed by an adjective the demonstrative us 
 not repeated, as, 
 
 Ce dont zous venez de me parler What you have been mention 
 est horrible, ing to me is horrid. 
 
 When it is followed by a substantive, the demonstra- 
 tive may either be repeated, or not, at pleasure, except 
 in the case of a plural, or a personal pronoun. Thu% 
 we may say, 
 
 Ce que je dis, est la vtriti, or, What I say is the truth, 
 e'est la v6rit6, 
 
 Though the former is best. But we must say, 
 Ce qui m'indigne, ce sont Its What provokes me, are the in- 
 
 injnsticcs, <ju'on ne cesse de juries which are continually 
 
 fuire, committed. 
 
 Ce fjui rrCarraclie au sentiment What alleviates the grief that 
 
 qui nvaccabie, e'est vous, oppresses me, is you. 
 
 Most of these rules contribute to the elegance of the 
 language. 1F 
 
 K EXERCISE. 
 If What is astonishing is not always ichat is pleasing. 
 
 (1.) h astonishing , £to»ner ; is pleasing, plaire. 
 
353 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 There arc two ways of employing celui. In the first 
 it is followed by a noun, or pronoun preceded by the 
 preposition de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Celui de vous qui, &c. Whichever of you that, &c 
 
 Cette montre resscmbh d celle de That watch is like that of your 
 votrefrere, brother. 
 
 In the second, it is followed by qui, que, or dont, as, 
 Celui qui nepense qu'd lui seul He who thinks of nobody but 
 dispense les autres d'y penser, himself, excuses others from 
 
 thinking of him. 
 Voire nouvelle est plus sure que Your intelligence is more au- 
 celle qiCon dtbitait hier, thentic than that which was 
 
 circulated yesterday. 
 
 In these two cases it is applied both to persons and 
 things. 
 
 In. the latter of these instances, celui is sometimes 
 omitted, and this turn gives strength and elegance to 
 the expression, as, 
 
 Qui veut trop sefaire craindre, se He who wishes to make himself 
 fait raremtnt aimer ; too much feared, seldom 
 
 makes himself beloved. 
 
 2. What the miser thinks least of, is to enjoy his riches. 
 
 3. What pleases us in the writings of the ancients, is to see that 
 they have taken nature as a model, and that they have painted her 
 with a noble simplicity. 
 
 4. JVJiat that good king has done for the happiness of his people, 
 deserves to be handed down to the latest posterity. 
 
 5. JVkat constitutes poetry is not the exact number and regu- 
 lar cadence of syllables : but it is the sentiment which animates 
 every thing, the lively fictions, bold figure?, and * beauty and 
 variety of the imagery: it is the enthusiasm, .fire, impetuosity, 
 force, a something in the words and thoughts which nature alone 
 can impart. 
 
 6. What we justly admire in Shakspeare are those characters 
 always natural and always well * sustained. 
 
 7. What keeps me attached to life, is you, my son, whose tender 
 age has still need of my care and advice. 
 
 (?.") If hat, (that to which ;) viise.r, avare. (3.) As a, pour. 
 
 (4.) Deserves, tstie digne ; to be handed dozun, etre transmis ; latest, ia plus 
 recuUe. 
 
 (5.) Constitutes, faixe ; exact, fixe ; lively, vifj imagery, image, pi- ; a some- 
 thing, unje nesais quoi j words, parole ; impart, dormer. 
 
 (60 IVe, on \ justly, avec justice ; natx rut, dans la nature ; sustaiixeu, souteou. 
 
 (7.) Kteps attached, attacker; care, advice, pi. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 353 
 
 Ceci and cela apply only to things ; however, in the 
 familiar style, custom authorises us to say, in speaking 
 of one person individually, or of many collectively ; 
 cela est heureux ! cela croupit dans lafange; cela est 
 gucux etjier, &c.f 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 PRONOUNS INDEFINITE-. 
 
 Though on may generally be considered as a mascu- 
 pronoun, as in the phrase, on rfcsi pas toujours mo 
 dc ses pulsions, there are however occasions in wl 
 it is evidently feminine, as, on n 'est pas toiiy ,e ei 
 
 jolie : it may likewise be followed by a plural, as, en se 
 batiit en desespere's ; esUon des iraitres ? 
 
 This pronoun must be repeated before all the verbs 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Whichever of you shall be found to excel the others both in 
 mind and body, shall be acknowledged king of the island. 
 
 2. There are admirable pictures; these are after the manner of 
 Rubens, and those after the manner of Van-Huysum. 
 
 3. Why are the statues of the most celebrated modern sculp- 
 tors, notwithstanding the perfection to which the arts have been 
 carried, so much inferior to those of the ancients ? 
 
 4. He whose soul, glowing, as it were, with divine fire, shall 
 represent to himself the whole of nature, and shall breathe into 
 objects that spirit of life which animates them, those affecting 
 traits which delight and ravish us, will be a man of real genius. 
 
 5. He that judges of others by himself, is liable to many 
 ■ 
 
 6. He that is easily offended, discovers his weak side, and affords 
 his enemies an opportunity of taking advantage of it. 
 
 7. He icho loves none but himself, deserves not to be loved by 
 others. 
 
 (1.) Be found to excel the others, on juger valnqueur ; both in, et pour (re- 
 peated. 
 
 (2.) There are, voila tie; picture, tableau; are afttr, eire d;;ns ; manner, 
 genre. 
 
 (SO Are % (to be placed before so much inferior ;) have, hctn carriei. (r.cUve 
 voic* ■.) with, on ; inferior, au-dessous. 
 
 (4.) filming rvith, enflamme de ; as it ivcre, pour ainsi dire; the rokc 
 tout ; shall breathe into, rtpandre sur j affecLmg, touchant ; delight * 
 
 real, vraL (5.) .'V d'apra j UeMe% exjMfe ; mieiake % an pi 
 
 (ft.) 1 s offended, s'offenser ; iLcak tide, fa ible ; affords., fournir d 
 nofiter 
 
 31* 
 
354 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROXOUtfS. 
 
 of a sentence, and refer to one ancTthe same subject. 
 Thus, the sentence, 
 
 On croit etre aime et Von ne nous aime pas. 
 is incorrect ; it should be, 
 
 On croit etre aimi et Von ne Vest pas* 
 Quiconque is generally masculine, however it is femi- 
 nine, when speaking of, or to females, as, quiconqiw de 
 vous, Mesdames, &c. Though, perhaps, celle dc vans, 
 &c. is preferable.^: 
 
 Chacun, though always singular, may be followed, 
 sometimes by son, sa, ses, and sometimes by leur, leurs, 
 which, in many instances, is embarrassing. 
 
 There is no difficulty in those phrases where chacun 
 is not contrasted with a plural number ; for then son, 
 sa, ses, must be used, as, 
 
 Donnez a chacun sa part; Give to each his share. 
 
 Que chacun songe a ses affaires, Let every one mind his own 
 
 business. 
 
 Rule. In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
 a plural to which it refers, son, sa, ses, must be em- 
 ployed, when chacun is placed after the regimen ; but 
 
 X EXERCISE ON PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 
 
 1. Do you sincerely think, said Emily' to Lucilla, that when 
 women are sensible and pretty, they are ignorant of * it : no, they 
 know it very well : but if they are watchful over their character, 
 they are not proud of these advantages. 
 
 2. We are not slaves, to receive such treatment. 
 
 3. Do you know what they do here 1 They eat, they drink, they 
 dance, they play, they walk, in a word, they kill time in the gayest 
 manner possible. 
 
 4. Whoever of you is bold enough to slander me, I will make 
 him repeat it. 
 
 5. Whoever of you is attentive and discreet, shall receive a re- 
 ward that will flatter her. 
 
 (J.) Sinrerr?;;, (1? bonne foi ; Finily, Emilie j VMKK, on; thc\. on; knoxv, 
 savoir; toulchfo! *v«r, jaloux de J character, ireputatii < J, s'enor- 
 
 guejllir. , on j sleeves, (des) esclavcs ; to receive, pour essurerde 
 
 (3.) They, on ; in the gayest manner, le plus gainient ; passible,(thz{ they can)- 
 
 (i.) h, iud-'< ; to dander, pour nsWirc de j it (of it.) 
 h, hicl-7; th.d w ;/.', fait j* ur. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 355 
 
 leur, leurs, must be used, when chacun is placed before 
 
 the regimen. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF son, sa, ses. 
 
 Remettez ces midailles ckacuna Return those medals each into 
 
 en sa place, its proper place. 
 
 Les liommes devraient Maimer, Men ou^ht to love one another, 
 
 chacun pour son propre interet, each for his o wn interest. 
 EXAMPLE OF leur, leurs. 
 Lcs J'ommes devraient avoir, Men oujht for their own inte- 
 
 chacim pour re in- rest, to have an affection for 
 
 ttrct, de V amour Its uns pour each other. 
 
 les <>• 
 
 Rex. In phrases where chacun is contrasted with a 
 plural, there are two senses, the collective and the dis- 
 tributive* . When chacun is placed after the regimen, 
 the collective sense expressed by the plural is finished ; 
 and the distributive clw.cun acts separately the part of 
 each individual : but when chacun precedes the regi- 
 men, the collective sense remaining incomplete, must 
 be carried on to the end ; and then the pronoun which 
 follows chacun is put in the plural, as, 
 La reiuc dit elle-mtmc aux deputes, qu'il etait temps qu 'Us s'en retour- 
 
 nassent chacun ehez euz.*\ 
 
 Per sonne, used as. a pronoun, is always masculine ; 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Go into my library, and put the books which have been sent 
 back to me, each into its place. 
 
 2. They have all brought offerings to the temple, every one ac- 
 cording to his means and devotion. 
 
 - to carry his orders to the muti- 
 . under his cole 
 4. Each of them has brought his offering, and fulfilled his reli- 
 
 duty. 
 B. Had Ronsard and Balzac each, in hi3 manner of writing, a 
 sufficient degree of merit to form after them any very great man in 
 verse and in prose ? 
 
 6. After a day so usefully spent, we went back, each to our own 
 home. 
 
 (2.) f {Jf"c rings, offrande. 
 
 (3.) 7 o curry, aller porter ; mutineer*, mntln •, cr lours, drapeau. 
 (4.) (They have brought each their, Lc.)fu/Jifltd, remplir. 
 (0. ) J>tn.r\ner of writing-. j, r «>nre ; legrte, asst-z ; Merit, l>on ; any t uiw 
 
 ty, J<>uniee> went back, retourner ; *p, chez •, pur ©am heme, (pron. 
 personal.) 
 
356 PABTICTJLAB RULES OF THE PRONOUNS, 
 
 of course' the adjective relating to it must be of that gen- 
 der, as, 
 
 Personne rtest aussi heureux Nobody is so happy as she. 
 qu'elle, 
 
 12 un et Vautre require the verb they govern to be in 
 the plural. See p. 261. 
 
 Ni Vun ni Vautre likewise generally govern the verb 
 in the plural, when both may at the same time receive 
 the action expressed by the verb : however, the two 
 following modes 
 
 Ni Vun ni Vautre irontfair leur devoir, or 
 Ni Vun ni Vautre n' a. fait son devoir, 
 
 are authorized ; but whenever this action applies only 
 to a single object, the verb must be in the singular, as, 
 
 Ni Vun ni Vautre n'est mon pere ; ni Van ni Vautre de sera nom- 
 me d cette ambassade. 
 
 But when ni Vun ni Vautre elegantly stand after the 
 verb, the verb is always in the plural, as, 
 lis ne sont marts ni Vun ni Vautre.i 
 
 Tout, and rien, when the regimen direct, are placed 
 after the verb, in simple tenses, and between the auxi- 
 liary and the participle, in compound tenses, as, U 
 
 7. Minds that possess any correctness, examine things with at- 
 tion, in order to give a fair judgment of them ; and they place each 
 2 of * them 1 in the rank it ought to occupy. 
 
 (7. ) Possess any, avoir de *, correctness, just esse ; give a fair judgment, juger 
 avec connaissauce ; place, mettre -, to occupy, avoir. 
 
 ~t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Nobody is so severe, so virtuous in public, as some women 
 who practise the least restraint in private. 
 
 2. Nobody could be happier than she ; but as a consequence of 
 that levity which you know she has, she has lost all the advanta- 
 ges that she had received from nature and education. 
 
 3. Racine and Fenelon will be always the delight of feeling 
 minds : both 2 possessed 1 in the highest degree the art of ex- 
 citing in us at pleasure the most tender and the most lively emo- 
 tions. 
 
 (1.) Some, aussi 5 some, certain ; practise the least i jstraint, etre le moius re- 
 tcnu. 
 (2.) Could, ind-2 ; the, un ; levity, le^erefo, 1c nom she hns, lui conna!tre. 
 (3.) Jilwajt dans tous les temps ; both, Van et I'autre 5 in fA«, au ; pleasure, gre - 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 357 
 
 avoue tout ; il n'avoue rien ; il a tout avoue' ; il rCa rien 
 avoue. But when they form the regimen indirect, they 
 are always placed after the verb, both in simple and 
 in compound tenses, as, il rit de tout ; il ne se ruble de 
 rien ; il ajpense a tout ; il n'a pe?is£ a rien. 
 Tout is sometimes used as an adverb, as, 
 
 II lui dit toutfroidement, He told him quite coolly. 
 
 Sometimes also, it represents quoique, encore que, en- 
 ti~rement, quelque, in which case the following rule 
 must be observed. 
 
 Rule. Tout before' an adjective, or a substantive 
 which is used adjectively, never takes either gender, or 
 number, except when immediately followed by an ad- 
 jective feminine beginning with a consonant, or h aspi- 
 rated, as, 
 
 Les enfans, tout aimables qu'ils Children, amiabie as they are. 
 
 sont, 
 
 lis sont tout interdits, They are quite disconcerted. 
 
 La rerlu tout austere quelle Virtue, austere as it may ap- 
 
 yarait, pear. 
 
 Ces images tout anwsantcs artel- These images, entertaining as 
 
 les sont, they may be. 
 
 Ccst une tete toute vide, It is quite a vacant head. 
 
 Ces dames, toutes sj0rituelles These ladies, witty as they may 
 
 qu'elles sont, be. 
 
 Ces Jleurs sont tout aussi frai- These flowers are quite as fresh 
 
 ches que celles que vous as these which you have. 
 
 azu, 
 
 j sont, tout ainsi que These ladies, as well as you, 
 
 vous, tout coiumc wnu, belles are handsome, young, and 
 
 jcunes et spirituelles, ingenious. 
 
 In this latter sense, tout is little more than a mere ex- 
 pletive. § 
 
 5. Balzac and Voiture enjoyed in their time great celebrity ; 
 but neither 2 has been read 1 since by good taste 1 ; the native 
 and simple graces 3 are preferred 2 to the bombast of the former, 
 and the affectation of the latter. 
 
 (A.) Enjoyed, ind-1 ; neither, ni Tun ni l'autre ; hasleen read, (they read 
 rhem no more) ; native, du naturel ; simple, de la simplicity ; art yrf/errc/L, 
 (active voice) depuisque lc ban I eferer les, kc. ; lombuit. boumJMXrOi 
 
358 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Quelque — que, joined to a substantive, either alone, 
 or accompanied by an adjective, takes the sign of the 
 plural. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelques richesses que vous Whatever riches you may pos- 
 
 ayez, 
 
 sess. 
 
 Quelques bonnes ozuvres que vous Whatever good actions you 
 
 fassiez, may do. 
 
 Quelques peines affreuses que However dreadful pains you 
 
 vous eprouviez, may suffer. 
 
 But, when joined to an adjective separated from its 
 substantive, it does not take the sign of the plural. 
 
 § EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Children, amiable as they are, have, nevertheless, many 
 faults which it is of importance to correct. 
 
 2. The philosophers of antiquity, although very* enlightened, 
 have given us but very confused ideas of the Deity, and very 
 vague notions about the principal duties of the law of nature. 
 
 3. Those flowers, inodorous as they are, are not the less 
 esteemed.^ 
 
 4. Virtue, austere as it is, makes us enjoy real pleasures. 
 
 5. Fables, although very * entertaining, yej: 4 truly 5 interest 3 
 us 2 only, when they convey instruction to us, under the disguise 
 of an ingenious allegory. 
 
 6. Although that absurd pedant is a# incessant 2 scribbler 1, 
 yet his head is altogether empty. 
 
 7. Far be from us those maxims of flattery, that kings are born 
 with talents, and that their favoured souls come out of God's 
 hands, completely wise and learned. 
 
 8. Those fountains glide quite gently through a mead ena- 
 melled with flowers. 
 
 9. These peaches are quite as good as those of the south of 
 France. 
 
 (1.) Have nevertheless, ne laisser pas d 'avoir ; faults, defaut ; of importance, 
 essentiel. (2.) Enlightened, eclaii^s qu'ils ^taient; of nature, naturel. 
 
 (3.) Inodorous, inodore ; no*, n'en. (J.) Enjoy, gotiter de. 
 
 (5.) Entertaining^ amusantes qu'ellcs sont ; truly, v£ritablement ; only, ne 1 
 que 6 ; convey, offviv : disguise, voile. 
 
 (6.) Incessant, infatigable ; scribbler, ecrivailleur ; his head is, (he has not le« 
 the head :) not, o'en ; altogether, tout. 
 
 (7.) Ear be, loin ; of, de, art. ; are 6om,naltre ', with talents, halile ; favoured, 
 privileeie ;comc out, sortir ; learned, savant. 
 
 ($.) Ulide, couler ; gently, doucement ; through a mead, sur un gaion. 
 
 (9.) South, midi. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 359 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tous les hommes, quclque oppo- All men, however opposite they 
 s6s qu'ils soient, may be. 
 
 Ces actions, quelque belles qu'on Those actions, however bril- 
 ls trci:. c, liant they may be found. 
 
 Quelque — que and quel que, joined to a substantive, 
 (p. 118), have the same meaning, although they are not 
 used h iifferentiy for each other. If the pronoun 
 stands before the substantive, we make use of quelque 
 — que ; as, 
 
 Qutfques richesses que vous ayez ; 
 
 But, if the verb intervene, then we make use of quel 
 que in two separate w r ords, as, 
 
 Quelles que soient les richesses que vous ayez.1t 
 
 U EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Whatever talents you may possess, whatever advantages you 
 may have received from nature and education, with * whatever 
 perfections you may be endowed, expect only the suffrage of a 
 small number of men. 
 
 2. However great serrices you may have rendered mankind, 
 rather look for their ingratitude than their acknowledgments. 
 
 3. However useful, however well written the works which you 
 have published, yet think not that you will immediately reap 'the 
 fruits of your labours; it is but by slow degrees that light intro- 
 duces itself among men. The course of time is swift : but it 
 seem-; to lag, when it brings reason and truth along with it. 
 
 4. Whatever may be the obstacles which ignorance, prejudice, and 
 envy oppose to the true principles of an art, yet we ought never to 
 be deterred lrom propagating them : the sun does not cease to 
 shine, because its light hurts the eyes of night-birds. 
 
 5. Whatever be your birth, whatever your riches and dignities, re- 
 member that you are frustrating the views of providence, if you do 
 not make use of them for the good of mankind. 
 
 (1.) Possess, avoir; have received, tenir ; be endowed, posseder j expect, ne 
 t'attendre a •, but, que. 
 
 (2.) Mankind, homnie, pi. ; rather look for, compter plut6t ; acknowledg- 
 ments, reconnaissance, sing. 
 
 (3) Immediately, de suite ; reap, recueillir; by slow degrees, avecleiteur; 
 among, cbez ; swift, rapide ; to lug, se «.rainer ; along xvith it, a sa suite. 
 
 (4.) IVt, on: to be deterred, se rebuter ; propagating, repandre j shine, 
 eckiirer ; its, the article; hurls, blesser ; night birds, oiseau de nuit. 
 
 (5.) .he frustrating, frustrer. 
 
360 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 CHAP V. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 
 
 It has been observed that the verb which has two 
 subjects, both singular, is put in the plural ; but to this 
 rule there are the following 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. A verb with two subjects in the singu ar, is not 
 put in the plural, when the two subjects are only joined 
 together by the conjunctions, ou, comme, aussi-bien que, 
 autanl que, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 La seduction, ou la terreur, Vs. Either persuasion, or terror has 
 
 entraine dans le parti des re- drawn him into the party of 
 
 belies, the rebels. 
 
 Le roi, aussi-bien que son mi- The king, as well as his mi- 
 
 nistere, veut le bien public, nistry, wishes for the public 
 
 good. 
 Son honnitetS, autant que son es- His honesty, as much as his wit 
 
 prif, le fait rechercher, makes him courted. 
 
 L'envie, comme V ambition, est Envy, like ambition, is a blind 
 
 une passion aveugle, passion. 
 
 2. The verb is likewise put in the singular, though 
 preceded by plurals, either when there is an expression 
 which collects all the substantives into one, such as, 
 tout, ce, rien, &c. or when the conjunction mais is 
 placed before the last substantive, and this is in the sin- 
 gular. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Bwns, dignites, honneurs, tout Riches, dignkies, honours, every 
 
 disparaft d la mort, thing vanishes at death. 
 
 Jeux, conversations, spectacles,- Games, conversations, shows* 
 
 rien ne la distrait, nothing diverts her. 
 
 Perfidies, noirceurs, incendics, Perfidies, enormities, confla- 
 
 massacres, ce n'est Id qa y une grations, massacres, all thu 
 
 faille image, &c. is but a feeble representation, 
 
 &c. 
 Non-sculcment tou'a scs richrsses Not only all his riches and 
 
 rXtousses honneurs. mais toute honours, but all his virtue 
 
 sa vertu s'6vanonit,t vanishes. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 361 
 
 OF THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 
 
 The collectives general have nothing to distinguish 
 them from substantives common, with regard to the 
 laws of agreement ; but the collectives partitive appa- 
 rently deviate from those laws, in some instances. 
 
 Rule. The verb, which relates to a collective par- 
 titive, is put in the plural, when that partitive is follow- 
 ed by the preposition de and a plural ; but it is put in 
 the singular, either when the partitive is followed by a 
 regimen singular, or when it expresses a determinate 
 quantity, or lastly, when it presents an idea independent 
 of the plural which follows it. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 
 
 1. Either fear or inability prevented them from moving. 
 
 2. The fear of death, or rather the love of life began to revive 
 in his bosom. 
 
 3. Alcibiades, as wtll as Plato, was among the disciples of 
 Socrates. 
 
 4. Lycurgus, like Solon, was a wise legislator. 
 
 5. Euripides, as much as Sophocles, contributed to the glory 
 of the Athenians. 
 
 6. Riches, dignities, honours, glory, pleasure, every thing loses 
 its charms from the moment we possess it, because none of those 
 things can fill the heart of man. 
 
 7. The gentle zephyrs wiiicb preserved, in that place, not- 
 withstanding the scorching heat of the sun, a delightful cool- 
 ness : streams gliding with a swee'. murmur, through meadows 
 interspersed with amaranths and violets; a thousand springing 
 flowers which enamelled carpets ever green ; a wood of those 
 tufted trees that bear golden apples, and the blossom of which, 
 renewed every season, yields the sweetest of all perfumes; the 
 warbling of birds ; the continual prospect of a fruitful country ; 
 10 a word, nothing of what till then had made him happy, could 
 assuage the feelings of his grief. 
 
 (1.) Tnability, impuissance *, mov ing, remuer. 
 
 (2.) iUgan to revive, se reveiller ; in, au fond de ; bosom, cceur. 
 
 (3.) .1mong, au nombre de. 
 
 (6.) We, on ; none, rien, those things, tout cela. 
 
 (7.) Preserved, entretenir ; scorching heat, arrteur ; interspersed with, pa» 
 seiner de ; springing, naissant ; carpets, tapis •, tufted, touffu ; golden, (of £o!d)| 
 renewed, (which renews) se renouveler •, (in) every season ; yields, repandr»{ 
 prospect, spectacle ; made, rendre ; a*sungt, Parracher a ; feeling, sentiment. 
 
 32 
 
362 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB, 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE PLURAL. 
 
 La plupart des homines sont The greatest part of men are 
 
 lien prompts dans leurs juge- very hasty in their judg- 
 
 menSy ments. 
 
 Bien des philosophes se sont Many philosophers have been 
 
 trompis, mistaken. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE SINGULAR. 
 
 Une infinite de peuple est ac- An immense number of people 
 
 courue, (regimen singular), flocked together. 
 
 La moitie des soldats a pSri, One half of the soldiers has 
 
 (determinate quantity), perished. 
 
 Le plus grand nombre des The greater number of the 
 
 troupes a peri, (idea inde- troops has perished. 
 
 pendent of the plural.) 
 
 Thus the substantives partitive, la plupart, une infi- 
 nite, tine foide, un nombre, la plus grande partie, une 
 sorte, &c. and words signifying quantity, such as peu, 
 beaucoup, assez, moins, plus, trap, tant, combien, and 
 que used for combien, followed by a noun joined to them 
 by the preposition de, have not the least influence on 
 the verb, and consequently, it is not with them that the 
 verb agrees, but with the noun which follows them. 
 
 Remark. The words infinite and la plupart, used 
 by themselves, require the verb in the plural, as : une 
 infinite' pensent, la plupart sont d'avis.^ 
 
 X EXERCISE ON THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 
 
 1. Many persons experience that human life is, every where, 
 a state in which much is to be endured, and little to be enjoyed. 
 
 2. Many poets think that poetry is the art of uniting pleasure 
 with truth, by calling imagination to the help of reason. 
 
 3. Few persons reflect that time, like money, may be lost by 
 unseasonable avarice. 
 
 4. So many years of familiarity were chains of iron which 
 linked me to those men who beset me every hour. 
 
 5. How many wise men f have thought that, to seclude one's 
 self from the world, was to pull out the teeth of devouring ani- 
 
 (1.) Muck is, &c. (one has a great deal of pains, and little of real enjoyments.) 
 (3.) Unseasonable, bors de propos. 
 
 (4.) Familiarity, habitude ,• linked, lier ; beset, obs£der. 
 
 (5.) Hoxu many, quede ; to seclude one's self, se retirer ; pull cut of, arracber 
 & ; to take away from, 6tcr a. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 363 
 
 PLACE OF THE SUBJECT WITH REGARD TO THE VERB. 
 
 It has been seen that the subject of a verb is either a 
 noun, or a pronoun, and that this subject must always 
 be expressed in French. It remains to speak of the 
 place of this subject with respect to the verb. 
 
 Rule. The subject, whether a noun, or pronoun, is 
 generally placed before the verb. 
 
 L'ambition effrenee de quclques The boundless ambition of a 
 
 homines, a, dans tous les few men has, in all ages, been 
 
 temps, etc la vraie cause des the real cause of the revolu- 
 
 r evolutions des itats, tions of empires. 
 
 Quand nous nageons dans Va- When we roll in plenty, we 
 
 bondance, it est Men rare que seldom think of the miseries 
 
 nous nous occupions des maux of others. 
 d'autrui,^ 
 
 mals, to take away from the wicked, the use of his poniard, from 
 calumny its poisons, and from envy its serpents ! 
 
 6. A company of young Phoenicians of uncommon beauty, clad 
 in fine linen, whiter than snow, danced a ■ long while the dances 
 of their own * country, then those of Egypt, and lastly, those of 
 Greece. 
 
 7. A troop of nymphs, crowned with flowers, whose lovely 
 tresses flowed over their shoulders, and waved with the wind,, 
 swam in shoals behind her car. 
 
 8. At the time of the invasion of Spain by the Moors, an innu- 
 merable multitude of people retired into the Asturias, and there pro- 
 claimed Felagius king. 
 
 9. A third part of the enemy were left dead on the field of battle ; 
 the rest surrendered at discretion. 
 
 10. The innumerable crowd of carriages which are to be seen in 
 London during the winter, astonishes foreigners. 
 
 (~.) Company, troupe ; clad in, et vfitu cle ; linen, lin. 
 
 (7.) Lovely , beau ; tresses, cheveu ; flo-wed, pendre ; waved, Hotter ; with, au 
 gre de ', swam, nager ; shoals, foule ; car, clur. 
 
 (8.) Moon, Maure $ retired, se retirer ; Jisturias, Asturies ; PclagiitSy Pelage. 
 (9.) A third part, un tiers ; enemy, pi.; surrendered, se rendre. 
 (10.) Crowd, quantite ; which are, (active voice, on.) 
 
 f EXERCISE. 
 I. Youth is full of presumption, it expects every thing from 
 
 (1.) Full of presumption, presomptueux ; expects, se promettre ; itself all snJJU 
 cient, pouvolr tout ; that it has, avoir. 
 
364 PARTICULAR RULES CU THE VERB. 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1. In these interrogative phrases the question is made 
 either with a pronoun, or a noun : if with a pronoun, 
 this is always placed after the verb, as, 
 
 Que dit-oji ? irai-je d la campagne ? dc qui parlc-t-or. 1 
 
 If with a noun, the noun is sometimes placed before, 
 and sometimes after the verb ; it stands before, when 
 the pronoun personal which answers to it, asks the ques- 
 tion, as, 
 
 Cetle nouvelle est-ette sure ? les kommes se rendent-ils toujours d 
 la raison ? 
 
 It stands after, when a pronoun absolute, or an interro- 
 gative adverb, placed at the beginning of the phrase, al- 
 low 7 the suppression of the personal pronoun, as, 
 
 Que dit votre ami ? dquois'accupevotrefr&re? oil demeure votrt 
 cousin ? 
 
 \ Remark. In interrogative sentences, when the 
 verb which precedes il, elle, on, ends with a vowel, the 
 
 itself: although frail, it thinks itself all-sufficient, and that it has 
 nothing to fear. 
 
 2. Commerce is like certain springs ; if you attempt to * divert 
 their course, you dry them up. 
 
 3. It is enough that falsehood is falsehood, to be unworthy of 
 a man who speaks in the * presence of God. and who is to sacri- 
 fice everything to truth. 
 
 4. The ambition and avarice of man are the sources of his un- 
 happiness. 
 
 5. Ttiey punished, in Crete, three vices which have remained 
 unpunished in all other nations : ingratitude, dissimulation, and 
 avarice. 
 
 6. Like the Numidian lion, goaded by cruel hunger, and rush- 
 ing upon a flock of feeble sheep, he tears, he slays, he wallows in 
 blood. 
 
 (-2.) "Spring's, source j attempt, vouloir ; dry wp, fa ire tarir. 
 
 (3.) It is enough, suffire ; falsehood, mepsonge . ■ en ; U tn sacri- 
 
 fice, doit. 
 
 (.).) Punished, inil-- ; hoot remained, 6tic •, »>i, chex. 
 
 (6.) Like the, semblable a un •, JVui x adsd fry, &c. (that 
 
 cruel hunger goads) d^vorer ; rushing (which rusliec upon,) entree ilans \ tears, 
 declarer -,'slays, ego'ger ; v:allorvs % nager. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 365 
 
 letter -/- is put between that verb and the pronoun, 
 as, 
 
 ArrivG-t-il ? viendra-t-eUe ? aime-t-on les zauriens ? 
 Whence stands after a verb, which ends with e mute, 
 that e mute is changed into e acute, as, aime-je ? puissi. 
 je ? But w r hen the transposition of je after the verb be- 
 comes harsh, euphony then requires another turn, so 
 instead of cours-je ? dors-je ? which would be intole- 
 rable, we must say, est-ce que je cours ? est-ce que j* 
 dors ?f 
 
 2. Incidental sentences which express that we are 
 quoting somebody's words, as, 
 
 Je meurs innocent, a dit Louis I die innocent, said Louis XVL 
 
 XVI 
 Je le veux bitn, dit-il, I am very willing, said he, 
 
 3. Impersonal verbs, and these words, tel, ainsi, &e. 
 
 II est arrivS un grand malheur, A great misfortune has happen- 
 ed. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Have yon forgotten all that Providence has done for you.? 
 how have you escaped the shafts of your enemies 7 how have yon 
 been preserved from the dangers which surrounded you on all 
 sides I could you be so blind as not to acknowledge and adore the 
 all-powerful hand that has miraculously saved you ? 
 
 2. What will posterity say of you, if, instead of devoting to 
 the happiness of mankind the great talents which you have re- 
 ceived from nature, you make use of them only to deceive and 
 corrupt them. 
 
 3. Do not the misfortunes which we experience often contribute 
 to our ■ prosperity ? 
 
 4. Why are th» works of nature so perfect ? Because each 
 work is a whole, and because she labours upon an eternal plan, 
 from which blie never deviates. Why, on the contrary, are the 
 'productions of man so imperfect ? It is because the human mind 
 being unable to create any thing, and incapable of embracing the 
 universe at a single glance, can * produce only after having been 
 enriched by experience and meditation. 
 
 (1.) Escaped, echapper a \ shafts, trait ; prese>-ved } garantir ; on all si<ks t de 
 pvti ; to as, assez pour ; suvcJ, conserve!*. 
 
 sbnsacrer ; mankind, homme, pi. ; deceive, £garer. 
 ( '. Experience, eprcuver ; contribute to, tourner en. 
 
 (4.) Because, e'esi que ; and because, etque ; being unable, ne pouvoir ; inca- 
 pable, (not being able ;) at, -ie ;glancc, vue -, enriched, fecondc. 
 
366 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 Tel 6lait V acharnement du sol- Such was the fury of the sot- 
 to, que, &c. dier, that, <fcc. 
 
 Ainsi finit cette sanglanU tra- Thus ended that bloody tr& 
 
 g6die,$ gedy. 
 
 4. When the subjunctive is used to express a wish, 
 or for quand mhne and a conditional, as, 
 
 Puissent tous les peuples se con- May all nations be convinced 
 
 vaincre dc cette veritS, of this truth. 
 
 Dusse-je y p6rir,firai, Should I perish there, I will go. 
 
 5. When the subject is followed by several words 
 which are dependent upon it, and form an incidental 
 sentence which, by its length, might obscure the rela- 
 tion of the verb to the subject; perspicuity then requires 
 that the subject should be displaced. 
 
 Sometimes, however, this transposition of the subject 
 is only the effect of taste, to avoid an inharmonious ca- 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. True glory, said he, is founded inhumanity; whoever pre- 
 fers his own glory to the feelings of humanity, is a monster of 
 pride, and not a man. 
 
 2. There have happened, for these * ten years, so many events 
 exceeding all probability, that posterity will find it very difficult 
 to credit them. 
 
 3. Such was that incorruptible Phocion, who answered the de- 
 puties of Alexander, who were telling him that this powerful mo- 
 narch loved him as the only honest man : well, then 2, let hhn al- 
 low me 1 to be and to appear so. 
 
 4. Thus ended, by the humiliation of Athens, that dreadful war 
 of twenty- seven years, to * which ambition gave rise, which hatred 
 made atrocious, and which was as fatal to the Greeks, as their an- 
 cient confederation had proved advantageous to them. 
 
 (1.) Is founded, ne se trouver pas hors de ;feetinzs, sentiment. 
 
 (2.) There have happened for, il se passer depuis ; exceeding, hors de j proba- 
 bility, vraisemblance ; will find very difficult, avoir bien de la peine ; to credit, 
 ajouter foi a. 
 
 (.3.) Loved, cherir ; honest man, homme de bien ; wm, ho ! 5 to be so, d fitre 
 tel ; appear so, le parattre. . 
 
 (4.) Ended, se terminer ; gave rise, faire naitrc ; made, rendre ; had proved, 
 
 etre. 
 
 If EXERCISE. 
 1. The gods grant that you may never experience such misfor- 
 tunes ! 
 
 (1.) Grant, faire ; experience, eprouver de. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 867 
 
 dence : or it is used by an orator, who wishes to rouse 
 the attention of his hearers by a bold and unexpected 
 turn.1T 
 
 GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS. 
 
 When the regimen of a verb is a noun, it is generally 
 placed after the verb : but to this rule there is one 
 exception, besides those which will hereafter be men- 
 tioned. 
 
 Exception. In an interrogative sentence, the regi- 
 men is placed before the verb, when this regimen is 
 joined to an absolute pronoun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quel objet voyez-vous ? What object do you see ? 
 
 A quelle science vous appliquez- To what science do you apply 
 
 vous ? yourself? 
 
 De quelle affaire vous occupez- About what business are you 
 
 vous? employed? 
 
 Remark. In French, a verb can never have two re- 
 gimens direct ; therefore, when a verb has two regi- 
 mens, both nouns, one of them must necessarily be pre- 
 ceded by a preposition. 
 
 2. May you, O wise old man ! in a repose diversified by pleas- 
 ing occupations, enjoy the past, lay hold of the present, and charm 
 your latter days with the hope of eternal felicity. 
 
 3. What is not in the power of the gods ! were you at the low- 
 est depths, the power of Jupiter could draw you from thence : 
 
 i in Olympus, beholding the stars under your feet, Ju- 
 pit. •!• could plunge you to the bottom of the abyss, or precipitate 
 you int.) the flames of gloomy Tartarus. 
 
 4. There, through meadows enamelled with (lowers, glide a 
 thousand various rivulet?, distributing every where their pure 
 (and) limpid waters. 
 
 5. Already, for the honour of France, there * had come into ad- 
 ministration a man more distinguished for his understanding and 
 virtues than for his dignities. 
 
 . : with, de. 
 ^ (3.) /* not in the po-a.-;r of, ne peuvent ; zvere, suhj-j ; lozcest depths, £>nd de 
 ftbtnae; power, . o ..Id, pou\oir, cond-1 ; Olympru, Olympe ; ttars, 
 
 astre : gl"oviy, noir ; Tartarus^ Taitaie. 
 
 (4.) Through, au milieu de •, -,i:ih. <W j giiue, serpemtr ; rivuUtM, ruLseau ; 
 distributing, 'which distribute); their, une. 
 
 (5.) find come, etre em iration, (of affairs) \for, par j uruhrsltind- 
 
 ing, esprit.. 
 
368 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Donnez ce livre d votrefrere, Give that book to your brother 
 
 On a accusi Ciceron <T impru- Cicero has been accused of im- 
 dence et de faiblesse, prudenceandweakness. 
 
 Though the natural order of the ideas seems to re- 
 quire that the regimen direct be placed before the indi- 
 rect, the perspicuity of the sentence does not allow it in 
 all cases. 
 
 Rule. When a verb has two regimens, the shorter is 
 generally placed first ; but if they be of equal length, 
 the regimen direct will precede the indirect. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Les hypocrites s'itudient d parer Hypocrites make it their study 
 le vice des dehors de la ver- to deck vice with the exterior 
 tu, of virtue. • 
 
 Les hypocrites s'ttudient d parer Hypocrites make it their study 
 des dehors de la vertu les to deck with the exterior of 
 vices les plus honteux et les virtue the most shameful and 
 plus dicriSs, most odious vices. 
 
 V ambition sacrijie le present d Ambition sacrifices the present 
 Vavenir, mais la volupti sacri- to the future, but pleasure 
 fie l'avenir aupresentj sacrifices the future to the 
 
 present. 
 
 Rule. A noun may be governed at once by two 
 verbs, provided those verbs do not require different re- 
 gimens. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 On doit aimer et respecter les We ought to love and respect 
 
 rois, kings. 
 
 Ce general attaqua et prit la That general attacked and took 
 
 ville, the city. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS. 
 
 1. Illustrious examples teach us, that God has hurled from 
 their thrones princes who contemned his laws : he reduced to the 
 condition of a beast the haughty Nebuchadnezzar, whe icantcd to usurp 
 divine honours. 
 
 2. Wretched is * the man who feeds his mind icith chimeras. 
 
 3. Our interest should prompt us to prefer virtue to vice, wisdom 
 to pleasure, and modesty to vanity 
 
 (J.) Illustrious, faraeux ; teach, appi'endre ; hurled, renverser ; haughty, sn- 
 perbe 5 Nabuchodonosor ; wanted, vouloir. 
 (2.) Feeds, ivpaitre. 
 (3.) Should, devoir, ind-1 •, prompt, porter ', pleasure, volupt£. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 369 
 
 But we must not say, 
 Cet officier ait aqua et sc rendit That officer attacked and made 
 mailre de la wile, himself master of the city. 
 
 A different turn should be given to the sentence, by 
 placing the noun after the first verb, and adding en be- 
 fore the second, as, 
 Cet officier attaqua la ville et s'en That officer attacked the city 
 
 rendit maUre,t and made himself master of 
 
 it. 
 
 OF THE USE PROPER, OR ACCIDENTAL, OF MOODS AND 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 The present is used to express an existing state, as, 
 Je suis ici f I am here. 
 
 An invariable state, as, 
 Dieu est de toute Sterniti, God is from all eternity. 
 
 A future near at hand, as, 
 H est demainfite, To-morrow is a holiday. 
 
 Or even a preterit, when, to give a sort of animated 
 picture, we relate a thing past as passing. Thus, we 
 find in Racine, 
 J" ax vu votre malheureux fits I have seen your unhappy sod 
 
 traini par ses chccaux, dragged along by his horses. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1 Luxury is like a torrent, which carries away, and overthrows 
 every thing it meets. 
 
 2. Nothing can * resist the operation of time : it, at length, un- 
 dermines, alters, or destroys every thing. 
 
 3. Among the Spartans, public education had two objects: the 
 first, to harden their bodies by fatigue ; the second, to exciCe and 
 nourish in their minds the love of their country, and an enthu- 
 siasm for what is great. 
 
 (I.) r arrics away, entralner *, overthrows, renverser ; every thing, tout ce 
 que. 
 
 ijitrat inn, action •, at length, a la longue ; undermines, miner. 
 .hnong the Spartans, a S[wirte ', lo,de ; harden, endurcir •, by, a ; their 
 must he rendered by the article for what is great, des graudes choses. 
 
370 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 But, suddenly passing from the preterit to the pre 
 sent, the speaker adds, 
 
 n veut les rappelcr, et sa voiz He calls out to stop them, hut 
 les effraie, his voice frightens them. 
 
 In English, the verb to be, is frequently used with 
 the participle present, as, 
 
 I am reading, I am translating, I shall be writing. 
 
 This construction is not adopted in French ; and 
 whenever found, it is to be translated in French simply 
 by the verb, put in the tense expressed by the verb to 
 be. Thus, J am reading, must in expressed by je lis : 
 I shall be writing, must be rendered fecrirai, &c.1T 
 
 The imperfect is used — 1. To denote the recurrency 
 of an action at a time which is past, as, 
 Qusmd fetais d Paris, fallais When I was at Paris, I often 
 
 souvent am Champs Elysees, went to the Champs Elysies: 
 
 IF EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF MOODS, &c. 
 
 1. He is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from 
 the fatigue of business, by some instructive and agreeable read 
 ing. 
 
 2. Truth, eternal by its nature, is immutable as God himself. 
 
 3. I never let a day pass without devoting an hour or two to 
 reading the ancients. 
 
 4. It is this week that the new piece comes out. 
 
 5. The armies were in sight : nothing was heard on all sides 
 but dreadful cries : the engagement began. Immediately a 
 cloud of arrows darkens the air and covers the combatants ; no- 
 thing is heard but doleful cries of the dying, or the clattering 
 of the arms of those who fall in the conflict; the earth groans 
 beneath a heap of dead bodies, and rivers of blood stream every 
 where ; there is nothing in this confused mass of men enraged 
 against one another but slaughter, despair, revenge, and brutal 
 fury. 
 
 (1.) Fi- relaxing, delasser ; reading, lecture. 
 
 (2.) /?</,de*, immut able, immuable. 
 
 (3.) .Let*' ; devoting, consacrer ; reading, la lecture de. 
 
 (4.) Come out, on donner. 
 
 (5. ) Sight, presence ; nothing was, fcc. on ne que, ind-2 ; the engagement began, 
 on en venir aux mains, ind-3; cloud, nuee ; arrows, trait ; darkens, obscurcir ; 
 nothing is, &.c. on ne plus que ; doleful, plaintif ; clattering, bruit ; conflict, 
 mSlee ; groans, geniir 5 beneath, sous ; heap, monceau ', rivers, ruisseau ; stream, 
 couler •, there is nothing in, ice. ce ne fitre dans *, mass, aiuas ; enraged, acharn£ ; 
 but, que •, slaughter, massacre. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 371 
 
 2. For a past which has some duration, especially in 
 narrations, as, 
 
 Rome ila.il aVahord gouvemtc par Rome was at first governed by 
 des rois,\ kings. 
 
 In French, the preterit definite and the preterit indefi- 
 nite are not used indifferently. 
 
 The preterit definite is used, when speaking of a 
 time which is entirely past, and of which nothing re- 
 mains, as, 
 
 Je fis un voyage d Bath le mois I took a journey to Bath last 
 
 demif, month. 
 
 T6crivis hier d Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 
 
 To authorize the use of this tense, there must be the 
 interval of, at least, one day. It is the most used in 
 the historic style, and for that reason called parfait his- 
 toriqne. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT. 
 
 1. When I was at Paris, I went every morning to take a walk 
 ifi the Champs Etystes, or the Bois de Boulogne : afterwards I 
 came home, where I employed myself till dinmer, either in reading 
 or writing ; and, in the evening, I generally went for amusement 
 to the French Theatre or the Opera. 
 
 2. Whenliflffsin the prime of life, like the light butterfly, I 
 fluttered from object to object, without being able to settle to any 
 thing : eager for pleasure, I seized every thing that had its appear- 
 ance : alas ! how far was I then from foreseeing that I should de 
 plore with so much bitterness the loss of that precious time. 
 
 :• For a short time after Abraham, the knowledge of the true 
 
 ired in Palestine and Egypt. MeJchisedec, king of 
 
 •st of the Most High 2 God 1. Abimelech, 
 
 k;u_ oi Gerar, and his successor of the same name, feared God, 
 
 by lii> name, and reverenced hi? power. But in Moses' time, 
 
 nations adored even beasts and reptiles. Every thing was God 
 
 bat God himself. 
 
 (!•) Take « walk, se promener •, in, a ; came home, rentier chez soi ; was busy, 
 iper ; reading, (by tbe verb; ; for amusement, me delasser ; French 1'hca- 
 Frun(jaise. 
 M <>f Iff, fleur de Page 5 butterfly, papilloa ; fluttered, voler ; being 
 it/e, me fixer ; eager for, avide de ; had its appearance, m'en 
 , how, que ; with so much bitterness, (so bitterly). 
 (i.) ^zuort, jurer ; reverenced, admirer, the nations, on ; even. jasqB'A; but, 
 exec, 
 
372 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 The preterit indefinite is used either for a past inde- 
 terminate, or for a past of which something still remains, 
 as, 
 
 Tax voyagi en Italic, I have travelled in Italy. 
 
 Tai dejeunS cc matin d Londres, I breakfasted this morning in 
 et dine d Richmond ,\ London, and dined at Rich- 
 
 mond. 
 
 The preterit indefinite is sometimes used instead of a 
 future just approaching, as, 
 
 Avez-vous bieniotfini ? Have you soon done 1 
 
 Ouiyfaifini dans le moment, Yes I shall have done in a mo- 
 
 ll ment. 
 
 % EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF THE PRETERIT. 
 
 Amenophis conceived the design of making his son a conqueror. 
 He set about it, after the manner of the Egyptians, that is, with 
 great ideas. All the children who were born on * the same day 
 as Sesostris, were brought to court by order of the king : he had 
 them educated as his own children, and with the same care as 
 Sesostris. When he was grown up, he made him serve his ap- 
 prenticeship in a war against the Arabs: this young prince learned 
 there to bear hunger and thirst, and subdued that nation, till then 
 invincible. He afterwards attacked Lybia, and conquered it. Af- 
 ter these successes, he formed the project of subduing the whole 
 world. In consequence of this. * he entered Ethiopia, which he 
 made tributary. He continued his victories in Asia. Jerusalem 
 was the first to feei the force of his arms : the rash Rehoboam 
 could not resist him, and Sesostris carried away the riches of Solo- 
 mon. He penetrated into the Indies, farther than Hercules and 
 Bacchus, aod farther than Alexander did afterward. The Scy- 
 thians obeyed him as far as the Tanais ; Armenia and Cappadocia 
 were subject to him. In a word, he extended his empire from the 
 Ganges to the Danube. 
 
 Making, faire de ; set about it, sy prendre ; after, a } ideas, pensee ; brought, 
 amener 5 had educated, faire elever ; g roxon up, grand ; made serve, fit faire ; ap- 
 prenticeship, apprentissage *, in. par ; entered, entrer dans *, made, rendre ; as 
 far as. jusqu'a ; Cappadocia. Cappadoce. 
 
 H EXERCISE. 
 1. Enflamed with the desire of knowing mankind, I have tra- 
 velled, not only among the most polished nations, but even 
 among the most barbarous. I hare observed them in the differ- 
 ent degrees of civilization, from the state of simple nature to the 
 
 (l.) IVith, de ; mankind, homme, pi. ; to, ehez ; polished nations, peuple 
 police) barbarous, nilio.i sauvage ; fro»> depuis ; simple, pur ; to, jusqu'a , 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 373 
 
 The two preterits anterior differ in the same manner 
 •he two preceding preterits, but they are always ac- 
 companied by a conjunction, or an adverb of time, as, 
 
 Jc snis sorti des que fai eu I went out as soon as I had 
 
 dined. 
 I had done yesterday at noon. 
 
 The pluperfect denotes that a thing took place before 
 another, which had itself already taken place, as, 
 
 rOji I had iienhe came in. 
 
 most perfect state of society, and wherever I went, the result was 
 the same : that is to say, I have every where seen beings occupied 
 in drying up the different sources of happiness that nature bad 
 placed within their reach. 
 
 woe travelled this year in Italy, where I had an * opportuii - 
 ty of seeing several master-pieces of antiquity, and where I made 
 a valuable collection of scarce medals. I there admired the per- 
 fection to which they have brought architecture, painting, and mu- 
 sic ; but what pleased me most there, was the beauty of the cli- 
 mate of Naples. 
 
 wherever I -cent, danstoos les pays ; the result was the same, (I had the same re- 
 sult :) in drying up, a tarir 5 rvithin their reach, a leur portee. 
 
 '.unity, occasion ; tnaster-picces, chef d'oeuvre ; scarce, rare-, phased 
 me moi,\ t'.iist- le plus de plalsir ; xcas, iod-1. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. As soon as I had examined this phenomenon, I tried to find 
 out its causes. 
 
 'Z. As goon as we had crossed the river, we found ourselves in a 
 wood where there was not a Dingle foot-path traced. 
 
 soon as the great Sesostris had satisfied his ambition by 
 ihe conquest of so many empires, he returned into Egypt, where 
 lie devoted the whole of the day to administering strict justice to 
 bifl 1 i. in the evening, he recreated himself by holding 
 
 conferences with the learned, or by conversing with the mosi up- 
 right people of his kingdom. 
 
 4. ! had only received, like most of the grandees, an education 
 in which I had imbibed nothing bat sentiments of pride and in- 
 sensibility ; that i-, they had done every thing in their power, 
 
 (I.) As soon as, des que ; tried to find out, en rechercher. 
 
 (2.) Crossed, traverser ; found ourselves, se trouver engage \ foot-path, sentier 
 de. 
 
 (3.) The whole of the day, jour entier ; administering, rendre, iaf-1 ; ttrit .', 
 exact; recreated, delasser •, by holding conferences, a s'entretenir ; upright, 
 honn^te *, people, v 
 
 (\.) Qrandee, grand ; i.ii'iibid, p liser ; thty, on ; m their povcer, ce qu'au 
 ■b. etoufler ; benevolent, uienfaisant. 
 
374 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 As the use of these different preterits is attended 
 with some difficulty, the following analysis is added, in 
 order more clearly to explain the manner in which they 
 are used. - 
 
 We read in Marmontel the following extract ; 
 
 Celicour, d Vdge de quinzc Celieour, at the age of nf 
 ans, avail tHe dans lo rttonde ce ieeu, had been iu the world what 
 qu J on uppelle un petit prodige. is called a iiitle prodigy. 
 
 The author employs the pluperfect, as he speaks of 
 a period of time anterior to all those which he is going 
 to mention. 
 
 II faisait des vers Us plus ga~ He composed the most agree- 
 
 lans du monde ; il u'y avait pas able love-sonnets imaginable; 
 
 dans le voisinuge une jolic there was not a pretty woman 
 
 ftmme, qu'il rCeut celebrie : c'e- in the neighbourhood that he 
 
 tait dommagc de laissertant de had not celebrated: it teas a 
 
 talens enfouis dans une petite pity to let so many talents be 
 
 ville ; Paris deVait en tire le buried in a little town ; Paris 
 
 theatre. tens the theatre on which they 
 
 ought to be exhibited. 
 
 Here the author makes use of the imperfect, be 
 cause he speaks of the habitual employment of Celi- 
 cour. 
 
 Et /'on fit si bien, que sonpbre And they contrived matters so 
 se resolut de Vy envoy er. that his father determined to send 
 
 him there. 
 
 Now, the author passes to the preterit definite, be- 
 cause he is no longer speaking of what Celicour used 
 to do, but what he did at a time past, and of which no- 
 thing remains. 
 
 Ce fire etait un Iionnite This father was a good sort 
 
 homme, qui aimait V esprit sans of man, who teas fond of wit, 
 
 en avoir, et qui admirait, sans without having any, and ad- 
 
 savoir pourqum, tout ce quive- mired, without knowing why, 
 
 nait de la capitate. 11 avait eveiy tiling that came from the 
 
 mime des relations lilUrairts, metropolis. Nay, he even had 
 
 el du nombre de sos corrcspondans some literary connexions, and 
 
 etait un connaisscur nomme M. among his correspondents icas 
 
 de Fintac. a connoisseur of the name oc" 
 
 Fintac. 
 
 to stifle in me happy ami benevolent dispositions which I had re- 
 ceived from nature. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 375 
 
 Here, again, the author resumes the form of the 
 imperfect, as he is now speaking of the habitual state 
 of Celicour's father in his little town, and because, in 
 this passage, he merely relates what that father was 
 doing, at a time past, which has no kind of relation to 
 the present. 
 
 Ce fut princip dement d lui It was paaticularly to him that 
 que Ctticourfut recommandS, Celicour was recommended. 
 
 The form of the preterit definite is now resumed, 
 because this is an action passed, at a time of which no- 
 thing is left, &c.:j: 
 
 There is this difference between the two future 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. God, who had created his angels in holiness, would have 
 their happiness depend upon themselves: they could insure 
 their felicity, by giving themselves willingly 10 their Creator ; 
 but they delighted in themselves, and not in God : immediately 
 those spirits of light became spirits of darkness. 
 
 2. There is a letter which Philocles has written to a friend of 
 his, about his project of making himself king of Carpathus. I 
 perused that letter, and it seemed to me to be the hand of Philo- 
 cles. They had perfectly imitated his writing. This letter Ihrtxo 
 me into a strange surprise. I read it again and again, and could 
 not persuade myself that it was written * by Philocles, when I re- 
 called to my mind the affecting marks which he had given me of 
 his disinterestedness and integrity. 
 
 3. Those who had shewn the greatest zeal for the state and my 
 >n, did yiot think themselves obliged to undeceive me, after 
 
 so terrible an example. I myself icas afraid lest truth should 
 brcj b in spile of all my flatter- 
 
 ould have raised in mebi '<* 
 remorse. My cffeminaey inion which a treacherous 
 
 minister lead gained over me, threw me into a kind of" despair of 
 ever recovering my * liberty. 
 
 (1.) Have their happiness depend, ss.) dtpendre, subj-3 ', 
 
 could, pooToir 5 dtlighLtd in, se plaire en ; of Light, lumiueux ; darkness, ten^- 
 bres. 
 
 (2.) There is, voila ; about, sur ; Carpathus, Carpathie ; to be, de ; they, on , 
 again »nd again, san9 cesse ; by, de ; when I recalled to, repasser dans, inf-J ; 
 intrgrity, bonne foi 
 
 ot think themselves oil ijed to, se croire dispense de ; was afraid 
 hrt, craindre cpae •, break through, percer, snbj- ! ; reach, pan I ; in 
 
 tpi'e of, maigTd ; raised in, causer a ; effaninacy, mollebse ;domiv.ion, ascendant^ 
 treacherous, perfide j gained, prendre j threw, plonger , recovering, renirer 
 
376 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 tenses, that the period of time expressed by the future 
 absolute, may, or may not be determined, as, 
 
 Sirai a la campagnc, or firai demain d la ccmpagne, 
 while, in the future anterior, the time is necessarily de- 
 termined, as, 
 
 Tauraijini, quand vous arriverez.il 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 The conditional is used — 1. To express a wish, as, 
 Qtteje serais, or, quej'aurais ete How glad J should be, or should 
 content de riussir dans cetle have been to succeed in that 
 affaire / affair. 
 
 2. With si, if, whether, expressing a doubt, as, 
 
 Demandtz-lui sHl serait venu Ask him whether he would have 
 acec nous suppos6 qiCil rfeut come with us, had he not 
 pas eu affaire, been busy. 
 
 3. Before, or after the imperfect, or pluperfect of 
 the indicative, preceded by si> as, 
 
 Nous nous epargnerions Men des We should spare ourselves 
 peincs, si nous savions moderer much pain, did we know how 
 nos desirs, to moderate our desires. 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Remember that youth is~ but a flower, which will wither 
 almost as soon as it * opens. Thou .izilt see thyself gradually 
 changed. Smiling graces, sweet pleasures, strength, health, and 
 joy, icill vanish like a pleasing dream ; nothing but the sad re- 
 membrance will be left thee. 
 
 2. I shall next ycur take a journey into Greece, and I am pre- 
 paring my self for it by reading the travels'^ the young Atta- 
 ch arpis. 
 
 3. When you have read the celebrated discourse of Bossuct on 
 Universal History, and studied in it the causes of the rise and fall 
 of states, you ic'dl he less astonished at the revolutions, more or 
 less sudden, that modern empires have experienced, which ap- 
 peared to yon in the most flourishing state. 
 
 (1.) Will wither, (will be almost as soon witli j opens, t'dose , 
 
 gradually, insensiblemsnt ; lively, riant ', pleasing, bean ; nvthir.g will be hft, il 
 
 n'en rener. 
 
 (2.) 7'ttJfce, faire \for it, y ', reading, lecture de \(\ vlui.) 
 
 (}.) Have read, wd-3 j ant/, que von^. i-: !eur ; /all, 
 
 chute ; sudden, subite ; (that have experienced th< 
 
 appeared ind--. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 377 
 
 Vous auriez 6t6 plus hzureux. si You would have been more 
 zous ariez suivimes conseils, happy, if you had followed 
 
 my advice. 
 
 4. With quand, used instead of si, qucique, or quand 
 mtrne ; the verb preceded by quand is generally in one 
 of the conditionals, as, 
 
 Quand Vavare possiderait tout Were the miser to possess all 
 I'or du mondc, il nc scraitpas the gold in the world, still he 
 encore content, would not be satisfied. 
 
 5. Lastly, for various tenses of the indi2ative, as, 
 
 roiritz-vous voire fits ingrzt ? Co 
 
 i 
 :h means, croyez-vous, &c. 
 
 T/auriez-vous soupconne d'un tel C 
 vice ? 
 
 which means, Vavez-vous, &c. 
 
 Quelle raison pourrait m'empe- V\ 
 cher daller vous voir ? 
 
 which means, quelle cause pourra, &c.f 
 
 t -EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. If it were even possible for men always to act conformably 
 
 to equity, as it is the multitude that must judge their conduct, 
 
 the wicked would always blame and contradict them from ma- 
 
 I the good sometimes from mistake. 
 
 , hat false steps I should have made but for you, at my en- 
 
 to the world ! 
 I it for your counsels, I should have failed In this undertak- 
 ing 
 
 4. How satisfied I should have been, if you had sooner informed 
 me of your happiness 
 
 5. If we gave to infancy none but just and clear notions, there 
 would not 0e by far so many false wits in the world. 
 
 G. Had Alexander conquered the whole world, his ambition 
 
 C roiritz-vous voire fils ingrzt ? Could you think your son un- 
 grateful ? 
 
 T/auriez-vous soupconne d'un tel Could you have suspected him 
 vice ? of such a vice ? 
 
 Quelle raison pourrait m'empe- What cause could prevent me 
 cher daller vous voir ? from coming to see you ? 
 
 (1.) If even, quand meme 5 were, cond- 1 ;for men, (tlj.it men ;) to act, ?ub 
 judgc, iuger de ; would b'nmt^ ird-7 j coy.trndict, c.oiser, ind-7. 
 (j.) I'/hnt, <jue dc ; tlevs, demarche 5 bvtfor, sans. 
 (i.) BulfTy >ans ;fuih'K <V!iouer. (4.) //W, q 
 
 (5.) V.'e. on : there tuould not he by far so many, il y aurait bien moi 
 (<>.) (When Alexander would have conquered ;) straitened, tror. a W 
 
 33* 
 
378 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 REMARK ON THE USE OF THE CONDITIONAL AND FUTURE. 
 
 Foreigners are very apt to use the future, or the 
 conditional after si, when meaning suppose que. They 
 
 say, 
 
 J'irai demain d la campagne, s'il I shall go into the country to- 
 
 feua beau, morrow, if the weatherbe fine. 
 
 Vous auriez vu le roi, si vous You would have seen the king 
 
 seriez venu, if you had come. 
 
 The impropriety of this construction will be obviated 
 by attending to the following 
 
 Rule. When a verb is preceded by si, meaning 
 suppose* que, the present is used instead of the future 
 absolute ; the preterit indefinite instead of the future 
 anterior ; the imperfect instead of the conditional pre- 
 ssnt, and the pluperfect instead of the conditional past. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tirai demain d la campagne, s'il I shall go to-morrow into the 
 
 fait beau, country, if it be fine weather. 
 
 U aura euVavantage, s'il a suivi He will have had the advan- 
 
 vos conseils, tage, if he has followed your 
 
 advice. 
 Jt serais conlent, si je wwsvoyais I should be pleased, if I saw 
 
 applique, you apply to study. 
 
 Trmrais &e content, si je vous I should have been pleased, if 
 
 avals vu applique*, I had seen you attentive to 
 
 your studies. 
 
 would not have been satisfied ; he xoould still have found himself 
 straitened in it. 
 
 7. Could you believe him vain enough to aspire to that high 
 degree of honour? 
 
 8. Could you Bvetf have thought him capable of deserting the 
 good cause, to go and side with rebels ? 
 
 9. Would yov. renounce being useful to the present generation, 
 because envy fastens on you ? 
 
 < I.) Dtserting, abandonner : to 50 and tide »&&, pour se ranger sous Vs dia- 
 peaux de. 
 
 (J ) fttuooiccj re-ioncer a } fastens, s'uitaclier ; o?i yu, A vos pas. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 379 
 
 Remark. This rule does not hold good, either when 
 si is placed between two verbs, the first of which im 
 plies doubt, uncertainty* as, 
 Je ne sais s'il viendra, 
 Or, with the second conditional post, as, 
 
 Vous m'eussiez trouve, sivousfussiez venu ce matin.\ . 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 There are conjunctions which govern the indicative, 
 (p. 294), and others which govern the subjunctive, 
 (p. 295). We call principal proposition the phrase 
 which is followed by the conjunction, and incidental, or 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 1. A voting man who is just entering the career of letters, 
 
 mediate the goodwill of the public, if he consider his first 
 successes only as an encouragement to do better. 
 
 2. That absurd criticism will h I only fools or mali- 
 cious people,* if attention Ita-s been paid to the spirit that per- 
 vades the whole, and the manner in which it is written. 
 
 3. Life mould possess many more sweets and charms, if men, 
 instead of tearing one another to pieces, formed but one society 
 of brethren. 
 
 4. The Athenians would Juice found in the young Alcibiade3 
 the only man capable of insuring their superiority in Greece, 
 had not that vain thoughtless people forced him. by an unjust, 
 or, at least, imprudent sentence, to banish himself from his 
 country. 
 
 ILDOW not ichellter reason will soon triumph over prejudice 
 and ignorance, but I am certain it will be the case sooner or 
 later. 
 
 G. Rome would have nercr attain d that high degree of splen- 
 dour and glory which astonishes us, had it not extended its con- 
 quests as much by its policy as by its arms. 
 
 (IJ (s just entering, tlebuter dans; career, carrieie \ conciliate, s'attirer ; 
 good win, bienveillance ; emnrider, regarder. 
 
 (2.") Fool", sot •, malicious, mechant ; paid, fair? \petveteU» the whole, r£gner 
 U"n-i boill i r.nitrt' • in u-htch, don!. 
 
 (3.) Possess, avoir ; tearing one another to jrieeee, s'entredeclurer. 
 
 iicriority, preponderance ; thoughtless, ledger •, lenience! cotu*nawartnn 
 
 (5 V Knmr, latolr ; it will be the case, cela fitre. 
 
 :.tuincd. parrenir a \poli<-y, politique. 
 
380 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 subordinate proposition, that which is placed after the 
 conjunction. In this sentence, 
 
 Je crois que vous aimez d jotter. 
 
 Je crois is the principal proposition, and vous aimez 
 ajouer is the subordinate proposition : que is the con- 
 junction that unites the two phrases. 
 
 General Rule. The verb of the subordinate pro- 
 position must be put in the indicative, when the verb of 
 the principal proposition expresses affirmation, in a 
 direct, positive, and independent manner ; but it is put 
 in the subjunctive, when that c f the principal proposition 
 expresses doubt, wish, or uncertainty. 
 
 Je sais qu'il est surpris, I know he is surprised. 
 
 Je erois qu'il viendra, I believe he will come. 
 
 Jc do ute qu'il soit surpris, I doubt his being surprised. 
 
 Jt doute qu'il vienne, I doubt his coming. 
 
 Je souhaite qu'il reussisse, I wish he may succeed. 
 
 Je tremble qu'il ne succombe,^ I tremble lest he should fail. 
 
 IT EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. The glory which has been ascribed to the Egyptians of 
 being the most, grateful of all men, shows that they icere likewise 
 the most sociable. 
 
 2. In Egypt, when it was proved that the conduct of a dead 
 man* had been bad, they condemned his memory, and he was 
 denied burial. 
 
 3. I am sure that by moderation, mildness, and politeness, you 
 will disarm even* envy itself. 
 
 4. The new philosophers say that colour is a sensation of the 
 soul. 
 
 5. I beli&ce you are as honest and disinterested as you seem to 
 be. 
 
 6. I doubt whether the Romans icould ever have triumphed 
 over the Gauls, if the different chiefs of this warlike people bad 
 not been disunited. 
 
 7. I could wish that the love, which we ought to have for one 
 another, were the principle of all our actions, as it is the basis of 
 all virtues. 
 
 (t.) Which has, &c qu'on •, ascribed, dormer j (rrMcful, reconnaissant, sing. ; 
 men, peuple (-.) IVas denial, priver tie j Wrial, «epulture. 
 
 (3 ) By- avec •, politeness, honnttete. (5.) Seem to be, le paraltre. 
 
 (o.) 11 hethcr, que. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 381 
 
 Do, did, trill, would, should, can, could, may, and 
 might, are sometimes, with respect to the French lan- 
 guage, simply signs of tenses, at others they are real 
 verbs. 
 
 There can be no difficulty about do and did ; these 
 are mere expletives, denoting interrogation, negation, 
 or merely emphasis, when they are joined to a verb. 
 
 J do love, J'aime. 
 
 I did love, J'aimois, or, j'aimai. 
 
 Do I love ? Aime-je ? 
 
 Did I love ? Aimais-ie, or, aimai-je ? 
 
 I do not lore, Je n'aime pas. 
 
 1 did not love, Je ir ahnais pas, or, je n'airnai pas. 
 
 In all these cases they are not expressed in French. 
 But when they are followed by a noun, or a pronoun, 
 then they are real verbs, and mean, f aire. 
 
 Do me that favour, Faites-moi ce plaisir. 
 
 He did it, II le fit 
 
 In short, by any thing else, except the verb with 
 which they are necessarily connected, as, 
 
 He did more than could have H fit plus qu'on n'eflt pu esp6~ 
 been expected, rer. 
 
 Should is onty a sign of the conditional, when it ex- 
 presses a thing which may happen upon some condition. 
 
 J should like a country life, if my J'aimerais la vie champetre, si 
 affairs would permit me to in- .mes affaires me permettaient 
 didge my inclination, de suivre mon gout. 
 
 But when it implies duty or obligation, it is a verb, 
 and must be expressed by the verb devoir, as, 
 
 8. Fear, lest it should be said that you feed upon chimeras, and 
 that you take the shadow for the reality. 
 
 9. The new philosophers will have colour to be a sensation of 
 the soul. 
 
 10. liritl have you to be a3 honest and disinterested as you 
 seem to be. 
 
 d vpo\, se reoaltre de. 
 
 I be, (that colour be.) 
 
382 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 We should never swerve from the Nous ne devrions jamais noua 
 path of virtue, ecarter du sentier de lavertu. 
 
 Can, could, may, and might, are not so difficult as 
 they appear at first sight ; because, in almost every in- 
 stance, there is no impropriety in rendering them by 
 the verb pouvoir. In general the first two imply a 
 power, a possibility, a capability, &c. and the others, a 
 permission, probability, &c. 
 
 Do, did, shall, will, &c. in English, are sometimes 
 used elliptically in the answers to interrogative sen- 
 tences. The French answer with the repetition of the 
 verb, accompanied with a pronoun expressive of the 
 idea of the interrogative sentence, as, 
 
 Will you do your exercise to- Ferez-vous votre theme an 
 day ? — Yes, I will: jourd'hui ? — Oui, je le ferai. 
 
 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Rule. When the first verb is in the imperfect, the 
 preterit, or the pluperfect, and the second denotes a 
 temporary action, this second verb is put in the imper- 
 fect, if we mean to express a present. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Je croyais, fai cru, f avals cru I thought, I have thought, I bad 
 que vous itudiez les miathima- thought that you were study 
 tiques, ing mathematics. 
 
 — In the >luperfect, if wo mean to express a past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 11 rri'assura quHl rtavait jamais He assured me that he had 
 tant ri, never laughed so much. 
 
 — And in the present of the conditional, if we mean to 
 express a future absolute. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 On rrCadit que votre frhre vien- I was told your brother would 
 drait d Londres I'kiver pro- come to town next winter. 
 chain, 
 
 But, although the first verb may be in some of these 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 383 
 
 tenses, yet the second is put in the present, when this 
 second verb expresses a thing which is true at all times. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Jci nu duaii, je o(S ai dit, je T told you, I have told you, I 
 d dit, quela santtfnic had 'old you, thai ha 
 la feticitS du corps, etlesavoir constitutes the happiness of 
 cellc de I'dme, the body, and knowledge Chat 
 
 of the soul. 
 
 Remark. In phrases where (ke et is pre- 
 
 ceded by que, it denotes, sometimes a past, sometimes 
 a present, with respect to the preceding verb. It de- 
 notes a past, when the verb which is joined to it by the 
 conjunction que is in the present, or future. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Votts savez, or vous saurez queh You know, or you must know 
 peuple Ronuiineta.it aussiavidc that the Romans were a 
 quC ambit ieux, people as covetous as they 
 
 were ambitious. 
 
 But it denotes a present, when the verb, which pre- 
 cedes it, is in the imperfect, one of the peterits, or the 
 pluperfect. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 On disuit. on a dit, on avail dit It was said, it has been said, 
 
 que Phoeionvtiutlc plus grand it had been said, that Pho- 
 
 ct If. phis honnete hommedeson cion was the greatest and 
 
 tewps, most upright man of his age. 
 
 /; q ■ a cut appris d Athene* As soon as it was known at 
 
 qu Aieibia It ctait d Lacede- Athens that Alcibiades was 
 
 >ne, on se rep c ntti de la pri- at Lacedemon, the Atheni- 
 
 dpitation acec laqudle on ans repented of the procipi- 
 
 iavait, condamni. tation with which they had 
 
 condemned him. 
 
 Nevertheless, the imperfect denotes the past, in 
 this last instance, when it signifies an action which was 
 past before that which is expressed by the lirst verb. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 En lisant Vhistoire des temps In reading the history of heroic 
 li'ro'iques, vous detcz avoir times, you must have re- 
 remarqu6 que ces hommes marked that those men Who 
 dont on a fait des demi-dirvz, have been made demi-gods, 
 etaient des clufs fbvees ft were ferocious and barbarous 
 barbanft digues d peine du chiefs, scarcely deserving the 
 nam d'/iomme.i . name of men. 
 
384 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE 
 AND THOSE OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Rule I. When the verb of the principal propo- 
 sition is in the present, or future, that of the subordi- 
 nate proposition is put in the present of the subjunctive, 
 to express a present, or future ; but in the preterit, to 
 express a past. We say, 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. I thought you were not ignorant that, to teach others the 
 principles of an art or science, it is necessary to have experience 
 and skill. 
 
 2. J. have been told that your sweetest occupation was to form 
 your taste, your heart, and your understanding. 
 
 3. Darius, in his flight, being* reduced to the necessity of 
 drinking water muddy and infected by dead bodies, affirmed that 
 he never had drunk with so much pleasure. 
 
 4. Care has been taken to inculcate in me, from infancy, that 
 I should succeed in the world, only in proportion as I should join 
 to the desire of pleasing, a great deal of gentleness and civility. 
 
 5. Ovid has said, that study softens the manners and corrects 
 every thing that is found in us rude and barbarous. 
 
 6. You know that those pretended heroes, whom Pagan an- 
 tiquity has made gods, ictre only barbarous and ferocious kings s 
 who overran the earth, not so much to conquer as to ravage it, 
 and who left every where traces of their fury and of their vices. 
 
 7. It has been said of Pericles, that his eloquence was Tike a 
 thunderbolt, which nothing could resist. 
 
 8. As soon as Aristides had said, that the proposal of Themis- 
 tocles zcas mjust, the whole people exclaimed, that they must not 
 think of it any longer. 
 
 9. Had you read the history of the early ages, you would know 
 that Egypt was the most enlightened country in the universe, and 
 the original spot* whence knowledge spread into Greece and the 
 neighbouring countries. 
 
 (1.) Were ignorant, ignore r : tench, instruiie dans ; it is necessary, avoir be- 
 soin *, skill, babilete. (2.) / have, «kc. (by the active voice) on. 
 
 (3.) Flight, deroute *, muddy, bourbeux ; aj/i>vud, assurer. 
 
 (4 ) Care has, tc. (active voice) on avoir ; in me, me ; in proportion, autartt 
 civthty, honnetete. ( •"'•) Corrects, eflacor ; is found, se trouver de. 
 
 (G.) Overran, parcourir ; not so much, moins. 
 
 (7.) It, on ; thunderbolt, foudre, m. ; (to) which. 
 
 (3.) Exclaimed, s'ecrier ; they must, t'alloir, ind-2; of it, y; any longes 
 plus. 
 
 (9.) Ages, temps ; the original spot * whence, celui d'ou ; n cig hb ouring,circOto 
 voisiu ; countries, lieu. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 386 
 
 11 faut que celui qui parte se 
 mette d la par tie de celui qui 
 Vicoute, 
 
 II voudra que zotre frere soit de 
 lapartie, 
 But we must say, 
 
 Four s'ilre Sieve d ce point de 
 grandeur, Ufaut que Rome ait 
 eu une suite non interrompue de 
 grands hommts, 
 
 He that speaks should accom- 
 modate himself to the un do- 
 standing of bimthat listens. 
 
 He will wish your brother to be 
 one of the party. 
 
 To have risen to that pitch of 
 grandeur, Rome must have 
 had an uninterrupted succes- 
 sion of great men. 
 
 Exception. Though the first verb be in the present, 
 or future, yet the second may be put in the imperfect, 
 or pluperfect of the subjunctive, when some conditional 
 expression is introduced into the sentence. 
 
 ft n'est point d'homme, quelque 
 mtrite qu il ait, qui ne fut trcs- 
 mortijil, s'il savait tout a qxi'on 
 pense de lui, 
 
 Oil trouvcra-t-on un homme 
 qui ne fit la mime faute, s'il 
 itait exposi aux mimes tenta- 
 tions ? 
 
 Je doute que zotre frere eut re- 
 ussi sans voire assistance^ 
 
 There is no man, whatever 
 merit he may have, that 
 would not feel very much 
 mortified, were he to know 
 all that is thought of him. 
 
 Where will you find the man 
 who would not have commit- 
 ted the same error, had he 
 been exposed to the same 
 temptations ? 
 
 I doubt whether your brother 
 would have succeeded, had 
 it not been for your assist- 
 ance. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He who wishes to teacli an art, must know it thoroughly, 
 he must "ire none but clear, precise, and well-digested notions of 
 it : he must instil them, one by one, into the minds of his pupils, 
 and, above all, lie must not overburden their memory with use- 
 less, or unimportant rules. 
 
 2. He fun st yield to the force of truth, when they shall have suf- 
 fered it to appear in its real light. 
 
 3. There is no work, however perfect people may suppose it, 
 that would not be liable to criticism, if it were examined with se- 
 verity and in every point of view. 
 
 (1.) It must (that he who, kc. know it) •, he must (not repeated), que ; instil, 
 (aire entrer ; by, a ', overburden, aurcharger ; unimportant, insignificant. 
 
 (?.) (It must, ind-7, that he) ; yield, se rendre ; vtffered, permettre ; it to ap- 
 pear, (that it appear) ; real light, vrai jour. 
 
 (3.) Would be liable, preter, suhj-J j with severity, a la rigueur ; in, touf T 
 point of view, face. 
 
 34 
 
386 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 Rule II. When the first verb is in the imperfect, 
 
 either of* the preterits, the pluperfect, or either of the 
 
 conditionals, the second is put in the imperfect of the 
 
 subjunctive, if we mean to express a present, or future ; 
 
 but it is put in the pluperfect, if we wish to express a 
 
 past. 
 Jevoulais, fai vouIu,feus voulu, je voudrais, or feusse voulu 
 
 que vous finissiez cette affaire. 
 Je ne savais pas, je n'ai pas su, &c. que vous eussiez etudie les 
 
 mathimaiiques. 
 
 Remark. With the preterit indefinite the second 
 
 verb is put in the present, if it expresses an action which 
 
 is, or may be done at all times, as, 
 
 Dieu a entoure les yeux de tunU God has surrounded the eyes 
 quesfort minces, transparentes with very thin tunics, trans- 
 au dehors, afin qu'on puisse parent on the outside, that 
 voir d travers, we may see through them. 
 
 And in the preterit, if we mean to express a past, as, 
 
 It a fallu qu'W ait sollicite ses He must have been obliged to 
 juges,^ solicit his judges, 
 
 4. I doubt whether his piece would have had the approbation 
 of connaisseurs, if he had not determined to make in it the changes 
 you judged necessary. 
 
 (4.) Approbation, suffrage-, had determined, se decider j in if, y \ judged, 
 Cnd-4. 
 
 f EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Mr. de Turenne never would buy any thing on credit, of 
 tradesmen, for fear, he used to say, they should lose a great part 
 of their demand, if he happened to be killed. All the workmen 
 who were employed about his house, had orders to bring in their 
 bill, before he set out for the campaign, and they were regularly 
 paid. 
 
 2. It would be belter, for a man who truly loves himself, to lost 
 his life, than to forfeit his honour by some base and shameful ac- 
 tion. 
 
 3. Lycurgus, in one of his laws, had forbidden to light home* 
 
 (1.) Would, vouloir, ind-- j buy on credit, prendre & creait •, nf, chez \ happen- 
 ed, venir ; were employed, travailltr; about, pour } bills, memoire ; he, on ; ic* 
 out for, se mettrc en. 
 
 (2.) To lose, (that he zoould lose) ; forfeit, ternir. 
 
 (3.) In, par; to light, que on eclairer, subj-J ; Mar, afin que ; reuch their houses, 
 te render chez eux ; getting intoxicated^ s'emvrcr. 
 
PARTICULAR I LES OF THE VERB. 887 
 
 In interrogative and negative sentences, the second 
 verb is generally put in the subjunctive, as, 
 
 Quel est Vinse?is6 qui tienne pour sur quHl xivra demain ? 
 Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les choses pussent tourner si 
 mal. 
 
 The verb is likewise in the subjunctive after the su- 
 perlative relative, and frequently after an impersonal 
 verb, as, 
 
 Lc meilleur cortege qu'un prince puisse avoir, c'estlec&ur de ses 
 sujets. 
 
 The subjunctive is elegantly used in elliptical phrases, 
 where the principal proposition is omitted, as, 
 
 Qiiil vine ! (je souhaite quHl), May he live ! 
 
 Qu'il se soit oublit jusqu'a ce That he should have so far ft>F- 
 
 point ! (je suis surpris qu'il), gotten himself ! 
 
 Qui nCaime, me suive ! (je veux Whoever loves me let him fol- 
 
 que celui qui), low me. 
 
 Heureux Vhomme qui ptut, ne Happy the man that can, were 
 
 fat-ce que dans sa vieillesse, it only in his old age, enjoy 
 
 jouir de toute la force de sa the whole strength of his rea- 
 
 raison ! (quand ce ne strait son. 
 
 q}ie),\ 
 
 those who came from a feast in the evening, that the fear of not 
 being able to reach their houses might prevent them from getting 
 intoxicated. 
 
 4. People used the bark of trees, or skins, to write upon^, be- 
 fore paper teas known. 
 
 5. Go and * ask that old man : for whom are you planting ? 
 he will answer you : for the immortal gods, who have ordered both 
 that I should profit by the labour of those that have preceded 
 me, and that those who should come after me, should profit by 
 mine. 
 
 (4.) People, on ; bark, ecorce ; skins, peau ; known, en usage. 
 (5.) Have ordered, vouloir ; both, et •, by, de. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Is there any one who does not feci that nothing is more de- 
 grading in a writer, than the pains he takes to express ordinary 
 and common things in a singular and pompous style. 
 
 2. Do you think that, in forming the republic of bees, God has 
 
 (l.) It degrading in, degrader ; in, de. ( •) Had in view, vouloir. 
 
368 PAKTICULAK RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 Remark. The relative pronouns qui, que, quel, dont, 
 and ou, govern the subjunctive in similar circumstan- 
 ces.^: 
 
 Further Observations upon the Conditional and 
 Subjunctive. 
 We have said the English auxiliaries should, would, 
 could, may, and might, are not always to be considered 
 as essentially and necessarily appertaining to the con- 
 ditional and subjunctive*. Indeed it seldom happens 
 that the French tenses are the same as the English, at 
 
 not had in view to teach kings to govern with gentleness, and sub- 
 jects to obey with love ? 
 
 3. You will never be at peace, either with yourself or with 
 others, unless you seriously endeavour to restrain your natural im- 
 petuosity. 
 
 (3.) Be at peace, avoir la paix ; either, ni ; or, ni j endeavour, s'appliquer. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Who is the writer that does not sometimes experience moments 
 of sterility and languor 1 
 
 2. There is not in the heart of man a good impulse that God 
 does not produce. 
 
 3. Choose a retreat where you may be quiet, a post whence you 
 may defend yourself. 
 
 4. The most flattering reward that a man can reap from his la- 
 bours, is the esteem of an enlightened public. 
 
 6. May he live, reign, and long constitute the happiness of a 
 nation which he loves, and by which he is adored J 
 
 6. That he should thus degrade himself, is what posterity will 
 find very difficult to believe. 
 
 7. A man just and firm is not shaken, either by the clamours of 
 an inconsiderate mob, or by the threats of an imperious tyrant : 
 though * the whole world were \o fall into ruins, he would be 
 struck by it, but not moved. 
 
 (2.) Impulse, mouvement. (3.) May, pouvoir. 
 
 (5.) (May he, repeated before every verb) •, constitute, faire j which kt loves, 
 cherir. 
 
 (6.) Find difficult, avoir de ia peine 5 believe, se persuader. 
 
 (7,) Is shaken, ebranlcr ; inconsiderate, insense* mob, populace; imperiout t 
 fier j were, devoir 5 to fall into ruins, s'eciouler. 
 
PARTICULAR BFLKS OF THE VERB. 389 
 
 least in subordinate, though they may be in the princi- 
 pal propositions. For instance. 
 
 / wish you would come to-night, 
 Cannot be translated by 
 
 Je souhaite que vous viendriez cesoir, 
 Because, " when the verb of the principal proposition 
 is in the present, the verb of (he subordinate proposition 
 is put in the present of the subjunctive, if we mean to 
 express a future." Therefore we must say, 
 
 Je souJiaite que vous veniez. 
 Or, " if the first verb is in either of the conditionals, 
 the second must be in the imperfect of the subjunctive," 
 For which reason we must also say, 
 
 Je voudrais que vous vinssiez. (See Rule II.) 
 
 New, in the first example, que vous veniez is marked 
 
 in the conjunction of the verb by, that you may come, 
 
 and in the second, que vous vinssiez, by, that you might 
 
 come, neither of which is in the examples given. Agafn, 
 
 R n'y apersonne qui le croie, 
 Cannot be translated by, there is nobody who may be- 
 lieve it, although may is the sign of the subjunctive in 
 the meaning ; but the meaning is, 
 
 There is nobody that believes it, or simply nobody believes U 
 
 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE 
 DIFFERENT MOODS. 
 
 Remark. Our intention is not to give the relations 
 which all the tenses bear to each other, but simply to 
 mention some of the principal. 
 
 relations of the indicative. 
 
 To the imperfect are subjoined three tenses. 
 ( quand vous 6cmmz 
 Standard. — Je lisais < quand vous avez icrii 
 ( quand vous tcrwites. 
 
390 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 The preterit anterior requires the preterit definite, as f 
 quand feus fni, vous entrates. 
 
 To the pluperfect are subjoined the preterit definite, 
 the preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, and the im- 
 perfect. 
 
 f quand vous entrdtes 
 
 T , ■ j } quand vous etes entri 
 Standards.-./^™* J»<j H vmndvousJliUe8 entri 
 
 (^ quand vous entriez. 
 To the preterit anterior indefinite is subjoined the 
 preterit indefinite, as, quand fax eu dint, vous £ies 
 entre. 
 
 In conjunction with si, for suppose que, the future ab- 
 solute requires the present, and the future anterior, the 
 preterit indefinite, 
 
 • a ( Vous partirez, sije veux. 
 
 standar . ^ User a parti, si vous Vavez voulu. 
 
 Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional. 
 In conjunction with si, for suppose que, the condition- 
 al present is accompanied by the imperfect, and the 
 first conditional past by the pluperfect, or by the second 
 conditional past. 
 
 ( Vous partiriez, sije It voulais. 
 -Standards.-^ Vous serk arti \ si jeV avals voulu 
 ( r \ sije leusse voulu. 
 
 The tenses of the conditional present, and of the two 
 conditionals past are likewise accompanied by them- 
 selves. 
 
 C Quand I' 'avare possidercit tout Vor dumonde, 
 il nc strait pas encore content. 
 Standards. — I Quand Alexandre aurait conquis tout I'univcrs, 
 il n'auratt pas 6te content. 
 
 ^ Vous fussicz parti, sije t'eusse voulu. 
 
 It has been observed that when two words are join- 
 ed by the conjunction que, the second verb is put 
 sometimes in the indicative and sometimes in the sub- 
 junctive. 
 
takticulah rules of the verb. 391 
 
 Relations of tlie Present and Future Absolute, of the In- 
 dicative to the Tenses of their ovm Mood and of the 
 Conditional, 
 
 These two tenses may be accompanied by all the 
 tenses of the indicative and conditional. 
 
 f vous parlcz aujourd'hui 
 vous partirez dcmain 
 vous serez parti, quand, &c. 
 vous partiez hier 
 vous par tit es hier 
 a C On dit \ J vous etes parti ce matin 
 
 Standard.— £ Qn dim j que ^ vous f{ ltesparl i hier, quand, &c 
 
 vous eliez parti hier, quand, &c. 
 vous par tiriez aujourd'hui, si, 
 
 &c. 
 vous seriez parti hier, si, &c. 
 K vou$fussiezpariiplusl6t,si,&,c. 
 
 Remark. The same relation subsists when the 
 sentence is negative ; except that for the present ab- 
 solute of the indicative, the present of the subjunctive 
 is substituted. Instead of, on ne dit pas que vous par- 
 tez aujourd'hui ; the genius of the French language re- 
 quires that we should say, on ne dit pas que vous par- 
 tiez aujourd'hui. 
 
 The imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in- 
 definite, and the pluperfect, are accompanied ei*her by 
 the imperfect, or by the pluperfect. 
 
 Sol^lThier ) \ vous partiez aujourd'hui 
 
 Standards.-^ ;' \ que 1 
 
 ( On avail dit ) { ™us 6txez partu 
 
 The future anterior requires the preterit indefinite, 
 as, on aura dit que vous avez menti. 
 
 The conditional present may be accompanied by the 
 present, the imperfect, the preterit indefinite, the plu- 
 perfect, the future of the indicative as well as by the 
 three conditionals. 
 
392 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB 
 
 * qu'il se trompe 
 quHl se trompait 
 qu'il s'est trompi 
 
 Sr^s.-Oncroirai, { f$ £*££?* 
 
 qu'U se tromperait, si, &c. 
 quHl se strait trompi, si, &c. 
 < qu , il sefut trompe, si, &c. 
 
 The first conditional past may be accompanied by the 
 imperfect, the pluperfect, as well as by the two other 
 conditionals. 
 
 f qu'U tombait 
 
 8TAm*EDs.-OnaM»»tcnti «"g *°* Tt 
 
 I qwil serait tomoe 
 
 [^quHlfut tombi 
 
 The second conditional past may be accompanied by 
 the same tenses. 
 
 Principal Relations with the Subjunctive. 
 
 To the present, the future absolute, and the future 
 anterior of the indicative is generally subjoined the pre- 
 sent of the subjunctive. 
 
 C II veut } 
 
 Standard. — 2 Ilvoudra >que vous particz. 
 
 ( II aura voulu ) 
 
 To the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in- 
 definite, the pluperfect, and the preterit anterior may 
 be subjoined the imperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 ( Je voulais 
 
 t Jai voulu y q 
 
 Tavais voulu 
 [ feus voulu J 
 
 Je voulus 
 Standard. — I Tai voulu j> que vous partisziez. 
 
 To the future anterior the preterit of the subjunctive, 
 as : II aura voulu qu'U soit parti. 
 
 The conditional present is accompanied either by the 
 imperfect, or by the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 a C r , . C vous partissioz 
 
 Standard. — < Je voudrais que < aLu^u- ««^j 
 
 £ ' ( vous tins siez part*. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 393 
 
 To the first and second conditionals past is subjoined 
 the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 ~ ( Taurais voulu ) r . . 
 
 S™ D AKD.-| j, tMge mulu I que vous fmssiez parti, 
 
 &c. &c. &c. &c. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 The preposition to before an infinitive, is, according to 
 circumstances, rendered either by pour, by d, or by de ; 
 sometimes even, it is not expressed at all. 
 
 When to means in order to, it is expressed in French; 
 by pour, as, 
 He came to speak to me, H vint pour me parler. 
 
 As for the other two cases, tiiere is hardly any fixed 
 rule to distinguish whether d or de, is to be used ; the 
 regimen which the preceding French verb requires af- 
 ter it is the only guide. Thus, 
 
 He Wees to play, will be expressed by it aime d jouer ; he told 
 me to go, by time dit d'allcr / and he preferred dying, by il aima 
 tnieuz mqurir. 
 
 The participle present is used in English both as a 
 substantive and an adjective, and frequently instead of 
 the present of the infinitive. 
 
 His ruling passion is hunting, Sa passion domiaante est la 
 
 chasse. 
 
 Heis gone a walking, II est alle se proraener. 
 
 Prevent him from doing mis- Empechez-le de faire le mal. 
 
 chief, 
 
 There is a pleasure in silencing II y a plaisir a ferraer la bouche 
 
 great talkers, aux grands parleurs. 
 
 It likewise takes almost every other preposition. In 
 the first of the above examples it is translated by the 
 substantive ; in the second by the verbal adjective ; 
 and in the others by the present of the infinitr e. But 
 sometimes it must be expressed by the relative qui, 
 with the verb in the indicative, especially when a differ- 
 ent mode might create any ambiguity in the sense ; as, 
 
394 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 I met them riding post, Je les ai rencontr6s qui cou 
 
 raient la poste. 
 
 Sometimes it must be expressed by the conjunction 
 que, with the verb in the indicative, or in the subjunc- 
 tive, as circumstances may require : this is when the 
 participle present is preceded by a possessive pronoun, 
 as, 
 Tlie fear of his coming vexed La crainte qu'il ne vint nous 
 
 us, tourmentait. 
 
 I doubt his being faithful, Je doute qu'il soit fidele, &c. 
 
 It may be proper to observe that, in French, the 
 preposition en alone is followed by the participle pre- 
 sent. All other prepositions require the present of the 
 infinitive. 
 
 Foreigners are apt to mistake in the use of the parti- 
 ciple present, because they do not consider that, as it 
 expresses an incidental proposition, it must evidently re- 
 late to the word which it restrains and modifies. 
 
 Rule. The participle present always forming a 
 phrase incidental and subordinate to another, must ne- 
 cessarily relate to the subject of the principal phrase, 
 when- it is not preceded by another noun, as in this sen- 
 tence : 
 
 Je ne puis vous accompagner d I cannot accompany you into 
 
 la campagne, ayant des af the country, having some 
 
 f aires qui exigent id ma pr£- business that requires my pre- 
 
 sence, sence here. 
 
 The participle present ayant relates to the subject je, 
 since the subordinate proposition, formed by ayant, could 
 have no kind of relation to the principal proposition, if 
 it could not be resolved into this, parce que fai des 
 affaires qui, &c. But, in this sentence ; 
 
 Combien voyons-nous dc gens, How many people do we see, 
 qui, connaissant It prix du who, knowing the value of 
 temps, le per dent maid-pro- time, waste it improperly ! 
 pos ! 
 
 Connaissant relates to the substantive gens, because 
 this is the word which it restrains and modifies, and 
 because the relative qui, placed between that substan- 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 395 
 
 tive as the regimen, and the participle present, obviates 
 every kind of ambiguity. 
 
 Remarks. 1. Two participles ought never to be 
 used together without being united by a conjunction, 
 as, &c. 
 
 C'est un homme aimant et craig- He is a man loving and fearing 
 nant Dien, God. 
 
 2. The relative en ought never to be put either be- 
 fore a participle present, or before a gerund. We can- 
 not say : 
 
 Je vous ax remis monjils entre les mains, en voulant faire quelquc 
 clwse de bon. 
 
 Because the sense would be amblgtYous : for, the mean- 
 ing is not : 
 
 As I wish to do something good, or, as I wish to do well, I have put 
 my son into your hands, 
 
 But, 
 
 I have put my son into your hands, as I wish to make something of 
 him. 
 
 We should say : Voulant en faire, &c. 
 Likewise this sentence would b-3 improper : 
 
 Lc prince tempere la rigueur du pouvoir, en en partageant Its 
 fo notions, 
 
 on account of the repetition of the word en, used in two 
 different senses, via., as a preposition and a relative. 
 Another turn must be then adopted, as, 
 
 Cest en partageant lesfonctions du pouvoir, qu'un prince en tern* 
 pere la rigueur. 
 
 CHAP. vr. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 The office of prepositions is to bring the two terms 
 between which they are placed, into a state of relation. 
 And that relation is generally expressed by their own 
 signification, as, 
 
 Avec, sur, pendant, dans, &c. 
 
396 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 But a y de, and en, express it, either by their primi- 
 tive and proper meaning, or figuratively and by exten- 
 sion ; so that, in this last case, they are merely preposi- 
 tions serving to unite the two terms ; whence it happens 
 that they often express, either the same relations that 
 others do, or opposite relations. For instance, in these 
 two sentences : 
 
 Approchez-vous dufeu, Come near the fire. 
 
 Eloignez-vous dufeu, Go from the fire. 
 
 De merely establishes a relation between the two 
 terms, without expressing in the first, the relation of ap- 
 proximation, or in the second, the relation of distance. 
 In order, therefore, to form a just idea of these three pro- 
 positions, it is of importance to consider only their pri- 
 mitive and proper signification. „ 
 
 En and dans have nearly the same meaning ; but 
 they differ in this, that the former is used in a more 
 vague, the latter in a more determinate sense, as : 
 J'etais en Angleterre, dans la province de Middlesex. 
 
 From what has just been said, it follows then that en, 
 on account of its indeterminate nature, ought not to be 
 followed by the article, except in a small number of 
 phrases sanctioned by usage, such are, 
 
 En la presence de Dieu ; en la grand 1 chambre du parlement ; en 
 V absence d'un tel ; en Vannie mil huit cent dix-sept, &c. 
 
 with respect to the expressions 
 
 En Vhonneur, en Vdge, it is better to say, a Vhonneur, a Ydge. 
 
 Avant is a preposition in this phrase : 
 Avantlejour, Before day-light. 
 
 But it is an adverb in this : 
 N'allezpas si avant, Do not go so forward. 
 
 Some other prepositions are likewise occasionally ad- 
 verbs. 
 
 Autour and alentour, must not be confounded ; autour 
 is a preposition, and alentour an adverb, thus ; 
 
 Tous les grands ttaient autour AM the grandees stood round 
 
 du trone, the throne. 
 
 he roi ttait sur son trone, ct les The king was upon the throne, 
 
 grands ttaient alentour, «nd the grandees stood round. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 39T7 
 
 Avant and auparavant are not used indifferently. 
 
 Avant is followed by a regimen, as 3 
 
 Avant Pdqnes, Before Easter. 
 
 Avant ce temps, Before that time. 
 
 Auparavant is followed by no regimen, as, 
 
 Si vous partiz, vev.ez me voir an- If you set off, come and seo ne 
 paravanty first. 
 
 PrH a and pris de, are not the same expressions. 
 Prit is an adjective : 
 
 Je suis pret d faire ce que vous I am ready to do what yom 
 voudrez, please. 
 
 But prds is a preposition : 
 
 Mon outrage est pr'es d'etre My work is nearly finished. 
 fini, 
 
 Au travers and a travers differ in this ; the first is 
 followed by the preposition de, the second is not, as, 
 
 II sefit jour au travers des en- He fought Ms way through &« 
 
 nemis, enemy. 
 
 II se Jit jour d travers les en- 
 
 nemis, 
 
 Avant denotes priority of time and order, as, 
 II est arrivi avant moi, l'artiele se met avant le nom. 
 
 Devant is used for en presence, vis-a-vis, as, 
 
 II a paru devant lejuge ; U loge devant Viglise. 
 
 Remark. Devant is likewise a preposition marking 
 order, and is the opposite of apr£s, as, 
 
 II ale pas devant moi, He has precedence of me. 
 
 Si vous ites prtsst, coiirez de- If you are in a hurry, run h- 
 vant, fore. 
 
 THE USE OF THE ARTICLE WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Some prepositions require the article before their re- 
 gimen ; others do not ; and others again, sometimes 
 admit, sometimes reject it. 
 
 35 
 
198 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS, 
 
 Rule I. The following prepositions, generally re- 
 quire the article before the noun, which they govern. 
 
 avant, depuis, ervers, nonobstaffl , selon, 
 
 aprcs, devant, excepts, .mi, stdrant, 
 
 cfiez, derriere, hors, pendant, touchant, 
 
 dans, durant, liormis, pour, vers, 
 
 avant Vaurore, chez h prii ;ce, enr rs les pant 
 
 apris la promenade, dans la mvison, devant feglise, «&c. 
 
 There are however exceptions, as, 
 
 araatterme, avant diner, pour lit une paillasse, 
 
 avant midi, aprds diner, depuis minuit, &c. 
 
 Rule II. A noun governed by the preposition en, 
 is not, in general, preceded by the article, as, 
 
 En 'dlle, en campagne, en extase, en songe, en pi&ces, &c. 
 
 Remark. ISarme'e est erctre'e en campagne, means the 
 army has taken the field ; but Mr. N. est alU a la cam- 
 pagne, means Mr. N. is gone into the country. 
 
 Rule III. These eleven prepositions, a de, avec, 
 contre, entre, malgre', outre, par, pour, sur, sans, some- 
 times admit, sometimes reject the article before their re- 
 gimen. 
 
 If the article is used in these phrases : 
 
 Jou&r sur le velours, 
 
 St. Paul veut de la subordination entre \a.femme et le mart 
 
 Sans les passions, oil serait le nitrite 1 
 
 It is suppressed in, 
 
 Etr$ sur pied ; un peu de facons ne gdte rien entre marl et 
 femme. 
 
 Vivre sans passions, e'est vivre sans plaisirs et sans peines. 
 
 REPETITION OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Rule I. The prepositions de, a, and en, must be re- 
 peated before all the nouns which they govern, as, 
 
 Voyons qui Vemporiera de vous, Let us see which of us will on- 
 de lui, ou de moi, cei, you, he, or I. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 399 
 
 Ette a de Vhonnetete, de la dou- 
 ceur, des grdces, et de V esprit, 
 
 La loi, que Dieu a grav6e au 
 fond de mon cceur, mHnstruit 
 de tout ce que je dois a Can- 
 teur de mon tire, au procliain, 
 k moi-meme, 
 
 En Asie, en Europe, en Afrique, 
 etjusqu'en Am&rique, on trouve 
 le mime prbjugt. 
 
 Rule II. The other prepositions, especially those 
 consisting of two syllables, are generally repeated — 
 before nouns, which have meanings totally different ^ 
 but seldom before nouns, that are nearly synonymous. 
 Rien n'cst moins selon Dieu et 
 
 selon le monde, 
 
 She has politeness, sweetness, 
 grace, and abilities. 
 
 The law which God has deeply 
 engraven on my heart, in- 
 structs me in every thing I 
 owe to the author of my be- 
 ing, to my neighbour, and to 
 myself. 
 
 In Asia, in Europe, in Africa, 
 and even in America, we find 
 the same prejudice. 
 
 Celte action est contre Vhonneur 
 et Contre toute esphce de prin- 
 cipes, 
 
 But we ought to say, 
 
 H perd sa jtunessc dans la mol- 
 lesse et la voluptS, 
 
 Notre loi ne condamne pcrsonne 
 sans V avoir entendu et ex- 
 amine. 
 
 Nothing is less according to 
 
 God and according to the 
 
 world. 
 That action is contrary to 
 
 honour, and to every kind of 
 
 principle. 
 
 He wastes his youth in effemi- 
 nacy and pleasure. 
 
 Our laws condemn nobody 
 without having heard and ex- 
 amined him. 
 
 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Some prepositions govern nouns without the help of 
 another preposition, as, 
 
 Devant le maison, Before the house. 
 
 Horniis sonfrtre, Except his brother. 
 
 Sans son ep6e, Without his sword, &c. 
 
 Others require the help of the preposition de, as, 
 Prds de la maison, Near the house. 
 
 A Vinsu desonfr&re, Unknown to his brother. 
 
 Aw-dessus du pont, Above the bridge, &c. 
 
 These four, jusque, par rapport, quant and sauf are 
 followed by the preposition d, as, 
 
 JusqxCau mou proem to, Till the next month. 
 
 Quant d moi, As for me, &c. 
 
400 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Practice alone can teach these different regimens. 
 
 Rule. A noun may be governed by two preposi- 
 tions, provided they do not require different regimens ; 
 thus we may say with propriety, 
 
 Qelui qui ccrit selon Its circon- He who writes according to 
 
 stances, pour ct contre un circumstances, both for and 
 
 parti, est un liomme bien tn6- against a party, is a very con- 
 
 piisable, temptible man. 
 
 But it would be wrong to say, 
 
 Celui qui 6cril en laveur et contre un parti, &c. 
 
 because enfaveur requires the preposition de. 
 
 Rule. Prepositions which, with their regimen, ex- 
 press a circumstance, are generally placed as nearly as 
 possible to the word to which that circumstance relates, 
 as, 
 
 On voit dcs personnes qui, avec We see persons who, with a 
 
 beaucoup d'esprit, commettent great deal of wit, commit 
 
 de tres-grandes fautes. very great faults. 
 
 Tai envoyS a la poste les lettres I have sent to the post-office the 
 
 quevous avsz ecrites, letters which you have written. 
 
 Groyez-vous pouvoir ramener Do you think you can reclaim 
 
 par la douceur ccs esprits by gentleness, those mistaken 
 
 6gar6s ? people ? 
 
 If we attempt to alter the place of these preposi- 
 tions, we shall find that the sentences will become am- 
 biguous. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 OF THE NEGATIVE TIC 
 
 Negation is expressed in French by ne, either alone 
 or accompanied by pas or point. On this point the Aca- 
 demy has examined the four following questions : 
 
 1. Where is the place of the negatives? 
 
 2. When is pas to be used in preference .o point, and 
 vice versa t 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 401 
 
 3. When may both be omitted ? 
 
 4. When ought both to be omitted ? 
 
 As this subject is of very material importance, wc 
 shall treat it upon the plan of the Academy, and agree- 
 ably to their views. 
 
 First Question. Where is the place of the nega- 
 tives ? 
 
 Ne is always prefixed to the verb ; but the place of 
 pas and point is variable. 
 
 When the verb is in the infinitive, these are placed in- 
 differently before, or after it ; for we say, 
 
 Pour ne point voir, or, pourne xoir pas. 
 
 In the other moods, except the imperative, the tenses 
 are either simple, or compound. In the simple tenses, 
 pas or point is placed after the verb. 
 
 II ne parle pas ; ne parle-t-il pas ? 
 
 In the compound tenses, it is placed between the 
 auxiliary and the participle. 
 
 E n 7 a pas parle ; n' a-t-il pas parU ? 
 
 In the imperative, it is placed after the verb. 
 Ne badinez pas. Ne vous en allez pas. 
 
 Second Question. When is pas to be used in pre- 
 ference to point, and vice versa ? 
 
 Point is a stronger negative than pas : besides, it de- 
 notes something permanent : II ne lit point, means, he 
 never reads. 
 
 Pas denotes something accidental : II ne lit pas, 
 means, he does not read now, or he is not reading. 
 
 Point de denotes an absolute negation. Thus : 
 
 II rv a point aV esprit, is to say, he has no wit at all. 
 
 Pas de allows the liberty of a reserve. So : 
 
 77 n'a pas d'esprit, is to say, he has nothing of wha* 
 can be called wit. 
 
 35 
 
402 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 Hence, the Academy concludes, that pas is more pro- 
 per, 
 
 1. Before plus, moins, si,autant, and other words de- 
 noting comparison, as, 
 
 Milton n'est pas moins sublime Milton is not less sublime than 
 qu'Homere, Homer. 
 
 2. Before nouns of number, as, 
 
 U n J y a pas dix ans, It is not ten years ago. 
 
 Point is elegantly used, 
 
 1. At the end of a sentence, as, 
 
 On s'amusait d ses depens. et it They were amusing themselves 
 ne s'en apercevaU point, at his expense, and he did not 
 
 perceive it. 
 
 2. In elliptical sentences, as, 
 
 Je croyais avoir affaire a un hon- I thought I had to deal with an 
 nete homme ; mais point, honest man ; but no. 
 
 3. In answer to interrogative sentences, as, 
 
 Irez-vous ce soir au pare ? — Shall you go this evening to the 
 point, park ? — no. 
 
 The Academy also observes, that when pas. or point 
 is introduced into interrogative sentences, it is with mean- 
 ings somewhat different. We make use of point, when 
 we have any doubt on our minds, as, 
 
 N'avez-vous point iti Id ? Have you not been there ? 
 
 But we use pas, when we are persuaded. Thus, 
 
 XTavez-vous pas et6 Id ? But you have been there, have 
 
 not you ? 
 
 Third Question. When may both pas and point be 
 omitted ? 
 
 They may be suppressed, 
 
 lo After the words cesser, oser, and pouvoir ; but this 
 omission is only for the sake of elegance, as, 
 
 Je ne cesse de in'cn occuper, I am incessantly attentive to it. 
 
 Jen'ose vous en purler, I dare not speak to you about it. 
 
 Je ne puis ypenscr sans frcmir, I cannot think of it without 
 
 shuddering. 
 
PARTICULAR RTJLES OP THE ADVERB. 403 
 
 We likewise say, but only in familiar conversation, 
 
 Ne lougez, Do jot stir. 
 
 2. In expressions of this kind, 
 
 Y a-t-il un homme dont eUe ne Is there a man that she does not 
 
 midise ? slander 1 
 
 Atez-vous un ami qui ne soit des Have you a friend that is not 
 
 miens ? likewise mine ? 
 
 Fourth Question. When ought both pas and poii.t 
 to be omitted ? 
 
 They are omitted, 
 
 1. When the extent which we mean to give to the ne- 
 gative is sufficiently expressed either by the words which 
 restrict it, by words which exclude all restriction, or 
 lastly, by such as denote the smaller parts of a whole, 
 and which are without the article. 
 
 To exemplify the first part of this remark, we say, 
 Je ne sors guere, I go out but seldom. 
 
 Je ne sortirai de trois jours, I shall not go out for three days 
 
 To exemplify the second, we say, 
 Jz riy cats jamais, I never go there. 
 
 Je riy -pev.se plus, I think no more of it. 
 
 Nul ne saits'il est digned'aMour, Nobody knows whether he be 
 
 oh de haine, deserving of love, or hatred. 
 
 Nemploycz aucun de ces sirata- Use none of these stratagems. 
 
 g&mes, 
 II nc plait d personne, He pleases nobody. 
 
 Rietl tiest plus cliarmant, Nothing is more charming. 
 
 Je riy ptnse nulltmcnt, I do not think of it at all. 
 
 To exemplify the third, we say, 
 II riy roit goulte, He cannot see at all. 
 
 Je a'cn ai cueilli brin, I did not gather a sprig. 
 
 II ne dit mot, He speaks not a word. 
 
 But if to mot we join an adjective of number, pas must 
 be added, as, 
 // ne dit pas un mot qui riintt- He speaks not a word but what 
 
 resse, is interesting. 
 
 Dans ce discours, il riy a jms In that speech, there are not 
 
 trois mots d reprendre, three words that are excep- 
 
 tionable. 
 
 Pas is likewise used with the preposition de, as, 
 
 II ne fait pas de d-marche inu~ lie does net take any useless 
 tile, step. 
 
404 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 Remark. If, after the sentences we have just men 
 tioned, either the conjunction que, or the relative pro 
 nouns qui or dont, should introduce a negative sentence, 
 then in this last pas and point are omitted, as, 
 
 Je nefais jamais d'exces que je I never commit any excess, 
 
 w'en sois incommode, without being ill after it. 
 
 Je ne vols personne qui ne vous I see nobody but what com- 
 
 loue, mends you. 
 
 2. When two negatives are joined by ni, as, 
 
 Je ne Vaime wi ne Vestime, I neither love nor esteem him. 
 
 And when the conjunction ni is repeated, either in the 
 subject, as, 
 
 Ni Vor nila grandeur ne nous Neither gold nor greatness can 
 rcndent heureux, make us happy. 
 
 Or, in the attribute, as, 
 // n'est ni prudent ni sage, He is neither prudent nor wise. 
 
 Or, in the regimen, as, 
 
 U rta ni dettes ni procds, He has neither debts nor law 
 
 suits. 
 
 Remark. Pas is preserved, when ni is not repeated, 
 a«nd when this last serves only to unite two members of a 
 negative sentence, as, 
 
 Je n'aime pas ce vain italage I do not like that vain display 
 d" 1 erudition, prodigufe sans of erudition, lavished without 
 choix et sans gout, ni ce luxe de choice and without taste, nor 
 mots qui ne disent Hen, that pomp of words which 
 
 have no meaning. 
 
 3. With the verb which follows que, used instead of 
 pourquoi, and with a moins que, or si, used instead of it, 
 as, 
 
 Que n'eteS'VOus aussi pose que Why are you not as sedate as 
 
 votrefrere ? your brother ? 
 
 Je nesortirai pas, d moins que I shall not go out, unless you 
 
 vous ne veniez mt prendre, come to fetch me. 
 
 Je n'irai pas chez lui, sHl ne m'y I shall not go to his house, if he 
 
 engage, do not invite me. 
 
 4. With ne — que used instead of settlement, as, 
 
 line jeuncsse, qui sc tivre d ses Youth, which abandons itself 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 405 
 
 passions, ne trajismet d la rneil- to its passions, transmits to 
 lesse qu y un corps us6, old age nothing but a worn- 
 
 out body. 
 
 When before the conjunction que, the word rien is un- 
 derstood, as, 
 // nefait que rire. He does nothing but laugh. 
 
 Or when that conjunction may be changed into sinon, 
 or si ce rfest, as, 
 
 U ne tient qu'd vous de riussir, The success wholly depends 
 
 upon you. 
 1 Trop de maitres d la fois ne Too many masters at once only 
 strvent qu'd embrouiiler Ves- serve to perplex the mind. 
 prit, 
 
 5. With a verb in the preterit, preceded by the con- 
 junction depuis que, or by the verb il y a, denoting a 
 certain duration of time, as, 
 
 Comment vous ites-vous porti de- How have you been since I saw 
 
 puis queje ne vous ai vu ? you ! 
 
 II y a trois mois que je ne vous ai I have not seen you for these 
 
 vu, three months. 
 
 But they are not omitted, when the verb is in the pre- 
 sent, as, 
 
 Comment vit-il depuis que nous How does he live now we do 
 
 ne le voyons point ? not see him ? 
 
 11 y a six mois que nous ne le We have not seen him these 
 
 voyons point, six months. 
 
 6. In phrases where the conjunction que is preceded 
 by the adverbs of comparison plus, moins, mieux, &c. or 
 some other equivalent term, as, 
 
 On miprise ceux qui patient au- We despise those who speak 
 trement qu'ils ne penscnt, differently from what they 
 
 think. 
 
 II icrit mieux qu'd ne parle, He writes better than he 
 
 speaks. 
 
 Cest pire qu'ou ne le disait, It is worse than was said. 
 
 Cest autre rJwse que je ne croy- It is different from what I 
 ais, thought. 
 
 Peu s'cti faut qu'on ne rrCaii I have been very near being 
 trompS, deceived. 
 
 7. In sentences united by the conjunction que to tho 
 
406 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 verbs douter, disesperer, nier, and disconvenir, forming 
 a negative member of a sentence, as, 
 
 Je ne doute pas quHl ne vunne, I doubt not that he will come . 
 
 Ne distsptrez pas qut cc moyen Do not despair of the success of 
 
 ne vous reussisse, these means. 
 
 Je ne vie pas, or je ne disconviens I do not deny that it is so. 
 
 pas que cela ne soit, 
 
 The Academy says, that after the two last verbs, ne 
 may be omitted, as, 
 
 Je ne nie pas, or, je ne disconviens pas que cela soit. 
 
 8. With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 
 verbs emp£cher and prendre garde, meaning to take care, 
 as, 
 
 J'empicherai Men que vous ne I shall prevent your being of the 
 
 soyez da nnmbre, number. 
 
 Prenez garde qvCon ne vous si- Take cars that they do not cor- 
 pse, - rupt you. 
 
 Remark. The Academy observes, that in the above 
 acceptation, prendre garde is followed by a subjunctive ; 
 but when it means to reflect, the indicative is used with 
 pas or point, as, 
 
 Prenez garde que vous ne m'en- Mind, you do not understand 
 tendezpaSf what I mean. 
 
 9. With a verb united by the conjunction que, to the 
 verb craindre, and those of the same meaning, when 
 we do not wish the thing expressed by the second verb, 
 as, 
 
 B craintque son fr&re ne Vaban- He is afraid his brother should 
 
 donne, forsake him. 
 
 Je crains que mon ami ne I fear my friend will die. 
 
 meure, 
 
 But pas is not omitted, when we wish the thing ex- 
 pressed by the second verb, as, 
 
 Je crains que mon pdre n f arrive I am afraid my father will not 
 pas, come. 
 
 10. With the verb which follows de peur que, d# crainte 
 que, in similar circumstances with craindre. Thus, 
 when we say, 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 407 
 
 De crainte qu'U ne perde son procds. 
 We wish that he may gain it, and, when we say, 
 
 De crainte qu'U ne soit pas puni, 
 We wish that he may be punished. 
 Re^iark. In these phrase:?, 
 Je crains que mon ami ne I am afraid my friend will die. 
 
 Vq; .h-mte. You prevent them from sing- 
 
 ing. 
 
 The expression ne is not a negation ; it is the ne, or 
 quin of the Latins introduced into the French language, 
 as may be seen by the English translation. 
 
 11. After savoir, whenever it has the meaning ofpow. 
 voir, as, 
 
 Je ne saurais en venir d bout, I cannot accomplish it. 
 
 When it means Hre incertain, it is the best to omit pas 
 and point, as, 
 
 Jcne sais oule prendre, I do not know whereto find 
 
 him. 
 // ne sail ce qu'il dit, He does not know what he 
 
 says. 
 
 Remark. But pas and point must be used when sa- 
 voir is taken in its true meaning, as, 
 Je ne sais pas le Francais, I do not know French. 
 
 12. We also say 5 
 
 Ne zous diplaise, ne votte en db- By your leave, under favour, 
 plaise, or, let it not displease you. 
 
 Plus and davantage must not be used indifferently. 
 Plus is followed by the preposition de, or the conjunc- 
 tion que, as, 
 
 Jl a plus de brillant que de so- He has more brilliancy than so- 
 
 lide, lidity. 
 
 II se fie plus d ses lumi&rcs qu'd He relies more upon bis-own 
 
 edits des autres, knowledge than upon that of 
 
 others. 
 
 Davantage is used alone and at the end of sentences, 
 
 as, 
 
 La science est estimable, mais la Learning is estimable, but vir- 
 vertu Vest davantage, tue is still more so. 
 
408 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 Though davantage cannot be followed by the preposi- 
 tion de, it may be preceded by the pronoun en, as, 
 
 Je n'en dirai pas davantage, I shall not say any more about 
 
 it. 
 
 It is incorrect to use davantage for le plus. We must 
 
 say, 
 
 Dp, toutes lesfleures a" 1 un parterre, Of all the flowers of a parterre 
 Van6mon± est celle qui r,:e plait the anemone is that which 
 le plus, pleases me most. 
 
 Si, aussi, tant, and auiant, are always followed by the 
 conjunction que, expressed or understood. 
 
 Si and aussi are joined to adjectives, adverbs, and 
 participles ; tant and auiant to substantives and verbs. 
 
 V 'Angleterre ?i f estpas si grande England is not so large as 
 
 que la France, ' France. 
 
 II est aussi estimi qu^aimi, He is as much esteemed as he is 
 
 belcved. 
 Elle a autant de beaute que de She has as much beauty as vu> 
 
 vcrtu, tue. 
 
 Remark. Autant may, however, be substituted for 
 aussi, when it is preceded by one adjective, and followed 
 by que arxl another adjective, as, 
 II est modeste autant que sage, He is as modest as wise. 
 
 Aussi and autant are used in the affirmative ; si and 
 tant in negative and interrogative sentences. The two 
 last are, however, alone to be used in affirmative senten- 
 ces, when they are put for tellement, as, 
 
 E est detenu si gros, quHl a de la He is become so bulky that he 
 
 peine d marcher, can hardly walk. 
 
 11 a tant couru qu'il en est hors He has been running so fast 
 
 dlialeine, that he is out of breath. 
 
 Jamais takes sometimes the preposition a, and toujours 
 the preposition pour, as, 
 
 Soyez & jamais heurtux, Be for ever happy. 
 
 C est pour toujours, It is for ever. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 409 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 Grammatical construction is the order which the 
 genius of a Ian: is assigned, in speech, to the 
 
 different sorts of words into which it is distinguished. 
 Construe sometimes mistake]] for syntax ; but 
 
 there is this difference, the latter consists in the n 
 which we are to observe, in order to express the rela- 
 tions of words one to another, whereas grammatical 
 construction consists in the various arrangements 
 which are allowed while w r e observe the rules of syn:ax. 
 Now this arrangement is irrevocably fixed, not only as 
 phrases may be interrogative, imperative, or exposi- 
 tive, but also as each of these kinds may be affirmative 
 or negative. 
 
 In sentences simply interrogative, the subject is 
 either a noun or pronoun. 
 
 If the subject be a noun, the following is the order to 
 be observed : first, the noun, then the verb, then the 
 corresponding personal pronoun, the adverb, if any, and 
 the regimen in the simple tenses : in the compound tenses, 
 the pronoun and the adverb are placed between the 
 auxiliary and the participle, as, 
 
 Les lumicres sont-elles un Men Are sciences an advantage to 
 
 pour les peuples ? ont-elles nations ? Have they ever 
 
 jamais contriljut d leur bun- contributed to their happi- 
 
 heur ? ness ? 
 
 If the subject be a pronoun, the verb begins the se- 
 ries, and the other words follow in the order already 
 pointed out, as, 
 
 Vous plairez-vous toujours d Will you always take pleasure 
 
 mtdire ? in slandering? 
 
 Aurez-vous bitntdtfir.i ? Shall you have soon done ? 
 
 N. B. When the verb is reflected, the pronoun 
 forming the regimen begins the series ; this pronoun 
 
 36 
 
41 C OP GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 always preserves its place before the verb, except in 
 sentences simply imperative. 
 
 In interrogative sentences, with negation, the same 
 ordt-r is ob -eived ; bi ine is placed be ton the verb, and 
 pas P or point, after the verb in the simple tenses, and 
 between the auxiliary and the participle in the compound 
 tenses., as, 
 Votre frere ne viendra-t-il pas Will not your brother come to- 
 
 dtmain ? morrow? 
 
 N'aurez-vous pas bientot fini? SbalJ you not have soon done ? 
 
 Remark. There are in French several other ways of 
 interrogating. 
 
 1 . With an absolute pronoun, as, 
 
 Qui vous a dit cela ? or, 
 
 Qui eot-ce qui vous a dit cela ? Who told you that ? 
 
 2. With the demonstrative pronoun ce, as, 
 Est-ce-vous ? Is it you 1 Est-ce qiCil pleut '• Does it rain T 
 
 3. With an interrogative verb, as, 
 
 Pourquoi vs ment-il pas ? Why does he not come ? 
 
 Comment vous trouvez-vous ? How do you find yourself? 
 
 Hence we see that the absolute pronouns and the in. 
 terrogative adverbs always begin the sentence : but the 
 demonstrative pronoun always follows the verb. 
 
 In sentences, simply imperative, the verb is always 
 placed first, in the first and second persons ; but in the 
 third, it comes after the conjunction que and the noun 
 or pronoun, as, 
 
 Allons Id, Let us go there. 
 
 l r enez ici, Come here. 
 
 Qu'ils y aillent, Let them go there. 
 
 Que Pierre aille d Londres, Let Peter go to London. 
 
 With negation ne and pas are placed as in interroga- 
 tive sentences. 
 
 For the place of the pronouns, (see p. 241.) 
 Sentences are expositive, when we speak without 
 either interrogating, or commanding. The following 
 is the order of the words in those which are affirmative : 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 411 
 
 the subject, the verb, the adverb, the participle, the re- 
 gimen, as, 
 
 Un ban prince mSrite V amour de A good prince deserves the lore 
 
 ses sujets, et Vestime de tous les cf his subjects, and the esteem 
 
 pcuplts, of all nations. 
 
 Cesar eut inutilen.ent passe le Caesar would have crossed the 
 
 Rubicon, s'z7 y cut eu de son Rubicon to no purpose, had 
 
 te.nps des Fabius, there been Fabii in his time. 
 
 The negative sentences differ from this construction, 
 only as ne is always placed before the verb, and pas, or 
 point, either after the verb, or between the auxiliary and 
 participle, as, 
 
 Un /uymme riche ne fait pas tou~ A rich man does not always df> 
 
 jours le bien qu'il pourrait, all the good he might. 
 
 Ciciron n'eiU peut-etre pas Ste un Cicero would not perhaps have 
 
 si grand orateur, sile desir de been so great an orator, had 
 
 s' clever aaz premieres dignites not the desire of rising to the 
 
 n'eut enflamme son ante, first dignities inflamed his soqfe 
 
 Sentences are either simple, or compound. They 
 are simple, when they contain only one subject and one 
 attribute, as, 
 
 Vous lisez, You read. 
 
 Vous itesjeune, You are young. 
 
 They are compound, when they associate several 
 subjects with one attribute, or several attributes with 
 one subject, or several attributes wiih several subjects, 
 or several subjects with several attributes. 
 
 This sentence, Pierre et Paid sent l^urc-ix, is com- 
 pound by having several subjects ; thi einme est 
 joHe, spirituelle et sensible, Is compound by having se- 
 veral attributes ; and this, Pierre et Paul sont spirituels 
 et savans, is composed at once of several subjects and 
 several attributes. 
 
 A sentence may be compound in various other ways ; 
 by the subject, by the vsrb, or by the attribute. 
 
 By the subject, when this is restricted by an inciden 
 tal proposition, as, 
 
 Dieu, qui est bon. 
 
412 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 By the verb, when it is modified by some circum 
 stance of time, order, &c, as, 
 
 Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais. 
 
 By the attribute, when this attribute is modified by a 
 regimen which is itself restricted, as, 
 
 Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais les hommes, qui mettent 
 sincerement leur confiance en lui. 
 
 These simple, or compound sentences, may be joined 
 to others by a conjunction, as, 
 
 Quand on aime V6tude, le temps When we 1 ")ve study t time flies 
 passe sans qu'on s'cn apercoive, without our perceiving it. 
 
 The two partial phrases here form but one. 
 
 Rule. When a sentence is composed of two partial 
 phrases, joined by a conjunction, harmony and perspi- 
 cuity generally require the shortest to go first. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quand les passions nous quittent, When our passions leave us, we 
 
 * nous nous flattens en vain, que It Y^ m flatter ourselves that 
 
 e'est nous qui les quittons, it is w T e that leave them. 
 
 On n^est point dplaindre, quand, He is not to be pitied, who for 
 
 au defaut de plaisirs riels, on want of real pleasure, finds 
 
 trouve le moyen de s'occuper de means to amuse himself with 
 
 chimeres, chimeras. 
 
 Periods result from the union of several partial 
 phrases, the whole of which make a complete sense. 
 Periods, to be clear, require the shortest phrases to 
 be placed first. The following example of this is taken 
 from Fie drier. 
 
 N'attendez pas, Messieurs, 
 
 1. Q,ue j'ouvre une scene tragique ; 
 
 2. Que je represente ce grand homme etendu sur ses propres 
 trophees ; 
 
 3. Q,ue je decouvre ce corps pA|e ct sanglant, aupres duquei 
 fume encore )a foudre qui l'a frappe ; 
 
 4. Q,ue je fasse crier son sang comme cetui d'Abcl, et que 
 j'expose a vos yeux les images de la religion et de ia pa trie 
 eplorce. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 413 
 
 This admirable period is composed of four members, 
 which go on gradually increasing. It is a rule not to 
 give more than four members to a period, and to avoid 
 multiplying incidental sentences. 
 
 Obscurity in style is generally owing to those small 
 phrases which divert the attention from the principal 
 sentences, and make us lose sight of them. 
 
 The construction which we have mentioned is called 
 direct, or regular, because the words are placed in 
 ling to the order which has been 
 pointed out. But this order may be altered in certain 
 c-u construction is called indirect, or 
 
 Now, it may be irregular, b by 
 
 ellipsis, by pleonasm, or by syllepsis ; these are what 
 are called the four iigures of words. 
 
 OF INVERSION. 
 
 Inversion is the transportation of a word into a place / 
 different from that which by usage is properly assigned 
 to it. This ought never to be done except when it 
 introduces more perspicuity, energy, or harmony into 
 the language ; for it is a defect in construction, when- 
 ever the relation subsisting between words is not easily 
 perceived. 
 
 There are two kinds of inversion : the one, by its 
 boldness seems to be confined to poetry : the other is 
 frequently employed even in prose. 
 
 We shall speak here of the latter kind only. 
 
 The following inversions are authorized by custom. 
 
 The subject by which a verb is governed may with 
 propriety be placed after it, as, 
 
 Tout ce que lid promct Vamitit AW that the friendship of the 
 des Romains, Romans promise? him. 
 
 Remark. This inversion is a ride of the art of 
 speaking and writing, whenever the subject is modified 
 
 36* 
 
4] 4 GF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 by an incidental sentence, long enough to make us 
 lose sight of the relation of the verb governed to the 
 subject governing. 
 
 The noun governed by the prepositions de and a 
 may likewise be very properly placed before the verb, 
 as, 
 D'une voix entrecovpee de san- In a voice interrupted by sobs, 
 
 glots, Us s'Scridrent, they exclaimed. 
 
 A tant (['injures, qu?a-t-elle re- To so much abuse, what an 
 
 pondu ? swer did slie give ? 
 
 The verb is likewise elegeaitly preceded by the pre- 
 positions apres, dans, par, sous, contre, &c. with their 
 dependencies, as well as by the conjunction si, quand, 
 parce que, puisque, quoique, lorsque, &c. as, 
 
 Par la loi du corps, je tiens d By the law of the body, I am 
 ce monde qui passe, connected with this passing 
 
 world. 
 Puisqu'il le veut 9 qu'il lefasse. Since he wishes it, let him do 
 
 it. 
 
 OF THE ELLIPSIS. 
 
 Ellipsis is the omission of a word, or even several 
 words which are necessary to make the construction 
 full and complete. In order to form a good ellipsis, 
 the mind must be able easily to supply the words omit- 
 ted, as, 
 
 J 'acccpterais ks offres de Da- I would accept the offers of 
 
 rius, sifitais Alexandre : — et Darius, if I were Alexan- 
 
 moi anssi, si fetais Panne- der: — and so would I, if I 
 
 nion, were Parmenio. 
 
 Here the mind easily supplies the words je les accep- 
 ter ois in the second member. 
 
 The ellipsis is very common in answers to interroga- 
 tive sentences, as, 
 
 Quand viendrez-vous ? — dc- When will yon come ? — to- 
 
 rnain, morrow. 
 
 that is, je viendrai demain. 
 
 In order to know whether an ellipsis be good, the 
 
OP GRAMMATICAL CONSTBTJCTIOX. 415 
 
 words that are understood must be supplied. It is cor- 
 rect, whenever the construction completely expresses 
 the sense denoted by the words which are supplied : 
 otherwise it is not exact. 
 
 OF THE PLEONASM. 
 
 Pleonasm, in gen a superfluity of words ; in 
 
 re good, it must be sane- 
 
 d by custom, which never authorizes its use, but 
 to give greater energy to language, or to express, in a 
 clearer manner, the internal feeling with which we are 
 affected. 
 
 Et que m'a fait d moi cette Troie cu je cours ! 
 Je me meurs. S'il ne veut pas vous le dire,je vous le d>rai, 
 moi. 
 
 Je l'ai vu de mes propres yeux. 
 
 Je l'ai entendu de mes propres oreilles. 
 
 — A moi, in the first sentence ; — me, in the second ; 
 — moi, in the third ; — de mes propres yeux, iu the 
 fourth ; and — de mes propres oreilles, in the fifth, are 
 employed merely for the sake of energy, or to manifest 
 an internal feeling. But this manner of speaking is 
 sanctioned by custom. 
 
 Remark. Expletives must not be mistaken for pleo 
 nasms, as, 
 
 Cest une affaire, oiiily va du It is an affair in which the 
 salut de Vttat, safety ot the state is con- 
 
 cerned. 
 
 Which is better than e'est une affaire, ou ; l va, &c. 
 by omitting y, which is in reality u D account of 
 
 oil : but y here, is a mode of expression from which it 
 is not allowable to deviate. 
 
416 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 qt? THE SYLLEPSIS. 
 
 The syllepsis is a figure by which a word relates 
 more to our meaning, than to the literal expressions, as 
 in these : 
 
 II est onze heures ; Tan mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dis-neuf. 
 
 When using it, the mind, merely intent upon a pre- 
 cise meaning, pays no attention to either the number, 
 or the gender of heure and an. 
 
 There is likewise a syllepsis in these sentences : 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne vienne. 
 J'empecherai qu'il ne vous nuisc. 
 J'ai peur qu'il ne m'oublie, &c. 
 
 Full of a wish that the event may not take place, we 
 are willing to do all we can, that nothing should pre- 
 sent an obstacle to that wish. This is the cause of the 
 introduction of the negative, which, although unne- 
 cessary to complete the sense, yet must be preserved 
 for the idiom. 
 
 There is again a very elegant syllepsis in sentences 
 like the following from Racine : 
 
 Entre le peuple et vous, vous prendrez Dieu pour juge ; 
 Vous souvenant, nion fils, que cache sous ce lin, 
 Comme eux vousf£tes pauvre, et, comme eux, orphelin. 
 
 The poet forgets that he has been using the word 
 peuple : nothing remains in his mind but des pauvres 
 and des orphelins, and it is with that idea of which he 
 is so fully impressed that he makes the pronoun eux 
 agree. For the same reason, Bossuet and Mezengui 
 have said, 
 
 Quand it peuple Htbreu entra dans la terre promise, tout y cel£- 
 brait lews ancetres. — Bosquet. 
 
 Moise eut recours au Seigneur, et lui dit: que ferai-je a ce 
 peuple ? bieniot lie me lapideront. — Mezengui. 
 
 Z»ewsand ils stand for Jes Hcbreux. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 417 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES, AMPHIBdLOGIES, AND 
 GALLICISMS. 
 
 We have chiefly to notice two incorrect modes of 
 construction, which are contrary to the principles laid 
 down in the preceding chapters — grammatical discordan- 
 ces, and amphibologies. 
 
 OF DISCORDANCES. 
 
 In general, there is a discordance in language, 
 when the words, which compose the various members 
 of a sentence, or period, do not agree with each other, 
 either because their construction is contrary to analo- 
 gy, or because they bring together dissimilar ideas, be- 
 tween which the mind perceives an opposition, or can 
 see no manner of affinity. 
 
 The following examples will serve to illustrate this ; 
 
 Notre reputation ne depend pas des louanges qu'on nous donne, 
 mais des actions louables que nous faisons. 
 
 This sentence is not correct, because the first mem- 
 ber being negative, and the second affirmative, cannot 
 ccme under the government of the same verb. It 
 ought to be : 
 
 Notre reputation depend, non Our reputation depends, not 
 des louanges qu'on nous upon the praises which are 
 donne, mais des actions bestoiced on us, hut upon the 
 louables que, &c. praiseworthy actions ichich us 
 
 perform. 
 
 But the most common discordances are those which 
 arise from the wrong use of tenses, as in this sentence : 
 
 II regarde votre malheur comme une punition du peu de com- 
 plaisance que vous avcz eue pour lui, dans le temps qu'il vous 
 pria, &c. 
 
 Because the two preterits, definite and indefinite, can- 
 not well agree together ; it should be ; 
 
418 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 
 
 Que vous eutes pour lui dans le temps qu'il vouspria. 
 
 There is discordance in this sentence : 
 
 On en ressentit autant de joie que d'une victoire complete dans 
 un autre temps, 
 
 Because the verb cannot be understood after the que 
 which serves for the comparison, when that verb is to 
 be in a different tense ; it should be : 
 
 On en ressentit autant do joie qu'on en aurait ressenti, &c. 
 
 This line of Racine, 
 
 Le flot, qui Tapporta, recule epouvante, 
 is also incorrect, because the form of the present cannot 
 associate with that of the preterit definite ; it should 
 have been : qui Va apporte. 
 
 OF AMPHIBOLOGIES. 
 
 Amphibology in language is when a sentence is so 
 constructed as to be susceptible of two different inter- 
 pretations : this must be carefully avoided. As we 
 speak only to be understood, perspicuity is the first and 
 most essential quality of language ; we should always 
 recollect that what is not clearly expressed in any lan- 
 guage, is no language at all. 
 
 Amphibologies are occasioned, 1. i^j the misuse of 
 — moods, and — tenses. 2. Of — the personal pronouns, 
 il, le, la, &c. 3. Of — the possessive pronouns, son, sa, 
 ses, &c. 4. By giving a wrong place to nouns. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the first Kind. 
 
 Qu'ai-je fait, pour venir accabler en ces lieux 
 
 Un heros, sur qui seul j'ai pu tourner les yeux ? Racine. 
 
 Pour venir forms an amphibology, because we do not 
 know whether it relates to the person who speaks, or to 
 the person spoken to : it should have been : Pour que 
 vous veniez. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 419 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the second Kind. 
 
 Cesar voulut prernierement surpasser Pompee ; les grandes 
 i ; Crassus [j.[ firer.t croire 3 quHl pounait partager la 
 giji.-e tie ces deui grands horn I 
 
 This sentence is faulty in its construction, because 
 ; Z and luz set m to relate to Cesar, although 
 the sense obii^eo us to refer tnein to Crassus. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the third Kind. 
 
 Valere alia chez Lcandre ; il y trouva son fils. 
 
 The pronoun son is ambiguous, because we do not 
 know to which it relates, to Valere, or to Leandre. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the fourth Kind. 
 
 J'ai envoye les lettras, que j'ai ecrit.es, a la poste. 
 
 A la poste, thus placed, is equivocal, because we do 
 not know whether it is meant that the letters have been 
 u at the post-office, or sent to the post-office. 
 
 OF GALLICISMS. 
 
 We have distinguished in our " Grammaire Philoso- 
 phique et Litteraire," four sorts of gallicisms : we shall 
 only mention here those of construction. 
 
 The gallicisms of construction are, in general, irre- 
 gularities and deviations from tke customary rules of 
 syntax : there are some, however, which are mere 
 ellipses, and others which can only be attributed to the 
 caprice of custom. 
 
420 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 
 
 General Principle. Every gallicism of construc- 
 tion which obscures the meaning of the sentence, ought 
 to be condemned. Those only ought to be preserved 
 which do not impair perspicuity, by introducing irregu- 
 laris of construction, '^rS which are, at the same time, 
 sanctioned by long practice. 
 
 According to this principle, this elliptic gallicism is 
 now rejected : 
 
 Et qu'ainsi ne soit, meaning : ce que je vous dis est si vrai que, 
 because it obscures the sentence. For instance : 
 
 J'etais dans oe jardin, et qv?ai7isi nesoit, voila. une fleur que j'y 
 ai cueillie, that is : Etpour preuve de cela, voila une fleur, &c! 
 
 Moliere and La Fontaine seem to have been the last 
 great writers that have used this expression. 
 
 One of the most common gallicisms is that in which 
 the impersonal verb il y a, is used for il est, il existe. 
 These expressions : 
 
 II y ovait une fois un roi ; — il y a cent a parier contre un, 
 are gallicisms. There are two in the following sen- 
 tence : 
 
 II n'y a pas jusqu'auz enfans, Even children will meddle with 
 qui ne s'ew melent, it. 
 
 The verb falloir forms a sort of gallicism with the 
 pronoun en y when it is conjugated like pronominal verbs 
 with the double pronouns, il se ; as, 
 
 II s'en faut, il s'en fallait, &c. 
 It then means to be wanting, and when preceded by an 
 adverb of quantity, the first pronoun is omitted, as, 
 Peu s'en faut, tant s'en faut. 
 These several manners of using the verb falloir will 
 be found in the following sentences : 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 II s'en fant bien qu'il soi*! He is far from being so clever 
 
 aussi habile qu'il croit l'e*re, as he thinks. 
 
 Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'ait He was very near failing in 
 
 succombe dans cette entreprise, that undertaking. 
 
 II ne s'en est presque rien He teas as near as possible be- 
 
 fallu qu'il n'ait ote tuc, ing killed. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 
 
 421 
 
 Vous dites qu'ii s ? en faut 
 viugt livres que Id somme en- 
 tiere n'y soit, mais vous vous 
 trompez, i! ne peut pas s'en 
 falioirtaDt, 
 
 Son rhurae est entierement 
 gueri, ou peut s T en faut, 
 
 Q,ue s'en est-il fallu que ces 
 deux amis ne se soient brouil- 
 les ? ' 
 
 Je ne suis pa? content de 
 votre application a 1'etude, tant 
 s'en faut, 
 
 Tant s'en faut que cette co- 
 medie me plaise, elle me sem- 
 ble au contraire detestable, 
 
 II s'en fallait beaucoup que 
 je vous approuvasse dans cette 
 circonstance, 
 
 The sentences : 
 
 II nest rien moins que ginSrcux, 
 Vous avcz beau dire, 
 
 A ce qu'il me semole, 
 
 Nous voild d nous lamenter, 
 
 Qu'est-ce que de nous, 
 
 are also gallicisms. 
 
 You say it wants twenfu 
 pounds to complete the sum. but 
 you are mistaken, it cannot 
 want so mucli. 
 
 His cold is entirely well, or 
 very near. 
 
 How near were these two 
 friends quarrelling ? 
 
 I aa not satisfied with your 
 application to study, far from 
 it. 
 
 So far from this piny pleas- 
 ing me, I think it insufferable. 
 
 J was far from approving 
 your conduct on that occasion. 
 
 He is far from being generous. 
 
 You may say what you please, 
 but, &c. 
 
 By what I can see, as the mat- 
 ter appears to me, &c. 
 
 We began to lament, here we 
 are lamenting, crying, &c. 
 
 What wretched beings we are ! 
 &c. &c. 
 
 The use which is made of the preposition en, in 
 many sentences, is likewise another source of galli- 
 cisms ; some of this kind will be found in the following 
 expressions : 
 
 A qui en avez vous ? 
 Oil en reui-ilvenir ? 
 
 II lui en veut, 
 
 Whom are you angry with T 
 What does he aim at? what 
 
 wou!d he be at ? 
 He has a quarrel with him, &c. 
 
 The preposition en changes also, sometimes, the sig- 
 nification of verbs, and then gives rise to gallicisms. 
 
 37 
 
422 Oi GRAMMATICAL niSC^OAXCES. 
 
 The conjunction que produces as great a number of 
 gallicisms ; as, 
 C'cst une terrible passion que Gaming is a terrible passion. 
 
 le jeu, 
 C'est done en vain que je tra- It is in vain then that I work. 
 
 vaille, 
 Ce n'est pas trop que cela, That is not too much. 
 
 II n'est que d* avoir du courage^ There is nothing like having 
 
 courage. 
 
 Many others will be found in the use which is made 
 of the prepositions d, de, dans, apres, &c. but enough 
 has been said on the subject. 
 
 Gallicisms are of very great use in the simple style, 
 therefore La Fontaine and Mad. de Sevigne abound in 
 them. The middling style has not so many, and the 
 solemn oratorical but few, and these even of a peculiar 
 nature. Only two examples of this kind, both taken 
 from the tragedy of Iphigenia, by Racine, will be here 
 inserted. 
 
 A T ^ez-vous pu penser qu'au sang d'Agamemnon 
 Achilie preferfit une fille sans nom, 
 Qui de tout son destin ce qu'elle a pu comprendre, 
 (Test qu'elle sort d'un sang, &c. 
 
 And 
 
 Je ne sais qui m'arrete et retient mon courroux, 
 Que par un prompt avis de tout ce qui se passe. 
 Je ne coure des dieux divulguer la menace. 
 
 In the first instance, qui is the subject, though with- 
 out relating to any verb ; and in the second, je ne sais 
 qui m'arrete que j e ne coure, is contrary to the rules of 
 common construction. " But," says Vaugelas, " these 
 extraordinary phrases, far from being vicious, possess 
 the more beauty, as they belong to a particular kind of 
 language/' 
 
FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 MADAME DE MAINTENON TO HER BROTHER. 
 
 We can only be 1 unhappy by our own fault ; this shall always 
 bo my text, and my reply to your lamentations. Recollect 2, 
 my dear brother, th,- voyage to Ameri^, the misfortunes of our 
 father, of our infancy and our youth T; and you will bless Pro- 
 vidence instead of murmuring against fortune. Ten years ago, 
 we were both very far {below our present situation 4 ;) and our 
 hopes were so feeble 5, that we limited our wishes to an (income 
 of three thousand livres 6.) At present we have four times that 
 sum 7, and our desires are not yet satisfied ! we enjoy the happy 
 mediocrity which you have so often extolled 8 ; let us be content. 
 If possessions 9 come to us, let us receive them from the hand 
 of God, but let not our views be 10 too extravagant^ 1. We 
 have (every thing necessary 12) and comfortable 13 ; ail the rest 
 is avarice 14 ; all these desires of greatness spring from 15 a^ 
 restless heart. Your debts are all paid, and you may live ele- 
 gantly 16, without contracting more 17. W 7 hat have you to 
 desire ? must 18 schemes 19 of wealth and ambition occasion 20 
 the loss of your repose and your health ? read the life of St. 
 Louis ; you will see how unequal 21 the greatness of this world 
 is to the desires of the human heart ; God only can satisfy 
 them 22. I repeat it, you are only unhappy by your own fault 
 Your uneasiness 23 destroys your health, which you ought to 
 preserve, if it were 24 only because I love you. Watch 25 your 
 temper 26 : if you can render it less splenetic 27 and less 
 gloomy, (ycu will have gained a great advantage 28.) This is 
 not the work of reflection only ; exercise, amusement, and a re- 
 gular life* (are necessary for the purpose 29.) You cannot think 
 well (whilst your health is affected 30 ;) when the body is debili- 
 tated 31, the mind is without vigour. Adieu ! write to me more 
 frequently, and in a style less gloomy. 
 
 1 On ne etre... que. 2 Songer a. 3 The misfortunes of our in 
 fancy and those of our, &c. 4 Du point ou nous sommes au 
 jourd'hui. 5 Si peu de chose. 6 Trois mille livres de rente. 7 
 That sum, en... plus. 8 Have so often extolled, vanter si fort, 
 ihd-2. 9 Fossessions, biens, 10 Let us not have views. 11 Trop 
 vaste. 32 Le necessaire. 13 Le commode. 14 Avarice, cupidity. 
 15 Spring from, partir du vide de. 16 Delicieusement. 17 Con- 
 tracting more, en faire de nouvelles. 18 Must, faut-il que. 19 
 Projet. 20 Occasion, couter, sub-1. 21 Unequal, au-dessous de. 
 22 Satisfy them, le rassasier. 23 Uneasiness, inquietude pi. 24 
 If it were, quand ce etre, cond-1. 25Travailler sur. 26 Humeur. 
 27 Bilieux. 28 Ce etre un grand point de gagn?. 29 II y faut 
 de. 20Tantque vous se porter mal. Debilitated, dans l'abatte- 
 ment. 
 
424 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 II. 
 
 THE CONVERT. 
 
 AN EASTERN TALE. 
 
 Divine mercy 1 had brought a vicious man into a society of 
 sages, whose morals were holy and pure. He was affected by 
 their virtues ; it was not long 2 before 3 he imitated them and 
 lost his old habits : he became just, sober, patient, laborious, and 
 benevolent. His deeds nobody could deny, but they were attri- 
 buted 4 to odious motives. Th-ey praised his good actions, with- 
 out loving his person : they would always judge him by what he 
 had been, not by what he was become. This injustice filled him 
 with grief ; he shed tears in the bosom of an ancient sage, more 
 just and more humane than the others. " O my son,''' said the 
 old man to him, " thou art better than thy reputation ; be thankful 
 " to God for it. Happy the man who can say, my enemies and 
 " my rivals censure in me vices of which I am not guilty. What 
 " matters 5 it, if thou art good, that men persecute thee as wick- 
 " ed 1 Hast thou not, to comfort thee, the two best witnesses of 
 " thy actions, God and thy conscience ?" Saint-Lambert. 
 
 Mr. de Montausier has written a letter to Monseigneur upon 
 the taking of Philipsbourgh, which very much pleases me, 
 "Monseigneur, I do not compliment you on the capture of Phi- 
 " lipsbourg : you had a good army, bombs, cannon, and Vauban ; 
 " neither shall I compliment you upon your valour : for that is 
 " an hereditary virtue in your family. But I rejoice that you 
 " are liberal, generous, humane, and that you know how to 
 " recompense the services of those who behave well : it is for 
 this that I congratulate you." Sevigne. 
 
 III. 
 THE GOOD MINISTER. 
 
 AN EASTERN TALE. 
 
 The great Aaron Raschild began to suspect that his vizier 
 Giafar was not deserving of the confidence which he had reposed 
 in him. The women of Aaron, the inhabitants of Bagdad, the 
 courtiers, the dervises, censured the vizier with bitterness. The 
 calif loved Giafar ; he would not condemn him upon the clamours 
 of the city and the court : he visited his empire ; every where 
 he saw the land well cultivated, the country smiling, the cottages 
 opulent, the useful arts honoured, and youth full of gaiety. He 
 visited his fortified cities and sea-ports, he saw numerous ships, 
 
 1 Mis£ricorde. 2 Ne pas tarder. 3 A, inf-1. 4 On donner 
 des motifs. 5 Importer. 
 
FREE EXERCISES. 1^5 
 
 which threatened the coasts of Africa and of Asia ; he saw war 
 riors disciplined and content ; these warriors, the seamen and the 
 peasantry, exclaimed: " O God, pour thy blessings upon the 
 " faithful, by giving them a calif like Aaron, and a vizier like 
 " Giafar." The calif, affected by these exclamations, enters a 
 mosque, falls upon his knees, and cries out : " Great God, I re- 
 u turn thee thanks ; thou hast given me a vizier of whom my 
 fc courtiers speak ill, and my people speak well." 
 
 Saint-Lambert. 
 
 Providence conducts us with so much goodness through the 
 different periods of our life, that we (do not perceive our progress 
 1.) This loss takes place gently 2, it is imperceptible, it is the 
 shadow of the sun-dial whose motion we do not see. If, at twen- 
 ty years of age, we could see 3 in a mirror, the face we shall have 
 at three-score, we (should be shocked at the contrast 4,) and 
 terrified at our own figure ; but it is day by day w r e advance : 
 we are to-day as we were yesterday, and shall be to-morrow as 
 we are to-day ; so we go forward without perceiving it, and this 
 is a miracle of that Providence whom I adore. Sevigne. 
 
 IV. 
 
 THE MAGNIFICENT PROSPECT. 
 
 This beautiful house was on the declivity of a hill, from 
 whence you beheld the sea, sometimes clear and smooth as glass, 
 sometimes idly 1 irritated against the rocks on which it broke, 
 bellowing 2 and swelling its waves like mountains. On another 
 side was seen a river, in which were islands bordered with 
 blooming limes, and lofty poplars, which raised their proud heads 
 to the very clouds. The several channels, which formed those 
 islands, seemed sporting 3 in the plain. Some rolled their limpid 
 waters with rapidity ; some had a peaceful and still course ; 
 others, by long windings, ran back again, to reascend as it were 
 to their source, and seemed not to have power to leave these en- 
 chanting borders. At a distance were seen hills and mountains, 
 which were lost in the clouds, and formed, by their fantastic 
 figure, as delightful a horizon (as the eye could wiSQ to behold 4.) 
 The neighbouring mountains were covered with verdant (vine 
 branches, 5) hanging in festoons ; the grapes, brighter than pur- 
 ple, could not conceal themselves under the leaves, and the 
 vine 6 was overloaded with its fruit. The fig, the olive, the 
 pomegranate, and all other trees, overspread the plain, and made 
 it one large garden. Fenelon. 
 
 1 Ne le sentir presque pas. 2 Va doucement. 3 On nous faire 
 voir. 4 Tomber a la renverse. 
 
 1 Follement. 2 En gemir. 3 Se jouer. 4 A souhait pour )% 
 okalsir de. 5 Pampre, m. 6 Vigne, f. 
 
 37* 
 
426 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 Long hopes wear out 7 j.oy, as long illness wears out pain. 
 All philosophic systems are only good when one (has no use 
 for them 8.) Sevigne 
 
 A GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 
 
 With what magnificence does nature shine 1 upon earth ! A 
 pure light, extending from east to west, gilds successively the 
 two hemispheres of this globe ; an element transparent and light, 
 surrounds it ; a gentle fecundating heat animates, gives being 2 
 to the seeds of life ; salubrious running streams contribute to 
 their preservation and growth ; eminences diversified over the 
 level land, arrest the vapours of the air, make these springs in- 
 exhaustible and always new ; immense cavities made to receive 
 them, divide the continents. The extent of the sea is as great as 
 that of the earth ; it is not a cold, barren element ; it is a new 
 empire, as rich, as populous as the first. The finger of God has 
 marked their boundaries. 
 
 The earth, rising above the level of the sea, is secure 3 from 
 its eruptions : its surface, enamelled with flowers,, adorned with 
 ever-springing verdure, peopled with thousands and thousands 
 of species of different animals, is a place of rest, a delightful 
 abode, where man, placed in order to second nature, presides 
 over all beings. The only one among them all, capable of 
 knowing and worthy of admiring, God has made him spectator 
 of the universe, and a witness of his wonders. The divine spark 
 with which he is animated, enables him to participate in the di- 
 vine mysteries ; it is by this light that he thinks and reflects ; by 
 it he sees and reads in the book of the universe, as in a copy of 
 the Deity. 
 
 Nature is the exterior throne of the divine Majesty ; the man 
 who contemplates, who studies it, rises by degrees to the inte- 
 rior throne of Omnipotence. Made to adore the Creator, the 
 vassal of heaven, sovereign of the earth, he ennobles, peoples, 
 enriches it ; he establishes among living beings, order, subordina- 
 tion, harmony; he embellishes nature herself; he cultivates, ex- 
 tends, and polishes it; lops off the thistle and the briar, and mul- 
 tiplies ffhe grape and the rose. Buffcn 
 
 VI. 
 
 ANOTHER GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 
 
 Trees, shrubs, and plants, are the ornaments and clothing 1 of 
 the earth. Nothing is so melancholy 2 as the prospect of a c«m- 
 
 7 User. 8 N'en avoir que faire. 
 
 1 Ne briller pas. 2 Faire ecloire. 3 A Tabri de. 
 
 1 Vehement. 2Trtste 
 
FREE EXERCISES. 427 
 
 try naked and bare 3, exhibiting to the eye nothing but stones, 
 mud, and sand. But, vivified by nature, and clad 4 in its nup- 
 tial robe, amidst the course of streams and the singing of birds, 
 the earth presents to man, in the harmony of the three kingdoms, 
 a spectacle full of life, of interest and charms, the only spectacle 
 in the world of which his eyes and heart are never weary 5. 
 
 The more a (contemplative man's soul is fraught with sensi 
 biiity 0,) the more he yields to the extacies which this harmony 
 produces in him. A soft and deep melancholy then takes pos 
 session of his senses, and in an intoxication of delight, he loses 
 himself in the immensity of that beautiful system, with which he 
 feels himself identified. Then every particular object escapes 
 him, he sees and feels nothing but in the whole. Some circum- 
 stance must contract his ideas, and circumscribe his imagination, 
 before 7 be can observe by parcels that universe which he was 
 endeavouring to embrace. J. J. Rousseau. 
 
 VII. 
 CULTIVATED NATURE, 
 
 How beautiful is cultivated nature ! by the labours of man, 
 how brilliant it is, and how pompously adorned ! He himself 
 il its chief ornament, its noblest part ; by multiplying himself, 
 he multiplies the most precious germ ; she also seems to mul- 
 tiply with him: by his art, he (brings forth to view J) all that 
 she concealed 2 in her bosom. How many unknown treasures ! 
 What new riches! Flowers, fruits, seeds brought to perfection, 
 multiplied to infinity ; the useful species of animals transport- 
 ed, propagated, increased without number; the noxious spe- 
 cies reduced, confined, banished ; goid, and iron more neces- 
 sary than gold, extracted from the bowels of the earth ; torrents 
 confined 3, rivers directed, contracted 4 ; the sea itself subjected, 
 explored 5, crossed, bom one hemisphere to the other ; the earth 
 accessible in every part, and every where rendered equally 
 cheerful and fruitful : in the vallies, delightful meadows ; i'n 
 the plains, rich pastures and still richer harvests; hills covered 
 with vines and fruits: their summits crowned with useful trees 
 and young forests; deserts changed into cities inhabited bv an 
 immense popiJation, which, continually circulating, spreads itself 
 from these centres to their extremities; roads opened and" fre- 
 quented, communications established every where, as so- many 
 witnesses of the strength and union of society; a thousand other 
 monuments of power and glory sufficiently demonstrate that 
 man, possessing; dominion over the earth, has changed, renewed 
 the whole of its surface, and that, at all times, he shares the em- 
 pire of it with nature. 
 
 3 Pel6, 4 Revetu. 5 Se lasser. 6 Contemplateur avoir Tame 
 sensible. 7 Pour qu'il. 
 
 1 Mettre au jour. 2 Receler. 3 Contenu. 4 Rcsserrc. 5 
 Reconnu. 
 
428 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 VIIL 
 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 However, man only reigns by right of conquest ; he rathei 
 enjoys than possesses, and he can preserve only by means of con- 
 tinual labour. If this ceases, every thing droops, every thing 
 declines, every thing changes, and again returns 1 under the 
 hand of nature ; she reassumes her rights, erases the work of 
 man, covers with dust and moss his most pompous monuments, 
 destroys them in time, and leaves him nothing but the regret of 
 having lost, through his fault, what his ancestors had conquered 
 by their labours. Those times, in which man loses his dominion, 
 those barbarous 2 ages, during which every thing is seen to pe- 
 rish, are always preceded by war, and accompanied by scarcity 
 and depopulation. Man, who can do nothing but by number, 
 who is strong only by union, who can be happy only by peace, is 
 mad enough to arm himself for his misery, and to fight for his 
 ruin. Impelled by an insatiable thirst of having, blinded by am 
 bition still more insatiable, he renounces all the feelings of huma 
 nity, turns all his strength against himself, seeks mutual destruction, 
 actually 3 destroys himself; and, after these periods of blood and 
 carnage, when the smoke of glory has vanished, he contemplates 
 with a sad eye, the earth wasted, the arts buried, nations scattered, 
 the people weakened, his own happiness ruined, and his real 
 power annihilated. Buffon. 
 
 IX. 
 
 INVOCATION TO THE GOD OF NATURE. 
 
 Almighty God ! whose presence alone supports nature, and 
 maintains the harmony of the laws of the universe : Thou, who, 
 from the immoveable throne of the empyrean, seest the celestial 
 spheres roll under thy feet, without shock or confusion : who, 
 from the bosom of repose, reproducest every moment their im 
 mense movements, and alone governest, in profound peace, that 
 infinite number of heavens and worlds ; restore, restore at length 
 tranquillity to the agitated earth ! let it be silent at thy voice ; 
 let discord and war cease their proud clamours ! God of good- 
 ness, author of all beings, thy paternal eye takes in 1 all the ob- 
 jects of the creation ; but man is thy chosen being ; thou hast 
 illumined 2 his soul with a ray of thy immortal light : complete 
 the measure of thy kindness by penetrating his heart with a ray 
 of thy love : this divine sentiment, diffusing itself every where, 
 will reconcile opposite natures ; man will no longer dread the 
 sight of man ; his hand will ho longer wield the murderous 
 steel 3 ; the devouring flames of war will no longer dry up 4 the 
 
 1 Rentrer. 2 De barbaric 3 En effet. 
 
 1 Embrasser. 2 Eclairer. 3 Le fer armer samain. 4 Tarir. 
 
FEEE EXERCISES. 429 
 
 sources of population : the human species, now weakened, muti- 
 lated, mowed down in the blossom, will spring anew 5 and 
 multiply without number ; nature, overwhelmed under the weight 
 of scourges 6, will soon re-assume, with a new Jife, its former 
 fruitfulness ; and we, beneficent God, will second it, we will cul- 
 tivate it, we will contemplate it incessantly, that we may every 
 moment offer thee a new tribute of gratitude and admiration. 
 
 Buffon. 
 
 X. 
 
 Happy they who are disgusted with 1 turbulent pleasures, and 
 know how to be contented 2 with the sweets of an innocent life ! 
 Happy they who delight in being instructed 3, and who take a 
 pleasure 4 in storing their minds with knowledge ! Wherever 
 adverse fortune may throw them, they always carry entertain- 
 ment with them ; and the disquiet which preys upon others, even 
 in the midst of pleasures, is unknown to those who can employ 
 themselves in reading. Happy they who love to read, and are 
 not like me deprived of the ability. As these thoughts were 
 passing in my mind, I went into a gloomy forest, where I imme- 
 diately perceived an old man, holding a book in his hand. The 
 forehead of this sage was broad, bald, and a little wrinkled : a 
 white beard hung down to his girdle ; his stature was talj and 
 majestic ; his complexion still fresh and ruddy, his eyes lively 
 and piercing, his voice sweet, his words plain and charming. I 
 never saw so venerable an old man. He was a priest of Apollo, 
 and officiated 5 in a marble temple, which the kings of Egypt 
 had dedicated to that God in this forest. The book which he 
 held in his hand was a collection of hymns in honour of the 
 Gods. He accosted me in a friendly manner; and we discoursed 
 together. He related things past so well, that they sGemed 
 present, and yet with such brevity, that his account never tired 
 me. He foresaw the future by his profound knowledge, which 
 made him know men and the designs of which they are capable. 
 With all this wisdom he was cheerful and complaisant, and the 
 sprightliesl youth has not so many graces as this man had at so 
 advanced an age. He accordingly loved young men when they 
 were teachable 6, and had a taste for study and virtue. 
 
 Fenelon. 
 
 XL 
 THOUGHTS ON POETRY. 
 
 Wherever I went, I found that poetry was considered as the 
 
 5 Germer de nouveau, G Flcau. 
 
 1 Se degouter de. 2 Sc contenter de. 3 S'instruire. 4 Se 
 plaire. 5 Servir. G Docile. 
 
430 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 (highest learning 1) and regarded with a veneration (somewhat 
 approaching to 2,) that which men would pay to angelic nature. 
 
 It yet fills me with wonder that, in almost all countries, the 
 most ancient poets are considered as the best ; whether (it be 
 that 3) every kind of knowledge is an acquisition gradually at- 
 tained, and poetry is a gift conferred at once ; or that the first 
 poetry of every nation surprised them as a novelty, and retained 
 the credit by consent, which it received by accident at first ; or 
 whether, as the province 4 of poetry is to describe nature and 
 passion, which are always the same, the first writers (took pos- 
 session 5) of (the most striking objects for description 6,) and 
 (the most probable occurrences for fiction 7,) and left nothing to 
 those that followed them, but transcription 8 of the same events, 
 and new combinations 9 of the same images. Whatever be the 
 reason, it is commonly observed, that the early Avriters are in 
 possession of nature, and their followers 10 of art : that, the first 
 excel in strength and invention, and the latter in elegance and 
 refinement. 
 
 I was desirous to add my name to this illustrious fraternity 11. 
 I read all the poets of Persia and Arabia, and was able to repeat 
 by memory the volumes that are suspended in the mosque of 
 Mecca. But I soon found that no man was ever great by imita- 
 tion. My desire of excellence 12 impelled 13 me to transfer 14 
 my attention to nature and to life 15. Nature was to be my sub- 
 ject, and men to be my auditors : I could never describe what I 
 had not seen ; I could not hope (to move those with delight or 
 terror 16) whose interests and opinions I did not understand 17. 
 
 XII. 
 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 Being now resolved to be a poet, I saw every thing (with a 
 new purpose 18 ;) my sphere of attention was suddenly magni- 
 fied : no kind of knowledge (was to be overlooked 19.) I ranged 
 mountains and deserts for 20 images and resemblances, and 
 (pictured upon my mind 21) every tree of the forest and flower 
 of the valley. 1 observed with equal care the crags of the rock 
 and the pinnacles of the palace. Sometimes I wandered along 
 the mazes of the rivulet, and sometimes watched the changes of 
 the summer-clouds. To a poet nothing can be useless. What- 
 
 1 Partie la plus sublime de la litterature. 2 Qui tenoit de. 3 
 Cela vienne de ce que. 4 But. 5. S'emparer. 6 Objets qui four- 
 nissaient les plus riches descriptions. 7 Evenemens qui prctaient 
 le plus a la fiction. 8 De copier. 9 Faire de nouvellcs combi- 
 naisons. 10 Successeurs. 11 Famille. 12 Exceller. 13 En- 
 gager. 14 Reporter... sur. 15 Tableau de la vie. 16 Reveiller 
 le plaisir ou la terreur dans ceux. 17 Ne connaitre ni. 18 Sous 
 un nouveau jour. 19 Je ne devais negliger. 20. Pour recueiller. 
 31 Penetrer mon esprit du tableau de. 
 
FREE EXERCISES. 431 
 
 ever is beautiful, and whatever is dreadful, must be familiar to 
 his imagination : he must (be conversant 22) with all that (is 
 awfully vast or elegantly little 23.) The plants of the garden, 
 the animals of the wood, the minerals of the earth, and the me- 
 teors of the sky, must all concur to store his mind with inex- 
 haustible variety : for every idea is useful for the (enforcement 
 or decoration 24) of moral or religious truth ; and he who knows 
 most, will have most power 25 of diversifying bis scenes 26, and 
 gratifying his reader with remote allusions and unexpected in- 
 struction. 
 
 All the appearances of nature I was, the refore, careful to study 
 27, and every country which 1 have surveyed has contributed 
 something to my poetical powers. 
 
 In so wide a survey, interrupted the prince, you must surely 
 nave left much unobserved. I have lived, till now, within the 
 circuit of these mountains, and yet cannot walk abroad without 
 the sight of something which I had never beheld before, or never 
 beeded 23. 
 
 XIIL 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 The business of a poet, said Imlac, is to examine, not the indi- 
 vidual, but the species ; to remark general properties and (large 
 appearances 29 :) he does not number the streaks of the tulip, or 
 describe the different shades in the verdure of the forest. He is 
 to exhibit, in his portraits of nature, such prominent and striking 
 features, as 30 recal the original to every mind ; and must neglect 
 the minuter discriminations 31, which one may have remarked, 
 and another neglected, for those characteristics 32 which are 
 alike obvious 33 to vigilance 34 and carelessness 35. 
 
 But the knowledge of nature is only half 36 the task of a poet : 
 he must be acquainted likewise with all the modes 37 of life. 
 His character requires that he estimate 38 the happiness and 
 misery of every condition : observe the power of all the passions, 
 in all their combinations, and trace the changes 39 of the human 
 mind, as they are modified by various institutions, and acciden- 
 tal influences of climate or custom : from the sprightliness of 
 infancy to the despondence of decrepitude. He must divest 
 himself 40 of the prejudices of his age or country; he must 
 consider right and wrong 41 in their abstracted and invariable 
 state 42 ; he must disregard present laws and opinions, and rise 
 
 22 Bien connaitre. 23 Etonr.e par sa grandeur, ou charme paj 
 son elegante petitesse. 24 Fortifier, ou embellir. 25 Ressource^ 
 pour. 26 Tableau. 527 Etudier av< c soln toutes les, cv.c. 28 Re 
 marquer. 29 Considerer les objets en grand. 30 De ces traits 
 saillans et frappans qui, &c. 'M Ces petits details. 32 Pour 
 s'appliquer a caracteriscr, &C &c. '.Y.\ Frappe egalement. 34 
 (Eil observateur. 35 Esprit insouciant :;<> The half of. 37 
 Tous les different aspects 3rt Apprecier. 3'J Suivre les vicis- 
 situdes. 40 Se depoailler. 41 Ce qui e^t juste ou injuste. 48 
 
432 ' FttEE EXERCISES. 
 
 to genera! and transcendent truths, which will always be the 
 same ; he must, therefore, (content himself with the slow progress 
 of his name 43,) contemn the applause of his own time, and 
 commit his claims to the justice of posterity. He must write as 
 the interpreter of nature, and the legislator of mankind, and con- 
 sider himself as presiding 44 over the thoughts and manners of 
 future generations, as abeing superior to time and place. 
 
 His labour is not yet at an end : he must know many languages, 
 and many sciences ; and, that his style may be worthy of his 
 thoughts, he must, by incessant practice, familiarize himself to 
 every delicacy of speech and grace of harmony. S. Johnson. 
 
 XIV. 
 
 .First follow nature, and your judgment frame, 
 By her just standard, which is still the same : 
 Unerring nature, still divinely bright, 
 One clear, unchanged, and universal light, 
 Life, force, and beauty, must to all impart ; ] 
 
 At once ihe source, and end, and test of art, 2 
 
 Art, from that fund, each just supply provides ; 
 Works without show, and without pomp presides ; 
 In some fair body thus tk' informing soul. 
 With spirits feeds, with vigour fills the whole ; 
 Each motion guides, and every nerve -sustains 
 Itself unseen, but in th' effect remains. 3 
 
 Some, to whom heav'n in wit has been profuse, 
 Want as much more to turn it to its use : 
 For wit and judgment often are at strife, 
 Tho' meant each other's aid, like man and wife. 4 
 'Tis more to guide, than spur the muse's steed, 
 Restrain his fury, than provoke his speed : 5 
 
 The winged courser, like a gen'rous norse, 
 Shows most true mettle, when you check its course. 6 
 
 Pope. 
 
 Abstraction faite de ces divers prejuges. 43 Se rcsigncr a voir 
 
 son nom percer difficilement. 44 Influer. 
 
 I Light, clear, immutable, and universal nature, which never 
 
 errs, and shines always with a divine splendour, must impart to all 
 
 she does, life, force, and beauty. 2 She is at once the source, &c. 
 
 3 So in a fair body, unseen itself, but always sensible by its ef- 
 fects, the soul continually acting, feeds the whole with spirits, fills 
 it with vigour, guides every motion of it, and sustai-ns every nerve 
 
 4 Some to whom heaven has given wit with profusion, want as 
 much yet to know the use they ought to make of it ; for wit and 
 judgment, though made, like man and wife, to aid each other, are 
 often in opposition. 
 
 5 |( is more difficult to guide lhan spur the courser of the mu- 
 ses, arid to restrain its ardour than provoke its impetuosity. 
 
 6 The winged courser is like a generous horse : the more we strive 
 to stop it in its rapid course,the more it shows unconquerable vigour. 
 
EXAMPLES OF PHRASES 
 
 ON THE 
 
 PRINCIPAL DIFFICULTIES OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE. 
 
 Sur les Collectifs Partitife. 
 
 La plupart des fruits verts sont d'lui 
 gout austire. 
 
 La plupart des gens ne se conduisent que 
 par intiret. 
 
 La plupart du monde 3e trompe. 
 
 11 miprise par philosophic les honneurs, 
 que la plupart du monde recherche. 
 
 II dezait me fournir tant d'arbres ; mais 
 fen ax rejctt la moitii qui ne valait rien. 
 
 Un grand nombre de speclateurs ajou- 
 tait a la bsaute du spectacle. 
 
 Tout sorte de livres ne sont pas egale- 
 mtnt bons. 
 
 Beaucoup de personnes se sont presentees. 
 
 Bien des personnes sc font des princives 
 
 a leurfantaisie. 
 
 Sur quelques Verbes qu'on ne peut con- 
 
 juguer avec Avoir sans faire des bar- 
 
 barismea. 
 
 // lui est ichu une succession du chef de 
 safemme. 
 
 11 tsl bien dichu de son cridit. 
 
 jV« sommes-noui pas convenus du prix ? 
 
 JVcst-i! pas intervenu dans cette affaire, 
 comme il Vavait promit .* 
 
 // est turvenu a Vimproviste. 
 
 La neige, qui est tjmbe'e cematin, a adou- 
 ei It temps. 
 
 Que de neige il est tomle" ce matin I 
 
 Toutes les dents lui sont tombies. 
 
 Ce apropos n'est pas tombi a terre. 
 
 Etes-vous alii voir votre ami t 
 
 lis sont arrive" s a midi et sont repartis de 
 suite. 
 
 t'csjlcurs sont a peine icloses. 
 
 Us est ni de parens veriueux, qui n'ont 
 run nigligi pour son education. 
 
 Mademoiselle votre saeur est-elfe rentrie 7 
 
 Madame votre mire n'est-elle pas encore 
 
 venue ? 
 
 Sur les Mots de Quantite. 
 
 fl a beaucoup d'csprit, mais curore plus 
 <Fimour-propre. 
 
 llaassez d'argent pour ses menus plai- 
 
 Il y avait bien du monde a VOpira. 
 
 Tl y avait hiex au Pare je ne sais combien 
 de gens. 
 
 Il boit aulant (Teau que de vin. 
 
 U a tant d'avxis qu'il ne manquera de 
 run. 
 
 >°er^onne n'y i P ; »J xVisttMt que lui. 
 
 IX n'a pas plus (V esprit qu'il n'enfiut. 
 
 Trop de loisir perd souvent lajeunesse. 
 
 . Py ai bien moins tVirdirit que vnus. 
 
 Sur les Pronoms Personnels. 
 Giprc et te retire. 
 Cours vite etr" -Vjmiue point. 
 
 On the Collective Partitives. 
 The greater part of green fruit is of a 
 harsh taste. 
 Most people are guided only by interest. 
 
 The greater part of mankind live in er- 
 ror. 
 
 As a true philosopher he despises those 
 honours which maukind in general court. 
 
 He was to fnrnish me so many trees, but 
 I refused half of them which were good for 
 nothing. 
 
 A considerable number of spectators ad 
 ded to the splendour of the scene. 
 
 Every kind of books are not equally good. 
 
 Many people presented themselves. 
 Many persons form principles to them- 
 selves, according to their fancy. 
 On some f^erbs which cannot be conjugated 
 with the verb Avoir, without making bar- 
 barous phrases. 
 An estate fell to him in right of his wife. 
 
 He has lost much of his credit. 
 
 Have we not agreed about the price ? 
 
 Did be not interfere in that affair as he 
 had promised ? 
 
 He came up unawares. 
 
 The snow which fell this morning has 
 softened the weather. 
 
 How much snow has fallen this morning ' 
 
 All his teeth have fallen out. 
 
 That remark was not allowed to escape. 
 
 Have you been to see your friend ? 
 
 They arrived at nocu and set out again 
 immediately. 
 
 These flowers are scarcely blown. 
 
 He was born of virtuous parents, who be- 
 stowed on him the best education. 
 
 Is your sister returned ? 
 
 Is not your mother come yet ? 
 
 On Words of fyu+itity. 
 He has a great deal of sense, but still 
 more vanity. 
 
 He has sufficient pocket-money. 
 
 There were a great many people at the 
 Opera. 
 
 There were I do not know how many 
 peopie in the Park yesterday. 
 
 lit: drinks as much water as wine. 
 
 He has so many friends that he will war.t 
 fur nothing. 
 
 Nobody has more interest there than he. 
 
 He is not overburdened with sense. 
 
 Too much leisure time is frequently the 
 'ion of youth. 
 
 I am much lass concerned in it than you. 
 On the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 Go out and retire, withdraw 
 
 Go quick and do not loiter. 
 
 38 
 
434 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 II dit ttujouroVhui une chose et demain il 
 te dimentira 
 
 11 s 'est dementi lui-mime. 
 
 Lajeutxcsjt est naturellement emportie ; 
 tile a besoin de quelque entrave qui la re- 
 tienne. 
 
 11 nepeut voir personne dans la prospi- 
 ritd sans lui porter envie. 
 
 Ce que vous me dltes est une inigme pour 
 snoi. 
 
 CPcst un homme extreme en tout ; il aime 
 et il hait avecfureur. 
 
 Si vous n'y avez jamais ite\ je vous y mi- 
 nerai. 
 
 Je Vai connu doux et modeste ; il s'est 
 bien gate" dans le commerce de ses nouveaux 
 amis, 
 
 E-lle n'est pas encore revenue du saisisse* 
 mentf que lui causa cette nou-velle* 
 
 11 menace de Vexterminer, lui et toute sa 
 race. 
 
 Si vous n'avcz que f aire de ce livre-ld^pre- 
 te:-le-moi. 
 
 Je lui avais envoy & un diamant, il Va re- 
 fuse, je te lui at renvoyJ. 
 
 11 apprend facilement et oublie de mime. 
 
 Je lui pardonne facilement d'avoir voulu 
 sefaire auteur ; mais je nt saurais lui pa r- 
 donner toutes les pudriliUs dont il a farci 
 ton livre. 
 
 Je me plains a vous de vous mime. 
 
 Si vous ne voulez pas etre pour lui } au 
 moins ne soysz pas contre. 
 
 Quand sera-ce que vous viendrez nous 
 voir ? 
 
 Sur soi, lui, soi-meme et lui-mfime. 
 
 Quand on a pour soi le timoignage de sa 
 conscience, on est bien fort. 
 
 Meslime de toute la terre ne sert de rien 
 a un nomine qui n'a pas le timoignage de 
 sa conscience pour lui. 
 
 Un homme fait mille fautes, parce qu'il 
 Me fait point de rijltxions sur lui. 
 
 On fait mille fautes, quand on ne fait 
 aucune reflexion sur soi. 
 
 11 aime mieux dire du mal de lui, que de 
 n'en point parler. 
 
 Ucgoiste aimerxt mieux dire du mal de 
 soi, que de n'en point parler. 
 
 On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que 
 soi. 
 
 Un prince a souvent besoin de beaucoup 
 de gens plus petit s que lui. 
 
 C'est un bon moyen de s'ilever soi-mimc, 
 que dPexalter ses partils ; et un homme 
 adroit s'elevc amsi lui-meme. 
 
 Sur let* Pronoms Reiatifs. 
 
 // n y y a rien de si capable d^eff^miner le 
 courage^ que Voisivetitt les ddlicei. 
 
 llfaut empScher que la division, qui est 
 dans ctttefamille, n'tclate. 
 
 11 y u bien des evtnemens que Von sun- 
 pose se passer pendant let entr'actes. 
 
 Jt le trouvai qui s'habillait. 
 
 Quile tirera de cet embarras, le tirera 
 d?une grande misire. 
 
 He advances a thing to-day, and will con- 
 tradict himself to-morrow. 
 
 He has contradicted himself. 
 
 Youth is naturally hasty, it needs some 
 check to restrain it. 
 
 He can see the prosperity of nobody with- 
 out envying" them. 
 
 What you tell me is a perfect riddle to 
 me. 
 
 He is a man that carries every thing- to 
 excess; he is alike violent in his love and 
 io his hatred. 
 
 If you have never been there, I will take 
 you. 
 
 I knew him when be was mild and mo 
 dest ; he has been much corrupted by asso- 
 ciating with his new acquaintances. 
 
 She is not yet recovered from the con- 
 sternation into which that intelligence threw 
 her. 
 
 He threatens to exterminate him and all 
 his family. 
 
 If you have done with this book, lend it 
 me. 
 
 I had sent him a diamond, and he refus- 
 ed it, but 1 sent him it back again. 
 
 He learns easily and forgets the same. 
 
 I can easily parden him for having at- 
 tempted to turn author ; but I cannot par- 
 don him all the absurdities with which he 
 has filled his book. 
 
 I complain to you of yourself. 
 
 If you will not be for him, at least do 
 not be against him. 
 
 When will you come to see us ? 
 
 On soi, lui, soi-meme and lui-mSme. 
 
 The approbation of our conscience ira 
 parts great courage. 
 
 The good opinion ef the whole world is 
 of no use to a man who has not the appro- 
 bation of his own conscience. 
 
 A man commits a thousand faults, because 
 he does not reflect on future consequences. 
 
 We commit a thousand faults, when we 
 neglect to reflect on ourselves. 
 
 He had rather speak ill of himself than 
 not talk of himself at all. 
 
 The egotist prefers speaking ill of him- 
 self rather than not be the subject of his 
 own conversation. 
 
 We frequently want the assistance o( one 
 who Is below ourselves. 
 
 A prince frequently needs the assistance 
 of many persons inferior to himself. 
 
 It is an excellent method of exalting our- 
 selves to exalt our equals, and a man of ad- 
 dress by this means exalts himself. 
 
 On the Relative Pronouns. 
 
 Nothing is so calculated t# enervate the 
 mind as idleness and pleasure. 
 
 The dissent ion in that family must be 
 prevented from becoming public 
 
 There are many events in a piece which 
 ere supposed to happen between the acts. 
 
 I found bim dressing. 
 
 Whoever extricates bim frcm this difla 
 culty will relieve hint from much distress. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES, 
 
 435 
 
 Ceux Id tont viritablement heureux, qui 
 croicnt Pitre. 
 
 U n'y a que la vertu, qui puisse rendre 
 un homme kcureux en cette vie. 
 
 J I n'y a rigle si ginirale^ qui n'ait son 
 exception. 
 
 Cest un orateur qui se posside et qui ne 
 se trouble jamais. 
 
 IlrCy a pas dans le cceur humain de repli 
 que Dtcu ne connaisse. 
 
 On n*a trouvi que qutlques fragment du 
 grand ouvrage quHl avait promis. 
 
 La f ante, que sous avczfaitc, est plus im- 
 portante que vous ne pensez. 
 
 ■Lts premieres demarches qu 1 on fait dans 
 le monde, ont beaucoup cTinfluence sur le 
 reste de la vie. 
 
 Cette farce est une des plus risibles gu'on 
 ait encore vues. 
 
 Amassez-vout des trteors que les vers et 
 la rouille ne puissent point getter, et que 
 les voleurs ne puissent point dirobtr. 
 
 /^incertitude, ou nous sommes de ce qui 
 doit arriver, fait que nous ne saurions pren- 
 dre des mesures justes. 
 
 Je m'e' tonne quHl ne voie pas le danger 
 ou il est. 
 
 LP hommt dont vous parlez, n'est plus ici. 
 
 Celui Je qui je tiens cette nouvelle ne 
 vous est pas connu. 
 
 Celui, a qui ce beau chateau appartient 
 ne Vhabite presque jamais. 
 
 Ce sont des ev&nemens auxquels il faut 
 bien se soumettre. 
 
 Cest ce a quoi vous ne pensez guire. 
 Sur les Pronoms Demonstratifs. 
 
 Ne point reconnoitre la divinite 1 , c^est rc~ 
 noncer a toutes les lumiires de la raison. 
 
 jyicntir, c*est mipriser Dieu et craindre 
 les hommes. 
 
 II y a des tpicUmies morales, et ce sont 
 les plus dangereuses. 
 
 Je crois que ce que vous dites est bien elo- 
 ign^ de ce que vous pensez. 
 
 Let hommes n'aiment ordinairement que 
 ctux qui les flattent. 
 
 Celui qui persuade d un autre de faire 
 un crime, n'est ruere mo ins coupable que 
 celui qui le commet. 
 
 Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi-meme. 
 
 Ce qu'on rapporte de lui est inconcevuble. 
 
 Ce qui m'ajjflige, c'est devoir le triomphe 
 du crime. 
 
 Connaissez-vout la jeune Emilie ? c'est 
 une enfant dont tout le monde dit du bien. 
 Jmitez en toutvotre amie : elle est douce, 
 appliquie, honnete et compaLissante. 
 6ur le Verbe avoir employ 6 alTmperson- 
 nel. 
 Remarque. Quand le verbe avoir s'em- 
 ploie a l'impersonnel, c'est dans le sens 
 d'etre, et alors il se joint toujours avec y. 
 II y a un an que je ne vous ai vu. 
 Y a-t-il des nouvelles 7 
 Wony U n'y en a pas t du moins que je sa- 
 
 Tbose are really happy who think them- 
 selves so. 
 
 Virtue alone can render a man happy in 
 this life. 
 
 There is no rule so general but it admits 
 of exceptions. 
 
 He is an orator who is master of him- 
 self, and who is never embarrassed. 
 
 There is no recess of the human heart 
 but God perceives it. 
 
 Only some fragments of the great work 
 he bad promised have been found. 
 
 The error you have committed is of more 
 consequence than you imagine. 
 
 The first steps we take on entering the 
 world have considerable influence on the 
 rest of our lives. 
 
 That farce is one of the most truly comie 
 that ever was seen. 
 
 Lay up for yourselves treasures which 
 neither moth nor rust can corrupt, and 
 which thieves cannot steal. 
 
 Our uncertainty as to wbat shall happen 
 makes us incapable of properly providing 
 against it. 
 
 I am astonished he does not see the dan 
 ger he is in. 
 
 The man whom you are speaking of is 
 not here now. 
 
 The person from whom I received the tn 
 telligence is not known to you. 
 
 The proprietor of that beautiful seat sel 
 dom resides there. 
 
 These are events to which we must sub- 
 mit. 
 
 It is what you seldom th ink of. 
 
 On the Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 Not to acknowledge the divinity, is total* 
 ly to renounce the light of reason. 
 
 To lie is to despise God and to fear man. 
 
 There are moral contagious disorders, and 
 these are the most dangerous. 
 
 What you advance is, I think, widely dit 
 ferent from your sentiments. 
 
 Hen in general love only those who flat- 
 ter them. 
 
 He who persuades another to the commis- 
 sion of a crime, is hardly less guilty than 
 he who commits it. 
 
 To think in this manner is to be wilfully 
 blind. 
 
 The reports concerning bim are hardly 
 conceivable. 
 
 What distresses me is to see guilt trim 
 phant. 
 
 Do you know little Emily ? she is a child 
 of whom every body speaks well. 
 
 Imitate your friend in every thing ; she 
 is mild, assiduous, polite and companionate. 
 On the Verb avoir, to have, employed 
 impersonally. 
 
 When the verb avoir is used impersonalhj 
 it signifies etre, to be, and in this senst tC 
 is always accompanied by the adverb y. 
 
 It is a twelvemonth since I saw you. 
 
 Is there any news ? 
 
 No, there is none, at least that I know. 
 
436 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 J\T>y a-t-xl pas einquante-quatre milles de 
 JLondres d Brighton 7 
 
 II y avait dejd beaucoup de mondc lorsque 
 j* arrival. 
 
 Il n'y avait hier presque personne auparc. 
 
 Y avait il de grands ddbats ? 
 
 JY'y avait-il pas beaucoup de curieux 7 
 J* Pavais vu il y avait a peine vingt-qua- 
 
 tre heures. 
 Il ii*y avait pas deux jours quHl avoit 
 
 dind chez moi. 
 
 Y avait ilsi long-temps que vous ne Pavi- 
 ez vu 7 
 
 II y out hier un bal chez M. un tel. 
 11 n'y exit pas hier de spectacle. 
 
 Y eut-il beaucoup de confusion et de di- 
 sordre 7 
 
 J\"'y eut-il pas un beau feu d?artifice 7 
 
 II y a eu aujourd'hui unefoule immense & 
 la promenade. 
 
 J I n'y a pas eu dc bal, comme on Vavait 
 annoncd. 
 
 Est-ilvrai quHl y a eu, un duel 7 
 
 JY'y a-t-il pas eudans sa conduiteunpeu 
 trop cPemportement 7 
 
 Quand il y eut eu une explication, les es- 
 prit s se valmirent. 
 
 N'y avait-il pas eu un plus grand nombre 
 de spectateurs 7 
 
 II y aura demain un simulacre de combat 
 naval. 
 
 II nhj aura aucun de vous. 
 
 Y aur a-t-il une bonne rdcolte cette anne'e 7 
 Jfy aura-t-il pas gue/gu'ur. de votre fa- 
 mil I e 7 
 
 A coup sur il y aura eu bien du ddsordre. 
 
 Sur cent personnes, il n r y en aura pas eu 
 dix de satisfaites. 
 
 Y aura-t-il eu un bon soupd 7 
 N^y aura-t-il pas eu de mecontens 7 
 
 II y aurait de la malhonnetd dans ce pro- 
 cddi. 
 
 II n r y aurait pas grand mal a cela. 
 
 Y aurait-il quelqu'un assez hardi pour 
 fattaquer 7 
 
 JV : y aurait-il pas quelquhin assez chari- 
 table pour Vavertir de ce qu'on dit de lui 7 
 
 II y aurait eu de V impudence d cela. 
 
 II n'i/ aurait pas eu innt de mesintelli- 
 gence, si Von mfen avait cru. 
 
 11 n'y aurait pas eu dix personnes. 
 
 Y aurait-il eu de V 'inconvenient 7 
 
 JV'y aurait-il pas eu de jaloux pour le 
 traverser dans res projets 7 
 
 Je ne croi< mm gu'il y ait un spectacle 
 plus magnifique. 
 
 Je ddsirerais q\C\\ y cut mnins de faus- 
 eti dans le commerce dc 
 
 Je n y ai pas ou'i dire gu'il y ait eu hier 
 des nouveltcs du continent. 
 
 Jluriez-vous cru gtt'il y cut cu tant de 
 persoymes compromises dans cette aft'aire 7 
 
 Phrase* di\i 
 Sa vie, ses actions, ses paroles, son air 
 mime et sa demarche, tout prechc, tout idi- 
 fa $n lui. 
 
 Is not it fifty- four miles from London to 
 Brighton ? 
 
 There were already a great many people 
 when 1 arrived. 
 
 There was hardly any hody in the Park 
 yesterday. 
 
 Were there violent debates ? 
 
 Were there not many curious people ? 
 
 1 had seen him scarcely four-and-tweuty 
 hours before. 
 
 He had dined with me not two days be- 
 fore. 
 
 Was it so long since you had seeu him f 
 
 There was yesterday a ball at Mr. A's. 
 
 There was no play yesterday. 
 
 Was there a great deal of confusion and 
 disorder ? 
 
 Were there not handsome fire-works ? 
 
 There was an immense crowd to-day at 
 the public walks. 
 
 There has not been any ball as had been 
 mentioned. 
 
 Is it true that there has been a duel ? 
 
 Was there not rather too much hastiness 
 in his behaviour ? 
 
 After the: e had been an explanation, tran- 
 quillity was restored. 
 
 Was not there a great number of specta- 
 tors ? 
 
 To-morrow there will be the representa 
 tion of a sea-fight. 
 
 There will be none of you. 
 
 Will there be a good harvest this yeai ? 
 
 Will not there be some of your family . ? 
 
 There must certainly have been much dis- 
 order. 
 
 Out of a hundred persons there will not 
 have been ten satisfied. 
 
 Will there have been a good supper ? 
 
 Will therenothave been some dissatisfied? 
 
 Such a step would have been ungenteel. 
 
 There would be no great harm in that 
 
 Would there be any one bold enough to 
 attack him ? 
 
 Would there be nobody kind enough to 
 acquaint him with what is said of him ? 
 
 There would have been some imprudence 
 in that. 
 
 There would not have been so great a mis 
 understanding had 1 been believed. 
 
 There would not have been ten persons. 
 
 Would there have been aj.y inconve- 
 nience ? 
 
 Would there not have been some envious 
 person to tins art him in his designs ? 
 
 I do not think there cau be a more superb 
 spectacle. 
 
 I wish there were less duplicity in the 
 concerns of life. 
 
 I have not heard that there was any news 
 from the continent yesterday. 
 
 Could you have 1 bought BO many persons 
 would have been exposed in that artair ? 
 
 Promiscuout I Erases. 
 His life, his actions, his very look and de- 
 portment, every thing in him instructs and 
 edifies. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 437 
 
 On craignait qyfil nParrivdt quelque d&~ It was apprehended some disorder would 
 sordre dans PassembUe, mais ioutes choses take place in the assembly, bui every thing 
 
 i>y pass irent fort doucement 
 
 La vigne et le lierre s'entortillent autour 
 dts ormes. 
 
 On ne disconvenient point quHl ne so it 
 brave , mais il est un peu trop fanfaron. 
 
 Le cadet est riche, mais Paine* Pest encore 
 davantage. 
 
 Le ciel est couvert de nuaget, et Porage 
 est pret afondre. 
 
 Apris q\Pil tut franchi les Alpes avec ses 
 troupes, il entra en Halie. 
 
 La frugality rend les corps plus sains et 
 plus robustcs. 
 
 Ce discours est peut-etre undes plus beaux 
 morceaux d^iloquence, qu'il y ait jamais eu. 
 
 Oest un homme qui aime la libtrte ; il ne 
 se gene pour qui que ce soit. 
 
 Il est plus haut que moi de deux doigts. 
 
 Jrez-vous vous exposer a la barbarie et a 
 Pinhospitalite" de ces peuples 7 
 
 A la tongue, les erreurs disparaissent, et 
 la viriti surnage. 
 
 Si vous le prtnez avec moi sur ce ton de 
 fierte", je serai aussijier que vous. 
 
 C'est un homme rigide, qui ne pardonne 
 rien, ni aux autres ni a lui-meme. 
 
 Les uns montent, les autres descendent, 
 ainsi va la roue de la fortune. 
 
 Je ne vois rien de solide dans tout ce que 
 vous me proposer. 
 
 L^art nVt jamais rien produit de plus 
 beau. 
 
 I, e quel est-ce des deux qui a tort ? 
 
 On aime quelquefois la trahison, mais on 
 hait toujours les traftres. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 L'e'liphant se sert de sa trompe pour pren- 
 dre et pour enlever tout ce qu'il veut. 
 
 Plus f 'examine cette personna, plus je 
 erois P avoir vue qutlque part. 
 
 La nuit vint, de fuQon que je fus con- 
 iraint de me retirer. 
 
 Ufaut vivre de faqon qyPon nefasse tort 
 a, personne. 
 
 Kile sut qu>on attaquait son mart et con- 
 rut aussitdt tout eperdue pour le secourir. 
 
 Je trouvai ses parens tout iploris. 
 
 Cet urbre po*sse ses branches touta droi- 
 tes. 
 
 J'en ai encore le me'moire toute fraiche. 
 
 II a voulu faire voir par cet esiai qu'il 
 
 went off very quietly. 
 
 The vine and ivy twist round the elms. 
 
 They do not deny that he is brave, but he 
 boasts rather too much. 
 
 The youngest is rich, but the eldest is still 
 more so. 
 
 The sky is covered with clouds, and the 
 storm is preparing to burst. 
 
 After having crossed the Alps with his 
 troops, he entered Italy. 
 
 Temperance imparts an increase of health 
 and strength to the body. 
 
 This speech is perhaps one of the finest 
 pieces of eloquence that was ever pronounc 
 ed. 
 
 He is a man foad of liberty, be will be 
 restrained by nobody. 
 
 He is taller than me by two inches. 
 
 Will you go and expose yourself to the 
 barbarity and inhospitality of those nations ? 
 
 In time evrors vanish and truth survives. 
 
 If you treat me with that haughtiness, I 
 can be as haughty as you. 
 
 He is a stern character, who pardons no- 
 thing either in himself or others. 
 
 Some mount, others descend ; thus goes 
 the wheel of fortune. 
 
 I see nothing certain in all you propose 
 tome. 
 
 It is one of the finest productions of art. 
 
 Which of the two is in the wrong ? 
 
 We sometimes love the treason, but we 
 
 always hate the traitor. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 The elephant makes use of his trunk to 
 take and lift whatever he pleases. 
 
 The more I look at that person, the more 
 I think I have seen him (or her) somewhere. 
 
 Night came on, so that I was obliged to 
 retire. 
 
 We must live in such a manner as to Jn 
 jure nobody. 
 
 She knew her husband was attacked, and 
 in a state of distraction ran to his assistance. 
 
 I found his relations all in tears. 
 
 The branches of that tree grow quite 
 straight. 
 
 It is still quite fresh in my memory. 
 
 He wished to shew by that attempt that 
 
 pouvait rdussir en quelque chose de plus he could succeed in an enterprise of more 
 
 grand, 
 
 llfut blesse" au front et mourut de cette 
 blessure. 
 
 Ces chevaux prirent le mors aux dents et 
 extrainirent le carrosse. 
 
 Ctst un homme qui compose sans chaleur 
 
 consequence. 
 
 He was wounded in the forehead, and died 
 of his wound. 
 
 Those horses ran away with the carriage. 
 
 He is a man that writes without the least 
 
 ni immgination ; tout ce qu*il icrit est froid warmth or animation: all his productions 
 
 et plat 
 
 Ce bdtiment a plus de profondeur que de 
 largeur. 
 
 Cet homme est un prodige de savoir, de 
 science, de valeur, cPcsprit, et de me'moire. 
 
 II est attache* d Pun et a Pautre, mais plus 
 a Pun qu'd Pautre. 
 
 Hi ant bien de Pair Pun de Pautre, 
 
 38* 
 
 are cold and insipid. 
 
 That building is deeper than it is broad. 
 
 That man is a prodigy of knowledge* 
 judgment, courage, sense, and memory. 
 
 He is attached to both, but to one mors 
 than to the other. 
 
 They very much resemble each other. 
 
433 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 Si Von mine cet hommc-ld, le contre-coup 
 retombera sur vous. 
 
 II serait mort, si on ne Veut assists avec 
 toin. 
 
 Ce poime serait parf ait, si les incidens, 
 qui It font languir, n"* inter rompaient la 
 continuite de Paction. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 Quand je levoudrais,je ne lepourroispas. 
 
 Je serai toujours votre ami, quand mime 
 vous ne le voudriez pas. 
 
 Quand vous auriez reussi, que vous en se- 
 rait-il revenu ? 
 
 Quand on dicouvrirait votre demarche , 
 on ne pourrait la blame r. 
 
 Quand vous auriez consulte" quelqu'un sur 
 votre marriage, vous n 1 auriez pas mieux re- 
 us si. 
 
 Le tonnerre et Veclair ne sont sensibles 
 que par la propagation du bruit et de lalu- 
 miere jusqxPd Vail et a Poreille. 
 
 Le langage de la prose est plus simple et 
 moins figure" que celui des vers. 
 
 Le commencement de son discours est tou- 
 jours assez sage ; mais, dans la suite, a 
 force de vouloir s'elever, il se perd dans les 
 nues : on ne sail plus ni ce qu'on voit, ni 
 ce qu'on entend. 
 
 &est un faute excusable dans un autre 
 homme, muis dun homme aussi sage que lui, 
 tile ne se pent par donner. 
 
 line su fit pas de paraitre honnete hom- 
 me, ilfaut Petre. 
 
 _ 11 nous a reQus avec bonte, et nous a dcou- 
 tis avec patience. 
 
 Tout y est si Men peint, qu>on croit voir 
 ce qu'il dicrit. 
 
 On ne pense rien de vous, qui ne vous soit 
 glorieux. 
 
 Les eaux de citernes ne sont que des eaux 
 de pluie ramassdes. 
 
 S y il n'est pas fort riche, du moins a-t-ilde 
 quoi vivre honnetement. 
 
 Quel quantiime du mois avons-nous ? 
 
 U lux tarde quHl ne soit majeur, il compte 
 les fours et les mois. 
 
 Des qualites excellentes, jointes d de ra- 
 res talens,font le parfait mirite. 
 
 il a une mauvaise qualiti, c'cst qxPil ne 
 
 t aurait garder un secret. 
 
 Modules de phrases dans lcsquelles, on doit 
 faire usage de l'article. 
 
 L'homme estsujet a bien des vicissitudes. 
 
 Les hommes d>un vrai gdnie sont rares. 
 
 Les hommes a imagination sont ra^ement 
 heureux. 
 
 L'homme, dont vous parhz, est un de mes 
 ctmis. 
 
 La vie est un melange ds biens et de maax. 
 
 La perfection en tout genre est le but au- 
 quel on doit tendre. 
 
 La beaute, les grace*, et I'esprit sont des 
 avantages bien precieux, quand ils sont re- 
 UvSs par la modestie. 
 
 Voild des tableaux d?une grande beaute. 
 
 Faites-vous des principes, dont vous ne 
 X>ou$ icartiez jamais. 
 
 Cet arbre porte des fruits excellens. 
 
 Ces jaisons sont des conjectures biznfai- 
 blet. 
 
 If that man is ruined, his misfortune will 
 recoil upon you. 
 
 He would have died, if he bad not been 
 kindly assisted. 
 
 That would be a perfect poem, if the in- 
 cidents which give a heaviness to it, did not 
 
 break the connecti on of the subject. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 If I were disposed I could not do it. 
 
 I will always be your friend, even though 
 you should not wish it. 
 
 Had you even succeeded, what were you 
 to have derived from it ? 
 
 Should the steps you have taken be dis- 
 covered, they could not be blamed. 
 
 Had you consulted somebody about your 
 marriage, you could not have succeeded 
 better. 
 
 Thunder and lightning are only percep- 
 tible by the transmission of sound and light 
 to the ear and eye. 
 
 Prose language is much more simple and 
 less figurative than poetic. 
 
 The beginning of his speech is always to- 
 lerably sensible : but afterwards, by affect- 
 ing the sublime, he loses himself, and we no 
 longer understand either what we see or 
 hear. 
 
 This fault would be excusable in another 
 man, but in a man of his sense it is unpar- 
 donable. 
 
 It is not enough to seem an honest man, 
 we must be so. 
 
 He received us with kindness, and heard 
 us patiently. 
 
 Every thing in it is so well delineated, you 
 think you see what he describes. 
 
 They think nothing of you but what is to 
 your honour. 
 
 Cistern water is only rain-water collect- 
 ed. 
 
 If he is not rich, at least he has enough to 
 live upon respectably. 
 
 What day of the month is it ? 
 
 He longs to be of age, and counts the days 
 and months. 
 
 Excellent qualities, joined to distinguish- 
 ed talents, constitute perfect merit. 
 
 He has one bad quality, he cannot keep a 
 secret. 
 
 Examples of phrases in which the Article is 
 used. 
 
 Man is liable to a variety of changes. 
 
 Men of real genius are scarce. 
 
 Men of a visionary character are seldom 
 happy. 
 
 The man you speak of is a friend of mine* 
 
 Life is a compound of good and evil. 
 
 Perfection In every thing ought to be our 
 object. 
 
 Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are vahia 
 ble endowments when heightened by mo- 
 desty. 
 
 These are very beautiful pictures. 
 
 Establish rules for yourself, and never de- 
 viate from them. 
 
 This tree bears very excellent fruit. 
 
 These reasons are very idle conjectures 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 4S9 
 
 Servez-vous des termes itablis par Vus- 
 age. 
 
 On doit loiter Pair de l'affectalion. 
 
 Le Jupiter de Phidias etait d'v.ne grande 
 bcaute". 
 
 Continuation de$ meme phrases. 
 
 La memoir t est le tre'sor de l'esprit, le 
 fruit de l'attenlion et de la reflexion. 
 
 J'acheiai hier des gravures precieuses et 
 rares. 
 
 La France est I e plus beau pays de PEu~ 
 rope. 
 
 & inter et de 1'Allemagne Hail opposi a 
 celui de la Russie. 
 
 La longueur de l'Angleterre du nord au 
 sud est de 360 milles, et sa largtur de Pest 
 a Pouest est de 300. 
 
 It arrive de la Chine, du Japon, et des 
 Indes Orientales, 6fc. 
 
 J I arrive de l'Amerique, de la Barbade, 
 de la Jamalque, 4fc. 
 
 J I vient de la Flandre Frangaise. 
 
 J I s'est itabli dans la province de ^Middlesex 
 
 Des petits-maitres sont des etres insup- 
 portables dans la sociiti. 
 
 Cest V opinion des nouveaux philosophes. 
 
 Kile a bien de la grace dans tout ce 
 qu' tile fait. 
 
 Cette etojfe se vend une guinee l'aune. 
 
 Ce vin coute 70 li-jres sterling la pidce. 
 Modules de phrases dans lesquelles on ne 
 doit pas faire usage de Particle. 
 
 JVos connoissances doivent etre tirees de 
 principes evidens. 
 
 Cet arbre porte d'excellens fruits. 
 
 Cts raisom sont de faibles conjectures. 
 
 Evitez tout ce qui a un air d'affectation. 
 
 Ces extmples peuvent servir de modeles. 
 
 Jl a une grande presence d'esprit. 
 
 La me'moire de raison et d'esprit est plus 
 utile que les autres sortes de memoire. 
 
 Peu de personnes rijlechissuit sur la ra- 
 pidity de la vie. 
 
 Que d'eA'enemens inconcevables se sont 
 succide's les uns aux autrts ! 
 
 11 y a plus d'esprit, mait moins de conna- 
 issances, dans ce siicle que dans le siicle 
 dernier. 
 
 On nevit jamais a< -taut d'< -flYonteri . 
 
 Je pris hier beuueoup de peine pour ri'eiw 
 
 Candie est une des ties Its plus agreables 
 de la AUdilerranic. 
 
 Jl arrive de Perse, dltalie, d*E 
 
 11 est revenu de Suisse, d'Allemagnc, 6fc. 
 
 Let vins de France scront chers cette anr 
 nit ; les vignes ont couU. 
 
 L^empire d'Allemagne est compose 1 de 
 grands et de pet its ('tats. 
 
 Lit chevaux d'Angleterre sont (xzccllens. 
 
 Jlpritmon dipart de Suisse, je nu 
 rai d Rome. 
 
 Continuation des monies phra 
 
 Vout trouverez ce passage page 120, liv- 
 re premier, chapitre dim. 
 
 Jl t\tt retire' en Angleterre. 
 
 Use the expressions established by custom. 
 
 We ought to avoid the appearance of af- 
 fectation. 
 
 The Jupiter of Phidias was extremely 
 
 beautiful. 
 
 The sayne Phrases continued. 
 
 Memory is the treasure of the mind, the 
 result of attention and reflection. 
 
 I yesterday bought some valuable and 
 scarce engravings. 
 
 France is the finest country in Europe. 
 
 The German interest was contrary to the 
 Russian. 
 
 The length of England from north to south 
 is 360 miles, and its breadth from east to 
 west is 300. 
 
 He comes from China, Japan, and the 
 East Indies. 
 
 He comes from America, Barbadoes, Ja 
 maica, &.c. 
 
 He comes from French Flanders. 
 
 He has settled in the county of Middlesex. 
 
 Coxcombs are un suffer able beings in so- 
 ciety. 
 
 It is the opinion of the new philosophers. 
 
 She does every thing most gracefully. 
 
 This stuff sells at a guinea the ell. 
 
 This wine cost? seventy pound s a pipe. 
 
 Examples of phrases in which the Article is 
 
 omitted. 
 
 Our knowledge ought to be derived from 
 evident principles. 
 
 This tree produces excellent fruit. 
 
 These reasons are idle conjectures. 
 
 Avoid whatever bears the appearance ot 
 affectation. 
 
 These examples may serve as models. 
 
 He has great presence of mind. 
 
 The memory of reason and sense is more 
 useful than any other kind of memory. 
 
 Few people reflect on the rapidity of life. 
 
 now many inconceivable events have fo!> 
 lowed in succession ! 
 
 There is more wit but less knowledge in 
 this age than in the last. 
 
 So much assurance never was met with. 
 I took a great deal of trouble yesterday 
 about nothing. 
 Candle is one of the most agreeable is 
 
 .ii the Mediterranean. 
 J le (orncs from Persia, Italy, Spain, kc. 
 fie is returned from Switzerland, Genua 
 ny, tc. 
 
 h vines will be dear this year ; the 
 en blighted. 
 Ill ■ German empire is composed of grea i 
 
 : l!l Btat68. 
 
 The English bor«=es are excellent 
 
 r leaving Switzerland, I retired t»j 
 
 Pome. 
 
 nuation ■•/the same phrases. 
 
 You will find thi> passage at i>age 10O, 
 
 6 fust, chapter the tenth. 
 He has retired to England. 
 
440 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES, 
 
 llvxt dans sa retraite en vrai philoso- 
 phe. 
 
 Quand il rdfldchit sur sa conduite, il en 
 cut honte. 
 
 Cest un homme qui cherche fortune. 
 
 J I intend malice a tout. 
 
 JVe portez en vie dpersonne. 
 
 Si vous promettez, tenez parole. 
 
 Dans les affaires importantes ne vous dd- 
 eidez jamais sans prendre conseil. 
 
 Courage, soldats, tenons fermts ; la vio- 
 toire est d nous. 
 
 Cettefemme n^a ni grace ni beaute. 
 
 Monseigneur le due de fyc. prince du sang, 
 alia hier a la campagne. 
 
 Montrer tant defaiblesse,c i est n'etre pas 
 homme. 
 
 Cet homme est une espice de misanthrope, 
 dont les brusqueries sont quelquefois tris- 
 plaisantes. 
 
 Uananas est une sorte de fruit tris-com- 
 mun aux Antilles. 
 
 Cest un genre de vie qui ne me plait point. 
 
 Continuation des memes phrases. 
 
 Cette dame plait a tout le monde par son 
 honnetete et sa douceur. 
 
 Tout homme a des defauts plus ou moins 
 sensibles. 
 
 Cette conduite augmentait chaque jour le 
 nombre de ses amis. 
 
 Tous les biens nous viennent de Dieu. 
 
 Venus it ait la diesse de la beaute" , et la 
 mire de Pamour et des graces. 
 
 Selon les patens, Jupiter itait le premier 
 des dieux. 
 
 Apollon etoit frere jumeau de Diane. 
 
 Rubens a ite un grand peintre. 
 
 Homere et Virgile sont les deux plus 
 grands poites ipiques. 
 
 Londres est la plus belle ville que je con- 
 naisse. 
 
 Ueau de riviere est douce, et Veau de 
 mer est saUe. 
 
 C'est un excellent poisson de mer. 
 
 Voila une superbe table de marbre. 
 
 iJeau de Seine est celle qu J on pref&re a 
 Paris. 
 
 Pauvrete n>est pas vice. 
 
 Citoyens, etrangers, grands, peuples, se 
 font montris sensibles a cette perte. 
 
 Modeles de phrases sur le Pronom 7>c. 
 
 Kst-ce la votre opinion ? — ne doutez point 
 que oe ne la soit. 
 
 Sont-ce lu vos domestiques? — out, ce les 
 tont. 
 
 Mcsdames, ites-vous les etrangeres quSon 
 tn'a annoncees ? — oui, nous les sovtmes. 
 
 Madame, etes-vous la malade pour la- 
 mielle on m'a appeU ? — oui, je la suis. 
 
 Madame, etes-vous la mere Je cet enfant f 
 —oui,je la suis. 
 
 Mesdames, etesoous contentes de cette 
 musique ? — qui, nous le sommes. 
 
 Elle est malheureuse, et je crains bien. 
 ffXi'elle ne le soit toule la vie. 
 
 Madame, Stei-vous mire ? — oui, je le suis. 
 
 Mudamc, ites-vous malade ? — out, je le suis. 
 
 He lives in his retreat like a real philo- 
 sopher. 
 
 When he reflected on his conduct, he was 
 ashamed of it. 
 
 He is a man that seeks to make a fortune. 
 
 He puts a malicious construction oiueve- 
 ry thing. 
 
 Envy nobody. 
 
 If you promise, keep your word. 
 
 In matters of consequence, never decide 
 without advice. 
 
 Cheer up, soldiers, let us continue firm j 
 the day is our own. 
 
 This woman is destitute both of grace 
 and beauty. 
 
 The duke of &.c. a prince of the blood, 
 went yesterday into the country. 
 
 To shew so much weakness is not acting 
 like a man. 
 
 This man is a kind of misanthropist, whose 
 oddities are sometimes comical. 
 
 The pine-apple is a kind of fruit very com- 
 mon in the Antilles. 
 It is a kind of life that is not agreeable to me 
 
 The same sentences continued. 
 
 This lady pleases every one by her good 
 breeding and mildness. 
 
 Every one has defects more or less obvi- 
 ous. 
 
 This behaviour daily increased the num- 
 ber of his friends. 
 
 Every blessing comes from God. 
 
 Venus was the goddess of beauty, and the 
 mother of love and the graces. 
 
 According to the Heathens, Jupiter was 
 the first of the gods. 
 
 Apollo was twin brother to Diana. 
 
 Rubens was a great painter. 
 
 Homer and Virgil are the two greatest 
 epic pools. 
 
 London is the finest city that I know. 
 
 River water is sweet, and sea water is 
 salt. 
 
 It is an excellent sea-fish. 
 
 There is a superb marble table. 
 
 The water of the Seine is preferred at 
 Paris. 
 
 Poverty is not a vice. 
 
 Citizens, strangers, grandees, people, have 
 shewn themselves sensible of this loss. 
 
 Forms of phrases upon the pronoun Le. 
 
 Is that your opinion ? — do not question it. 
 
 Are these your servants ? — yes they are. 
 
 Ladies, are you the strangers that have 
 been announced to me ? — yes, we are. 
 
 Madam, are you the sick person for whom 
 I have been called ?— yes, I am. 
 
 Madam, are you the mother of this child ? 
 — yes, I am. 
 
 Ladies, are you pleased with this music ? 
 — yes, we are. 
 
 She is unhappy, and I much fear she will 
 continue so for life. 
 
 Madam, are you a mother ? — yes I am. 
 
 Madam, are you sick ? — yes, I am. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 44! 
 
 Madame, depuis quel temps etes-vous ma- 
 riee i—je le suis depuis un an. 
 
 Y a-t-il long-temps que vous etes arrivee ? 
 — je le suis depuis quinze jours. 
 
 Aristote croyait que le monde etait de 
 toute itemite ; maisPluton ne le croyait pas. 
 
 Quoique cette ftmme montre plus defer- 
 mete" que les autres, elle n'est pas pour cela 
 la mo ins ajfligec. 
 
 Cette femme a Part de repandre des lar- 
 mes dans le temps vxeme qu'elle est le moins 
 
 cfflige'e. 
 
 Modeies de phrases sur les differentes re- 
 gies du participe passe. 
 
 La nouvelle piece a-t-elle ete applaudie ? 
 
 Vos parens y seront-ils arrives d temps ? 
 
 Elle s'est donne de belles robes. 
 
 Elles nous ont apporte de superbes ailleis. 
 
 Cette ruse ne lui a pas reussi. 
 
 La vie traiquille que fai men ee depuis 
 dix ans, a beaucoup contribae a me faire 
 0ublier mes malheurs. 
 
 Les lettres, qui fai recces, m'ont beau- 
 -mup ajJligL 
 
 Que de peines vous vous etts donnees ! 
 
 Quelle tache vous vous etes imposee ! 
 
 C>est une satire que fai retrouvee dans 
 mes papiers. 
 
 Les lettres qu'a ecrites Pline le jeune, 
 qpelque agriables quhlles soient, se ressen- 
 tent neartmoins un peu de la decadence du 
 gout purmi les Komains. 
 
 Je rte serais pas entri avec vous dans tous 
 ces details de grammaire, sije ne les avais 
 crus necessaires. 
 
 L'Egypte s'etait rendue celebre par la 
 tuges*c de ses lois long-temps avant que la 
 Grese sortit de la barbaric 
 
 Cest une des plusgrandes nierveilles quPon 
 ait vues. 
 
 Dhomme de lettres, dont vous nfavez, par- 
 le, a un gout exquis. 
 
 Vous avcz tris-bien instruit vos elives. 
 
 Lucr&ce s'est donne la mart. 
 
 La se'eheresse quHl y a eu au printemps a 
 fuitpcrir tous lis fruits. 
 
 Je n'ai point riussi, malgre les mesure3 
 que vous wCavez conseille de prendre. 
 
 Queile aveature vous est- it an i 
 
 Cette femme s*esi ur n.odile a 
 
 %es enfans. 
 
 Cette femmr s^est propose d'enscigner la 
 giographie et Vhistoire a ses enfans. 
 
 '.es de phrasr- cipaux rap- 
 
 •k-s modes et des U 
 Je Valtendais depuis long-temps, <■ 
 il vint me joindre. 
 
 H sortit au moment mime que fentrais. 
 
 Je commensals d voir des craintes sur la 
 riussite de votre affaire, lorsque fai rtqx 
 votre lettre. 
 
 Vis que feus fait quelques visites indis- 
 pensables, je rentrai chtx moi, et je ne sor- 
 tit plus. 
 
 J'avais dijb tout pripari pour mon di- 
 
 Madam, how long have you been married ? 
 —^ year. 
 Is it long since you arrived ? — a fortnight. 
 
 Aristotle believed the world to have been 
 from all eternity ; but Tlato did not 
 
 Although this woman shows more resolu- 
 tion than the others, she is nevertheless not 
 the least afflicted. 
 
 This woman has the art of shedding tearr, 
 even when she is least afflicted. 
 
 Forms of Phrases upon the different rules 
 of the participle past. 
 
 Did the new piece meet with applause ? 
 
 Will your relations arrive there in time ? 
 
 She has given herself fine gowns. 
 
 They have brought us beautiful pinks. 
 
 He has not succeeded in this stratagem. 
 
 The quiet life I have led these ten years 
 has greatly contributed to make me forget 
 my misfortunes. 
 
 The letters I have received have afflicted 
 me greatly. 
 
 What a deal of trouble you have given 
 yourself ! 
 
 What a task you have imposed on your- 
 self ? 
 
 It is a satire that I have again met with 
 in my papers. 
 
 The letters which the younger Pliny has 
 written, however agreeable they may be, 
 savour, nevertheless, a little of the decline 
 of taste among the Romans. 
 
 I would not have entered into these gram- 
 matical details with you, had I not thought 
 them necessary. 
 
 Egypt had become celebrated for the wis 
 dora of its laws long before Greece had 
 emsrged from barbarism. 
 
 It is one of the greatest wonders that has 
 ever been seen. 
 
 The man of letters you spoke to me of has. 
 an excellent taste. 
 
 You have instructed your pupils extreme 
 ly well. 
 
 Lucretia lulled herself. 
 
 The dry veather we had in the spring 
 has destroyed all the fruit. 
 
 I have not succeeded, notwithstanding the 
 steps you advised me to take. 
 
 What adventures have you nut with ? 
 
 This woman proposed herself as a model 
 for her children. 
 
 This woman prop b geography 
 
 and history to h«T children. 
 
 Forms of phrases upon the prim ipal rcla- 
 
 t lom of moods and u 
 T had waited* a long time for him, i 
 
 line to me. 
 He was going out at the time I was cn- 
 
 tning. 
 1 u. 
 
 the sne 
 
 ed your letter. 
 
 I went home and did n 
 
 terwan 
 
 I had already made ev ion for 
 
442 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 part, lorsque des a ff aires imprivues m'onc" my departure, when some unexpected bust- 
 force" a It diffirer de quelques jours. 
 
 Vous ititz dejd sorti, quandje me pre" - 
 stntai chez vous. 
 
 J'avais dijd livri d Pimpression mon ouv- 
 rage. lorsque vous me demandiez, si je le 
 donnerais bientdt an public. 
 
 Lorsqut j'ai eu termini mon affaire vous 
 avez commence" la vdtre. 
 
 JLorsque feus dijeune" je montai a chtval, 
 etjefus d Londres. 
 
 Lorsque favrailu la nouvelle piice,je 
 vous dirai avec franchise ce que fen pense. 
 
 Iriez'vous d Home si vous le pouviez ? — 
 oui, firais. 
 
 Auriez-vnus consent i d ces conditions, si 
 on vons les avait propose" es ? 
 
 Irez-vous demain a Londres, si vous le 
 pouvtz ? — oui, firai. 
 
 11 sera surement parti , si vous Pavez vou- 
 lu. 
 
 Vous eussiez laissd dchupper une occasion 
 si favorable, si Pon ne vous eut averti a 
 
 temps. 
 
 Continuation des memes phrases. 
 
 On dit que vous partez aujourd'hui pour 
 Paris. 
 
 Tout le monde soutient que vous accepte- 
 rez la place qu'on vous offre. 
 
 On soupQonne que vous aviez hier regit 
 eette agreable nouvelle quand on vous ren- 
 eontra. 
 
 Beaucoup de vos amis croient que vous 
 partites hier pour la campagne. 
 
 Le bruit se ripand que vous avez fait une 
 grosse perte. 
 
 J'apprends dans P instant que vousfus- 
 siez parti il y a trois jours, si des engage- 
 mens, que vous aviez iontractfs de puis long- 
 iemps, ne vous avaient retenu. 
 
 J^Pest-il pas vrai que vous partiriez au- 
 jourd'hui, si vous le pouviez 7 
 
 Est'il vrai que vous seriez parti depuis 
 long-temps pour la campagne, si voire 
 amour pour les arts ne vous avait retenu a 
 la ville ? 
 
 Je ne crois pas que vous partiez, quoique 
 tout le monde P assure. 
 
 Je ne croyaispas qu'ilfut si-tdt de retour. 
 
 II afallu qu'il ait eu affaire a bien des 
 personnel. 
 
 Je doute que votre amifut venu d bout 
 da tesprojets, s'il n'avait pasiti fortemtnt 
 protdge". 
 
 h n'est point tPhomme, quelque me" rite 
 quhi ait, qui nefxLt trds-mortifd, s'il sa- 
 voit toute ce qu'on pense de lui. 
 
 Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les af- 
 faires pus sent si mal toumer. 
 
 Modules de Phrases sur la Negative JV*#. 
 
 // n'y a pas beaucoup tfargent chez ces 
 gens de lettres. 
 
 11 n'y a point d* ressource dans uneper- 
 sonne qui n'o point CPcsprit. 
 
 Cest d tort que vous Paccusez de jouer ', 
 *c vous assure qu'il aejous point. 
 
 ness occurred, that obliged me to defer it 
 for somp days. 
 
 You were already gone out when I called 
 upon you. 
 
 My work had been sent to be printed 
 when you asked me if I should soon bring 
 it out. 
 
 When my business was over you began 
 yours. 
 
 When I had done breakfast, I got on 
 horseback, and went to London. 
 
 When I have read the new piece, I will 
 candidly give you my opinion of it. 
 
 Would you go 10 Rome if it were in your 
 power ?— Yes, I would. 
 
 Would you have agreed to those terms, 
 had they been proposed to you ? 
 
 Shall you go to London to-morrow, if you 
 can ?•— yes, I shall. 
 
 He will certainly have set out, if you 
 v/ished it. 
 
 You would have let so favourable an op- 
 portunity slip, had you not been warned in 
 
 time. 
 
 The same phrases continued. 
 
 It is said that you set off to-day for Parts. 
 
 Every one maintains that you will accept 
 of this place that is offered to you. 
 
 It is suspected that you had received this 
 agreeable intelligence when you were met 
 yesterday. 
 
 Many of your friends believe that yoo set 
 out yesterday for the country. 
 
 There is a report that you have met with 
 a considerable loss. 
 
 I have thb moment learnt that you would 
 have set out three days since, had not en- 
 gagements which you had formed long ago 
 detained you. 
 
 It is not true that you would set out to- 
 day, if you could ? 
 
 Is It true that you would have set out for 
 the country long since, had not your love 
 for the arts detained you in town ? 
 
 I do not imagine that you will set out, al- 
 though every body asserts it. 
 
 I did not believe he had gone back so 
 soon. 
 
 He must have had business with a great 
 many people. 
 
 I doubt that your friend would have suc- 
 ceeded in his plan, had he not been strongly 
 patronised. 
 
 There is not a man, whatever merit he 
 may possess, that would not be very much 
 mortified, were be to know every thing 
 that is thought of him. 
 
 You never persuaded yourself that mat- 
 ters could have taken so unfortunate a turn. 
 
 Forms of Phrases upon the Negative Ne. 
 
 There is not much money to be found 
 among men of letters. 
 
 There are no resources in a person with- 
 out sense. 
 
 You accuse him wrongfully of gaming J 
 I assure you he never games. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 443 
 
 Entrez dans le talon ; vous pourrez lui 
 parler ; il nejouepas. 
 
 Si pour avoir du bien, il en coute a la 
 probite", je n'en vcutc point. 
 
 Rien n'cet sur avec les capricieux ; vous 
 croyez itre bitn enfaveur, point du tout: 
 Vinstant de la plus belle humeur est suivi de 
 la plus fdchcuse. 
 
 Vous ne cessez de nous ripiter Its mimes 
 ckoses. 
 
 Je n'aurais os£ vous en parler le premier. 
 
 Malgri ses protections, il n'a pu riussir 
 dans ses projtts. 
 
 Cet ouvrage seraitfort 6on, netait pour 
 la negligence du style. 
 
 Y a-t-il guc/gu'un dont elle ne midise. 
 
 J'ai pris tant de gout pour une vie retU 
 rt"e, que je ne sors presque jamais. 
 
 yield ce qui s'ett pane ; n'en parlez a 
 personne. 
 
 JMon parti est pris ; ne m'en parlez plus. 
 
 "N'employez aucun de ces moyens : Us sont 
 indignes de vous. 
 
 Rien n'es* plusjoli. 
 
 Je ne dis rien queje ne pense. 
 
 Je nefais jamais d'excis que je n'en sois 
 incommode. 
 
 Continuation des memes Phrases. 
 C'est un homme pour qui je n'ai ni amour, 
 ni estime. 
 
 11 n' est ni ussez prudent ni assez eclaire". 
 
 Je vous assure que ji ne le friquente ni 
 ne It vois. 
 
 Ne faire que parcourir Its diffe" rentes 
 branches des connuissances humaines sans 
 s'arreter a aucune, e'est moins cherchtr a 
 i'instruire, qu'a tuer le temps. 
 
 Que netes-vous toujour s aussi complai- 
 sant ? 
 
 Il ne lefcrapas, a moins que vous ne Py 
 tngagitz. 
 
 11 n\rapas, si vous ne Pen priez. 
 
 Il nous a menaces de se venger ; nous 
 rfavortsjuit qu'en rire. 
 
 Trop d 1 insouciance ne peut que nuirc. 
 
 Que dcccncz-vous ? il y a trois mois que 
 nous ne vous arona vu 'J 
 
 Comment vous etes-vous porti depuis que 
 notes ne vous avons vu ? 
 
 C'esi bien pire qu'on ne le disait. 
 
 Pen s^en fautqut je n'a t'c donne" tiie bais- 
 sit dans It pitge. 
 
 Ditet la viriti en toute occasion ; on me 1 - 
 prise toujours ccux qui par lent autrement 
 qu?ilt ne pensent. 
 
 Ne desesperez pas que la viriti ne sefas- 
 se jour a la longue. 
 
 Je ne disconviens pas que la chose ne soit 
 ainsi. 
 
 Prenex garde qu'on ne vous entraine dans 
 quelqucfuutse d-marche. 
 
 J'cmpficberai bien qu'on nc vous nuise 
 dans cette affaire. 
 
 Il craint (ju'on ne le soupgonne d 1 avoir 
 trtmpi dans ce comptot. 
 
 Go into the room, you may speak to him t 
 he is not playing-. 
 
 I do not wish to make a fortune, if it can 
 only be done at the expense of honesty. 
 
 Nothing is certain with capricious peo- 
 ple; you think yourself in favour, by no 
 means ; the moment of the best humour is 
 followed by that of the worst. 
 
 You are constantly repeating the same 
 thing to us. | 
 
 I should not have dared to be the first to 
 speak to you of it. 
 
 With all his interest he has not been able 
 to succeed in bis plans. 
 
 This work would be very good, were it 
 not for the negligence of the style. 
 
 Is there any one she does not slander ? 
 
 I have acquired so great a taste for re- 
 tirement, that I seldom go abroad. 
 
 This is what has passed ; do not speak of 
 it to any one. 
 
 My resolution is fixed; talk to me no 
 more of it. 
 
 Do not employ any one of these measures j 
 they are unworthy of you. 
 
 Nothing is more beautiful. 
 
 I never speak but what I think. 
 
 I never conunit any excess without suf- 
 fering by it. 
 
 Continuation of the same i'hrases. 
 
 He is a m?.n for whom I have neither 
 love nor esteem. 
 
 He is ne ither sufficiently prudent nor en- 
 lightened. 
 
 I assure you I neither associate with him 
 nor see him. 
 
 To go through the different branches of 
 human knowledge only, without fixing upon 
 any one of them, is not to seek for instruc- 
 tion, but to kill time. 
 
 Why are you not at all times equally com- 
 plaisant ? 
 
 He will not do it, unless you persuade him 
 to it. 
 
 He will not go, if you do not request it ot 
 him. 
 
 He has threatened us with vengeance ; we 
 only laughed at him. 
 
 Too great supineness cannot but be hurt* 
 ful. 
 
 What has become of you ? we have not 
 seen you these three months. 
 
 How have you been since we saw you f 
 
 It is much worse than was said. 
 
 1 was near running headlcng into the 
 snare. 
 
 Tell the truth on all occasions : those who 
 speak what they do not think are always 
 de-pised. 
 
 Do not despair that truth will appear in 
 time. 
 
 1 admit that it is so. 
 
 Take care that you are not led into some 
 false step. 
 
 I shall prevent them from doing you any 
 harm in this business. 
 
 He is apprehensive that he is suspected of 
 being concerned in this plot. 
 
444 
 
 PHRASES OX SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 On lux a donni d'excellens conseils, de 
 crainte quHl ne manqudt V occasion de /aire 
 connaitre ce quHl est en itat defaire. 
 
 J'y at long-temps travailU ; je nesaurais 
 en venir d bout, 
 
 Vousferiez mieux de vous taire ; vous ne 
 savez ce que vous dues. 
 
 Vous ne sauriez me /aire un plus grand 
 plaisir. 
 
 Phrases sur quelques Delicatesses de la 
 
 Langue Franchise. 
 Irez-vous ce soir a Poptra ?—oui, firai. 
 
 Iriez-vous aroec plaisir a Rome 7 — ouij J 
 irais. 
 
 La justice qui nous est quelquefois refu- 
 sie par nos coutemporains, la posteriU soit 
 nous la rendre. 
 
 Cette grandeur qui vous 6 'tonne si forty il 
 la doit a votre nonchalance. 
 
 U perit, cc hdros, si cher a son pays. 
 
 Je Pavais bienprevu que ce haut degre de 
 grandeur serait la cause de sa ruine. 
 
 Citoyens, etr angers, ennemis,peuples,rois, 
 empereurs, le plaignent e.t le r&oertnt. 
 
 ^assembles fnie, chacun se retira chez 
 soi. 
 
 Heureux le psuple qu'un sage roi gou- 
 verne. 
 
 Il refusa les plus grands honneurs, con- 
 tent de les mdriter. 
 
 Priircs, remontrances, commandemens, 
 tout est inutile. 
 
 Lz vent renvcrse tows, cabanes, palais, 
 iglises. 
 
 Notre reputation ne ddpend pas da ca- 
 price des hommes ; mate elU depend des ac- 
 tions louables que nousfaisons. 
 
 Il y a beaucoup de chosts quHl nHmporle 
 point du tout de savoir. 
 
 La vue de Pesprit a plus tTdtendue que la 
 rme du corps. 
 
 Ce qui sert a la vanite, n>est que vanite". 
 Tout ce qui n'a que le monde pourfon- 
 dement f se dissipe et s'evanouit avec le moii- 
 
 They have given him excellent advice, 
 lest he should lose the opportunity of shew- 
 ing what he was capable of doing. 
 
 I have been long employed about it ; I 
 cannot accomplish it. 
 
 You had better be silent, you do not know 
 what you are saying. 
 
 You cannot do me a greater favour. 
 
 de. 
 
 (Pest le privilege des grands hommes de 
 vaincre Penvie / le mirite la fait naitre, le 
 merite la fait mourir. 
 
 L amour-propre est plus habile que le plus 
 habile homme au monde. 
 
 En quittant le monde, on ne quit it le plus 
 souvent ni les erreurs, ni les f dies passions 
 du monde. 
 
 Phrases on some Uelicacies of the French 
 Language. 
 
 Shall you go to the opera this evening f 
 —yes, I shall. 
 
 Would you cheerfully go to Rome ?— ves, 
 I would. * * 
 
 Posterity knows how to do us that justice 
 which is sometimes refused us by our con- 
 temporaries. 
 
 That greatness which so much astonishes 
 you, he owes to your indifference. 
 
 That hero, so dear to his country, perish- 
 ed. 
 
 I foresaw that the greatness of his eleva- 
 tion would be his ruin. 
 
 Citizens, strangers, enemies, nations, kings, 
 emperors, pity and respect him. 
 
 The assembly being over, each returned 
 home. 
 
 Happy are the people who are governed 
 by a wise king. 
 
 He refused the greatest honours, satisfied 
 with having deserved them. 
 
 Entreaties, remonstrances, injunctions 
 are all useless. 
 
 The wind overturns towers, cottages, pa- 
 laces, churches. 
 
 Our reputation does not depend on the ca 
 price of men, but on the commendable ac 
 tions we perfoum. 
 
 There are many things which it is of no 
 consequence at all to know. 
 
 The eye of the mind reaches much far- 
 ther thau the bodily eye. 
 
 What promotes vanity is only vanity 
 
 All that is confined to this lower world 
 disperses and vanishes with the world. 
 
 It is the prerogative of great men to con- 
 quer envy ; merit gives it birth, and merit 
 destroys it. 
 
 Self-love is more ingenious than the most 
 ingenious man in the world. 
 
 In renouncing the world we general 1 ', re- 
 nounce niether the errors nor giddy passions 
 of the world. 
 
 FINIS. 
 
 d S*. #-k «*» 
 

 
 
 
 
 m^ * v ^ • ©US * &y ^ o v JIvM^ * -c? 
 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper pro 
 
 *^ 
 
 O. Sji* 1 a0 **$► **'^ > J J ( Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 
 **£* <y t • • » "Si Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 
 
 ^• r ^ PreservationTechnologies 
 
 y ^ A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 c5* 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township. PA 1 6066 
 (724)779-2111 
 

 
 ^0< 
 
 . • • • . 
 
 <$> .«, -\/\3><£*\* «£a a - * 
 
 
 
 % '^^ vv* 
 
 
 ^°-